PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Hybrid IP-PBX

Model No. KX-NS500

Thank you for purchasing this Panasonic product.

Please read this manual carefully before using this product and save this manual for future use.
In particular, be sure to read "1.1.1 For Your Safety (Page 14)" before using this product.

KX-NS500: PFMPR Software File Version 004.20000 or later

Manuals and supporting information are provided on the Panasonic Web site at:
http://panasonic.net/pcc/support/pbx/ WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
Introduction
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Introduction
About this Programming Manual
The PC Programming Manual is designed to serve as a system programming reference for the Panasonic
IP-PBX. It explains how to programme this PBX using Web Maintenance Console.
The PC Programming Manual is divided into the following sections:

Section 1, Overview
Provides an overview of programming the PBX.

Section 2, Introduction of Web Maintenance Console

Explains the layout and menus of Web Maintenance Console.

Sections 3 – 27, Web Maintenance Console Operating Instructions

Serves as reference operating instructions when using Web Maintenance Console to programme the PBX.

Section 28, Appendix

Provides a list of changes from previous software versions of the PBX.

Feature Programming References

Provides a list of all related programming items for each feature.

References Found in the PC Programming Manual

PC Programming Manual References
Related sections of the PC Programming Manual are listed for your reference.

Feature Guide References

The Feature Guide explains what the PBX can do, as well as how to obtain the most of its many features and
facilities. Sections from the Feature Guide are listed throughout this manual for your reference.

Installation Manual References

The Installation Manual provides instructions detailing the installation and maintenance of the PBX. Sections
from the Installation Manual are listed throughout this manual for your reference.

Links to Other Pages and Manuals

If you are viewing this manual with a PC, certain items are linked to different sections of this and other PBX
manuals. Click on a link to jump to that section.
Linked items include:
• Installation Manual References
• PC Programming Manual References
• Feature Guide References

Trademarks
• Microsoft, Outlook, Internet Explorer, Windows and Windows Vista are either registered trademarks or
trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.
• Intel and Intel Core are trademarks of Intel Corporation in the U.S. and/or other countries.
• Mozilla and Firefox are registered trademarks of the Mozilla Foundation.

2 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 Introduction
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

• All other trademarks identified herein are the property of their respective owners.
• Microsoft product screen shot(s) reprinted with permission from Microsoft Corporation.

Notice
• During a long programming session, it is highly recommended that you periodically save the system data
to the System Memory. If the PBX undergoes a sudden power failure or if the system is reset for some
reason, all the system data in RAM will be lost. However, if system data has been saved to the System
Memory, it can be easily reloaded.
• To save the system data to the System Memory, (1) click the button on the Home screen of Web
Maintenance Console before resetting the PBX or turning off the power, or (2) logout from Web
Maintenance Console so that the PBX automatically saves the system data.

NOTES
• The contents of this manual apply to PBXs with a certain software version, as indicated on the cover of
this manual. To confirm the software version of your PBX, see How do I confirm the software version
of the PBX or installed cards? in Maintenance Console Software in 2.3 Frequently Asked Questions
(FAQ).
• Some optional hardware, software, and features are not available in some countries/areas, or for some
PBX models. Please consult your certified Panasonic dealer for more information.
• Product specifications, including text displayed by the software, are subject to change without notice.
• In this manual, the suffix of each model number (e.g., KX-NS500NE) is omitted unless necessary.
• Operation of the KX-NS0154 depends on the PBX software file version and the firmware version of the
KX-NS0154. You can confirm the compatibility on the Panasonic Web site:
http://panasonic.net/pcc/support/pbx

PC Programming Manual 3

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
Table of Contents
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Table of Contents
1 Overview .................................................................................................13
1.1 Introduction .....................................................................................................................14
1.1.1 For Your Safety ..............................................................................................................14
1.1.2 Introduction .....................................................................................................................16
1.1.3 Entering Characters .......................................................................................................17
1.2 PC Programming .............................................................................................................21
1.2.1 Starting Web Maintenance Console ...............................................................................21
1.2.2 PC Programming Using Off-line Mode ...........................................................................25
1.2.2.1 Editing and Printing Terminal Labels in Off-line Mode ................................................30
2 Introduction of Web Maintenance Console .........................................31
2.1 Introduction .....................................................................................................................32
2.1.1 Web Maintenance Console Accounts ............................................................................32
2.1.2 Access Levels ................................................................................................................34
2.1.3 Logging in to Web Maintenance Console .......................................................................38
2.1.4 Easy Setup Wizard .........................................................................................................39
2.1.5 Card Status ....................................................................................................................40
2.1.6 Extension Number Setting ..............................................................................................41
2.2 Logout ..............................................................................................................................42
2.3 Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ) ..............................................................................43
3 Web Maintenance Console Home Screen ............................................51
3.1 Home Screen ...................................................................................................................52
4 Status ......................................................................................................57
4.1 Status—Equipment Status .............................................................................................58
4.1.1 Status—Equipment Status—UPS ..................................................................................58
4.1.2 Status—Equipment Status—CS Information ..................................................................59
4.1.3 Status—Equipment Status—PS Information ..................................................................60
4.1.4 Status—Equipment Status—UM Port status ..................................................................61
4.1.5 Status—Equipment Status—USB ..................................................................................62
5 System Control .......................................................................................63
5.1 System Control—Program Update ................................................................................64
5.1.1 System Control—Program Update—Download Program File ........................................66
5.1.2 System Control—Program Update—Update Program File ............................................68
5.1.3 System Control—Program Update—Plug and Update ..................................................70
5.2 System Control—MOH ....................................................................................................71
5.2.1 System Control—MOH—Install ......................................................................................71
5.2.2 System Control—MOH—Delete .....................................................................................72
5.2.3 System Control—MOH—Status / Backup ......................................................................73
5.3 System Control—System Reset ....................................................................................74
5.4 System Control—System Shutdown .............................................................................75
6 Tool ..........................................................................................................77
6.1 Tool—System Data Backup ...........................................................................................78
6.1.1 Tool—System Data Backup—Backup to USB ...............................................................78
6.1.2 Tool—System Data Backup—Backup to NAS ...............................................................79
6.2 Tool—BRI Automatic Configuration ..............................................................................80
6.3 Tool—NDSS Link Data Clear ..........................................................................................81
6.4 Tool—Call Pickup for My Group ....................................................................................82
6.5 Tool—Extension List View .............................................................................................83

4 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 Table of Contents
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

6.6 Tool—Import ....................................................................................................................84

6.7 Tool—Export ....................................................................................................................89
6.8 Tool—Screen Customise ................................................................................................90
6.9 Tool—UM Data Backup ...................................................................................................91
6.9.1 Tool—UM Data Backup—Manual Backup .....................................................................92
6.9.2 Tool—UM Data Backup—Scheduled Backup ................................................................93
6.10 Tool—UM Data Restore ..................................................................................................94
6.11 Tool—UM Backup History ..............................................................................................96
6.12 Tool—DXDP All OUS .......................................................................................................97
6.13 Tool—Contact information .............................................................................................98
6.14 Tool—UT Option Setting ................................................................................................99
6.15 Tool—URL Information .................................................................................................100
6.16 Tool—SVM (Simplified Voice Message) ......................................................................101
6.16.1 Tool—SVM (Simplified Voice Message)—Delete All Recording ..................................101
6.16.2 Tool—SVM (Simplified Voice Message)—Check Current Usage ................................101
7 Utility .....................................................................................................103
7.1 Utility—Diagnosis .........................................................................................................104
7.1.1 Utility—Diagnosis—Card Diagnosis .............................................................................104
7.1.2 Utility—Diagnosis—Ping ..............................................................................................105
7.2 Utility—File ....................................................................................................................106
7.2.1 Utility—File—File Transfer PC to PBX .........................................................................106
7.2.2 Utility—File—File Transfer PBX to PC .........................................................................107
7.2.3 Utility—File—File View .................................................................................................108
7.2.4 Utility—File—File Delete ..............................................................................................109
7.2.5 Utility—File—Message File Transfer PC to PBX ..........................................................110
7.2.6 Utility—File—Message File Transfer PBX to PC ..........................................................111
7.3 Utility—Log ....................................................................................................................112
7.3.1 Utility—Log—Error Log ................................................................................................112
7.3.2 Utility—Log—Syslog .....................................................................................................115
7.3.3 Utility—Log—Web-MC Event Log ................................................................................116
7.3.4 Utility—Log—UM System Log ......................................................................................117
7.3.5 Utility—Log—Call Control Log ......................................................................................118
7.4 Utility—Monitor/Trace ...................................................................................................119
7.4.1 Utility—Monitor/Trace—ISDN/QSIG Protocol Trace ....................................................119
7.4.2 Utility—Monitor/Trace—V-IPGW Protocol Trace ..........................................................120
7.4.3 Utility—Monitor/Trace—V-SIPGW Protocol Trace .......................................................121
7.4.4 Utility—Monitor/Trace—CS Status Monitor—Air Sync Group ......................................122
7.4.5 Utility—Monitor/Trace—CS Status Monitor—LAN Sync Group ...................................123
7.4.6 Utility—Monitor/Trace—UM System Trace (Internal) ...................................................125
7.4.7 Utility—Monitor/Trace—E1 Signalling Bit Monitor ........................................................126
7.4.8 Utility—Monitor/Trace—E1 Line Trace .........................................................................127
7.4.9 Utility—Monitor/Trace—TCP Trace ..............................................................................128
7.5 Utility—Report ...............................................................................................................129
7.5.1 Utility—Report—Digital Trunk Error Report ..................................................................129
7.5.2 Utility—Report—IP Extension Statistical Information ...................................................130
7.5.3 Utility—Report—UM View Reports ...............................................................................131
7.5.4 Utility—Report—E-mail Report .....................................................................................134
7.5.5 Utility—Report—IP-CS Information ..............................................................................135
7.5.5.1 Utility—Report—IP-CS Information—IP-CS Statistical Information ...........................135
7.5.5.2 Utility—Report—IP-CS Information—LAN Sync Information .....................................136
7.5.5.3 Utility—Report—IP-CS Information—PS Call Disconnect Log ..................................139
7.6 Utility—Activation Key Installation ..............................................................................140
7.7 Utility—Email Notification ............................................................................................141
7.7.1 Utility—Email Notification—Alert ..................................................................................141

PC Programming Manual 5

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
Table of Contents
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

7.7.2 Utility—Email Notification—System Analysis ...............................................................143

7.7.3 Utility—Email Notification—Test Email .........................................................................144
7.8 Utility—Command .........................................................................................................145
7.8.1 Utility—Command—UM Command ..............................................................................145
7.9 Utility—UM – System Prompts Customisation ...........................................................146
7.10 Utility—Automatic Two-way Recording ......................................................................148
7.10.1 Utility—Automatic Two-way Recording—Supervisor Setting .......................................148
7.10.2 Utility—Automatic Two-way Recording—Extension Setting .........................................149
7.10.3 Utility—Automatic Two-way Recording—Extension Setting List ..................................150
7.10.4 Utility—Automatic Two-way Recording—Maintenance ................................................153
7.11 Utility—UM - System Maintenance ..............................................................................154
7.12 Utility—CS-Web Connection ........................................................................................155
8 Users .....................................................................................................157
8.1 Users—User Profiles ....................................................................................................158
8.1.1 Users—User Profiles—Advanced setting .....................................................................160
8.2 Users—Add User ...........................................................................................................164
8.2.1 Users—Add User—Single User ...................................................................................164
8.2.2 Users—Add User—Multiple Users ...............................................................................168
8.3 Users—Automatic Two-way Recording ......................................................................169
8.3.1 Users—Automatic Two-way Recording—Edit a Recording .........................................169
8.3.2 Users—Automatic Two-way Recording—Record List ..................................................170
8.4 Users—ICDG Management ...........................................................................................171
8.4.1 Users—ICDG Management—Group Monitor ...............................................................171
8.4.2 Users—ICDG Management—ACD Report ..................................................................174
8.4.3 Users—ICDG Management—ACD Scheduled Export .................................................181
8.4.4 Users—ICDG Management—ACD Export History .......................................................182
9 PBX Configuration—[1] Configuration ...............................................183
9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot ..........................................................184
9.2 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property ..........................190
9.2.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property—Main ...................190
9.2.2 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property—Site .....................198
9.2.3 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property—Slot 
Summary ......................................................................................................................222
9.2.4 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property—NSVM .................225
9.3 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Activation Key Status .................228
9.4 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—VoIP Property ...............................231
9.4.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—VoIP Property—VoIP (Ext) 
Setting ..........................................................................................................................231
9.4.2 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—VoIP Property—VoIP (Trunk) 
Setting ..........................................................................................................................233
9.5 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—UM Card Property ........................236
9.6 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—UM Port Property .........................238
9.7 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property—Port Type
View ................................................................................................................................239
9.8 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Shelf Property—V-SIPGW ...........240
9.9 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Card Property—V-SIPGW ...........244
9.10 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property—V-SIPGW ............245
9.11 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Shelf Property—V-IPGW .............266
9.11.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Shelf Property—V-IPGW—GK
Settings ........................................................................................................................275
9.11.2 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Shelf Property—V-IPGW—Hunt
Pattern ..........................................................................................................................276
9.12 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property—V-IPGW ...............277

6 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 Table of Contents
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

9.13 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Card Property—V-IPEXT .............279

9.14 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property—V-IPEXT ..............282
9.15 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Card Property—V-SIPEXT ..........291
9.16 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property—V-SIPEXT ...........293
9.17 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Card Property—V-IPCS ...............301
9.18 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property—V-IPCS ................303
9.19 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Card Property—V-UTEXT ...........308
9.20 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property—V-UTEXT ............310
9.21 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Card Property—Extension
Type ................................................................................................................................318
9.22 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property—Extension
Type ................................................................................................................................321
9.23 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Card Property - LCO type ...........325
9.24 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - LCO Port ............331
9.25 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Card Property - BRI type/PRI
type .................................................................................................................................334
9.26 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - BRI Port ..............340
9.27 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - PRI Port ..............350
9.28 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Card Property—E1 type ..............359
9.29 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Card Property—E1 type Line Signal 
Setting ............................................................................................................................361
9.30 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Card Property—E1 type MFC-R2 
Setting 1 .........................................................................................................................364
9.31 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Card Property—E1 type MFC-R2 
Setting 2 .........................................................................................................................367
9.32 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property—E1 Port ...............370
9.33 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Expansion Unit1/Expansion Unit2/
Expansion Unit3 ............................................................................................................374
9.34 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Card Property—DOORPHONE
Card ................................................................................................................................376
9.35 PBX Configuration—[1-2] Configuration—Portable Station .....................................377
9.36 PBX Configuration—[1-3] Configuration—Option .....................................................380
9.37 PBX Configuration—[1-4] Configuration—Clock Priority .........................................382
9.38 PBX Configuration—[1-5] Configuration—DSP Resource ........................................383
9.38.1 PBX Configuration—[1-5-1] Configuration—DSP Resource—Setting .........................383
9.38.1.1 PBX Configuration—[1-5-1] Configuration—DSP Resource—Setting—DSP Resource
Advisor .......................................................................................................................386
9.38.2 PBX Configuration—[1-5-2] Configuration—DSP Resource—Usage ..........................387
10 PBX Configuration—[2] System .........................................................389
10.1 PBX Configuration—[2-1] System—Date & Time .......................................................390
10.1.1 PBX Configuration—[2-1-1] System—Date & Time—Date & Time Setting .................390
10.1.2 PBX Configuration—[2-1-2] System—Date & Time—SNTP / Daylight Saving ............391
10.1.2.1 PBX Configuration—[2-1-2] System—Date & Time—SNTP / Daylight Saving—Daylight
Saving ........................................................................................................................393
10.2 PBX Configuration—[2-2] System—Operator & BGM ...............................................395
10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3] System—Timers & Counters ...........................................396
10.4 PBX Configuration—[2-4] System—Week Table ........................................................411
10.4.1 PBX Configuration—[2-4] System—Week Table—Time Setting .................................411
10.5 PBX Configuration—[2-5] System—Holiday Table ....................................................413
10.6 PBX Configuration—[2-6] System—Numbering Plan ................................................415
10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main ....................................415
10.6.2 PBX Configuration—[2-6-2] System—Numbering Plan—Quick Dial ...........................438
10.6.3 PBX Configuration—[2-6-3] System—Numbering Plan—B/NA DND Call
Feature .........................................................................................................................440

PC Programming Manual 7

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
Table of Contents
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

10.7 PBX Configuration—[2-7] System—Class of Service ................................................443

10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System—Class of Service—COS Settings ......................443
10.7.2 PBX Configuration—[2-7-2] System—Class of Service—External Call Block .............457
10.7.3 PBX Configuration—[2-7-3] System—Class of Service—Internal Call Block ...............458
10.8 PBX Configuration—[2-8] System—Ring Tone Patterns ...........................................459
10.8.1 PBX Configuration—[2-8-1] System—Ring Tone Patterns—Call from CO ..................459
10.8.2 PBX Configuration—[2-8-2] System—Ring Tone Patterns—Call from
DOORPHONE ..............................................................................................................460
10.8.3 PBX Configuration—[2-8-3] System—Ring Tone Patterns—Call from Others ............461
10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options ................................................463
10.10 PBX Configuration—[2-10] System—Extension CID Settings ..................................486
10.11 PBX Configuration—[2-11] System—Audio Gain ......................................................489
10.11.1 PBX Configuration—[2-11-1] System—Audio Gain—Paging/MOH .............................489
10.11.2 PBX Configuration—[2-11-2] System—Audio Gain—Card ..........................................491
11 PBX Configuration—[3] Group ...........................................................493
11.1 PBX Configuration—[3-1] Group—Trunk Group ........................................................494
11.1.1 PBX Configuration—[3-1-1] Group—Trunk Group—TRG Settings ..............................494
11.1.2 PBX Configuration—[3-1-2] Group—Trunk Group—Local Access Priority ..................500
11.1.3 PBX Configuration—[3-1-3] Group—Trunk Group—Caller ID Modification .................501
11.1.4 PBX Configuration—[3-1-4] Group—Trunk Group—Dialling Plan ...............................505
11.1.4.1 PBX Configuration—[3-1-4] Group—Trunk Group—Dialling Plan—Auto
Assign ........................................................................................................................507
11.1.5 PBX Configuration—[3-1-5] Group—Trunk Group—Charge Rate ...............................508
11.2 PBX Configuration—[3-2] Group—User Group ..........................................................509
11.3 PBX Configuration—[3-3] Group—Call Pickup Group ..............................................510
11.3.1 PBX Configuration—[3-3] Group—Call Pickup Group—All Setting ..............................511
11.4 PBX Configuration—[3-4] Group—Paging Group ......................................................512
11.4.1 PBX Configuration—[3-4] Group—Paging Group—All Setting ....................................513
11.4.2 PBX Configuration—[3-4] Group—Paging Group—External Pager .............................514
11.5 PBX Configuration—[3-5] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group .....................515
11.5.1 PBX Configuration—[3-5-1] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group
Settings ........................................................................................................................515
11.5.1.1 PBX Configuration—[3-5-1] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group
Settings—Member List ..............................................................................................524
11.5.2 PBX Configuration—[3-5-2] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Queuing Time
Table ............................................................................................................................526
11.5.3 PBX Configuration—[3-5-3] Group—Incoming Call Distribution
Group—Miscellaneous .................................................................................................527
11.5.4 PBX Configuration–[3-5-4] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—ACD
Supervisor ....................................................................................................................531
11.6 PBX Configuration—[3-6] Group—Extension Hunting Group ..................................532
11.6.1 PBX Configuration—[3-6] Group—Extension Hunting Group—Member List ...............533
11.7 PBX Configuration—[3-7] Group—UM Group ............................................................534
11.7.1 PBX Configuration—[3-7-1] Group—UM Group—System Settings .............................534
11.7.2 PBX Configuration—[3-7-2] Group—UM Group—Unit Settings ...................................536
11.7.2.1 PBX Configuration—[3-7-2] Group—UM Group—Unit Settings—Member List ........538
11.8 PBX Configuration—[3-8] Group—PS Ring Group ....................................................539
11.8.1 PBX Configuration—[3-8] Group—PS Ring Group—Member List ...............................540
11.9 PBX Configuration—[3-9] Group—Conference Group ..............................................541
11.9.1 PBX Configuration—[3-9] Group—Conference Group—Member List .........................543
11.10 PBX Configuration—[3-10] Group—P2P Group .........................................................544
11.11 PBX Configuration—[3-11] Group—VM(DPT) Group .................................................545
11.11.1 PBX Configuration—[3-11-1] Group—VM(DPT) Group—System Settings ..................545
11.11.2 PBX Configuration—[3-11-2] Group—VM(DPT) Group—Unit Settings .......................547

8 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 Table of Contents
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

11.11.2.1 PBX Configuration—[3-11-2] Group—VM(DPT) Group—Unit Settings—Member

List .............................................................................................................................548
11.12 PBX Configuration—[3-12] Group—VM(DTMF) Group ..............................................551
11.12.1 PBX Configuration—[3-12-1] Group—VM(DTMF) Group—System Settings ...............551
11.12.2 PBX Configuration—[3-12-2] Group—VM(DTMF) Group—Group Settings .................555
11.12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[3-12-2] Group—VM(DTMF) Group—Group Settings—Member
List .............................................................................................................................556
12 PBX Configuration—[4] Extension .....................................................557
12.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1] Extension—Wired Extension ...........................................558
12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings ..........558
12.1.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings—CLIP
Generate ....................................................................................................................581
12.1.2 PBX Configuration—[4-1-2] Extension—Wired Extension—FWD/DND .......................583
12.1.3 PBX Configuration—[4-1-3] Extension—Wired Extension—Speed Dial ......................584
12.1.4 PBX Configuration—[4-1-4] Extension—Wired Extension—Flexible Button ................585
12.1.4.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-4] Extension—Wired Extension—Flexible Button—Flexible
button data copy ........................................................................................................593
12.1.5 PBX Configuration—[4-1-5] Extension—Wired Extension—PF Button ........................594
12.1.6 PBX Configuration—[4-1-6] Extension—Wired Extension—NDSS Link Data -
Send .............................................................................................................................595
12.1.7 PBX Configuration—[4-1-7] Extension—Wired Extension—CLIP ID Table .................596
12.1.8 PBX Configuration—[4-1-8] Extension—Wired Extension—Simplified Voice
Message .......................................................................................................................597
12.2 PBX Configuration—[4-2] Extension—Portable Station ............................................599
12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings ..........599
12.2.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings—CLIP
Generate ....................................................................................................................620
12.2.2 PBX Configuration—[4-2-2] Extension—Portable Station—FWD/DND .......................622
12.2.3 PBX Configuration—[4-2-3] Extension—Portable Station—Flexible Button ................623
12.2.3.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-3] Extension—Portable Station—Flexible Button—Flexible
button data copy ........................................................................................................630
12.2.4 PBX Configuration—[4-2-4] Extension—Portable Station—NDSS Link Data -
Send .............................................................................................................................631
12.2.5 PBX Configuration—[4-2-5] Extension—Portable Station—CLIP ID Table ..................632
12.2.6 PBX Configuration—[4-2-6] Extension—Portable Station—Simplified Voice
Message .......................................................................................................................633
12.3 PBX Configuration—[4-3] Extension—DSS Console .................................................635
12.3.1 PBX Configuration—[4-3] Extension—DSS Console—DSS key data copy .................642
13 PBX Configuration—[5] Optional Device ...........................................643
13.1 PBX Configuration—[5-1] Optional Device—Doorphone ..........................................644
13.2 PBX Configuration—[5-2] Optional Device—External Pager ....................................647
13.3 PBX Configuration—[5-3] Optional Device—Voice Message ...................................648
13.3.1 PBX Configuration—[5-3-1] Optional Device—Voice Message—DISA System ..........648
13.3.2 PBX Configuration—[5-3-2] Optional Device—Voice Message—DISA Message ........653
13.3.3 PBX Configuration—[5-3-3] Optional Device—Voice Message—SVM ........................655
13.4 PBX Configuration—[5-4] Optional Device—External Relay ....................................658
13.5 PBX Configuration—[5-5] Optional Device—External Sensor ..................................660
14 PBX Configuration—[6] Feature .........................................................663
14.1 PBX Configuration—[6-1] Feature—System Speed Dial ...........................................664
14.2 PBX Configuration—[6-2] Feature—Hotel & Charge .................................................666
14.3 PBX Configuration—[6-3] Feature—Verification Code ..............................................673
14.4 PBX Configuration—[6-4] Feature—Second Dial Tone .............................................675

PC Programming Manual 9

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
Table of Contents
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

14.5 PBX Configuration—[6-5] Feature—Absent Message ...............................................676

14.6 PBX Configuration—[6-6] Feature—Tenant ................................................................677
15 PBX Configuration—[7] TRS ...............................................................679
15.1 PBX Configuration—[7-1] TRS—Denied Code ...........................................................680
15.2 PBX Configuration—[7-2] TRS—Exception Code ......................................................681
15.3 PBX Configuration—[7-3] TRS—Special Carrier ........................................................682
15.4 PBX Configuration—[7-4] TRS—Emergency Dial ......................................................683
15.5 PBX Configuration—[7-5] TRS—Miscellaneous .........................................................684
16 PBX Configuration—[8] ARS ...............................................................687
16.1 PBX Configuration—[8-1] ARS—System Setting .......................................................688
16.2 PBX Configuration—[8-2] ARS—Leading Number ....................................................689
16.3 PBX Configuration—[8-3] ARS—Routing Plan Time .................................................690
16.3.1 PBX Configuration—[8-3] ARS—Routing Plan Time—Time Setting ............................691
16.4 PBX Configuration—[8-4] ARS—Routing Plan Priority .............................................692
16.5 PBX Configuration—[8-5] ARS—Carrier .....................................................................693
16.6 PBX Configuration—[8-6] ARS—Leading Number Exception ..................................696
16.7 PBX Configuration—[8-7] ARS—Authorisation Code for TRG .................................697
17 PBX Configuration—[9] Private Network ...........................................699
17.1 PBX Configuration—[9-1] Private Network—TIE Table .............................................700
17.2 PBX Configuration—[9-2] Private Network—Network Data Transmission ..............702
17.3 PBX Configuration—[9-3] Private Network—Network Operator (VoIP) ...................705
17.4 PBX Configuration—[9-4] Private Network—NDSS Key Table .................................706
17.5 PBX Configuration—[9-5] Private Network—Centralised UM/VM Unit .....................708
18 PBX Configuration—[10] CO & Incoming Call ...................................709
18.1 PBX Configuration—[10-1] CO & Incoming Call—CO Line Settings ........................710
18.2 PBX Configuration—[10-2] CO & Incoming Call—DIL Table & Port Settings ..........711
18.3 PBX Configuration—[10-3] CO & Incoming Call—DDI / DID Table ...........................716
18.3.1 PBX Configuration—[10-3] CO & Incoming Call—DDI / DID Table—Automatic
Registration ..................................................................................................................719
18.3.2 PBX Configuration—[10-3] CO & Incoming Call—DDI / DID Table—Name
Generate ......................................................................................................................721
18.4 PBX Configuration—[10-4] CO & Incoming Call—MSN Table ..................................723
18.5 PBX Configuration—[10-5] CO & Incoming Call—Miscellaneous ............................726
19 PBX Configuration—[11] Maintenance ..............................................727
19.1 PBX Configuration—[11-1] Maintenance—Main ........................................................728
19.2 PBX Configuration—[11-2] Maintenance—PT Programming Access ......................739
19.3 PBX Configuration—[11-3] Maintenance—CS Synchronisation ..............................740
19.3.1 PBX Configuration—[11-3-1] Maintenance—CS Synchronisation—Air
Synchronisation ............................................................................................................740
19.3.2 PBX Configuration—[11-3-2] Maintenance—CS Synchronisation—LAN
Synchronisation ............................................................................................................743
19.3.3 PBX Configuration—[11-3-3] Maintenance—CS Synchronisation—LAN Sync Group
Setting ..........................................................................................................................746
20 UM Configuration—[1] Mailbox Settings ...........................................749
20.1 UM Configuration—[1] Mailbox Settings ....................................................................750
20.1.1 UM Configuration—[1-1] Mailbox Settings—Quick Setting ..........................................750
20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting ..............................................752
20.1.3 UM Configuration—[1-3] Mailbox Settings—Auto Configuration ..................................774

10 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 Table of Contents
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

21 UM Configuration—[2] Class of Service ............................................775

21.1 UM Configuration—[2] Class of Service .....................................................................776
22 UM Configuration—[3] UM Extension / Trunk Service .....................789
22.1 UM Configuration—[3-1] UM Extension / Trunk Service—Service Group ...............790
22.2 UM Configuration—[3-2] UM Extension / Trunk Service—Port Assignment ...........792
23 UM Configuration—[4] Service Settings ............................................793
23.1 UM Configuration—[4-1] Service Settings—Caller ID / PIN Call Routing ................794
23.2 UM Configuration—[4-2] Service Settings—Parameters ...........................................797
23.3 UM Configuration—[4-3] Service Settings—Custom Service ...................................804
23.3.1 UM Configuration—[4-3] Service Settings—Custom Service—Menu & Transfer ........806
23.3.2 UM Configuration—[4-3] Service Settings—Custom Service—Date Control ...............810
23.3.3 UM Configuration—[4-3] Service Settings—Custom Service—Time Control ..............811
23.3.4 UM Configuration—[4-3] Service Settings—Custom Service—Day Control ................812
23.3.5 UM Configuration—[4-3] Service Settings—Custom Service—Password ...................813
23.4 UM Configuration—[4-4] Service Settings—Holiday Table .......................................816
24 UM Configuration—[5] System Parameters .......................................821
24.1 UM Configuration—[5-1] System Parameters—Mailbox Group ................................822
24.2 UM Configuration—[5-2] System Parameters—Extension Group ............................824
24.3 UM Configuration—[5-3] System Parameters—System Caller Name
Announcement ..............................................................................................................826
24.4 UM Configuration—[5-4] System Parameters—Parameters .....................................828
25 UM Configuration—[6] H/W Settings ..................................................845
25.1 UM Configuration—[6] H/W Settings ...........................................................................846
26 UM Configuration—[7] System Security ............................................847
26.1 UM Configuration—[7] System Security .....................................................................848
27 Network Service ...................................................................................851
27.1 Network Service—[1] IP Address/Ports ......................................................................852
27.2 Network Service—[2] Server Feature ..........................................................................856
27.2.1 Network Service—[2-1] Server Feature—DHCP ..........................................................856
27.2.2 Network Service—[2-2] Server Feature—FTP .............................................................858
27.2.3 Network Service—[2-4] Server Feature—HTTP ..........................................................859
27.2.4 Network Service—[2-5] Server Feature—NTP .............................................................860
27.2.5 Network Service—[2-6] Server Feature—SMTP ..........................................................861
27.2.6 Network Service—[2-7] Server Feature—IMAP4 .........................................................864
27.3 Network Service—[3] Client Feature ...........................................................................865
27.3.1 Network Service—[3-1] Client Feature—FTP ..............................................................865
27.3.2 Network Service—[3-2] Client Feature—Syslog ..........................................................867
27.3.3 Network Service—[3-3] Client Feature—SNMP Agent ................................................868
27.4 Network Service—[4] Other ..........................................................................................872
27.4.1 Network Service—[4-1] Other—Security ......................................................................872
27.4.2 Network Service—[4-2] Other—NAS ...........................................................................873
28 Appendix ...............................................................................................875
28.1 Revision History ............................................................................................................876
28.1.1 PFMPR Software File Version 004.1xxxx ....................................................................876
28.1.2 PFMPR Software File Version 004.2xxxx ....................................................................878
Feature Programming References ...........................................................879

PC Programming Manual 11

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
Table of Contents
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

12 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Section 1
Overview

This section provides an overview of programming the

PBX.

PC Programming Manual 13

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
1.1.1 For Your Safety
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

1.1 Introduction

1.1.1 For Your Safety

To prevent personal injury and/or damage to property, be sure to observe the following safety precautions.
The following symbols classify and describe the level of hazard and injury caused when this unit is
operated or handled improperly.

This notice means that misuse could result in death

WARNING or serious injury.

This notice means that misuse could result in injury

CAUTION or damage to property.

The following types of symbols are used to classify and describe the type of instructions to be
observed.

This symbol is used to alert users to a specific operating procedure that must not be performed.

This symbol is used to alert users to a specific operating procedure that must be followed in
order to operate the unit safely.

14 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 1.1.1 For Your Safety
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

WARNING

• Unplug the PBX from the AC outlet if it emits smoke, an abnormal smell or makes unusual noise. These
conditions can cause fire or electric shock. Confirm that smoke has stopped and contact an authorised
Panasonic Factory Service Centre.

CAUTION

• To the Administrator or Installer regarding account passwords

1. Please provide all system passwords to the customer.
2. To avoid unauthorised access and possible abuse of the PBX, keep the passwords secret, and inform
the customer of the importance of the passwords, and the possible dangers if they become known to
others.
3. The PBX has no passwords set initially. For security, select an installer password as soon as the PBX
system is installed at the site.
4. Change the passwords periodically.
5. It is strongly recommended that passwords of 10 numbers or characters be used for maximum
protection against unauthorised access.
• There is a risk that fraudulent telephone calls will be made if a third party discovers a personal identification
number (PIN) (verification code PIN or extension PIN) of the PBX.
The cost of such calls will be billed to the owner/renter of the PBX.
To protect the PBX from this kind of fraudulent use, we strongly recommend:
a. Keeping PINs secret.
b. Selecting complex, random PINs that cannot be easily guessed.
c. Changing PINs frequently.

PC Programming Manual 15

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
1.1.2 Introduction
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

1.1.2 Introduction
These programming instructions are designed to serve as an overall system programming reference for the
PBX. Each feature in the PBX has default settings that can be changed to customise the PBX to your
requirements. These settings control the functions of the PBX, and changing them is referred to as "system
programming".
Programming can be performed by system installers, on-site managers, and individual users. However,
managers and individual users may only change a limited number of settings. For details, see 2.1.1 Web
Maintenance Console Accounts.
All features and settings of the PBX can be programmed through system programming with Web Maintenance
Console. Starting Web Maintenance Console is described in 1.2 PC Programming. Individual system
programming items are described from Section 3 Web Maintenance Console Home Screen.

Programming Modes
There are two different modes available for programming using Web Maintenance Console:
• On-line Mode
On-line mode allows you to use Web Maintenance Console on a PC that is connected to the PBX to modify
the system data and settings used by the PBX. Settings can be modified and results are displayed in real
time. Modifications to settings change the information in the PBX’s temporary memory (DRAM). To finalise
the changes, you must either save the changes to the PBX’s System Memory by clicking or log out of
Web Maintenance Console by clicking . For details, see Web Maintenance Console Features in
3.1 Home Screen.
• Off-line Mode
Off-line mode allows you to connect to a version of Web Maintenance Console running on your PC. Using
Off-line mode, you can create new system data files and make modifications to system data files stored
on your PC, without being connected to the PBX. After you finish configuring settings, they can be saved
and uploaded to the PBX, which will update the PBX’s settings. For details, see Uploading Programmed
Settings to the PBX in 1.2.2 PC Programming Using Off-line Mode.

16 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 1.1.3 Entering Characters
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

1.1.3 Entering Characters

The characters on a white background below can be used when storing a name, message, password or other
text entry data using a PC. The available characters vary according to the model of PBX.

Note
For NE models, the tables differ depending on the Area Code selected in Easy Setup.

Table 1 (Standard)

PC Programming Manual 17

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
1.1.3 Entering Characters
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Table 2 (For NE model)

18 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 1.1.3 Entering Characters
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Table 3 (For RU/UC model)

PC Programming Manual 19

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
1.1.3 Entering Characters
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Table 4 (For Greece)

20 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 1.2.1 Starting Web Maintenance Console
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

1.2 PC Programming

1.2.1 Starting Web Maintenance Console

System programming, diagnosis and administration can be performed with a PC using Web Maintenance
Console. Web Maintenance Console is accessed through a Web browser running on a networked PC.
This section describes how to set up and access Web Maintenance Console.

System Requirements
Required Operating System
• Microsoft® Windows Vista® Business, Windows® 7, Windows 8, Windows 8 Professional, Windows 8.1 or
Windows 8.1 Professional operating system

Note
In Windows 8 / 8.1 and Windows 8 / 8.1 Professional, Web Maintenance Console runs only in desktop
mode. It is not available from the Windows 8 / 8.1 Start screen.

Recommended Display Settings

• Screen resolution: XGA (1024 ´ 768)
• DPI setting: Normal size (96 DPI)
Supported Browsers for use with Web Maintenance Console
• Windows Internet Explorer® 8
• Windows Internet Explorer 9
• Windows Internet Explorer 10*1
• Windows Internet Explorer 11
• Mozilla® Firefox® version 21 or later
*1
64-bit Enhanced Protected Mode (EPM) is not supported.

Always apply the latest updates to your Web browser software. For details, refer to your Web browser’s
documentation. Only the browsers and browser versions listed above are supported for use with Web
Maintenance Console.

Note
When using Windows Internet Explorer, there may be a delay when displaying some screens of Web
Maintenance Console. A message may be displayed that reads "Stop running this script?". This message
is automatically displayed when a script takes a long time to complete. If this message is displayed, click
No to continue using Web Maintenance Console. If you click Yes, you will have to close the browser window
for Web Maintenance Console and log in again. For information about disabling this prompt, refer to your
Web browser’s on-line support resources.
Browser Setting Requirements
The following functions must be enabled in the Web browser’s settings to use Web Maintenance Console:
• Cookies
• JavaScript
• The ability to download files
• The display of animations
• The display of images
For details regarding the above settings, refer to your Web browser’s documentation.

PC Programming Manual 21

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
1.2.1 Starting Web Maintenance Console
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

PC Specifications (for programming)

The following are recommended specifications for PCs used for programming. For details about programming
in Off-line mode, see 1.2.2 PC Programming Using Off-line Mode.

Recommended Specification

CPU 3.2 GHz Intel® Core™ 2 Duo processor or comparable CPU

RAM 2048 MB
Hard Disk 10 GB available space

Copyright for MD5

This software uses the Source Code of RSA Data Security, Inc. described in the RFC1321 (MD5
Message-Digest Algorithm).

Copyright (C) 1991-2, RSA Data Security, Inc. Created 1991. All rights reserved.

Licence to copy and use this software is granted provided that it is identified as the "RSA Data Security, Inc.
MD5 Message-Digest Algorithm" in all material mentioning or referencing this software or this function.

Licence is also granted to make and use derivative works provided that such works are identified as "derived
from the RSA Data Security, Inc. MD5 Message-Digest Algorithm" in all material mentioning or referencing the
derived work.

RSA Data Security, Inc. makes no representations concerning either the merchantability of this software or
the suitability of this software for any particular purpose. It is provided "as is" without express or implied warranty
of any kind.
These notices must be retained in any copies of any part of this documentation and/or software.

PC Connection (On-line Mode)

To connect to Web Maintenance Console in On-line mode, both the PC and the PBX must be connected. The
connection can be made through a local area network (LAN), a virtual private network (VPN), or over the
Internet. A PC can also be connected directly to the maintenance port of the PBX.

Note
• When connecting to Web Maintenance Console over the Internet, the use of an encrypted
communication method, such as TLS, is strongly recommended. For details, contact your network’s
administrator.

Connecting to Web Maintenance Console (On-line Mode)

Below is the procedure for connecting to Web Maintenance Console to programme in On-line mode:
1. Connect the PC to the PBX:
• Connect the PBX to a network with the LAN port and access the PBX from a PC in your LAN or VPN.
• Connect the PBX to a network with the LAN port and access the PBX from a PC using an Internet
connection.
2. Access Web Maintenance Console:

LAN or VPN connection:

Launch your Web browser and input the IP address of the PBX followed by the Web Maintenance Console
port number into the address bar. The input method will differ according to the PC’s connection to the PBX.

22 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 1.2.1 Starting Web Maintenance Console
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

The default IP address for the LAN port of the PBX is 192.168.0.101, and the default Web Maintenance
Console port number is 80. Accordingly, the address to enter to connect to the PBX for the first time will
be as follows (enter the address exactly as shown):
http://192.168.0.101

MNT Port connection:

Launch your Web browser and in the address bar, enter one of the following addresses exactly as shown:
– 223.0.0.1
or
– http://kx-ns500.

Note
• If entering "http://kx-ns500.", be sure to include the period at the end as shown.
• If connecting using 223.0.0.1 takes a long time, configure a static IP address for the PC.

Internet connection (TLS Connection):

When the PC is accessing the PBX from a connection over the Internet, the use of TLS is strongly
recommended. When using a TLS encrypted connection, the default port is 443. The format of the address
to enter to connect to the PBX using a TLS encrypted connection will be as follows:
https://xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx:yyy
• "xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx" is the IP address of a device that can be accessed from the Internet, such as the
IP address of a network router.
• "yyy" is a port number. The network router’s port forwarding settings must be configured so that traffic
arriving at port "yyy" is forwarded to the correct IP address and port of the PBX in the LAN.
• Port forwarding settings must specify the IP address and the port number of the network router
("xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx:yyy") to transfer the packets to the PBX in the LAN, so that the packets sent to the
global IP address and specified port of the router will be transferred to the IP address and specified
port of the PBX in the LAN.
• Note the usage of "https" instead of "http".
• If you connect to Web Maintenance Console using TLS, a security alert window is displayed. Follow
the prompts to install a security certificate. The procedure may vary according to your browser.

Note
• You can also connect to the PBX in On-line mode using the Off-line Web Maintenance Console
Programme Launcher. For details, see Connecting in On-line Mode using the Programme
Launcher in 1.2.2 PC Programming Using Off-line Mode.
3. The Web Maintenance Console login screen is displayed. For details about logging in, see 2.1.3 Logging
in to Web Maintenance Console.
• If this is the first time the PBX is accessed (i.e., it is in its initialised, factory default state), you must log
in using the Installer level account. Once you log in, the Easy Setup Wizard will launch. For details,
see 2.1.4 Easy Setup Wizard.
• If the PBX has been set up using the Easy Setup Wizard, PBX system programming can be performed.
To perform programming, enter the login name and password according to your status and
authorisation level. For details about the differences between levels of authorisation, see 2.1.1 Web
Maintenance Console Accounts.
4. After you successfully log in to Web Maintenance Console, the Home screen will be displayed and
programming can be performed. For details about accessing the different features of Web Maintenance
Console, see 3.1 Home Screen.

Connecting to Web Maintenance Console (Remote Access)

Below is the procedure for connecting to Web Maintenance Console to programme via Remote Access:

PC Programming Manual 23

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
1.2.1 Starting Web Maintenance Console
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

1. Connect the PC to the PBX.

• Install the Remote card, connect the PBX to an analogue line, and access the PBX from a PC via a
remote modem.
• Connect the PBX to an ISDN line and access the PBX from a PC via an ISDN modem.
For more details, refer to "5.2 PC Connection—Connection via RMT Card (KX-TDA0196)" or "5.2 PC
Connection—Connection via PRI23 Card (KX-NS5290), PRI30/E1 Card (KX-NS5290CE), BRI2 Card
(KX-NS5282), or BRI4 Card (KX-NS5284)" in the Installation Manual.
2. Start the Off-line Web Maintenance launcher :
Analogue Line connection:
1) Click the Connect-Online Mode button.
2) Select the Modem tab.
3) Set the following:
– Dial Number / Dial Type / Port / Baud Rate (bps) / Flow Control / Command
4) Enter the Password.
5) Click the Connect button.
ISDN Line connection:
1) Click the Connect-Online Mode button.
2) Select the ISDN Remote tab.
3) Enter the Telephone Number.
4) Enter the Password.
5) Click the Connect button.
3. The Web Maintenance Console login screen is displayed. For details about logging in, see 2.1.3 Logging
in to Web Maintenance Console.
4. After you successfully log in to Web Maintenance Console, the Home screen will be displayed and
programming can be performed. For details about accessing the different features of Web Maintenance
Console, see 3.1 Home Screen.

Connecting to Web Maintenance Console (Off-line Mode)

To connect to Web Maintenance Console in Off-line mode, use the New -Offline Mode or Open -Offline
Mode operations in the Off-line Web Maintenance Console programme launcher. For details, refer to 1.2.2 PC
Programming Using Off-line Mode.

24 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 1.2.2 PC Programming Using Off-line Mode
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

1.2.2 PC Programming Using Off-line Mode

PC Programming is performed by connecting to the PBX using Web Maintenance Console, which is also known
as On-line mode. However, as certain programming requires installed cards to be set to out of service (OUS),
or requires system settings to be changed, some programming cannot be performed while the PBX is in use.
Off-line mode programming is performed using the Off-line version of Web Maintenance Console, which you
install on your PC.
Off-line mode allows you to create new system data files and make modifications to system data files stored
on your PC, without being connected to the PBX. The programming changes can be saved and then later
uploaded to the PBX.
The following procedures outline how to install and use the Off-line Web Maintenance Console for Off-line
mode programming.

Installation
Note
• Be sure to install and use the latest version of "KX-NS Unified Web Maintenance Console".
• Before beginning the installation of Off-line Web Maintenance Console, the following software must be
installed on the PC:
– Microsoft .NET Framework 2.0
– Microsoft .NET Framework 4
This software can be downloaded from Microsoft’s online Download Center.
• To install or uninstall the software on a PC running Windows Vista Business, Windows 7, Windows 8,
Windows 8 Professional, Windows 8.1, or Windows 8.1 Professional, you must be logged in as a user
in the "Administrators" group.
1. Copy the "KX-NS Unified Web Maintenance Console" setup file to your PC.
2. Double-click the setup file to run the installer.
3. Follow the on-screen instructions provided by the installation wizard.

The Programme Launcher

After Off-line Web Maintenance Console has been installed, you can run the Programme Launcher from the
Windows Start menu.

PC Programming Manual 25

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
1.2.2 PC Programming Using Off-line Mode
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Off-line Web Maintenance Console Programme Launcher

Note
Off-line Web Maintenance Console cannot be used when the PBX Web Manager for Unified PC
Maintenance Console (for KX-TDA/KX-TDE/KX-NCP PBXs) is running on the PC.
To disable the PBX Web Manager:
1. In the Unified PC Maintenance Console launcher, click Option®PBX Web Manager.
2. Deselect the Enable Web Server check box.
3. Click OK.
Starting a New System Data File
You can start a new session of PBX programming in Off-line mode. You can then programme PBX settings in
Off-line Web Maintenance Console and then save them to a file you can later upload to the PBX.

Note
Since selecting this option creates a blank system data file, uploading this file to the PBX will overwrite all
previous settings. Use this function only when necessary.

To create a new system data file

1. In the Programme Launcher, click New -Offline Mode. The Off-line Web Maintenance Console login
screen will be displayed in your PC’s Web browser. For details about the login screen, see 2.1.3 Logging
in to Web Maintenance Console.
2. Log in to Off-line Web Maintenance Console using the Installer level account and password to start the
Easy Setup Wizard. For details, see 2.1.4 Easy Setup Wizard.

To convert a KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200’s or KX-TE’s system data file to KX-NS500

KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200 or KX-TE system data can be converted for use with the KX-NS500 by using the
Database Converter.
1. In the Programme Launcher, click Database Converter. The Database Converter screen will be displayed
in your PC.
For details, refer to "Converting KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200 or KX-TE series System Data for Use with the
KX-NS500" in "5.3 Starting Web Maintenance Console" in the Installation Manual.

26 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 1.2.2 PC Programming Using Off-line Mode
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Opening an Existing System Data File

This operation will load a PBX settings system data file from your PC for programming in Off-line mode. The
system data file can be a file created earlier using Off-line Web Maintenance Console, or a system data file
downloaded from a PBX. You can then programme PBX settings using Off-line Web Maintenance Console
and then save the settings to a file you can later upload to the PBX.
When you use the following procedure to open a system file created using a previous version of the PBX
software, a confirmation screen will be displayed asking whether you want to convert the system data to the
latest software version. Click Yes to convert the data and proceed with Off-line programming.

To open a system data file

1. In the Programme Launcher, click Open -Offline Mode.
The Open dialogue box will be displayed.
2. Navigate to the folder containing the system data file you want to open.
3. Select the file.
4. Click Open, and then click OK.
The file will be loaded and the Off-line Web Maintenance Console login screen will be displayed in your
PC’s Web browser. For details about the login screen, see 2.1.3 Logging in to Web Maintenance
Console.
5. Log in using an account name and password associated with the system data file that was loaded.
Note
User (User) level accounts cannot be used to log in to Off-line Web Maintenance Console. For details about
account types, refer to 2.1.1 Web Maintenance Console Accounts.

Connecting in On-line Mode using the Programme Launcher

You can also use the Programme Launcher to log in to Web Maintenance Console in On-line mode. You can
save the IP address and port information for each PBX in a profile. This feature is useful when there are multiple
PBXs in your network. For details about connecting to the PBX in On-line mode, see Connecting to Web
Maintenance Console (On-line Mode) in 1.2.1 Starting Web Maintenance Console.

To connect in On-line mode using the Programme Launcher

1. In the Programme Launcher, click Connect -Online Mode.
The Connection dialogue box will be displayed.
2. Select a profile from the drop-down list, or enter the IP address and Port manually.
3. Click Connect.
The Web Maintenance Console login screen for connecting directly to the PBX in On-line mode will be
displayed in your PC’s Web browser. For details about the login screen, see 2.1.3 Logging in to Web
Maintenance Console.

Editing and Printing Terminal Labels

You can create and print key label sheets that match the Flexible Button settings and then use the labels on
extensions. In the Programme Launcher, click Terminal Label Print. The screen for editing and printing key
labels will be displayed. For details, see 1.2.2.1 Editing and Printing Terminal Labels in Off-line Mode.

Options
You can specify the display language of the Programme Launcher, as well as set the web server port number
for Off-line Web Maintenance Console. In the Programme Launcher, click Options and change the settings
as necessary.
Adding Additional Languages
Additional display language files may be made available. To add a display language not listed in the language
selection menu, select Additional language, and then click Browse to specify the language file. After
specifying a language file, click OK to change to the selected language.

PC Programming Manual 27

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
1.2.2 PC Programming Using Off-line Mode
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

VoIP Test Tool

Click the VoIP Test Tool button to launch the VoIP Test Tool. This tool is identical to the VoIP Test Tool
included with the Unified PC Maintenance Console for KX-TDA/KX-TDE/KX-NCP PBXs.

IP Terminal Utility
Click the IP Terminal button to launch the IP Terminal setup utility. This utility is identical to the IP Terminal
utility included with the Unified PC Maintenance Console for KX-TDA/KX-TDE/KX-NCP PBXs.

IP Trace File Converter

Click the IP Trace File Converter button to launch the IP Trace File Converter utility. This utility will convert
locally-saved IP trace file data collected by the system utilities listed below into a format that can be analysed
by general packet analysis software tools.
– 7.4.2 Utility—Monitor/Trace—V-IPGW Protocol Trace
– 7.4.3 Utility—Monitor/Trace—V-SIPGW Protocol Trace
Others
Others is a tool used to edit files saved by using the Export tool. Copy files from the Others folder to edit them.
After saving edited files, import them to the PBX.
The following types of data types can be edited.
• Feature – Speed Dial and Caller ID
• Incoming Call – DDI/DID Table
• Wired Extension
• PS Extension
For details, see "6.6 Tool—Import" and "6.7 Tool—Export".

Programming in Off-line Mode

Once you have logged in to Off-line Web Maintenance Console, programming is very similar to On-line mode.
The title bar will be coloured differently from when in On-line mode:

When programming in On-line mode:

When programming in Off-line mode:

Some items are not programmable when in Off-line mode, and those items will be greyed out. Some tools and
utilities are also not available in Off-line mode. For details, refer to 2.1.2 Access Levels.

Notice
• In Off-line mode, changes made in 6.8 Tool—Screen Customise will not be reflected in On-line mode.
This is because these settings are not stored in the system data file (DFSYS).
• When you load the system data file to the PBX, you must install any required activation keys in On-line
mode. Activation keys are required for mailboxes. Settings such as mailbox passwords will be cleared
if the number of activation keys for mailboxes is insufficient.

Uploading Programmed Settings to the PBX

When programming in Off-line mode, clicking the icon will open a save dialogue box. Specify a location and
file name for the system data file. This file can then be uploaded to the PBX in On-line mode using the "File
Transfer PC to PBX" utility. For details, refer to 7.2.1 Utility—File—File Transfer PC to PBX.

28 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 1.2.2 PC Programming Using Off-line Mode
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Notice
• If the PC running the Off-line Web Maintenance Console is shut down, the Web browser is closed, or
the user logs out, any changes that have not been saved will be lost. Be sure to regularly save data
while programming.
• When you upload a system setting file to the PBX, all existing settings on the PBX will be overwritten
with the settings in the file, including settings you may not want to change. To change only specific
settings in Off-line mode, follow the procedure below:
1. Use the "File Transfer PBX to PC" utility in On-line mode to save a file with the PBX’s current
settings. For details, refer to 7.2.2 Utility—File—File Transfer PBX to PC.
2. Use the Open -Offline Mode command in the Programme Launcher to load the PBX system file
in Off-line mode.
For details, refer to Opening an Existing System Data File above.
3. Perform the desired programming in Off-line mode, and then click the icon to save the modified
system settings to your PC.
4. Log in to Web Maintenance Console in On-line mode, and then use the "File Transfer PC to
PBX" utility to upload the modified data to the PBX.
• When programming in Off-line mode, be careful when programming the following parameters:
– 20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting—Mailbox Parameters—
Mailbox Password (Message Client)
– 20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting—Notification
Parameters— E-mail/Text Message Device—Device No. 1, 2, 3—E-mail Address
These parameters require an activation key (KX-NSU2xx) to function. If these items are programmed
in Off-line mode, but the PBX does not have the required activation key installed, the values specified
for these parameters will be cleared when the data is uploaded to the PBX.

PC Programming Manual 29

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
1.2.2 PC Programming Using Off-line Mode
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

1.2.2.1 Editing and Printing Terminal Labels in Off-line Mode

Follow the procedure below to print key label sheets for use with your system’s extensions and DSS consoles.
1. In On-line mode, export PBX system data to your PC, and then open the exported data in Off-line mode.
a. In On-line mode, use the File Transfer PBX to PC utility to save your system’s data and settings to your
PC. For details, see 7.2.2 Utility—File—File Transfer PBX to PC.
b. Use the Programme Launcher to open the system data in Off-line mode. For details, see Opening an
Existing System Data File in 1.2.2 PC Programming Using Off-line Mode.
2. In Off-line mode, export the key settings to a CSV file.
a. After logging in to Off-line Web Maintenance Console, access the screen from which key settings will
be exported:
– For extensions: Setup ® PBX Configuration ® Extension ® Wired Extension ® Flexible
Button
– For DSS consoles: Setup ® PBX Configuration ® Extension ® DSS Console
b. Click Export, specify a location to save the flexible key settings data, and then click OK.
Note
The Export button is available only when in Off-line mode.
3. Open the exported CSV data in the Terminal Label Print utility, and then edit the label settings as necessary.
a. In the Programme Launcher, click Terminal Label Print.
b. Select Open. Specify the exported CSV file in the dialogue that is displayed, and then click OK.
c. Edit the following settings as necessary:
Label Specifies the label that will be printed next to the corresponding
button. (Max. 20 characters)
Colour of Font Specifies the colour used for the label text for the corresponding
button. Click Choose to select a colour.
Colour of Background Specifies the colour used for the label background for the
corresponding button. Click Choose to select a colour.
Font Size Specifies the size of the font on the label for the corresponding
button. (Size value range: 4–15)
Telephone Type Specifies the model number of the telephone to determine the size
and shape of the label template.

4. Once the settings have been configured, click Key Label Print on the settings screen. Follow the Key
Label Print Wizard to print the key labels or to output the data as a PDF file.

30 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Section 2
Introduction of Web Maintenance Console

This section serves as reference operating instructions

when using Web Maintenance Console to programme
the PBX.

PC Programming Manual 31

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
2.1.1 Web Maintenance Console Accounts
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

2.1 Introduction

2.1.1 Web Maintenance Console Accounts

User account levels
Access to Web Maintenance Console requires a login name and password, which are assigned to accounts
in the PBX. Also, access to Web Maintenance Console is controlled by different levels of authorisation. The
Installer level is the highest authorisation level. There are also two levels for end users, Administrators and
Users. The usage for each level and number of accounts available for each level are as follows:

Level Description Number of Accounts

Installer For dealers and system installers 1

User For on-site managers 8
(Administrator)
User (User) For end users 492

Differences between user levels

• Installer
The installer level account is the highest authorisation account of the three levels. This account level is to
be used by dealers or system installers. All system programming settings are available, and this account
is used for overall system installation and maintenance. The installer level can be used to programme
which menus in Web Maintenance Console are accessible by Administrator accounts.
• User (Administrator)
Administrator accounts are for general maintenance of users and user settings. This account level is used
by on-site managers and network administrators. Administrator level accounts can use Web Maintenance
Console to add users or programme user settings.
User (Administrator) accounts are intended for maintenance functions only. To manage their own PBX
user settings, on-site managers and network administrators should create their own User (User) accounts
for programming.
• User (User)
User accounts are for individual users of the PBX system. Users can use Web Maintenance Console to
change their extension settings, speed dial settings, or other personal settings by accessing a limited
number of pre-defined menus.

Note
• User (User) accounts cannot be used when programming in Off-line mode. For details, refer to
1.2.2 PC Programming Using Off-line Mode.

Account Login Names and Passwords

Each account has a login name and password and are specified as follows. All account passwords are set in
Web Maintenance Console (see 8.2.1 Users—Add User—Single User).

32 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 2.1.1 Web Maintenance Console Accounts
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Level Login Name Password

Installer INSTALLER 4-16 character password, using a-z, A-Z,

and 0-9 (case sensitive).
For an initialised PBX that has not yet been
set up, the default Installer level password
is "1234". You will be prompted to choose
a new password for the Installer level
account when the Easy Setup Wizard is run
(see 2.1.4 Easy Setup Wizard).
Administrator 1-16 character login name, using 4-16 character password, using a-z, A-Z,
a-z, A-Z, and 0-9 (case sensitive). and 0-9 (case sensitive). Set during
User Set during account creation. account creation.
(see 8.2.1 Users—Add (see 8.2.1 Users—Add User—Single
User—Single User) User)

For more information about creating and managing end user accounts, see Section 8 Users.

CAUTION
To the Administrator or Installer regarding account passwords
1. Please provide all system passwords to the customer.
2. To avoid unauthorised access and possible abuse of the PBX, keep the passwords secret, and inform
the customer of the importance of the passwords, and the possible dangers if they become known to
others.
3. The PBX has no passwords set initially. For security, select an installer password as soon as the PBX
system is installed at the site.
4. Change the passwords periodically.
5. It is strongly recommended that passwords of 10 numbers or characters be used for maximum
protection against unauthorised access.

PC Programming Manual 33

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
2.1.2 Access Levels
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

2.1.2 Access Levels

Access to menu options within Web Maintenance Console is restricted depending on the level of the account
and the current programming mode (see Programming Modes in 1.1.2 Introduction). When a menu option
is limited to certain access levels, this is noted in this manual in the initial description of that menu option, for
example:
"This option is only available at Installer level."

The options available for each programming mode and access level are shown below.
The access levels are abbreviated as follows:
U: User (User); A: User (Administrator); I: Installer

Note
User (User) accounts cannot be used when programming in Off-line mode.
A check mark indicates that the menu option is available for that access level.

Home Screen
Menu Option Off-line On-line

A I U A I

System Information ü ü ü ü ü
Logout ü ü ü ü ü

Tool
Menu Option Off-line On-line

A I U A I

System Data Backup to USB ü ü

System Data Backup to NAS ü ü
BRI Automatic Configuration ü
NDSS Link Data Clear ü
Call Pickup for My Group ü ü
Extension List View ü ü ü ü ü
Import®Feature - Speed Dial and Caller ID ü ü ü ü
Import®Incoming Call - DDI/DID Table ü ü
Import®ARS - Leading Digit ü ü
Import®ARS - Except Code ü ü
Import®ARS - Routing Plan ü ü
Import®Wired Extension ü ü
Import®PS Extension ü ü
Import®Quick Dial ü ü
Import®SIP Extension ü ü

34 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 2.1.2 Access Levels
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Menu Option Off-line On-line

A I U A I

Import®V-IPGW GW Settings ü ü
Import®V-IPGW DN2IP ü ü
Import®V-SIPGW Settings ü ü
Import®V-SIPGW Provider ü ü
Export®Feature - Speed Dial and Caller ID ü ü ü ü
Export®Incoming Call - DDI/DID Table ü ü
Export®ARS - Leading Digit ü ü
Export®ARS - Except Code ü ü
Export®ARS - Routing Plan ü ü
Export®Wired Extension ü ü
Export®PS Extension ü ü
Export®Quick Dial ü ü
Export®SIP Extension ü ü
Export®V-IPGW GW Settings ü ü
Export®V-IPGW DN2IP ü ü
Export®V-SIPGW Settings ü ü
Export®V-SIPGW Provider ü ü
Screen Customise ü ü
UM Data Backup ü
UM Data Restore ü
UM Backup History ü
DXDP All OUS ü
Contact information ü ü ü ü
UT Option Setting ü ü
URL Information ü ü

Utility
Menu Option Off-line On-line

A I U A I

Diagnosis®Card Diagnosis ü ü
Diagnosis®Ping ü
File Transfer PC to PBX ü

PC Programming Manual 35

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
2.1.2 Access Levels
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Menu Option Off-line On-line

A I U A I

File Transfer PBX to PC ü

File View ü
File Delete ü
Message File Transfer PC to PBX ü
Message File Transfer PBX to PC ü
Error Log ü ü
Syslog ü
Web-MC Event Log ü ü
UM System Log ü
ISDN/QSIG Protocol Trace ü
V-IPGW Protocol Trace ü
V-SIPGW Protocol Trace ü
CS Status Monitor®Air Sync Group ü
CS Status Monitor®LAN Sync Group ü
UM System Trace (Internal) ü
E1 Signalling Bit Monitor ü
E1 Line Trace ü
Digital Trunk Error Report ü
IP Extension Statistical Information ü
UM View Reports ü ü
E-mail Report ü ü
IP-CS Information ® IP-CS Statistical Information ü
IP-CS Information ® LAN Sync Information ü
Activation Key Installation ü
Email Notification—Alert ü ü
Email Notification—System Analysis ü
Email Notification—Test Email ü
UM Command ü
UM – System Prompts Customisation ü ü
Automatic Two-way Recording ü ü ü ü
UM - System Maintenance ü ü

36 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 2.1.2 Access Levels
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Menu Option Off-line On-line

A I U A I

CS-Web Connection ü ü

PC Programming Manual 37

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
2.1.3 Logging in to Web Maintenance Console
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

2.1.3 Logging in to Web Maintenance Console

After establishing a connection to Web Maintenance Console (see 1.2.1 Starting Web Maintenance
Console), the login window is displayed, and a login name and password must be entered. If this is the first
time to log in to Web Maintenance Console, and the PBX is in its initialised, factory default state, you must log
in using the Installer level account to begin the Easy Setup Wizard (see 2.1.4 Easy Setup Wizard).
For information about account names and passwords, see 2.1.1 Web Maintenance Console Accounts.

Login Screen

Login Restrictions
• Up to 32 User (User) and User (Administrator) level accounts may log in at one time to Web Maintenance
Console in On-line mode.
• Only 1 user may log in using the Installer level account at a time. If someone using the Installer level account
is logged in to Web Maintenance Console and is making changes, and another user logs in using the
Installer level account, the user logging in may override the other logged-in user so that programming can
be performed (a warning screen will be displayed for the user that is about to override the currently
logged-in user).
• Users can view only menus and setting items they may access according to their account level. For User
(Administrator) level accounts, the items that can be viewed can be set by the Installer level account. For
details, see 6.8 Tool—Screen Customise.
• If two logged-in users change the same setting, the change made last will be the effective setting.
• If a user attempts to log in, but enters an incorrect password three times, the failure is recorded in the error
log of the PBX and the user may not attempt to log in again for a 5-minute period.

38 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 2.1.4 Easy Setup Wizard
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

2.1.4 Easy Setup Wizard

In the Easy Setup Wizard, you will configure the mandatory settings required for the PBX. When you log in to
Web Maintenance Console for a PBX that is in its initialised, factory default state, the Easy Setup Wizard for
that PBX will launch automatically.
You must log in using the Installer level account name and password.
– The Installer level account name is "INSTALLER".
– The default Installer level account password is "1234".
After logging in, the Easy Setup Wizard welcome screen is displayed. Select a language, and then click
Install. Refer to 5.4.1 Easy Setup Wizard in the Installation Manual for detailed and important information
about configuring the PBX using the Easy Setup Wizard.

PC Programming Manual 39

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
2.1.5 Card Status
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

2.1.5 Card Status

Certain tools, utilities and settings require that the target card be set to out-of-service (OUS) or in-service
(INS) status before the operation is carried out. Where required, this is noted in the description of each item.
Card status changes can be performed only in On-line mode (see Programming Modes in
1.1.2 Introduction).
• "In service" means that the card is installed correctly in the PBX, and is capable of being used normally.
• "Out of service" means that the card is installed correctly in the PBX, but has been temporarily removed
from use. This allows settings to be modified or software to be upgraded.
• "Fault" means that the card is not installed in the PBX correctly, or is not functioning correctly. For more
information, see the Installation Manual.
For details about how to change the status of a card, see To change the status (INS/OUS) of a card (On-line
mode only) in 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot.

40 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 2.1.6 Extension Number Setting
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

2.1.6 Extension Number Setting

Many screens within the Maintenance Console software allow you to select extensions as part of programming
various features (for example, as members of a group). These screens use a standard window to make
selecting multiple extensions easy, accessed by clicking a button. This section explains how to use this
Extension Number Setting window.

To select multiple extension numbers, select the type of extension to display, highlight the extensions you wish
to add, then click the Add button. When finished, click OK. Data for the selected extensions will be added to
the first free spaces on the original screen.

Extension Type
Selects the types of extension numbers to display in Extension Numbers & Names List. Multiple items
can be selected. Items that are not available are shown with a grey checkbox.

Value Range
Wired Extension, Portable Station, ICD Group, PS Ring Group, OGM (DISA), External Pager, UM / VM
Extension, UM Group, VM(DPT) Group, VM(DTMF) Group

Extension Numbers & Names List

Displays all available extensions of the types selected in Extension Type, and names. Click entries to select
them, and click the Add button when finished, to add the selected extensions. To deselect an entry, click it
again.

Value Range
Matching extensions

Available Column
Specifies which fields in the original form to add extension data to. For example, if both extension numbers
and names can be entered in the original form, it is possible to specify that extension name data not be
transferred, by deselecting that field here.
To select or deselect a field, click its name.

Value Range
Available fields

Selected Extension List

Displays the extensions that have been selected to be added to member data. To remove an extension from
this list, click it to select it and click Delete.

Value Range
Selected extensions

PC Programming Manual 41

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
2.2 Logout
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

2.2 Logout
To logout of Web Maintenance Console, click the button to end the programming session and return to the
Login screen. When this option is chosen, system data is automatically saved from the temporary memory
(DRAM) of the PBX to the System Memory.

To logout
1. Click the button.
A confirmation message will be displayed.
2. Click Yes.
Note
• If the PC running the Web browser that is connected to Web Maintenance Console is shut down, or
the Web browser is closed, any changes that have not been saved to the System Memory will be lost.
To save settings while programming, click the button on the Home screen. Always end your
programming session by clicking the button.
• If you are logged in but do not perform any operations in Web Maintenance Console for 60 minutes
(default value), you will be automatically logged out.

42 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 2.3 Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ)
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

2.3 Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ)

This section provides answers to some common questions about using the Maintenance Console software to
programme the PBX. The information is divided into the following topics:

Title Description

Connection Connecting to the PBX using Maintenance Console.

Maintenance Console Software Using the Maintenance Console software.
Card Status Changing the status (INS/OUS) of cards.
Portable Stations Setting up portable stations, including registration and deregistration.
Numbering Changing the numbering plan for the PBX, or numbers of individual
extensions or features.
Saving Modified Data Safely saving PBX data edited with Maintenance Console.
Setting Features Setting up individual features.

Connection
Q The Maintenance Console cannot connect to the PBX via a LAN connection.
A • Is the PC connected to the LAN?
• Have the IP address and port number of the PBX been set correctly? For more details,
see 27.1 Network Service—[1] IP Address/Ports.
• Is the login name and password correct?

Q Can I perform initial setup of the PBX without being connected to the PBX?
A • Yes. This is possible in Off-line mode.
Create a new system data file in Off-line mode (see 1.2.2 PC Programming Using
Off-line Mode), modify settings as necessary, and then upload this file to the PBX
later (see 7.2.1 Utility—File—File Transfer PC to PBX).

Maintenance Console Software

Q How do I confirm the software version of the PBX or installed cards?
A • From 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot, place the mouse cursor
over the System Property button and click Site. The software version of the PBX is
displayed on this screen.
• From 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot, place the mouse cursor
over the System Property button and click Slot Summary. Summary information is
displayed for all cards installed in the PBX.

Q Not all of the characters of a setting can be displayed because the column is too
narrow.
A • Move the mouse to the line between the names of 2 setting items, at the top of the
table.
The pointer will change to a double arrow. Click and drag the line to the right until all
characters are displayed.

PC Programming Manual 43

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
2.3 Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ)
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Card Status
Q The status of a new card will not change to "INS".
A • With the new card installed, does the total number of extensions or trunks exceed the
maximum supported by the PBX?
• Is the type of card installed in the slot different from the card type set as "Pre-Install"
for that slot? Confirm that the correct card is installed in the slot.
• Is the card firmly and fully installed in the slot? Confirm that the card is installed
correctly in the slot.
• Confirm that the card is not damaged.

Q I cannot change an LCO port to INS status.

A • Is the card installed in the appropriate slot?
• Is the card installed in the correct slot, but not functioning correctly?
Check the condition of the card.
• Is the card itself in INS status?
Set it to INS status.
• Is a trunk line connected to the appropriate port?
• Is the port in FAULT status, even though a trunk is connected?
Run diagnosis on the relevant slot.

Q How do I prevent newly installed cards automatically being changed to "INS"?

A • Change New Card Installation—Card Status for any Card in 9.36 PBX
Configuration—[1-3] Configuration—Option from "In Service (INS)" to "Out of
Service (OUS)".

Portable Stations
Q I cannot register Portable Stations using the method described in 9.35 PBX
Configuration—[1-2] Configuration—Portable Station.
A • Do the PINs (Personal Identification Numbers) of the PBX and the Portable Station
match? Confirm that they are the same.
• Is the Portable Station within transmission range of the CS?
• Has the Portable Station previously been registered at another location?
It is not possible to register a Portable Station at 2 locations, so use the Forced
De-registration option to delete the previous registration.

Q I cannot delete the extension number of a Portable Station.

A • First, de-register the Portable Station itself, and then delete the extension number.

Q I cannot de-register a Portable Station.

A • Is the Portable Station turned on? If not, turn it on.
• Is the Portable Station within transmission range of the CS? If not, move it closer to
the CS and try the de-registration operation again.

Q The Portable Station I want to de-register is broken, and will not turn on, or is not
available, or the registration information was deleted first from the Portable Station,
so it cannot be de-registered.

44 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 2.3 Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ)
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

A • The Portable Station can be forcibly de-registered by following the procedure shown
in Forced De-registration of 9.35 PBX Configuration—[1-2]
Configuration—Portable Station.

Q I changed the extension number of a Portable Station, but the display of the Portable
Station still shows the old extension number.
A • Turn the Portable Station off and back on again, to force it to re-register its location.

Q I changed the FCO of a Portable Station, but the display of the Portable Station still
shows the old FCO.
A • Turn the Portable Station off and back on again, to force it to re-register its location.

Q If I delete the extension number of a Portable Station, and then turn the Portable
Station off and back on again, it does not function correctly.
A • Do not delete the extension number of the Portable Station, as this information is
necessary for it to operate.

Numbering
Q How do I change the extension number of a wired extension?
A • Change the extension number of the target port to the new number, and click Apply.
Next, set the port to OUS status, and then back to INS status.

Q I changed the extension number of a wired extension while the extension was
engaged in a call, but the display still shows the previous extension number.
A • The extension number will not change while the extension is in use. When the
conversation is finished, set the port to OUS status, and then back to INS status.

Q How do I change the extension numbering plan from 3-digit numbers to 4-digit
numbers?
A • Perform the following steps:
1. Open the 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering
Plan—Main screen.
2. Enter a 2-digit number in Leading Number, or change No. of Additional
Digits from "x" to "xx".
For more details, see What is the procedure to modify the Numbering Plan?
in Numbering.

Q How do I set a 3-digit numbering plan?

PC Programming Manual 45

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
2.3 Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ)
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

A • Select 3-digits for Select default value of Numbering Plan in the Easy Setup Wizard.
If you want to change to a 3-digit extension numbering plan after the PBX system is
already running using a 4-digit extension numbering plan, follow the procedure below.
There are 2 methods of creating a 3-digit numbering plan, using 10.6.1 PBX
Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main:
1. Set the leading number to be 2 digits, with one additional digit. This method allows
a maximum of 10 extensions.
Example: Leading Number = 10; No. of Additional Digits = x
In this example, extension numbers 100 to 109 can be used.
2. Set the leading number to be one digit, with 2 additional digits. This method allows
a maximum of 100 extensions.
Example: Leading Number = 1; No. of Additional Digits = xx
In this example, extension numbers 100 to 199 can be used.
For more details, see What is the procedure to modify the Numbering Plan? in
Numbering.

Q What is the procedure to modify the Numbering Plan?

A • Perform the following steps:
1. Confirm that the Numbering Plan you will change is not currently being used by
any extensions (see 6.5 Tool—Extension List View).
If it is being used by extensions, temporarily change the extension numbers of
those extensions to that of another numbering plan, or delete the extension
number (see 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired
Extension—Extension Settings and 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1]
Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings).
2. Clear the Leading Number cell.
3. Click Apply.
4. Modify the No. of Additional Digits cell as required.
5. Click Apply.
6. Enter the desired value in the Leading Number cell.
7. Click Apply.
8. Set all extension ports to OUS status.
9. On the relevant screens, set the extension numbers of extensions to the desired
values.
10. Set all extension ports back to INS status.

Q When modifying the Numbering Plan, I cannot change the Leading Number.
A • It is not possible to use the same Leading Number for 2 extension blocks, or to use a
number that could possibly overlap with another Leading Number.
So, for example, if "2" is already set as a Leading Number it is not possible to set
"21" as another Leading Number because of the possible overlap of extension
numbers.
The number you are trying to store cannot be used if it is already being used by:
• A feature number
• Another extension block
• A Dial setting (see 17.1 PBX Configuration—[9-1] Private Network—TIE
Table)
• Quick Dialling (see 10.6.2 PBX Configuration—[2-6-2] System—Numbering
Plan—Quick Dial)
In any of these cases, choose another number.

46 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 2.3 Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ)
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Q When modifying the Numbering Plan, how do I set a 1-digit extension number?
A • Perform the following steps:
1. Clear the Leading Number cell.
2. Click Apply.
3. Set No. of Additional Digits to "None".
4. Click Apply.
5. Enter the desired value in the Leading Number cell.
6. Click Apply.
7. Set all extension ports to OUS status.
8. On the relevant screens, set the extension numbers of extensions to the desired
values.
9. Set all extension ports back to INS status.

Q How do I change a feature number?

A • Perform the following steps:
1. Open the 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering
Plan—Main screen and navigate to the Features tab.
2. Change the value in the Dial cell of the desired feature.
3. Click Apply.

Q I cannot change a feature number.

A • It is not possible to use the same number for 2 items.
The number you are trying to store cannot be used if it is already being used by:
• A feature number
• An extension
• A Dial setting (see 17.1 PBX Configuration—[9-1] Private Network—TIE
Table)
• Quick Dialling (see 10.6.2 PBX Configuration—[2-6-2] System—Numbering
Plan—Quick Dial)
In any of these cases, choose another number.

Q How do I change the code used to access another PBX?

A • Perform the following steps:
1. Open the 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering
Plan—Main screen.
2. Select the Other PBX Extension tab.
3. Change the value in the Dial cell of the desired feature.
4. Click Apply.

Q I cannot change an Other PBX Extension code.

PC Programming Manual 47

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
2.3 Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ)
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

A • It is not possible to use the same number for 2 items.

The number you are trying to store cannot be used if it is already being used by:
• A feature number
• An extension
• A Dial setting (see 17.1 PBX Configuration—[9-1] Private Network—TIE
Table)
• Quick Dialling (see 10.6.2 PBX Configuration—[2-6-2] System—Numbering
Plan—Quick Dial)
In any of these cases, choose another number.

Q I cannot change a feature number on the B/NA DND Call Feature screen.
A • The number you are trying to store is already being used by another call feature.
Please choose a different number.

Q How do I prevent extension numbers being automatically assigned to a newly

installed card?
A • Change New Card Installation—Automatic Extension Number Set for
Extension Card in the 9.36 PBX Configuration—[1-3] Configuration—Option
screen from "Enable" to "Disable".

Saving Modified Data

Q Modified settings have not been updated in the PBX.
A • Click Apply or OK in the main screen.

Q If I reset the PBX directly after modifying settings, the modified settings are not
updated in the PBX.
A • When you click Apply, the settings are updated in the PBX, but are not yet saved to
the System Memory. If system data is not saved to the System Memory, the PBX will
restore the data that was last saved to the card in the event that the PBX is reset, or
power is turned off and back on again.
Therefore, before resetting the PBX, click the button on the Home screen to save
the system data to the System Memory. Also, when you finish a programming session,
be sure to click the button to logout and save the system data to the System
Memory.

Q After reinitialising the PBX, I restored system data from a previous backup.
However, some of the settings have not been restored to their previous values.
A • The following setting data is not saved to the System Memory, so will be deleted when
the PBX is initialised. This data is stored in the PBX’s battery backup memory.
• Advice of Charge (AOC)
• Hospitality guest billing data
• Timed Reminder
• ICD Group login status
(All extensions are set to Login by default.)
• Remote Extension Dial Lock

48 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 2.3 Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ)
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Setting Features
Q How do I change the dialling mode of an analogue trunk?
A • From the 9.24 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property -
LCO Port screen, change the Dialling Mode setting of the target port to "DTMF"
or "Pulse", as required.

Q How do I set disconnect detection (CPC Detection) for an analogue trunk?

A • From the 9.24 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property -
LCO Port screen, modify the CPC Signal Detection Time—Outgoing,
Incoming setting of the target port.
The required value varies by carrier. Transmission and reception can be set
separately.

Q What settings do I change to enable use of an extension ISDN telephone?

A • From the 9.26 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property -
BRI Port screen, set the Port Type of the port you want to use to "EXT".

Q How do I connect to another PBX using QSIG?

A • From the 9.26 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property -
BRI Port or 9.27 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property
- PRI Port screen, set the Port Type of the port you want to use to either
"QSIG-Slave" or "QSIG-Master".

Q How do I edit a Class of Service, or create a new Class of Service?

A • Class of Service feature restrictions can be set from the 10.7.1 PBX
Configuration—[2-7-1] System—Class of Service—COS Settings screen.

Q How do I restrict calls between 2 extensions?

A • Calls between extensions can be restricted from the 10.7.3 PBX
Configuration—[2-7-3] System—Class of Service—Internal Call Block screen.
Click in the relevant cells to select the COS levels whose extensions are blocked from
calling each other.

Q How do I restrict trunk calls made by extensions?

A • Trunk calls made by extensions can be restricted from the 10.7.2 PBX
Configuration—[2-7-2] System—Class of Service—External Call Block screen.
Click in the relevant cells to select the trunk groups that cannot be used by extensions
associated with a particular COS in each time mode.
To prevent extensions associated with a COS from making trunk calls, set all trunk
groups for that COS to "Block" (blue).

Q How do I modify the hold operation for SLTs?

A • It is possible to choose how to hold a line and transfer a call with an SLT using the
SLT—SLT Hold Mode option on the 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9]
System—System Options screen.
For more details, see "2.13.1 Call Hold" of the Feature Guide.

PC Programming Manual 49

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
2.3 Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ)
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Q How do I set up an Incoming Call Distribution (ICD) group to receive trunk calls
directly?
A • Perform the following steps:
1. On the 11.5.1 PBX Configuration—[3-5-1] Group—Incoming Call Distribution
Group—Group Settings screen, enter the floating extension number you chose
for the ICD group in the Floating Extension Number cell.
2. Click Apply.
3. On the 11.5.1.1 PBX Configuration—[3-5-1] Group—Incoming Call
Distribution Group—Group Settings—Member List screen, select the ICD
group you created from the ICD Group No. drop-down list.
4. Enter the extension numbers of member extensions in the Extension
Number column.
5. Click Apply.
6. On the DIL tab of the 18.2 PBX Configuration—[10-2] CO & Incoming
Call—DIL Table & Port Settings screen, enter the floating extension number of
the ICD group as the DIL Destination—Day, Lunch, Break, Night of each time
mode.
7. Modify other settings as required from the Group—Incoming Call Distribution
Group submenu.

Q How do I set the queuing operation for an Incoming Call Distribution group?
A • Perform the following steps:
1. On the 11.5.2 PBX Configuration—[3-5-2] Group—Incoming Call Distribution
Group—Queuing Time Table screen, set the actions as required for each
queuing table.
2. On the 11.5.1 PBX Configuration—[3-5-1] Group—Incoming Call Distribution
Group—Group Settings screen, from the Queuing Time Table tab, select the
number of the Queuing Time Table to use in each time mode.

Q How do I add an extension as a member of an Incoming Call Distribution (ICD)

group?
A • Perform the following steps:
1. On the 11.5.1.1 PBX Configuration—[3-5-1] Group—Incoming Call
Distribution Group—Group Settings—Member List screen, from the ICD
Group No. drop-down list, select the group you want to modify.
The ICD group must have an extension number set.
2. Enter the extension number of the extension you want to add in a blank cell of the
Extension Number column.
3. Set Delayed Ring as necessary.
4. Click Apply.
Note that it is necessary to set the extension number of the ICD group in advance.

Q I have set FWD through system programming, but calls are still not being forwarded.
A • Perform the following steps:
1. Check that the Forward / DND settings of the target extension on the 12.1.2 PBX
Configuration—[4-1-2] Extension—Wired Extension—FWD/DND or
12.2.2 PBX Configuration—[4-2-2] Extension—Portable Station—FWD/
DND screen are set to one of the forwarding settings.
2. Create a FWD button on the target extension if one does not already exist.
3. Press the FWD button so that it changes to FWD status.

50 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Section 3
Web Maintenance Console Home Screen

This section explains how to setup the main PBX and

other connected PBXs from the Home Screen of Web
Maintenance Console.

PC Programming Manual 51

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
3.1 Home Screen
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

3.1 Home Screen

When you log in to Web Maintenance Console, the home screen is displayed. For information about connecting
to Web Maintenance Console and logging in, see 1.2.1 Starting Web Maintenance Console.
The home screen of Web Maintenance Console is divided into several areas, as shown below:

2
1 3

1. Logged in Account Level

The logged in account level is displayed.
2. Menu Buttons
Provides access to the three main components of Web Maintenance Console:

Button Description

Clicking this button will load the Home Screen. From the Home Screen, you can:
• View the Main unit configuration and the status of cards.
For more information, see 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot.

Home Screen
Clicking this button will display the Maintenance Screen tree view items. From the
Maintenance Screen, you can:
• Check the status and equipment of the PBX
• Backup or update PBX system files
• Use tools and reports to monitor and analyse system usage
Maintenance For more information, see Maintenance Screen Tree View Items below.
Screen

52 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 3.1 Home Screen
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Button Description

Clicking this button will display the Setup Screen tree view items. From the Setup
Screen, you can:
• Configure PBX hardware and virtual cards
• Programme settings for extensions and call handling
• Configure network settings and auxiliary PBX functions
Setup Screen
• Configure the Unified Messaging (UM) system
For more information, see Setup Screen Tree View Items below.

3. Web Maintenance Console Features

Clicking these buttons provides features for Web Maintenance Console, as follows:

Button Description

Clicking this button will save any changes made to settings to the System Memory.
Programming changes that are not saved will be lost if the PBX is reset or is turned
off. Changes may also be lost if Web Maintenance Console is suddenly terminated
Save Data or the PC running Web Maintenance Console loses power unexpectedly. Be sure to
save the data periodically while programming, especially during long programming
sessions.
Clicking this button displays the Web Maintenance Console software version,
copyright notices, and licences.

System Note
Information Licence information is not displayed when programming in Off-line mode.

Clicking this button will save any programming changes to the PBX’s System Memory
and log you out of Web Maintenance Console. For more information, see
2.2 Logout.
Logout
Clicking this button will display the Extension List View in a separate window. For
details, see 6.5 Tool—Extension List View.

Extension
List View

PC Programming Manual 53

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
3.1 Home Screen
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Button Description

Clicking this button will switch the tab display. There are two types of tab display, Tab
Mode and Single Mode. When Tab Mode is used, items clicked in the tree are
displayed in new tabs. When Single Mode is used, the current tab displays the clicked
item.

Note
Tab • When the Menu button is clicked or when you log out in Tab Mode, all child
Selection tabs are closed.
• When a parent tab is closed, all of its child tabs are closed.
• When Tab Mode is used:
– Up to 10 tabs can be opened including the parent tab.
– Tabs are displayed according to the tab settings of the browser*1 used.
*1
To enable Tab Mode for Internet Explorer, select Tools ® Internet Options from the menu bar,
open the General tab and under Tabs, and then click Settings.
In the displayed window, check “Always switch to new tabs when they are created”, and then
select “Always open pop-ups in a new tab”.

Notice
Do not reload the web page during in Tab Mode. Doing so will close all child tabs.

4. Tree View
When the Maintenance Screen or Setup Screen is selected, the tree view is displayed. The tree view is
used to display PBX setting items. Setting items are listed in categories, and by clicking items in the tree,
setting items are displayed to the right in the settings programming area. Some tree items have
sub-categories with additional options and settings. Clicking a sub-category will open an additional layer
of settings. Below is a summary of the tree view menu items for the Setup Screen and the Maintenance
Screen.

Maintenance Screen Tree View Items

Item Primary Functions

Status • Check the status of the PBX’s system hardware

• Check the status of PBX equipment (PSs, CSs, etc.)
• Check the status of extensions used by the Unified Messaging system
For details, see Section 4 Status.
System Control • Download and update PBX software files
• Manage music on hold (MOH) data
• Reset or shutdown the system
For details, see Section 5 System Control.
Tool • Backup system data to a USB memory device
• View a list of PBX extensions
• Import and export PBX settings and user information
• Backup or restore Unified Messaging data
For details, see Section 6 Tool.

54 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 3.1 Home Screen
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Item Primary Functions

Utility • Perform tests for PBX cards and network connections

• Transfer files between the PBX and a connected PC
• View reports, error logs, event logs, and programme update logs
• Monitor and trace PBX communications and protocols
• Manage activation keys
For details, see Section 7 Utility.

Setup Screen Tree View Items

Item Primary Functions

Users • Manage, view, and add PBX user profiles and account information
For details, see Section 8 Users.
PBX Configuration • Configure PBX hardware settings for cards, equipment, and networking
• Configure network-wide programming such as BGM and Class of Service
• Configure dialling features, call routing, and incoming call settings
• Configure call logging (SMDR) and other PBX maintenance items
For details, see Section 9 PBX Configuration—[1] Configuration to
Section 19 PBX Configuration—[11] Maintenance.
UM Configuration • Configure Unified Messaging mailboxes and voice mail subscriber settings
• Configure service settings and system parameters
• Configure hardware options
For details, see Section 20 UM Configuration—[1] Mailbox Settings to
Section 26 UM Configuration—[7] System Security.
Network Service • Configure server and client features for the PBX
• Configure connections settings and network security
For details, see Section 27 Network Service.

Standard Buttons
There are standard buttons that are displayed on many screens within the Maintenance Console.
The standard buttons are as follows:

Button Function

OK Temporarily implements changes to the system’s memory (DRAM)

and closes the current screen.
Cancel Abandons changes and closes the current screen.
Apply Temporarily implements changes to the system’s memory (DRAM)
and remains on the same screen.

Copying and Pasting Data

Many setting items in Web Maintenance Console can be copied and pasted to other items on the same screen.
When the icon is displayed, clicking it will open a menu where you can specify the copy source and the
paste destinations.

PC Programming Manual 55

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
3.1 Home Screen
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

1. On a programming screen, click . The copy window will be displayed.

Note
The icon may not be displayed for some programming screens.
2. Select the copy source from the Copy From drop-down menu.
3. In Copy To, select one or more paste destinations. Hold down the "Ctrl" key and click to select destinations
one at a time, or hold down the "Shift" key and click to select a range of destinations.
4. In Items, select one or more items to copy from the source selected in Copy From. Hold down the "Ctrl"
key and click to select items one at a time, or hold down the "Shift" key and click to select a range of items.
5. Click Copy. The programming item(s) selected in Items for the copy source specified in Copy From will
be copied to the destination(s) specified in Copy To.

Individual items can also be copied and pasted in a manner similar to other software programmes. Press
"Ctrl"+"c" to copy a highlighted (orange-coloured) programming item entry, select a target cell by pressing the
keyboard arrow keys, and then press "Ctrl"+"v" to paste the copied information to the selected cell.

56 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Section 4
Status

This section serves as reference operating instructions

for the Status menu of the Maintenance screen of Web
Maintenance Console.

PC Programming Manual 57

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
4.1.1 Status—Equipment Status—UPS
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

4.1 Status—Equipment Status

4.1.1 Status—Equipment Status—UPS

Information is provided about the status of the UPS device and the connection to the PBX
• UPS Connection Status
Displays if the UPS system is connected or not connected. If a UPS system is connected, the information
below will be displayed for the UPS system.
• Battery Voltage (V)
The voltage of the UPS battery is displayed (0-240 V).
• Battery Charge Percentage (%)
The remaining charge of the UPS battery is displayed (percentage value).
• Power Supply
Displays the usage status of the UPS (if the UPS is engaged in supplying power to the PBX).
• UPS Shutdown Conditions - Battery level
From the drop-down list, select the amount of remaining battery level for when to initiate PBX shutdown
procedures.

58 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 4.1.2 Status—Equipment Status—CS Information
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

4.1.2 Status—Equipment Status—CS Information

Displays information stored by the PBX regarding each Cell Station (CS).
This option is only available for the Installer level account in On-line mode and requires that the target
V-IPCS4 card be set to INS status.

The displayed items are as follows:

Item Description

Shelf Number of the shelf

Slot Number of the slot
Port Number of the port
CS Name Name of the attached CS
Status Service status of the attached CS: INS, OUS, or FAULT.
If the status is FAULT, subsequent data items for that port will be left
blank.
Version Version number of the programme file stored in the CS
Revision Revision number of the programme file stored in the CS
CSID 12-digit ID number of the CS
Path Number of the wireless extension currently using each path. In the case
of a group, several extensions may be using the same floating extension
number.
When an extension number is not registered, the display shows
"OFF". The number of paths that can be used varies for each CS model.
For more details, see the documentation for your CS.
Group Call Number of PSs registered to the attached CS that are members of a PS
Ring Group.

To view CS information
1. From the Target CS I/F Shelf-Slot No. drop-down list, select the target shelf and slot.
• To display information on a single card, select the shelf number, slot number and name of that card.
• To display information on all matching cards, select "All".
2. From the Interval Timer drop-down list, select the number of seconds between each automatic screen
refresh.
3. If you want to save the CS information, click Capture.
a. Create a file for saving the data.
b. Click Start.
c. Click Close.
4. Click Start to begin monitoring.
Monitoring will be performed and the screen will refresh according to the interval specified.
5. Click Stop to end monitoring.
6. If you started to save the CS information in step 3, click Capture, then click Stop to record the information
to the specified file.
7. Click Close to return to the main screen.

PC Programming Manual 59

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
4.1.3 Status—Equipment Status—PS Information
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

4.1.3 Status—Equipment Status—PS Information

Displays Portable Station (PS) registration information, including the associated Cell Station (CS).
This option is only available for the Installer level account in On-line mode.

The displayed items are as follows:

Item Description

PS No. PS location number.

Only registered PSs will be displayed.
Extension Number Extension number of the PS.
Location Slot Slot number of the CS that the PS is registered with.
Location Port Port number of the CS that the PS is registered with.
Model Name*1 Model name of the PS.
Version*1 Software version of the PS.

*1
This information is displayed for certain PSs only. For more information, refer to the documentation for your PS.

60 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 4.1.4 Status—Equipment Status—UM Port status
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

4.1.4 Status—Equipment Status—UM Port status

The UM Port status screen displays each port’s status and number for the Unified Messaging system. The
screen will be updated every 30 seconds. Each port’s status will be displayed in one of the following ways:
• Online (Ready): The port is ready to be used.
• Incoming Call: The port is handling an incoming call.
• Outgoing Call: An outgoing service is being processed.
• Error Occurred: An error has been detected.
• Off Line: The port is offline.
This screen can be accessed only in On-line mode.

PC Programming Manual 61

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
4.1.5 Status—Equipment Status—USB
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

4.1.5 Status—Equipment Status—USB

USB Mount Status indicates if a USB memory device is connected to the PBX. There is also an Unmount
button.
• Mounted: A USB memory device is connected to the PBX. Before removing the USB memory device from
the PBX, click Unmount.

Note
If a mounted memory device is removed from the PBX without first clicking Unmount, the data on the
USB memory device may be damaged.
• None: No USB memory device is detected by the PBX.
This screen can be accessed only in On-line mode.

62 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Section 5
System Control

This section serves as reference operating instructions

for the System Control menu of the Maintenance screen
when programming using Web Maintenance Console.

PC Programming Manual 63

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
5.1 System Control—Program Update
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

5.1 System Control—Program Update

The programme files for the following hardware components can be updated with the Program Update feature.
Each file must be named as indicated in the table to be recognised by the PBX.

Hardware that can be updated using Program Update

Programme Type Target of Update File Name

MPR Programme KX-NS500 Mother Board PFMPR

Expansion Unit KX-NS520 Mother Board PEXPS
Programme
LPR Programmes DHLC/DLC PDHLC2
PT Programmes KX-NT265 PNT265A
KX-NT343, KX-NT346, KX-NT343 PNT300
KX-NT321 PNT321
KX-UT133, KX-UT136 PUT13X
KX-UT113, KX-UT123 PUT1XX
KX-NT511 PNT511
KX-NT543, KX-NT546 PNT540
KX-NT551, KX-NT553, KX-NT556 PNT550
KX-NT560 PNT560
KX-UT248 PUT248
KX-UT670 PUT670
Firmware for PFPGA PFPGA
KX-NS500
PARMIRNR PARMIRNR
PARMVDNR PARMVDNR
PARMIREP PARMIREP
PARMVDEP PARMVDEP
PC300NR PC300NR
PC300EP PC300EP
PC300DAG PC300DAG

64 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 5.1 System Control—Program Update
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Programme Type Target of Update File Name

CS Programmes (PS CS using a DHLC/DLC card for DECT Portable PDCSDECT

Programmes) Station
CS using a DHLC/DLC card for 2.4 GHz Portable PDCS24G
Station
High-density CS for DECT Portable Station PHCSDECT
IP-CS for DECT Portable Station PICSDCT
TCAx85 + IP-CS (KX-NS0154)*1 PNS0154

*1
Software updates for PSs (e.g., KX-TCA185) are bundled with software updates for an IP-CS (KX-NS0154 only).

PC Programming Manual 65

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
5.1.1 System Control—Program Update—Download Program File
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

5.1.1 System Control—Program Update—Download Program File

Software updates for PBX hardware components can be downloaded to the PBX. Manual and automatic
methods are available.
Programme downloading can be performed only in On-line mode.

Note
• When using an FTP server with this feature, the programme files to be downloaded to the PBX must
be named on the FTP server in a specific way that includes the version number.
Example: "PNT300_xxx_xxx_xxx"
("xxx_xxx_xxx" is the version number.)

Manual
Using manual operations, the location of updated PBX software is specified and downloaded to the Main unit.
To download programme files manually
1. In Location of program files, specify the location of the updated files from the Look in drop-down list.
The choices are as follows:
• Local PC
Click Browse and specify the location of the updated programme files stored on the PC logged in to
Web Maintenance Console.
• USB Memory
If a USB memory device is inserted into the PBX, the contents of the following directory on the device
will be checked for updated files:
/private/meigroup/psn/ippbx/update
• FTP Server
The PBX connects to the specified FTP server and checks for updated files. Specify an FTP server
from the FTP connection name drop-down list, and specify the number of attempts to connect to the
FTP server in No. of retries.
To specify a new FTP site, see 27.3.1 Network Service—[3-1] Client Feature—FTP.
• NAS
Specify the location of the updated programme files stored on a directory of the NAS to Web
Maintenance Console.
2. Specify which PBX programme files will be automatically downloaded by checking the boxes next to each
hardware item.
3. For FTP Server only
Click Check to confirm the connection to the FTP server. If a connection is established, the Execute button
will become active.
4. Click Execute, and then click OK on the confirmation message that appears. When the transfer is complete,
click OK.

Note
• If downloading cannot be completed within 10 minutes (due to slow network speeds or other connection
problems), the download operation will be cancelled.

Automatic
The Main unit is set to automatically check an FTP server for updated programme files. If an update is available,
the Main unit will download the data.
To download programme files automatically
1. For Download Server, select an FTP site.
To specify a new FTP site, see 27.3.1 Network Service—[3-1] Client Feature—FTP.
2. For Download mode, select one of the following:
• None: No actions are taken (automatic downloading is disabled).

66 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 5.1.1 System Control—Program Update—Download Program File
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

• Check only: The specified download server is checked at the specified times. If an e-mail is entered
in Email notification, an e-mail notification is sent when updated files have been discovered.

Note
If Check only is selected, updated files will have to be downloaded manually (see the manual
procedure above).
• Download automatically: The specified download server is checked at the specified times. If updated
files are discovered, they will be downloaded automatically to the PBX. If an e-mail is entered in Email
notification, an e-mail notification is sent when updated files have been downloaded.
3. In Check time and date, specify when the PBX will contact the server to check for updates. The check
can be performed on a daily or weekly basis.
4. In Email notification specify up to 2 e-mail addresses that will receive an e-mail notification when updated
files have been discovered or when updated files have been downloaded.

Note
If Download automatically is not selected in step 2, specify at least one e-mail address so that an
administrator will be notified when updated files have been discovered.
5. To begin automatic checking for updates according to Check time and date, click Execute.
6. The PBX will now periodically perform checks and downloads as specified in the settings. Click Download
Cancel on this screen to stop automatic programme updates.

Note
When the system is downloading data from an FTP server, if downloading cannot be completed within 10
minutes (due to slow network speeds or other connection problems), the download operation will be
cancelled.

PC Programming Manual 67

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
5.1.2 System Control—Program Update—Update Program File
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

5.1.2 System Control—Program Update—Update Program File

Once updated programme files have been downloaded and are stored on a PBX, they can be used to update
the system files of the PBX. The update process can be set to be automatically performed at a specified time,
or the update process can be carried out manually.
You must be connected to the PBX in On-line mode to update programme files.

Note
• Before updating programme files, we strongly recommend making a backup of all system files. For
details, refer to the following:
– 6.1 Tool—System Data Backup
– 6.9 Tool—UM Data Backup
• Do not upgrade KX-UT series SIP phones at the same time as the Main unit.
• When upgrading the system software to version 004.1xxxx from an older version, the following SRAM
data is cleared.
– Timed Reminder
– Remote Station Lock Status
– Room Status
– Login/Logout Status
– SMDR
– Billing Information
– Hotel Check In/Check Out
– Hotel Specifications
Save SRAM data before upgrading the firmware.
When you upgrade the software, a message will be shown. Then, you can save the following SRAM
data into the Storage Memory Card as "smdrdata.zip".
– SMDR
– Billing Information
– Hotel Specifications
• The updated PBX resets when the update is complete.
• Once the update starts, the STATUS LED on the front of the PBX flashes in green (120 times per
minute) until shutdown.

For Program Update Type, select Immediately or Timed Update.

Immediately (Manual update)

Specify which cards or devices to update, and perform the update immediately.
1. In Email notification, specify up to 2 e-mail addresses that will receive a notification when programme
files have been updated.
2. Updated programme files that can be used to update cards or devices installed in the system are listed in
Available Program File(s). In Select the target to update, specify which cards or devices will be updated
using the files listed by checking the boxes next to each item.

Note
• When selecting an item, a warning message may be displayed. Confirm the contents of the warning,
and then click OK to continue.
• If you are updating the software for a PS, select the port of an IP-CS (e.g., KX-NS0154) that
supports this feature. For details about which PSs can be updated, see 5.1.3 System
Control—Program Update—Plug and Update.
3. Click Apply.
4. Click Execute.
The programme files are updated to the PBX.

68 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 5.1.2 System Control—Program Update—Update Program File
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Timed Update (Automatic update)

Specify which cards or devices to update and a time to execute the update.
1. In Email notification, specify up to 2 e-mail addresses that will receive a notification when programme
files have been updated.
2. Updated programme files that can be used to update cards or devices installed in the system are listed in
Available Program File(s). In Select the target to update, specify which cards or devices will be updated
using the files listed by checking the boxes next to each item.

Note
When selecting an item, a warning message may be displayed. Confirm the contents of the warning,
and then click OK to continue.
3. In Update Time, specify the time of day when the update will be executed.
4. Click Apply.
5. Click Execute.
The programme files will be updated to the PBX at the specified time.

Note
• For CS programme files, in order for CS cards to be displayed on this screen, the cards must be set
to INS, and the ports of the card must be set to OUS.

PC Programming Manual 69

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
5.1.3 System Control—Program Update—Plug and Update
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

5.1.3 System Control—Program Update—Plug and Update

The Plug and Update feature allows IP-PTs, IP-CSs, and certain PSs to be automatically updated to the latest
software version when they are registered to the PBX. When Plug and Update is enabled, the version number
of the system software stored on the Main unit is compared to the system software currently in the device, after
the device has been registered to the PBX. If the software on the Main unit is newer, it is downloaded to the
device. By default, Plug and Update is set to Off for all device types.
1. For each device type, select On for the features you want to enable.
• Plug & Update for IP-PT/IP-CS: Enable Plug and Update for IP-PTs and IP-CSs.
• Plug & Update for TCAx85: Enable Plug and Update for supported PSs.
• Manual Update for TCAx85: Enable manual updates for supported PSs.
2. Click OK.
Note
• Plug & Update for TCAx85 and Manual Update for TCAx85 cannot be set to enable at the same
time.
• The following PSs support this feature:
• KX-TCA185
• KX-TCA285
• KX-TCA385

70 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 5.2.1 System Control—MOH—Install
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

5.2 System Control—MOH

5.2.1 System Control—MOH—Install

Sound files on the programmer’s PC can be installed to each PBX for use as Music on Hold (MOH).
This screen can be accessed only in On-line mode.
1. Click Browse and select a WAV file to install as an MOH file. Only one file may be installed at a time.
2. As uploading the file to the PBX may require some time, a time can be set in Time Set.
3. In BGM No., specify which BGM number the MOH file will occupy.
4. Click Execute to confirm the settings. If "Now" is set for Time Set, the installation will begin at this time.
Note
• Only WAV files can be installed, and file names must not exceed 57 characters in length (including the
file extension ".wav"). Only use ASCII characters in file names.
• Files may not be larger than 40 MB in size.
• User (User) level accounts cannot perform this procedure.
• A WAV file is pre-installed as BGM 1. When a new WAV file is installed to BGM 1, the pre-installed file
will be overwritten. If you need the pre-installed file in the future, backup the file before installing a new
file. For details, see 5.2.3 System Control—MOH—Status / Backup.

PC Programming Manual 71

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
5.2.2 System Control—MOH—Delete
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

5.2.2 System Control—MOH—Delete

MOH files that are occupying BGM numbers can be deleted.
This screen can be accessed only in On-line mode.
1. In BGM No., specify the BGM numbers to delete MOH files from. Specify "All" to delete the data saved in
all BGM numbers.
2. Click Execute to delete the files of the specified BGM numbers.
Note
• User (User) level accounts cannot perform this procedure.

72 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 5.2.3 System Control—MOH—Status / Backup
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

5.2.3 System Control—MOH—Status / Backup

MOH files stored on a PBX can be downloaded to the user’s PC.
This screen can be accessed only in On-line mode.
1. The MOH files saved to the PBX will be listed. Click Backup for the file you would like to back up. One file
can be backed up at a time.
2. A save file dialogue will appear. Specify the directory on the PC to back up the file to.
3. Click OK when finished.
Note
• Remained Capacity Time indicates the amount of time available for new MOH files to be added. The
amount of time of any MOH files scheduled to be uploaded in 5.2.1 System
Control—MOH—Install is not reflected in this value.
• User (User) level accounts cannot perform this procedure.

PC Programming Manual 73

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
5.3 System Control—System Reset
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

5.3 System Control—System Reset

When programming changes or other changes to PBX settings require a system reset, this command allows
a reset to be performed remotely from Web Maintenance Console.
When the system is reset, any settings not saved to the System Memory are lost. A backup should be performed
before the reset to ensure no data is lost. However, a backup should not be performed if settings or data have
recently been imported into the system, because performing a backup would overwrite the imported data with
the current PBX settings.
This screen can be accessed only in On-line mode.

[Manual System Reset]

1. Select the System Reset tab.
2. Confirm the contents of the displayed warning message.
3. Click Backup or Skip according to the system’s status:
• Backup: Click to backup system settings. The system will be reset after the backup has been
performed.
• Skip: The system is reset without performing a backup.

If you are logged in to the PBX that is reset using this command, it is necessary to re-log in to Web Maintenance
Console to continue programming.

[System Reset by Timed Schedule]

1. Select the Timed Reset tab.
2. Select the Reset Mode (None, One Time, Daily).
3. Set the Reset Time (00:00-23:59).
4. Click Apply or OK to set the system reset.
The PBX will have its system reset at the specified mode and reset time, according to the above settings.

74 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 5.4 System Control—System Shutdown
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

5.4 System Control—System Shutdown

In order to turn off the power to a PBX, it must first be issued a shutdown command using Web Maintenance
Console. Follow the procedure below to prepare a PBX for system shutdown.
When the system is shut down, any settings not saved to the System Memory are lost. A backup should be
performed before the shutdown to ensure no data is lost. However, a backup should not be performed if settings
or data have recently been imported into the system, because performing a backup would overwrite the
imported data with the current PBX settings.
This screen can be accessed only in On-line mode.
1. Confirm the contents of the displayed warning message.
2. Click Backup or Skip according to the system’s status:
• Backup: Click to backup system settings. The system will prepare for shutdown after the backup has
been performed.
• Skip: The system is prepared for shutdown without performing a backup.
3. The STATUS LED on the front of the PBX will flash amber. When shutdown preparations are completed,
the STATUS LED will stop flashing and remain a solid amber. Once the STATUS LED stops flashing, you
may turn off the power switch on the back of the PBX.

PC Programming Manual 75

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
5.4 System Control—System Shutdown
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

76 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Section 6
Tool

This section serves as reference for the Tool menu of

the Maintenance screen of Web Maintenance Console.

PC Programming Manual 77

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
6.1.1 Tool—System Data Backup—Backup to USB
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

6.1 Tool—System Data Backup

6.1.1 Tool—System Data Backup—Backup to USB

A PBX’s system data can be backed up to a USB memory device inserted into the PBX’s USB port. At a later
time, the USB memory device can be used to restore the backed up system data to a PBX.
This screen can be accessed only in On-line mode.

To back up the system data to a USB memory device

1. Insert a USB memory device into the USB port of the PBX.
Note
• To check the inserted USB memory’s status, see 4.1.5 Status—Equipment Status—USB.
• The USB memory device must be compatible for use with the PBX. For details, refer to
"4.10 Connection of Peripherals—USB Interface for USB Memory Device—Using a USB memory
device" in the Installation Manual.
2. Select the system data items to backup.
• System Data
System data includes programming information for the PBX, including extension and network
configuration information.
• MOH + OGM
MOH (Music on Hold) and OGM (Outgoing Message) sound files stored on the PBX are backed up.
• Activation Key
Activation key files that were installed on the PBX are backed up.
Any or all of the above items may be selected. However, the system cannot be restored unless System
Data is specified.
3. Click Execute to back up the specified files. If backup data already exists on the USB memory device, it
will be deleted. A confirmation message will be displayed. Click Continue.
4. A time estimation for the backup will be displayed. Click Continue.
5. A progress bar is displayed to indicate the progress of the backup. A message will be displayed when the
backup is finished. Click OK.

Note
• Unified Messaging (UM) data must be backed up using a separate process. See 6.9 Tool—UM Data
Backup.
• Use a USB memory device with a capacity of at least 512 MB. During the backup process, if an error
message is displayed indicating there is not enough free memory space on the USB memory device,
delete other unnecessary files on the USB memory device, or use a USB memory device with a larger
capacity.
• The following characters cannot be used in the names of the backup files: open bracket, close bracket,
space, forward slash ("/"), period ("."), or 0 (zero).

Restoring backed up data from a USB memory device to a PBX

Follow the procedure below to restore the backed up data to a PBX.

Note
The restoration process first requires an initialisation of the PBX, which returns the PBX to its factory default
state. Under the following conditions, restoration may not be possible, even though the PBX has been
initialised.
• The USB memory device hardware is faulty.
• The data on the USB memory device has become corrupted.

78 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 6.1.2 Tool—System Data Backup—Backup to NAS
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

• The USB memory device is removed from the USB port of the PBX during the restoration process.
• The following characters cannot be used in the names of the backup files: open bracket, close bracket,
space, forward slash ("/"), period ("."), or 0 (zero).
To minimise the potential of a failed backup, connect the USB memory device to a PC to confirm the USB
memory device is operational and that the backup data is intact before starting this restore process.
1. The PBX must be in a powered-off state.
2. Insert the USB memory device with the backup data into the USB port of the PBX.
3. Set the PBX’s System Mode Switch to the "SYSTEM INITIALIZE" position.
4. Turn on the PBX’s power switch. The STATUS indicator will flash green. Slide the System Mode Switch
back to the "NORMAL" position. The restore process will begin and the STATUS indicator will flash rapidly.
5. When the restoration process is completed, the PBX will restart automatically.

6.1.2 Tool—System Data Backup—Backup to NAS

A PBX’s system data can be backed up to a NAS (Network Attached Storage) in the PBX’s LAN network.
This screen can be accessed only in On-line mode.

To back up the system data to a NAS

1. Connect a NAS and PBX.
Set the parameters necessary to connect the NAS to the PBX (IP address of the NAS, etc.), and then
confirm the connection. See 27.4.2 Network Service—[4-2] Other—NAS.
2. Select the system data items to backup.
• System Data
System data includes programming information for the PBX, including extension and network
configuration information.
• MOH + OGM
MOH (Music on Hold) and OGM (Outgoing Message) sound files stored on the PBX are backed up.
3. Click Execute to back up the specified files. If backup data already exists on the NAS, it will be deleted. A
confirmation message will be displayed. Click Continue.
4. A progress bar is displayed to indicate the progress of the backup. A message will be displayed when the
backup is finished. Click OK.

Note
• Unified Messaging (UM) data must be backed up using a separate process. See 6.9 Tool—UM Data
Backup.
• Data backed up from the PBX to a NAS cannot be restored directly from the NAS to the PBX. The
backup data must be copied from the NAS to a local PC. Then the data can be restored from the local
PC to the PBX.
• The following characters cannot be used in the names of the backup files: open bracket, close bracket,
space, forward slash ("/"), period ("."), or 0 (zero).
• When using a NAS, make sure there is sufficient network bandwidth.

PC Programming Manual References

27.4.2 Network Service—[4-2] Other—NAS

PC Programming Manual 79

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
6.2 Tool—BRI Automatic Configuration
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

6.2 Tool—BRI Automatic Configuration

Automatically configures the network settings of the BRI card.
This option is only available at Installer level in On-line mode.
This tool automatically inputs values into the fields L1 Mode, L2 Mode, Access Mode, and TEI
Mode, on the Network tab of the 9.26 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property -
BRI Port screen.

Note
• To use this tool, the card to be configured must be pre-set to OUS status. For more details, see
2.1.5 Card Status.
• At any time on this screen, you can click Cancel to return to the previous screen without saving.

To configure the BRI card

1. In Check, select the card, and then click OK.
2. Click Execute.
The results of the automatic configuration will be displayed.
3. Click the Check Box cell for the ports that have been configured.
4. Click to Data Apply save these results to the BRI card.

80 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 6.3 Tool—NDSS Link Data Clear
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

6.3 Tool—NDSS Link Data Clear

Clears NDSS Link Data stored in the connected PBX. While this tool clears both monitor extension and
monitored extension data, it only clears it at the connected PBX. To clear this data at other PBXs in the QSIG
network, it is necessary to run this tool at those PBXs.
This screen can be accessed only in On-line mode.

To clear the NDSS Link Data

When this tree menu item is selected, a confirmation screen will be displayed.
• Click OK to clear the data.
• Click Cancel to keep the data, and close the screen.

PC Programming Manual 81

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
6.4 Tool—Call Pickup for My Group
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

6.4 Tool—Call Pickup for My Group

Allows you to automatically configure settings in 10.6.2 PBX Configuration—[2-6-2] System—Numbering
Plan—Quick Dial and 12.1.3 PBX Configuration—[4-1-3] Extension—Wired Extension—Speed Dial so
that users can answer calls to their Call Pickup Group by pressing " 0".

To activate this tool

1. When this tree menu item is selected, a confirmation screen will be displayed.
2. Click Yes.
The Group Call Pickup feature number (default: 40) + the extension user group number of the extension
is assigned to first personal speed dial.

Note
This tool can only be activated if all of the following conditions are met:
– The first Quick Dial setting is empty or is already set to " 0".
– " 0" is not used for another feature number.
– The Group Call Pickup feature number has been assigned.
– The Personal Speed Dialling feature number has been assigned.
– The extension user group number does not exceed the highest Call Pickup Group number.

82 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 6.5 Tool—Extension List View
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

6.5 Tool—Extension List View

Displays a list of all programmed extension numbers and types. It is possible to sort the information according
to Extension Number, Type, Extension Name, Shelf, Slot, or Port. There is also a key-word searching feature.

The types that can be displayed are as follows:

Type Detail

Intercom Wired Extension

Portable Station Wireless Extension (Portable Station)
SIP / IP-PT / S-PS SIP/IP-PT/S-PS Extension
UM / VM Unified Messaging UM Group/VPS Voice Mail
ICD Group Incoming Call Distribution Group
PS Ring Group Portable Station Ring Group
UM Group Unified Messaging UM Group
VM(DPT) Group VM (DPT) Group
VM(DTMF) Group VM (DTMF) Group
Pager External Pager
OGM (DISA) DISA
DSS DSS Console
DPT-I/F CS PT-interface CS
SVM Simplified Voice Message
MODEM MODEM
ISDN Remote ISDN Remote

PC Programming Manual 83

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
6.6 Tool—Import
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

6.6 Tool—Import
Allows several types of system data files or tables to be imported.
Except for Speed Dial and Caller ID, this option is only available at Installer level.
The files from which data can be imported are files that were previously saved at this or another PBX using
the Export tool (see 6.7 Tool—Export), or comma-separated value (CSV) files. Unsupported file types cannot
be opened.
For all tables except ARS - Routing Plan, it is possible to edit the CSV file directly using an appropriate editor,
before importing.

The types of data that can be imported using this tool, and the matching destination fields, are as follows:

Feature - Speed Dial and Caller ID

Data Type Import Destination

System Speed Dialling Number Location

Name Name
CO Line Access Number + Dial
Telephone Number
CLI Destination CLI Destination

Related programming: 14.1 PBX Configuration—[6-1] Feature—System Speed Dial

Note
Imported Speed Dial and Caller ID data can be copied to a specific speed dial destination. The copy range
can be specified by selecting the from/to of the index.

Incoming Call - DDI/DID Table

Data Type Import Destination

Location Location
DDI/DID Number Dial In Number
DDI/DID Name Dial In Name
DDI/DID Destination-Day Destination-Day
DDI/DID Destination-Lunch Destination-Lunch
DDI/DID Destination-Break Destination-Break
DDI/DID Destination-Night Destination-Night
Tenant Number Tenant Number
Service Group No. Group number for VPS answer
VM Trunk Group No. VM Trunk Group No.
CLI Ring for DDI/DID-Day CLI Ring - Day
CLI Ring for DDI/DID-Lunch CLI Ring - Lunch
CLI Ring for DDI/DID-Break CLI Ring - Break
CLI Ring for DDI/DID-Night CLI Ring - Night

84 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 6.6 Tool—Import
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Related programming: 18.3 PBX Configuration—[10-3] CO & Incoming Call—DDI / DID Table

ARS - Leading Digit

Data Type Import Destination

Location Location
Leading Number Leading Digit
Additional Number of Digits Additional Dial Digits
Routing Plan Number Route Plan Number

Related programming: 16.2 PBX Configuration—[8-2] ARS—Leading Number

ARS - Except Code

Data Type Import Destination

Location Location
Leading Number Exception Exception Code

Related programming: 16.6 PBX Configuration—[8-6] ARS—Leading Number Exception

ARS - Routing Plan

Data Type Import Destination

(no fields to select) (no fields to select)

Related programming: 16.3 PBX Configuration—[8-3] ARS—Routing Plan Time

Wired Extension
Data Type Import Destination

No. Location (selected automatically)

Extension Number Extension Number (selected automatically)
Extension Name Extension Name (selected automatically)

Related programming: 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension

Settings

PS Extension
Data Type Import Destination

No. Location (selected automatically)

Extension Number*1 Extension Number (selected automatically)
Extension Name Extension Name (selected automatically)

*1
This data can only be exported, and cannot be imported.

Related programming: 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension

Settings

PC Programming Manual 85

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
6.6 Tool—Import
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Quick Dial
Data Type Import Destination

No. Location
Dial Dial
Phone Number Phone Number

Related programming: 10.6.2 PBX Configuration—[2-6-2] System—Numbering Plan—Quick Dial

SIP Extension
Data Type Import Destination

No. Location
Extension Number Extension Number
Password Password

Related programming: 9.16 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property—V-SIPEXT

V-IPGW GW Settings
Data Type Import Destination

No. Location
GW Name GW Name
GW IP Address GW IP Address
GW Group GW Group No.
Connection for IP-GW Connection for IP-GW
Protocol Protocol
Progress Tone Send Mode Progress Tone Send Mode
IP Codec Priority 1st IP Codec Priority 1st
IP Codec Priority 2nd IP Codec Priority 2nd
IP Codec Priority 3rd IP Codec Priority 3rd
Packet Sampling Time (G.711A) Packet Sampling Time (G.711A)
Packet Sampling Time (G.711Mu) Packet Sampling Time (G.711Mu)
Packet Sampling Time (G.729A) Packet Sampling Time (G.729A)
Voice Activity Detection for G.711 Voice Activity Detection for G.711
FAX Sending Method FAX Sending Method
Maximum Bit Rate Maximum Bit Rate
FAX Detection Ability FAX Detection Ability
DTMF DTMF
Payload Type Payload Type

86 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 6.6 Tool—Import
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Data Type Import Destination

T38 FAX Max Datagram T38 FAX Max Datagram

T38 FAX UDPTL Error Correction – T38 FAX UDPTL Error Correction – Redundancy
Redundancy
T38 FAX UDPTL Redundancy count T38 FAX UDPTL Redundancy count for T.30 messages
for T.30 messages
T38 FAX UDPTL Redundancy count T38 FAX UDPTL Redundancy count for data
for data
T38 FAX Rate Management Method T38 FAX Rate Management Method

Related programming: 9.2.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System

Property—Main—V-IPGW–GW Settings–Main

V-IPGW DN2IP
Data Type Import Destination

No. Location
Leading Number Leading Number
Remaining Number of Digits Remaining Number of Digits
GW No./GW Group Selection GW No./GW Group Selection
GW Group GW Group
GW No. GW No.

Related programming: 9.2.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System

Property—Main—V-IPGW–DN2IP

V-SIPGW Settings
Data Type Import Destination

(no fields to select) (no fields to select)

Related programming: 9.10 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property—V-SIPGW

V-SIPGW Provider
Data Type Import Destination

(no fields to select) (no fields to select)

Related programming: 9.10 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property—V-SIPGW

PS Registration
Data Type Import Destination

(no fields to select) (no fields to select)

Related programming: 9.35 PBX Configuration—[1-2] Configuration—Portable Station

PC Programming Manual 87

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
6.6 Tool—Import
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Note
Before importing PS registration settings, be sure to de-register any PSs already registered to the PBX.

To import system data

1. From the Tool tree menu, select Import, and then click the type of data to import.
2. Navigate to the folder containing the system data file you want to open.
3. Select the file.
4. Click OK to open the file.
If applicable, a list of field names found in the imported file will be displayed.
5. For the Feature - Speed Dial and Caller ID table, select the Speed Dial table to which to import the data
(system or tenant) from the drop-down list.
6. If required, select import fields.
When import fields can be selected, the selection screen is displayed automatically. Matching origin and
destination fields are entered by default.
• To change the destination for an import field, select the preferred field from the drop-down list.
• To not import a field, select the blank option from the drop-down list.
7. Click OK to perform the import operation.
Depending on the type of data imported, the relevant programming screen may be displayed.
• Click OK or Apply to complete the import operation.
If data in a field being imported does not match the required format for the import destination, an error
message will be displayed when the import operation is attempted, and the operation will be cancelled.
This can occur when, for example, the destination field can only accept numeric data, but the data being
imported contains alphabet characters, as the correct fields were not linked together.

Notices Regarding Importing Data from KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200 PBXs to the PBX

Quick Dial
The PBX only supports an 8-digit Quick Dial format. Therefore, KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200 Quick Dial data in
the 4-digit format cannot be imported.

88 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 6.7 Tool—Export
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

6.7 Tool—Export
Allows several types of system data to be exported to files. These files can be used with the Import tool (see
6.6 Tool—Import) to update another PBX.
Except for ARS - Routing Plan, tables are exported as comma-separated value (CSV) files.
Except for Speed Dial and Caller ID, this option is only available at Installer level.

Note
The separator used in CSV files created using the Export tool is decided by the unit specified in List
Separator, found in the Windows Control Panel’s "Regional Options".

To export system data

1. From the Tool tree menu, select Export, and then click the type of data to export.
2. Select the check boxes next to the names of the fields to export, and then click OK.
3. If a message window is displayed, click OK.
4. In the file selection screen, select the Save check box, and then click OK.

PC Programming Manual 89

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
6.8 Tool—Screen Customise
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

6.8 Tool—Screen Customise

Allows you to specify which Setup and Maintenance screens can be accessed in the User (Administrator)
account level.
This option is only available at Installer level.
Selected check boxes will be displayed in the tree menus of Web Maintenance Console to users with the User
(Administrator) account level.

To modify displayed screens

1. Click the access level to modify.
2. Select the items that you want to have displayed.
• Clear the check box beside the names of items you do not want to have displayed.
• Select the check box beside the names of items you want to have displayed.
3. Click OK.

90 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 6.9 Tool—UM Data Backup
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

6.9 Tool—UM Data Backup

The UM Data Backup tool can be used to backup and restore Unified Messaging (UM) data.
This screen can be accessed only in On-line mode.
The following voice data can be backed up or restored as individual files. The data can be backed up to a USB
memory device connected to the PBX or a NAS.
a. System Prompts
– Installed Prompts
– Custom Service Menu
– Company Name
– Company Greetings
– System Mailbox Group Voice Label
– System Caller Name
– Prompt Selection
– Hold Announce Menu
b. Mailbox Prompts
– Owner Name
– Personal Greetings
– Personal Caller ID Name
– Interview
– Personal Group List Name
– EMD List Member Name
c. Mailbox Messages
Note
Mailbox data may not be backed up if the mailbox is in use during the backup process. Additionally, Unified
Messaging system response time may be affected when backing up data. For these reasons, we
recommend backing up data when the Unified Messaging system is not in use.
Use only the ASCII character set for directory/file names.
The UM Data Backup tool can be executed manually or scheduled to run automatically at regular intervals.
Refer to the following:
• 6.9.1 Tool—UM Data Backup—Manual Backup
• 6.9.2 Tool—UM Data Backup—Scheduled Backup

PC Programming Manual 91

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
6.9.1 Tool—UM Data Backup—Manual Backup
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

6.9.1 Tool—UM Data Backup—Manual Backup

Use this procedure to manually back up Unified Messaging system data. For details on the items that can be
backed up, see 6.9 Tool—UM Data Backup.
1. To back up system prompts, select the check box next to System Prompts and select the check boxes
of the items you want to back up.
2. To back up mailbox prompts, select the check box next to Mailbox Prompts and select which prompts to
back up.
3. To back up the prompts for specific mailboxes, click Mailbox Prompts to open the mailbox list. Check the
top checkbox to select all mailboxes, or select the mailboxes for which you wish to back up prompts, then
click OK.
4. To back up mailbox messages, check the box next to Mailbox Messages button and click Mailbox
Messages to open the mailbox list. Select the top check box to select all mailboxes, or select the mailboxes
you wish to back up, and then click OK.
5. Select the destination for the backed up data:
• Local PC: After the backup is started, a file download will begin in your web browser. Specify a location
on your local PC to save the backup data.
• USB Flash Drive (Main Unit): Back up the data to a USB memory device connected to the Main unit.
When USB Flash Drive (Main Unit) is selected, a folder selection menu becomes active. Specify a
folder on the USB memory device for saving the backup data.

Note
Before selecting this option, make sure that a USB memory device is connected to the Main unit.
• NAS: Back up the data to a NAS. When NAS is selected, a folder selection menu becomes active.
Specify a folder on the NAS for saving the backup data.
6. Click OK to start the backup.
Note
• The system will prepare the data to be backed up, and the backup will begin about 30 seconds later.
The time needed to backup the data will vary depending on the communication speed and the amount
of data that is being backed up.
• Deleted messages will not be backed up when backing up Mailbox Messages.
• When Local PC is selected, individual messages that are larger than 100 MB cannot be backed up.
• Depending on your browser or your browser’s settings, a prompt may appear during the backup for
each file to be downloaded. Be sure to select an action for each prompt that appears.

92 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 6.9.2 Tool—UM Data Backup—Scheduled Backup
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

6.9.2 Tool—UM Data Backup—Scheduled Backup

You can schedule backups in advance. The Unified Messaging system will automatically back up the selected
data at the scheduled times to a USB memory device or NAS connected to the PBX. (Scheduled backups
cannot be made to a local PC.) For details on the items that can be backed up, see 6.9 Tool—UM Data
Backup.
Follow the procedure below to schedule an automatic backup.
1. Click to create a new scheduled backup.
2. Enter a description for the backup.
3. Set the frequency (daily, weekly, etc.) and time of day when the backup should take place.
4. Check the desired item(s) to backup.
5. Click Edit next to Mailbox Prompts.
6. Check either All Mailboxes or select the mailboxes you wish to backup.
7. Click OK.
8. Click Edit next to Mailbox Messages.
9. Check either All Mailboxes or select the mailboxes you wish to backup. You can also specify the following
backup conditions:
• Retention Days: Back up only messages that have been stored on the system for at least the number
of days specified.
• Remaining mailbox Capacity (min): Only perform a backup if the remaining mailbox capacity has
reached the specified amount.
• Delete After Backup: Specify to delete messages that have been backed up from the mailbox.
• Message Type: Specify to back up all messages, or only messages marked as "old".
Note
An invalid combination of these settings may prevent a backup from occurring. For example, if a mailbox
is full, but there are no messages older than the number of days specified in Retention Days, or no
messages are marked as "old", the backup will not be performed.
10. In System Backup, select USB Flash Drive (Main Unit) or NAS, and then specify the folder on the
selected device where you want to save the system backup file.
11. Click OK.
12. In Status, select Enable and click OK.
Note
• Up to 20 backup events can be scheduled.
• If a backup is scheduled, but a USB memory device is not connected to the PBX at the time of the
scheduled backup, the backup will not be performed.
• When using a NAS, make sure there is sufficient network bandwidth.

Editing a scheduled backup

1. From the Scheduled Backup screen, select the backup you wish to edit.
2. Click Edit.
3. Edit the settings as desired.
4. Click OK.
Deleting a scheduled backup
1. From the Scheduled Backup screen, select the backup you wish to delete.
2. Click Delete.
3. Click Yes.
4. Click OK.

PC Programming Manual 93

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
6.10 Tool—UM Data Restore
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

6.10 Tool—UM Data Restore

Follow the procedure below to restore data backed up using the UM Data Backup tool.
This screen can be accessed only in On-line mode.
For more information about the UM Data Backup tool, see 6.9 Tool—UM Data Backup. You can restore data
from a USB memory device connected to the PBX or from a file on your local PC.
1. Select the check boxes of the items to restore.
2. In System Restore, select Local PC or USB Flash Drive (Main Unit).
• Local PC
Click Browse and select a backup file from your local PC. The file must have been saved using the
UM Data Backup tool.
• USB Flash Drive (Main Unit)
When USB Flash Drive (Main Unit) is selected, the folder selection menu becomes active. Specify
the folder on the USB memory device where the backup data is saved.
• NAS
When NAS is selected, the folder selection menu becomes active. Specify the folder on the NAS where
the backup data is saved.

Note
Before selecting USB Flash Drive (Main Unit), make sure that the USB memory device with the
backup data is connected to the Main unit.

To restore a single file:

Files that match the selected types of items to restore will be highlighted.
Click a file in the list to display its name in the text box. You can also click a folder name to display that
folder’s contents, and then click a file to select it.

To restore multiple files at once:

Folders whose contents match the selected types of items to restore will be highlighted.
Click a folder in the list to display its name in the text box. You can also click a folder name to display that
folder’s contents, and then click a folder to select it.

Note
When restoring data from a local PC, up to 40 files can be selected at one time. When there are a large
number of files to restore, they should be restored from the folder on the USB memory device.
3. Click OK to restore the selected file or folder of files.
• Local PC
The results of the data restore will be downloaded from the PBX as a text file called
"UM_data_restore_result.txt". Save the file to your local PC to view its contents.
• USB Flash Drive (Main Unit)
The results of the data restore will be saved in a text file called "UM_data_restore_result.txt" on the
USB memory device. To view this file, you must connect the USB memory device to a PC and then
open the text file.
• NAS
The results of the data restore will be saved in a text file called "UM_data_restore_result.txt" on the
NAS. To view this file, you must connect to the NAS and copy to a PC and then open the text file.

Note
• When restoring multiple items, only files that match the items for which check boxes have been selected
will be restored. Also, even if data exists in the specified folder of the USB memory device, the data
will not be restored unless the check box of the matching item has been selected.
• Data in sub-folders of a selected folder will not be restored.
• If more than one file matches a selected item, the newest file will be restored.

94 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 6.10 Tool—UM Data Restore
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

• The following characters cannot be used in the names of the backup files: open bracket, close bracket,
space, forward slash ("/"), period ("."), or 0 (zero).
• The backup file names stored on the USB memory device should not be changed. If the file names are
changed, the system may not be able to detect which backup files correspond to which UM data items.
• A backed up message cannot be restored to the subscriber’s mailbox if the mailbox still contains a
New/Old/Deleted copy of the same message.
• Voice data recorded by users in a KX-TVM series VPS can be converted and used as voice data in
the PBX’s Unified Messaging system. For details, refer to "5.3 Starting Web Maintenance
Console—KX-TVM System Prompt and Mailbox Data Import" in the Installation Manual.

PC Programming Manual 95

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
6.11 Tool—UM Backup History
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

6.11 Tool—UM Backup History

The following records for backup that have been performed can be checked on this screen:
• Description
• Parameters
• Completion Status
• Date & Time
• Total Elapsed Time (HH:MM:SS)
This screen can be accessed only in On-line mode.

96 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 6.12 Tool—DXDP All OUS
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

6.12 Tool—DXDP All OUS

Sets the status of all DXDP/XDP extension ports to "OUS" simultaneously for the PBX.

To set all DXDP/XDP ports to OUS for the PBX

1. Access Tool—DXDP All OUS from the Maintenance Screen tree view.
2. Click OK.

PC Programming Manual 97

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
6.13 Tool—Contact information
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

6.13 Tool—Contact information

Dealers can set contact information for the user of the PBX here. When users select this tree menu item, this
information will be displayed for the user’s reference.
1. Input the following information, and then click OK.
• Company Name
• Telephone Number
• Fax Number
• Address
• URL
• Email Address

98 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 6.14 Tool—UT Option Setting
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

6.14 Tool—UT Option Setting

Option settings can be specified for KX-UT series SIP phones on a system-wide level.

Note
The following apply when programming in On-line mode only:
• To set these parameters, all installed V-UTEXT cards must first be set to OUS. For details, see 9.1 PBX
Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot.

Numbering Plan for UT Series Terminal

One or more number dialling plans can be specified for KX-UT series SIP phones. Enter the dial plan text string
into the text box, and then click OK. A dial plan text string may also be copied and pasted into the text box
from another source.

Note
• For more information about dial plans, refer to the Administrator Guide of the relevant KX-UT series
SIP phone.
• You can enter up to 500 characters in the dial plan text box.
• You can assign up to 20 dial plans, separating them with a "|" (vertical bar).
• You can assign up to 32 digits per dial plan.
• When OK is clicked, the entered text string will be validated. If there is a validation error, a message
will be displayed.

Timer for UT Series Terminal

This timer specifies for KX-UT series SIP phones how long the system waits for another digit to be dialled
before determining that dialling has finished. This value will apply for all KX-UT series SIP phones connected
to the PBX. Specify a number of seconds in Extension Inter-digit (s), and then click OK.
If the value for the timer is changed, the new value will be applied to each KX-UT series SIP phone after it is
restarted.

PC Programming Manual 99

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
6.15 Tool—URL Information
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

6.15 Tool—URL Information

The URL address for downloading the IMAP tool can be specified on this screen. This URL address will be
used for the Unified Messaging Plug in download button displayed to users when they view the Unified
Message tab of their profile in the User menu. For details, see 8.2.1 Users—Add User—Single User.

Specify a valid URL address for Unified Messaging Plug in, and then click OK.

100 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 6.16.2 Tool—SVM (Simplified Voice Message)—Check Current Usage
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

6.16 Tool—SVM (Simplified Voice Message)

6.16.1 Tool—SVM (Simplified Voice Message)—Delete All

Recording
Deletes all voice messages recorded by the SVM feature.

To delete SVM recording data

1. Access Tool—SVM (Simplified Voice Message)—Delete All Recording.
2. Click OK.

6.16.2 Tool—SVM (Simplified Voice Message)—Check Current

Usage
Displays information on the voice messages stored by the SVM feature. For each message, the type of
message and the associated extension are displayed.

To check the current usage

1. Access Tool—SVM (Simplified Voice Message)—Check Current Usage.

PC Programming Manual 101

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
6.16.2 Tool—SVM (Simplified Voice Message)—Check Current Usage
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

102 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Section 7
Utility

This section serves as reference operating instructions

for the Utility menu of the Maintenance screen of Web
Maintenance Console.

PC Programming Manual 103

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
7.1.1 Utility—Diagnosis—Card Diagnosis
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

7.1 Utility—Diagnosis

7.1.1 Utility—Diagnosis—Card Diagnosis

Performs diagnostic tests on cards installed in the PBX, to identify the source of problems.
If any of the tests listed here returns the result "NG" ("No Good"), contact your dealer.
When testing is complete, any cards that were set to OUS status must be returned to INS status if they are to
be used again.
This screen can be accessed only in On-line mode.

Card Test
Tests the relevant functions of a card to ensure that it is operating correctly. The tests carried out vary according
to the type of card being tested.

The tests that are performed on each card are listed below.

Test Type Available Cards

Local loop back diagnosis DLC2, DLC8, DLC16, LCOT6 (Pre-installed/Option), BRI2, BRI4,
PRI23, PRI30/E1
DTMF Receive test port DHLC4, MCSCL8, MCSLC16 (Pre-installed/Option)
PT loop back diagnosis DLC2, DLC8, DLC16, DHLC4

To perform a card test

1. Click on the Status cell of the card to be tested, and set it to "OUS".
2. Click on the cell showing the card type.
A new window will be displayed.
3. Select the Card Test option, and then click Execute.
The error report will be displayed. When all tests are completed, the words "Test End!" will be shown on
the last line of the output.
4. Select an option:
• Click Capture if you want to save the displayed information.
1. Specify a save destination and file name.
2. Click Save.
• Click Cancel to return to the Diagnosis screen.
Note
To run consecutive card tests on the BRI2/BRI4 card, you must change the card’s status to INS, then
OUS again after running each test.

104 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 7.1.2 Utility—Diagnosis—Ping
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

7.1.2 Utility—Diagnosis—Ping
Performs a connection test on network devices. This function sends echo requests to a particular IP address
across an IP network, and displays the result of responses and round-trip time.
This screen can be accessed only in On-line mode.

To perform a Ping test

1. Enter a specific IP address in the IP Address box.
2. Click Test to perform the test.
The result will be displayed.
3. Select an option:
• Click Capture if you want to save the displayed information.
1. Enter a file name, or select a file to overwrite.
2. Click Save.
• Click Cancel to return to the Ping screen.

PC Programming Manual 105

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
7.2.1 Utility—File—File Transfer PC to PBX
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

7.2 Utility—File

7.2.1 Utility—File—File Transfer PC to PBX

Copies PBX system data files from the connected PC to the System Memory installed in the PBX. Pre-existing
files in System Memory Card are overwritten.
This option is only available at Installer level when programming in On-line mode.

To install new main system data that has been copied to the PBX, use the System Reset utility (see 5.3 System
Control—System Reset) for DFSYS files.

The PBX examines the header information of a file to determine 2 things: whether the file contains supported
data, and which system component the file applies to.
Only files whose header information matches that of a system file supported by the PBX can be transferred.
Attempting to transfer any other type of file results in an error message.

The names of all files that can be stored in the System Memory are as follows:

System Data
Name on System Memory Corresponding Card

DFSYS Mother Board

DFSYS_R Mother Board*1

*1
DFSYS-file-format data that is transferred to the PBX is saved as "DFSYS_R".

To transfer files to the System Memory

1. The dialogue box will be displayed.
2. Select the file to upload, and click OK.
A window showing the upload progress will be displayed.
While transferring files to the System Memory, the PBX automatically renames them according to the
header information.
A message will be displayed when the transfer is complete.
3. Click OK.

106 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 7.2.2 Utility—File—File Transfer PBX to PC
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

7.2.2 Utility—File—File Transfer PBX to PC

Copies system data files from the System Memory and SD card installed in the PBX to the connected PC.
This option is only available at Installer level when programming in On-line mode.

The files that can be downloaded from the System Memory and SD card are as follows:

File Name File Type

DFSYS System data

$SYSERR Error data
$SYSERR1–$SYSERR9
UT_ACS KX-UT series SIP phone configuration
data

• Downloading the DFSYS system data file allows you to make a backup of the configuration of the PBX.
• The error data files are snapshots of the configuration of the PBX taken automatically when a major error
causes a system reset. They can be analysed by your dealer to identify the source of a problem. If there
is only one error data file, its name will be $SYSERR. If there is more than one file, the files will be numbered
in chronological order, up to a maximum of 9 files.
• KX-UT series SIP phone configuration data can be transferred to a PC, and then imported using the
phone’s Web user interface. For details, refer to the Administrator Guide of the relevant KX-UT series SIP
phone.

To transfer files to the PC

1. Select the file to download from the list of files on System Memory and SD card.
Only the files listed in the table above can be downloaded. Selecting any other file will cause an error
message to be displayed.
2. Click Transfer.
The Save dialogue box will be displayed.
3. Navigate to the folder in which you want to save the file.
4. Enter a file name.
5. Click Save.
• A window showing the download progress will be displayed.
• A message will be displayed when the transfer is complete.
6. Click OK.

PC Programming Manual 107

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
7.2.3 Utility—File—File View
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

7.2.3 Utility—File—File View

Displays a list of files in System Memory and SD card.
This screen can be accessed only in On-line mode.
The name, date and time of creation, and size of files are displayed.
This utility can also display information on activation key files stored in the in the System Memory and SD card.
The effective date, PFMPR-ID, activation key type, number of activation keys, and expiration date of activation
keys are displayed on the Detail screen.

To view information of programme and activation key files stored in the System Memory and
SD card
1. Click on the name of the desired programme or activation key file.
2. Click Detail. The Detail screen will be displayed. You can select different files from the File drop-down
menu to view the details for each file.

108 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 7.2.4 Utility—File—File Delete
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

7.2.4 Utility—File—File Delete

Allows you to delete files from the System Memory.
This option is only available at Installer level in On-line mode.
The DFSYS system file cannot be deleted by this utility.

Note
Programme files cannot be deleted if the Program Update feature’s timed update is set, or if an update is
currently being performed. For details, see 5.1.2 System Control—Program Update—Update Program
File.

To delete files from the System Memory

1. Click on the file to be deleted.
2. Click Delete.
A confirmation screen will be displayed.
3. Click OK.
The display will return to the File Delete screen.

PC Programming Manual 109

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
7.2.5 Utility—File—Message File Transfer PC to PBX
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

7.2.5 Utility—File—Message File Transfer PC to PBX

Transfers Outgoing Message (OGM) files from the PC to the System Memory.
This option is only available at Installer level when programming in On-line mode.
Uploaded files are automatically renamed as necessary. If the location specified already contains an OGM, it
will be overwritten by the newly uploaded message.

To transfer OGMs to the System Memory

1. From the Utility menu, select Message File Transfer PC to PBX.
2. Select the destination to transfer the OGM files to from the drop-down list, and then click Browse.
The Open dialogue box will be displayed.
3. Select the message files to upload. The files must be in the WAV format.
It is possible to select multiple files.

Note
• When selecting files to copy to the PBX, the file names (apart from the file extension) cannot be
more than 33 characters in length.
• When selecting G.711 codec WAV files to copy to the PBX, the total file size of all selected files
combined cannot exceed 32 megabytes.
4. Click OK.
• The files will be uploaded. Files that do not contain message data will be ignored.
• An index number (01 to 64) will be appended automatically to the file names of message files
transferred to the PBX.
• When complete, the display will return to the main screen.

110 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 7.2.6 Utility—File—Message File Transfer PBX to PC
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

7.2.6 Utility—File—Message File Transfer PBX to PC

Transfers Outgoing Message (OGM) files from the System Memory to the PC.
This option is only available at Installer level when programming in On-line mode.

To transfer OGMs to the PC

1. From the lower drop-down list, select the messages to transfer.
• To transfer a certain message, select the number of that message.
• To transfer all messages at once, select "ALL".
The Save dialogue box will be displayed.
2. Enter a file name.
3. Click Save.
4. Click OK.
• When you choose to transfer all messages, each message is saved as an individual file, with a number
appended to the file name corresponding to that message’s location in the System Memory.
• When complete, the display will return to the main screen.

PC Programming Manual 111

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
7.3.1 Utility—Log—Error Log
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

7.3 Utility—Log

7.3.1 Utility—Log—Error Log

Collects and displays system error information.
Whenever there is a system failure, the PBX stores the error code generated. The connected PC collects all
of these codes, along with other information, and displays an explanatory error message.
This screen can be accessed only in On-line mode.

The functions of the buttons on this screen are as follows:

Button Function

Cancel Closes the Error Log screen without saving.

Save Saves the currently displayed Error Log information as a text file.
Minor Displays minor errors, which affect only a certain part of system operation.
Major Displays major errors, which affect operation of the whole system, or result in
system failure.
Clear Erases the stored error log information from both the screen and the PBX.
Log Information Displays probable causes of the errors and their solutions.

The items displayed on screen are as follows:

Item Description

Date The date of the error detection.

Time The time of the error detection.
Error Code The 3-digit error code assigned by the PBX. For details about the error code,
refer to the "Log Information" item in this table.
Sub Code SMDR:
The 8-digit sub code of the relevant hardware (BBWXYYZZ).
Web Maintenance Console:
The 6-digit sub code of the relevant hardware (WXYYZZ).
For information about the digits of the Sub Code, refer to table "Sub Code
Details" below.
Error Message A description of the error.
Log Information Clicking this button displays a list of errors and solutions in PDF format, as
shown below.

112 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 7.3.1 Utility—Log—Error Log
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

[Sample] List of Errors and Solutions

For each error code, the error message, probable cause, and solutions are explained.

Sub Code Details

Sub Code Description

BB 00 (Standalone operation)
or
01–15 (Corresponding to the site number in a One-look network [2 to 16])
W Slot Type
For physical slots (including physical slots of Expansion Units)
– " " (blank)
For virtual slots
– "*" (asterisk)
X Shelf Number
– Main Unit: 1
– Expansion Unit: 2–4
– Non-PBX process: 5

PC Programming Manual 113

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
7.3.1 Utility—Log—Error Log
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Sub Code Description

YY Slot Number
When X is not 5
Physical shelf
Mother board slot: 00
Regular slots: 01–07
Expansion Unit
EXP-S card: 00
Optional physical service card slots: 01–05
Virtual shelf
Virtual Trunk slots: 01–04
Virtual Extension slots: 05–08
Virtual IP-CS slots: 09–12
When X is 5
YY: Process code
ZZ Port Number
When X is not 5
ZZ: Optional service card port number (01–XX)

When X is 5
ZZ: Process number (determined by each process)

Note
When there is no parameter for slot and port number, YY and ZZ will be displayed as "00".
Example: Sub code for the mother board = "00 10000"

114 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 7.3.2 Utility—Log—Syslog
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

7.3.2 Utility—Log—Syslog
Displays a log of system events. Each entry in the log includes the following information:
• Type: Describes the type of system event.
• Date: The date and time the system event occurred.
• Message: Details about the system event.
This screen can be accessed only in On-line mode.

PC Programming Manual 115

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
7.3.3 Utility—Log—Web-MC Event Log
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

7.3.3 Utility—Log—Web-MC Event Log

The Web-MC Event Log retains information about user interaction with Web Maintenance Console.
This screen can be accessed only in On-line mode.
The items displayed on screen are as follows:

Item Description

Date The date of the event.

Time The time of the event.
User The account name of the user accessing Web Maintenance Console.
Description A description of the action taken by the user. (i.e. "Login to
Web-MC")
IP Address The IP address of the PC used to access Web Maintenance Console.

To save the event log as a text file

1. From the Web-MC Event Log screen, select Save.
The Save dialogue box will be displayed.
2. Enter a file name.
3. Click Save.
To clear the event log
1. From the Web-MC Event Log screen, select Clear.
Note
Users logged in to a Main unit can see all events.

116 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 7.3.4 Utility—Log—UM System Log
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

7.3.4 Utility—Log—UM System Log

You can export a log of events from the Unified Messaging system for troubleshooting purposes.
This screen can be accessed only in On-line mode.
1. Click OK to export a UM System Log file.
2. Click Save to save the data to a local file.
3. Click OK.

PC Programming Manual 117

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
7.3.5 Utility—Log—Call Control Log
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

7.3.5 Utility—Log—Call Control Log

Collects and displays Logical Partitioning Call Control Log information.
To show the setting change information for the Logical Partitioning feature, press the Condition button.
To show the call restriction status of the Logical Partitioning feature, press the Status button.

Condition

Item Description

Date The date on which the setting change of the logical partitioning
feature occurred.
Time The time at which the setting change of the logical partitioning feature
occurred.
Information "Logical Partition" is displayed.
Status The new setting status of the following settings is displayed.
9.2.2 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System
Property—Site—Main— Area ID for logical partition
10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options—Option
2— Applying logical partitioning

Status

Item Description

Date The date on which the call restriction event from the logical
partitioning feature occurred.
Time The time at which the call restriction event from the logical partitioning
feature occurred.
Function The call restriction types are as follows:
– CO call
– CO-CO call
– Conference call
Information The restricted extension number and/or trunk number is displayed.
Status "Restricted (Logical Partitioning)" is displayed.

118 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 7.4.1 Utility—Monitor/Trace—ISDN/QSIG Protocol Trace
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

7.4 Utility—Monitor/Trace

7.4.1 Utility—Monitor/Trace—ISDN/QSIG Protocol Trace

This utility collects protocol trace data from the BRI or PRI card, and displays it on the PC.
This option is only available at Installer level in On-line mode, and requires that the target BRI or PRI card be
set to INS status.
Protocol trace data is continually accumulated on ISDN cards, and 3 types of data can be downloaded:
• Real Time Trace: Pseudo-real-time data is collected through data polling at one-second intervals. The
displayed information is updated beginning when the Start button is clicked.
• Accumulation Trace: Previously accumulated data is retrieved and displayed.
• Error Accumulation Trace: Previously accumulated error data is retrieved and displayed. This trace
shows the data snapshot that is taken just before a card resets.

To view trace data

1. From the Shelf-Slot No. drop-down list, select the target slot. Each card will be preceded by the pattern
"X-Y" as follows:
• X: Shelf number (1-4)
– 1: Main unit
– 2: Expansion Unit1
– 3: Expansion Unit2
– 4: Expansion Unit3
• Y: Slot number (1-7)
2. From the Trace Data Type drop-down list, select the type of data to view.
3. Click Start.
Trace information will be displayed.
4. Select an option:
• Click Capture to save the displayed trace information.
• Click Clear to clear the screen display.
5. Click Cancel to return to the main screen.

PC Programming Manual 119

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
7.4.2 Utility—Monitor/Trace—V-IPGW Protocol Trace
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

7.4.2 Utility—Monitor/Trace—V-IPGW Protocol Trace

This utility collects trace data of protocol activity from V-IPGW card.
This option is only available at Installer level in On-line mode, and requires that the target V-IPGW card be set
to INS status.

To save trace data to the System Memory

1. From the Utility menu, select V-IPGW Protocol Trace.
When the progress bar disappears, the protocol trace is complete. The trace data has been saved to the
System Memory (file name: "PRTH323").

To transfer trace data to the PC

1. Click the File Transfer PBX to PC link to access the file transfer screen.
The list of files will be displayed.

Note
The file transfer screen can also be accessed from the tree menu (see 7.2.2 Utility—File—File
Transfer PBX to PC).
2. Select the desired trace data file.
3. Click Transfer.
4. Navigate to the folder in which you want to save the file.
5. Enter a file name.
6. Click Save.
7. Click OK.

120 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 7.4.3 Utility—Monitor/Trace—V-SIPGW Protocol Trace
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

7.4.3 Utility—Monitor/Trace—V-SIPGW Protocol Trace

The trace data of protocol activity can be collected from the V-SIPGW card and saved to a PC using the
V-SIPGW Protocol Trace.
This option requires that the target V-SIPGW card be set to INS status.
This option is only available at Installer level in On-line mode.
Follow the steps below to trace and file V-SIPGW card protocol activity:

To save trace data to the System Memory

1. From the tree menu, select V-SIPGW Protocol Trace.
When the progress bar disappears, the protocol trace is complete. The trace data has been saved to the
System Memory (file name: "PRTSIPC").

To transfer trace data to the PC

1. Click the File Transfer PBX to PC link to access the file transfer screen.
The list of files will be displayed.

Note
The file transfer screen can also be accessed from the tree menu (see 7.2.2 Utility—File—File
Transfer PBX to PC).
2. Select the desired trace data file.
3. Click Transfer.
4. Navigate to the folder in which you want to save the file.
5. Enter a file name.
6. Click Save.
7. Click OK.

PC Programming Manual 121

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
7.4.4 Utility—Monitor/Trace—CS Status Monitor—Air Sync Group
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

7.4.4 Utility—Monitor/Trace—CS Status Monitor—Air Sync Group

This utility monitors the status of CSs being synchronised with air synchronisation. CSs receive data from other
CSs that they are currently synchronised with. Current Sync CS information is displayed for IP-CSs that are
in INS status.
This option is only available at Installer level in On-line mode.

The displayed items for the Current Sync CS of each CS are as follows:

Item Description

CS Type Type of CS that each CS is currently synchronised with.

Shelf The shelf number (or Virtual for IP-CSs) of the CS that each CS is currently
synchronised with.
Slot Slot number of the CS that each CS is currently synchronised with.
Port Port number of the CS that each CS is currently synchronised with.
CS / Repeater Indicates whether the CS that each CS is currently synchronised with is a
CS or Repeater.
CS Name Name of the CS that each CS is currently synchronised with.
CS ID 12-digit ID number of the CS that each CS is currently synchronised with.
Monitored Value Monitored value (dBm) of the CS that each CS is currently synchronised
with.
Monitored Level Monitored level (signal strength level) of the CS that each CS is currently
synchronised with.
Error Rate (%) Error Rate of the CS for each CS that it is currently synchronised with.

To monitor the status of CSs

1. From the Air Synchronisation Group Number drop-down list, select the desired Air Synchronisation
Group number.
2. From the Interval Timer drop-down list, select the number of seconds between each automatic screen
refresh.
3. Click Start to monitor the status of air synchronisation.
Monitoring will be performed and the screen will refresh according to the specified interval.
4. Click Stop to end monitoring.
5. To refresh the screen manually at any time, click Refresh.
6. To collect the monitored data, click Start Capture.
7. Click Stop Capture to finish and save the monitored data.
A dialogue box will be displayed.
8. Navigate to the folder in which you want to save the file.
9. Enter a file name.
10. Click Save.
The dialogue box will close.

122 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 7.4.5 Utility—Monitor/Trace—CS Status Monitor—LAN Sync Group
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

7.4.5 Utility—Monitor/Trace—CS Status Monitor—LAN Sync

Group
This utility monitors the status of CSs being synchronised with LAN synchronisation (KX-NS0154 only). CSs
receive data from other CSs that they are currently synchronised with. Information is displayed for IP-CSs that
are in INS status.
This option is only available at Installer level in On-line mode.

The displayed items for each CS are as follows:

Item Description

Index A unique index for the CS. (This depends on the number of V-IPCS4 cards
and the number of connected CSs.)
Shelf Always displays "Virtual".
Slot The slot number of the CS in the selected synchronisation group.
Port The port number of the CS.
Connection The connection status of the CS (OUS/INS/Fault).
LAN Sync Status The current synchronisation status of the CS, as follows:
1. No Sync.: Attempting to establish synchronisation
2. Establishing Sync.: Establishing synchronisation
3. Good: Currently synchronised
4. Keep Sync.: Maintaining synchronisation
5. Unstable: The CS is running unsynchronised
6. Sync. Lost: Synchronisation has been lost
7. Out of system: Cannot communicate with the PBX
8. Sync. Master: CS is the sync master or is a slave acting as the sync
master
LAN Sync Quality Level Shows the quality of the synchronisation, depending on the value of LAN
Sync Status, as follows:
• 1, 7, 8: "–" is displayed.
• 6: The quality of the synchronisation before synchronisation was lost is
displayed.
• Other: A number indicating the quality of the synchronisation (-16384–
16384 ns).

To monitor the status of CSs

1. From the LAN Synchronisation Group Number drop-down list, select the desired LAN Synchronisation
Group number.
2. From the Interval Timer drop-down list, select the number of seconds between each automatic screen
refresh.
3. Click Start to monitor the status of LAN synchronisation.
Monitoring will be performed and the screen will refresh according to the specified interval.
4. Click Stop to end monitoring.
5. To refresh the screen manually at any time, click Refresh.
6. To collect the monitored data, click Start Capture.
7. Click Stop Capture to finish and save the monitored data.
A dialogue box will be displayed.

PC Programming Manual 123

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
7.4.5 Utility—Monitor/Trace—CS Status Monitor—LAN Sync Group
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

8. Navigate to the folder in which you want to save the file.

9. Enter a file name.
10. Click Save.
The dialogue box will close.

124 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 7.4.6 Utility—Monitor/Trace—UM System Trace (Internal)
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

7.4.6 Utility—Monitor/Trace—UM System Trace (Internal)

Unified Messaging (UM) system processes can be monitored and logged.
This screen can be accessed only in On-line mode.
The following data can be traced and logged for each UM port, or all UM ports:
• DTMF / Dial: data regarding DTMF signals received by the Unified Messaging system.
• Guidance: guidance data that the Unified Messaging system played.
• Message: Unified Messaging system activity for messages such as creating, playing and deleting.
• Process Event: events occurred between Unified Messaging system processes such as Application, Call
Processor and DSP.
• Caller ID: received Caller ID information.
• DID: received DID numbers.
• PIN: PINs received by the Unified Messaging system.
Follow the steps below to monitor or log the system trace data.
1. Select Internal Trace, Display, or Trace Clear.
– Setting
1. Check Enable / Disable Trace Data.
2. Check the data and UM ports you wish to monitor.
3. Click OK.
– Display: Displays the trace data and/or error data.
1. Check the data and UM ports you wish to monitor.
2. To include error data, click the Error Trace tab and check Error Data.
3. Click OK.
4. The selected data will be displayed in a new window. Click the Trace Data or Error Trace tabs to
switch views. Click Save Log File to save a copy of the displayed data.
5. Click Cancel when finished.
– Trace Clear: Clears saved trace data.
1. Select the trace data to clear.
2. Click OK to clear the selected trace data.
3. The message "System Trace Clear Successful" will be displayed. Click OK to continue.

PC Programming Manual 125

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
7.4.7 Utility—Monitor/Trace—E1 Signalling Bit Monitor
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

7.4.7 Utility—Monitor/Trace—E1 Signalling Bit Monitor

Displays reference signalling bit information for all channels of a E1 card that is installed in an Expansion Unit
by monitoring sent and received A, B, C and D bits. This utility is intended for use by dealers.
For information about Expansion Units see 9.33 PBX Configuration—[1-1]
Configuration—Slot—Expansion Unit1/Expansion Unit2/Expansion Unit3.
This option is only available at the Installer level, and requires that the target card be set to INS status.
While monitoring is being performed, any displayed bits whose value changes from 0 to 1 or vice versa will be
highlighted in red until the next screen refresh is performed.

To view signalling bit information

1. From the Shelf-Slot No. drop-down list, select the target slot. Each card will be preceded by the pattern
"X-Y" as follows:
• X: Shelf number (1-4)
– 1: Main Unit
– 2: Expansion Unit1
– 3: Expansion Unit2
– 4: Expansion Unit3
• Y: Slot number (1-7)
2. From the Interval Timer drop-down list, select the number of seconds between each automatic screen
refresh.
3. Click Start.
Monitoring will be performed and the screen will refresh according to the interval specified.
4. Click Stop to end monitoring.
To refresh the screen at any time while monitoring is stopped, click Refresh.

126 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 7.4.8 Utility—Monitor/Trace—E1 Line Trace
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

7.4.8 Utility—Monitor/Trace—E1 Line Trace

Traces the sent and received signalling bits and dial numbers on the specified channel of the E1 line card. This
utility is intended for use by dealers.
For information about Expansion Units, see 9.33 PBX Configuration—[1-1]
Configuration—Slot—Expansion Unit1/Expansion Unit2/Expansion Unit3.
This option is only available at Installer level, and requires that the target card be set to INS status.

To view trace data

1. From the Shelf-Slot No. drop-down list, select the target slot. Each card will be preceded by the pattern
"X-Y" as follows:
• X: Shelf number (1-4)
– 1: Main Unit
– 2: Expansion Unit1
– 3: Expansion Unit2
– 4: Expansion Unit3
• Y: Slot number (1-7)
2. From the CH No drop-down list, select the target channel.
3. Click Start.
Trace information will be displayed. The information is automatically updated whenever the data being
monitored changes.
4. Click Stop to end the trace.
5. Select an option:
• Click Capture to save the displayed trace information.
Information will be saved to the PC as a text-format file.
• Click Clear to erase the information.

PC Programming Manual 127

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
7.4.9 Utility—Monitor/Trace—TCP Trace
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

7.4.9 Utility—Monitor/Trace—TCP Trace

The TCP trace result of LAN port transmission activity can be output to the USB port.
You must log in using the Installer level account to use this feature.
You must access the TCP trace output destination device directly from the Web Maintenance Console when
using this feature. In a One-look network, you cannot access this feature via the Master PBX’s Web
Maintenance Console.

TCP trace data is output to a USB memory device connected to the USB port. The TCP trace file is saved
without an extension in the root directory of the USB memory device.
The file name uses the time stamp from when the operation was started, and is "TCP_YYMMDDhhmmssN",
where YY: year, MM: month, DD: day, hh: hour, mm: minute, ss: second, and N: serial number.
If the generated TCP trace file exceeds 30 MB, it is split into separate files of up to 30 MB, as follows:
• TCP_YYMMDDhhmmss (The first file is not given a serial number.)
• TCP_YYMMDDhhmmss1
• TCP_YYMMDDhhmmss2
:
• TCP_YYMMDDhhmmssN
TCP trace data output stops when the remaining space in the USB memory device reaches 50 MB.

To output LAN port TCP trace data to a USB memory device

1. Click Start.
2. Click Stop to end the trace.

128 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 7.5.1 Utility—Report—Digital Trunk Error Report
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

7.5 Utility—Report

7.5.1 Utility—Report—Digital Trunk Error Report

Displays accumulated information on various types of errors occurring on digital trunks.
This option is only available at Installer level in On-line mode.
The value displayed for each error item is the number of times that each error occurred during the time period
selected. Average values for these items vary depending upon many factors, such as the equipment being
used, and the distance from the telephone company.

The displayed items are as follows:

Item Description

Time Time of error

Slot Relevant slot and card type
Counter of Digital Trunk Out of SYNC (#300) Digital trunk out of sync (Loss of Signal)
Error Logs logged in
"Minor Error" Log RAI (#301) Digital trunk RAI signal reception
AIS (#302) Digital trunk Alarm Indication Signal reception
Frame Failure (#300) Digital trunk frame failure (Loss of Frame)
Counter of minor CRC Cyclic Redundancy Check error
communication error
SF Severely errored frame (or Severe Framing
Error)
FE Frame synchronisation bit-error
LV Line Code Violation
SL Controlled slip

To view digital trunk information

1. From the Slot drop-down list, select the target slot.
• To generate a report on a specific card, select the slot number and card name.
• To generate a report on all matching cards simultaneously, select "ALL".
2. From the Display form drop-down list, select the time period to view.
3. Click Execute.
The error report will be displayed.

PC Programming Manual 129

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
7.5.2 Utility—Report—IP Extension Statistical Information
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

7.5.2 Utility—Report—IP Extension Statistical Information

Displays accumulated statistical information on IP extensions, IP-CSs (KX-NS0154 only), V-IPEXT cards,
V-IPCS cards, and the DSP card.
This screen can be accessed only in On-line mode.

The displayed items are as follows:

Item Description

Collection Started Time Date and time the port was last reset.
Port No. Number of the port.
RTP Receive Packet Counter Total number of packets received.
RTP Receive Lost Packet Counter Total number of packets lost.
RTP Receive Abandoned Packet Counter Total number of packets abandoned.
RTP Arrive Packet Interval (MAX.) [ms] Maximum time taken for a packet to
arrive.
RTP Arrive Packet Interval (MIN.) [ms] Minimum time taken for a packet to
arrive.

To view IP extension information

1. From the Card Selection drop-down list, select the slot number for the card.
2. Click Execute.
The statistical information will be displayed.
3. Select an option:
• Click Capture if you want to save the displayed information.
1. Enter a file name, or select a file to overwrite.
2. Click Save.
• Click Clear to erase the information and reset the Collection Started Time.
4. Click Cancel to return to the main screen.

130 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 7.5.3 Utility—Report—UM View Reports
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

7.5.3 Utility—Report—UM View Reports

Unified Messaging (UM) system reports can be generated in order to monitor voice mail operations. Reports
can be displayed on a PC, printed, or exported.
This screen can be accessed only in On-line mode.

To view a report
1. In the View Report tab, select the desired report from the Report Parameters drop-down list.
2. Specify a range of mailbox numbers in the From and To boxes, or click Select all mailboxes.
3. Click View Report.
Some reports can be viewed as a table or as a graph. For these reports, select "Table" or "Graph" under
View As before clicking View Report.

To export a report
A report can be printed from Web Maintenance Console or exported as a text file or CSV file.
1. When viewing a report, select Print Out (PC), Text, or Comma-separated values (CSV) from the
drop-down menu.
2. Click Export.
3. If you select Print Out (PC):
A print command is sent to the PC. Follow any prompts to print the report.
If you select Text or Comma-separated values (CSV):
A file save dialogue is displayed. Specify the folder to export the report file to.

To clear a report
For each report, all data can be cleared. Follow the steps below to clear all report data. Some reports can also
be set to automatically clear at specified times.
1. Select the Report Data Clear (Manual) tab.
2. Select the desired report from Report Parameters.
3. Click Report Data Clear.

To automatically clear report data:

1. Select the Report Data Clear (Scheduled) tab.
2. Select Daily, Weekly, Monthly, or Yearly, and specify the time, the day of week or day of month, and the
month, as necessary.
3. Select the desired report from Report Parameters.
4. Click OK.
Note
For scheduling the Automatic Report Data Clear, if a day is specified that does not exist (i.e., February 31),
the Automatic Report Data Clear will not be performed.

Unified Messaging System Reports

Report Type Description

Mailbox Information Report The mailbox information report displays configuration parameters
(from owner’s extension to e-mail options) for a specified mailbox
or a range of mailboxes. 50 records are displayed at a time for this
report.

PC Programming Manual 131

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
7.5.3 Utility—Report—UM View Reports
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Report Type Description

Call Account Report*1 The call account report displays information about outgoing call
activity. Information can be shown by UM port or by mailbox. The
report includes date, starting time, used port, connection time,
called telephone number, call type, exit status of each callout, total
callouts number and the connection time for local or long distance
call, and total number of outgoing calls. 400 records are displayed
at a time for this report.
UM Extn. Usage Report*1 The port usage report displays information about each UM port,
such as connection time and percentage of time which each UM
port was busy.
Memory Card Usage Report*1 The memory usage report indicates the amount of storage space
used and the amount of available space. Available space is
expressed in minutes. Information for the number of messages
stored in and deleted from the Unified Messaging system is
displayed.
Mailbox Usage Report*1 The mailbox usage report displays information for a specified
mailbox or range of mailboxes, including the number of recorded
messages, the total time of outgoing calls, external messages,
message notification, and group message delivery.
• Specify the mailboxes for which you want to display a report,
then click View Report.
• Items not marked as "current" are accumulated indications
since the last clearing of this report.
100 records are displayed at a time for this report.
Fax Transfer Report*1 The fax transfer report displays information about faxes received
by the Unified Messaging system and transferred to a fax
extension. It includes the fax reception date, the port number used,
and the fax transfer status for a maximum of 64 fax messages.
Call Handling Statistic Report*1 The call handling statistic report displays both a summary of and
details of Unified Messaging activity over a specified period of time
for the Automated Attendant service. This report includes the total
number of incoming calls, transferred calls, held calls, calls which
left a message, the result of transferred calls, etc.
Custom Service Report*1 The Custom Service report displays information such as Custom
Service settings, message recording status, number of access,
time of access, and number of access to each key.
Message Status Report The message status report provides the status of all messages of
specified subscribers.
Subscriber Setup Report The subscriber setup report displays the basic settings (owner’s
name, password, personal greeting, etc.) for a specified mailbox
or range of mailboxes.
Security Information Report The security information report displays information about mailbox
accesses. The report includes the date of the last change and last
access, number of total accesses, login, and failed accesses.

132 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 7.5.3 Utility—Report—UM View Reports
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Report Type Description

Hourly Statistics Report*1 The hourly statistics report displays information about the number
of incoming or outgoing calls, the connected time per hour, etc.
*1
This report can be set to be automatically cleared according to scheduled settings.

PC Programming Manual 133

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
7.5.4 Utility—Report—E-mail Report
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

7.5.4 Utility—Report—E-mail Report

A log of information about e-mail messages sent using the functions of the PBX can be viewed in the E-mail
Report.
This screen can be accessed only in On-line mode.
The information in the report includes the following items for each e-mail message sent:
• User name under which the message was sent
• Unified Messaging mailbox number
• Time sent
• Destination e-mail address
• Sending status of the e-mail message

The maximum number of entries included in the report is as follows, depending on the type of the message:
• Voice mail notifications: 5,000 entries
• Missed call notifications: 1,000 entries
• Other e-mail messages (system messages, etc.): 1,000 entries
Note
Messages sent by the PBX, such as system alerts, will list the user as "System" and the mailbox number
as "—".
If these maximum amounts are exceeded, older records beyond the maximum amount for each type will be
deleted as new entries are recorded. To delete all e-mail report records, click Delete all E-mail report.

Exporting the E-mail Report

1. Select an export format from the drop-down list.
2. Click Export.
3. A download dialogue for the e-mail report will be displayed. Open the file to view it, or save the file to the
PC.

134 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 7.5.5 Utility—Report—IP-CS Information
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

7.5.5 Utility—Report—IP-CS Information

7.5.5.1 Utility—Report—IP-CS Information—IP-CS Statistical

Information
Displays accumulated statistical information on the usage of wireless channels and air synchronisation of
IP-CSs.
This screen can be accessed only in On-line mode.

The displayed items are as follows:

Item Description

Date The date the information was acquired.

Time The time the information was acquired. Statistics are collected
every hour.
Available Channel (Max / Min / Maximum, minimum, and average number of available channels
Average) for the previous 1 hour.
Number of Location Registration The number of successful, failed, and total location registrations
(OK / NG / Total) for the previous 1 hour.
Number of Outgoing Call (OK / NG / The number of successful, failed, and total number of outgoing
Total) calls made by the CS for the previous 1 hour.
Number of Incoming Call (OK / NG / The number of successful, failed, and total number of incoming
Total) calls received by the CS for the previous 1 hour.
Number of etc. (OK / NG / Total) The number of successful, failed, and total number of other
transactions made by the CS for the previous 1 hour.
Air Sync Change*1 The number of times the CS has changed its air synchronisation
destination in the previous 1 hour.
Air Sync Self Running*1 The number of times the CS has switched to self-running mode in
the previous 1 hour.
Air Sync Lost*1 The number of times the CS has lost synchronisation in the
previous 1 hour.
*1
A dash is displayed if the selected CS is synchronised using LAN synchronisation.

To view IP-CS statistical information

1. In the Target IP-CS: CS Name drop-down list, select the CS whose statistics you want to view. Only CSs
that support this feature are displayed in the drop-down list.
The selected CS’s CSID is displayed in CSID, and the statistics for the selected CS are displayed.
2. To refresh the display with the latest statistics, click Refresh.
Note
You can view a list of disconnected calls at the CS by clicking the "PS Call Disconnect Log" link in the
upper-right corner of the screen. For details, see 7.5.5.3 Utility—Report—IP-CS Information—PS Call
Disconnect Log.

PC Programming Manual 135

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
7.5.5 Utility—Report—IP-CS Information
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

7.5.5.2 Utility—Report—IP-CS Information—LAN Sync Information

Displays accumulated statistical information on the performance of CSs being synchronised using LAN
synchronisation. On this screen, you can view the performance of wireless devices on the LAN, which is useful
for troubleshooting and determining whether the number of channels needs to be increased.
This screen can be accessed only in On-line mode.

The displayed items are as follows:

Item Description

Date The date the information was acquired.

Time The time the information was acquired. Statistics are collected
every hour.
IP Address The IP address of the selected CS.
Sync Change The number of times the CS has changed its synchronisation
destination in the previous 1 hour.
Sync Lost The number of times the CS has lost its synchronisation in the
previous 1 hour.
Keep Sync The number of times the CS has switched to keep sync in the
previous 1 hour.
H.O Unable The number of times handover has not been possible in the
previous 1 hour.
Keep Sync Ratio (%) The percentage of time the CS has been in keep sync in the
previous 1 hour.
H.O Unable Ratio (%) The percentage of time the CS has been unable to do handover
in the previous 1 hour.
Keep Sync Time The length of time in minutes the CS has been in keep sync.
H.O Unable Time The length of time in minutes the CS has been unable to do
handover.

136 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 7.5.5 Utility—Report—IP-CS Information
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Item Description

Short Term Diag The short term (within the previous 1 hour) diagnosis for LAN
synchronisation.
• Indeterminable: Status cannot be determined.
• Indeterminable (IGMP Querier not found): Status cannot be
determined because the IGMP querier could not be found.
• Under Diagnosis: Diagnosis is being performed.
• OK: Synchronisation is OK.
• Not OK (Signal Jitter): Synchronisation is susceptible to jitter.
• Not OK (Signal delay): Synchronisation is susceptible to delay.
• Conditional OK (Signal Jitter): Synchronisation is OK, but jitter
is possible.
• Conditional OK (Signal delay): Synchronisation is OK, but
delay is possible.
• Out of Sync: Synchronisation cannot be established.
• Out of Sync (10base-T): Synchronisation cannot be
established on a 10Base-T connection.
• Out of Sync (100base-TX half): Synchronisation cannot be
established on a 100Base-TX half-duplex connection.
• Out of Sync (IGMP Querier not found): Synchronisation
cannot be established because an IGMP querier could not be
found.
Long Term Diag The long term diagnosis for LAN synchronisation.
• Indeterminable: Status cannot be determined.
• Indeterminable (IGMP Querier not found): Status cannot be
determined because the IGMP querier could not be found.
• Under Diagnosis: Diagnosis is being performed.
• OK: Synchronisation is OK.
• Not OK (Signal Jitter): Synchronisation is susceptible to jitter.
• Not OK (Signal delay): Synchronisation is susceptible to delay.
• Conditional OK (Signal Jitter): Synchronisation is OK, but jitter
is possible.
• Conditional OK (Signal delay): Synchronisation is OK, but
delay is possible.
• Out of Sync: Synchronisation cannot be established.
• Out of Sync (10base-T): Synchronisation cannot be
established on a 10Base-T connection.
• Out of Sync (100base-TX half): Synchronisation cannot be
established on a 100Base-TX half-duplex connection.
• Out of Sync (IGMP Querier not found): Synchronisation
cannot be established because an IGMP querier could not be
found.

To view LAN synchronisation information

1. In the Target IP-CS: CS Name / MAC Address drop-down list, select the CS whose statistics you want
to view. Only CSs that support this feature are displayed in the drop-down list.
The selected CS’s MAC address is displayed in the text box, and the statistics for the selected CS are
displayed. The master CS’s name and MAC address are also displayed for reference.
2. To refresh the display with the latest statistics, click Refresh.

PC Programming Manual 137

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
7.5.5 Utility—Report—IP-CS Information
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Note
You can view a list of disconnected calls at the CS by clicking the "PS Call Disconnect Log" link in the
upper-right corner of the screen. For details, see 7.5.5.3 Utility—Report—IP-CS Information—PS Call
Disconnect Log.

138 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 7.5.5 Utility—Report—IP-CS Information
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

7.5.5.3 Utility—Report—IP-CS Information—PS Call Disconnect Log

Displays a list of PS calls that have been disconnected at the CS selected on the parent screen. This log can
be saved as a text file.
This screen can be accessed by clicking the "PS Call Disconnect Log" link on either the IP-CS Statistical
Information screen or the LAN Sync Information screen.
See 7.5.5.1 Utility—Report—IP-CS Information—IP-CS Statistical Information and
7.5.5.2 Utility—Report—IP-CS Information—LAN Sync Information.
This screen can be accessed only in On-line mode.

The displayed items are as follows:

Item Description

Index The entry’s index.

Date The date the call was disconnected.
Time The time the call was disconnected.
Error Message The reason the call was disconnected.
• Connection Error: There was an error in the connection.
Extension Number The extension number of the PS where the call was disconnected.
PS-ID The ID of the PS where the call was disconnected.

To save the log

1. Click Save.
The log information of CSs that support this feature is saved.
2. A download dialogue for the call disconnect report will be displayed. Open the file to view it, or save the
file to the PC.

PC Programming Manual 139

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
7.6 Utility—Activation Key Installation
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

7.6 Utility—Activation Key Installation

Activation keys for various features of the PBX can be installed using this screen. Activation key files are copied
from a PC to the PBX and activated. Use the below procedure to install activation key files to a PBX.
This screen can be accessed only in On-line mode.
1. Click Browse and specify the directory where the activation key files are stored, and click Open.
2. A list of activation key files stored in the specified directory is displayed. Check the boxes next to the
activation keys to install to the PBX, and click Install.
3. The activation keys will be copied to the Main unit. When installation is complete, the message, "The
activation key has been installed and activated successfully!" is displayed.
4. Click OK.
Note
You can click the provided link to directly access 9.3 PBX Configuration—[1-1]
Configuration—Slot—Activation Key Status to view activation key information and programme the
number of activated IP-GW trunks and IP softphones.

140 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 7.7.1 Utility—Email Notification—Alert
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

7.7 Utility—Email Notification

7.7.1 Utility—Email Notification—Alert

You can specify e-mail addresses that will receive messages regarding the PBX’s status.

System Alarm
An e-mail message will be sent to the specified address when there is a system alarm. The e-mail message
will contain details about the alarm.
1. For Filtering Setting, select the check boxes to specify whether to receive e-mails when there is a Major
alarm, a Minor alarm, or both.
2. Specify one or two e-mail addresses that will receive system alarm alert messages.
Notice
Be sure to enter e-mail addresses correctly. If an address is incorrectly entered, an alert will not be
received when there is a system alarm, or information regarding the PBX may be sent unintentionally
to a third party.
3. In Subject enter the text that will be used for the subject header of e-mails that are sent.
For Format—Message body type, select the check boxes to specify whether to include the subject in the
message body.
• Type1: Message body does not include the subject
• Type2: Message body includes the subject
4. Click OK when finished.
Licence Expiry
• Partner licence (product licences with an expiration date)*1
A notification e-mail will be sent to the specified addresses at midnight, 40 days before the activation key
expires. Or, if the PBX is started within 40 days of the activation key’s expiration, a notification e-mail will
be sent at that time to the specified addresses. Only 1 notification will be sent.
• Non-product licences with an expiration date
A notification e-mail will be sent to the specified addresses at midnight, 10 days before the activation key
expires if the PBX is turned on. If the PBX is started within 10 days of the activation key’s expiration, a
notification e-mail will be sent each time the PBX is started.
*1
For the following activation keys, the e-mail will be sent 40 days before the activation key expires.
• Poltys CA RCS-Extend (1 user)
• Poltys CA RCS-Extend (5 users)
• Poltys CA RCS-Extend (10 users)
• Poltys CA RCS-Extend (128 users)
• Poltys CCAccounting A.L.
• Poltys CCAcc. Enterprise A.L.
• Poltys CCView A.L.
• Poltys CCView add. PBX A.L.
• Poltys CCView Supervisor A.L. (1 user)
• Poltys CCView Supervisor A.L. (5 users)
• Poltys CCView CRM P-up A.L. (1 user)
• Poltys CCView CRM P-up A.L. (5 users)
• Poltys Number notice A.L.
• Poltys CCAgent A.L. (1 user)
• Poltys CCAgent A.L. (5 users)
• Poltys CCRecord Analogue A.L. (4 ports)
• Poltys CCRecord Analogue A.L. (8 ports)

PC Programming Manual 141

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
7.7.1 Utility—Email Notification—Alert
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

• Poltys CCRecord Analogue A.L. (12 ports)

• Poltys CCRecord Analogue A.L. (16 ports)
• Poltys CCRecord Analogue A.L. (24 ports)
• Poltys CCRecord Digital A.L. (8 ports)
• Poltys CCRecord Digital A.L. (16 ports)
• Poltys CCRecord Digital A.L. (24 ports)
• Poltys CCRecord PRI A.L. (1 port)
• Poltys CCRecord PRI A.L. (2 ports)
• Poltys CCRecord SIP A.L. (4 ports)

1. Specify one or two e-mail addresses that will receive expiry notice messages.
Notice
Be sure to enter e-mail addresses correctly. If an address is incorrectly entered, an alert will not be
received when activation keys are about to expire, or information regarding the PBX may be sent
unintentionally to a third party.
2. In Subject enter the text that will be used for the subject header of e-mails that are sent.
For Format—Message body type, select the check boxes to specify whether to include the subject in the
message body.
• Type1: Message body does not include the subject
• Type2: Message body includes the subject
3. Click OK when finished.

142 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 7.7.2 Utility—Email Notification—System Analysis
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

7.7.2 Utility—Email Notification—System Analysis

Send a specific log file to the designated e-mail address(es).
This screen can be accessed only in On-line mode.
1. Check the Log File Type drop-down menu, select a log file to send to the e-mail address.
2. Enter up to 2 e-mail addresses in Email Address 1 and Email Address 2.
3. In Subject, enter text to be used as the subject line of the e-mail sent.
4. Click Execute and the mail will be sent at that time.

PC Programming Manual 143

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
7.7.3 Utility—Email Notification—Test Email
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

7.7.3 Utility—Email Notification—Test Email

Send a test e-mail to confirm e-mail sending settings are correctly configured.
This screen can be accessed only in On-line mode.
1. Enter up to 2 e-mail addresses in Email Address 1 and Email Address 2.
2. In Subject, enter text to be used as the subject line of the e-mail sent.
3. Click Execute. A test mail will be sent to the specified address(es).
Mail settings can be viewed and set in 27.2.5 Network Service—[2-6] Server Feature—SMTP.

144 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 7.8.1 Utility—Command—UM Command
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

7.8 Utility—Command

7.8.1 Utility—Command—UM Command

System commands can be sent directly to the Unified Messaging system using the Commands dialogue.
This screen can be accessed only in On-line mode.
Follow the steps below to use the Commands dialogue:
1. Enter the desired command, then click RUN. Results from entered commands are displayed.
2. When finished, click Close.

PC Programming Manual 145

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
7.9 Utility—UM – System Prompts Customisation
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

7.9 Utility—UM – System Prompts Customisation

The System Prompts customisation screen is used to view, play, add, or delete system prompts. The
programmer can also check the prompt number and text for these prompts.
This screen can be accessed only in On-line mode.
The following categories of system prompts can be customised from the System Prompts customisation
screen:
a. System Guidance
b. Custom Service Menus
c. Company Greetings
d. Other
– Company Name
– Language Select Menu
– Hold Announce Menu
– Mailbox Group List
– System Caller ID
To customise system prompts, select a tab in the System Prompts dialogue box.

Notice
The system prompts initially installed on the SD Memory Card cannot be restored to their original state by
initialising or resetting the PBX; any changes made to the initially installed system prompts cannot be
undone. Before changing any system prompts, perform a backup of the initial system prompt data. See
6.9 Tool—UM Data Backup for details. Then, you can restore the system prompts to their initial state by
restoring the backup data. See 6.10 Tool—UM Data Restore for details.

Deleting Prompts
The programmer is able to delete specified system prompts.
To delete a specific system prompt:
1. Select the cell for the desired prompt number.
2. Click Delete.
Recording System Prompts
1. Select the desired system prompt to record, and click Play/Record.
2. Select "Record from extension" or "Import from recorded file".
When "Record from extension" is selected:
1. Specify the extension number of the telephone used for recording, then click Connect.
2. When the specified extension rings, go off-hook.
3. Click Record, Stop, or Play to record or play a system prompt.
4. Click Disconnect.
5. Click OK.
When "Import from recorded file" is selected:
1. Click Browse.
The Open dialogue box appears.
2. Navigate to the folder containing the WAV files you wish to import.
WAV files must meet the following specifications:
– G.711 PCM codec
– 8 kHz, 8-bit sampling rate
– Monaural
– A-law or µ-law encoding
3. Select the desired WAV file.
4. Click Open to import the file.
5. Click OK.

146 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 7.9 Utility—UM – System Prompts Customisation
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Starting and Stopping System Prompt Playback

1. Select the desired system prompts.
2. Click Play/Record.
3. Click Play or Stop.

PC Programming Manual 147

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
7.10.1 Utility—Automatic Two-way Recording—Supervisor Setting
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

7.10 Utility—Automatic Two-way Recording

7.10.1 Utility—Automatic Two-way Recording—Supervisor

Setting
Specify the extensions of supervisors that will control the Automatic Two-way Recording feature for agent
extensions. These settings may be changed by a programmer with a User (Administrator) account.
1. Click Add/Delete.
2. Select supervisor extensions from the list, and click OK.
3. Repeat this procedure to add multiple supervisors. Click OK when finished.

148 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 7.10.2 Utility—Automatic Two-way Recording—Extension Setting
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

7.10.2 Utility—Automatic Two-way Recording—Extension Setting

Specify the Automatic Two-way Recording settings for each supervisor. These settings may be changed by a
programmer with a User (Administrator) account.
1. From the Select a Supervisor drop-down list, select a supervisor (specified in 7.10.1 Utility—Automatic
Two-way Recording—Supervisor Setting).
2. In UM Destination Mailbox specify the mailbox where the Automatic Two-way Recording data will be sent.
Select Add New Mailbox and specify a new mailbox number, or select an existing mailbox from the Select
Mailbox drop-down list.
3. In What type of calls to record, check the boxes to specify if internal calls, external calls, and/or calls
made to an incoming call distribution group will be recorded to the mailbox.
4. In Select User Extensions, click Add.
5. Select the check boxes for the agent extensions that the supervisor will control, and then click OK.
6. Click List View to confirm the current Automatic Two-way Recording settings for each supervised
extension.
7. Click OK when you have finished configuring settings and adding agent extensions for a supervisor.
Once these settings have been configured, supervisors can change settings for agent extensions they have
been assigned in 8.3.1 Users—Automatic Two-way Recording—Edit a Recording.

PC Programming Manual 149

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
7.10.3 Utility—Automatic Two-way Recording—Extension Setting List
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

7.10.3 Utility—Automatic Two-way Recording—Extension Setting

List
In this list you can view the settings of extensions that are programmed to have calls recorded by the Automatic
Two-way Recording feature. Information for each extension, including the extension’s supervisor, UM Group
number, and Automatic Two-way Recording destination mailbox is displayed.
You can specify which types of calls will recorded for each extension. These settings may be changed by a
programmer with a User (Administrator) account.
1. For an extension, select a setting for Internal Call, External Call, and ICDG Incoming Only. (See below
for details.)
• Internal Call: Extension-to-extension calls are recorded.
• External Call: Calls with outside parties are recorded.
• ICDG Incoming Only: Only calls from outside parties that are received through an incoming call
distribution group are recorded.
2. Select On or Off for that setting.
3. Click OK when finished.
The programming items displayed on this screen are as follows.

Extension Number
Indicates the extension number of the extension (reference only).

Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)

Extension Name
Indicates the name of the extension (reference only).

Value Range
Max. 20 characters

Internal Call
Specifies whether intercom calls for the extension will be automatically recorded.

Note
Calls between extensions that are connected in a QSIG network are seen as external calls, irrespective of
whether an activation key for QSIG enhanced features is used. To enable Automatic Two-way Recording
for this type of call, set External Call to On.

Value Range
On, Off

Feature Guide References

3.2.1.4 Automatic Two-way Recording for Manager

External Call
Specifies whether trunk calls for the extension are automatically recorded.

150 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 7.10.3 Utility—Automatic Two-way Recording—Extension Setting List
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Value Range
On, Off

Feature Guide References

3.2.1.4 Automatic Two-way Recording for Manager

ICDG Incoming Only

Specifies whether only trunk calls that are received through an incoming call distribution group to the extension
are automatically recorded.

Note
External Call must be set to "On" to set this item to "On".

Value Range
On, Off

Feature Guide References

3.2.1.4 Automatic Two-way Recording for Manager

Supervisor
Indicates the extension designated as a supervisor that may play, delete, or confirm the information of two-way
recordings (reference only).

Value Range
Extension number and user name

PC Programming Manual References

7.10.1 Utility—Automatic Two-way Recording—Supervisor Setting

Feature Guide References

3.2.1.4 Automatic Two-way Recording for Manager

Mailbox Number
Indicates the Unified Messaging mailbox where two-way recordings will be stored (reference only).

Value Range
Mailbox number

PC Programming Manual References

7.10.2 Utility—Automatic Two-way Recording—Extension Setting

PC Programming Manual 151

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
7.10.3 Utility—Automatic Two-way Recording—Extension Setting List
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Feature Guide References

3.2.1.4 Automatic Two-way Recording for Manager

152 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 7.10.4 Utility—Automatic Two-way Recording—Maintenance
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

7.10.4 Utility—Automatic Two-way Recording—Maintenance

Automatic Two-way Recording can be enabled or disabled, or set to record until a specified date and time by
a programmer with a User (Administrator) account.
1. To start Automatic Two-way Recording, click Start. The button will change to display Stop.
Two-way recording for all designated extensions will continue until one of the following occurs:
• The Stop button is clicked.
• The two-way recording time limit or memory capacity has been reached.
• The date and time set in Recording Period is reached.
2. To set a specific time when Automatic Two-way Recording will stop:
a. In Recording Period, select Yes for Setting.
b. In Date & Time, enter a year, month, day, hour, and minute. Click on the calendar and clock numbers
to select them.
c. Click OK.
3. To end Automatic Two-way Recording any time, click Stop.

PC Programming Manual 153

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
7.11 Utility—UM - System Maintenance
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

7.11 Utility—UM - System Maintenance

Programme settings for Unified Messaging (UM) system maintenance.

System Maintenance Mode

Specifies whether to enable or disable System Maintenance Mode.

System Maintenance Start Time

Specifies the System Maintenance start time.

After specifying the settings on this screen, click OK.

154 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 7.12 Utility—CS-Web Connection
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

7.12 Utility—CS-Web Connection

You can specify the URL of the Super Master CS for your system, which will be used for accessing online
CS-Web system programming. For details about the Super Master CS and setting up SIP-CSs, refer to the
SIP-CS Installation Guide.
1. In Super Master CS-Web URL, enter the URL of the Super Master CS.
2. Click Test to confirm if the input URL is correct. If the URL is correct, the CS-Web login screen will open
in your web browser.
3. Click OK.
When programming in other screens, clicking the SIP-CS Web button on that screen will access CS-Web
system programming at the URL specified here.

PC Programming Manual 155

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
7.12 Utility—CS-Web Connection
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

156 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Section 8
Users

This section serves as reference operating instructions

for the Users menu of the Setup screen of Web
Maintenance Console.

PC Programming Manual 157

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
8.1 Users—User Profiles
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

8.1 Users—User Profiles

Manage PBX settings on a per-user level. Information for each user account is displayed and can be added,
edited, or and deleted by a User (Administrator) or Installer level account.

Note
• For User (Administrator) accounts to change User (User) account settings, the Installer account must
use the Screen Customise tool to allow User (Administrator) accounts to view the Users—User
Profiles screen. For details, see 6.8 Tool—Screen Customise.
• When a User (User) level account accesses this screen, he may view and edit items for his account
as explained in 8.2.1 Users—Add User—Single User. In addition, some advanced settings are
available for User (User) level accounts only. For details, see 8.1.1 Users—User Profiles—Advanced
setting.
The settings that can be changed in the User Profile List for each user are as follows:

Common

Item Description

First Name Specifies the first name of the user.

Last Name Specifies the last name of the user.
User Group Specifies the user’s group.
User groups can be set in Extension Settings:
• 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired
Extension—Extension Settings
• 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable
Station—Extension Settings
Ext. No. Specifies the extension number associated with this user.
Extension numbers can be set in Extension Settings:
• 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired
Extension—Extension Settings
• 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable
Station—Extension Settings
Ext. COS Select a Class of Service (COS) for the user from the drop-down list.
COS settings can be set in 10.7 PBX Configuration—[2-7] System—Class of
Service.
Mailbox No. Specifies the UM mailbox number for the user.
Mailbox COS Select a mailbox COS for the user from the drop-down list. Mailbox COS settings
can be set in 21.1 UM Configuration—[2] Class of Service.

FWD/DND

Item Description

First Name Specifies the first name of the user.

Last Name Specifies the last name of the user.
FWD/DND setting - call from CO Specifies the FWD/DND setting for calls from trunks.
Mode
FWD setting - call from CO Specifies the FWD destination for calls from trunks.
Destination

158 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 8.1 Users—User Profiles
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Item Description

FWD/DND setting - call from Ext. Specifies the FWD/DND setting for calls from extensions.
Mode
FWD setting - call from Ext. Specifies the FWD destination for calls from extensions.
Destination

For settings and details for FWD/DND items, refer to the following:
• 12.1.2 PBX Configuration—[4-1-2] Extension—Wired Extension—FWD/DND
• 12.2.2 PBX Configuration—[4-2-2] Extension—Portable Station—FWD/DND
Option

Item Description

Rule of copy to extension name Determines how the First Name and Last Name set in User
Profiles is used for the Extension Name of the following settings.
• 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired
Extension—Extension Settings
• 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable
Station—Extension Settings

User Controls
• Add Button
To add a user profile for a single extension, click the button to open the Add User Wizard. See
8.2.1 Users—Add User—Single User.
• Edit Button
To edit information on an individual user level, select a user from the list by clicking on the row of the user
to edit, then clicking the button to open the Add User Wizard with the selected user’s information filled
in. See 8.2.1 Users—Add User—Single User.
• Delete Button
To delete users:
1. Check the box(es) next to the user’s name(s) and click the button.
2. A confirmation message will appear. Click OK.
3. The user’s information is deleted from the list.
• Add Range Button
To add multiple user profiles for a range of extensions at one time, click the button. See
8.2.2 Users—Add User—Multiple Users.

Note
• In order to edit the settings of the Unified Message tab by clicking the button, you must be logged
in to the PBX with the associated UM Group that your mailbox is assigned to. If you are logged in to a
PBX that is different from the PBX with the associated UM Group of your mailbox, the following items
will be greyed out:
– Prompt Registration
– Mailbox Password
– Mailbox Password (Message Client)
– Advanced setting
If these items are greyed out, click Direct Login to log in directly to the PBX associated with the UM
Group of your mailbox to make changes to these items.
• The , , and buttons are not visible for User (User) level accounts.

PC Programming Manual 159

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
8.1.1 Users—User Profiles—Advanced setting
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

8.1.1 Users—User Profiles—Advanced setting

When User (User) level accounts access their user profiles, they may view and edit items for their account as
explained in 8.2.1 Users—Add User—Single User. In addition, some advanced settings can also be
programmed by users.

Note
The advanced settings described here are displayed only for User (User) level accounts.

Accessing advanced user profile settings

1. Log in Web Maintenance Console using a User (User) level account.
2. In the user profile, click the Unified Message tab.
3. Click the Advanced setting button.
4. In addition to normal mailbox settings, Advanced Call Transfer Setting and Scenario Setting will be
displayed.

Advanced Call Transfer Setting

By combining the settings for Call Transfer and Incomplete Call Handling, you can create a call handling
"scenario" for your extension. Up to 20 scenarios can be created, and a scenario can be assigned to each
absent message. Click the Edit button in Advanced Call Transfer Setting to open the window for
programming. Select a Scenario number (1–20) from the drop-down menu, then programme the settings for
that scenario. Click OK at the bottom of the window when finished.

Scenario Name
Specify a name for the scenario for identification.

Value Range
Max. 32 Characters

Feature Guide References

3.2.2.6 Call Transfer Scenario

Call Transfer Status—Selection

Determines how the Unified Messaging system will handle a call in the selected scenario.

Value Range
None: Rings the subscriber’s extension.
Call blocking: Handles the call according to the Incomplete Call Handling for No Answer setting for the
subscriber’s extension. The subscriber’s extension will not ring.
Call screening: The caller is prompted to record his or her name. The Unified Messaging system then calls
the subscriber and plays back the caller name. The subscriber can choose whether to answer the call.
Leave a Message: Transfers the caller to the mailbox.
Intercom Paging: Pages the subscriber by intercom.
Transfer to specified Custom Service Menu: Transfers the caller to the specified Custom Service.

Feature Guide References

3.2.2.6 Call Transfer Scenario

160 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 8.1.1 Users—User Profiles—Advanced setting
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Call Transfer Status—VIP Filter

Specifies whether calls from certain telephone numbers will be transferred directly to a specified extension or
telephone number.

Note
This setting can only be set to "Enable" when Call Transfer Status—Selection is set to "Leave a
Message".

Value Range
Enable, Disable

Feature Guide References

3.2.2.6 Call Transfer Scenario

Call Transfer Status—Telephone Number 1, 2, 3

Specifies the telephone numbers that the VIP Filter setting will be applied to. When a call is received from any
of the numbers specified here, the call will be transferred immediately to the destination specified in Call
Transfer Status—Transfer to (Selection/Other).

Value Range
Max. 32 digits

Feature Guide References

3.2.2.6 Call Transfer Scenario

Call Transfer Status—Transfer to (Selection/Other)

Specifies the transfer destination for calls transferred according to the VIP Filter setting.

Value Range
Extension: The call is transferred to the user’s extension.
Other: The call is transferred to the telephone number that is specified in Transfer to (Other).

Feature Guide References

3.2.2.6 Call Transfer Scenario

Call Transfer Status—Transfer to specified Custom Service Menu

Select a Custom Service from the drop-down menu if "Transfer to specified Custom Service Menu" is selected
for Call Transfer Status—Selection.

Value Range
Custom Service

PC Programming Manual References

23.3 UM Configuration—[4-3] Service Settings—Custom Service

PC Programming Manual 161

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
8.1.1 Users—User Profiles—Advanced setting
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Feature Guide References

3.2.2.6 Call Transfer Scenario

Call Transfer Status—Transfer to specified telephone number - 1

If "None" or "Call screening" is selected for Call Transfer Status—Selection, specifying a telephone number
here will transfer the caller to that telephone number.

Note
If "Call screening" is selected, the transfer destination will hear the call screening prompt before the call is
transferred.

Value Range
Max. 32 digits (consisting of 0–9, , and #)

Feature Guide References

3.2.2.6 Call Transfer Scenario

Call Transfer Status—Transfer to specified telephone number 2, 3, 4, 5

(Selection/Other)
If "None" or "Call screening" is selected for Call Transfer Status—Selection, and the call could not be
transferred to the number specified in Call Transfer Status—Transfer to specified telephone number -
1, the call will be transferred according to these settings for this scenario, in numerical order of priority.

Note
• This sequence has higher priority than the alternate extension transfer sequence specified in 24.4 UM
Configuration—[5-4] System Parameters—Parameters— PBX Environment—Alternate
Extension Transfer Sequence (Up to 16 digits / [0-9 * # D R F T X , ;]).
• If "Call screening" is selected, the transfer destination will hear the call screening prompt before the
call is transferred.

Value Range
Other, Extension, Covering Extension
If "Other" is specified, enter a maximum of 32 digits consisting of 0–9, , and #.

Feature Guide References

3.2.2.6 Call Transfer Scenario

Incomplete Call Handling for No Answer

Specifies how the scenario handles a call when there is no answer.

Note
More than one option can be selected.

Value Range
Leave a Message: Allows the caller to record a message.
Transfer to a covering extension: Transfers the caller to a covering extension.
Page the mailbox owner by intercom paging: Pages the subscriber by intercom.

162 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 8.1.1 Users—User Profiles—Advanced setting
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Transfer to operator: Transfers the caller to an operator.

Return to top menu: Lets the caller return to the top menu and try another extension.
Transfer to specified Custom Service Menu: Transfers the caller to the specified Custom Service.

Feature Guide References

3.2.2.6 Call Transfer Scenario

Incomplete Call Handling for Busy

Specifies how the scenario handles a call when the destination is busy.

Note
More than one option can be selected.

Value Range
Leave a Message: Allows the caller to record a message.
Transfer to a covering extension: Transfers the caller to a covering extension.
Page the mailbox owner by intercom paging: Pages the subscriber by intercom.
Transfer to operator: Transfers the caller to an operator.
Return to top menu: Lets the caller return to top menu and try another extension.
Transfer to specified Custom Service Menu: Transfers the caller to the specified Custom Service.

Feature Guide References

3.2.2.6 Call Transfer Scenario

Scenario Setting
You can select scenarios set in 8.1.1 Users—User Profiles—Advanced setting for your extension. A scenario
can be set temporarily, or scenarios can be selected for use according to the Absent Message setting of the
extension of the subscriber. (® 14.5 PBX Configuration—[6-5] Feature—Absent Message)
Temporary Scenario: Setting a scenario here will use that scenario indefinitely. A scenario set here will be
used regardless of the subscriber’s extension status. Selecting "None" will remove the setting.
Absent Message 1–9: The selected scenario will be used when the indicated Absent Message is set at the
extension.

PC Programming Manual 163

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
8.2.1 Users—Add User—Single User
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

8.2 Users—Add User

8.2.1 Users—Add User—Single User

The Add User—Single User screen provides a method to create user accounts and establish PBX settings on
a per-user level. When adding a user, the following settings can be specified. This screen will also be displayed
with information already entered when editing an existing user.

Note
User (User) level accounts may access this screen to edit their account information, but only the items
marked with a "*".

User Information

Item Description

First Name* Specifies the first name of the user (max 20 characters).*1
Last Name* Specifies the last name of the user (max 20 characters).*1
Change Language* Select the Web Maintenance Console language displayed for the user from the
drop-down list. Users may select different display languages without affecting
the display of other users.
Department Specifies a department description of up to 64 characters.
Section Specifies a section description of up to 64 characters.
User Group Select a User Group from the drop-down list.
User groups can be set in Extension Settings:
• 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired
Extension—Extension Settings
• 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable
Station—Extension Settings
User Level Select a User Level from the drop-down list.
• The Installer level account may select User (User) or User (Administrator)
levels.
• User (Administrator) level accounts may only select the User (User) level.
*1
The First Name and Last Name set on this screen are applied to system settings as follows.
• The First Name and Last Name are copied to the Extension Name for the user’s extension number in the following settings.
A. 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Main
B. 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings—Main
The format of the extension name is determined by the setting in the User Profiles—Option tab:
– Rule-A: [First Name] [space] [Last Name]
– Rule-B: [Last Name] [,] [First Name]

Notice
If the length of the name copied to the Extension Name is longer than the maximum number of characters allowed for the
setting, the letters at the end of the name exceeding the maximum will be discarded.
• The First Name and Last Name are copied to the corresponding First Name and Last Name on the following screen for the
specified mailbox number.
C. 20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting—Mailbox Parameters
• Changing the name settings in the Extension Settings or Mailbox Settings screens listed above will not change the First
Name or Last Name on this screen (the copying function is one-way).

164 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 8.2.1 Users—Add User—Single User
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Contact

Item Description

Extension No. Select an extension for the user from the drop-down list.
Device Displays the device type of the selected extension.
Extension PIN* Specifies the user’s extension PIN.*1
DDI Specifies the user’s Direct Dial In (DDI) number.
Fax* Specifies the user’s fax number.
Phone (Home)* Specifies the user’s home telephone phone number.
Phone (Mobile)* Specifies the user’s mobile telephone phone number.
Email 1–3* Specifies the user’s e-mail address(es).*2

*1
The Extension PIN set on this screen is applied to system settings as follows.
• The Extension PIN is copied to the Extension PIN for the user’s extension number in the following settings.
A. 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Main
B. 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings—Main
• If Automatic copy to Mailbox Password is checked when the Extension PIN is input, the Extension PIN is also copied to the
following settings according to the user’s designated mailbox.
– Mailbox Password in the User Profiles—Unified Message tab.
– 20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting—Mailbox Parameters— Mailbox Password

Notice
If the Extension PIN to be copied has less characters than the minimum number of characters required for the Mailbox
Password, the data will not be copied and an error message is displayed. See 26.1 UM Configuration—[7] System
Security—Subscriber— Minimum Password Length (0-16 digits).
*2
The e-mail addresses set for Email 1–3 on this screen are applied to system settings as follows.
• If Use for missed call notification is checked when the Email 1–3 information is input, the user will receive an e-mail at the
address(es) specified when a trunk call is missed.
• If Automatic copy to UM message notification is checked when the Email 1–3 information is input, the input address(es) are
copied to the following setting. This process is one-way; changes to the below setting will not change the information input on
this screen.
– 20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting—Notification Parameters— E-mail/Text Message
Device—Device No. 1, 2, 3—E-mail Address

Notice
If the Activation Key for Unified Messaging E-mail Notification (KX-NSU2xx) is not installed, or the number of activation keys is
insufficient, the e-mail address(es) will not be copied and an error message is displayed.

Unified Message

Item Description

Mailbox Number Enter the UM mailbox for the user.

Class of Service Select a COS for the user from the drop-down list.
(COS)

PC Programming Manual 165

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
8.2.1 Users—Add User—Single User
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Item Description

Prompt Registration* Click Prompt Registration to open the User Prompt Registration screen. The
following prompts can be recorded in this screen:
• Mailbox owner name
• Personal greetings (No Answer, Busy, After Hour, Caller ID Greeting,
Temporary Greeting and Absent Message)
• Interview mailbox questions
• Personal caller ID name
To record a prompt
Select a prompt number and click Play/Record.
When "Record from extension" is selected:
1. Specify the extension number of the telephone used for recording, then
click Connect.
2. When the specified extension rings, go off-hook.
3. Click Record, Stop, or Play to record or play a system prompt.
4. Click Disconnect.
When "Import from recorded file" is selected:
1. Click Browse. The Open dialogue box appears.
2. Navigate to the folder containing the WAV files you wish to import.
3. Select the desired WAV file.
4. Click Open to import the file.
5. Click Upload.
6. Click OK.
To start and stop prompt playback
1. Select the desired prompt.
2. Click Play/Record.
3. Click Play or Stop.
4. Click OK.
To delete a specific prompt
1. Select the desired prompt.
2. Click Delete.
3. Click OK.
Mailbox Password* Click to specify the password for the mailbox.

Note
If Extension PIN is input in the Contact tab, and Automatic copy to
Mailbox Password is checked, the extension PIN will be copied to this
setting and overwrite any previously input data here.
Mailbox Password Click to specify the messaging client password for the mailbox.
(Message Client)*
Note
This setting requires the installation of an Activation Key for Unified
Messaging E-mail Notification (KX-NSU2xx) for the number of users that
will be accessing their UM mailbox using a client software programme.

166 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 8.2.1 Users—Add User—Single User
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Item Description

Advanced setting* Click to view the selected mailbox’s settings. See 20.1 UM
Configuration—[1] Mailbox Settings.

Note
When User (User) level accounts access these settings, additional items
are displayed. See 8.1.1 Users—User Profiles—Advanced setting.
Unified Messaging Click to open a new window in your Web browser and access the download
Plug in site for the IMAP Session Controller software.

Telephony Feature

Item Description

Class of Service Select the COS for the user from the drop-down list.
(COS)
Forward / Do Not Specifies the user’s FWD/DND settings for trunk calls.
Disturb—For external For the FWD destination, Phone (Home) or Phone (Mobile) (as specified in
calls* the Contact tab), or a manually input number can be specified.
Forward / Do Not Specifies the user’s FWD/DND settings for extension calls.
Disturb—For internal For the FWD destination, Phone (Home) or Phone (Mobile) (as specified in
calls* the Contact tab), or a manually input number can be specified.
Speed Dialling View/ Click this button to open the Speed Dial screen. The appropriate screen (wired
Edit* extension or portable station) will be opened according to the extension
specified for the user.
Flexible Button View/ Click this button to open the Flexible Button screen. The appropriate screen
Edit* (wired extension or portable station) will be opened according to the extension
specified for the user.

Login Account

Item Description

Login ID Set a login ID for the user. (4-16 characters in length)

Note
Login IDs must be unique for each user.
Password* Set a password for the user. (4-16 characters in length)
Re-enter* Re-enter the password for confirmation.

When all relevant information has been set, click OK to add or reflect changes to the user account.

Note
If the user changes any of their own settings, they will be applied to the user the next time they log into
Web Maintenance Console.

PC Programming Manual 167

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
8.2.2 Users—Add User—Multiple Users
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

8.2.2 Users—Add User—Multiple Users

The Add User—Multiple Users screen provides a method to create multiple user profiles for a range of
extensions at one time.
1. In the From and To fields, specify the range of extensions to create profiles for.
2. Select the Create mailboxes with the same number as the extensions check box if you want to create
Unified Messaging mailboxes whose mailbox numbers are the same as the assigned extension numbers.
3. If you choose to create mailboxes in step 2, select where the mailboxes will be created:
4. Click OK.
Settings automatically programmed for each user
• First Name/Last Name
The Extension Name, which is the name displayed on extension LCDs, can be copied all at once to the
First Name and Last Name settings for each extension. The format for copying the Extension Name can
be selected as follows.
1. Click Setup ® Users ® User Profiles.
2. On the Option tab, for Rule of copy to extension name select one of the following.
– Rule-A: [First Name] [space] [Last Name]
– Rule-B: [Last Name] [,] [First Name]
For more information, refer to "5.9 Configuration of Users" in the Installation Manual.
• Login ID: The extension number (i.e., if the extension is "101", the Login ID for the user will also be
"101")
• Password: "PWD" + the extension number for the user (e.g., "PWD101")

Note
• When OK is clicked, if any extensions within the range specified in step 1 already have user accounts
associated with them, the process will not complete, and an error message will be displayed.
• If the Create mailboxes with the same number as the extensions check box is selected and a
mailbox number has already been assigned to another extension, the user profile will be created without
a UM mailbox assigned to it.
• If the maximum number of digits for a mailbox number ( Mailbox No. Max. Length (3-8) in 24.4 UM
Configuration—[5-4] System Parameters—Parameters) is less than the number of digits for the
specified extensions, the maximum number of digits for a mailbox number will be automatically
increased to match the number of digits for the specified extensions.
• A maximum of 500 users can be created at once using this feature.

168 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 8.3.1 Users—Automatic Two-way Recording—Edit a Recording
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

8.3 Users—Automatic Two-way Recording

This screen is accessible only by users designated as Automatic Two-way Recording supervisors. See
7.10.1 Utility—Automatic Two-way Recording—Supervisor Setting.
This screen can be accessed only in On-line mode.

8.3.1 Users—Automatic Two-way Recording—Edit a Recording

On this screen, a user designated as a supervisor may change Automatic Two-way Recording settings for
extensions they are supervising. Information for each extension, including the extension’s supervisor, and
Automatic Two-way Recording destination mailbox is displayed.
You can specify which types of calls will recorded for each extension.
1. For an extension, click the setting for Internal Call, External Call, or ICDG Incoming Only.
• Internal Call: Extension-to-extension calls are recorded.
• External Call: Calls with outside parties are recorded.
• ICDG Incoming Only: Only calls that are received by the extension through an incoming call
distribution group are recorded.
2. Select On or Off for that setting.
Note
To set ICDG Incoming Only to "On", External Call must first be set to "On".
3. Click OK when finished.

PC Programming Manual 169

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
8.3.2 Users—Automatic Two-way Recording—Record List
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

8.3.2 Users—Automatic Two-way Recording—Record List

Users designated as supervisors can view and play messages recorded using the Automatic Two-way
Recording feature.
1. Select one or more mailboxes, and click OK.
2. Messages recorded in the selected mailbox(es) will be displayed. You can filter the list of messages
displayed or play a message.
To filter the list of messages:
Specify any number of the following conditions, and then click Search to display the messages that match
those conditions.
• Mailbox: Specify an Automatic Two-way Recording mailbox, or select ALL.
• Extension: Specify an extension to view all calls that were recorded using Automatic Two-way
Recording for that extension, or select ALL.
• Status: Specify the status for the recorded messages in the mailbox.
• Internal/External: Specify whether the recorded conversations were intercom calls or trunk calls, or
specify both.
• Call Type: Specify whether the recorded conversations were incoming calls or outgoing calls, or specify
both.
– If Internal/External is set to "Internal" or "Both", Call Type will be set to "Both".
– If Internal/External is set to "External", Call Type can be set to "Incoming", "Outgoing", or
"Both".
• Phone Number: Specify the phone number of the party calling the recorded extension.
• Caller Name: Specify the name of the party that called the recorded extension (may not be available
for all recorded messages).
• Length: Specify the length of the recorded conversations.
• Period: Specify a time period in which calls were recorded.
To play a message:
For playback on the PC:
1. Select the check box of a message to play.
2. At the bottom of the screen, select PC.
3. Click the button.
The message will be downloaded as an audio file for playback on the PC being used to connect to Web
Maintenance Console.
For playback using the supervisor’s designated extension:
1. In the Mailbox filter, select the mailbox whose messages you want to display, and then click Search.
2. Select the check boxes for one or more messages to play.
3. At the bottom of the screen, select Phone.
4. Click the button.

Note
If ALL has been selected for the Mailbox filter, the button will be disabled. Select a specific
mailbox to enable the button.
5. In the window that appears, enter the extension number in Specify Extension of the extension at which
to play back the messages, and then click Connect.
6. Go off-hook when the extension rings to establish a call with the UM message playback system.
7. During the call, click Play to listen to the currently selected message. If multiple messages were
selected in step 2, you can click Prev and Next to cycle through and listen to the selected messages.
8. When you are finished listening to messages, click Disconnect or go on-hook.

170 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 8.4.1 Users—ICDG Management—Group Monitor
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

8.4 Users—ICDG Management

This screen is accessible only by users designated as an ACD supervisor. This screen can be accessed only
in On-line mode.

8.4.1 Users—ICDG Management—Group Monitor

Description
Users designated as an ACD supervisor can specify an ICD group to monitor, set monitoring conditions, and
begin monitoring.

Supervisor selection
Selects the ACD supervisor from a drop-down list.
This operation is available only at the User (Administrator) level.
For details about ACD supervisor settings, see 11.5.4 PBX Configuration–[3-5-4] Group—Incoming Call
Distribution Group—ACD Supervisor.

Value Range
Registered ACD supervisors

Feature Guide References

2.2.2.10 Supervisory Feature (ACD)

Start Monitor
Click the Start Monitor button to start monitoring the target ICD group. This feature requires the Call Centre
Feature Enhancement activation key. If this activation key is not installed, the Start Monitor button is greyed
out.

Feature Guide References

2.2.2.10 Supervisory Feature (ACD)

Basic Settings—Layout
Specifies the layout of monitoring results.

Value Range
1 Group, 4 Groups

Feature Guide References

2.2.2.10 Supervisory Feature (ACD)

Basic Settings—Select ICD Group

Selects the ICD groups to be managed by the ACD supervisor, from a drop-down list.

PC Programming Manual 171

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
8.4.1 Users—ICDG Management—Group Monitor
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Value Range
ICD groups

Feature Guide References

2.2.2.10 Supervisory Feature (ACD)

Options—Member Status View Mode

Specifies the display mode of the status of group members.

Value Range
Standard, Simple

Feature Guide References

2.2.2.10 Supervisory Feature (ACD)

Options—Highlighted Display Settings—Number of Current Waiting Calls (1-30)

Specifies the threshold number of current waiting calls. When this number is matched or exceeded, calls are
highlighted on the monitor screen.

Value Range
1–30

Feature Guide References

2.2.2.10 Supervisory Feature (ACD)

Options—Highlighted Display Settings—Waiting Time (0-10 min/10 sec)

Specifies the waiting time after which calls are highlighted on the monitor screen. When this setting is set to
"0", all waiting calls are highlighted.

Value Range
0–10’00

Feature Guide References

2.2.2.10 Supervisory Feature (ACD)

Options—Highlighted Display Settings—Colour Mode

Specifies the colour mode of highlighted items on the monitor screen.

Value Range
Mode 1, Mode 2, Mode 3

172 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 8.4.1 Users—ICDG Management—Group Monitor
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Feature Guide References

2.2.2.10 Supervisory Feature (ACD)

Options—Highlighted Display Settings—Blinking

Specifies whether highlighted items blink on the monitor screen.

Value Range
Enable, Disable

Feature Guide References

2.2.2.10 Supervisory Feature (ACD)

Options—Highlighted Display Settings—Full Screen Display (pixels)

Select the display resolution of the monitor screen for full screen display.

Note
When you select Automatic, the system automatically recognises the specified resolution of your PC
display and selects a full screen resolution from the following display resolutions. If any of these sizes do
not match the specified resolution for your PC display, select the resolution that is smaller than and closest
to your monitor’s maximum display resolution.

Value Range
Disable, Automatic, 1024 ´ 768, 1280 ´ 1024, 1920 ´ 1080

Feature Guide References

2.2.2.10 Supervisory Feature (ACD)

PC Programming Manual 173

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
8.4.2 Users—ICDG Management—ACD Report
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

8.4.2 Users—ICDG Management—ACD Report

Description
On this screen, users designated as an ACD supervisor can create ACD reports on ICD groups after filtering
according to group, agent, or call. Filtering types are separated by tabs.

Supervisor selection
Selects the ACD supervisor from a drop-down list.
This operation is available only at the User (Administrator) level.

Value Range
Registered ACD supervisors

Feature Guide References

2.2.2.10 Supervisory Feature (ACD)

Report Profiles
Follow the procedure below to save/load ACD report profiles. The type of ACD report (Group/Agent/Call) and
filter conditions are saved in each profile.
1. Click the Report Profiles button.
2. To load a previously saved report profile, click a profile to select it, and then click the Load button.
3. To save the current report profile, assign a name in Profile Name (max. 32 characters), and then click the
Save button.

Feature Guide References

2.2.2.10 Supervisory Feature (ACD)

Option
Follow the procedure below to set ACD report options.
1. Click the Option button.
2. In Device, Select the destination for the ACD report data:
• Local PC: After the ACD report is created, a file download will begin in your web browser. Specify a
location on your local PC to save the ACD report data.
• NAS: Save the data to a NAS. When NAS is selected, a folder selection menu becomes active.
3. Select the ACD Report - Export CSV File Format.
Value Range
Comma(,), Semicolon(;)
4. Click OK.

Feature Guide References

2.2.2.10 Supervisory Feature (ACD)

174 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 8.4.2 Users—ICDG Management—ACD Report
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Group
Group—View Report
To display a report according to groups, follow the procedure below. This feature requires the Call Centre
Feature Enhancement activation key. If this activation key is not installed, the View Report button is greyed
out.
1. Enter the report output conditions and click the View Report button.
2. The ACD Report - Group Report screen is displayed. To confirm the selected groups, click View. The
list of selected groups is displayed.
3. Results for the following items are displayed.
Item Description

Incoming Calls
Total The number of incoming calls received by the target ICD group.
Answered The number of incoming calls answered by the target ICD group.
Lost The number of incoming calls to the target ICD group cancelled by
the caller.
Overflow The number of overflowed incoming calls to the target ICD group.
Talk Time
Total The total talking time of answered calls for the target ICD group.
(HH:MM:SS)
Average The average talking time of answered calls for the target ICD group.
(HH:MM:SS)
Max. The longest talking time of answered calls for the target ICD group.
(HH:MM:SS)
Wait Time
Wait Time (Answered)
Total The total waiting time of answered calls for the target ICD group.
(HH:MM:SS)
Average The average waiting time of answered calls for the target ICD group.
(HH:MM:SS)
Max. The longest waiting time of answered calls for the target ICD group.
(HH:MM:SS)
Wait Time (Lost)
Total The total waiting time of cancelled calls for the target ICD group.
(HH:MM:SS)
Average The average waiting time of cancelled calls for the target ICD group.
(HH:MM:SS)
Max. The longest waiting time of cancelled calls for the target ICD group.
(HH:MM:SS)
Max. Waiting Calls The maximum number of calls waiting in the queue of the target ICD
group.

4. Reports can be outputted in the following 3 ways.

PC Programming Manual 175

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
8.4.2 Users—ICDG Management—ACD Report
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

•Graph: Click the Graph button to display the report in graph form on the ACD Report - Group
Graph screen. Click the Print button to print the graph.
• Export: Click the Export button to output the report to a local PC as a file.
• Print: Click the Print button to print the report.
5. Click the Close button to close the ACD Report - Group Report screen.

Feature Guide References

2.2.2.10 Supervisory Feature (ACD)

Group—Filter Settings—View Mode

Selects the monitoring view mode from a drop-down list.

Value Range
Group, Hour*1, Day, Date, Month, Trunk, Caller ID/CLIP
*1
If Hour is selected, set the monitoring range for the target group (0:00–23:59).

Feature Guide References

2.2.2.10 Supervisory Feature (ACD)

Group—Filter Settings—Select Group

To select the target group for creating a report, follow the procedure below.
1. Click the Select button.
2. Click an ICD group from those displayed in the Available Group for ACD Report window to select it. Up
to 64 groups can be selected.
3. Click ==> to move the selected ICD groups to the Selected Group for ACD Report window.
4. To remove ICD groups from the Selected Group for ACD Report window, click a group to select it and
click <==.
5. Click OK.

Feature Guide References

2.2.2.10 Supervisory Feature (ACD)

Group—Filter Settings—Select Period

Specifies the target period for the report.

Value Range
Yesterday, Last Week, Last Month, Today, This Week, This Month, Custom Period*1
*1
If Custom Period is selected, set Start Date/Start Time/End Date/End Time also.

Feature Guide References

2.2.2.10 Supervisory Feature (ACD)

176 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 8.4.2 Users—ICDG Management—ACD Report
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Agent
Agent—View Report
To display a report according to agents, follow the procedure below. This feature requires the Call Centre
Feature Enhancement activation key. If this activation key is not installed, the View Report button is greyed
out.
1. Enter the report output conditions and click the View Report button.
2. The ACD Report - Agent Report screen is displayed. To confirm the selected agents, click View. The list
of selected agents is displayed.
3. Results for the following items are displayed.
Item Description

Total Answer
Total Answer The number of calls that the target agent answers.
Talk Time
Total The total talking time for the target agent. (HH:MM:SS)
Average The average talking time for the target agent. (HH:MM:SS)
Max. The longest talking time for the target agent. (HH:MM:SS)
Login Time The total login time for the target agent. (HH:MM:SS)
Not-ready Time The total not ready time for the target agent. (HH:MM:SS)
Wrap-up Time The total wrap-up time for the target agent. (HH:MM:SS)

4. Reports can be outputted in the following 3 ways.

• Graph: Click the Graph button to display the report in graph form on the ACD Report - Agent
Graph screen. Click the Print button to print the graph.
• Export: Click the Export button to output the report to a local PC as a file.
• Print: Click the Print button to print the report.
5. Click the Close button to close the ACD Report - Agent Report screen.

Feature Guide References

2.2.2.10 Supervisory Feature (ACD)

Agent—Filter Settings—View Mode

Selects the monitoring view mode from a drop-down list.

Value Range
Agent, Hour*1, Day, Date, Month
*1
If Hour is selected, set the monitoring range for the target group (0:00–23:59).

Feature Guide References

2.2.2.10 Supervisory Feature (ACD)

PC Programming Manual 177

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
8.4.2 Users—ICDG Management—ACD Report
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Agent—Filter Settings—Select Agent

To select the target agent for creating a report, follow the procedure below.
1. Click the Select button.
2. Click an agent from those displayed in the Available Agent for ACD Report window to select it. Up to
8192 agents are displayed, and up to 128 agents can be selected from the list.
3. Click ==> to move the selected agents to the Selected Agent for ACD Report window.
4. To remove agents from the Selected Agent for ACD Report window, click an agent to select it and click
<==.
5. Click OK.

Feature Guide References

2.2.2.10 Supervisory Feature (ACD)

Agent—Filter Settings—Select Period

Specifies the target period for the report.

Value Range
Yesterday, Last Week, Last Month, Today, This Week, This Month, Custom Period*1
*1
If Custom Period is selected, set Start Date/Start Time/End Date/End Time also.

Feature Guide References

2.2.2.10 Supervisory Feature (ACD)

Call
Call—View Report
To display a report according to calls, follow the procedure below. This feature requires the Call Centre Feature
Enhancement activation key. If this activation key is not installed, the View Report button is greyed out.
1. Enter the report output conditions and click the View Report button.
2. The ACD Report - Call Report screen is displayed.
Item Description

ACD Report - Call Report

Start Date The start date of the call.
Start Time The start time of the call. (HH:MM:SS)
End Date The end date of the call.
End Time The end time of the call. (HH:MM:SS)
Result The processing result. (Answered/Abandoned/Overflowed/
Unanswered*1)
ICDG The incoming ICD Group number.
Incoming Agent The extension number of the agent that received the call.*2
Answering Agent The answering member. (Extension Name/Extension Number)
Talk Time The talking time. (HH:MM:SS)

178 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 8.4.2 Users—ICDG Management—ACD Report
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Item Description

Wait Time The waiting time. (HH:MM:SS)*3

Trunk The incoming trunk group number.
Caller ID/CLIP The caller’s number.

*1
Unanswered is displayed when the agent did not answer the call if the ICD group distribution method is set to Uniform Call
Distribution or Priority Hunting.
*2
Displayed only when the ICD group distribution method is set to Uniform Call Distribution or Priority Hunting.
*3
The unanswered wait time is displayed when the call was Unanswered and the ICD group distribution method is set to Uniform
Call Distribution or Priority Hunting.

Note
The displays described in *1–*3 can be changed through system programming. For details, see
"11.5.3 PBX Configuration—[3-5-3] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Miscellaneous—
Options—Call Log for Built-in ACD Report—ICD Group Unanswered Call Log".
3. Reports can be outputted in the following 2 ways.
• Export: Click the Export button to output the report to a local PC as a file.
• Print: Click the Print button to print the report.
4. Click the Close button to close the ACD Report - Call Report screen.

PC Programming Manual References

11.5.3 PBX Configuration—[3-5-3] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Miscellaneous—
Options—Call Log for Built-in ACD Report—ICD Group Unanswered Call Log

Feature Guide References

2.2.2.10 Supervisory Feature (ACD)

Call—Filter Settings—Select Group

Follow the procedure below to select the target group for creating a report.
1. Click the Select button.
2. Click the ICD group name you want to analyse from the ICD group names displayed on the Available
Group for ACD Report window. (Maximum 64 groups displayed)
3. Click ==> to move the ICD group you selected in step 2 to the Selected Group for ACD Report window.
(Maximum 64 groups)
To delete an ICD group from the Selected Group for ACD Report window, click the ICD group name,
and then click <==.
4. Click OK.

Feature Guide References

2.2.2.10 Supervisory Feature (ACD)

Call—Filter Settings—Select Period

Specifies the target period for the report.

PC Programming Manual 179

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
8.4.2 Users—ICDG Management—ACD Report
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Value Range
Yesterday, Last Week, Last Month, Today, This Week, This Month, Custom Period*1
*1
If Custom Period is selected, set Start Date/Start Time/End Date/End Time also.

Feature Guide References

2.2.2.10 Supervisory Feature (ACD)

Call—Filter Settings—Call Filter Mode

Calls that are the target of an ACD report can be filtered in the following 3 ways.

Value Range
• Caller ID/CLIP Filter: Filtering according to caller ID or CLIP
1. Click Caller ID/CLIP Filter.
2. Set the target caller ID or CLIP (maximum: 10).
• Talk/Wait Duration Filter: Filtering according to continuous talking or waiting time
1. Click Talk/Wait Duration Filter.
2. Select Talk Time or Wait Time from a drop-down list.
3. Set the filtering target duration using one of the following 2 methods.
To set a minimum duration, click Min., and set the duration time (0:00–23:59).
To set a maximum duration, click Max., and set the duration time (0:00–23:59).
• Lost Call Filter: Filtering according to lost calls
1. Click Lost Call Filter.

Feature Guide References

2.2.2.10 Supervisory Feature (ACD)

180 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 8.4.3 Users—ICDG Management—ACD Scheduled Export
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

8.4.3 Users—ICDG Management—ACD Scheduled Export

On this screen, users can register or delete the schedule for the automatic export of ACD Report data. The
PBX system will automatically export the selected ACD Report data at the scheduled times to a USB memory
device or NAS connected to the PBX. (ACD scheduled exports cannot be made to a local PC.) For details
about ACD reports, see 8.4.2 Users—ICDG Management—ACD Report.

Follow the procedure below to schedule the automatic export of ACD Report data.
1. Click to create a new scheduled export.
2. In Description, enter a description for the export (maximum 32 characters). This information is shown as
the description of the ACD Scheduled Export.
3. Select a report profile to be used for the scheduled export. If no report profile is selected, all items will be
exported.
For the details about report profiles, see 8.4.2 Users—ICDG Management—ACD Report— Report
Profiles.
4. Specify the file name for the exported ACD report data (maximum 32 characters).
5. Set the frequency (daily, weekly, etc.) and time of day for when the export should take place.
6. Select the type of CSV separator value to be used for the exported CSV files.
7. In Device, select a USB memory device or NAS, and then specify the folder on the selected device where
you want to save the ACD scheduled export file.
8. Click OK.
Note
• Installer and User (Administrator) level accounts can select a supervisor from the Supervisor
selection drop-down list in 8.4.2 Users—ICDG Management—ACD Report.
Each supervisor can register up to 10 schedules for the automatic export of ACD reports.
• If an ACD report export is scheduled and a USB memory device has been selected in Device, but
a USB memory device is not connected to the PBX at the time of the scheduled export, the ACD
scheduled export will not be performed.
• When using a NAS, make sure there is sufficient network bandwidth.

Editing ACD export schedules

1. From the ACD Report–ACD Scheduled Export screen, select the schedule you wish to edit.
2. Click .
3. Edit the settings as desired.
4. Click OK.
Deleting a scheduled export
1. From the ACD Report–ACD Scheduled Export screen, select the schedule you wish to delete.
2. Click .
3. Click OK.

PC Programming Manual 181

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
8.4.4 Users—ICDG Management—ACD Export History
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

8.4.4 Users—ICDG Management—ACD Export History

The export history for ACD Report data can be checked on this screen. The following items are recorded for
each export:
• Date/Time
• Description
• Parameters
• Report Profile
• Completion Status
This screen can be accessed only in On-line mode.

Note
• Installer and User (Administrator) level accounts can select a supervisor from the Select Supervisor
drop-down list in 8.4.2 Users—ICDG Management—ACD Report.
• The date/time display can be switched between 12 hour and 24 hour in 10.9 PBX
Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options—Option 1— PT LCD—Time Display.

To back up the export history of ACD Report data

1. Click Backup.
2. Click OK.
3. Specify the folder and file name to export the history file to and click Save.
The export history of ACD Report data on the current screen is saved as a text file.
When you export the ACD report manually, a hyphen will be displayed for the report profile in the ACD
Report data export history.

To delete the records for exporting exports of ACD Report data

1. Click Clear.
2. Click OK.
The records for the export history of ACD Report data on the current screen are deleted.

182 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Section 9
PBX Configuration—[1] Configuration

This section serves as reference operating instructions

for the Configuration menu of the PBX Configuration
menu of the Setup screen of Web Maintenance
Console.

PC Programming Manual 183

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot

The operating characteristics associated with each service card can be programmed.
Move the mouse pointer over an installed card to display the menu of options for that card. To view a summary
of status and versions for all cards installed in the PBX, click the Slot Summary button (see 9.2 PBX
Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property).

To select a shelf in the PBX

Click one of the following buttons to view the shelf in the PBX:
• Basic Unit: View the basic unit.
• Expansion Unit1: View the physical card shelf of the Expansion Unit connected to connection port 1 of
the EXP-M card.
• Expansion Unit2: View the physical card shelf of the Expansion Unit connected to connection port 2 of
the EXP-M card.
• Expansion Unit3: View the physical card shelf of the Expansion Unit connected to connection port 3 of
the EXP-M card.
• Virtual Slot: View the virtual card shelf.

To install a new physical card to the PBX

1. Click on the name of the card to install in the list on the right.
An image of the card will be displayed, and information about the card will be shown.
2. Click and drag the image of the card to the slot, and release it.
The card will move into the slot space.
3. Click OK to confirm.

To add new virtual cards to the PBX

1. Click on the name of the card to install at the top.
2. Click and drag the image of the card to the slot, and release it. The card will move into the slot space.
3. Click OK to confirm.

To access card properties

1. Move the mouse pointer over a card.
A menu will be shown under the mouse pointer.
2. Select Card Property.
The property screen for that card will be displayed.

To access port properties of cards

1. Move the mouse pointer over a card. For combination physical cards, move the mouse pointer over the
individual card name.
A menu will be shown under the mouse pointer.
2. Select Port Property.
The property screen for that card’s port or ports will be displayed.

184 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

To remove a card from the PBX

1. Move the mouse pointer over the card to remove.
A menu will be shown under the mouse pointer.
2. Select Delete.
3. Click OK to confirm.
The card will be removed.

Note
The cards in Slot No.1-No.3 of the Basic Unit and the card in Slot No.1 of the Expansion Unit cannot
be deleted because these cards are pre-installed.

To display the status information of a card

1. Move the mouse pointer over the card.
A menu will be shown under the mouse pointer.
2. Select Status.
The status information of the card will be displayed in a pop-up window.

To change the status (INS/OUS) of a card (On-line mode only)

1. Move the mouse pointer over the card.
A menu will be shown under the mouse pointer.
2. Select the desired status:
• Click INS to set the card to in-service status.
• Click OUS to set the card to out-of-service status.

To access IP-PT port properties

1. When you place the mouse cursor over the IP Phone Registration button on the Slot screen, the following
choices appear. Click an option to open a port properties programming screen:

IP-PT: For KX-NT300/KX-NT500 series and KX-NT265 (software version 2.00 or later) IP-PTs
(® 9.14 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property—V-IPEXT)

SIP-MLT: For KX-UT series SIP phones, S-PSs, and SIP-CSs

(® 9.20 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property—V-UTEXT)

Standard SIP Phone: For third party SIP Phones

(® 9.16 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property—V-SIPEXT)

Option: Opens the Site Property—Main screen.

(® 9.2.2 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property—Site—Main)

PC Programming Manual 185

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Card Types Supported by the Main Unit

Max. No/ Max. No/Line
Installation Type Card Type Card Programming
Card Type Type
9.11 PBX
V-IPGW16: Virtual Configuration—[1-1]
16-Channel VoIP 2 Configuration—Slot
Gateway Card —Shelf
4 Property—V-IPGW
(Trunk) 9.8 PBX
V-SIPGW16: Virtual Configuration—[1-1]
16-Channel SIP Trunk 4 Configuration—Slot
Card —Shelf
Property—V-SIPGW
9.13 PBX
V-IPEXT32: Virtual
Configuration—[1-1]
Virtual 32-Channel VoIP 4
Configuration—Slot—Card
Extension Card
Property—V-IPEXT
9.15 PBX
V-SIPEXT32: Virtual
4 Configuration—[1-1]
32-Channel SIP 4
(Extension) Configuration—Slot—Card
Extension Card
Property—V-SIPEXT
V-UTEXT32: Virtual 9.19 PBX
32-Channel SIP Configuration—[1-1]
4
Proprietary Extension Configuration—Slot—Card
Card Property—V-UTEXT
9.17 PBX
V-IPCS4: Virtual 4 IP
8 Configuration—[1-1]
Cell Station Interface 8
(IP CS) Configuration—Slot—Card
Card
Property—V-IPCS
9.23 PBX
LCOT6: 6-port 1 Configuration—[1-1]
1
Analogue Trunk Card (Trunk) Configuration—Slot—Card
Property - LCO type
Pre-Installed DLC2: 2-port Digital 1 9.21 PBX
1
Extension Card (Extension) Configuration—[1-1]
Configuration—Slot—Card
MCSLC16: 16-port 1 Property—Extension Type
1
SLT Card (Extension)

186 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Max. No/ Max. No/Line

Installation Type Card Type Card Programming
Card Type Type
9.23 PBX
LCOT6: 6-port Configuration—[1-1]
1
Analogue Trunk Card Configuration—Slot—Card
Property - LCO type
PRI23: PRI23 Trunk 9.25 PBX
1
Card Configuration—[1-1]
Configuration—Slot—Card
Property - BRI type/PRI
1 type
PRI30/E1: PRI30/E1 (Trunk) 9.28 PBX
1
Trunk Card Configuration—[1-1]
Option - Trunk / Configuration—Slot—Card
Doorphone Slot Property—E1 type
BRI2: BRI2 Trunk Card 1 9.25 PBX
Configuration—[1-1]
BRI4: BRI4 Trunk Card Configuration—Slot—Card
1 Property - BRI type/PRI
type
9.34 PBX
DPH2: 2-port Configuration—[1-1]
1
Doorphone Interface 1 Configuration—Slot—Card
(Doorphone)
Card Property—DOORPHONE
Card
DHLC4: 4-port Digital
2
Hybrid Extension Card
DLC8: 8-port Digital 2
2
Extension Card (Extension)
9.21 PBX
Option - MCSLC8: 8-port SLT Configuration—[1-1]
2
Extension Slot Card Configuration—Slot—Card
Property—Extension Type
DLC16: 16-port Digital
1
Extension Card 1
MCSLC16: 16-port (Extension)
1
SLT Card

Card Types Supported by Expansion Units

Max. No/ Max. No/Line
Installation Type Card Type Card Programming
Card Type Type
9.21 PBX
MCSLC16: 16-port 1 Configuration—[1-1]
Pre-Installed 1
SLT Card (Extension) Configuration—Slot—Card
Property—Extension Type

PC Programming Manual 187

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Max. No/ Max. No/Line

Installation Type Card Type Card Programming
Card Type Type
9.23 PBX
LCOT6: 6-port Configuration—[1-1]
2
Analogue Trunk Card Configuration—Slot—Card
Property - LCO type
PRI23: PRI23 Trunk 9.25 PBX
1
Card Configuration—[1-1]
Configuration—Slot—Card
Property - BRI type/PRI
2 type
PRI30/E1: PRI30/E1 (Trunk) 9.28 PBX
1
Trunk Card Configuration—[1-1]
Option - Trunk / Configuration—Slot—Card
Doorphone Slot Property—E1 type
BRI2: BRI2 Trunk Card 2 9.25 PBX
Configuration—[1-1]
BRI4: BRI4 Trunk Card Configuration—Slot—Card
2 Property - BRI type/PRI
type
9.34 PBX
DPH2: 2-port Configuration—[1-1]
1
Doorphone Interface 1 Configuration—Slot—Card
(Doorphone)
Card Property—DOORPHONE
Card
DHLC4: 4-port Digital
2
Hybrid Extension Card
DLC8: 8-port Digital 2
2
Extension Card (Extension)
9.21 PBX
Option - MCSLC8: 8-port SLT Configuration—[1-1]
2
Extension Slot Card Configuration—Slot—Card
Property—Extension Type
DLC16: 16-port Digital
1
Extension Card 1
MCSLC16: 16-port (Extension)
1
SLT Card

For more information on the virtual cards and other optional cards, see the following sections in the Installation
Manual:
→ 4.4 Virtual Cards
→ 4.5 Physical Trunk and Extension Cards
For information about cards supported by Expansion Units, see System Components for Expansion Unit in the
Installation Manual.

Common Programming Reference Items

When programming settings for cards, extensions, and other devices using Web Maintenance Console,
depending on the screen being accessed, the following items may be listed on the screen for your reference:

188 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Item Description

Shelf Indicates the physical or virtual shelf where the card, extension, or device is located
in the PBX.
• Shelf "1" is the physical shelf of the Main Unit.
• Shelf "2" corresponds to the Expansion unit connected to EXP-M port 1.
• Shelf "3" corresponds to the Expansion unit connected to EXP-M port 2.
• Shelf "4" corresponds to the Expansion unit connected to EXP-M port 3.
Slot Indicates the slot number within the shelf where the card, extension, or device is
located.
Port Indicates the port number assigned to the extension or device.

PC Programming Manual 189

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
9.2.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property—Main
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

9.2 PBX Configuration—[1-1]

Configuration—Slot—System Property

9.2.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System

Property—Main
The properties of the PBX system can be specified.

Main
DSP CODEC G.711 only (SIP extension)
Specifies whether or not to only use the G.711 codec for SIP extension calls.

Value Range
Enable, Disable

DSP CODEC G.711 only (IP-GW)

Specifies whether or not to only use the G.711 codec for IP trunk calls.

Value Range
Enable, Disable

DSP CODEC Priority-1 value only (others)

Specifies whether or not to only use the priority 1 codec set for the following types of calls:
• IP extension calls
• SIP trunk calls
Value Range
Enable, Disable

System Speed Dial Download For UT Extensions

Specifies the maximum number of system speed dial entries that will be downloaded to KX-UT series SIP
phones.

Value Range
0–300

PC Programming Manual References

9.20 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property—V-UTEXT—Option— System Speed
Dial Download

190 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 9.2.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property—Main
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

System Status
CPU Usage
Displays the system CPU’s current processor load, expressed as a percentage of total capacity (reference
only).

Value Range
0–100%

Memory Usage
Displays the amount of system memory currently being used, displayed as a percentage of total capacity
(reference only).

Value Range
0–100%

SD card Usage
Displays the amount of SD Memory Card memory currently being used, displayed as a percentage of total
capacity (reference only).

Value Range
0–100%

V-IPGW
Call Signalling Model
Specifies whether to carry out a call control (H.225) process directly between the cards or through a gatekeeper.

Value Range
Direct, GateKeeper

Gatekeeper Connection Checking Interval (*60s)

Specifies the time between periodic checks of connection to the gatekeeper.

Value Range
0 (disabled), 1–1440

Terminal type to Gatekeeper

Specifies the connection service type notified to the gatekeeper.

Value Range
Terminal, Gateway

Gatekeeper ID to Gatekeeper
Specifies the authentication ID notified to the gatekeeper.

PC Programming Manual 191

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
9.2.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property—Main
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Value Range
Max. 20 Characters

Bandwidth to Gatekeeper
Specifies the used bandwidth information notified to the gatekeeper.

Value Range
1–255 kbps

Primary Gatekeeper IP Address

Specifies the IP address of the primary gatekeeper.

Value Range
1.0.0.0–223.255.255.255

Primary Gatekeeper Port Number

Specifies the port number of the primary gatekeeper.

Value Range
1–65535

Secondary Gatekeeper IP Address

Specifies the IP address of the secondary gatekeeper.

Value Range
1.0.0.0–223.255.255.255

Secondary Gatekeeper Port Number

Specifies the port number of the secondary gatekeeper.

Value Range
1–65535

H.225 Port Number

Specifies the port number for the H.225 protocol (call control) in an H.323 protocol suite.

Value Range
1–65535

RAS Port Number

Specifies the port number for the H.225 protocol (RAS) in an H.323 protocol suite.

Value Range
1–65535

192 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 9.2.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property—Main
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

QSIG Connectionless Tunnelling TCP Port Number

Specifies the TCP port number for connectionless tunnelling between gateway devices at different locations
in a QSIG network.

Value Range
1–65535

QSIG Connectionless Tunnelling UDP Port Number

Specifies the UDP port number for connectionless tunnelling between gateway devices at different locations
in a QSIG network.

Value Range
1–65535

H.323 Dynamic Port Number

Specifies the starting port number from which 448 contiguous ports are used as dynamic ports.

Value Range
1–65000

V-IPGW–GW Settings–Main
GW Name
Specifies the name of the destination gateway device for programming reference.

Value Range
Max. 20 characters

GW IP Address
Specifies the IP address of the destination gateway device.

Value Range
1.0.0.0–223.255.255.255

GW Group
Specifies the number of the gateway group to which the gateway entry belongs. A maximum of 256 gateway
groups can be created.

Value Range
1–256, None

Connection for IP-GW

Enables the use of the Voice Activity Detection feature between the V-IPGW and KX-TDE/KX-TDA IP-GW
cards.

PC Programming Manual 193

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
9.2.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property—Main
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Value Range
Disable (TDE), Enable (TDA)

Protocol
Specifies the type of protocol for connectionless tunnelling between gateway devices at different locations in
a QSIG network.

Value Range
TCP, UDP

Progress Tone Send Mode

Specifies whether to send call progress tones to the destination. When selecting External, call progress tones
are audible at the destination.

Value Range
External, Internal

V-IPGW–GW Settings–Option 1
GW Name
Specifies the name of the destination gateway device for programming reference.

Value Range
Max. 20 characters

IP Codec Priority—1st, 2nd, 3rd

Specifies the priority of the codecs to be used. For fax communications, it is necessary to specify G.711A or
G.711Mu for 1st priority.

Value Range
For 1st:
G.711A, G.711Mu, G.729A

For 2nd and 3rd:

None, G.711A, G.711Mu, G.729A

Packet Sampling Time (G.711A)

Specifies the time interval between measurements (samples) of sound data during a conversation. The smaller
this number, the higher the quality of the transmitted sound.

Value Range
20 ms, 30 ms, 40 ms, 50 ms, 60 ms

194 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 9.2.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property—Main
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Packet Sampling Time (G.711Mu)

Specifies the time interval between measurements (samples) of sound data during a conversation. The smaller
this number, the higher the quality of the transmitted sound.

Value Range
20 ms, 30 ms, 40 ms, 50 ms, 60 ms

Packet Sampling Time (G.729A)

Specifies the time interval between measurements (samples) of sound data during a conversation. The smaller
this number, the higher the quality of the transmitted sound.

Value Range
20 ms, 30 ms, 40 ms, 50 ms, 60 ms

V-IPGW–GW Settings–Option 2
GW Name
Specifies the name of the destination gateway device for programming reference.

Value Range
Max. 20 characters

Voice Activity Detection for G.711

Enables the use of the Voice Activity Detection feature for the G.711 codec. This feature conserves bandwidth
by detecting silent periods during a call and suppressing the packets of silence from being sent to the network.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

FAX Sending Method

Specifies the method of transporting the fax signal.

Value Range
G.711 Inband, T.38

Maximum Bit Rate

Specifies the maximum bit rate of the fax signal.

Value Range
No Speed Limit, 2400 bps, 4800 bps, 7200 bps, 9600 bps, 12000 bps, 14400 bps

FAX Detection Ability

Enables the use of the FAX Detection Ability feature. Since fax signals using a codec other than G.711 cannot
be received accurately at the destination, this feature automatically switches the codec to G.711 to enable
end-to-end fax signal relay over the network.

PC Programming Manual 195

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
9.2.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property—Main
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Value Range
Disable, Enable

PC Programming Manual References

9.2.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property—Main—V-IPGW–GW Settings–Option
1— IP Codec Priority—1st, 2nd, 3rd

DTMF
Specifies the method to transport DTMF tones.

Value Range
Inband, Outband (RFC2833), Outband (H.245)

Payload Type
Specifies the payload type for DTMF tones using RFC2833. Programming this parameter is only necessary if
DTMF is set to Outband (RFC2833).

Value Range
96–127

V-IPGW–GW Settings–Option 3
GW Name
Specifies the name of the destination gateway device for programming reference.

Value Range
Max. 20 characters

T38 FAX Max Datagram

Specifies the maximum datagram size when using the T.38 protocol.

Value Range
272–512

T38 FAX UDPTL Error Correction – Redundancy

Specifies whether to enable the redundancy feature when using the T.38 protocol.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

T38 FAX UDPTL Redundancy count for T.30 messages

Specifies the redundancy count for T.30 messages when using the T.38 protocol.

196 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 9.2.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property—Main
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Value Range
0–7

T38 FAX UDPTL Redundancy count for data

Specifies the redundancy count for data when using the T.38 protocol.

Value Range
0–3

T38 FAX Rate Management Method

Specifies the rate management method when using the T.38 protocol.

Value Range
Transferred TCF, Local TCF

V-IPGW–DN2IP
Leading Number
Specifies the leading digits in dialled numbers by which to associate calls with the appropriate destination.

Value Range
Max. 30 digits (consisting of 0–9)

Remaining Number of Digits

Specifies the number of digits to be dialled following the leading number to access the destination.

Value Range
0–29

GW No./GW Group Selection

Specifies the type of destination when making calls: a gateway device or a gateway group.

Value Range
GW Group, GW No.

GW Group
Specifies the number of the destination gateway group. This setting is only available when GW No./GW Group
Selection on this screen is set to GW Group.

Value Range
1–256

PC Programming Manual 197

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
9.2.2 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property—Site
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

GW No.
Specifies the number of the destination gateway device. This setting is only available when GW No./GW Group
Selection on this screen is set to GW No..

Value Range
1–512

9.2.2 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System

Property—Site
The properties of the PBX site can be specified. When you place the mouse cursor over the System
Property button and click the Site button, the Main and NSVM buttons are displayed. Click a button to open
that site property screen.

Main
Site Name
Indicates the site name of the PBX (reference only).

Value Range
Site Name

Location (MIB)
Indicates the MIB info - SysLocation setting in 27.3.3 Network Service—[3-3] Client Feature—SNMP
Agent (reference only).

Value Range
Max. 255 characters

PBX Region
Indicates the region of the PBX (reference only).

Value Range
PBX Region

IP Address
Indicates the IP address of the PBX (reference only).

Value Range
1.0.0.0 - 255.255.255.255

MAC Address
Indicates the MAC address of the PBX (reference only).

198 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 9.2.2 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property—Site
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Value Range
00:00:00:00:00:00–FF:FF:FF:FF:FF:FF

PBX Version
Indicates the software version of the PBX (reference only).

Value Range
0000.00000 - 9999.99999

Data Version
Indicates the version number of the data (reference only).

Value Range
0000.0000 - 9999.9999

SRAM Version
Indicates the version number of the SRAM (reference only).

Value Range
000 - 999

System Up Time
Indicates the system up time (reference only).

Value Range
Days, Hours and Minutes

Storage Memory Size

Indicates the size of the installed storage memory card (reference only).

Value Range
Card Size

Area ID for logical partition
Specifies the area ID for the Logical Partitioning feature.

Value Range
1 - 16

PC Programming Manual References

7.3.5 Utility—Log—Call Control Log
10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options—Option 2— Applying logical partitioning

PC Programming Manual 199

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
9.2.2 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property—Site
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Feature Guide References

2.11.8 Trunk Call Limitation

P2P Group
Specifies the peer-to-peer group of the site.

Value Range
1–32

Feature Guide References

5.2.3 Peer-to-Peer (P2P) Connection

P2P Group Name

Indicates the selected peer-to-peer group’s name (reference only).

Value Range
P2P Group Name

Feature Guide References

5.2.3 Peer-to-Peer (P2P) Connection

LLDP Packet Sending Ability

Specifies whether the PBX notifies IP-CSs (KX-NS0154 only) to enable or disable the ability to send and receive
LLDP packets.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

IP Terminal Registration Mode

Specifies the IP terminal registration mode for registering IP telephones to the PBX.

Value Range
Manual, Full Automatic, Extension Input

Installation Manual References

5.4.1 Easy Setup Wizard

IP-CS Registration Mode

Specifies the registration mode for registering IP-CSs to the PBX.

Value Range
Manual, Full Automatic

200 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 9.2.2 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property—Site
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

SIP over TCP/IP (V-SIPGW) *)

Specifies whether or not to use SIP over TCP/IP protocol for the site. When this setting is enabled, SIP trunks
cannot use the UDP/IP protocol.

Note
If this setting is changed, the V-IPGW cards and/or V-SIPGW cards installed at the site will be deleted.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

VoIP-DSP Options
The settings in this tab relate to IP extensions and IP trunks.

IP Extension Count of BGM

Specifies how many IP-PTs connected to the mother board can send out BGM.

Value Range
0–117

Feature Guide References

2.30.1 Background Music (BGM)

Echo Cancellation Ports

Specifies the number of ports to be used for echo cancellation.

Value Range
0–64

Send Music On Hold to IP trunk (for P2P conversation)

Enables the sending of hold music to an IP trunk during a P2P connection call between an IP extension and
IP trunk.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

Jitter Compensation Operation for G.711

Enables the use of a jitter buffer feature for voice communications using the G.711 codec.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

P2P Group Jitter Compensation Operation for G.711 FAX

Enables the use of a jitter buffer feature for fax communications using the G.711 codec.

PC Programming Manual 201

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
9.2.2 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property—Site
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Value Range
Disable, Enable

Jitter Compensation Operation for G.729A

Enables the use of a jitter buffer feature for communications using the G.729A codec.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

Jitter Buffer Delay Min. for Voice

Specifies the minimum size of the jitter buffer for voice communications.

Value Range
0–200 ms

Jitter Buffer Delay Max. for Voice

Specifies the maximum size of the jitter buffer for voice communications.

Value Range
0–200 ms

Jitter Buffer Delay Init. for Voice

Specifies the initial size of the jitter buffer for voice communications.

Value Range
0–200 ms

Jitter Buffer Adaptation Period for Voice

Specifies the length of time that the jitter buffer is applied for voice communications.

Value Range
1000–65530 ms

Jitter Buffer Delay Min. for FAX

Specifies the minimum size of the jitter buffer for fax communications.

Value Range
0–200 ms

Jitter Buffer Delay Max. for FAX

Specifies the maximum size of the jitter buffer for fax communications.

Value Range
0–200 ms

202 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 9.2.2 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property—Site
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Jitter Buffer Delay Init. for FAX

Specifies the initial size of the jitter buffer for fax communications.

Value Range
0–200 ms

Jitter Buffer Adaptation Period for FAX

Specifies the length of time that the jitter buffer is applied for fax communications.

Value Range
1000–65530 ms

DTMF Detection Level for G.711A

Specifies the level of DTMF detection for the G.711A codec.

Value Range
-45– -12 dB

DTMF Detection Level for G.711Mu

Specifies the level of DTMF detection for the G.711Mu codec.

Value Range
-39– -6 dB

CNG Signal Effective Detection Width 1 (ON)

Specifies the length of time that the PBX detects the CNG signal.

Value Range
20–5000 ms

CNG Signal Effective Detection Width 2 (OFF)

Specifies the length of time that the PBX waits until another CNG signal is detected.

Value Range
20–5000 ms

CNG Signal Fixation Detection Counter

Specifies the number of times the CNG signal must be detected before the PBX proceeds the fax operation.

Value Range
1–3

CNG Signal Fixation Detection Pattern

Specifies the CNG signal pattern to be detected before the PBX proceeds the fax operation.

PC Programming Manual 203

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
9.2.2 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property—Site
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Value Range
OFF, ON

CED Signal Fixation Detection Time

Specifies the minimum length of time required for the CED (called station identification) signal to be detected
by the PBX.

Value Range
50 ´ n (n=1–100) ms

CNG Signal Effective Detection Width 1 (ON) - SIP Extension

Specifies the length of time that the PBX detects the CNG signal for SIP extensions.

Value Range
20 ´ n (n=1–250) ms

CNG Signal Effective Detection Width 2 (OFF) - SIP Extension

Specifies the length of time that the PBX waits until another CNG signal is detected for SIP extensions.

Value Range
20 ´ n (n=1–250) ms

CNG Signal Fixation Detection Counter - SIP Extension

Specifies the number of times the CNG signal must be detected before the PBX proceeds the fax operation
for SIP extensions.

Value Range
1–3

CNG Signal Fixation Detection Pattern - SIP Extension

Specifies the CNG signal pattern to be detected before the PBX proceeds the fax operation for SIP extensions.

Value Range
Off, On

CED Signal Fixation Detection Time - SIP Extension

Specifies the minimum length of time required for the CED (called station identification) signal to be detected
by the PBX for SIP extensions.

Value Range
50 ´ n (n=1–100) ms

204 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 9.2.2 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property—Site
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

T38 FAX Transmit Level (Network to PBX) A-Law

Specifies the transmission level of G3 fax signals after being converted from T.38 protocol packets, when the
codec used is G.711A.

Value Range
-13–2 dB

T38 FAX Transmit Level (Network to PBX) Mu-Law

Specifies the transmission level of G3 fax signals after being converted from T.38 protocol packets, when the
codec used is G.711Mu.

Value Range
-7–8 dB

T38 FAX Transmit Level A-Law - SIP Extension

Specifies the transmission level of G3 fax signals after being converted from T.38 protocol packets, when the
codec used is G.711A for SIP extensions.

Value Range
-13–2 dB

T38 FAX Transmit Level Mu-Law - SIP Extension

Specifies the transmission level of G3 fax signals after being converted from T.38 protocol packets, when the
codec used is G.711Mu for SIP extensions.

Value Range
-7–8 dB

Port Number
Voice (RTP) UDP Port No. (Server)
Specifies the UDP port used by the system to transmit and receive RTP (Real-time Transfer Protocol) data.
This must be changed if another network application is using the same port.
For voice communications, the system uses 128 contiguous UDP ports, starting from the port number specified
here.

Value Range
1024–64000

Feature Guide References

5.2.1 IP Proprietary Telephone (IP-PT)

Voice (RTP) UDP Port No. (IP-PT / SIP-MLT)

Specifies the UDP port used to transmit and receive RTP (Real-time Transfer Protocol) data on the IP-PT side.
This must be changed if another network application is using the same port.

PC Programming Manual 205

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
9.2.2 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property—Site
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

For voice communications, an IP-PT uses 128 contiguous UDP ports, starting from the port number specified
here.
To change the value displayed here, click Common Settings and set the desired value.

Value Range
1024–65535

Feature Guide References

5.2.1 IP Proprietary Telephone (IP-PT)

UDP Port No. for SIP Extension Server

Specifies the UDP port number used for the SIP Extension server.
To change the value displayed here, click Common Settings and set the desired value.

Value Range
1024–65535

Feature Guide References

5.2.2 SIP (Session Initiation Protocol) Extension

CWMP (HTTP) Port No. for SIP-MLT

Specifies the HTTP port of the PBX-side ACS for control communication with KX-UT series SIP phones.

Value Range
0–65535 (Setting "0" will close port access for this feature)

Feature Guide References

5.2.2.3 Simple Remote Connection

CWMP (HTTPS) Port No. for SIP-MLT

Specifies the HTTPS port of the PBX-side ACS for control communication with KX-UT series SIP phones.

Value Range
0–65535 (Setting "0" will close port access for this feature)

Feature Guide References

5.2.2.3 Simple Remote Connection

Data Transmission Protocol (HTTP) Port No. for SIP-MLT

Specifies the HTTP port of the PBX-side ACS for data communication with KX-UT series SIP phones.

Value Range
0–65535 (Setting "0" will close port access for this feature)

206 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 9.2.2 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property—Site
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Feature Guide References

5.2.2.3 Simple Remote Connection

Data Transmission Protocol (HTTPS) Port No. for SIP-MLT

Specifies the HTTPS port of the PBX-side ACS for data communication with KX-UT series SIP phones.

Value Range
0–65535 (Setting "0" will close port access for this feature)

Feature Guide References

5.2.2.3 Simple Remote Connection

Firmware Update Port No. for IP-PT/IP-CS (Media Relay)

Specifies the IP-PT/IP-CS firmware update port number.

Value Range
0–65535

LOGIN Port Number

Specifies the port number used to login to the PBX via the LAN.

Value Range
1024–65535

CTI Port Number

Specifies the port number used to operate CTI via the LAN. Selecting "0" disables the 3rd Party CTI feature.

Value Range
1024–65535

Feature Guide References

2.26 Computer Telephony Integration (CTI) Features

Built-in Communication Assistant Server

Specifies the port number for the Communication Assistant (CA) application.

Value Range
1024–65535

PC Programming Manual References

12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 9— Built-in
Communication Assistant

PC Programming Manual 207

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
9.2.2 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property—Site
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 9— Built-in

Communication Assistant

Feature Guide References

2.26.2 CA (Communication Assistant)

LAN Status
LINK for Main Port
Indicates the current connection status of the main port (reference only).

Value Range
1: Disconnect, 0: Connect

Media Relay
Common—NAT - External IP Address
Specifies the NAT device external IP address (common).

Value Range
Blank, 1.0.0.1–223.255.255.254

Feature Guide References

5.2.2.3 Simple Remote Connection

IP Extension / IP-CS—NAT - MGCP Server Port No.

Specifies the outside-facing MGCP port of the PBX-side network gateway for remote connections.

Value Range
1–65535

Feature Guide References

5.2.2.3 Simple Remote Connection

IP Extension / IP-CS—NAT - MGCP Server Port No. for IP-CS

Specifies the outside-facing MGCP port of the PBX-side network gateway for remote connections.

Value Range
1–65535

Feature Guide References

5.2.2.3 Simple Remote Connection

208 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 9.2.2 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property—Site
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

IP Extension / IP-CS—Keep Alive Packet Type

Specifies the type of Keep Alive packets to be sent out for remote connections for IP extensions.

Value Range
Blank UDP, None

Feature Guide References

5.2.2.3 Simple Remote Connection

IP Extension / IP-CS—Keep Alive Packet Type for IP-CS

Specifies the type of Keep Alive packets to be sent out for remote connections for IP-CS (KX-NS0154 only).

Value Range
Blank UDP, None

Feature Guide References

5.2.2.3 Simple Remote Connection

IP Extension / IP-CS—Keep Alive Packet Sending Interval Time (s)

Specifies the time interval between transmissions of Keep Alive packets.

Value Range
10–60 s

Feature Guide References

5.2.2.3 Simple Remote Connection

IP Extension / IP-CS—NAT - FTP Server Port No.

Specifies the port number of FTP server for IP-CS (KX-NS0154 only).

Value Range
1–65535

Feature Guide References

5.2.2.3 Simple Remote Connection

SIP Extension / UT Extension—NAT - SIP Proxy Server Port No.

Specifies the outside-facing port of the network gateway connected to the SIP proxy server.

Value Range
1–65535

PC Programming Manual 209

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
9.2.2 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property—Site
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Feature Guide References

5.2.2.3 Simple Remote Connection

UT Extension—NAT - CWMP Server (HTTP) Port No.

Specifies the outside-facing HTTP port of the PBX-side network gateway for remote connections.

Value Range
1–65535

Feature Guide References

5.2.2.3 Simple Remote Connection

UT Extension—NAT - CWMP Server (HTTPS) Port No.

Specifies the outside-facing HTTPS port of the PBX-side network gateway for remote connections.

Value Range
1–65535

Feature Guide References

5.2.2.3 Simple Remote Connection

UT Extension—NAT - CWMP Server (HTTP) Port No. for Network Survivability

Specifies the outside-facing HTTP port of the PBX-side network gateway for remote connections. This setting
specifies the port number used for the secondary server for network survivability.

Value Range
1–65535

Feature Guide References

5.2.2.3 Simple Remote Connection

UT Extension—NAT - CWMP Server (HTTPS) Port No. for Network Survivability

Specifies the outside-facing HTTPS port of the PBX-side network gateway for remote connections. This setting
specifies the port number used for the secondary server for network survivability.

Value Range
1–65535

Feature Guide References

5.2.2.3 Simple Remote Connection

210 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 9.2.2 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property—Site
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

UT Extension—NAT - SIP-MLT Data Download Server (HTTP) Port No.

Specifies the outside-facing HTTP port of the PBX-side network gateway for remote connections used for
downloading data to KX-UT series SIP phones.

Value Range
1–65535

Feature Guide References

5.2.2.3 Simple Remote Connection

UT Extension—NAT - SIP-MLT Data Download Server (HTTPS) Port No.

Specifies the outside-facing HTTPS port of the PBX-side network gateway for remote connections used for
downloading data to KX-UT series SIP phones.

Value Range
1–65535

Feature Guide References

5.2.2.3 Simple Remote Connection

UT Extension—NAT - NTP Server Port No.

Specifies the outside-facing port of the network gateway connected to the NTP server.

Value Range
1–65535

Feature Guide References

5.2.2.3 Simple Remote Connection

UT Extension—Keep Alive Packet Type

Specifies the type of Keep Alive packets to be sent out for remote connections.

Value Range
Register, Blank UDP, None

Feature Guide References

5.2.2.3 Simple Remote Connection

UT Extension—Keep Alive Packet Sending Interval Time (s)

Specifies the time interval between transmissions of Keep Alive packets.

Value Range
10–60 s

PC Programming Manual 211

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
9.2.2 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property—Site
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Feature Guide References

5.2.2.3 Simple Remote Connection

UT Extension—SIP Register Expire Time (s)

Specifies the length of time that will elapse before the current registration expires.

Value Range
10–3600 s

Feature Guide References

5.2.2.3 Simple Remote Connection

UT Extension—PERIODIC Ability
Specifies whether alive monitoring is performed for connected remote extensions.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

Feature Guide References

5.2.2.3 Simple Remote Connection

UT Extension—PERIODIC Packet Sending Interval Time (s)

Specifies the polling interval for alive monitoring when PERIODIC Ability is set to Enable.

Value Range
30–3600 s

Feature Guide References

5.2.2.3 Simple Remote Connection

Option—NAT - RTP IP Address

Specifies the RTP server’s IP address. If using a separate IP address from Common—NAT - External IP
Address, configure this setting.

Value Range
Blank, 1.0.0.1–223.255.255.254

Feature Guide References

5.2.2.3 Simple Remote Connection

212 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 9.2.2 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property—Site
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Option—NAT - SIP Proxy Server IP Address

Specifies the outside-facing IP address or host name of the network gateway connected to the SIP proxy
server. If using a separate IP address from Common—NAT - External IP Address, configure this setting.

Value Range
Blank, 1.0.0.1–223.255.255.254

Feature Guide References

5.2.2.3 Simple Remote Connection

Option—NAT - CWMP Server IP Address

Specifies the outside-facing IP address of the PBX-side network gateway for remote connections. If using a
separate IP address from Common—NAT - External IP Address, configure this setting.

Value Range
Blank, 1.0.0.1–223.255.255.254

Feature Guide References

5.2.2.3 Simple Remote Connection

Option—NAT - CWMP Server IP Address for Network Survivability

Specifies the outside-facing IP address of the PBX-side network gateway for remote connections. This setting
specifies the port number used for the secondary server for network survivability.

Value Range
Blank, 1.0.0.1–223.255.255.254

Feature Guide References

5.2.2.3 Simple Remote Connection

Option—NAT - NTP Server IP Address

Specifies the outside-facing IP address of the network gateway connected to the NTP server. If using a
separate IP address from Common—NAT - External IP Address, configure this setting.

Value Range
Blank, 1.0.0.1–223.255.255.254

Feature Guide References

5.2.2.3 Simple Remote Connection

SIP Extension
SIP Location Hold Time Max.
Specifies the maximum length of time that the PBX holds information on the location of SIP Extensions.

PC Programming Manual 213

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
9.2.2 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property—Site
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Value Range
10–3600 s

Feature Guide References

5.2.2 SIP (Session Initiation Protocol) Extension

SIP Location Hold Time Min.

Specifies the minimum length of time that the PBX holds information on the location of SIP Extensions.

Value Range
10–3600 s

Feature Guide References

5.2.2 SIP (Session Initiation Protocol) Extension

SIP Location Hold Time Interval

Specifies the interval time that the PBX waits before starting to hold information on location of SIP Extensions.

Value Range
1–10 s

Feature Guide References

5.2.2 SIP (Session Initiation Protocol) Extension

SIP Session Timer Min.

Specifies the minimum length of time that the PBX waits before disconnecting SIP sessions when no
communication is detected.

Value Range
90–3600 s

Feature Guide References

5.2.2 SIP (Session Initiation Protocol) Extension

Setting parameters assigned to Remote SIP-MLT—NAT - CWMP Server IP

Address
Specifies the outside-facing IP address or host name of the PBX-side network gateway for remote connections.

Value Range
1.0.0.0–223.255.255.255 (IP address), Max. 100 characters (host name)

214 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 9.2.2 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property—Site
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Feature Guide References

5.2.2.3 Simple Remote Connection

Setting parameters assigned to Remote SIP-MLT—NAT - CWMP Server (HTTP)

Port No.
Specifies the outside-facing HTTP port of the PBX-side network gateway for remote connections.

Value Range
1–65535

Feature Guide References

5.2.2.3 Simple Remote Connection

Setting parameters assigned to Remote SIP-MLT—NAT - CWMP Server (HTTPS)

Port No.
Specifies the outside-facing HTTPS port of the PBX-side network gateway for remote connections.

Value Range
1–65535

Feature Guide References

5.2.2.3 Simple Remote Connection

Setting parameters assigned to Remote SIP-MLT—NAT - SIP-MLT Data

Download Server (HTTP) Port No.
Specifies the outside-facing HTTP port of the PBX-side network gateway for remote connections used for
downloading data to KX-UT series SIP phones.

Value Range
1–65535

Feature Guide References

5.2.2.3 Simple Remote Connection

Setting parameters assigned to Remote SIP-MLT—NAT - SIP-MLT Data

Download Server (HTTPS) Port No.
Specifies the outside-facing HTTPS port of the PBX-side network gateway for remote connections used for
downloading data to KX-UT series SIP phones.

Value Range
1–65535

PC Programming Manual 215

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
9.2.2 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property—Site
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Feature Guide References

5.2.2.3 Simple Remote Connection

Setting parameters assigned to Remote SIP-MLT—NAT - SIP Proxy Server IP

Address
Specifies the outside-facing IP address or host name of the network gateway connected to the SIP proxy
server.

Value Range
1.0.0.0–223.255.255.255 (IP address), Max. 100 characters (host name)

Feature Guide References

5.2.2.3 Simple Remote Connection

Setting parameters assigned to Remote SIP-MLT—NAT - SIP Proxy Server Port

No.
Specifies the outside-facing port of the network gateway connected to the SIP proxy server.

Value Range
1–65535

Feature Guide References

5.2.2.3 Simple Remote Connection

Setting parameters assigned to Remote SIP-MLT—NAT - NTP Server IP Address

Specifies the outside-facing IP address or host name of the network gateway connected to the NTP server.

Value Range
1.0.0.0–223.255.255.255 (IP address), Max. 100 characters (host name)

Feature Guide References

5.2.2.3 Simple Remote Connection

Setting parameters assigned to Remote SIP-MLT—NAT - NTP Server Port No.

Specifies the outside-facing port of the network gateway connected to the NTP server.

Value Range
1–65535

Feature Guide References

5.2.2.3 Simple Remote Connection

216 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 9.2.2 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property—Site
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Setting parameters assigned to Remote SIP-MLT—NAT - Keep Alive Packet

Type
Specifies the type of Keep Alive packets to be sent out for remote connections.

Value Range
Register, Blank UDP, None

Feature Guide References

5.2.2.3 Simple Remote Connection

Setting parameters assigned to Remote SIP-MLT—NAT - Keep Alive Packet

Sending Interval Time (s)
Specifies the time interval between transmissions of the Keep Alive packet.

Note
• This interval must be shorter than the NAT binding time of the router. The default value is appropriate
in most cases.
• This setting is available only when NAT - Keep Alive Packet Type is set to "Blank UDP".

Value Range
10–60 s

Feature Guide References

5.2.2.3 Simple Remote Connection

Setting parameters assigned to Remote SIP-MLT—NAT - SIP Register Expire

Time (s)
Specifies the length of time that will elapse before the current registration expires.

Note
This setting is available only when NAT - Keep Alive Packet Type is set to "Register".

Value Range
10–3600 s

Feature Guide References

5.2.2.3 Simple Remote Connection

Setting parameters for Networking Survivability, assigned to Remote

SIP-MLT—NAT - CWMP Server IP Address
Specifies the outside-facing IP address or host name of the PBX-side network gateway for remote connections
that is used when the gateway specified in Setting parameters assigned to Remote SIP-MLT is not available.

Value Range
1.0.0.0–223.255.255.255 (IP address), Max. 100 characters (host name)

PC Programming Manual 217

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
9.2.2 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property—Site
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Feature Guide References

5.2.2.3 Simple Remote Connection

Setting parameters for Networking Survivability, assigned to Remote

SIP-MLT—NAT - CWMP Server (HTTP) Port No.
Specifies the outside-facing HTTP port of the PBX-side network gateway for remote connections that is used
when the gateway specified in Setting parameters assigned to Remote SIP-MLT is not available.

Value Range
1–65535

Feature Guide References

5.2.2.3 Simple Remote Connection

Setting parameters for Networking Survivability, assigned to Remote

SIP-MLT—NAT - CWMP Server (HTTPS) Port No.
Specifies the outside-facing HTTPS port of the PBX-side network gateway for remote connections that is used
when the gateway specified in Setting parameters assigned to Remote SIP-MLT is not available.

Value Range
1–65535

Feature Guide References

5.2.2.3 Simple Remote Connection

Control Condition of Remote SIP-MLT—PERIODIC Ability

Specifies whether alive monitoring is performed for connected remote extensions.

Value Range
Enable, Disable

Feature Guide References

5.2.2.3 Simple Remote Connection

Control Condition of Remote SIP-MLT—PERIODIC Packet Sending Interval Time

(s)
Specifies the polling interval for alive monitoring when PERIODIC Ability is set to "Enable".

Value Range
30–3600 s

Feature Guide References

5.2.2.3 Simple Remote Connection

218 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 9.2.2 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property—Site
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Echo Cancellation
The settings in this tab are for non-IP calls.

Echo Cancellation Ability

Specifies the echo canceller ability time.

Value Range
OFF, 64 ms, 128 ms

DSP Digital Gain (Down)

Specifies the DSP Digital Gain for the down voice path.

Value Range
-14–6 dB

DSP Digital Gain (Up)

Specifies the DSP Digital Gain for the up voice path.

Value Range
-14–6 dB

EC Gain
Specifies the Echo Canceller Gain.

Value Range
-14–6 dB

NLP Setting
Specifies the NLP (Non-Linear Processor) setting to control echo sound quality.

Value Range
Disable, Weak, Normal, Strong

DSP Conference
DSP Conference Priority
Specifies the Conference Priority (the conference resource you want to use).

Value Range
Preferential: Conference resource on DSP card
Alternative: Default conference resource

DSP Digital Gain (Up) on V-IPEXT side for conference

Specifies the DSP Digital Gain for the up voice path for conference calls using an extension of a V-IPEXT card.

PC Programming Manual 219

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
9.2.2 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property—Site
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Value Range
-14–6 dB

DSP Digital Gain (Up) on V-SIPEXT side for conference

Specifies the DSP Digital Gain for the up voice path for conference calls using an extension of a V-SIPEXT
card.

Value Range
-14–6 dB

DSP Digital Gain (Up) on V-UTEXT side for conference

Specifies the DSP Digital Gain for the up voice path for conference calls using an extension of a V-UTEXT
card.

Value Range
-14–6 dB

DSP Digital Gain (Up) on Multisite GW side for conference

Specifies the DSP Digital Gain for the up voice path for conference calls using a gateway between sites.

Value Range
-14–6 dB

Echo Cancellation Ability on TDM side for conference

Specifies the echo canceller ability time for conferencing using TDM circuit mode communication.

Value Range
OFF, 64 ms, 128 ms

DSP Digital Gain (Up) on TDM side for conference

Specifies the DSP Digital Gain for the up voice path for conferencing using TDM circuit mode communication.

Value Range
-14–6 dB

DSP Digital Gain (Down) on TDM side for conference

Specifies the DSP Digital Gain for the down voice path for conferencing using TDM circuit mode
communication.

Value Range
-14–6 dB

EC Gain on TDM side for conference

Specifies the error correction gain for conferencing using TDM circuit mode communication.

220 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 9.2.2 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property—Site
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Value Range
-14–6 dB

NLP Setting on TDM side for conference

Specifies the NLP (Non-Linear Processor) setting for conferencing using TDM circuit mode communication.

Value Range
Disable, Weak, Normal, Strong

PC Programming Manual 221

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
9.2.3 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property—Slot Summary
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

9.2.3 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System

Property—Slot Summary
Summary information is displayed for all cards installed in the PBX.
Click one of the following tabs to view a summary of the shelf in the PBX:
• Physical Shelf: View the physical card shelf.
• Virtual Shelf: View the virtual card shelf.

Physical Shelf
The Shelf and Slot for each item are displayed for your reference. For details, see Common Programming
Reference Items in 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot.

Card Type
Indicates the service cards installed in the slots of the physical shelf (reference only).

Value Range
Card Type:
LCOT6: 6-Port Analogue Trunk Card
DLC2: 2-Port Digital Extension Card
MCSLC16: 16-Port Single Line Telephone Extension Card
BRI2: BRI2 Card
BRI4: BRI4 Card
PRI23: PRI23 Card
PRI30: PRI30 Card
E1: E1 Trunk Card
DPH2: 2-Port Doorphone Card
DHLC4: 4-Port Digital Hybrid Extension Card
DLC8: 8-Port Digital Extension Card
DLC16: 16-Port Digital Extension Card
MCSLC8: 8-Port Single Line Telephone Extension Card
EXP-S: Expansion Slave Card for connecting Expansion Units

PC Programming Manual References

9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot
9.21 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Card Property—Extension Type
9.23 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Card Property - LCO type
9.25 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Card Property - BRI type/PRI type

Status
Indicates the card status (reference only).

Value Range
INS: The card is in service.
OUS: The card is out of service.
Fault: The card is not communicating with the network.
Pre-Install: A card has been added to the slot.
IDLE: No card is installed in the slot.

222 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 9.2.3 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property—Slot Summary
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

PC Programming Manual References

9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot

Version
Indicates the software version of the installed card (reference only).

Value Range
Version number

PC Programming Manual References

9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot

Virtual Shelf
The Shelf and Slot for each item are displayed for your reference. For details, see Common Programming
Reference Items in 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot.

Slot Type
Indicates the type of card slot (reference only).

Value Range
Trunk, Extension

PC Programming Manual References

9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot

Card Type
Indicates the type of virtual card installed (reference only).

Value Range
V-SIPGW16, V-IPGW16, V-IPEXT32, V-SIPEXT32, V-IPCS4, V-UTEXT32

PC Programming Manual References

9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot

Status
Indicates the card status (reference only).

Value Range
INS: The card is in service.
OUS: The card is out of service.
Fault: The card is not communicating with the network.
Pre-Install: A card has been added to the slot.

PC Programming Manual 223

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
9.2.3 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property—Slot Summary
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

PC Programming Manual References

9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot

224 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 9.2.4 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property—NSVM
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

9.2.4 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System

Property—NSVM
Settings related to audio quality and sound detection for the PBX site can be specified.

Echo Cancellation Ability

Specifies the echo canceller ability time.

Value Range
OFF, 64 ms, 128 ms

DSP Digital Gain (Down)

Specifies the DSP Digital Gain for the down voice path.

Value Range
-14–6 dB

DSP Digital Gain (Up)

Specifies the DSP Digital Gain for the up voice path.

Value Range
-14–6 dB

EC Gain
Specifies the Echo Canceller Gain.

Value Range
-14–6 dB

NLP Setting
Specifies the NLP (Non-Linear Processor) setting to control echo sound quality.

Value Range
Disable, Weak, Normal, Strong

FAX Detection Ability

Enables the use of the FAX Detection Ability feature. Since fax signals using a codec other than G.711 cannot
be received accurately at the destination, this feature automatically switches the codec to G.711 to enable
end-to-end fax signal relay over the network.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

PC Programming Manual 225

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
9.2.4 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property—NSVM
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

CNG Signal Effective Detection Width 1 (ON)

Specifies the length of time that the PBX detects the CNG signal.

Value Range
20–5000 ms

CNG Signal Effective Detection Width 2 (OFF)

Specifies the length of time that the PBX waits until another CNG signal is detected.

Value Range
20–5000 ms

CNG Signal Fixation Detection Counter

Specifies the number of times the CNG signal must be detected before the PBX proceeds the fax operation.

Value Range
1–3

CNG Signal Fixation Detection Pattern

Specifies the CNG signal pattern to be detected before the PBX proceeds the fax operation.

Value Range
OFF, ON

Maximum Silence Time

Specifies the length of time of silence that the PBX will detect as the end of a call.

Value Range
1000–60000 (ms)

Maximum Continuous Tone Time

Specifies the length of time of a continuous tone that the PBX will detect as the end of a call.

Value Range
1000–60000 (ms)

Unique Cyclic Tone Detection

Specifies whether the system will detect the end of a call when there is a unique cyclic tone.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

Maximum Cyclic Tone Time

Specifies the length of time of a continuing cyclic tone that the PBX will detect as the end of a call.

226 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 9.2.4 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property—NSVM
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Value Range
1000–60000 (ms)

PC Programming Manual 227

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
9.3 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Activation Key Status
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

9.3 PBX Configuration—[1-1]

Configuration—Slot—Activation Key Status
Refreshes and displays information about activation keys provided by any activation key files in the System
Memory and by pre-installed activation keys on the mother board. To access this screen, click the Activation
Key button on the Configuration—Slot main screen.
It is possible to programme how the number of available IP Trunk channels is to be divided for H.323 and SIP
trunks. In Number of activated IP-GW, type the number of IP Trunk channels to be used for H.323 trunks.
The remaining number of IP Trunk channels will be used for SIP trunks.

Note
If you have changed the value for Number of activated IP-GW, you must click Execute to restart the
V-IPGW cards for the change to take effect.
Similarly, you can programme how many IP softphones can be used through the IP Softphone/IP Proprietary
Telephone activation key. In Number of activated IP-Softphone, type the number of IP softphones to be used
through the IP Softphone/IP Proprietary Telephone activation key, and then click OK. The remainder is the
number of IP-PTs that can be used through the IP Softphone/IP Proprietary Telephone activation key. By
default, only IP softphones can be used.
You can click the Activation Key Installation link to access the Activation Key Installation screen (see
7.6 Utility—Activation Key Installation) for installing activation keys.

Trial Activation Keys

The PBX includes free trials for some PBX features that normally require activation keys. The trials have a
60-day limit. To begin using the free trials:
1. Click Activate Pre-installed Activation keys. A list of trial activation keys is displayed in a new window.
2. Select the check boxes next to the trial activation keys you want to activate.
3. Click OK.
The trial period for the selected trial activation keys will begin.

Trial activation keys:

• One-look Network
• Two-way Recording Control
• Message Backup
• UM/E-mail (128 users)
• Two-way Recording (30 users)
• CTI interface
• CSTA Multiplexer (session)
• Mobile Extension (30 users)
• CA PRO (128 users)
• CA Supervisor (1 user)
• CA Operator Console (1 user)
• CA Thin Client Server
• Call Centre Feature Enhancement
• Poltys C. Bridge
• Poltys CA RCS-Start (5 users)
• Poltys CCAccounting
• Poltys CCAcc. Enterprise
• Poltys CCView
• Poltys CCView add. PBX
• Poltys CCView Supervisor (5 users)
• Poltys CCView CRM P-up (5 users)

228 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 9.3 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Activation Key Status
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

• Poltys Number notice

• Poltys CCAgent (5 users)
• Poltys CCRecord SIP (4 ports)

MPR-ID
Indicates the ID number of the mother board (reference only).

Value Range
ID number of the mother board

Activated Feature
Indicates the type of activation keys (reference only).
Note that the types of activation keys are subject to change without notice. For CA activation keys, refer to the
documentation for CA.

Value Range
IP Trunk (ch): Activate H.323 IP-GW or SIP-Trunk
IP Proprietary Telephone/IP Softphone/P-SIP Extension (ch): Activate Soft-phone /IP-PT /SIP-MLT /P-SIP
IP Proprietary Telephone/P-SIP Extension (ch): Activate IP-PT/SIP-MLT/P-SIP
SIP Extension (ch): Activate SIP-Phone for 3rd party /IP Conference Phone
IP-CS channel expansion (CS unit): IP-CS channel expansion to 8ch
One-look Network: Multi site connection with KX-NS1000 PBXs
QSIG Network: QSIG Networking
Two-way Recording Control: Two-way recording (Manager control)
Message Backup: UM Message Back UP
UM Port (ch): Unified Message ports
UM/E-mail (user): Email (IMAP4) client / Email Notification (Voice/Fax message)
Two-way Recording (user): Two-way Recording / Two-way Transfer
CTI interface: CTI Server (3rd Party CTI link)
CSTA Multiplexer (session): CSTA(CTI) Multi-session
Mobile Extension (user): Working with cellular phone
CA Basic (No limit): CA Basic
CA Pro (user): CA PRO
CA Supervisor (user): CA ACD Supervisor
CA Network Feature (user): CA Network
CA Operator Console (user): CA Operator Console
CA Thin Client Server: Thin Client Server Connection
Call Centre Feature Enhancement: Built-in ACD Report, Announcement of waiting number for queuing
Poltys C. Bridge: Communication Bridge server
Poltys CA RCS-Start (user): Mobile UC client (RCS) 1year licence
Poltys CA RCS-Extend (user): Mobile UC client (RCS) 1year extension licence
Poltys CCAccounting: CCAccounting
Poltys CCAccounting A.L.: CCAccounting (annual licence)
Poltys CCAcc. Enterprise: CCAccounting Enterprise Edition Additional Connection licence
Poltys CCAcc. Enterprise A.L.: CCAccounting Enterprise Edition Additional Connection licence (annual
licence)
Poltys CCView: CCView
Poltys CCView A.L.: CCView (annual licence)
Poltys CCView add. PBX: CCView Enterprise Edition. Additional PBX Connection licence
Poltys CCView add. PBX A.L.: CCView Enterprise Edition. Additional PBX Connection licence (annual licence)
Poltys CCView Supervisor: CCView Supervisor

PC Programming Manual 229

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
9.3 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Activation Key Status
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Poltys CCView Supervisor A.L.: CCView Supervisor (annual licence)

Poltys CCView CRM P-up: Independent Desktop CRM Popup SW with 1st Party TSP
Poltys CCView CRM P-up A.L.: Independent Desktop CRM Popup SW with 1st Party TSP (annual licence)
Poltys Number notice: Dial Number Notification
Poltys Number notice A.L.: Dial Number Notification (annual licence)
Poltys CCAgent: CCAgent With Internal CRM
Poltys CCAgent A.L.: CCAgent With Internal CRM (annual licence)
Poltys CCRecord Analogue: CCRecord Analog Extensions/Trunks
Poltys CCRecord Analogue A.L.: CCRecord Analog Extensions/Trunks (annual licence)
Poltys CCRecord Digital: CCRecord Digital Extensions
Poltys CCRecord Digital A.L.: CCRecord Digital Extensions (annual licence)
Poltys CCRecord PRI: CCRecord for E1/T1 (PRI)
Poltys CCRecord PRI A.L.: CCRecord for E1/T1 (PRI) (annual licence)
Poltys CCRecord SIP: CCRecord SIP Extensions/Trunks
Poltys CCRecord SIP A.L.: CCRecord SIP Extensions/Trunks (annual licence)
PSDN Option-1: PSDN partner’s optional licence No.1
PSDN Option-2: PSDN partner’s optional licence No.2

Pre-installed
Indicates the number of channels (or CA users) provided by the mother board (reference only).

Value Range
Not applicable.

Activation Key
Indicates the number of channels (or CA users) provided by activation key files in the System Memory
(reference only).

Value Range
Not applicable.

Features in total
Indicates the total number of channels (or CA users) provided by the mother board and activation key files in
the System Memory (reference only).

Value Range
Not applicable.

230 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 9.4.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—VoIP Property—VoIP (Ext) Setting
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

9.4 PBX Configuration—[1-1]

Configuration—Slot—VoIP Property

9.4.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—VoIP 

Property—VoIP (Ext) Setting
Allows you to install or remove IP extension cards by entering the number of IP extensions (IP-PT, UT/UDT
or SIP extension) and to set IP Terminal Registration Mode.
When you place the mouse cursor over the VoIP Property button on the Slot screen, click the VoIP(Ext)
Setting button to open the VoIP(Ext) Setting screen.

Number of IP Extensions—Number of IP Extensions—IP-PT(NT)

Specifies the required number of IP-PT(NT) extensions to install or remove V-IPEXT32 cards.

Value Range
0–128

Number of IP Extensions—Number of IP Extensions—UT/UDT

Specifies the required number of UT/UDT extensions to install or remove V-UTEXT32 cards.

Value Range
0–128

Number of IP Extensions—Number of IP Extensions—SIP-Phone

Specifies the required number of SIP extensions to install or remove V-SIPEXT32 cards.

Value Range
0–128

Number of IP Extensions—Number of IP Extensions—Total

Indicates the total number of required IP Extensions (IP-PT(NT), UT/UDT, SIP Phone) (reference only).

Value Range
0–128

Number of IP Extensions—Number of cards—V-IPEXT32
Indicates the number of installed V-IPEXT32 cards (reference only).

Value Range
0–4

Number of IP Extensions—Number of cards—V-UTEXT32
Indicates the number of installed V-UTEXT32 cards (reference only).

PC Programming Manual 231

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
9.4.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—VoIP Property—VoIP (Ext) Setting
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Value Range
0–4

Number of IP Extensions—Number of cards—V-SIPEXT32
Indicates the number of installed V-SIPEXT32 cards (reference only).

Value Range
0–4

Number of IP Extensions—Number of cards—Total
Indicates the number of total installed IP Extension cards (reference only).

Value Range
0–4

IP Terminal Registration Mode

Specifies the IP Terminal registration mode for registering IP telephones to the PBX.

Value Range
Manual, Full Automatic, Extension Number Input

232 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 9.4.2 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—VoIP Property—VoIP (Trunk) Setting
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

9.4.2 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—VoIP 

Property—VoIP (Trunk) Setting
Allows you to add new SIP trunk accounts by entering the number of SIP trunk port and some SIP trunk settings.
When you place the mouse cursor over the VoIP Property button on the Slot screen, click the VoIP
(Trunk) Setting button to open the VoIP (Trunk) Setting screen.

Number of IP Trunks—SIP Trunk (Available)

Displays the number of SIP trunks that can be assigned.

Value Range
0-64

Number of IP Trunks—Additional Number of SIP Trunks

Specifies the number of SIP Trunk to install V-SIPGW cards.

Value Range
0-32

Account Setting—User Name (64 characters)
Specifies the user name (SIP Account) provided by the SIP provider.

Value Range
Max. 64 characters

Account Setting—Authentication ID (64 characters)
Specifies the authentication ID required for registration with the SIP server.

Value Range
Max. 64 characters

Account Setting—Authentication Password (32 characters)
Specifies the authentication password used for registration with the SIP provider.

Value Range
Max. 32 characters

Account Setting—SIP Server Name / Outbound Proxy Name ( Max.100

characters)
Specifies the domain name of the SIP proxy server.

Note
Specify the domain name of the outbound proxy server, if provided by the SIP provider.

PC Programming Manual 233

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
9.4.2 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—VoIP Property—VoIP (Trunk) Setting
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Value Range
Max. 100 characters

Account Setting—SIP Server IP Address

Specifies the IP address of the SIP proxy server. This setting is compulsory when not using the DNS server.

Note
Specify the IP address of the outbound proxy server, if provided by the SIP provider.

Value Range
1.0.0.0–223.255.255.255

Account Setting—SIP Server Domain / Proxy Domain ( Max.100 characters)

Specifies the domain name provided by the SIP provider.

Value Range
Max. 100 characters

Property Setting—Select Service Provider
Select the SIP service provider after importing SIP service provider file.

Value Range
Max. 100 characters

Property Setting—Register Ability
Specifies whether to send the REGISTER message to the SIP server.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

Property Setting—Session Expire Timer (s)
Specifies the length of time that the PBX waits before terminating SIP sessions when no reply to the repeated
requests is received.

Value Range
90–3600 s

Property Setting—From Header - user Part
Specifies the value to be stored in the username part of the SIP-URI of the From header.

Value Range
User Name, Authentication ID, PBX-CLIP

234 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 9.4.2 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—VoIP Property—VoIP (Trunk) Setting
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Property Setting—Header Type
Specifies the header of the SIP message in which the caller information is stored.

Value Range
From Header, P-Preferred-Identity Header

Property Setting—Anonymous format in "From" header
Specifies the format of the "From" header when not sending caller ID.

Value Range
Display name and SIP-URI, Display name only

Note
If "Display name and SIP-URI" is selected, the display name part and the SIP-URI of the "From" header
will be displayed as "Anonymous".
[Example]
From: Anonymous <sip:[email protected]>
If "Display name only" is selected, only the display name part of the "From" header will be displayed as
"Anonymous".
[Example]
From: Anonymous <sip:[email protected]>

Property Setting—FAX Sending Method
Specifies the method of transporting the fax signal.

Value Range
G.711 Inband, T.38

PC Programming Manual 235

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
9.5 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—UM Card Property
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

9.5 PBX Configuration—[1-1]

Configuration—Slot—UM Card Property
The properties of the Unified Messaging (UM) system can be specified.
Place the mouse cursor over the UM Property button on the Slot screen, and click the Card Property button
to open the UM Card Property screen.

Main
Echo Cancellation Ability
Specifies the echo canceller ability time.

Value Range
OFF, 64 ms, 128 ms

DSP Digital Gain (Down)

Specifies the DSP Digital Gain for the down voice path.

Value Range
-14–6 dB

DSP Digital Gain (Up)

Specifies the DSP Digital Gain for the up voice path.

Value Range
-14–6 dB

EC Gain
Specifies the Echo Canceller Gain.

Value Range
-14–6 dB

NLP Setting
Specifies the NLP (Non-Linear Processor) setting to control echo sound quality.

Value Range
Disable, Weak, Normal, Strong

FAX Detection Ability

Enables the use of the FAX Detection Ability feature. Since fax signals using a codec other than G.711 cannot
be received accurately at the destination, this feature automatically switches the codec to G.711 to enable
end-to-end fax signal relay over the network.

236 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 9.5 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—UM Card Property
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Value Range
Disable, Enable

CNG Signal Effective Detection Width 1 (ON)

Specifies the length of time that the PBX detects the CNG signal.

Value Range
20–5000 ms

CNG Signal Effective Detection Width 2 (OFF)

Specifies the length of time that the PBX waits until another CNG signal is detected.

Value Range
20–5000 ms

CNG Signal Fixation Detection Counter

Specifies the number of times the CNG signal must be detected before the PBX proceeds the fax operation.

Value Range
1–3

CNG Signal Fixation Detection Pattern

Specifies whether or not the Unified Messaging system will respond to CNG signals.

Value Range
OFF, ON

PC Programming Manual 237

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
9.6 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—UM Port Property
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

9.6 PBX Configuration—[1-1]

Configuration—Slot—UM Port Property
The properties of the Unified Messaging (UM) system’s ports can be specified.
Place the mouse cursor over the UM Property button on the Slot screen, and click the Port Property button
to open the UM Port Property screen.
The Port for each item is displayed for your reference. For details, see Common Programming Reference
Items in 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot

Extension Number
Specifies the extension number of the port.

Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)

Connection
Indicates the port status. To change the status of the port, click the desired cell in the column, and then select
INS or OUS for the port.
This option is only available in On-line mode.

Value Range
INS: The port is in service.
OUS: The port is out of service.
Fault: The port is not communicating with the network.

PC Programming Manual References

9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot–To change the status (INS/OUS) of a card (On-line mode
only)

238 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 9.7 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property—Port Type View
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

9.7 PBX Configuration—[1-1]

Configuration—Slot—Port Property—Port Type View
Displays the number of connected telephones, devices, and Cell Stations (CSs). This screen can be accessed
from the Port Property screen of any extension cards in use in the PBX system, including extension cards of
Expansion Units. For information about Expansion Units, see 9.33 PBX Configuration—[1-1]
Configuration—Slot—Expansion Unit1/Expansion Unit2/Expansion Unit3.
This screen can be accessed only in On-line mode.

Type
Indicates the types of telephones, devices, or CSs (reference only).

Value Range
IP-EXT, SIP-MLT, SIP, DPT (40V) (KX-DT300 series/KX-DT500 series/KX-T7600 series DPTs), DPT (15V)
(DPTs other than KX-DT300 series/KX-DT500 series/KX-T7600 series), APT (15V), SLT, DSS Console, UM,
VM, Other, CS, High-density CS, IP-CS, SIP-CS, S-PS

PC Programming Manual References

9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot

Total Count
Indicates the total number of each type of telephone, device, and CS connected to the PBX (reference only).
CSs are counted on the basis of the number of ports in service plus the number of extension ports to which
CSs are connected.

Value Range
Not applicable.

PC Programming Manual References

9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot

PC Programming Manual 239

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
9.8 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Shelf Property—V-SIPGW
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

9.8 PBX Configuration—[1-1]

Configuration—Slot—Shelf Property—V-SIPGW
Common settings for all of the V-SIPGW cards installed in the Virtual Shelf can be programmed.

Icon Description
In this section, the following icons show the different parameter type.

Icon Description for Parameter Type

Manual programming is compulsory under certain conditions.

Manual programming is optional.

Main
SIP Client Port Number
Specifies the port number of the PBX used for communications with the SIP server.

Value Range
1024–65535

NAT Traversal
Specifies the NAT traversal method.
– STUN: A STUN Server, used alongside the SIP Server, finds out the global IP address of the router with
NAT enabled.
– Fixed IP Addr.: The global IP address of the router with NAT enabled is fixed.
Note
Manual programming is optional except when programming is required depending on the network
conditions.

Value Range
Off, Fixed IP Addr., STUN

NAT - Voice (RTP) UDP Port No.

Specifies the starting port number of the dynamic ports used for NAT Traversal.

Value Range
1024–65535

NAT - Keep Alive Packet Sending Ability

Specifies whether to send Keep Alive packets in order to maintain the NAT binding information. This setting
may be compulsory depending on the network conditions.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

240 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 9.8 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Shelf Property—V-SIPGW
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

NAT - Keep Alive Packet Type

Specifies the type of Keep Alive packets to be sent out.

Value Range
Blank UDP, None

NAT - Keep Alive Packet Sending Interval

Specifies the interval time until the next Keep Alive packet is sent.

Note
This interval must be shorter than the NAT binding time of the router. The default value is appropriate in
most cases.

Value Range
1–60 s

NAT - Fixed Global IP Address

Specifies the global IP address of the router with NAT enabled. This setting is compulsory if Fixed IP Addr.
is selected in NAT Traversal.

Value Range
1.0.0.0–223.255.255.255

STUN Ability
Specifies whether to open a protocol port of the STUN server to enable STUN feature.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

STUN Client Port Number

Specifies the port number of the PBX used for communications with the STUN server.

Value Range
1–65535

STUN External Address Detection Retry Counter

Specifies the number of times that a query is retried when no response is received from the STUN server.

Value Range
0–8

STUN Resending Interval

Specifies the length of time until a query is retried when no response is received from the STUN server.

PC Programming Manual 241

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
9.8 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Shelf Property—V-SIPGW
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Value Range
0–1600 ms

SIP Called Party Number Check Ability

Specifies whether to receive a SIP trunk call when receiving the INVITE message with an incorrect target
SIP-URI. The setting specified here is also applied when the request header is blank or contains characters
that cannot be modified to a receivable number.

Value Range
Disable (High->Low), Disable (Low->High), Enable

SIP Called Party Number Search Mode

Specifies the search mode for the notified SIP Called Party Number information.

Value Range
Mode 1: Searches SIP accounts only.
Mode 2: Searches SIP accounts, then DDI/DID numbers. Searches the SIP trunks of the tenant of the
search-matched DDI/DID number, in ascending order (Low ® High).
Mode 3: Searches SIP accounts, then DDI/DID numbers. Searches the SIP trunks of the tenant of the
search-matched DDI/DID number, in descending order (High ® Low).

Symmetric Response Routing Ability

Enables this feature to request that the SIP server sends the response back to the source IP address and port
from which the request originated.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

100rel Ability
Specifies whether to add the option tag 100rel to the header field of the INVITE message.

Value Range
Disable: This feature is not activated.
Enable (Active): Activates this feature only if the other device supports the feature.
Enable (Passive): Activates this feature only when requested by the other device.

Ringback Tone to Outside Caller

Enables the PBX to send a ringback tone to an outside caller when the network cannot send the tone.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

SIP QoS Ability

Specifies the type of value to be stored in the ToS field in the IP header.

242 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 9.8 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Shelf Property—V-SIPGW
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Value Range
ToS, DSCP, HEX

SIP QoS-ToS Priority

Specifies the priority level in the ToS field when "ToS" is selected in SIP QoS Ability.

Value Range
0–7

SIP QoS-ToS Type

Specifies the ToS type in the ToS field when "ToS" is selected in SIP QoS Ability.

Value Range
Normal, Monetary Cost, Reliability, Throughput, Delay

Timer
SIP T1
Specifies the retransmission interval time for INVITE requests and responses.

Value Range
5–255 ´ 100 ms

SIP T2
Specifies the retransmission interval time for INVITE responses and non-INVITE requests.

Value Range
40–255 ´ 100 ms

PC Programming Manual 243

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
9.9 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Card Property—V-SIPGW
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

9.9 PBX Configuration—[1-1]

Configuration—Slot—Card Property—V-SIPGW
Common card settings for all of the V-SIPGW cards installed in the Virtual Shelf can be programmed.

DNS SRV Record Resolve Ability

Specifies whether to request that the DNS server translates domain names into IP addresses using the DNS
SRV record. Click Common Settings to change this setting.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

244 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 9.10 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property—V-SIPGW
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

9.10 PBX Configuration—[1-1]

Configuration—Slot—Port Property—V-SIPGW
Programming Port Properties
Some of the parameters can be automatically programmed by selecting the desired SIP provider for each
virtual SIP gateway port.

Icon Description
In this section, the following icons show the different parameter type.

Icon Description for Parameter Type

Programmed automatically by selecting the desired SIP provider in Select Provider.

Manual programming is compulsory.

Manual programming is compulsory under certain conditions.

Manual programming is optional.

Automatic Programming
Some of the parameters on this screen can be automatically programmed by selecting the desired SIP provider
for each virtual SIP gateway port. A maximum of 32 SIP providers can be programmed, and a different SIP
provider can be assigned to each virtual SIP gateway port.
Follow the steps below to configure a SIP provider.
1. Click Select Provider.
A dialogue box will appear. Available virtual SIP gateway port numbers are displayed in the list.
2. From the Provider menu, select the desired SIP provider.
3. Highlight the desired port numbers or click Select All to select all the virtual SIP gateway port numbers to
be assigned to the SIP provider selected in step 2.
4. Click Execute.
5. Click OK.
6. Click Apply.
Appropriate setting values designated by the SIP provider will be set in the parameters for the virtual SIP
gateway ports.

Manual Programming
Follow the steps below to programme the parameters which are not automatically programmed by selecting a
provider.
1. Click a desired tab.
2. Enter information or select from the list for each parameter.
Adding Settings to Provider Profiles
Follow the steps below to add the settings to provider profiles.
1. Click Add Provider.
A dialogue box will appear. Available virtual SIP gateway port numbers are displayed in the list.
2. Highlight the desired port numbers or click Select All to select all the virtual SIP gateway port numbers to
add the settings to provider profiles.
3. Click Execute.
Trunk Adaptor
To connect to a Trunk Adaptor, follow the steps below.

PC Programming Manual 245

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
9.10 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property—V-SIPGW
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

1. Ensure that the Trunk Adaptor is connected to the network and a power supply, and that all ports to be set
are OUS.
2. Click Trunk Adaptor. The Trunk Adaptor List screen is displayed.
3. Enter a name (20 characters or less) for the Trunk Adaptor in Trunk Adaptor Name.
4. Enter the Trunk Adaptor’s IP address in Trunk Adaptor IP Address.
5. To confirm that the setting is correct, click CONNECT. If the setting is correct, the Trunk Adaptor’s Web
Maintenance Console will open in a new browser window.
For details about the Trunk Adaptor’s Web Maintenance Console, refer to the documentation of the Trunk
Adaptor.
6. Click Next. The Set Trunk Adaptor window will open.
7. In Virtual SIP Gateway - Port Property - No. Range, specify From and To to select a range of SIP
connections to be used with the Trunk Adaptor. These numbers correspond to the No. column of the main
Port Property screen.
8. In Name : IP Address, select a name and IP address previously entered on the Trunk Adaptor List
screen.
9. In SIP Server Port Number, enter the SIP server’s port number.
10. In SIP Account / User Name, enter a 3- to 5-digit number in From.
11. Click Finish, and the following settings are implemented:
• Provider Name and SIP Server IP Address in the Main tab will be set to match the selected
Trunk Adaptor.
• The User Name and Authentication ID in the Account tab will be set to the value specified in
SIP Account / User Name, increased by 1 for each connection (i.e. if "401" was specified, User
Name and Authentication ID for No. 1 will be set to "401", and then for No. 2 they will be set to
"402", etc.).
12. In the Calling Party tab of the V-SIPGW—Port Property screen, set From Header—User Part to
PBX-CLIP for each port that was set to be used with the Trunk Adaptor.

Main
The Shelf, Slot, and Port for each item are displayed for your reference. For details, see Common
Programming Reference Items in 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot.

Connection
Indicates the port status. To change the status of the port, click the desired cell in the column, and then select
INS or OUS for the port.
This option is only available in On-line mode.

Value Range
INS: The port is in service.
OUS: The port is out of service.
Fault: The port is not communicating with the network.

Connection Attribute
Specifies whether to connect a port to a Trunk Adaptor or use it as a SIP gateway.

Value Range
SIP Provider, Trunk Adaptor

246 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 9.10 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property—V-SIPGW
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Feature Guide References

5.3.1 Trunk Adaptor Connection

Trunk Property
Specifies the networking type of each SIP trunk.

Note
If Connection Attribute is set to "Trunk Adaptor" for the port, only "Public" will be available for this setting.

Value Range
Public, VPN

Channel Attribute
Specifies the channel property of each port to enable several sessions to be performed for one subscription
with the SIP provider.

Value Range
Basic channel: The subscriber channel that is assigned the SIP registration information.
Additional channel for SlotN (N=1–4) ChN (N=1–16): The subordinate channel that uses the same registration
information as a Basic channel for SIP sessions. Select the Slot number and the Basic channel number to
which the Additional channel belongs.
Not Used: The channel is not in use.

Note
• The Basic channel and Additional channel can belong to different V-SIPGW cards.
• When you save the data on the Main screen, for each virtual SIP gateway port that has Channel
Attribute set to Basic channel, the following items are checked for duplication: SIP Server Name,
SIP Server IP Address, and SIP Service Domain.
A maximum of 32 different SIP providers can be programmed.

Provider Name
Specifies the name of the SIP provider.

Value Range
Max. 20 characters

SIP Server Name

Specifies the domain name of the SIP proxy server.

Note
Specify the domain name of the outbound proxy server, if provided by the SIP provider.

Value Range
Max. 100 characters

SIP Server IP Address

Specifies the IP address of the SIP proxy server. This setting is compulsory when not using the DNS server.

PC Programming Manual 247

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
9.10 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property—V-SIPGW
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Note
Specify the IP address of the outbound proxy server, if provided by the SIP provider.

Value Range
1.0.0.0–223.255.255.255

SIP Server IP Address for Failover

Specifies the IP address of the SIP proxy server for failover.

Note
Specify the IP address of the outbound proxy server for failover, if provided by the SIP provider. This setting
cannot be changed while the V-SIPGW card is set to INS.

Value Range
1.0.0.0–223.255.255.255

SIP Server Port Number

Specifies the port number of the SIP proxy server.

Value Range
1–65535

SIP Service Domain

Specifies the domain name provided by the SIP provider.

Value Range
Max. 100 characters

Subscriber Number
Specifies the number used as the CLIP number.

Value Range
Max. 16 digits (consisting of 0–9, , and #)

P2P Group
Specifies the peer-to-peer group of the IP-Trunk.

Value Range
1–32

PC Programming Manual References

9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Main— P2P Group

Feature Guide References

5.2.3 Peer-to-Peer (P2P) Connection

248 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 9.10 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property—V-SIPGW
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

P2P Group Name

Indicates the selected peer-to-peer group’s name (reference only).

Value Range
P2P Group Name

PC Programming Manual References

9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Main— P2P Group

Feature Guide References

5.2.3 Peer-to-Peer (P2P) Connection

Account
The Shelf, Slot, and Port for each item are displayed for your reference. For details, see Common
Programming Reference Items in 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot.

Connection
Indicates the port status. To change the status of the port, click the desired cell in the column, and then select
INS or OUS for the port.
This option is only available in On-line mode.

Value Range
INS: The port is in service.
OUS: The port is out of service.
Fault: The port is not communicating with the network.

User Name
Specifies the user name (SIP Account) provided by the SIP provider.

Value Range
Max. 64 characters

Authentication ID
Specifies the authentication ID required for registration with the SIP server.

Value Range
Max. 64 characters

Authentication Password
Specifies the authentication password used for registration with the SIP provider.

Value Range
Max. 32 characters

PC Programming Manual 249

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
9.10 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property—V-SIPGW
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Register
The Shelf, Slot, and Port for each item are displayed for your reference. For details, see Common
Programming Reference Items in 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot.

Connection
Indicates the port status. To change the status of the port, click the desired cell in the column, and then select
INS or OUS for the port.
This option is only available in On-line mode.

Value Range
INS: The port is in service.
OUS: The port is out of service.
Fault: The port is not communicating with the network.

Register Ability
Specifies whether to send the REGISTER message to the SIP server.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

Register Sending Interval

Specifies the maximum length of interval time after which the PBX sends the REGISTER message.

Value Range
10–86400 s

Un-Register Ability when port INS

Specifies whether to unregister the previous registration and send the REGISTER message to the SIP server
when the port status is set back to INS.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

Registrar Server Name

Specifies the domain name of the SIP server.

Value Range
Max. 100 characters

Registrar Server IP Address

Specifies the IP address of the SIP server. This setting is compulsory when a register IP address is provided.

Value Range
1.0.0.0–223.255.255.255

250 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 9.10 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property—V-SIPGW
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Registrar Server IP Address for Failover

Specifies the IP address of the SIP registrar server for failover.

Note
Specify the IP address of the outbound registrar server for failover, if provided by the SIP provider. This
setting cannot be changed while the V-SIPGW card is set to INS.

Value Range
1.0.0.0–223.255.255.255

Registrar Server Port Number

Specifies the port number of the SIP server.

Value Range
1–65535

Register Resending Interval (s)

Specifies the interval time for resending the REGISTER message.

Value Range
0-65535 s

NAT
The Shelf, Slot, and Port for each item are displayed for your reference. For details, see Common
Programming Reference Items in 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot.

Connection
Indicates the port status. To change the status of the port, click the desired cell in the column, and then select
INS or OUS for the port.
This option is only available in On-line mode.

Value Range
INS: The port is in service.
OUS: The port is out of service.
Fault: The port is not communicating with the network.

STUN Server—Name
Specifies the domain name of a STUN server.

Value Range
Max. 100 characters

STUN Server—IP Address

Specifies the IP address of the STUN server. This setting is compulsory when the STUN method is selected
and a DNS server is not used.

PC Programming Manual 251

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
9.10 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property—V-SIPGW
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Value Range
1.0.0.0–223.255.255.255

STUN Server Port Number

Specifies the port number of the STUN server.

Value Range
1–65535

Option
The Shelf, Slot, and Port for each item are displayed for your reference. For details, see Common
Programming Reference Items in 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot.

Connection
Indicates the port status. To change the status of the port, click the desired cell in the column, and then select
INS or OUS for the port.
This option is only available in On-line mode.

Value Range
INS: The port is in service.
OUS: The port is out of service.
Fault: The port is not communicating with the network.

Session Timer Ability

Enables the PBX to periodically refresh SIP sessions by sending repeated requests.

Value Range
Disable: This feature is not activated.
Enable (Active): Activates this feature only if the other device supports the feature.
Enable (Passive): Activates this feature only when requested by the other device.

Session Expire Timer

Specifies the length of time that the PBX waits before terminating SIP sessions when no reply to the repeated
requests is received.

Value Range
90–3600 s

Session Refresh Method

Specifies the type of request that the PBX sends to periodically refresh SIP sessions.

Value Range
UPDATE, re-INVITE

252 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 9.10 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property—V-SIPGW
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Session Incoming Refresher Request

Specifies the type of method used for establishing the session interval.

Value Range
UAC, UAS

SIP 200 Response Timer (*100 ms)

Specifies the amount of time to wait for a SIP 200 (OK) response when establishing a connection between two
parties. (Specifying "0" will disable the timer.)

Value Range
0–18000 ´ 100 ms

SIP 18x Response Timer (s)

Specifies the amount of time to wait for a 18x response when establishing a connection between two parties.

Value Range
0–255 s

Proxy-Require Option
Specifies option tags in a Proxy-Require header field so that the SIP server is notified that the client is behind
a router with NAT enabled and firewall.

Value Range
Max. 100 characters

Failover Timer(INVITE)
Specifies the amount of time to wait for a response for an INVITE request.

Value Range
0–30 s

Failover Timer(REGISTER)
Specifies the amount of time to wait for a response for a REGISTER request.

Note
• If 0 is specified, failover operation follows the T1/T2 timer.
• While monitoring failover with OPTIONS, the applicable timer setting is applied to OPTIONS as well.
• This setting cannot be changed while the V-SIPGW card is set to INS.
• This setting cannot be changed when an additional channel is active.

Value Range
0–30 s

PC Programming Manual 253

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
9.10 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property—V-SIPGW
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Calling Party
The Shelf, Slot, and Port for each item are displayed for your reference. For details, see Common
Programming Reference Items in 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot.

Connection
Indicates the port status. To change the status of the port, click the desired cell in the column, and then select
INS or OUS for the port.
This option is only available in On-line mode.

Value Range
INS: The port is in service.
OUS: The port is out of service.
Fault: The port is not communicating with the network.

Header Type
Specifies the header of the SIP message in which the caller information is stored.

Value Range
From Header, P-Preferred-Identity Header

From Header—User Part

Specifies the value to be stored in the username part of the SIP-URI of the From header.

Value Range
User Name, Authentication ID, PBX-CLIP

From Header—SIP-URI
Specifies the complete SIP-URI address of the From header. The configuration in From Header—User Part
will be invalid if this parameter is set.

Value Range
Max. 100 characters

P-Preferred-Identity Header—User Part

Specifies the value to be stored in the username part of the SIP-URI of the P-Preferred-Identity header.

Value Range
User Name, Authentication ID, PBX-CLIP

P-Preferred-Identity Header—SIP-URI
Specifies the complete SIP-URI address of the P-Preferred-Identity header. The configuration in
P-Preferred-Identity Header—User Part will be invalid if this parameter is set.

Value Range
Max. 100 characters

254 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 9.10 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property—V-SIPGW
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Number Format
Selects the format of the CLIP number to be sent to the called party.

Value Range
International, +International, National

Remove Digit
Specifies the number of leading digits of the CLIP number to be removed. This setting is compulsory when
PBX-CLIP is selected in From Header—User Part or P-Preferred-Identity Header—User Part.

Value Range
0–32

Additional Dial
Specifies the number to be added to the CLIP number in the place of the removed digits. This setting is
compulsory when PBX-CLIP is selected in From Header—User Part or P-Preferred-Identity Header—User
Part.

Value Range
Max. 20 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)

Anonymous format in "From" header

Specifies the format of the "From" header when not sending caller ID.

Value Range
Display name and SIP-URI, Display name only

Note
If "Display name and SIP-URI" is selected, the display name part and the SIP-URI of the "From" header
will be displayed as "Anonymous".
[Example]
From: Anonymous <sip:[email protected]>
If "Display name only" is selected, only the display name part of the "From" header will be displayed as
"Anonymous".
[Example]
From: Anonymous <sip:[email protected]>

P-Asserted-Identity header
Select whether to include a P-Asserted-Identity header with caller information. This header will be sent
independent of the selection for Header Type (From Header/P-Preferred-Identity Header).

Value Range
Disable, Enable

Note
• To copy values from one location to another, click Copy to.
• If the Channel Attribute setting of the port is "Additional", the setting cannot be changed.

PC Programming Manual 255

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
9.10 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property—V-SIPGW
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Called Party
The Shelf, Slot, and Port for each item are displayed for your reference. For details, see Common
Programming Reference Items in 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot.

Connection
Indicates the port status. To change the status of the port, click the desired cell in the column, and then select
INS or OUS for the port.
This option is only available in On-line mode.

Value Range
INS: The port is in service.
OUS: The port is out of service.
Fault: The port is not communicating with the network.

Number Format
Specifies the format of an incoming call number.

Value Range
International, +International, National

Type
Specifies the header of the incoming SIP message in which the dialled number is stored.

Value Range
Request-URI, To header

MEX - Prefix for Incoming/E.164 - Prefix for own system

Specifies the Mobile Device Access prefix for incoming calls from MEX-enabled mobile devices.

Value Range
Max. 16 characters

MEX - Prefix for Outgoing/E.164 - Prefix for other system

Specifies the Mobile Device Access outgoing prefix for calls made to MEX-enabled mobile devices.

Value Range
Max. 16 characters

MEX/E.164 - Additional Dial

Specifies additional digits to be inserted before the dialled number of an incoming call from a MEX-enabled
mobile device.

Value Range
Max. 7 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)

256 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 9.10 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property—V-SIPGW
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Voice/FAX
The Shelf, Slot, and Port for each item are displayed for your reference. For details, see Common
Programming Reference Items in 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot.

Connection
Indicates the port status. To change the status of the port, click the desired cell in the column, and then select
INS or OUS for the port.
This option is only available in On-line mode.

Value Range
INS: The port is in service.
OUS: The port is out of service.
Fault: The port is not communicating with the network.

IP Codec Priority—1st, 2nd, 3rd

Specifies the priority of the codecs to be used. None is only available for 2nd and 3rd priorities.

Value Range
G.711A, G.711Mu, G.729A, None

Packet Sampling Time (G.711A)

Specifies the time interval between measurements (samples) of sound data during a conversation. The smaller
this number, the higher the quality of the transmitted sound.

Value Range
20 ms, 30 ms, 40 ms, 50 ms, 60 ms

Packet Sampling Time (G.711Mu)

Specifies the time interval between measurements (samples) of sound data during a conversation. The smaller
this number, the higher the quality of the transmitted sound.

Value Range
20 ms, 30 ms, 40 ms, 50 ms, 60 ms

Packet Sampling Time (G.729A)

Specifies the time interval between measurements (samples) of sound data during a conversation. The smaller
this number, the higher the quality of the transmitted sound.

Value Range
20 ms, 30 ms, 40 ms, 50 ms, 60 ms

Voice Activity Detection for G.711

Enables the use of the Voice Activity Detection feature for the G.711 codec. This feature conserves bandwidth
by detecting silent periods during a call and suppressing the packets of silence from being sent to the network.

PC Programming Manual 257

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
9.10 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property—V-SIPGW
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Value Range
Disable, Enable

Inform Annex B Status (G.729A)

Specifies whether to inform that Annex B for the G.729 codec is not supported.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

Note
Annex B expansion features for the G.729 codec are not supported by the V-SIPGW card. However, it is
necessary to inform some carriers of this fact to avoid having calls disconnected. Carriers can be informed
by enabling this feature.

FAX Sending Method

Specifies the method of transporting the fax signal.

Value Range
G.711 Inband, T.38

Maximum Bit Rate

Specifies the maximum bit rate of the fax signal.

Value Range
No Speed Limit, 2400 bps, 4800 bps, 7200 bps, 9600 bps, 12000 bps, 14400 bps

FAX Detection Ability

Enables the use of the FAX Detection Ability feature. This feature enables end-to-end fax signal relay when
the other party prefers a codec other than G.711. This feature functions only if the other party supports G.711.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

DTMF
Specifies the method to transport DTMF tones.

Value Range
Inband, Outband (RFC2833), Outband (SIP INFO)

Payload Type
Specifies the payload type of RFC2833 for DTMF tones.

Note
Manual programming is required if DTMF is set to Outband (RFC2833).

258 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 9.10 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property—V-SIPGW
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Value Range
96–127

RTP/RTCP
The Shelf, Slot, and Port for each item are displayed for your reference. For details, see Common
Programming Reference Items in 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot.

Connection
Indicates the port status. To change the status of the port, click the desired cell in the column, and then select
INS or OUS for the port.
This option is only available in On-line mode.

Value Range
INS: The port is in service.
OUS: The port is out of service.
Fault: The port is not communicating with the network.

RTP QoS Ability

Specifies the type of value to be stored in the ToS field in the IP header.

Value Range
ToS, DSCP, HEX

RTP QoS-ToS Priority

Specifies the priority level in the ToS field.

Value Range
0–7

RTP QoS-ToS Type

Specifies the ToS type in the ToS field.

Value Range
Normal, Monetary Cost, Reliability, Throughput, Delay

RTP QoS-DSCP
Specifies the value in the ToS field by a DSCP for DiffServ.

Value Range
0–63

RTP QoS-HEX
Specifies the value in the ToS field by a hexadecimal number.

PC Programming Manual 259

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
9.10 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property—V-SIPGW
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Value Range
00–FF

RTCP Packet Sending Ability

Specifies whether to enable each port to send RTCP packets.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

RTCP Packet Interval

Specifies the interval time until the next RTCP packet is sent.

Value Range
5–60 s

Keep Alive Timer

Specifies the length of time to send Keep Alive packets for the connection. Specifying "0 s" will disable the
sending of Keep Alive packets.

Value Range
0 s, 10 s, 20 s, 30 s, 40 s, 50 s, 60 s

T.38
The Shelf, Slot, and Port for each item are displayed for your reference. For details, see Common
Programming Reference Items in 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot.

Connection
Indicates the port status. To change the status of the port, click the desired cell in the column, and then select
INS or OUS for the port.
This option is only available in On-line mode.

Value Range
INS: The port is in service.
OUS: The port is out of service.
Fault: The port is not communicating with the network.

T38 FAX Max Datagram

Specifies the maximum datagram size when using the T.38 protocol.

Value Range
272–512

T38 FAX UDPTL Error Correction – Redundancy

Specifies whether to enable the redundancy feature when using the T.38 protocol.

260 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 9.10 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property—V-SIPGW
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Value Range
Disable, Enable

T38 FAX UDPTL Redundancy count for T.30 messages

Specifies the redundancy count for T.30 messages when using the T.38 protocol.

Value Range
0–7

T38 FAX UDPTL Redundancy count for data

Specifies the redundancy count for data when using the T.38 protocol.

Value Range
0–3

T38 FAX Rate Management Method

Specifies the rate management method when using the T.38 protocol.

Value Range
Transferred TCF, Local TCF

Reject T.38 Request from Network

Specifies whether T.38 protocol data requests are rejected or accepted.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

T.38 FAX NAT Traversal

Specifies the NAT Traversal packet type when sending or receiving faxes using the T.38 protocol.

Value Range
Disable, Blank UDP

T.38 Option
The Shelf, Slot, and Port for each item are displayed for your reference. For details, see Common
Programming Reference Items in 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot.

Connection
Indicates the port status. To change the status of the port, click the desired cell in the column, and then select
INS or OUS for the port.
This option is only available in On-line mode.

Value Range
INS: The port is in service.

PC Programming Manual 261

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
9.10 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property—V-SIPGW
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

OUS: The port is out of service.

Fault: The port is not communicating with the network.

T38 FAX QoS Available

Specifies the type of value to be stored in the ToS field in the IP header when using the T.38 protocol.

Value Range
ToS, DSCP, HEX

T38 FAX QoS-ToS Priority

Specifies the priority level in the ToS field when using the T.38 protocol.

Value Range
0–7

T38 FAX QoS-ToS Type

Specifies the ToS type in the ToS field when using the T.38 protocol.

Value Range
Normal, Monetary Cost, Reliability, Throughput, Delay

T38 FAX QoS-DSCP

Specifies the value in the ToS field by a DSCP for DiffServ when using the T.38 protocol. This setting is
compulsory when DSCP is selected in T38 FAX QoS Available.

Value Range
0–63

T38 FAX QoS-HEX

Specifies the value in the ToS field by a hexadecimal number when using the T.38 protocol. This setting is
compulsory when HEX is selected in T38 FAX QoS Available.

Value Range
00–FF

DSP
The Shelf, Slot, and Port for each item are displayed for your reference. For details, see Common
Programming Reference Items in 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot.

Connection
Indicates the port status. To change the status of the port, click the desired cell in the column, and then select
INS or OUS for the port.
This option is only available in On-line mode.

262 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 9.10 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property—V-SIPGW
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Value Range
INS: The port is in service.
OUS: The port is out of service.
Fault: The port is not communicating with the network.

Echo Canceller Ability

Specifies the echo canceller ability time.

Value Range
OFF, 64 ms, 128 ms

DSP Digital Gain (Down)

Specifies the DSP Digital Gain for the down voice path.

Value Range
-14–6 dB

DSP Digital Gain (Up)

Specifies the DSP Digital Gain for the up voice path.

Value Range
-14–6 dB

EC Gain
Specifies the Echo Canceller Gain.

Value Range
-14–6 dB

NLP Setting
Specifies the NLP (Non-Linear Processor) setting to control echo sound quality.

Value Range
Disable, Weak, Normal, Strong

Supplementary Service
The Shelf, Slot, and Port for each item are displayed for your reference. For details, see Common
Programming Reference Items in 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot.

Connection
Indicates the port status. To change the status of the port, click the desired cell in the column, and then select
INS or OUS for the port.
This option is only available in On-line mode.

PC Programming Manual 263

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
9.10 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property—V-SIPGW
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Value Range
INS: The port is in service.
OUS: The port is out of service.
Fault: The port is not communicating with the network.

CLIP (Receive)
Specify where caller information about an incoming call is obtained:
• Prioritised: P-Asserted-Identity®P-Preferred-Identity®From Header
• Fixed: From Header
Value Range
P-Asserted-Identity Header, From Header

Note
• To copy values from one location to another, click Copy to.
• If the Channel Attribute setting of the port is "Additional", the setting cannot be changed.

CLIR
Specifies whether to allow restriction of the display of the CLIP number on the called party’s telephone when
making a SIP trunk call.

Value Range
Yes, No

CNIP (Send)
Specifies whether to send the caller’s name to be displayed on the called party’s telephone when making a
SIP trunk call.

Value Range
Yes, No

CNIP (Receive)
Specifies whether to receive the caller’s name to be displayed on the called party’s telephone when receiving
a SIP trunk call.

Value Range
Yes, No

Blind Transfer(REFER)
Specifies whether to allow blind transfers using REFER.

Value Range
Yes, No

264 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 9.10 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property—V-SIPGW
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Attended Transfer(REFER)
Specifies whether to allow attended transfers using REFER.

Value Range
Yes, No

Advanced
The Shelf, Slot, and Port for each item are displayed for your reference. For details, see Common
Programming Reference Items in 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot.

Connection
Indicates the port status. To change the status of the port, click the desired cell in the column, and then select
INS or OUS for the port.
This option is only available in On-line mode.

Value Range
INS: The port is in service.
OUS: The port is out of service.
Fault: The port is not communicating with the network.

Diversion Header
Enable this setting to allow the specified SIP trunks to detect incoming Mobile Device Access calls from
MEX-enabled mobile devices.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

PC Programming Manual 265

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
9.11 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Shelf Property—V-IPGW
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

9.11 PBX Configuration—[1-1]

Configuration—Slot—Shelf Property—V-IPGW
Common settings for all of the V-IPGW cards installed in the Virtual Shelf can be programmed.

Main
Gatekeeper Available
Specifies whether to use a gatekeeper.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

RTCP Packet Sending Ability

Specifies whether to enable the PBX to send RTCP packets.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

RTCP Packet Interval

Specifies the length of time until the PBX retries to send RTCP packets when no reply is received.

Value Range
5–60 s

RTP QoS Available

Specifies the type of value to be stored in the ToS field of the packet.

Value Range
ToS, DSCP, HEX

RTP QoS-ToS Priority

Specifies the priority level in the ToS field.

Value Range
0–7

RTP QoS-ToS Type

Specifies the ToS type in the ToS field.

Value Range
Normal, Monetary Cost, Reliability, Throughput, Delay

266 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 9.11 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Shelf Property—V-IPGW
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

RTP QoS-DSCP
Specifies the value in the ToS field by a DSCP for DiffServ.

Value Range
0–63

RTP QoS-HEX
Specifies the value in the ToS field by a hexadecimal number.

Value Range
00–FF

T38 FAX QoS Available

Specifies the type of value to be stored in the ToS field in the IP header when using the T.38 protocol.

Value Range
ToS, DSCP, HEX

T38 FAX QoS-ToS Priority

Specifies the priority level in the ToS field when using the T.38 protocol.

Value Range
0–7

T38 FAX QoS-ToS Type

Specifies the ToS type in the ToS field when using the T.38 protocol.

Value Range
Normal, Monetary Cost, Reliability, Throughput, Delay

T38 FAX QoS-DSCP

Specifies the value in the ToS field by a DSCP for DiffServ when using the T.38 protocol. This setting is
compulsory when DSCP is selected in T38 FAX QoS Available.

Value Range
0–63

T38 FAX QoS-HEX

Specifies the value in the ToS field by a hexadecimal number when using the T.38 protocol. This setting is
compulsory when HEX is selected in T38 FAX QoS Available.

Value Range
00–FF

PC Programming Manual 267

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
9.11 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Shelf Property—V-IPGW
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Echo Canceller Ability

Specifies the echo canceller ability time.

Value Range
OFF, 64 ms, 128 ms

Feature Guide References

5.2.1 IP Proprietary Telephone (IP-PT)

DSP Digital Gain (Down)

Specifies the DSP Digital Gain for the down voice path.

Value Range
-14–6 dB

Feature Guide References

5.2.1 IP Proprietary Telephone (IP-PT)

DSP Digital Gain (Up)

Specifies the DSP Digital Gain for the up voice path.

Value Range
-14–6 dB

Feature Guide References

5.2.1 IP Proprietary Telephone (IP-PT)

EC Gain
Specifies the Echo Canceller Gain.

Value Range
-14–6 dB

Feature Guide References

5.2.1 IP Proprietary Telephone (IP-PT)

NLP Setting
Specifies the NLP (Non-Linear Processor) setting to control echo sound quality.

Value Range
Disable, Weak, Normal, Strong

268 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 9.11 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Shelf Property—V-IPGW
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Feature Guide References

5.2.1 IP Proprietary Telephone (IP-PT)

QSIG-CT
Enables a call to be transferred to a destination extension at another PBX in a QSIG network.

Value Range
No, Yes

Feature Guide References

4.3.4.4 Call Transfer (CT)—by QSIG

QSIG-CF
Enables a call to be forwarded to a destination extension at another PBX in a QSIG network.

Value Range
No, Yes

Feature Guide References

4.3.4.3 Call Forwarding (CF)—by QSIG

Trunk Property
Indicates the networking type of each trunk.

Value Range
Public, Private, VPN

Outgoing Call
First-digit Timer (T302-1)
Specifies the length of time within which the first digit of a dial number must be dialled after seizing a virtual IP
trunk.

Value Range
5–30 s

Inter-digit Timer (T302-2)

Specifies the length of time within which subsequent digits of a dial number must be dialled.

Value Range
1–10 s

PC Programming Manual 269

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
9.11 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Shelf Property—V-IPGW
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Dial End Code

Specifies the delimiter code to be used to signal the end of a dialled number.

Value Range
0–9, #, *

Incoming Call
Voice Activity Detection for G.711
Enables the use of the Voice Activity Detection feature for the G.711 codec. This feature conserves bandwidth
by detecting silent periods during a call and suppressing the packets of silence from being sent to the network.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

Voice Codec Priority 1st

Specifies the highest priority codec type. For fax communications, it is necessary to specify G.711A or G.
711Mu for this parameter.

Value Range
G.711A, G.711Mu, G.729A

Voice Codec Priority 2nd

Specifies the second highest priority codec type.

Value Range
None, G.711A, G.711Mu, G.729A

Voice Codec Priority 3rd

Specifies the third highest priority codec type.

Value Range
None, G.711A, G.711Mu, G.729A

Packet Sampling Time for G.711A

Specifies the time interval between measurements (samples) of sound data during a conversation. The smaller
this number, the higher the quality of the transmitted sound.

Value Range
20 ms, 30 ms, 40 ms, 50 ms, 60 ms

Packet Sampling Time for G.711Mu

Specifies the time interval between measurements (samples) of sound data during a conversation. The smaller
this number, the higher the quality of the transmitted sound.

270 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 9.11 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Shelf Property—V-IPGW
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Value Range
20 ms, 30 ms, 40 ms, 50 ms, 60 ms

Packet Sampling Time for G.729A

Specifies the time interval between measurements (samples) of sound data during a conversation. The smaller
this number, the higher the quality of the transmitted sound.

Value Range
20 ms, 30 ms, 40 ms, 50 ms, 60 ms

FAX Detection Ability

Enables the use of the FAX Detection Ability feature. Since fax signals using a codec other than G.711 cannot
be received accurately at the destination, this feature automatically switches the codec to G.711 to enable
end-to-end fax signal relay over the network.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

PC Programming Manual References

9.11 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Shelf Property—V-IPGW—Incoming Call— Voice
Codec Priority 1st

FAX Sending Method

Specifies the method of transporting the fax signal.

Value Range
G.711 Inband, T.38

Maximum Bit Rate

Specifies the maximum bit rate of the fax signal.

Value Range
No Speed Limit, 2400 bps, 4800 bps, 7200 bps, 9600 bps, 12000 bps, 14400 bps

DTMF
Specifies the type of DTMF tone to be sent out.

Value Range
Inband, Outband (RFC2833), Outband (H.245)

Payload Type
Specifies the payload type for DTMF tones using RFC2833. Programming this parameter is only necessary if
DTMF is set to Outband (RFC2833).

PC Programming Manual 271

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
9.11 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Shelf Property—V-IPGW
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Value Range
96–127

T38 FAX Max Datagram

Specifies the maximum datagram size when using the T.38 protocol.

Value Range
272–512

T38 FAX UDPTL Error Correction – Redundancy

Specifies whether to enable the redundancy feature when using the T.38 protocol.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

T38 FAX UDPTL Redundancy count for T.30 messages

Specifies the redundancy count for T.30 messages when using the T.38 protocol.

Value Range
0–7

T38 FAX UDPTL Redundancy count for data

Specifies the redundancy count for data when using the T.38 protocol.

Value Range
0–3

T38 FAX Rate Management Method

Specifies the rate management method when using the T.38 protocol.

Value Range
Transferred TCF, Local TCF

Timer
T301
Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for a reply after making a call.

Value Range
0–18000 ´ 100 ms

T302
Specifies the maximum time allowed between each digit on an incoming call. Applies to overlap receiving.

272 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 9.11 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Shelf Property—V-IPGW
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Value Range
0–600 ´ 100 ms

T303
Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for a reply after sending the SETUP (call setting) message.

Value Range
0–600 ´ 100 ms

T304
Specifies the maximum time allowed between each digit on an outgoing call. Applies to overlap sending.

Value Range
0–3000 ´ 100 ms

T305
Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for a reply after sending the DISC (disconnection) message.

Value Range
0–3000 ´ 100 ms

T308
Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for a reply after receiving the Release message.

Value Range
0–600 ´ 100 ms

T309
Specifies the length of time after which the PBX tries to disconnect the data link, before disconnecting the call.

Value Range
0–3000 ´ 100 ms

T310
Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for a continuance message after receiving the Incoming Call
Proceeding message.

Value Range
0–3000 ´ 100 ms

T313
Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for a reply after sending the Connect message.

PC Programming Manual 273

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
9.11 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Shelf Property—V-IPGW
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Value Range
0–600 ´ 100 ms

T316
Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for a reply after sending the Restart message.

Value Range
0–3000 ´ 100 ms

T318
Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for a reply after sending the Resume message.

Value Range
0–600 ´ 100 ms

T319
Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for a reply after sending the Suspend message.

Value Range
0–600 ´ 100 ms

T322
Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for a reply after sending the Status enquiry message.

Value Range
0–600 ´ 100 ms

T3D3
Specifies the length of time after which the PBX tries to establish L2 in "Permanent" mode.

Value Range
0–3000 ´ 100 ms

T3D9
Specifies the length of time after which the PBX tries to disconnect L2 in "Call by Call" mode.

Value Range
0–3000 ´ 100 ms

274 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 9.11.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Shelf Property—V-IPGW—GK Settings
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

9.11.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Shelf

Property—V-IPGW—GK Settings
Gatekeeper registration information can be programmed.

Destination Number
Specifies a telephone number to register with a gatekeeper.

Value Range
Max. 30 digits (consisting of 0–9)

Device Name
Specifies the name of the device for programming reference.

Value Range
Max. 20 characters

PC Programming Manual 275

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
9.11.2 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Shelf Property—V-IPGW—Hunt Pattern
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

9.11.2 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Shelf

Property—V-IPGW—Hunt Pattern
The related settings of hunt patterns can be programmed. The hunt pattern determines how to route incoming
calls through virtual IP trunks to the PBX.
A maximum of 32 hunt patterns can be programmed.

Hunt Pattern 1–16

Leading Number
Specifies the leading digits of dialled numbers by which to determine the call distribution port group to direct
incoming calls.

Value Range
Max. 30 digits (consisting of 0–9)

Call Distribution Port Group—1st–16th

Specifies the number of the call distribution port group to which incoming calls are directed in priority.

Value Range
For 1st:
CDPG1–CDPG48

For 2nd–16th:
None, CDPG1–CDPG48

PC Programming Manual References

9.12 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property—V-IPGW— Call Distribution Port Group

Feature Guide References

4.3.2.3 Call Distribution Port Group

276 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 9.12 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property—V-IPGW
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

9.12 PBX Configuration—[1-1]

Configuration—Slot—Port Property—V-IPGW
Various settings can be programmed for each virtual IP Gateway port.
The Shelf, Slot, and Port for each item are displayed for your reference. For details, see Common
Programming Reference Items in 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot.

Trunk Adaptor
To connect to a Trunk Adaptor, follow the steps below.
1. Ensure that the Trunk Adaptor is connected to the network and a power supply.
2. Click Trunk Adaptor. The Trunk Adaptor List screen is displayed.
3. Enter a name (20 characters or less) for the Trunk Adaptor in Trunk Adaptor Name.
4. Enter the Trunk Adaptor’s IP address in Trunk Adaptor IP Address.
5. To confirm that the setting is correct, click CONNECT. If the setting is correct, the Trunk Adaptor’s Web
Maintenance Console will open in a new browser window.
For details about the Trunk Adaptor’s Web Maintenance Console, refer to the documentation of the Trunk
Adaptor.
6. Click OK.

Connection
Indicates the port status. To change the status of the port, click the desired cell in the column, and then select
INS or OUS for the port.
This option is only available in On-line mode.

Value Range
INS: The port is in service.
OUS: The port is out of service.
Fault: The port is not communicating with the network.

Connection Attribute
Specifies whether to connect a port to a Trunk Adaptor or use it as an IP gateway.

Value Range
Gateway, Trunk Adaptor

Feature Guide References

5.3.1 Trunk Adaptor Connection

Call Distribution Port Group

Specifies a call distribution port group to which incoming trunk calls are directed through the virtual VoIP
gateway port.

Value Range
1–48

PC Programming Manual 277

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
9.12 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property—V-IPGW
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Feature Guide References

4.3.2.3 Call Distribution Port Group

278 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 9.13 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Card Property—V-IPEXT
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

9.13 PBX Configuration—[1-1]

Configuration—Slot—Card Property—V-IPEXT
The properties of the V-IPEXT card can be specified.

Signalling (PTAP) UDP Port No. (Server)

Specifies the UDP port used by the V-IPEXT card to transmit and receive PTAP (Panasonic Telephony
Administration Protocol) data. This must be changed if another network application is using the same port.
To change the value displayed here, click Common Settings and set the desired value.

Value Range
1024–65535

Feature Guide References

5.2.1 IP Proprietary Telephone (IP-PT)

Signalling (MGCP) UDP Port No. (Server)

Specifies the UDP port used by the V-IPEXT card to transmit and receive MGCP (Media Gateway Control
Protocol) data. This must be changed if another network application is using the same port.
To change the value displayed here, click Common Settings and set the desired value.

Value Range
1024–65535

Feature Guide References

5.2.1 IP Proprietary Telephone (IP-PT)

Signalling (MGCP) UDP Port No. (IP-PT)

Indicates the UDP port used to transmit and receive MGCP (Media Gateway Control Protocol) data on the
IP-PT side (reference only).

Value Range
2427

Feature Guide References

5.2.1 IP Proprietary Telephone (IP-PT)

Keep Alive Time-Out

Specifies the length of time that the PBX will continue to consider an IP-PT to be active even if it receives no
transmissions from that IP-PT. The PBX constantly confirms the status of IP-PTs. If no communications are
received from an IP-PT for the duration specified here, the PBX considers the IP-PT to be unreachable, and
sets the port status to Fault.

PC Programming Manual 279

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
9.13 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Card Property—V-IPEXT
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

During operation, set between 10 s and 60 s. Settings over 60 s, and Disable, are used for debugging purposes,
and IP-PTs cannot be guaranteed to function normally in these circumstances. Do not use debugging settings
unless instructed to do so.
To change the value displayed here, click Common Settings and set the desired value.

Value Range
Disable, 10–120 s

Feature Guide References

5.2.1 IP Proprietary Telephone (IP-PT)

First Resending Time (PTAP)

Specifies the length of time that the PBX waits before starting to resend PTAP (Panasonic Telephony
Administration Protocol) data.
To change the value displayed here, click Common Settings and set the desired value.

Value Range
500 ´ n (n=1–16) ms

Feature Guide References

5.2.1 IP Proprietary Telephone (IP-PT)

Resending Time Out (PTAP)

Specifies the length of time after which the PBX terminates resending PTAP (Panasonic Telephony
Administration Protocol) data.
To change the value displayed here, click Common Settings and set the desired value.

Value Range
150–240 s

Feature Guide References

5.2.1 IP Proprietary Telephone (IP-PT)

First Resending Time (MGCP)

Specifies the length of time that the PBX waits before starting to resend MGCP (Media Gateway Control
Protocol) data.
To change the value displayed here, click Common Settings and set the desired value.

Value Range
500 ´ n (n=1–8) ms

Feature Guide References

5.2.1 IP Proprietary Telephone (IP-PT)

280 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 9.13 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Card Property—V-IPEXT
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Resending Time Out (MGCP)

Specifies the length of time after which the PBX terminates resending MGCP (Media Gateway Control Protocol)
data.
To change the value displayed here, click Common Settings and set the desired value.

Value Range
75–120 s

Feature Guide References

5.2.1 IP Proprietary Telephone (IP-PT)

PC Programming Manual 281

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
9.14 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property—V-IPEXT
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

9.14 PBX Configuration—[1-1]

Configuration—Slot—Port Property—V-IPEXT
Various settings can be programmed for each virtual IP extension port.

IP-PT Registration and De-registration

An IP-PT must be registered to the PBX by programming the PBX and IP-PT before it can be used.
Programming instructions for the PBX are given below.
It is possible to de-register the IP-PT later.
IP-PT Registration, De-registration, and Forced De-registration can be performed only in On-line mode.

Preparation
Open 27.1 Network Service—[1] IP Address/Ports—Basic Settings, and confirm that the IP addresses of
the mother board and DSP card, subnet mask address, and default gateway address are set.

Registration
Follow the steps below to register the IP-PT.
1. Connect the IP-PT to be registered to the network and, if necessary, the power supply.
2. Click Registration.
A dialogue box will appear. Non-registered (available) extension numbers and names are displayed on the
left.
3. Highlight numbers and names and click the right arrow to select them for registration. Click Next.
4. Click Next.
5. If the registration is still in progress, the dialogue box will show "Registration Executing".
If the registration is successful, the dialogue box will show "Registration Completed". Click Close.
Once the IP-PT is successfully registered, the status of the IP-PT will update to show "Registered".

De-registration
Follow the steps below to de-register the IP-PT.
1. Click De-registration.
A dialogue box will appear. Registered extension numbers and names are displayed on the left.
2. Highlight numbers and names and click the right arrow to select them for de-registration. Click Next.
A dialogue box will appear.
3. Click Confirm.
If the de-registration is successful, the dialogue box will show "De-registration Succeed".
4. Click Close.
Once the IP-PT is successfully de-registered, the status of the IP-PT will update to show "None".

Forced De-registration
Follow the steps below to forcibly de-register the IP-PT when normal de-registration has been unsuccessful
or IP address settings have been changed or deleted only on the IP-PT.
1. Click Forced De-registration.
A dialogue box will appear. Registered extension numbers and names are displayed on the left.

282 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 9.14 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property—V-IPEXT
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

2. Highlight numbers and names and click the right arrow to select them for forced de-registration. Click
Next.
A dialogue box will appear.
3. Click OK.
A dialogue box will appear.
4. Click Confirm.
If the de-registration is successful, the dialogue box will show "Forced De-registration Succeed".
5. Click Close.
Once the IP-PT is successfully de-registered, the status of the IP-PT will update to show "None".

Main
The Shelf, Slot, and Port for each item are displayed for your reference. For details, see Common
Programming Reference Items in 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot.

Extension Number
Specifies the extension number of the port.

Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)

Feature Guide References

5.2.1 IP Proprietary Telephone (IP-PT)

Extension Name
Specifies the extension name of the port.

Value Range
Max. 20 characters

Feature Guide References

5.2.1 IP Proprietary Telephone (IP-PT)

Connection
Indicates the port status. To change the status of the port, click the desired cell in the column, and then select
INS or OUS for the port.
This option is only available in On-line mode.

Value Range
INS: The port is in service.
OUS: The port is out of service.
Fault: The port is not communicating with the network.

Feature Guide References

5.2.1 IP Proprietary Telephone (IP-PT)

PC Programming Manual 283

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
9.14 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property—V-IPEXT
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Status
Indicates whether a certain IP-PT is registered (reference only).

Value Range
None, Registered

Feature Guide References

5.2.1 IP Proprietary Telephone (IP-PT)

IP Phone Registration ID (MAC Address)

Specifies the MAC address of the IP-PT.
This parameter can only be modified when Connection on this screen is set to OUS.

Value Range
00:00:00:00:00:00–FF:FF:FF:FF:FF:FF

Feature Guide References

5.2.1 IP Proprietary Telephone (IP-PT)

Current IP Address
Indicates the current IP address of the IP-PT (reference only).

Value Range
1.0.0.0–223.255.255.255

Feature Guide References

5.2.1 IP Proprietary Telephone (IP-PT)

Program Ver.
Indicates the programme software file version of the IP-PT (reference only).

Value Range
Version number

Feature Guide References

5.2.1 IP Proprietary Telephone (IP-PT)

P2P Group
Specifies the peer-to-peer group of the IP-PT.

Value Range
1–32

284 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 9.14 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property—V-IPEXT
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

PC Programming Manual References

9.2.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property—Main— P2P Group

Feature Guide References

5.2.3 Peer-to-Peer (P2P) Connection

P2P Group Name

Indicates the selected peer-to-peer group’s name (reference only).

Value Range
P2P Group Name

PC Programming Manual References

9.2.2 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property—Site—Main— P2P Group

Feature Guide References

5.2.3 Peer-to-Peer (P2P) Connection

Option
The Shelf, Slot, and Port for each item are displayed for your reference. For details, see Common
Programming Reference Items in 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot.

Extension Number
Specifies the extension number of the port.

Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)

Feature Guide References

5.2.1 IP Proprietary Telephone (IP-PT)

Extension Name
Specifies the extension name of the port.

Value Range
Max. 20 characters

Feature Guide References

5.2.1 IP Proprietary Telephone (IP-PT)

PC Programming Manual 285

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
9.14 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property—V-IPEXT
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Connection
Indicates the port status. To change the status of the port, click the desired cell in the column, and then select
INS or OUS for the port.
This option is only available in On-line mode.

Value Range
INS: The port is in service.
OUS: The port is out of service.
Fault: The port is not communicating with the network.

Feature Guide References

5.2.1 IP Proprietary Telephone (IP-PT)

Headset OFF/ON
Turns on or off the use of a headset with the IP-PT.

Value Range
Headset OFF, Headset ON

Feature Guide References

2.11.4 Headset Operation
5.2.1 IP Proprietary Telephone (IP-PT)

C.Waiting with Headset
When headset mode is enabled, selects whether a call waiting tone is heard through the telephone’s speaker
phone or the ear piece of the headset. However, this setting is available only for telephones that support both
EHS headsets and waiting tone path switching. (KX-NT556, KX-NT553 only)

Value Range
PT Tone, Headset

Feature Guide References

2.10.4.2 Call Waiting Tone
5.2.1 IP Proprietary Telephone (IP-PT)

Ringing Tone
Selects the dual-tone switching pattern of the ring tone for incoming calls.

Value Range
A: 64 ms (697 Hz), 64 ms (852 Hz)
B: 32 ms (697 Hz), 32 ms (852 Hz)
C: 128 ms (697 Hz), 128 ms (852 Hz)
D: 32 ms (697 Hz), 96 ms (852 Hz)

286 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 9.14 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property—V-IPEXT
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Feature Guide References

5.2.1 IP Proprietary Telephone (IP-PT)

IP Codec Priority
Specifies the codec used for compression and decompression of transmitted data.
Some codecs may become unavailable depending on the value set here, as follows:
– When G.722 is selected, the priority is G.722 ® G.711 ® G.729A.
– When G.711 is selected, the priority is G.711 ® G.729A (G.722 is unavailable).
– When G.729A is selected, both G.711 and G.722 are unavailable.
Value Range
G.711, G.729A, G.722

Feature Guide References

5.2.1 IP Proprietary Telephone (IP-PT)

Packet Sampling Time (G.711/G.722)

Specifies the time interval between measurements (samples) of sound data during a conversation.
The smaller this number, the higher the quality of the transmitted sound.

Value Range
20 ms, 30 ms, 40 ms, 60 ms

Feature Guide References

5.2.1 IP Proprietary Telephone (IP-PT)

Packet Sampling Time (G.729A)

Specifies the time interval between measurements (samples) of sound data during a conversation.
The smaller this number, the higher the quality of the transmitted sound.

Value Range
20 ms, 30 ms, 40 ms, 60 ms

Feature Guide References

5.2.1 IP Proprietary Telephone (IP-PT)

Announce Mode
Specifies if the extension’s built-in ANNOUNCE feature is enabled. A KX-NT265, KX-NT300 series, or
KX-NT500 series phone in a remote location with ANNOUNCE enabled can provide the PBX’s IP Address
information to other terminals in the remote location in place of manually programming the PBX’s IP address
at each terminal.

Value Range
Enable, Disable

PC Programming Manual 287

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
9.14 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property—V-IPEXT
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Feature Guide References

5.2.1 IP Proprietary Telephone (IP-PT)

Voice
The Shelf, Slot, and Port for each item are displayed for your reference. For details, see Common
Programming Reference Items in 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot.

Extension Number
Specifies the extension number of the port.

Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)

Feature Guide References

5.2.1 IP Proprietary Telephone (IP-PT)

Extension Name
Specifies the extension name of the port.

Value Range
Max. 20 characters

Feature Guide References

5.2.1 IP Proprietary Telephone (IP-PT)

Connection
Indicates the port status. To change the status of the port, click the desired cell in the column, and then select
INS or OUS for the port.
This option is only available in On-line mode.

Value Range
INS: The port is in service.
OUS: The port is out of service.
Fault: The port is not communicating with the network.

Feature Guide References

5.2.1 IP Proprietary Telephone (IP-PT)

DTMF
Specifies the type of DTMF tone to be sent out.

Value Range
Inband, Outband (RFC2833)

288 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 9.14 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property—V-IPEXT
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Feature Guide References

5.2.1 IP Proprietary Telephone (IP-PT)

Payload Type
Specifies the payload type for DTMF tones using RFC2833. Programming this parameter is only necessary if
DTMF is set to Outband (RFC2833).

Value Range
96–127

Feature Guide References

5.2.1 IP Proprietary Telephone (IP-PT)

Remote Place
The Shelf, Slot, and Port for each item are displayed for your reference. For details, see Common
Programming Reference Items in 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot.

Extension Number
Specifies the extension number of the port.

Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)

Feature Guide References

5.2.1 IP Proprietary Telephone (IP-PT)

Extension Name
Specifies the extension name of the port.

Value Range
Max. 20 characters

Feature Guide References

5.2.1 IP Proprietary Telephone (IP-PT)

Connection
Indicates the port status. To change the status of the port, click the desired cell in the column, and then select
INS or OUS for the port. This option is only available in On-line mode.

Value Range
INS: The port is in service.
OUS: The port is out of service.
Fault: The port is not communicating with the network.

PC Programming Manual 289

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
9.14 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property—V-IPEXT
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Feature Guide References

5.2.1 IP Proprietary Telephone (IP-PT)

Phone Location
Specifies the type of extension connected to the port.

Value Range
Local: The extension is located on the same network as the PBX (standard configuration).
Remote (MRG): The extension is accessing the PBX remotely (use Media Relay Gateway).

Feature Guide References

5.2.1 IP Proprietary Telephone (IP-PT)

290 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 9.15 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Card Property—V-SIPEXT
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

9.15 PBX Configuration—[1-1]

Configuration—Slot—Card Property—V-SIPEXT
The properties of the virtual SIP Extension card can be specified.
To change the value displayed here, click Common Settings and set the desired value.

Echo Canceller Ability

Specifies the echo canceller ability time.

Value Range
OFF, 64 ms, 128 ms

Feature Guide References

5.2.2 SIP (Session Initiation Protocol) Extension

DSP Digital Gain (Down)

Specifies the DSP Digital Gain for the down voice path.

Value Range
-14–6 dB

Feature Guide References

5.2.2 SIP (Session Initiation Protocol) Extension

DSP Digital Gain (Up)

Specifies the DSP Digital Gain for the up voice path.

Value Range
-14–6 dB

Feature Guide References

5.2.2 SIP (Session Initiation Protocol) Extension

EC Gain
Specifies the Echo Canceller Gain.

Value Range
-14–6 dB

Feature Guide References

5.2.2 SIP (Session Initiation Protocol) Extension

PC Programming Manual 291

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
9.15 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Card Property—V-SIPEXT
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

NLP Setting
Specifies the NLP (Non-Linear Processor) setting to control echo sound quality.

Value Range
Disable, Weak, Normal, Strong

Feature Guide References

5.2.2 SIP (Session Initiation Protocol) Extension

292 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 9.16 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property—V-SIPEXT
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

9.16 PBX Configuration—[1-1]

Configuration—Slot—Port Property—V-SIPEXT
Various settings can be programmed for each virtual SIP extension port.
The Shelf, Slot, and Port for each item are displayed for your reference. For details, see Common
Programming Reference Items in 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot.

Main
Extension Number
Specifies the extension number of the port.

Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)

Feature Guide References

5.2.2 SIP (Session Initiation Protocol) Extension

Password
Specifies the password used for registering a SIP Extension to the PBX. While it is possible to enter a password
manually for each SIP Extension, you can copy Extension Number to Password by clicking the Copy
to button. This parameter can only be modified when the virtual SIP extension port is set to OUS, and the
programmer must be in On-line mode.

Value Range
4–16 characters (consisting of 0–9, a–z, A–Z)

Feature Guide References

5.2.2 SIP (Session Initiation Protocol) Extension

Connection
Indicates the port status. To change the status of the port, click the desired cell in the column, and then select
INS or OUS for the port.
This option is only available in On-line mode.

Value Range
INS: The port is in service.
OUS: The port is out of service.
Fault: The port is not communicating with the network.

Feature Guide References

5.2.2 SIP (Session Initiation Protocol) Extension

PC Programming Manual 293

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
9.16 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property—V-SIPEXT
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Current IP Address
Indicates the current IP address of the SIP Extension (reference only).

Value Range
1.0.0.0–223.255.255.255

Feature Guide References

5.2.2 SIP (Session Initiation Protocol) Extension

P2P Group
Specifies the peer-to-peer group.

Value Range
1–32

PC Programming Manual References

9.2.2 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property—Site—Main— P2P Group

Feature Guide References

5.2.3 Peer-to-Peer (P2P) Connection

P2P Group Name

Indicates the selected peer-to-peer group’s name (reference only).

Value Range
P2P Group Name

PC Programming Manual References

9.2.2 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property—Site—Main— P2P Group
11.10 PBX Configuration—[3-10] Group—P2P Group

Feature Guide References

5.2.3 Peer-to-Peer (P2P) Connection

MWI Method
Selects the method of receiving Message Waiting Indications for SIP extensions.

Value Range
Standard, Unsolicited

Note
If "Standard" is selected, a maximum of 64 SIP extensions can be used.

294 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 9.16 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property—V-SIPEXT
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Feature Guide References

2.20.1 Message Waiting
5.2.2 SIP (Session Initiation Protocol) Extension

Option
The Shelf, Slot, and Port for each item are displayed for your reference. For details, see Common Programming
Reference Items in 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot.

Extension Number
Specifies the extension number of the port.

Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)

Feature Guide References

5.2.2 SIP (Session Initiation Protocol) Extension

Password
Specifies the password used for registering a SIP Extension to the PBX. While it is possible to enter a password
manually for each SIP Extension, you can copy the value for Extension Number to Password by clicking
the Copy to button. This parameter can only be modified when the virtual SIP extension port is set to OUS,
and the programmer must be in On-line mode.

Value Range
4–16 characters (consisting of 0–9, a–z, A–Z)

Feature Guide References

5.2.2 SIP (Session Initiation Protocol) Extension

Connection
Indicates the port status. To change the status of the port, click the desired cell in the column, and then select
INS or OUS for the port. This option is only available in On-line mode.

Value Range
INS: The port is in service
OUS: The port is out of service
Fault: The port is not communicating with the network.

Feature Guide References

5.2.2 SIP (Session Initiation Protocol) Extension

Bearer
Selects the bearer mode. When Automatic is selected, the bearer mode is set to Speech automatically.

PC Programming Manual 295

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
9.16 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property—V-SIPEXT
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Value Range
Automatic, Speech, Audio

Feature Guide References

5.2.2 SIP (Session Initiation Protocol) Extension

Packet Sampling Time (G.711/G.722)

Specifies the time interval between measurements (samples) of sound data during a conversation. The smaller
this number, the higher the quality of the transmitted sound.

Value Range
20 ms, 30 ms, 40 ms, 50 ms, 60 ms

Feature Guide References

5.2.2 SIP (Session Initiation Protocol) Extension

Packet Sampling Time (G.729A)

Specifies the time interval between measurements (samples) of sound data during a conversation. The smaller
this number, the higher the quality of the transmitted sound.

Value Range
20 ms, 30 ms, 40 ms, 50 ms, 60 ms

Feature Guide References

5.2.2 SIP (Session Initiation Protocol) Extension

Remote Place
The Shelf, Slot, and Port for each item are displayed for your reference. For details, see Common Programming
Reference Items in 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot.

Extension Number
Specifies the extension number of the port.

Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)

Feature Guide References

5.2.2 SIP (Session Initiation Protocol) Extension

Password
Specifies the password used for registering a SIP Extension to the PBX. While it is possible to enter a password
manually for each SIP Extension, you can copy the value for Extension Number to Password by clicking

296 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 9.16 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property—V-SIPEXT
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

the Copy to button. This parameter can only be modified when the virtual SIP extension port is set to OUS,
and the programmer must be in On-line mode.

Value Range
4–16 characters (consisting of 0–9, a–z, A–Z)

Feature Guide References

5.2.2 SIP (Session Initiation Protocol) Extension

Connection
Indicates the port status. To change the status of the port, click the desired cell in the column, and then select
INS or OUS for the port. This option is only available in On-line mode.

Value Range
INS: The port is in service
OUS: The port is out of service
Fault: The port is not communicating with the network.

Feature Guide References

5.2.2 SIP (Session Initiation Protocol) Extension

Phone Location
Specifies the type of extension connected to the port.

Value Range
Local: The extension is located on the same network as the PBX (standard configuration).
Remote (MRG): The extension is accessing the PBX remotely (Media Relay Gateway).

Feature Guide References

5.2.2 SIP (Session Initiation Protocol) Extension

FAX/T.38
The Shelf, Slot, and Port for each item are displayed for your reference. For details, see Common Programming
Reference Items in 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot.

Extension Number
Specifies the extension number of the port.

Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)

Feature Guide References

5.2.2 SIP (Session Initiation Protocol) Extension

PC Programming Manual 297

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
9.16 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property—V-SIPEXT
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Password
Specifies the password used for registering a SIP Extension to the PBX. While it is possible to enter a password
manually for each SIP Extension, you can copy the value for Extension Number to Password by clicking
the Copy to button. This parameter can only be modified when the virtual SIP extension port is set to OUS,
and the programmer must be in On-line mode.

Value Range
4–16 characters (consisting of 0–9, a–z, A–Z)

Feature Guide References

5.2.2 SIP (Session Initiation Protocol) Extension

Connection
Indicates the port status. To change the status of the port, click the desired cell in the column, and then select
INS or OUS for the port. This option is only available in On-line mode.

Value Range
INS: The port is in service
OUS: The port is out of service
Fault: The port is not communicating with the network.

Feature Guide References

5.2.2 SIP (Session Initiation Protocol) Extension

FAX Detection Ability

Enables the use of the FAX Detection Ability feature.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

Feature Guide References

5.2.2 SIP (Session Initiation Protocol) Extension

FAX Sending Method

Specifies the method of transporting the fax signal.

Value Range
G.711 Inband, T.38

Feature Guide References

5.2.2 SIP (Session Initiation Protocol) Extension

298 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 9.16 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property—V-SIPEXT
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Maximum Bit Rate

Specifies the maximum bit rate of the fax signal.

Value Range
No Speed Limit, 2400 bps, 4800 bps, 7200 bps, 9600 bps, 12000 bps, 14400 bps

Feature Guide References

5.2.2 SIP (Session Initiation Protocol) Extension

T38 FAX Max Datagram

Specifies the maximum datagram size when using the T.38 protocol.

Value Range
272–512

Feature Guide References

5.2.2 SIP (Session Initiation Protocol) Extension

T38 FAX UDPTL Error Correction – Redundancy

Specifies whether to enable the redundancy feature when using the T.38 protocol.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

Feature Guide References

5.2.2 SIP (Session Initiation Protocol) Extension

T38 FAX UDPTL Redundancy count for T.30 messages

Specifies the redundancy count for T.30 messages when using the T.38 protocol.

Value Range
0–7

Feature Guide References

5.2.2 SIP (Session Initiation Protocol) Extension

T38 FAX UDPTL Redundancy count for data

Specifies the redundancy count for data when using the T.38 protocol.

Value Range
0–3

PC Programming Manual 299

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
9.16 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property—V-SIPEXT
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Feature Guide References

5.2.2 SIP (Session Initiation Protocol) Extension

T38 FAX Rate Management Method

Specifies the rate management method when using the T.38 protocol.

Value Range
Transferred TCF, Local TCF

Feature Guide References

5.2.2 SIP (Session Initiation Protocol) Extension

300 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 9.17 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Card Property—V-IPCS
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

9.17 PBX Configuration—[1-1]

Configuration—Slot—Card Property—V-IPCS
The properties of the V-IPCS card can be specified.

Signalling (PTAP) UDP Port No. (Server)

Specifies the UDP port used by the V-IPCS card to transmit and receive PTAP (Panasonic Telephony
Administration Protocol) data. This must be changed if another network application is using the same port.
To change the value displayed here, click Common Settings and set the desired value.

Value Range
1024–65535

Signalling (MGCP) UDP Port No. (Server)

Specifies the UDP port used by the V-IPCS card to transmit and receive MGCP (Media Gateway Control
Protocol) data. This must be changed if another network application is using the same port.
To change the value displayed here, click Common Settings and set the desired value.

Value Range
1024–65535

Signalling (MGCP) UDP Port No. (IP-CS)

Indicates the UDP port used to transmit and receive MGCP (Media Gateway Control Protocol) data on the
IP-CS side (reference only).

Value Range
2427

Voice (RTP) UDP Port No. (IP-CS)

Specifies the UDP port used to transmit and receive RTP (Real-time Transfer Protocol) data on the IP-CS side.
This must be changed if another network application is using the same port.
For voice communications, an IP-CS uses 128 contiguous UDP ports, starting from the port number specified
here.
To change the value displayed here, click Common Settings and set the desired value.

Value Range
1024–65024

Keep Alive Time-Out

Specifies the length of time that the PBX will continue to consider an IP-CS to be active even if it receives no
transmissions from that IP-CS. The PBX constantly confirms the status of IP-CSs. If no communications are
received from an IP-CS for the duration specified here, the PBX considers the IP-CS to be unreachable, and
sets the port status to Fault.
During operation, set between 10 s and 60 s. Settings over 60 s, and Disable, are used for debugging purposes,
and IP-CSs cannot be guaranteed to function normally in these circumstances. Do not use debugging settings
unless instructed to do so.

PC Programming Manual 301

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
9.17 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Card Property—V-IPCS
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

To change the value displayed here, click Common Settings and set the desired value.

Value Range
Disable, 10–120 s

First Resending Time (PTAP)

Specifies the length of time that the PBX waits before starting to resend PTAP (Panasonic Telephony
Administration Protocol) data.
To change the value displayed here, click Common Settings and set the desired value.

Value Range
500 ´ n (n=1–16) ms

Resending Time Out (PTAP)

Specifies the length of time after which the PBX terminates resending PTAP (Panasonic Telephony
Administration Protocol) data.
To change the value displayed here, click Common Settings and set the desired value.

Value Range
150–240 s

First Resending Time (MGCP)

Specifies the length of time that the PBX waits before starting to resend MGCP (Media Gateway Control
Protocol) data.
To change the value displayed here, click Common Settings and set the desired value.

Value Range
500 ´ n (n=1–8) ms

Resending Time Out (MGCP)

Specifies the length of time after which the PBX terminates resending MGCP (Media Gateway Control Protocol)
data.
To change the value displayed here, click Common Settings and set the desired value.

Value Range
75–120 s

CS Repeater Mode
Specifies the CS Repeater Mode setting. If Normal is selected, DECT communication will not be encrypted.
To change the value displayed here, click Common Settings and set the desired value.

Value Range
Normal, Optional

302 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 9.18 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property—V-IPCS
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

9.18 PBX Configuration—[1-1]

Configuration—Slot—Port Property—V-IPCS
Various settings can be programmed for each virtual IP-CS port.

IP-CS Registration and De-registration

An IP-CS must be registered to the PBX by programming the PBX and IP-CS before it can be used.
Programming instructions for the PBX are given below.
It is possible to de-register the IP-CS later.
IP-CS Registration, De-registration, and Forced De-registration can be performed only in On-line mode.

Preparation
Open 27.1 Network Service—[1] IP Address/Ports—Basic Settings, and confirm that the IP addresses of
the mother board and DSP card, subnet mask address, and default gateway address are set.

Registration
Follow the steps below to register the IP-CS.
1. Connect the IP-CS to be registered to the network and, if necessary, the power supply.
2. Click Registration.
A dialogue box will appear. Non-registered (available) IP-CSs are displayed on the left.
3. Highlight IP-CSs and click the right arrow to select them for registration. Click Next.
4. If the registration is still in progress, the dialogue box will show "Registration Executing".
If the registration is successful, the dialogue box will show "Registration Completed". Click Close.
Once the IP-CS is successfully registered, the status of the IP-CS will update to show "Registered".

De-registration
Follow the steps below to de-register the IP-CS.
1. Click De-registration.
A dialogue box will appear. Registered IP-CSs are displayed on the left.
2. Highlight IP-CSs and click the right arrow to select them for de-registration. Click Next.
A dialogue box will appear.
3. Click Confirm.
If the de-registration is successful, the dialogue box will show "De-registration Succeed".
4. Click Close.
Once the IP-CS is successfully de-registered, the status of the IP-CS will update to show "None".

Forced De-registration
Follow the steps below to forcibly de-register the IP-CS when normal de-registration has been unsuccessful
or IP address settings have been changed or deleted only on the IP-CS.
1. Click Forced De-registration.
A dialogue box will appear. Registered IP-CSs are displayed on the left.
2. Highlight IP-CSs and click the right arrow to select them for forced de-registration. Click Next.
A dialogue box will appear.
3. Click OK.
A dialogue box will appear.

PC Programming Manual 303

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
9.18 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property—V-IPCS
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

4. Click Confirm.
If the de-registration is successful, the dialogue box will show "Forced De-registration Succeed".
5. Click Close.
Once the IP-CS is successfully de-registered, the status of the IP-CS will update to show "None".

Main
The Shelf, Slot, and Port for each item are displayed for your reference. For details, see Common
Programming Reference Items in 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot.

CS Name
Specifies the CS name of the port.

Value Range
Max. 20 characters

Connection
Indicates the port status. To change the status of the port, click the desired cell in the column, and then select
INS or OUS for the port.
This option is only available in On-line mode.

Value Range
INS: The port is in service.
OUS: The port is out of service.
Fault: The port is not communicating with the network.

Status
Indicates whether a certain IP-CS is registered (reference only).

Value Range
None, Registered

Channel expansion
Specifies whether to expand the number of channels for the IP-CS. This setting is available only for
KX-NS0154 IP-CSs. This setting will be greyed out if the IP-CS's port is not set to OUS, or a non-supported
type of IP-CS (e.g., KX-NCP0158) is connected to the port.

Value Range
For KX-NS0154: Yes, No
For other IP-CSs: - (hyphen)

MAC Address
Indicates the MAC address of the IP-CS (reference only).

Value Range
00:00:00:00:00:00–FF:FF:FF:FF:FF:FF

304 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 9.18 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property—V-IPCS
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Current IP Address
Indicates the current IP address of the IP-CS (reference only).

Value Range
1.0.0.0–223.255.255.255

Program Ver.
Indicates the programme software file version of the IP-CS (reference only).

Value Range
Version number

Air Sync Group No

Assigns an Air Synchronisation Group number to the IP-CS.
This setting is available only if the IP-CS’s port is set to OUS.

Value Range
None, 1–4

PC Programming Manual References

19.3.1 PBX Configuration—[11-3-1] Maintenance—CS Synchronisation—Air Synchronisation

LAN Sync Group No.

Specifies the LAN sync group number when using an IP-CS (KX-NS0154 only) in a LAN sync group. A
maximum of 32 IP-CSs can be assigned to one group.
This setting is available only if the IP-CS’s port is set to OUS.

Value Range
None, 1–4

PC Programming Manual References

19.3.2 PBX Configuration—[11-3-2] Maintenance—CS Synchronisation—LAN Synchronisation
19.3.3 PBX Configuration—[11-3-3] Maintenance—CS Synchronisation—LAN Sync Group Setting

Option
The Shelf, Slot, and Port for each item are displayed for your reference. For details, see Common
Programming Reference Items in 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot.

CS Name
Specifies the CS name of the port.

Value Range
Max. 20 characters

PC Programming Manual 305

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
9.18 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property—V-IPCS
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Connection
Indicates the port status. To change the status of the port, click the desired cell in the column, and then select
INS or OUS for the port.
This option is only available in On-line mode.

Value Range
INS: The port is in service.
OUS: The port is out of service.
Fault: The port is not communicating with the network.

IP Codec Priority
Specifies the codec used for compression and decompression of transmitted data.

Value Range
G.711, G.729A

Packet Sampling Time (G.711)

Specifies the time interval between measurements (samples) of sound data during a conversation.
The smaller this number, the higher the quality of the transmitted sound.

Value Range
20 ms, 30 ms, 40 ms, 50 ms, 60 ms

Packet Sampling Time (G.729A)

Specifies the time interval between measurements (samples) of sound data during a conversation.
The smaller this number, the higher the quality of the transmitted sound.

Value Range
20 ms, 30 ms, 40 ms, 50 ms, 60 ms

Voice Activity Detection for G.711

Enables the use of the Voice Activity Detection feature for the G.711 codec. This feature conserves bandwidth
by detecting silent periods during a call and suppressing the packets of silence from being sent to the network.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

Announce Mode
Specifies if the IP-CS's (KX-NS0154 only) built-in ANNOUNCE feature is enabled. An IP-CS (KX-NS0154 only)
in a remote location with ANNOUNCE enabled can provide the PBX’s IP Address information to other terminals
in the remote location in place of manually programming the PBX’s IP address at each terminal.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

306 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 9.18 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property—V-IPCS
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Remote Place
The Shelf, Slot, and Port for each item are displayed for your reference. For details, see Common
Programming Reference Items in 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot.

CS Name
Specifies if the IP-CS (KX-NS0154 only) name of the port.

Value Range
Max. 20 characters

Connection
Indicates the port status. To change the status of the port, click the desired cell in the column, and then select
INS or OUS for the port. This option is only available in On-line mode.

Value Range
INS: The port is in service.
OUS: The port is out of service.
Fault: The port is not communicating with the network.

Feature Guide References

5.2.7 IP-CS (KX-NS0154)

Phone Location
Specifies the location of IP-CS (KX-NS0154 only) connected to the port.

Value Range
Local: The IP-CS (KX-NS0154 only) is located on the same network as the PBX (standard configuration).
Remote (MRG): The IP-CS (KX-NS0154 only) is accessing the PBX remotely (use Media Relay Gateway).

Feature Guide References

5.2.7 IP-CS (KX-NS0154)

PC Programming Manual 307

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
9.19 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Card Property—V-UTEXT
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

9.19 PBX Configuration—[1-1]

Configuration—Slot—Card Property—V-UTEXT
Various settings can be programmed for V-UTEXT cards.
Click Common Settings to change these settings.

Main
Echo Cancellation Ability
Specifies the echo canceller ability time.

Value Range
OFF, 24 ms, 128 ms

DSP Digital Gain (Down)

Specifies the DSP Digital Gain for the down voice path.

Value Range
-14–6 dB

DSP Digital Gain (Up)

Specifies the DSP Digital Gain for the up voice path.

Value Range
-14–6 dB

EC Gain
Specifies the Echo Canceller Gain.

Value Range
-14–6 dB

NLP Setting
Specifies the NLP (Non-Linear Processor) setting to control echo sound quality.

Value Range
Disable, Weak, Normal, Strong

PERIODIC Inform
Specifies whether alive monitoring is performed for connected extensions.

Value Range
Enable, Disable

308 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 9.19 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Card Property—V-UTEXT
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

PERIODIC Inform Interval

Specifies the polling interval for alive monitoring when PERIODIC Inform is set to "Enable".

Value Range
30–3600 s

INFORM retransmission counter

Specifies the number of times the PERIODIC Inform is sent for extensions when attempting to establish a
connection.

Value Range
2–10 times

NTP Query Interval

Specifies the interval at which connected extensions poll the specified NTP server for a time update.

Value Range
1–24 hours

Failover Timer (For S-PS/SIP-CS)

Specifies the time period after which a SIP-CS that cannot connect to its primary PBX will re-route to its
assigned secondary PBX.

Note
For SIP-CSs, primary PBX and secondary PBX settings must be made through the Web programming
interface of the Master SIP-CS or through configuration file programming. For details, refer to the
documentation of the SIP-CS.

Value Range
0–64 s

PC Programming Manual 309

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
9.20 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property—V-UTEXT
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

9.20 PBX Configuration—[1-1]

Configuration—Slot—Port Property—V-UTEXT
Various settings can be programmed for the ports of V-UTEXT cards.

KX-UT Series SIP Phone, S-PS, and SIP-CS Registration and De-registration
A KX-UT series SIP phone, S-PS, or SIP-CS must be registered to the PBX by programming the PBX and SIP
phone, S-PS, or SIP-CS before it can be used.
Programming instructions for the PBX are given below.
It is possible to de-register the SIP phone, S-PS, or SIP-CS later.
Registration, De-registration, and Forced De-registration can be performed only in On-line mode.

Preparation
Open 27.1 Network Service—[1] IP Address/Ports—Basic Settings, and confirm that the IP addresses of
the mother board and DSP card, subnet mask address, and default gateway address are set.

Registration
Follow the steps below to register a SIP phone.
1. Connect the device to be registered to the network and, if necessary, the power supply.
2. Click Registration.
A dialogue box will appear. Non-registered (available) extension numbers and names are displayed on the
left.
3. Highlight numbers and names and click the right arrow to select them for registration. Click Next.
4. Click Next.
5. If the registration is still in progress, the dialogue box will show "Registration Executing".
If the registration is successful, the dialogue box will show "Registration Completed". Click Close.
Once the device is successfully registered, the status of the device will update to show "Registered".

Note
S-PSs and SIP-CSs will be automatically registered to the PBX after settings have been made via CS web
programming for the Super Master CS. For details, refer to the documentation for the SIP-CS.

De-registration
Follow the steps below to de-register a SIP phone, S-PS, or SIP-CS.
1. Click De-registration.
A dialogue box will appear. Registered extension numbers and names are displayed on the left.
2. Highlight numbers and names and click the right arrow to select them for de-registration. Click Next.
A dialogue box will appear.
3. Click Confirm.
If the de-registration is successful, the dialogue box will show "De-registration Succeed".
4. Click Close.
Once the device is successfully de-registered, the status of the device will update to show "None".

Forced De-registration
Follow the steps below to forcibly de-register a SIP phone, S-PS, or SIP-CS when normal de-registration has
been unsuccessful or IP address settings have been changed or deleted only on the target device.

310 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 9.20 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property—V-UTEXT
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

1. Click Forced De-registration.

A dialogue box will appear. Registered extension numbers and names are displayed on the left.
2. Highlight numbers and names and click the right arrow to select them for forced de-registration. Click
Next.
A dialogue box will appear.
3. Click OK.
A dialogue box will appear.
4. Click Confirm.
If the de-registration is successful, the dialogue box will show "Forced De-registration Succeed".
5. Click Close.
Once the device is successfully de-registered, the status of the device will update to show "None".

SIP-CS Web
To access the system’s Super Master CS for related programming, click SIP-CS Web. The CS Web login
screen will open in your web browser.

Note
For this button to be enabled, you must specify the URL of the Super Master CS on the Utility—CS-Web
Connection screen. See 7.12 Utility—CS-Web Connection.

Main
The Shelf, Slot, and Port for each item are displayed for your reference. For details, see Common
Programming Reference Items in 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot.

Extension Number
Specifies the extension number of the port.

Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)

Feature Guide References

5.2.2 SIP (Session Initiation Protocol) Extension

Extension Name
Specifies the extension name of the port.

Value Range
Max. 20 characters

Feature Guide References

5.2.2 SIP (Session Initiation Protocol) Extension

Telephone Type
Specifies the connected device type.

PC Programming Manual 311

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
9.20 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property—V-UTEXT
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Note
• This setting cannot be changed if a device has already been registered for the port. De-register the
device set for the port before changing the setting.
• To change this setting when programming in Off-line mode, and a device is already registered to the
port, change the setting of IP Phone Registration ID (MAC Address) for the port to
"00:00:00:00:00:00", and then click Apply. The setting can then be changed.

Value Range
UT: A KX-UT series SIP phone is connected.
S-PS: A SIP Portable Station phone is connected.
SIP-CS: A SIP Cell Station is connected.
Master-CS: A SIP Master Cell Station is connected.

Feature Guide References

5.2.2 SIP (Session Initiation Protocol) Extension

Connection
Indicates the port status. To change the status of the port, click the desired cell in the column, and then select
INS or OUS for the port.
This option is only available in On-line mode.

Value Range
INS: The port is in service.
OUS: The port is out of service.
Fault: The port is not communicating with the network.

Feature Guide References

5.2.2 SIP (Session Initiation Protocol) Extension

Password
Specifies the password used for registering a SIP phone, S-PS, or SIP-CS to the PBX. This parameter can
only be modified when the virtual SIP extension port is set to OUS.

Value Range
4–16 characters (consisting of 0–9, a–z, A–Z)

Feature Guide References

5.2.2 SIP (Session Initiation Protocol) Extension

Status
Indicates whether a certain SIP phone, S-PS, or SIP-CS is registered (reference only).

Value Range
None, Registered

312 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 9.20 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property—V-UTEXT
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Feature Guide References

5.2.2 SIP (Session Initiation Protocol) Extension

IP Phone Registration ID (MAC Address)

Specifies the MAC address of the SIP phone, S-PS, or SIP-CS.
This parameter can only be modified when Connection on this screen is set to OUS.

Value Range
00:00:00:00:00:00–FF:FF:FF:FF:FF:FF

Note
For S-PSs and SIP-CSs, this value will be "FF:FF:FF:FF:FF:FF".

Feature Guide References

5.2.2 SIP (Session Initiation Protocol) Extension

Current IP Address
Indicates the current IP address of the SIP phone, S-PS, or SIP-CS (reference only).

Value Range
1.0.0.0–223.255.255.255

Feature Guide References

5.2.2 SIP (Session Initiation Protocol) Extension

Program Ver.
Indicates the programme software file version of the SIP phone (reference only).

Note
Software file version numbers are not displayed for S-PSs or SIP-CSs.

Value Range
Version number

Feature Guide References

5.2.2 SIP (Session Initiation Protocol) Extension

P2P Group
Specifies the peer-to-peer group.

Value Range
1–32

PC Programming Manual 313

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
9.20 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property—V-UTEXT
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

PC Programming Manual References

11.10 PBX Configuration—[3-10] Group—P2P Group

Feature Guide References

5.2.3 Peer-to-Peer (P2P) Connection

P2P Group Name

Indicates the selected peer-to-peer group’s name (reference only).

Value Range
P2P Group Name

PC Programming Manual References

11.10 PBX Configuration—[3-10] Group—P2P Group

Feature Guide References

5.2.3 Peer-to-Peer (P2P) Connection

Option
The Shelf, Slot, and Port for each item are displayed for your reference. For details, see Common
Programming Reference Items in 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot.

Extension Number
Specifies the extension number of the port.

Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)

Extension Name
Specifies the extension name of the port.

Value Range
Max. 20 characters

Connection
Indicates the port status. To change the status of the port, click the desired cell in the column, and then select
INS or OUS for the port.
This option is only available in On-line mode.

Value Range
INS: The port is in service.
OUS: The port is out of service.
Fault: The port is not communicating with the network.

314 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 9.20 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property—V-UTEXT
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

System Speed Dial Download

Specifies if the connected SIP phone will download system speed dial entries from the PBX.

Value Range
Enable, Disable

PC Programming Manual References

9.2.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property—Main— System Speed Dial
Download For UT Extensions

SIP QoS-DSCP
Specifies the value in the ToS field by a DSCP for DiffServ.

Value Range
0–63

RTP QoS-DSCP
Specifies the value in the ToS field by a DSCP for DiffServ.

Value Range
0–63

UT Codec Priority - 1st—UT Codec Priority - 4th

Specifies the priority of the codecs to be used. None is only available for 2nd, 3rd, and 4th priorities.

Value Range
G.722, G711A, G.729A, G711Mu, None

Packet Sampling Time

Specifies the time interval between measurements (samples) of sound data during a conversation. The smaller
this number, the higher the quality of the transmitted sound.

Value Range
20 ms, 30 ms, 40 ms

Jitter Buffer - Maximum Delay

Specifies the maximum size of the jitter buffer for voice communications.

Value Range
3–50 ms

Jitter Buffer - Minimum Delay

Specifies the minimum size of the jitter buffer for voice communications.

PC Programming Manual 315

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
9.20 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property—V-UTEXT
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Value Range
1–2 ms

Jitter Buffer - Initial Delay

Specifies the initial size of the jitter buffer for voice communications.

Value Range
1–7 ms

Gain Type
Specifies the type of gain file to distribute to connected SIP devices.

Value Range
Default, Type1, Type2, Type3

Remote Place
The settings on this screen are for programming the Simple Remote Connection feature for connecting SIP
phones in remote locations to the PBX. For details and conditions regarding the use of this feature, refer to
"5.2.2.3 Simple Remote Connection" in the Feature Guide.

The Shelf, Slot, and Port for each item are displayed for your reference. For details, see Common
Programming Reference Items in 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot.

Extension Number
Specifies the extension number of the port.

Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)

Extension Name
Specifies the extension name of the port.

Value Range
Max. 20 characters

Connection
Indicates the port status. To change the status of the port, click the desired cell in the column, and then select
INS or OUS for the port.
This option is only available in On-line mode.

Value Range
INS: The port is in service.
OUS: The port is out of service.
Fault: The port is not communicating with the network.

316 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 9.20 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property—V-UTEXT
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Phone Location
Specifies the type of extension connected to the port.

Value Range
Local: The extension is located on the same network as the PBX (standard configuration).
Remote (SBC): The extension is accessing the PBX remotely (Simple Remote Connection).
Remote (MRG): The extension is accessing the PBX remotely (use Media Relay Gateway).

Feature Guide References

5.2.2.3 Simple Remote Connection

Web-MC Ability
Specifies whether the Web programming is allowed on the KX-UT series SIP phone connected to the port by
enabling the Web port setting on the phone’s menu. For details about Web programming for KX-UT series SIP
phones, refer to the documentation of the phone.

Value Range
Enable, Disable

Feature Guide References

5.2.2.3 Simple Remote Connection

Protocol for Remote SIP-MLT

Specifies the protocol to use for remote SIP phone data communication. HTTPS is strongly recommended for
remote SIP-MLT connections.

Value Range
HTTPS, HTTP

Note
A total of 20 HTTPS connections can be set per PBX site. If "HTTPS" is selected but the total number of
HTTPS connections available at the site will be exceeded by changing this setting, a warning message will
be displayed and the setting change will be cancelled.

Feature Guide References

5.2.2.3 Simple Remote Connection

PC Programming Manual 317

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
9.21 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Card Property—Extension Type
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

9.21 PBX Configuration—[1-1]

Configuration—Slot—Card Property—Extension
Type
The property for the extension cards can be specified.

SLT Pulse Dial Mode

Selects the type of pulse dial transmission appropriate to your area.

Value Range
Normal, Sweden, New Zealand

SLT Off Hook Time

Specifies the minimum length that a pulse dial sent from an SLT must be for the PBX to recognise it as an
off-hook signal.

Value Range
8 ´ n (n=3–255) ms

SLT Off Hook Guard Time

Specifies the length of guard time used for off-hook signals from SLTs, to prevent the PBX mistaking them for
pulse dials.

Value Range
8 ´ n (n=12–63) ms

SLT Pulse Maximum Break Width

Specifies the maximum length of the break signal in a pulse dial.

Value Range
8 ´ n (n=9–20) ms

SLT Pulse Minimum Make Width

Specifies the minimum length of the make signal in a pulse dial.

Value Range
8 ´ n (n=1–5) ms

SLT Flash Detection

Enables the PBX to detect the flash signal sent when an SLT user presses the hookswitch or the Flash/Recall
button.

318 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 9.21 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Card Property—Extension Type
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Value Range
Disable: The PBX disconnects the line to prevent placing the call on hold.
Enable: The PBX places the call on consultation hold.

Feature Guide References

2.13.3 Call Splitting

Flash Timing - Min.

Specifies the minimum length that a signal sent from an SLT must be for the PBX to recognise it as a hookswitch
flash signal.

Value Range
8 ´ n (n=3–63) ms

Flash Timing - Range

Specifies the maximum length that a signal sent from an SLT can be for the PBX to recognise it as a hookswitch
flash signal.

Value Range
8 ´ n (n=3–191) ms

DTMF-R STD Detection Time

Specifies the minimum length that a DTMF tone must be for the PBX to recognise it as a DTMF tone.

Value Range
2 ´ n (n=1–31) ms

SLT Power Supply
Selects the voltage that enables an SLT to activate the Message Waiting lamp. When an MCSLC card is
installed, the value for this setting is fixed at "85 V".

Value Range
85 V, 145 V

Feature Guide References

2.20.1 Message Waiting

APT/SLT Parallel Connection
Enables an SLT connected in parallel to an APT to ring with the APT for calls.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

PC Programming Manual 319

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
9.21 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Card Property—Extension Type
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Feature Guide References

2.11.10 Parallelled Telephone

Ringing Start Mode of Extension Caller ID
Specifies the Ringing Start Mode of Extension Caller ID. Please consult your certified Panasonic dealer for
more information.

Value Range
Mode 1: With Pre-ring signal
Mode 2: Without Pre-ring signal

320 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 9.22 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property—Extension Type
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

9.22 PBX Configuration—[1-1]

Configuration—Slot—Port Property—Extension
Type
Various settings can be programmed for each extension port.
To view the total number of each type of extension connected, click Port Type View.
The Shelf, Slot, and Port for each item are displayed for your reference. For details, see Common
Programming Reference Items in 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot.

Note
Other programming items that are displayed on this screen but not listed below are used only when
programming extensions connected to an Expansion Unit.
For information about Expansion Units, see 9.33 PBX Configuration—[1-1]
Configuration—Slot—Expansion Unit1/Expansion Unit2/Expansion Unit3.

Port Type
Indicates the port type (reference only).

Value Range
SLT/DPT/S-Hybrid/S-Hybrid(S-DPT)/S-Hybrid(SLT)/IP-EXT/SIP-MLT/SIP/ISDN/UM

Telephone Type
Indicates the connected telephone type (reference only).

Value Range
APT/DPT/DSS/VM/ISDN-Extension/IP-PT/UT/SIP/SIP-CS/S-PS/CS/CS-M/CS-S1/CS-S2/CS-S3/No
Connection/UNKNOWN

Connection
Indicates the port status. To change the status of the port, click the desired cell in the column, and then select
INS or OUS for the port.
This option is only available in On-line mode.

Value Range
INS: The port is in service.
OUS: The port is out of service.
Fault: The port is not communicating with the PBX.

Extension Number
Specifies the extension number of the port.

Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)

PC Programming Manual 321

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
9.22 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property—Extension Type
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Extension Name
Specifies the extension name of the port.

Value Range
Max. 20 characters

XDP Mode
Turns XDP mode on or off for the port. This setting is only available when Port Type on this screen is set to
S-Hybrid.

Value Range
On: XDP enabled (The main telephone and sub telephone have different extension numbers. This is called
XDP Mode.)
Off: XDP disabled (The main telephone and sub telephone both have the main telephone’s extension number.
This is called Parallel Mode.)

Feature Guide References

2.11.10 Parallelled Telephone
5.2.6 Extension Port Configuration

Parallel Telephone Ringing
Specifies whether the sub telephone (SLT) rings at the same time as the main telephone (DPT) for an incoming
call. This setting is only available when Port Type on this screen is set to S-Hybrid.

Value Range
Yes, No

Feature Guide References

2.11.10 Parallelled Telephone

DPT Type—Type
Selects the port type.
To change the port type of an extension port, follow the steps below:
1. Set the status of the extension port to "OUS".
2. Change the port type of the extension port, then click Apply.
3. Set the status of the extension port to "INS".
When changing the port type of an extension port for which Wireless XDP has been set on the 12.1.1 PBX
Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings screen, the Wireless XDP setting
must be deleted first.
When changing the type of a port for which one or more SDN buttons are set (except when changing between
PC Console and Telephone), all SDN buttons customised for that device will be deleted. When you attempt to
apply the new settings, a warning message is displayed showing the slot and port number for which SDN
buttons will be deleted. If you do not wish to delete SDN buttons for this port, click Cancel.

Value Range
Normal: For connecting a DPT or CS
DSS: For connecting a DSS Console (A maximum of 8 DSS Consoles can be connected to the PBX.)

322 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 9.22 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property—Extension Type
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

VM(DPT): For connecting a Panasonic VPS through DPT Integration

PC Console: For connecting a PC Console (A maximum of 8 PC Consoles can be connected to the PBX.)

Feature Guide References

2.28.1 Voice Mail (VM) Group
2.26.1 Computer Telephony Integration (CTI)

DPT Type—Location No.
Specifies the location number of the connected DSS Console or PC Console. This setting is only available
when DPT Type—Type on this screen is set to DSS or PC Console.
Note that, depending on system traffic, there may be a limit to the number of PC Consoles that can be supported
by a single DLC/DHLC card.
When changing the location number of a DSS Console for which one or more SDN buttons are set, all SDN
buttons customised for that device will be deleted. When you attempt to apply the new settings, a warning
message is displayed showing the slot and port number for which SDN buttons will be deleted. If you do not
wish to delete SDN buttons for this port, click Cancel.

Value Range
1-8

Feature Guide References

2.26.1 Computer Telephony Integration (CTI)

DPT Type—VM Unit No.

Selects the unit number of the connected VPS. This setting is only available when DPT Type—Type on this
screen is set to VM(DPT).

Value Range
1-2

Feature Guide References

2.28.1 Voice Mail (VM) Group

DPT Type—VM Port No.

Specifies the VM port number for the port. This setting is only available when DPT Type—Type on this screen
is set to VM(DPT).

Value Range
1-12

Feature Guide References

2.28.1 Voice Mail (VM) Group

PC Programming Manual 323

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
9.22 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property—Extension Type
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

DPT Type—Air Sync Group No

Assigns an Air Synchronisation Group number to the CS. This setting is only available when DPT
Type—Type on this screen is set to Normal.

Value Range
None, 1

PC Programming Manual References

19.3.1 PBX Configuration—[11-3-1] Maintenance—CS Synchronisation—Air Synchronisation

Headset OFF/ON
Turns on or off the use of a headset with a DPT. This setting is only available when Port Type on this screen
is set to DPT, DPT(S-DPT), S-Hybrid, or S-Hybrid(S-DPT).

Value Range
Headset OFF, Headset ON

Feature Guide References

2.11.4 Headset Operation

C.Waiting with Headset
Selects the Call Waiting tone generating device when using a headset. This setting is only available when Port
Type on this screen is set to DPT, DPT(S-DPT), S-Hybrid, or S-Hybrid(S-DPT). This setting is displayed when
"Headset ON" is selected for Headset OFF/ON.

Value Range
PT Tone, Headset

Ringing Tone
Selects the dual-tone switching pattern of the ring tone for incoming calls when Port Type on this screen is set
to DPT, DPT(S-DPT), S-Hybrid, S-Hybrid(SLT), or S-Hybrid(S-DPT). This setting is not available for the APTs,
or SLTs.

Value Range
A: 64 ms (697 Hz), 64 ms (852 Hz)
B: 32 ms (697 Hz), 32 ms (852 Hz)
C: 128 ms (697 Hz), 128 ms (852 Hz)
D: 32 ms (697 Hz), 96 ms (852 Hz)

324 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 9.23 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Card Property - LCO type
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

9.23 PBX Configuration—[1-1]

Configuration—Slot—Card Property - LCO type
The properties of the analogue trunk cards can be specified.

Outgoing Guard Time

Specifies the length of time after a trunk is disconnected, during which the PBX cannot seize the line.

Value Range
3–6 s

First Dial Timer (CO)

Specifies the minimum time that the PBX waits after seizing a trunk, before sending the dialled digits to the
telephone company. This allows the telephone company to have enough time to accept the dialled digits
correctly.

Value Range
0.5 ´ n (n=1–16) s

CO Feed Back Tone

Specifies whether the pulse feedback tone is turned on or not. For outgoing trunk calls, audible tones can be
heard as the dialled number is sent out, which informs the extension user that the number has been dialled.

Value Range
No, Yes

Bell Detection—Bell Start Detection Timer

Specifies the minimum length of a bell signal that can be recognised by the PBX as the bell signal sent from
the telephone company, before the PBX detects an arriving call.

Value Range
24 ´ n (n=1–50) ms

Bell Detection—Bell Off Detection Timer

Specifies the duration of the bell off detection timer. If the PBX receives no bell signal from the telephone
company for the length of time specified here, the PBX treats the call as lost.

Value Range
1.0 s–15.0 s

Pulse / DTMF Dial—DTMF Inter-digit Pause

Specifies the length of the DTMF inter-digit pause. This allows the telephone company to have enough time
to accept the dialled digits correctly.

PC Programming Manual 325

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
9.23 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Card Property - LCO type
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Value Range
64 + 16 ´ n (n=0–11) ms

Pulse / DTMF Dial—Pulse Inter-digit Pause

Specifies the length of the pulse inter-digit pause. This allows the telephone company to have enough time to
accept the dialled digits correctly.

Value Range
630 ms, 830 ms, 1030 ms

Low Speed Pulse Dial—Pulse % Break

Specifies the % break for a low speed pulse dial. This is the ratio between the break (on-hook) signal and make
(off-hook) signal in a pulse dial.

Value Range
Other, 60%, 67%

PC Programming Manual References

9.24 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - LCO Port

Low Speed Pulse Dial—Break Width

Specifies the maximum length of the break signal in a low speed pulse dial. Low Speed Pulse Dial—Pulse
% Break on this screen determines the value that can be specified here.

Value Range
20 + (4 ´ n) (n=1–15) ms

PC Programming Manual References

9.24 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - LCO Port

Low Speed Pulse Dial—Make Width

Specifies the minimum length of the make signal in a low speed pulse dial. Low Speed Pulse Dial—Pulse
% Break on this screen determines the value that can be specified here.

Value Range
4 ´ n (n=3–15) ms

PC Programming Manual References

9.24 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - LCO Port

High Speed Pulse Dial—Pulse % Break

Specifies the % break for a high speed pulse dial. This is the ratio between the break (on-hook) signal and
make (off-hook) signal in a pulse dial.

326 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 9.23 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Card Property - LCO type
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Value Range
Other, 60%, 67%

PC Programming Manual References

9.24 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - LCO Port

High Speed Pulse Dial—Break Width

Specifies the maximum length of the break signal in a high speed pulse dial. High Speed Pulse Dial—Pulse
% Break on this screen determines the value that can be specified here.

Value Range
12+ (4 ´ n) (n=1–15) ms

PC Programming Manual References

9.24 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - LCO Port

High Speed Pulse Dial—Make Width

Specifies the minimum length of the make signal in a high speed pulse dial. High Speed Pulse Dial—Pulse
% Break on this screen determines the value that can be specified here.

Value Range
4 ´ n (n=3–15) ms

PC Programming Manual References

9.24 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - LCO Port

Pulse Type
Selects the type of pulse dial transmission appropriate to your area.

Value Range
Normal, Sweden, New Zealand

Option Card Equipment—Option 1 and Option 2

Indicates the type of the card that is installed on the LCOT card (reference only).

Value Range
None, Caller ID Card

PC Programming Manual References

9.24 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - LCO Port— Caller ID Detection

PC Programming Manual 327

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
9.23 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Card Property - LCO type
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Feature Guide References

2.19.1 Caller ID

Caller ID—Caller ID Signalling

Selects the type of Caller ID signalling provided by the telephone company.

Value Range
FSK, FSK (with Visual Caller ID), DTMF

Feature Guide References

2.19.1 Caller ID

Caller ID—Max Receive Time

Specifies the maximum number of Caller ID series that are sent from the network.

Value Range
0 (no limit), 1, 2, 3

Feature Guide References

2.19.1 Caller ID

Caller ID—Caller ID (FSK) Carrier Detection

Enables the PBX to detect the carrier when receiving Caller ID. To enable this setting, Caller ID—Caller ID
Signalling on this screen should be set to FSK.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

Feature Guide References

2.19.1 Caller ID

Caller ID—Caller ID (FSK) END Detection

Selects the method used to detect the end of Caller ID information.

Value Range
Length + Timer, Timer

Feature Guide References

2.19.1 Caller ID

328 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 9.23 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Card Property - LCO type
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Caller ID—Caller ID (FSK) Header Examination

Enables the PBX to check the header of received Caller ID information. To enable this setting, Caller
ID—Caller ID Signalling on this screen should be set to FSK.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

Feature Guide References

2.19.1 Caller ID

Caller ID—Caller ID (FSK) Detection Start Timer

Specifies the length of time that the PBX waits before attempting to detect Caller ID information, after receiving
a call. To enable this setting, Caller ID—Caller ID Signalling on this screen should be set to FSK.

Value Range
None, 80 ´ n (n=1–15) ms

Feature Guide References

2.19.1 Caller ID

Caller ID—Caller ID (FSK) Detection Timer

Specifies the total time required by the PBX to detect Caller ID information. To enable this setting, Caller
ID—Caller ID Signalling on this screen should be set to FSK.

Value Range
1040 + (80 ´ n) (n=0–37) ms

Feature Guide References

2.19.1 Caller ID

Caller ID—Caller ID (DTMF) Start Code 1 and Start Code 2

Selects the DTMF code used to detect the beginning of a Caller ID series. Start Code 1 is prior to Start Code
2.

Value Range
None, *, #, A, B, C, D

Feature Guide References

2.19.1 Caller ID

Caller ID—Caller ID (DTMF) Information Start Code

Selects the DTMF code used to detect the beginning of the information segment of a Caller ID series.

PC Programming Manual 329

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
9.23 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Card Property - LCO type
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Value Range
None, *, #, A, B, C, D

Feature Guide References

2.19.1 Caller ID

Caller ID—Caller ID (DTMF) End Code

Selects the DTMF code used to detect the end of a Caller ID series.

Value Range
None, *, #, A, B, C, D

Feature Guide References

2.19.1 Caller ID

Caller ID—Caller ID (DTMF) Information Code-PRIVATE, OUT OF AREA,

TECHNICAL REASON, UNKNOWN NUMBER, RESTRICTED NUMBER
Specifies the number used to identify each type of information code.

Value Range
Max. 16 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)

Feature Guide References

2.19.1 Caller ID

Caller ID—Caller ID Header[03]

Selects the type of the 3rd header in a Caller ID signal.

Value Range
DDN, Caller ID

Feature Guide References

2.19.1 Caller ID

330 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 9.24 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - LCO Port
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

9.24 PBX Configuration—[1-1]

Configuration—Slot—Port Property - LCO Port
Various settings can be programmed for each analogue trunk port.
The Shelf, Slot, and Port for each item are displayed for your reference. For details, see Common
Programming Reference Items in 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot.

Port Type
Select to use the port with either the CO, MOH, or External Pager features. (Only LCOT6 is installed by
default.)
2 ports, an odd and an even port, are programmed in a pair.

Value Range
CO, MOH, External Pager

Installation Manual References

4.3.4 LCOT6 in KX-NS500 (installed by default)

Connection
Indicates the port status. To change the status of the port, click the desired cell in the column, and then select
INS or OUS for the port.
This option is only available in On-line mode.
This option can only be changed when CO is selected for the Port Type.

Value Range
INS: The port is in service.
OUS: The port is out of service.

Busy Out Status

Indicates the Busy Out status (reference only).

Value Range
Normal, Busy Out

Feature Guide References

2.5.4.6 Trunk Busy Out

Dialling Mode
Selects the type of signal used to dial out to the analogue trunk.

Value Range
DTMF, Pulse

PC Programming Manual 331

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
9.24 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - LCO Port
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Feature Guide References

2.5.4.4 Dial Type Selection

CPC Signal Detection Time—Outgoing, Incoming

Specifies the length of time required by the PBX to detect a CPC signal on outgoing or incoming trunk calls
before disconnecting the line. When None is selected here, the line will not be disconnected when a CPC
signal is not detected.

Value Range
None, 6.5 ms, 8 ´ n (n=1–112) ms

Feature Guide References

2.11.9 Calling Party Control (CPC) Signal Detection

DTMF Width
Selects the length of the DTMF tone sent to the analogue trunk.

Value Range
80 ms, 160 ms

Pulse Speed
Selects the speed at which pulse dials are sent to the analogue trunk.

Value Range
Low, High

Reverse Detection
Selects the type of trunk call for which the reverse signal from the telephone company is detected.

Value Range
Disable: For no trunk call
Outgoing: For outgoing trunk calls only
Both Call: For both outgoing and incoming trunk calls

Feature Guide References

2.5.4.5 Reverse Circuit

Caller ID Detection
Enables the PBX to detect a Caller ID signal from the analogue trunk.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

332 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 9.24 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - LCO Port
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

PC Programming Manual References

9.23 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Card Property - LCO type

Feature Guide References

2.19.1 Caller ID

Pause Time
Specifies the length of a pause.

Value Range
1.5 s, 2.5 s, 3.5 s, 4.5 s

Feature Guide References

2.5.4.7 Pause Insertion
2.5.4.8 Host PBX Access Code (Access Code to the Telephone Company from a Host PBX)
2.5.4.9 Special Carrier Access Code

Flash Time
Specifies the length of a flash signal.

Value Range
None, 16 ´ n (n=1–255) ms

Feature Guide References

2.11.7 External Feature Access (EFA)

Disconnect Time
Specifies the length of time after a trunk is disconnected, during which the PBX cannot seize the line.

Value Range
0.5 s, 1.5 s, 2.0 s, 4.0 s, 12.0 s

Feature Guide References

2.11.6 Flash/Recall/Terminate

PC Programming Manual 333

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
9.25 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Card Property - BRI type/PRI type
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

9.25 PBX Configuration—[1-1]

Configuration—Slot—Card Property - BRI type/PRI
type
The properties of the PRI or BRI card can be specified.

ISDN CO / QSIG Master / QSIG Slave—T200

Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for a reply after sending the L2 command to ISDN.

Value Range
0–600 ´ 100 ms

ISDN CO / QSIG Master / QSIG Slave—T202

Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for a reply after resending the request to use an ISDN line as
a TIE line.

Value Range
0–600 ´ 100 ms

Feature Guide References

4.3.1 TIE Line Service

ISDN CO / QSIG Master / QSIG Slave—T203

Specifies the length of time to detect no communication status of L2.

Value Range
0–600 ´ 100 ms

ISDN CO / QSIG Master / QSIG Slave—T301

Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for a reply after making a call to ISDN.

Value Range
0–18000 ´ 100 ms

ISDN CO / QSIG Master / QSIG Slave—T302

Specifies the maximum time allowed between each digit on an incoming call. Applies to overlap receiving.

Value Range
0–600 ´ 100 ms

334 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 9.25 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Card Property - BRI type/PRI type
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

ISDN CO / QSIG Master / QSIG Slave—T303

Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for a reply after sending the SETUP (call setting) message to
ISDN.

Value Range
0–600 ´ 100 ms

ISDN CO / QSIG Master / QSIG Slave—T304

Specifies the maximum time allowed between each digit on an outgoing call. Applies to overlap sending.

Value Range
0–3000 ´ 100 ms

ISDN CO / QSIG Master / QSIG Slave—T305

Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for a reply after sending the DISC (disconnection) message
to ISDN.

Value Range
0–3000 ´ 100 ms

ISDN CO / QSIG Master / QSIG Slave—T308

Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for a reply after receiving the Release message from ISDN.

Value Range
0–600 ´ 100 ms

ISDN CO / QSIG Master / QSIG Slave—T309

Specifies the length of time that the PBX tries to disconnect the data link, before disconnecting the call.

Value Range
0–3000 ´ 100 ms

ISDN CO / QSIG Master / QSIG Slave—T310

Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for a continuance message after receiving the Incoming Call
Proceeding message.

Value Range
0–3000 ´ 100 ms

ISDN CO / QSIG Master / QSIG Slave—T313

Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for a reply after sending the Connect message.

Value Range
0–600 ´ 100 ms

PC Programming Manual 335

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
9.25 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Card Property - BRI type/PRI type
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

ISDN CO / QSIG Master / QSIG Slave—T316

Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for a reply after sending the Restart message.

Value Range
0–3000 ´ 100 ms

ISDN CO / QSIG Master / QSIG Slave—T318

Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for a reply after sending the Resume message.

Value Range
0–600 ´ 100 ms

ISDN CO / QSIG Master / QSIG Slave—T319

Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for a reply after sending the Suspend message.

Value Range
0–600 ´ 100 ms

ISDN CO / QSIG Master / QSIG Slave—T322

Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for a reply after sending the Status enquiry message.

Value Range
0–600 ´ 100 ms

ISDN CO / QSIG Master / QSIG Slave—T3D3

Specifies the length of time that the PBX tries to establish L2 in "Permanent" mode.

Value Range
0–3000 ´ 100 ms

ISDN CO / QSIG Master / QSIG Slave—T3D9

Specifies the length of time that the PBX tries to disconnect L2 in "Call by Call" mode.

Value Range
0–3000 ´ 100 ms

ISDN Extension—T200
Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for a reply after sending the L2 command to ISDN.

Value Range
0–600 ´ 100 ms

ISDN Extension—T201
Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for a reply after resending the TEI check request to ISDN.

336 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 9.25 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Card Property - BRI type/PRI type
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Value Range
0–600 ´ 100 ms

ISDN Extension—T203
Specifies the length of time to detect no communication status of L2.

Value Range
0–600 ´ 100 ms

ISDN Extension—T301
Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for a reply after making a call to ISDN.

Value Range
0–18000 ´ 100 ms

ISDN Extension—T302
Specifies the maximum time allowed between each digit on an incoming call. Applies to overlap receiving.

Value Range
0–600 ´ 100 ms

ISDN Extension—T303
Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for a reply after sending the SETUP (call setting) message to
ISDN.

Value Range
0–600 ´ 100 ms

ISDN Extension—T304
Specifies the maximum time allowed between each digit on an outgoing call. Applies to overlap sending.

Value Range
0–3000 ´ 100 ms

ISDN Extension—T305
Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for a reply after sending the DISC (disconnection) message
to ISDN.

Value Range
0–3000 ´ 100 ms

PC Programming Manual 337

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
9.25 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Card Property - BRI type/PRI type
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

ISDN Extension—T306
Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for a reply after sending the DISC (disconnection) message
to ISDN. This setting is used when inband tones are supplied.

Value Range
0–3000 ´ 100 ms

ISDN Extension—T307
Specifies the maximum time that the PBX maintains a suspended call, before restarting.

Value Range
0–6000 ´ 100 ms

ISDN Extension—T308
Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for a reply after receiving the Release message from ISDN.

Value Range
0–600 ´ 100 ms

ISDN Extension—T309
Specifies the length of time that the PBX tries to disconnect the data link, before disconnecting the call.

Value Range
0–3000 ´ 100 ms

ISDN Extension—T310
Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for a reply after receiving the Incoming Call Proceeding
message.

Value Range
0–3000 ´ 100 ms

ISDN Extension—T312
Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for a reply after sending the SETUP (call setting) message to
ISDN.

Value Range
0–600 ´ 100 ms

ISDN Extension—T316
Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for a reply after sending the Restart message.

Value Range
0–3000 ´ 100 ms

338 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 9.25 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Card Property - BRI type/PRI type
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

ISDN Extension—T320
Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for packet protocol.

Value Range
0–3000 ´ 100 ms

ISDN Extension—T322
Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for a reply after sending the Status enquiry message.

Value Range
0–600 ´ 100 ms

ISDN Extension—T3D3
Specifies the length of time that the PBX tries to establish L2 in "Permanent" mode.

Value Range
0–3000 ´ 100 ms

ISDN Extension—T3D9
Specifies the length of time that the PBX tries to disconnect L2 in "Call by Call" mode.

Value Range
0–3000 ´ 100 ms

PC Programming Manual 339

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
9.26 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - BRI Port
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

9.26 PBX Configuration—[1-1]

Configuration—Slot—Port Property - BRI Port
Various settings can be programmed for each BRI port.

Main
The Shelf, Slot, and Port for each item are displayed for your reference. For details, see Common
Programming Reference Items in 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot.

Port Type
Selects the port type.
Each ISDN connection in a QSIG network must have a master port on one PBX and a slave port on another
PBX. ISDN extensions can belong to an incoming call distribution group or idle extension hunting group. In
this case, an MSN can be assigned.

Value Range
CO: For connecting to public network
Extension: For connecting to extension
QSIG-Slave: For connecting to private network (slave port)
QSIG-Master: For connecting to private network (master port)

Feature Guide References

4.1.2.1 Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN)—SUMMARY
4.3.4.1 QSIG Standard Features—SUMMARY

Connection
Indicates the port status. To change the status of the port, click the desired cell in the column, and then select
INS or OUS for the port.
This option is only available in On-line mode.

Value Range
INS: The port is in service.
OUS: The port is out of service.
Fault: The port is not communicating with the network.

LLC Information
Enables the PBX to send LLC (Low Level Compatibility) information to the network when an outgoing call is
made when the ISDN bearer mode is speech.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

Status Message
Specifies whether the Status Message is sent to the network.

340 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 9.26 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - BRI Port
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Value Range
No Transmission: Status Message is not sent.
When Mandatory error detection: Send the Status Message when an error (Mandatory) is detected.
When Option / Mandatory error detection: Send the Status Message when an error (Option or Mandatory) is
detected.

Status Receive
Selects what happens to a call when the Status Message from the network does not match the actual status
of the call.

Value Range
Ignore: Ignore the Status Message from the network.
Disconnect: Disconnect the call.

ISDN CO
Parameters for ISDN CO are not applicable for the BRI extension port.
The Shelf, Slot, and Port for each item are displayed for your reference. For details, see Common
Programming Reference Items in 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot.

Port Type
Selects the port type.
Each ISDN connection in a QSIG network must have a master port on one PBX and a slave port on another
PBX. ISDN extensions can belong to an incoming call distribution group or idle extension hunting group. In
this case, an MSN can be assigned.

Value Range
CO: For connecting to public network
Extension: For connecting to extension
QSIG-Slave: For connecting to private network (slave port)
QSIG-Master: For connecting to private network (master port)

Connection
Indicates the port status. To change the status of the port, click the desired cell in the column, and then select
INS or OUS for the port.
This option is only available in On-line mode.

Value Range
INS: The port is in service.
OUS: The port is out of service.
Fault: The port is not communicating with the network.

Subscriber Number
Specifies the number used as the CLIP number.

Value Range
Max. 16 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)

PC Programming Manual 341

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
9.26 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - BRI Port
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Feature Guide References

4.1.2.2 Calling/Connected Line Identification Presentation (CLIP/COLP)

Ringback Tone to Outside Caller

Enables the PBX to send a ringback tone to an outside caller when the network cannot send the tone.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

ISDN Outgoing Call Type

Selects the method used to send dialled digits to the network.

Value Range
En-bloc: The PBX sends all of the dialled digits at once after the extension user completes dialling. The PBX
recognises the end of dialling when (1) # is dialled, if programmed, (2) a pre-programmed telephone number
is dialled, or (3) the inter-digit timer expires.
Overlap: The PBX sends dialled digits one at a time.

PC Programming Manual References

9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot
10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3] System—Timers & Counters—Dial / IRNA / Recall / Tone— Dial—Extension
Inter-digit (s)
10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options—Option 2— ISDN en Bloc Dial—[#] as End of
Dial for en Bloc mode
11.1.4 PBX Configuration—[3-1-4] Group—Trunk Group—Dialling Plan

Feature Guide References

4.1.2.1 Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN)—SUMMARY

ISDN Centrex
Enables the use of the telephone company’s ISDN Centrex Service features.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

Feature Guide References

4.1.2.1 Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN)—SUMMARY

BRI Data Link (P-MP) Mode

Assigns one or two TEIs (Terminal Endpoint Identifier) to the BRI CO port. To use the ISDN Hold supplementary
service with point-to-multipoint configuration, this parameter should be set to 2-link in some countries/areas.

Value Range
1-link: One TEI is assigned to the BRI CO port.

342 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 9.26 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - BRI Port
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

2-link: Two TEIs are assigned to the BRI CO port. (Available when Access Mode on the Network tab is set
to P-MP.)

Networking Data Transfer

Enables transmission of extension status data to connected PBXs in a network. This setting is only available
when Port Type on this screen has been set to QSIG-Slave or QSIG-Master.
A maximum of two ports of each BRI card can be assigned to transmit extension status information.

Value Range
Off, On

PC Programming Manual References

Section 17 PBX Configuration—[9] Private Network

Feature Guide References

4.3.5.1 Network Direct Station Selection (NDSS)

ISDN Extension
Parameters for ISDN Extension are not applicable for BRI ports assigned as CO ports.
The Shelf, Slot, and Port for each item are displayed for your reference. For details, see Common
Programming Reference Items in 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot.

Port Type
Selects the port type.
Each ISDN connection in a QSIG network must have a master port on one PBX and a slave port on another
PBX. ISDN extensions can belong to an incoming call distribution group or idle extension hunting group. In
this case, an MSN can be assigned.

Value Range
CO: For connecting to public network
Extension: For connecting to extension
QSIG-Slave: For connecting to private network (slave port)
QSIG-Master: For connecting to private network (master port)

Feature Guide References

5.2.5.1 ISDN Extension

Connection
Indicates the port status. To change the status of the port, click the desired cell in the column, and then select
INS or OUS for the port.
This option is only available in On-line mode.

Value Range
INS: The port is in service.
OUS: The port is out of service.

PC Programming Manual 343

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
9.26 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - BRI Port
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Fault: The port is not communicating with the network.

Feature Guide References

5.2.5.1 ISDN Extension

Ring Mode (ISDN MSN Last No. 0 or 00)

Selects the ring mode when receiving an incoming call with an MSN ending with "0" or "00". This setting is only
available when Port Type on this screen is set to Extension.

Value Range
Ring All Extension for MSN: Ring all ISDN extensions that are addressed with MSN.
Ring an Extension for MSN: Ring only one of the ISDN extensions that are addressed with MSN.

Feature Guide References

5.2.5.1 ISDN Extension

ISDN Extension Progress Tone

Enables the PBX to send call progress tones to the ISDN extension. This setting is only available when Port
Type on this screen is set to Extension.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

Feature Guide References

5.2.5.1 ISDN Extension

Network
The Shelf, Slot, and Port for each item are displayed for your reference. For details, see Common
Programming Reference Items in 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot.

Port Type
Selects the port type.
Each ISDN connection in a QSIG network must have a master port on one PBX and a slave port on another
PBX. ISDN extensions can belong to an incoming call distribution group or idle extension hunting group. In
this case, an MSN can be assigned.

Value Range
CO: For connecting to public network
Extension: For connecting to extension
QSIG-Slave: For connecting to private network (slave port)
QSIG-Master: For connecting to private network (master port)

344 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 9.26 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - BRI Port
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Connection
Indicates the port status. To change the status of the port, click the desired cell in the column, and then select
INS or OUS for the port.
This option is only available in On-line mode.

Value Range
INS: The port is in service.
OUS: The port is out of service.
Fault: The port is not communicating with the network.

Network Type
Selects the network type of the port.

Value Range
0–56
(2 UK (Domestic), 5 Netherlands, 6 SwissNET2, 7 SwissNET3, 8 Euro ISDN (Standard), 14 France
(Domestic), 19 Finland, 20 Norway, 27 Australia, 51 US National ISDN 2)

Feature Guide References

4.1.2.1 Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN)—SUMMARY

L1 Mode
Selects the active mode of L1 (Layer 1) on the BRI port.

Value Range
Call, Permanent

Feature Guide References

4.1.2.1 Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN)—SUMMARY

L2 Mode
Selects the active mode of L2 (Layer 2) on the BRI port.

Value Range
Call, Permanent

Feature Guide References

4.1.2.1 Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN)—SUMMARY

Access Mode
Selects the configuration of the BRI port.

Value Range
P-P: Point-to-Point
P-MP: Point-to-multipoint

PC Programming Manual 345

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
9.26 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - BRI Port
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Feature Guide References

4.1.2.1 Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN)—SUMMARY

TEI Mode
Specifies the TEI mode assigned to the BRI port.

Value Range
Automatic, Fix 0–Fix 63

Feature Guide References

4.1.2.1 Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN)—SUMMARY

Network Numbering Plan

The Shelf, Slot, and Port for each item are displayed for your reference. For details, see Common
Programming Reference Items in 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot.

Port Type
Selects the port type.
Each ISDN connection in a QSIG network must have a master port on one PBX and a slave port on another
PBX. ISDN extensions can belong to an incoming call distribution group or idle extension hunting group. In
this case, an MSN can be assigned.

Value Range
CO: For connecting to public network
Extension: For connecting to extension
QSIG-Slave: For connecting to private network (slave port)
QSIG-Master: For connecting to private network (master port)

Connection
Indicates the port status. To change the status of the port, click the desired cell in the column, and then select
INS or OUS for the port.
This option is only available in On-line mode.

Value Range
INS: The port is in service.
OUS: The port is out of service.
Fault: The port is not communicating with the network.

Trunk Property
Selects the trunk property of the port.

Value Range
Public: Public network
Private: Private Network
VPN: Virtual Private Network

346 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 9.26 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - BRI Port
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Feature Guide References

4.3.1 TIE Line Service
4.3.3 ISDN Virtual Private Network (ISDN-VPN)

Calling Party Number—Numbering Plan ID—Public, Private

Selects the numbering plan ID that applies to outgoing trunk calls routed through public and private networks.

Value Range
Unknown, ISDN-Telephony, National Standard, Private

Calling Party Number—Type of Number—Public, Private

Selects the type of number that applies to outgoing trunk calls routed through public or private networks.

Value Range
Unknown, International, National, Network, Subscriber

Called Party Number—Numbering Plan ID—Public, Private

Selects the numbering plan ID that applies to incoming trunk calls routed through public and private networks.

Value Range
Unknown, ISDN-Telephony, National Standard, Private

Called Party Number—Type of Number—Public, Private

Selects the type of number that applies to incoming trunk calls routed through public and private networks.

Value Range
Unknown, International, National, Network, Subscriber

Supplementary Service
The Shelf, Slot, and Port for each item are displayed for your reference. For details, see Common
Programming Reference Items in 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot.

Port Type
Selects the port type.
Each ISDN connection in a QSIG network must have a master port on one PBX and a slave port on another
PBX. ISDN extensions can belong to an incoming call distribution group or idle extension hunting group. In
this case, an MSN can be assigned.

Value Range
CO: For connecting to public network
Extension: For connecting to extension
QSIG-Slave: For connecting to private network (slave port)
QSIG-Master: For connecting to private network (master port)

PC Programming Manual 347

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
9.26 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - BRI Port
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Connection
Indicates the port status. To change the status of the port, click the desired cell in the column, and then select
INS or OUS for the port.
This option is only available in On-line mode.

Value Range
INS: The port is in service.
OUS: The port is out of service.
Fault: The port is not communicating with the network.

COLP, CLIR, COLR, CNIP, CONP, CNIR, CONR, CF (Rerouting), CT, CCBS,
AOC-D, AOC-E, 3PTY
Specifies whether each ISDN or QSIG supplementary service is used.

Value Range
For COLP, CLIR, COLR, CNIP, CONP, CNIR, CONR, CF (Rerouting), CT, CCBS, AOC-D, AOC-E:
No, Yes

For 3PTY:
No, Yes-3Pty

Feature Guide References

4.1.2.2 Calling/Connected Line Identification Presentation (CLIP/COLP)
4.1.2.3 Advice of Charge (AOC)
4.1.2.5 Call Forwarding (CF)—by ISDN (P-P)
4.1.2.7 Call Transfer (CT)—by ISDN
4.1.2.8 Three-party Conference (3PTY)—by ISDN
4.1.2.10 Completion of Calls to Busy Subscriber (CCBS)
4.3.4.2 Calling/Connected Line Identification Presentation (CLIP/COLP) and Calling/Connected Name
Identification Presentation (CNIP/CONP)—by QSIG
4.3.4.3 Call Forwarding (CF)—by QSIG
4.3.4.4 Call Transfer (CT)—by QSIG
4.3.4.5 Completion of Calls to Busy Subscriber (CCBS)—by QSIG

CCBS Option
The Shelf, Slot, and Port for each item are displayed for your reference. For details, see Common
Programming Reference Items in 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot.

Port Type
Selects the port type.
Each ISDN connection in a QSIG network must have a master port on one PBX and a slave port on another
PBX. ISDN extensions can belong to an incoming call distribution group or idle extension hunting group. In
this case, an MSN can be assigned.

Value Range
CO: For connecting to public network
Extension: For connecting to extension
QSIG-Slave: For connecting to private network (slave port)

348 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 9.26 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - BRI Port
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

QSIG-Master: For connecting to private network (master port)

Connection
Indicates the port status. To change the status of the port, click the desired cell in the column, and then select
INS or OUS for the port.
This option is only available in On-line mode.

Value Range
INS: The port is in service.
OUS: The port is out of service.
Fault: The port is not communicating with the network.

CCBS Type
Selects the type of call from the network initiated by the CCBS (Completion of Calls to Busy Subscriber) feature,
from which the specified number of digits are deleted.
CCBS Delete Digits on this screen specifies the number of digits to delete from the received number.

Value Range
ALL, Unknown, International, National, Network specific, Subscriber, Abbreviated

Feature Guide References

4.1.2.10 Completion of Calls to Busy Subscriber (CCBS)

CCBS Delete Digits

Specifies the number of digits to delete from the received number when receiving a call of the specified type
initiated by the CCBS feature from the network. CCBS Type on this screen specifies the applicable type of
call.

Value Range
0–15

Feature Guide References

4.1.2.10 Completion of Calls to Busy Subscriber (CCBS)

PC Programming Manual 349

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
9.27 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - PRI Port
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

9.27 PBX Configuration—[1-1]

Configuration—Slot—Port Property - PRI Port
Various settings can be programmed for each PRI port.

Main
The Shelf, Slot, and Port for each item are displayed for your reference. For details, see Common
Programming Reference Items in 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot.

Port Type
Selects the port type.

Note
• Each ISDN connection in a QSIG network must have a master port on one PBX and a slave port on
another PBX.
• ISDN extensions can belong to an incoming call distribution group or idle extension hunting group. In
this case, an MSN can be assigned.

Value Range
CO: For connecting to public network
Extension: For connecting to extension
QSIG-Slave: For connecting to private network (slave port)
QSIG-Master: For connecting to private network (master port)

Feature Guide References

4.1.2.1 Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN)—SUMMARY
4.3.4.1 QSIG Standard Features—SUMMARY

Connection
Indicates the port status. To change the status of the port, click the desired cell in the column, and then select
INS or OUS for the port.
This option is only available in On-line mode.

Value Range
INS: The port is in service.
OUS: The port is out of service.
Fault: The port is not communicating with the network.

Status Message
Specifies whether the Status Message is sent to the network.

Value Range
No Transmission: Status Message is not sent.
When error detection (Mandatory): Send the Status Message when an error (Mandatory) is detected.
When error detection (Option / Mandatory): Send the Status Message when an error (Option or Mandatory) is
detected.

350 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 9.27 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - PRI Port
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Status Receive
Selects what happens to a call when the Status Message from the network does not match the actual status
of the call.

Value Range
Ignore: Ignore the Status Message from the network.
Disconnect: Disconnect the call.

CRC4 Mode
Enables the use of CRC4 for error checking. CRC (Cyclic Redundancy Check) is an error checking control
technique that uses a specific binary prime divisor that results in a unique remainder. It is usually a 16- to
32-bit character. (Assignable only when using the PRI30 card.)

Value Range
Disable, Enable

Line Coding
Selects the line coding type of the PRI PCM (Pulse Code Modulation) for the port. This setting is only available
when using the PRI23 card.

Value Range
B8ZS, AMI

Frame Sequence
Selects the type of frame sequence for the port. This setting is only available when using the PRI23 card.

Value Range
Extended Multi frame (ESF), 4-Frame Multi frame (F4), 12-Frame Multi frame (F12)

CO Setting
CO Setting parameters are not applicable to ports assigned as Extension in Port Type.
The Shelf, Slot, and Port for each item are displayed for your reference. For details, see Common
Programming Reference Items in 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot.

Port Type
Selects the port type.

Note
• Each ISDN connection in a QSIG network must have a master port on one PBX and a slave port on
another PBX.
• ISDN extensions can belong to an incoming call distribution group or idle extension hunting group. In
this case, an MSN can be assigned.

Value Range
CO: For connecting to public network
Extension: For connecting to extension
QSIG-Slave: For connecting to private network (slave port)

PC Programming Manual 351

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
9.27 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - PRI Port
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

QSIG-Master: For connecting to private network (master port)

Connection
Indicates the port status. To change the status of the port, click the desired cell in the column, and then select
INS or OUS for the port.
This option is only available in On-line mode.

Value Range
INS: The port is in service.
OUS: The port is out of service.
Fault: The port is not communicating with the network.

Subscriber Number
Specifies the number used as the CLIP number.

Value Range
Max. 16 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)

Feature Guide References

4.1.2.2 Calling/Connected Line Identification Presentation (CLIP/COLP)

Ringback Tone to Outside Caller

Enables the PBX to send a ringback tone to an outside caller when the network cannot send the tone.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

ISDN Outgoing Call Type

Selects the method used to send dialled digits to the network.

Value Range
En-bloc: The PBX sends all of the dialled digits at once after the extension user completes dialling. The PBX
recognises the end of dialling when (1) # is dialled, if programmed, (2) a pre-programmed telephone number
is dialled, or (3) the inter-digit timer expires.
Overlap: The PBX sends dialled digits one at a time.

PC Programming Manual References

9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot
10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3] System—Timers & Counters—Dial / IRNA / Recall / Tone— Dial—Extension
Inter-digit (s)
10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options—Option 2— ISDN en Bloc Dial—[#] as End of
Dial for en Bloc mode
11.1.4 PBX Configuration—[3-1-4] Group—Trunk Group—Dialling Plan

352 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 9.27 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - PRI Port
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Feature Guide References

4.1.2.1 Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN)—SUMMARY

ISDN Centrex
Enables the use of the telephone company’s ISDN Centrex Service features.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

Feature Guide References

4.1.2.1 Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN)—SUMMARY

Networking Data Transfer

Enables transmission of extension status data to connected PBXs in a network. This setting is only available
when Port Type on this screen has been set to QSIG-Slave or QSIG-Master.

Value Range
Off, On

PC Programming Manual References

Section 17 PBX Configuration—[9] Private Network

Feature Guide References

4.3.5.1 Network Direct Station Selection (NDSS)

Loopback Test started by Network

Enables a loopback test started from the network side, to be performed on the PRI23 card.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

Extension Setting
Extension Setting parameters are applicable only for the PRI extension port.
The Shelf, Slot, and Port for each item are displayed for your reference. For details, see Common
Programming Reference Items in 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot.

Port Type
Selects the type of the port.

Note
• Each ISDN connection in a QSIG network must have a master port on one PBX and a slave port on
another PBX.

PC Programming Manual 353

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
9.27 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - PRI Port
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

• ISDN extensions can belong to an incoming call distribution group or idle extension hunting group. In
this case, an MSN can be assigned.

Value Range
CO: For connecting to public network
Extension: For connecting to extension
QSIG-Slave: For connecting to private network (slave port)
QSIG-Master: For connecting to private network (master port)

Connection
Indicates the port status. To change the status of the port, click the desired cell in the column, and then select
INS or OUS for the port.
This option is only available in On-line mode.

Value Range
INS: The port is in service.
OUS: The port is out of service.
Fault: The port is not communicating with the network.

Ring Mode (ISDN MSN Last No. 0 or 00)

Selects the ring mode when receiving an incoming call with an MSN ending with "0" or "00".

Value Range
Ring All Extension for MSN: Ring all ISDN extensions that are addressed with MSN.
Ring AN Extension for MSN: Ring only one of the ISDN extensions that are addressed with MSN.

Feature Guide References

5.2.5.1 ISDN Extension

Network Configuration
The Shelf, Slot, and Port for each item are displayed for your reference. For details, see Common
Programming Reference Items in 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot.

Port Type
Selects the port type.

Note
• Each ISDN connection in a QSIG network must have a master port on one PBX and a slave port on
another PBX.
• ISDN extensions can belong to an incoming call distribution group or idle extension hunting group. In
this case, an MSN can be assigned.

Value Range
CO: For connecting to public network
Extension: For connecting to extension
QSIG-Slave: For connecting to private network (slave port)
QSIG-Master: For connecting to private network (master port)

354 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 9.27 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - PRI Port
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Connection
Indicates the port status. To change the status of the port, click the desired cell in the column, and then select
INS or OUS for the port.
This option is only available in On-line mode.

Value Range
INS: The port is in service.
OUS: The port is out of service.
Fault: The port is not communicating with the network.

Network Type
Selects the network type of the port.

Value Range
0–56
(2 UK (Domestic), 5 Netherlands, 6 SwissNET2, 7 SwissNET3, 8 Euro ISDN (Standard), 14 France
(Domestic), 19 Finland, 20 Norway, 27 Australia, 51 US National ISDN 2)

Feature Guide References

4.1.2.1 Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN)—SUMMARY

Network Numbering Plan

The Shelf, Slot, and Port for each item are displayed for your reference. For details, see Common
Programming Reference Items in 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot.

Port Type
Selects the port type.

Note
• Each ISDN connection in a QSIG network must have a master port on one PBX and a slave port on
another PBX.
• ISDN extensions can belong to an incoming call distribution group or idle extension hunting group. In
this case, an MSN can be assigned.

Value Range
CO: For connecting to public network
Extension: For connecting to extension
QSIG-Slave: For connecting to private network (slave port)
QSIG-Master: For connecting to private network (master port)

Connection
Indicates the port status. To change the status of the port, click the desired cell in the column, and then select
INS or OUS for the port.
This option is only available in On-line mode.

Value Range
INS: The port is in service.

PC Programming Manual 355

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
9.27 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - PRI Port
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

OUS: The port is out of service.

Fault: The port is not communicating with the network.

Trunk Property
Selects the trunk property of the port.

Value Range
Public: Public network
Private: Private Network
VPN: Virtual Private Network

Feature Guide References

4.3.1 TIE Line Service
4.3.3 ISDN Virtual Private Network (ISDN-VPN)

Calling Party Number—Numbering Plan ID—Public, Private

Selects the numbering plan ID that applies to outgoing trunk calls routed through public and private networks.

Value Range
Unknown, ISDN-Telephony, National Standard, Private

Calling Party Number—Type of Number—Public, Private

Selects the type of number that applies to outgoing trunk calls routed through public or private networks.

Value Range
Unknown, International, National, Network, Subscriber

Called Party Number—Numbering Plan ID—Public, Private

Selects the numbering plan ID that applies to incoming trunk calls routed through public and private networks.

Value Range
Unknown, ISDN-Telephony, National Standard, Private

Called Party Number—Type of Number—Public, Private

Selects the type of number that applies to incoming trunk calls routed through public and private networks.

Value Range
Unknown, International, National, Network, Subscriber

Supplementary Service
The Shelf, Slot, and Port for each item are displayed for your reference. For details, see Common
Programming Reference Items in 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot.

356 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 9.27 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - PRI Port
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Port Type
Selects the port type.

Note
• Each ISDN connection in a QSIG network must have a master port on one PBX and a slave port on
another PBX.
• ISDN extensions can belong to an incoming call distribution group or idle extension hunting group. In
this case, an MSN can be assigned.

Value Range
CO: For connecting to public network
Extension: For connecting to extension
QSIG-Slave: For connecting to private network (slave port)
QSIG-Master: For connecting to private network (master port)

Connection
Indicates the port status. To change the status of the port, click the desired cell in the column, and then select
INS or OUS for the port.
This option is only available in On-line mode.

Value Range
INS: The port is in service.
OUS: The port is out of service.
Fault: The port is not communicating with the network.

COLP, CLIR, COLR, CNIP, CONP, CNIR, CONR, CF (Rerouting), CT, CCBS,
AOC-D, AOC-E, E911, 3PTY
Specifies whether each ISDN or QSIG supplementary service is used.
The available services depend on the setting of Port Type on this screen.

Value Range
For COLP, CLIR, COLR, CNIP, CONP, CNIR, CONR, CF (Rerouting), CT, CCBS, AOC-D, AOC-E, E911:
No, Yes

For 3PTY:
No, Yes-3Pty

Feature Guide References

4.1.2.2 Calling/Connected Line Identification Presentation (CLIP/COLP)
4.1.2.3 Advice of Charge (AOC)
4.1.2.5 Call Forwarding (CF)—by ISDN (P-P)
4.1.2.7 Call Transfer (CT)—by ISDN
4.1.2.8 Three-party Conference (3PTY)—by ISDN
4.1.2.10 Completion of Calls to Busy Subscriber (CCBS)
4.3.4.2 Calling/Connected Line Identification Presentation (CLIP/COLP) and Calling/Connected Name
Identification Presentation (CNIP/CONP)—by QSIG
4.3.4.3 Call Forwarding (CF)—by QSIG
4.3.4.4 Call Transfer (CT)—by QSIG
4.3.4.5 Completion of Calls to Busy Subscriber (CCBS)—by QSIG

PC Programming Manual 357

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
9.27 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - PRI Port
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

CCBS Type
Selects the type of call from the network initiated by the CCBS (Completion of Calls to Busy Subscriber) feature,
from which the specified number of digits are deleted.
CCBS Delete Digits on this screen specifies the number of digits to delete from the received number.

Value Range
ALL, Unknown, International, National, Network specific, Subscriber, Abbreviated

Feature Guide References

4.1.2.10 Completion of Calls to Busy Subscriber (CCBS)

CCBS Delete Digits

Specifies the number of digits to delete from the received number when receiving a call of the specified type
initiated by the CCBS feature from the network. CCBS Type on this screen specifies the applicable type of
call.

Value Range
0–15

Feature Guide References

4.1.2.10 Completion of Calls to Busy Subscriber (CCBS)

358 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 9.28 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Card Property—E1 type
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

9.28 PBX Configuration—[1-1]

Configuration—Slot—Card Property—E1 type
The properties of the E1 card can be specified.
To adjust related settings, click Line Signal Setting, MFC-R2 Setting 1, and MFC-R2 Setting 2.

Line Coding
Selects the line coding type of E1 PCM (Pulse Code Modulation) for the E1 card.

Value Range
HDB3, AMI

Frame Sequence
Selects the type of frame sequence for the E1 card.

Value Range
PCM30, PCM30-CRC

Frame Option
Selects the value for C-bit and D-bit.

Value Range
C=A, D=B; C=0, D=0; C=0, D=1; C=1, D=0; C=1, D=1

First Dial Timer (TIE)
Specifies the minimum time that the PBX waits after seizing a DDI/DID or TIE line, before sending the dialled
digits to the telephone company or to another PBX. This allows the telephone company or the other PBX to
have enough time to accept the dialled digits correctly.

Value Range
32 x n (n=1–255) ms

Answer Detection Timer
Specifies the length of time required by the PBX to recognise the answer signal. This allows the telephone
company to have enough time to accept the dialled digits correctly.

Value Range
32 x n (n=1–255) ms

Seizure ACK Wait Timer
Specifies the length of time that the PBX waits for the seizure ACK signal.

Value Range
0.5 x n (n=1–20) s

PC Programming Manual 359

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
9.28 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Card Property—E1 type
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

LIU Send Option
Indicates the transmitting level (Transmit Pulse Amplitude) of LIU (reference only).

Value Range
Mode 1-Mode 8

LIU Receive Option
Selects the receiving level (Receive Equalisation) of LIU.

Value Range
Automatic, 6 dB, 12 dB, 18 dB, 24 dB

RAI Signal Detection Mode
Selects the RAI signal detection mode.

Value Range
Type1, Type2

DTMF Tone—DTMF Inter-digit Pause

Specifies the length of the DTMF inter-digit pause.

Value Range
64 + 16 x n (n=0–11) ms

360 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 9.29 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Card Property—E1 type Line Signal Setting
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

9.29 PBX Configuration—[1-1]

Configuration—Slot—Card Property—E1 type Line 
Signal Setting
DR2 Setting Type
Selects the control type of the DR2 (Digital System R2) signal.

Value Range
Normal, Option 1, Option 3

Inter-digit Timer
Specifies the pseudo-answer time. This setting is available only when Option 1 or Option 3 is selected in DR2
Setting Type on this screen.

Value Range
3-15

Bit Position for Dial Pulse
Selects the position of the pulse dial control bit in a DR2 signal.

Value Range
A-bit, B-bit

Bit Position for Clear Back
Selects the position of the clear-back signal control bit in a DR2 signal.

Value Range
A-bit, B-bit, A&B-bit

Forced Release
Enables the PBX to send a forced release signal.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

Forced Release Pattern
Selects the bit pattern for a forced release signal.

Value Range
A=0/B=0, A=0/B=1, A=1/B=0, A=1/B=1

Meter Pulse Detection—Mode

Specifies the mode for call charge meter pulses.

PC Programming Manual 361

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
9.29 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Card Property—E1 type Line Signal Setting
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Value Range
No Detection: Meter pulses are not sent or received.
Outgoing call only: Sends a call charge meter pulse for outgoing trunk calls.
Both calls: Sends and receives call charge meter pulses.

Feature Guide References

2.29.1 E1 Line Service

Meter Pulse Detection—Bit Position

Specifies the bit position of a call charge meter pulse.

Value Range
A-bit, B-bit, C-bit, D-bit

Feature Guide References

2.29.1 E1 Line Service

Meter Pulse Detection—Length

Specifies the length that a call charge meter pulse must be for the PBX to recognise it as a call charge meter
pulse.

Value Range
8 ´ n (n=1–80) ms

Feature Guide References

2.29.1 E1 Line Service

DSP Gain Adjustment—DTMF Transmit
Specifies the output power of the DTMF signal sent from the DSP (Digital Signal Processor).

Value Range
-12 dB–3 dB

DSP Gain Adjustment—DTMF Receive
Specifies the strength range within which a DTMF signal must be for the DSP to recognise it as a DTMF signal.

Value Range
-42 - 0 dB – -11- 0 dB

DSP Gain Adjustment—MFC-R2 Transmit
Specifies the output power of MFC-R2 signals sent from the DSP.

362 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 9.29 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Card Property—E1 type Line Signal Setting
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Value Range
-31 dB–0 dB

DSP Gain Adjustment—MFC-R2 Receive
Specifies the strength range within which an MFC-R2 signal must be for the DSP to recognise it as an MFC-R2
signal.

Value Range
-38 - 0 dB – -23 - 0 dB

Frame Error Detection—Error Detection
Specifies whether the PBX detects frame synchronisation errors.

Value Range
No, Yes

Frame Error Detection—Error Rate
Specifies the number of frame errors per second which the PBX needs to recognise a remote alarm. To enable
this setting, Frame Error Detection—Error Detection on this screen should be set to Yes.

Value Range
No limit, 16 x n (n=1–7) errors/s

PC Programming Manual 363

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
9.30 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Card Property—E1 type MFC-R2 Setting 1
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

9.30 PBX Configuration—[1-1]

Configuration—Slot—Card Property—E1 type 
MFC-R2 Setting 1
ANI Service—Mode
Selects the ANI (Automatic Number Identification) service mode.

Value Range
None: ANI service is not activated.
Incoming call only: Receives the caller’s number from the E1 line.
Outgoing call only: Sends the caller’s number to the E1 line.
Both calls: Sends and receives the caller’s number through the E1 line.

ANI Service—ANI Max. digits
Specifies the maximum number of digits to be received via ANI when receiving a call with ANI.

Value Range
None, 1–16

MFC-R2 Timer—Forward
Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for an MFC-R2 forward signal sent from the telephone
company.

Value Range
1–30 s

MFC-R2 Timer—Backward
Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for an MFC-R2 backward signal sent from the telephone
company.

Value Range
1–30 s

MFC-R2 Timer—Disappearance
Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for an MFC-R2 disappearance signal sent from the telephone
company.

Value Range
1–30 s

Group-l Code Assignment—ANI Start
Specifies the code used to indicate the beginning of an ANI number.

364 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 9.30 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Card Property—E1 type MFC-R2 Setting 1
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Value Range
Undefined, 1–15

Group-l Code Assignment—ANI Complete (1)–(4)

Specifies the code used to indicate the end of an ANI number.

Value Range
ANI Complete (1): 1–15
ANI Complete (2)–(4): Undefined, 1–15

Group-l Code Assignment—ANI Reject
Specifies the code used to reject an ANI number.

Value Range
1–15

Group-l Code Assignment—End of Digit
Specifies the code used to recognise the end of each digit in an ANI number.

Value Range
Undefined, 1–15

Group-l Code Assignment—End of Digit Timer
Specifies the length of time that the PBX waits for further signal before detecting the end of digit of an ANI
number.

Value Range
1–15

Group-l Code Assignment—G-ll Code Outgoing Call
Specifies the code for sending Group-ll code to the telephone company.

Value Range
1–15

Group-l Code Assignment—G-ll Code Incoming Call [1]–[15]

Specifies the destination of incoming trunk calls for each Group-ll code respectively.

Value Range
Undefined, Subscriber, Operator, Collect Call

Group-l Code Assignment—Group-ll ANI
Specifies the Group-ll ANI start code.

PC Programming Manual 365

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
9.30 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Card Property—E1 type MFC-R2 Setting 1
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Value Range
1–15

MFC-R2 Group-1[*][#]—E1 MFC-R2 Group1[*] code
Specifies the code value of the Group-1 code when the received Group-1 code is [*].

Value Range
11–15

MFC-R2 Group-1[*][#]—E1 MFC-R2 Group1[#] code
Specifies the code value of the Group-1 code when the received Group-1 code is [#].

Value Range
11–15

366 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 9.31 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Card Property—E1 type MFC-R2 Setting 2
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

9.31 PBX Configuration—[1-1]

Configuration—Slot—Card Property—E1 type 
MFC-R2 Setting 2
Group-A Code Assignment—Address Complete
Specifies the address complete (completion of dial reception) code sent to the telephone company.

Value Range
1–15

Group-A Code Assignment—ANI Request
Specifies the code used to request the telephone company to send an ANI number.

Value Range
1–15

Group-A Code Assignment—ANI (N+1)
Specifies the code used to request the telephone company to send the (N+1)th digit of an ANI number.

Value Range
1–15

Group-A Code Assignment—ANI (N+1) Additional Code
Specifies the second code when two codes are needed to request the telephone company to send the (N+1)th
digit of an ANI number.

Value Range
Undefined, 1–15

Group-A Code Assignment—Set up Speech Path
Specifies the setup speech path code sent to the telephone company.

Value Range
Undefined, 1–15

Group-A Code Assignment—(First) Request
Specifies the code used to request the telephone company to send the first digit of an ANI number.

Value Range
Undefined, 1–15

Group-A Code Assignment—(N) Request
Specifies the code used to request the telephone company to send the (N)th digit of an ANI number.

PC Programming Manual 367

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
9.31 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Card Property—E1 type MFC-R2 Setting 2
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Value Range
Undefined, 1–15

Group-A Code Assignment—(N-1) Request
Specifies the code used to request the telephone company to send the (N-1)th digit of an ANI number.

Value Range
Undefined, 1–15

Group-A Code Assignment—(N-2) Request
Specifies the code used to request the telephone company to send the (N-2)th digit of an ANI number.

Value Range
Undefined, 1–15

Group-A Code Assignment—(N-3) Request
Specifies the code used to request the telephone company to send the (N-3)th digit of an ANI number.

Value Range
Undefined, 1–15

Group-B Code Assignment—Idle (1)
Specifies the code used normally to inform the telephone company that the status of the called destination is
idle.

Value Range
Undefined, 1–15

Group-B Code Assignment—Idle (2)
Specifies the code used in special circumstances, such as an international call, to inform the telephone
company that the status of the called destination is idle.

Value Range
Undefined, 1–15

Group-B Code Assignment—Idle (3)
Specifies the code used to inform the telephone company that the status of the called destination is idle when
the call is disconnected by the caller.

Value Range
Undefined, 1–15

Group-B Code Assignment—Busy
Specifies the code used to inform the telephone company that the status of the called destination is busy.

368 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 9.31 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Card Property—E1 type MFC-R2 Setting 2
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Value Range
Undefined, 1–15

Group-B Code Assignment—Unallocated
Specifies the code used to inform the telephone company that the received number is not defined.

Value Range
Undefined, 1–15

Group-B Code Assignment—Congestion
Specifies the code used to inform the telephone company that the network is congested.

Value Range
Undefined, 1–15

Group-B Code Assignment—Out-of-Service
Specifies the code used to inform the telephone company that the status of the called destination is out of
service.

Value Range
Undefined, 1–15

Group-B Code Assignment—No Billing
Specifies the code used to inform the telephone company that the call is not charged.

Value Range
Undefined, 1–15

Group-B Code Assignment—Collect Call Reject
Specifies the code used to inform the telephone company that the collect call has been rejected.

Value Range
Undefined, 1–15

PC Programming Manual 369

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
9.32 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property—E1 Port
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

9.32 PBX Configuration—[1-1]

Configuration—Slot—Port Property—E1 Port
Various settings can be programmed for each E1 channel. To change the status of ports, click Command.

Shelf
Indicates the shelf position (reference only).

Value Range
Shelf number

Slot
Indicates the slot position (reference only).

Value Range
Slot number

CH
Indicates the channel number (reference only).

Value Range
channel number

Connection
Indicates the channel status (reference only).
This column offers two ways to open the screen to select the channel command:
• Click the desired cell in the column.
• Select the desired cell in the column, and then click Command.
Value Range
INS: The channel is in service.
OUS: The channel is out of service.
Fault: The channel is not communicating with the network.

Subscriber Number
Specifies the number used as the CLIP number.

Value Range
Max. 16 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)

Feature Guide References

4.1.2.2 Calling/Connected Line Identification Presentation (CLIP/COLP)

370 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 9.32 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property—E1 Port
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Channel Type
Selects the channel type.

Value Range
Undefined: Not assigned
DR2: Digital System R2

Feature Guide References

2.29.1 E1 Line Service

Trunk Property
Selects the trunk property of the E&M channel.

Value Range
Public: Use the DIL/DDI/DID method to distribute incoming trunk calls.
Private: Use the TIE line service between two or more PBXs.

Feature Guide References

2.1.1.1 Incoming Trunk Call Features—SUMMARY
4.1.2.1 Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN)—SUMMARY
4.3.1 TIE Line Service

CO Dial Mode
Selects the type of signal used to dial out to a trunk.
If MFC-R2 is selected, the PBX (not the telephone company) sends a dial tone to the caller when making a
trunk call using an E1 line.

Value Range
DTMF, MFC-R2

Feature Guide References

2.5.4.4 Dial Type Selection
2.29.1 E1 Line Service

E1 Receiver Type
Selects the type of signal the PBX receives from the E1 line.
This should be set to MFC-R2 when receiving ANI (Automatic Number Identification) numbers from the E1
line.

Value Range
DTMF, MFC-R2, Undefined

Feature Guide References

2.29.1 E1 Line Service

PC Programming Manual 371

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
9.32 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property—E1 Port
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Receive Digits
Specifies the maximum number of digits to be received from a DDI/DID number when receiving a call with the
DDI/DID number.

Value Range
0–15

CPC Detection Time—Out, In
Specifies the length of time required by the PBX to detect a CPC signal on outgoing or incoming trunk calls
before disconnecting the line. When None is selected here, the line will not be disconnected when a CPC signal
is not detected.

Value Range
None, 80 x n (n=2–75) ms

Feature Guide References

2.11.9 Calling Party Control (CPC) Signal Detection

DTMF Width
Selects the length of the DTMF tone sent to the E1 channel.

Value Range
80 ms, 160 ms

Ringback Tone to Outside Caller

Enables the PBX to send a ringback tone to an outside caller when the network cannot send the tone.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

Dial Tone to Extension
Enables the PBX to send a dial tone to an extension making a call when the network cannot send the tone.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

Answer Wait Timer (*60s)
Selects the length of time that the PBX waits for the called outside party to answer an outgoing trunk call. The
line will be disconnected automatically when this timer expires.

Value Range
None, 1–4

372 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 9.32 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property—E1 Port
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Pause Time
Specifies the length of a pause.

Value Range
1.5 s, 2.5 s, 3.5 s, 4.5 s

Feature Guide References

2.5.4.7 Pause Insertion
2.5.4.8 Host PBX Access Code (Access Code to the Telephone Company from a Host PBX)
2.5.4.9 Special Carrier Access Code

Flash Time
Specifies the length of a flash signal.

Value Range
None, 16 x n (n=1–255) ms

Disconnect Time
Specifies the length of time after a trunk is disconnected, during which the PBX cannot seize the line.

Value Range
0.5 s, 1.5 s, 2.0 s, 4.0 s, 12.0 s

Feature Guide References

2.11.6 Flash/Recall/Terminate

PC Programming Manual 373

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
9.33 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Expansion Unit1/Expansion Unit2/Expansion Unit3
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

9.33 PBX Configuration—[1-1]

Configuration—Slot—Expansion Unit1/Expansion
Unit2/Expansion Unit3
Settings for Expansion Units connected to the PBX over a stacking connection can be programmed. Click
Expansion Unit1, Expansion Unit2 or Expansion Unit3 on the Slot screen to view the physical card shelf
of the Expansion Unit.

Note
• Expansion Units must first be pre-installed before they can be programmed. For details, see To
pre-install PBXs connected to the EXP-M card in 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1]
Configuration—Slot.
• For information about hardware configuration restrictions and conditions for Expansion Units, refer to
4.6 Expansion Card in the Installation Manual.

To install a new physical card in an Expansion Unit

1. Click on the name of the card to install in the list on the right. An image of the card will be displayed, and
information about the card will be shown.
2. Click and drag the image of the card to the slot, and release it. The card will move into the slot space.
3. Click OK to confirm.

To change the status (INS/OUS) of an Expansion Unit

1. Move the mouse pointer over the Shelf Status button. A menu will be shown under the mouse pointer.
2. Select the desired status:
• Click INS to set the shelf to in-service status.
• Click OUS to set the shelf to out-of-service status.

To remove an Expansion Unit from the EXP-M card

1. Move the mouse pointer over the Shelf Status button. A menu will be shown under the mouse pointer.
2. Click Delete. The Expansion Unit will be deleted from the system and the corresponding shelf button will
become greyed out.

Note
The Expansion Unit must be set to OUS before it can be deleted.

Programming cards installed in an Expansion Unit

You can access the card properties and port properties of the physical cards installed in an Expansion Unit
using the Web Maintenance Console Interface. The settings, setting values, and other information is similar
to programming using the Unified PC Maintenance Console. Refer to the PC Programming Manual of the
Expansion Unit PBX for programming information.

Programming Card Properties for cards installed in Expansion Units

For your reference, the following information is included on each Card Property screen for cards installed in
Expansion Units:
Shelf: The shelf number of the EXP-M card Expansion Unit connection:
• 2: Expansion Unit1

374 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 9.33 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Expansion Unit1/Expansion Unit2/Expansion Unit3
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

• 3: Expansion Unit2
• 4: Expansion Unit3
Slot: The physical slot number within the Expansion Unit where the card is installed.

Programming Port Properties for cards installed in Expansion Units

To change the status of a port when programming via Web Maintenance Console, click the desired cell in the
Connection column, and then select INS or OUS for the port.

PC Programming Manual 375

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
9.34 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Card Property—DOORPHONE Card
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

9.34 PBX Configuration—[1-1]

Configuration—Slot—Card Property—DOORPHONE
Card
The doorphone card’s settings can be programmed.
The Shelf, Slot, and Port for each item are displayed for your reference. For details, see Common
Programming Reference Items in 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot.

Port Status
Specifies the port’s status.
This option is only available in On-line mode.

Value Range
INS: The port is in service.
OUS: The port is out of service.
Fault: There is a communication error.

For Output - Device Type

Selects the type of connected output device (for output ports only).

Value Range
Ringer, Relay, Door Opener

For Sensor - Input Signal Decision Time

Specifies the minimum duration of continuous input from the triggered sensor before the PBX recognises the
input and makes a sensor call.

Value Range
32 ´ n (n=2–255) ms

For Sensor - Input Signal Detection Reopening Time

Specifies the length of time after the sensor has been triggered during which any further input from the sensor
will be ignored.

Value Range
10 ´ n (n=1–255) s

376 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 9.35 PBX Configuration—[1-2] Configuration—Portable Station
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

9.35 PBX Configuration—[1-2]

Configuration—Portable Station
Various portable station (PS) settings can be programmed.

PS Registration and De-registration

A PS must be registered to the PBX by programming both the PBX and PS before it can be used. Programming
instructions of the PBX are given below; programming instructions of the PS are found in the Installation
Manual.
It is possible to de-register the PS later.
PS Registration, De-registration, and Forced De-registration can be performed only in On-line mode.

Registration
Follow the steps below to register the PS.
1. Click Registration.
A dialogue box will appear. Non-registered (available) extension numbers and names are displayed on the
left.
2. Highlight PBX sites and click the right arrow to select them for registration. Click Next.
3. If the registration is still in progress, the dialogue box will show "Registration Executing".
If the registration is successful, the dialogue box will show "Registration Completed". Click Close.
Once a PS is successfully registered, the status of the PS will update to show "Registered".

De-registration
Follow the steps below to de-register the PS.
1. Click De-registration.
A dialogue box will appear. Registered extension numbers and names are displayed on the left.
2. Highlight numbers and names and click the right arrow to select them for de-registration. Click Next.
A dialogue box will appear.
3. Click Confirm.
If the de-registration is successful, the dialogue box will show "De-registration Succeed".
4. Click Close.
Once the PS is successfully de-registered, the status of the PS will update to show "None".

Forced De-registration
Follow the steps below to forcibly de-register the PS when normal de-registration has been unsuccessful or
de-registration has been performed only on the PS.
1. Click Forced De-registration.
A dialogue box will appear. Registered extension numbers and names are displayed on the left.
2. Highlight numbers and names and click the right arrow to select them for forced de-registration. Click
Next.
A dialogue box will appear.
3. Click OK.
A dialogue box will appear.
4. Click Confirm.
If the de-registration is successful, the dialogue box will show "Forced De-registration Succeed".
5. Click Close.
Once the PS is successfully de-registered, the status of the PS will update to show "None".

PC Programming Manual 377

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
9.35 PBX Configuration—[1-2] Configuration—Portable Station
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Personal Identification Number

Specifies the Personal Identification Number (PIN) of the PBX, used to avoid registering a PS to the wrong
PBX.
Note that the same PIN should be entered at the PS, before the PS is registered to the PBX.

Value Range
4 digits (consisting of 0–9)

Feature Guide References

5.2.4.1 Portable Station (PS) Connection

Index
Indicates the PS number (reference only).

Value Range
1–128

Feature Guide References

5.2.4.1 Portable Station (PS) Connection

Extension No.
Specifies the extension number of the PS.
In Wireless XDP Parallel Mode, the PS can be used as a sub telephone with a wired main telephone (PT/SLT),
and two of them will share one extension number of the main telephone. However, note that the PS extension
number specified here will not be altered by the extension number of the main telephone even if the PS is in
Wireless XDP Parallel Mode.

Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)

Feature Guide References

5.2.4.1 Portable Station (PS) Connection
5.2.4.5 Wireless XDP Parallel Mode

Extension Name
Specifies the name of the PS.

Value Range
Max. 20 characters

PC Programming Manual References

12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings—Main— Extension
Name

378 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 9.35 PBX Configuration—[1-2] Configuration—Portable Station
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Feature Guide References

5.2.4.1 Portable Station (PS) Connection

Status
Indicates whether a certain PS is registered (reference only).

Value Range
None, Registered

Feature Guide References

5.2.4.1 Portable Station (PS) Connection

PC Programming Manual 379

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
9.36 PBX Configuration—[1-3] Configuration—Option
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

9.36 PBX Configuration—[1-3]

Configuration—Option
System options can be programmed.

System Wireless—System ID
Indicates the radio system ID used to register a PS (reference only).

To clear the System ID

1. Click the Clear Master CS button.
2. A warning will be displayed. Confirm the contents of the warning, and then click Yes.
Note
The System ID can be cleared using this procedure only in Off-line mode.

Value Range
Not applicable.

System Wireless—CO Status Display in Standby (KX-WT125 only) (Need

System Restart)
Selects whether to display the CO status on the LCD of the PS when in stand-by mode (KX-WT125 only).

Note
• The KX-WT125 is available only in Canada.
• For users in Canada, this setting is also available for the KX-WT126.

Value Range
Enable, Disable

New Card Installation—Card Status for any Card

Selects the initial status of cards after installation.

Value Range
In Service, Out of Service

New Card Installation—Automatic Extension Number Set for Extension Card

Selects whether extension numbers are assigned to extension ports automatically or manually.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

New Card Installation—ISDN Standard Mode for PRI23 Card

Specifies whether a PRI23 card is automatically set to ISDN Standard Mode or T1-LCOT mode when it is
installed for the first time.

380 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 9.36 PBX Configuration—[1-3] Configuration—Option
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Value Range
ISDN Standard Mode: The CCBS, CF, CT, and Unified Messaging features are supported. DIL and DID call
distribution are available for the D channel.
T1-LCOT mode: DIL and DID call distribution are available for all 23B channels. The CCBS, CF, CT, and
Unified Messaging features are not available in this mode.

Feature Guide References

2.1.1.2 Direct In Line (DIL)
2.1.1.3 Direct Inward Dialling (DID)/Direct Dialling In (DDI)
4.3.4.3 Call Forwarding (CF)—by QSIG
4.3.4.4 Call Transfer (CT)—by QSIG
4.3.4.5 Completion of Calls to Busy Subscriber (CCBS)—by QSIG
4.3.5.2 Centralised Voice Mail

PC Programming Manual 381

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
9.37 PBX Configuration—[1-4] Configuration—Clock Priority
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

9.37 PBX Configuration—[1-4] Configuration—Clock

Priority
Shelf-Slot Number
Selects and prioritises slot numbers for the BRI and PRI cards that are used to forward a clock pulse from an
external source to the PBX.
Obtain the master clock time from the outside line that the telephone company provides.
To change Clock Priority, follow the steps below:
1. Assign a Clock Priority to each slot.
2. Set the status of the present clock source card to "OUS", then "INS".
Note
If multiple PBXs are used to establish a private network (TIE line service, QSIG network, etc.) without being
connected through the telephone company, assign only one PBX as the clock source on the network. That
PBX should have a card connected to a telephone company line selected as its clock source. All other
PBXs should have cards connected to the network selected as the clock source. This enables all PBXs on
the network to synchronise their timing.

Value Range
None, Shelf and Slot number
Shelf and slot numbers are listed using the pattern "X-Y":
• X: Shelf number (1–4)
– 1: Main unit
– 2: Expansion Unit1
– 3: Expansion Unit2
– 4: Expansion Unit3
• Y: Slot number (1–7)

382 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 9.38.1 PBX Configuration—[1-5-1] Configuration—DSP Resource—Setting
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

9.38 PBX Configuration—[1-5] Configuration—DSP

Resource
IP communications that are handled by the PBX require DSP resources. DSP resources can be reserved for
various functions of the PBX.
The DSP resource advisor is a tool that analyses the configuration and user requirements for the system in
order to recommend which DSP card should be used. Click DSP Resource Advisor to access this feature.
(See 9.38.1.1 PBX Configuration—[1-5-1] Configuration—DSP Resource—Setting—DSP Resource
Advisor.)

9.38.1 PBX Configuration—[1-5-1] Configuration—DSP

Resource—Setting
Set the amount of DSP resources to reserve for each PBX function that uses DSP resources.

Option DSP Power

Indicates the total amount of available DSP resources based on the installed DSP card (reference only).
The number of resources provided by each type of DSP card is as follows:
• DSP S card: 63
• DSP M card: 127
• DSP L card: 254
One DSP card can be installed on the mother board.
Because the system reserves 2 resources for internal system functions, the total amount of available resources
indicated will be 2 less than the total resources of the installed card(s).

Value Range
Resource amount (3 digits)

Feature Guide References

5.5.4 DSP Resource Usage

Option DSP
Indicates the type of the installed DSP card (reference only).

Value Range
DSP S, DSP M, DSP L

Feature Guide References

5.5.4 DSP Resource Usage

Services—VoIP (G.711)
Specifies the number of simultaneous VoIP calls to reserve DSP resources for.

PC Programming Manual 383

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
9.38.1 PBX Configuration—[1-5-1] Configuration—DSP Resource—Setting
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Value Range
0–506 VoIP calls

Feature Guide References

5.5.4 DSP Resource Usage

Services—Unified message
Specifies the number of UM ports to reserve DSP resources for.

Value Range
0–25 ports (UM: 24 ports, Fax: 1 port)

Feature Guide References

5.5.4 DSP Resource Usage

Services—Two-way Recording
Specifies the number of UM ports reserved in Services—Unified message to use for Two-way Recording.

Value Range
0–24 ports (cannot exceed the value set in Services—Unified message)

Feature Guide References

5.5.4 DSP Resource Usage

Services—OGM
Specifies the number of OGM ports to reserve DSP resources for.

Value Range
0–64 ports

Feature Guide References

5.5.4 DSP Resource Usage

Services—Conference trunk
Specifies the number of conference rooms to reserve DSP resources for.

Value Range
0–24 conference rooms

Feature Guide References

5.5.4 DSP Resource Usage

384 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 9.38.1 PBX Configuration—[1-5-1] Configuration—DSP Resource—Setting
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Services—Free resources (G.711)

Indicates the amount of free DSP resources available to allocate (reference only).

Value Range
0–506 DSP resources

Feature Guide References

5.5.4 DSP Resource Usage

Select a time to apply the set values

Specifies when the settings made on this screen are applied.

Note
Any calls being made that use DSP resources will be disconnected when setting values are changed and
applied.

Value Range
• Set: Specify a date and time to apply the changes, and click OK. The changes will be applied at the specified
date and time.
• Apply now: The changes are applied immediately. Click OK to apply the settings immediately.

PC Programming Manual 385

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
9.38.1 PBX Configuration—[1-5-1] Configuration—DSP Resource—Setting
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

9.38.1.1 PBX Configuration—[1-5-1] Configuration—DSP

Resource—Setting—DSP Resource Advisor
The DSP Resource Advisor assists programmers in the allocation of DSP resources to various PBX functions.
1. Note the value of Total Power. This is the total capacity for allocating DSP resources, depending on the
DSP card installed in the PBX.
2. In the Ports column, enter the number of ports to allocate to each PBX function.
3. For voice calls, it is useful to estimate how often each call function is used, as every extension or trunk is
not in use all the time. In the Busy Ratio (%) column, specify the anticipated ratio of time the type of voice
call function will be used.
4. As values are entered, the values in the Power column will increase to reflect the resource required for
the input amounts. Likewise, the value for Free resources (G.711) will decrease.

Note
Click Clear to reset the input values and start again.
5. When all items are allocated, confirm that the amount of resources input does not exceed the value
indicated in Total Power.
• Click Apply to insert the specified allocation settings into the DSP Resource—Setting screen.
• Click Cancel to return to the DSP Resource—Setting screen without making any changes.
For details, refer to "5.5.4.2 DSP Resource Advisor" in the Feature Guide.

386 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 9.38.2 PBX Configuration—[1-5-2] Configuration—DSP Resource—Usage
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

9.38.2 PBX Configuration—[1-5-2] Configuration—DSP

Resource—Usage
The Usage screen is a graphical display of DSP resource usage. This information is useful to analyse usage
patterns over time to determine DSP resource needs and optimal configuration settings.
This screen can be accessed only in On-line mode.
• The graph displays DSP resource usage over time. The time frame displayed can be displayed in
increments of 1 hour, 4 hours, or 24 hours. Up to 30 days of usage data can be stored.
• Only DSP resources that have been reserved in 9.38.1 PBX Configuration—[1-5-1]
Configuration—DSP Resource—Setting are displayed.

PC Programming Manual 387

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
9.38.2 PBX Configuration—[1-5-2] Configuration—DSP Resource—Usage
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

388 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Section 10
PBX Configuration—[2] System

This section serves as reference operating instructions

for the System menu of the PBX Configuration menu of
the Setup screen of Web Maintenance Console.

PC Programming Manual 389

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
10.1.1 PBX Configuration—[2-1-1] System—Date & Time—Date & Time Setting
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

10.1 PBX Configuration—[2-1] System—Date & Time

10.1.1 PBX Configuration—[2-1-1] System—Date & Time—Date

& Time Setting
The date and time of the PBX can be programmed. The date and time will be shown on the display of extensions
(e.g., PT, PS).
This screen can be accessed only in On-line mode.

Date & Time

Indicates the current date and time. Values can be entered by clicking the parameter you want to change and
typing the new value, or by clicking the up/down arrows beside the date and time.

Note
• When this setting is changed and applied, it may take between 1 minute and several hours (depending
on the configuration of the PBX network) for all connected IP-PTs to reflect this change on their displays.
• At default settings, KX-UT series SIP phones synchronise to the PBX’s date and time once every hour.

Value Range
Year: 2000–2035
Month: 01–12
Day: 01–31
Hour: 00–23
Minute: 00–59
Second: 00–59

390 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 10.1.2 PBX Configuration—[2-1-2] System—Date & Time—SNTP / Daylight Saving
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

10.1.2 PBX Configuration—[2-1-2] System—Date & Time—SNTP /

Daylight Saving
Automatic clock adjustment and Summer time (daylight saving time) settings of the PBX can be programmed.
Automatic clock adjustment can be performed using one of two methods, ISDN & Caller ID or SNTP (Simple
Network Time Protocol).
To set Summer time, click 10.1.2.1 PBX Configuration—[2-1-2] System—Date & Time—SNTP / Daylight
Saving—Daylight Saving.

Note
The NTP server function of the PBX must be enabled for connected KX-UT series SIP phones to receive
automatic time adjustment information from the PBX. See 27.2.4 Network Service—[2-5] Server
Feature—NTP.

Automatic Time Adjustment

Enables the PBX to automatically adjust its clock every day according to the time information provided by the
network.

Value Range
Disable, ISDN & Caller ID (FSK), SNTP

Feature Guide References

5.5.5 Automatic Setup

SNTP—SNTP Server—IP Address

Specifies the IP address or host name of the SNTP server.

Value Range
1.0.0.0–223.255.255.255 (IP address), Max. 253 characters (host name)

Feature Guide References

5.5.5 Automatic Setup

SNTP—SNTP Server—Port Number

Indicates the port number used for communication with an SNTP server (reference only).

Value Range
1–65535

Feature Guide References

5.5.5 Automatic Setup

SNTP—Time Zone—Time Zone

Specifies your local UTC (Coordinated Universal Time) time zone using the up and down arrows.

PC Programming Manual 391

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
10.1.2 PBX Configuration—[2-1-2] System—Date & Time—SNTP / Daylight Saving
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Note
If KX-UT series SIP phones are connected to the PBX, and this setting is changed, they must be restarted
for the new time zone setting to take effect.

Value Range
-14:00–+14:00

Feature Guide References

5.5.5 Automatic Setup

SNTP—Time Zone—Time Zone for PC

Indicates the UTC (Coordinated Universal Time) time zone of the PC (reference only).

Value Range
-14:00–+14:00

Feature Guide References

5.5.5 Automatic Setup

392 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 10.1.2 PBX Configuration—[2-1-2] System—Date & Time—SNTP / Daylight Saving
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

10.1.2.1 PBX Configuration—[2-1-2] System—Date & Time—SNTP /

Daylight Saving—Daylight Saving
Summer time can be programmed. Summer time sets the clock one hour forward at 2:00 AM on the start date,
and one hour back at 2:00 AM on the end date. The start and end dates of a maximum of 20 different summer
times can be programmed.

Setting
Enables Summer time.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

PC Programming Manual References

10.1.2 PBX Configuration—[2-1-2] System—Date & Time—SNTP / Daylight Saving

Feature Guide References

5.5.5 Automatic Setup

Start Date—Year, Month, Day

Specifies the start date of daylight savings time.

Value Range
Year: 2000–2035
Month: 1–12
Day: 1–31

PC Programming Manual References

10.1.2 PBX Configuration—[2-1-2] System—Date & Time—SNTP / Daylight Saving

Feature Guide References

5.5.5 Automatic Setup

PC Programming Manual 393

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
10.1.2 PBX Configuration—[2-1-2] System—Date & Time—SNTP / Daylight Saving
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

End Date—Year, Month, Day

Specifies the end date of daylight savings time.

Value Range
Year: 2000–2035
Month: 1–12
Day: 1–31

PC Programming Manual References

10.1.2 PBX Configuration—[2-1-2] System—Date & Time—SNTP / Daylight Saving

Feature Guide References

5.5.5 Automatic Setup

394 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 10.2 PBX Configuration—[2-2] System—Operator & BGM
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

10.2 PBX Configuration—[2-2] System—Operator &

BGM
Settings related to the PBX operator and audio sources can be specified.

PBX Operator—Day, Lunch, Break, Night

Specifies the extension number or floating extension number of incoming call distribution group to be
designated as the PBX operator in each time mode (day/lunch/break/night). To select an extension number,
click Destination Setting (see 2.1.6 Extension Number Setting).
If Automatic copy to UM Operator (No.1) is checked here, the PBX Operator extension number(s) set for
Day/Lunch/Break/Night will be copied to the Unified Messaging service’s Operator Extension for Operator
Service No. 1 (see 23.2 UM Configuration—[4-2] Service Settings—Parameters—Automated
Attendant— Operator Service).

Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)

PC Programming Manual References

10.4 PBX Configuration—[2-4] System—Week Table
10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main
11.5.1 PBX Configuration—[3-5-1] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings
23.2 UM Configuration—[4-2] Service Settings—Parameters—Automated Attendant— Operator Service

Feature Guide References

5.1.5 Operator Features

BGM and Music on Hold—Music on Hold

Selects the audio source for Music on Hold.

Value Range
Tone, BGM1, BGM2, BGM3, BGM4, BGM5, BGM6, BGM7, BGM8

Feature Guide References

2.13.4 Music on Hold

BGM and Music on Hold—Sound on Transfer

Selects the audio source for Music for Transfer (either the same music source chosen for the Music on Hold,
or ringback tone).

Value Range
Same as Music on Hold, Ringback Tone

Feature Guide References

2.12.1 Call Transfer

PC Programming Manual 395

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3] System—Timers & Counters
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3] System—Timers &

Counters
Various system timers and counters can be programmed.

Dial / IRNA / Recall / Tone

Automatic Redial—Repeat Counter
Specifies the number of times Automatic Redial is attempted before being cancelled.

Value Range
0–10

Feature Guide References

2.6.3 Last Number Redial

Automatic Redial—Repeat Interval (x10s)

Specifies the length of time between repeated Automatic Redial attempts.

Value Range
10 ´ n (n=1–120) s

Feature Guide References

2.6.3 Last Number Redial

Automatic Redial—Redial Call Ring Duration (x10s)

Specifies the length of time that the PBX waits for the called party to answer an Automatic Redial attempt. This
is the length of time that the called party’s extension will ring for each attempt.

Value Range
10 ´ n (n=1–30) s

Feature Guide References

2.6.3 Last Number Redial

Automatic Redial—Analogue CO Mute / Busy Detection Timer (s)

Specifies the length of time before the PBX stops muting the caller’s voice and cancels busy tone detection
when Automatic Redial to analogue trunk is performed.

Value Range
0–15 s

396 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3] System—Timers & Counters
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Feature Guide References

2.6.3 Last Number Redial

Dial—Hot Line (Pickup Dial) Start (s)

Specifies the length of time between going off-hook and the start of automatic dialling when the Hot Line feature
is set.

Value Range
0–180 s

Feature Guide References

2.6.6 Hot Line

Dial—Extension First Digit (s)

Specifies the length of time after going off-hook within which the first digit of a feature number or destination
must be dialled before a reorder tone is heard.

Value Range
1–250 s

Feature Guide References

2.5.2 Automatic Extension Release

Dial—Extension Inter-digit (s)

Specifies the length of time within which subsequent digits must be dialled before the PBX sends a reorder
tone.

Value Range
1–250 s

Feature Guide References

2.5.2 Automatic Extension Release

Dial—Analogue CO First Digit (s)

Specifies the length of time within which the first digit of a telephone number must be sent to an analogue
trunk. If no digit is sent before this time expires, the PBX recognises end of dialling and stops muting the
caller’s voice over the analogue trunk.

Value Range
1–15 s

PC Programming Manual 397

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3] System—Timers & Counters
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Dial—Analogue CO Inter-digit (s)

Specifies the length of time within which subsequent digits of a telephone number must be sent to an analogue
trunk. If no digit is sent before this time expires, the PBX recognises end of dialling and stops muting the
caller’s voice over the analogue trunk.

Value Range
1–15 s

Dial—Analogue CO Call Duration Start (s)

Specifies the length of time between the end of dialling and the start of the SMDR timer for outgoing analogue
trunk calls.

Value Range
0–60 s

Feature Guide References

2.22.1.1 Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR)

Intercept Routing No Answer (IRNA)—Day (s), Lunch (s), Break (s), Night (s)
Specifies the length of time until an unanswered trunk call is redirected to the intercept routing destination in
each time mode.
Note that this setting is only valid for extensions whose Intercept No Answer Time—Day, Lunch, Break,
Night is set to "0".

Value Range
1–240 s

PC Programming Manual References

12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Intercept No Answer
Time— Intercept No Answer Time—Day, Lunch, Break, Night

Feature Guide References

2.1.1.6 Intercept Routing

Recall—Hold Recall (s)

Specifies the length of time until the holding extension receives a Hold Recall ring or alarm tone when a held
call remains unretrieved.

Value Range
0 (disable the Hold Recall)–240 s

Feature Guide References

2.13.1 Call Hold

398 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3] System—Timers & Counters
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Recall—Transfer Recall (s)

Specifies the length of time that a transferred call waits to be answered, before being redirected to the Transfer
Recall destination assigned to the original transferring extension.

Value Range
1–240 s

PC Programming Manual References

12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings
12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings

Feature Guide References

2.12.1 Call Transfer

Recall—Call Park Recall (s)

Specifies the length of time that a parked call waits to be retrieved, before the Transfer Recall destination
assigned to the extension that parked the call hears a Call Park Recall ring.

Value Range
1–240 s

PC Programming Manual References

12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings
12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings

Feature Guide References

2.13.2 Call Park

Recall—Disconnect after Recall (x60s)

Specifies the length of time after an extension with a trunk call on hold receives a Hold Recall tone that the
held call is disconnected.

Value Range
60 ´ n (n = 1–30) s

Feature Guide References

2.13.1 Call Hold

Tone Length—Busy Tone / DND Tone (s)

Specifies the length of time that a busy/DND tone is heard when a call is made to an extension in busy status
or DND mode. A reorder tone will be sent when this timer expires. (For a call through DISA, the call will be
disconnected when this timer expires.)

PC Programming Manual 399

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3] System—Timers & Counters
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Value Range
1–15 s

Feature Guide References

2.3.3 Do Not Disturb (DND)
2.10 Busy Line/Busy Party Features

Tone Length—Reorder Tone for PT Handset (s)

Specifies the length of time that a reorder tone is heard when using a PT handset. The PT will return to idle
status when this timer expires.

Value Range
1–15 s

Feature Guide References

2.5.2 Automatic Extension Release

Tone Length—Reorder Tone for PT Hands-free (s)

Specifies the length of time that a reorder tone is heard from the built-in speaker of a PT in hands-free mode.
The PT will return to idle status when this timer expires. This setting is applied to PSs as well as PTs.

Value Range
1–15 s

Feature Guide References

2.5.2 Automatic Extension Release
2.11.1 Hands-free Operation

DISA / Door / Reminder / U. Conf

DISA—Delayed Answer Timer (s)
Specifies the length of time that the caller hears a ringback tone before hearing an OGM.

Value Range
0–30 s

PC Programming Manual References

13.3.2 PBX Configuration—[5-3-2] Optional Device—Voice Message—DISA Message

Feature Guide References

2.16.1 Direct Inward System Access (DISA)

400 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3] System—Timers & Counters
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

DISA—Mute & OGM Start Timer after answering (s)

Specifies the length of time until the caller hears an OGM after reaching the DISA line.

Value Range
0.0–12.0 s

PC Programming Manual References

13.3.2 PBX Configuration—[5-3-2] Optional Device—Voice Message—DISA Message

Feature Guide References

2.16.1 Direct Inward System Access (DISA)

DISA—No Dial Intercept Timer (s)

Specifies the length of time after the OGM finishes playing in which the caller must begin dialling before the
call is redirected to the operator.

Value Range
0–120 s

PC Programming Manual References

10.2 PBX Configuration—[2-2] System—Operator & BGM
13.3.2 PBX Configuration—[5-3-2] Optional Device—Voice Message—DISA Message
14.6 PBX Configuration—[6-6] Feature—Tenant— Operator (Extension Number)

Feature Guide References

2.16.1 Direct Inward System Access (DISA)

DISA—2nd Dial Timer for AA (s)

Specifies the length of time in which the caller must dial the second digit before the DISA AA Service activates.

Value Range
0–5 s

PC Programming Manual References

13.3.2 PBX Configuration—[5-3-2] Optional Device—Voice Message—DISA Message

Feature Guide References

2.16.1 Direct Inward System Access (DISA)

DISA—Intercept Timer—Day (s), Lunch (s), Break (s), Night (s)

Specifies the length of time until an unanswered DISA call is intercepted and redirected to the intercept routing
destination after the original destination receives the call in each time mode.

PC Programming Manual 401

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3] System—Timers & Counters
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Value Range
0–60 s

PC Programming Manual References

12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Intercept
Destination— Intercept Destination—When called party does not answer—Day, Lunch, Break, Night
12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings—Intercept
Destination— Intercept Destination—When called party does not answer—Day, Lunch, Break, Night
13.3.2 PBX Configuration—[5-3-2] Optional Device—Voice Message—DISA Message

Feature Guide References

2.1.1.6 Intercept Routing
2.16.1 Direct Inward System Access (DISA)

DISA—Disconnect Timer after Intercept (s)

Specifies the length of time that an intercepted DISA call rings at the intercept routing destination before being
disconnected.

Value Range
0–60 s

PC Programming Manual References

13.3.2 PBX Configuration—[5-3-2] Optional Device—Voice Message—DISA Message

Feature Guide References

2.16.1 Direct Inward System Access (DISA)

DISA—CO-to-CO Call Prolong Counter

Specifies the number of times that the caller can prolong a trunk-to-trunk call on a DISA line. (Selecting "0"
enables the caller to prolong the trunk-to-trunk call without restriction.)

Value Range
0–15

PC Programming Manual References

13.3.2 PBX Configuration—[5-3-2] Optional Device—Voice Message—DISA Message

Feature Guide References

2.16.1 Direct Inward System Access (DISA)

402 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3] System—Timers & Counters
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

DISA—CO-to-CO Call Prolong Time (x60s)

Specifies the length of time that a trunk-to-trunk call on a DISA line is prolonged each time that the caller
prolongs the call. (Selecting "0" prevents the caller from prolonging the trunk-to-trunk call.)

Value Range
60 ´ n (n = 0–7) s

PC Programming Manual References

13.3.2 PBX Configuration—[5-3-2] Optional Device—Voice Message—DISA Message

Feature Guide References

2.16.1 Direct Inward System Access (DISA)

DISA—Progress Tone Continuation Time before Recording Message (s)

Specifies the length of time that a progress tone is sent to the manager extension before recording an OGM.

Value Range
0–60 s

PC Programming Manual References

13.3.2 PBX Configuration—[5-3-2] Optional Device—Voice Message—DISA Message

Feature Guide References

2.30.2 Outgoing Message (OGM)

DISA—Reorder Tone Duration (s)

Specifies the length of time that a reorder tone is sent to the caller before the call is disconnected. If "0" is
specified, no reorder tone is sent and the call is disconnected immediately.

Value Range
0–15 s

PC Programming Manual References

13.3.2 PBX Configuration—[5-3-2] Optional Device—Voice Message—DISA Message

Feature Guide References

2.16.1 Direct Inward System Access (DISA)

Doorphone—Call Ring Duration (x10s)

Specifies the length of time that a call from a doorphone rings until the call is cancelled when there is no answer.

PC Programming Manual 403

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3] System—Timers & Counters
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Value Range
10 ´ n (n=1–15) s

PC Programming Manual References

13.1 PBX Configuration—[5-1] Optional Device—Doorphone

Feature Guide References

2.18.1 Doorphone Call

Doorphone—Call Duration (x10s)

Specifies the length of time until an answered doorphone call is disconnected.

Value Range
10 ´ n (n=0–30) s

PC Programming Manual References

13.1 PBX Configuration—[5-1] Optional Device—Doorphone

Feature Guide References

2.18.1 Doorphone Call

Doorphone—Open Duration (s)

Specifies the length of time that a door stays unlocked after being opened from an extension.

Value Range
2–7 s

PC Programming Manual References

13.1 PBX Configuration—[5-1] Optional Device—Doorphone

Feature Guide References

2.18.2 Door Open

Timed Reminder—Repeat Counter

Specifies the number of times that an alarm is repeated.

Value Range
1–15

Feature Guide References

2.24.4 Timed Reminder

404 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3] System—Timers & Counters
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Timed Reminder—Interval Time (x10s)

Specifies the length of time between the repeated alarms.

Value Range
10 ´ n (n=1–120) s

Feature Guide References

2.24.4 Timed Reminder

Timed Reminder—Alarm Ringing Duration (x10s)

Specifies the length of time that an alarm rings.

Value Range
10 ´ n (n=1–30) s

Feature Guide References

2.24.4 Timed Reminder

Unattended Conference—Recall Start Timer (x60s)

Specifies the length of time until the conference originator receives an Unattended Conference Recall tone.

Value Range
60 ´ n (n = 0–60) s

Feature Guide References

2.14.2 Conference

Unattended Conference—Warning Tone Start Timer (s)

Specifies the length of time until the parties involved in an Unattended Conference receive a warning tone after
the conference originator receives the Unattended Conference Recall tone but does not return to the
conference.

Value Range
0–240 s

Feature Guide References

2.14.2 Conference

Unattended Conference—Disconnect Timer (s)

Specifies the length of time until an Unattended Conference is disconnected after the parties involved in the
conference receive a warning tone but the conference originator does not return to the conference.

PC Programming Manual 405

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3] System—Timers & Counters
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Value Range
0–240 s

Feature Guide References

2.14.2 Conference

Miscellaneous
Caller ID—Waiting to receive (s)
Specifies the length of time that the PBX waits to receive Caller ID from an analogue trunk. If the Caller ID is
received through an analogue trunk card on which no Caller ID card is mounted or through a port to which
Caller ID Detection is disabled, this timer is not applicable.

Value Range
0–15 s

PC Programming Manual References

11.1.3 PBX Configuration—[3-1-3] Group—Trunk Group—Caller ID Modification
14.1 PBX Configuration—[6-1] Feature—System Speed Dial

Feature Guide References

2.19.1 Caller ID

Caller ID—Visual Caller ID Display (s)

Specifies the length of time that a Caller ID number, with the Call Waiting tone offered by an analogue line
from the telephone company, is shown on the display. The Caller ID number flashes on the display for five
seconds, followed by a 10-second pause, then flashes again for five seconds.

Value Range
0–250 s

Feature Guide References

2.1.3.3 Call Waiting
2.10.4.2 Call Waiting Tone
2.19.1 Caller ID

Extension PIN—Lock Counter

Specifies the number of successive incorrect PIN entries allowed before the extension PIN is locked. A locked
extension PIN cannot be used until reset from the extension assigned as manager. (Specifying "None" disables
this counter.)

Value Range
None, 1–15

406 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3] System—Timers & Counters
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Feature Guide References

2.7.5 Walking COS
2.7.6 Verification Code Entry
2.24.1 Extension Personal Identification Number (PIN)

External Sensor—Ring Duration (s)

Specifies the length of time that the PBX waits for the called party to answer before cancelling a sensor call.

Value Range
10 ´ n (n=1–15) s

Feature Guide References

2.18.3 External Sensor

Incoming Call Inter-digit Timer—DDI / DID (s)

Specifies the length of time between digits when receiving a DDI/DID number from a public network. The call
will be redirected to a PBX operator when this timer expires.

Value Range
0–30 s

PC Programming Manual References

18.3 PBX Configuration—[10-3] CO & Incoming Call—DDI / DID Table

Feature Guide References

2.1.1.3 Direct Inward Dialling (DID)/Direct Dialling In (DDI)

Incoming Call Inter-digit Timer—TIE (s)

Specifies the length of time between digits when receiving a dialled number from a TIE line. The call will be
redirected to a PBX operator when this timer expires.

Value Range
3–30 s

PC Programming Manual References

17.1 PBX Configuration—[9-1] Private Network—TIE Table

Feature Guide References

4.3.1 TIE Line Service

PC Programming Manual 407

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3] System—Timers & Counters
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

PT Display—PT Last Display Duration in Idle Mode (s)

Specifies the length of time that the current information remains on the display after the extension returns to
idle status.

Value Range
1–15 s

Air Synchronisation—Watching Degeneracy (x60s)

Specifies the length of time that a Slave CS can maintain an ongoing call after air synchronisation is lost.

Value Range
60 ´ n (n=0–300) s

PC Programming Manual References

19.3.1 PBX Configuration—[11-3-1] Maintenance—CS Synchronisation—Air Synchronisation

Voice Mail (Caller from VM to CO)—On-hook Wait Time (s)

Specifies the length of time from when the voice mail seizes a trunk (for example, to transfer a call) until the
voice mail goes on hook. If the time specified here is too short, the voice mail will be unable to dial the number
and make a connection.

Value Range
1–30 s

Feature Guide References

3.1.1 Unified Messaging System Overview

During Conversation—DTMF Signal Length (ms)

Specifies the length of time that a DTMF signal is sent when a number is dialled from a PT or PS during a
conversation.

Value Range
80 ms, 160 ms, 240 ms, 320 ms

During Conversation—DTMF Inter-digit Pause (ms)

Specifies the length of time between DTMF signals when numbers are dialled in succession from a PT or PS
during a conversation.

Value Range
64 + 16 ´ n (n=0–15) ms

During Conversation—Pause Signal Time (s)

Specifies the length of the pause inserted when the PAUSE button is pressed during a conversation.

408 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3] System—Timers & Counters
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Value Range
1.5 s, 2.5 s, 3.5 s, 4.5 s

Feature Guide References

2.5.4.7 Pause Insertion

System Wireless—PS Out of Range Timer (s)

When the destination of an incoming call is a PS, specifies the length of time the PBX searches for the PS
before setting its status to Out of Range.
If "0" is assigned, the timer is controlled by the cell station.

Value Range
0–30 s

PC Programming Manual References

10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options— System Wireless—Out of Range Registration

Feature Guide References

4.3.6.1 PS Roaming by Network ICD Group

SVM—Recording Time (s)

Specifies the maximum length of a message recorded by the SVM feature.

Value Range
1–600 s

PC Programming Manual References

12.1.8 PBX Configuration—[4-1-8] Extension—Wired Extension—Simplified Voice Message
12.2.6 PBX Configuration—[4-2-6] Extension—Portable Station—Simplified Voice Message

Feature Guide References

2.16.3 Built-in Simplified Voice Message (SVM)

SVM—Dial Tone Continuous Time (s)

Specifies the length of time that dial tone 3 is heard after all messages stored by the SVM feature for an
extension are finished playing.

Value Range
1–60 s

PC Programming Manual References

12.1.8 PBX Configuration—[4-1-8] Extension—Wired Extension—Simplified Voice Message

PC Programming Manual 409

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3] System—Timers & Counters
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

12.2.6 PBX Configuration—[4-2-6] Extension—Portable Station—Simplified Voice Message

Feature Guide References

2.16.3 Built-in Simplified Voice Message (SVM)

Conference Group Call—Ring Duration (s)

Specifies the length of time that a conference group call will ring. The conference group call will be established
with members who answer within this time. If no members answer the call before this timer expires, the call is
cancelled.

Value Range
0–120 s

PC Programming Manual References

10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main—Features— Conference Group Call
Operation
10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System—Class of Service—COS Settings—Miscellaneous— Conference
Group Call Operation
11.9 PBX Configuration—[3-9] Group—Conference Group

Feature Guide References

2.15.1 Conference Group Call

Call Pickup Group Monitor—LCD Display Duration (s)

Specifies how long the indication of an incoming call that can be answered by an extension in a call pickup
group is shown on PTs’ displays.

Value Range
5, 10, 15 s

Feature Guide References

2.4.3 Call Pickup

410 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 10.4.1 PBX Configuration—[2-4] System—Week Table—Time Setting
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

10.4 PBX Configuration—[2-4] System—Week Table

A specific time mode (day, night, lunch, or break) can be selected for operation depending on the time of day.
The time mode can be switched either automatically or manually. Select the desired switching mode from the
Time Service Switching Mode option.
Time Table numbers correspond to tenant numbers (for example, Tenant 1 uses Time Table 1). Select the
desired Time Table from the Time Table No. list.
When in Automatic Switching mode, the time modes of the tenant are switched as programmed in the
corresponding Time Table. Manual switching is possible only from an authorised extension (determined by
COS).
• To adjust the currently displayed Time Table, click and drag the divisions between two time periods.
• To programme the time blocks of the currently displayed Time Table, including adding or deleting time
blocks, click Time Setting.

10.4.1 PBX Configuration—[2-4] System—Week Table—Time

Setting
The start times of 4 different time blocks can be programmed for each day of the week, for the selected Time
Table, as well as the start and end times of up to 3 break periods.

1. Day/Lunch/Night—Day1 Start, Lunch Start, Day2 Start, Night Start—Setting

Enables the setting of the start time for each time block.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

Feature Guide References

5.1.3 Tenant Service
5.1.4 Time Service

1. Day/Lunch/Night—Day1 Start, Lunch Start, Day2 Start, Night Start—Hour,

Minute
Specifies the start time for each time block. Times can only be set when 1. Day/Lunch/Night—Day1 Start,
Lunch Start, Day2 Start, Night Start—Setting is set to Enable.

Value Range
00:00–23:59

Feature Guide References

5.1.3 Tenant Service
5.1.4 Time Service

2. Break—Break 1–3 Start—Setting

Enables the setting of the start time for each break period.

PC Programming Manual 411

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
10.4.1 PBX Configuration—[2-4] System—Week Table—Time Setting
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Value Range
Disable, Enable

Feature Guide References

5.1.3 Tenant Service
5.1.4 Time Service

2. Break—Break 1–3 Start—Hour, Minute

Specifies the start time for each break period. Times can only be set when 2. Break—Break 1–3
Start—Setting is set to Enable.

Value Range
00:00–23:59

Feature Guide References

5.1.3 Tenant Service
5.1.4 Time Service

2. Break—Break 1–3 End—Hour, Minute

Specifies the end time for each break period. Times can only be set when 2. Break—Break 1–3
Start—Setting is set to Enable.

Value Range
00:00–23:59

Feature Guide References

5.1.3 Tenant Service
5.1.4 Time Service

412 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 10.5 PBX Configuration—[2-5] System—Holiday Table
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

10.5 PBX Configuration—[2-5] System—Holiday

Table
A specific time mode (day, night, lunch, or break) can be selected for operation during holidays. Select the
desired time mode from the Holiday Mode list.
The start and end dates of a maximum of 24 different holidays can be programmed.
You can click the UM Holiday Table tab to open the Holiday Table used for features of the Unified Messaging
system. These settings are synchronised with Unified Messaging system Holiday settings.

Holiday Table—Setting
Enables the setting of the holiday.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

PC Programming Manual References

23.4 UM Configuration—[4-4] Service Settings—Holiday Table— Setting

Feature Guide References

5.1.4 Time Service

Holiday Table—Start Date—Month

Specifies the month of the holiday start date.

Value Range
1–12

PC Programming Manual References

23.4 UM Configuration—[4-4] Service Settings—Holiday Table— Start Date (Month Day)

Feature Guide References

5.1.4 Time Service

Holiday Table—Start Date—Day

Specifies the day of the holiday start date.

Value Range
1–31

PC Programming Manual References

23.4 UM Configuration—[4-4] Service Settings—Holiday Table— Start Date (Month Day)

PC Programming Manual 413

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
10.5 PBX Configuration—[2-5] System—Holiday Table
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Feature Guide References

5.1.4 Time Service

Holiday Table—End Date—Month

Specifies the month of the holiday end date.

Value Range
1–12

PC Programming Manual References

23.4 UM Configuration—[4-4] Service Settings—Holiday Table— End Date (Month Day)

Feature Guide References

5.1.4 Time Service

Holiday Table—End Date—Day

Specifies the day of the holiday end date.

Value Range
1–31

PC Programming Manual References

23.4 UM Configuration—[4-4] Service Settings—Holiday Table— End Date (Month Day)

Feature Guide References

5.1.4 Time Service

414 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

10.6 PBX Configuration—[2-6] System—Numbering

Plan

10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering

Plan—Main
Details of the extension numbering schemes, feature access numbers, and numbers to access other PBXs in
a network can be programmed here.
For more information on flexible numbering, see "5.5.7 Flexible Numbering/Fixed Numbering" in the Feature
Guide.

Note
• Numbering does not necessarily have to be uniform; varying numbers of digits can be used for each
setting.
• To programme these settings, all installed V-SIPEXT and V-UTEXT cards must first be set to OUS.
For details, see 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot.

Extension
The leading numbers and the number of additional digits of the extension numbers for a maximum of 64
different extension numbering schemes can be programmed.

Leading Number
Specifies the leading number of extension numbers and floating extension numbers.

Note
Changing this value will also affect the following settings.
• Extension Number as set in User Profiles and UM Configuration
• Mailbox Number when set to synchronise with Extension Number settings
(However, Mailbox Number synchronisation depends on the setting 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9]
System—System Options—Option 9— Extension / Mailbox Setting—Mailbox Number
Synchronization with Extension Number.)

Value Range
Max. 3 digits (consisting of 0–9)

PC Programming Manual References

10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options—Option 9— Extension / Mailbox Setting—Mailbox
Number Synchronization with Extension Number
11.5.1 PBX Configuration—[3-5-1] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings
11.7.2 PBX Configuration—[3-7-2] Group—UM Group—Unit Settings
12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings
12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings
13.3.2 PBX Configuration—[5-3-2] Optional Device—Voice Message—DISA Message
19.1 PBX Configuration—[11-1] Maintenance—Main
20.1 UM Configuration—[1] Mailbox Settings— Mailbox Number

PC Programming Manual 415

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

No. of Additional Digits

Specifies the number of additional digits following the leading number.

Value Range
None: 0 digit
X: 1 digit
XX: 2 digits

Features
Feature numbers to access various PBX features can be programmed. The following features are available
while hearing a dial tone.

Operator Call
Specifies the feature number used to call the operator.

Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)

PC Programming Manual References

10.2 PBX Configuration—[2-2] System—Operator & BGM
14.6 PBX Configuration—[6-6] Feature—Tenant

Feature Guide References

5.1.5 Operator Features

Idle Line Access (Local Access)

Specifies the feature number used to make a trunk call by Idle Line Access (selects an idle trunk automatically).

Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)

PC Programming Manual References

11.1.2 PBX Configuration—[3-1-2] Group—Trunk Group—Local Access Priority

Feature Guide References

2.5.5.3 Trunk Access

Trunk Group Access

Specifies the feature number used to make a trunk call using an idle trunk from a certain trunk group.

Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)

416 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

PC Programming Manual References

18.1 PBX Configuration—[10-1] CO & Incoming Call—CO Line Settings

TIE Line Access

Specifies the feature number used to make a TIE line call.

Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)

PC Programming Manual References

17.1 PBX Configuration—[9-1] Private Network—TIE Table

Feature Guide References

4.3.1 TIE Line Service

Redial
Specifies the feature number used to redial the last number dialled.

Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)

Feature Guide References

2.6.3 Last Number Redial

System Speed Dialling / Personal Speed Dialling

Specifies the feature number used to make a call using a System/Personal Speed Dialling number.

Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)

PC Programming Manual References

12.1.3 PBX Configuration—[4-1-3] Extension—Wired Extension—Speed Dial
14.1 PBX Configuration—[6-1] Feature—System Speed Dial

Feature Guide References

2.6.4 Speed Dialling—Personal/System

Personal Speed Dialling - Programming

Specifies the feature number used to programme Personal Speed Dialling numbers at an extension.

Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)

PC Programming Manual 417

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Feature Guide References

2.6.4 Speed Dialling—Personal/System

DOORPHONE Call
Specifies the feature number used to make a call to a doorphone.

Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)

PC Programming Manual References

13.1 PBX Configuration—[5-1] Optional Device—Doorphone

Feature Guide References

2.18.1 Doorphone Call

Group Paging
Specifies the feature number used to page a certain paging group.

Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)

PC Programming Manual References

11.4 PBX Configuration—[3-4] Group—Paging Group

Feature Guide References

2.17.1 Paging

External BGM On / Off

Specifies the feature number, available for manager extensions, used to turn on or off the external BGM.

Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)

PC Programming Manual References

10.2 PBX Configuration—[2-2] System—Operator & BGM
10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System—Class of Service—COS Settings—Manager— Manager

Feature Guide References

2.30.1 Background Music (BGM)

418 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

OGM Record / Clear / Playback

Specifies the feature number, available for manager extensions, used to record, clear, or play back a certain
OGM.

Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)

PC Programming Manual References

13.3.2 PBX Configuration—[5-3-2] Optional Device—Voice Message—DISA Message
10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System—Class of Service—COS Settings—Manager— Manager

Feature Guide References

2.30.2 Outgoing Message (OGM)

Single CO Line Access

Specifies the feature number used to make a trunk call using a certain trunk.

Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)

PC Programming Manual References

18.1 PBX Configuration—[10-1] CO & Incoming Call—CO Line Settings

Feature Guide References

2.5.5.3 Trunk Access

Parallel Telephone (Ring) Mode Set / Cancel

Specifies the feature number used to set or cancel an SLT connected in parallel with a DPT to ring when
receiving an incoming call.

Note
This feature is restricted to extensions connected Expansion Units. For information about connecting SLTs
and DPTs in parallel, refer to 2.11.10 Parallelled Telephone in the Feature Guide.

Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)

Feature Guide References

2.11.10 Parallelled Telephone

Group Call Pickup

Specifies the feature number used to answer a call ringing at a certain call pickup group.

PC Programming Manual 419

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)

PC Programming Manual References

11.3 PBX Configuration—[3-3] Group—Call Pickup Group

Feature Guide References

2.4.3 Call Pickup

Directed Call Pickup

Specifies the feature number used to answer a call ringing at a certain extension.

Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)

PC Programming Manual References

12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 3— Call
Pickup Deny
12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 3— Call
Pickup Deny

Feature Guide References

2.4.3 Call Pickup

TAFAS Answer
Specifies the feature number used to answer a trunk call notified through an external pager.

Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)

PC Programming Manual References

13.2 PBX Configuration—[5-2] Optional Device—External Pager

Feature Guide References

2.17.2 Trunk Answer From Any Station (TAFAS)

Group Paging Answer

Specifies the feature number used to answer a page to a paging group.

Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)

420 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

PC Programming Manual References

11.4 PBX Configuration—[3-4] Group—Paging Group

Feature Guide References

2.17.1 Paging

Automatic Callback Busy Cancel

Specifies the feature number used to cancel Automatic Callback Busy.

Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)

Feature Guide References

2.10.1 Automatic Callback Busy (Camp-on)

User Remote Operation / Walking COS / Verification Code

Specifies the feature number used to change the COS of an extension temporarily, and also change the feature
settings (for example, FWD, DND) of an extension from another extension or through DISA.

Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)

PC Programming Manual References

10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System—Class of Service—COS Settings—Optional Device & Other
Extensions— Remote Operation by Other Extension

Feature Guide References

2.7.5 Walking COS
2.7.6 Verification Code Entry

Wireless XDP Parallel Mode Set / Cancel

Specifies the feature number used to set or cancel Wireless XDP Parallel mode.

Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)

PC Programming Manual References

10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System—Class of Service—COS Settings—Optional Device & Other
Extensions— Accept Wireless XDP Parallel Mode Set by PS

Feature Guide References

5.2.4.5 Wireless XDP Parallel Mode

PC Programming Manual 421

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Account Code Entry

Specifies the feature number used to enter an Account Code.

Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)

Feature Guide References

2.5.4.3 Account Code Entry

Call Hold / Call Hold Retrieve

Specifies the feature number used to hold a call or retrieve a call on hold from the holding extension.

Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)

Feature Guide References

2.13.1 Call Hold

Call Hold Retrieve : Specified with a Holding Extension Number

Specifies the feature number used to retrieve a held call from a different extension by specifying a holding
extension number.

Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)

Feature Guide References

2.13.1 Call Hold

Call Park / Call Park Retrieve

Specifies the feature number used to hold a call in a parking zone or retrieve a call held in a parking zone.

Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)

Feature Guide References

2.13.2 Call Park

Hold Retrieve : Specified with a Held CO Line Number

Specifies the feature number used to retrieve a held trunk call from a different extension by specifying the held
trunk number.

Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)

422 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Feature Guide References

2.13.1 Call Hold

Door Open
Specifies the feature number used to open a door.

Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)

PC Programming Manual References

13.1 PBX Configuration—[5-1] Optional Device—Doorphone

Feature Guide References

2.18.2 Door Open

External Relay Access

Specifies the feature number used to activate a relay.

Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)

PC Programming Manual References

13.4 PBX Configuration—[5-4] Optional Device—External Relay

Feature Guide References

2.18.4 External Relay Control

External Feature Access

Specifies the feature number used to access the features of a host PBX or the telephone company.

Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)

Feature Guide References

2.11.7 External Feature Access (EFA)

SIP Refer(Blind)
Specifies the feature number used to perform a blind transfer from a SIP extension.

Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)

PC Programming Manual 423

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Feature Guide References

5.2.2 SIP (Session Initiation Protocol) Extension

ISDN Hold
Specifies the feature number used to hold a call using the ISDN service of the telephone company, instead of
the PBX feature.

Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)

Feature Guide References

4.1.2.6 Call Hold (HOLD)—by ISDN

COLR Set / Cancel

Specifies the feature number used to set or cancel COLR, which suppresses the presentation of the called
party’s number to the caller.

Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)

PC Programming Manual References

9.26 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - BRI Port—Supplementary Service—
COLP, CLIR, COLR, CNIP, CONP, CNIR, CONR, CF (Rerouting), CT, CCBS, AOC-D, AOC-E, 3PTY
9.27 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - PRI Port—Supplementary Service—
COLP, CLIR, COLR, CNIP, CONP, CNIR, CONR, CF (Rerouting), CT, CCBS, AOC-D, AOC-E, E911, 3PTY

Feature Guide References

4.1.2.2 Calling/Connected Line Identification Presentation (CLIP/COLP)
4.3.4.2 Calling/Connected Line Identification Presentation (CLIP/COLP) and Calling/Connected Name
Identification Presentation (CNIP/CONP)—by QSIG

CLIR Set / Cancel

Specifies the feature number used to set or cancel CLIR, which suppresses the presentation of the caller’s
number to the called party.

Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)

PC Programming Manual References

9.26 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - BRI Port—Supplementary Service—
COLP, CLIR, COLR, CNIP, CONP, CNIR, CONR, CF (Rerouting), CT, CCBS, AOC-D, AOC-E, 3PTY
9.27 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - PRI Port—Supplementary Service—
COLP, CLIR, COLR, CNIP, CONP, CNIR, CONR, CF (Rerouting), CT, CCBS, AOC-D, AOC-E, E911, 3PTY

424 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Feature Guide References

4.1.2.2 Calling/Connected Line Identification Presentation (CLIP/COLP)
4.3.4.2 Calling/Connected Line Identification Presentation (CLIP/COLP) and Calling/Connected Name
Identification Presentation (CNIP/CONP)—by QSIG

Switch CLIP of CO Line / Extension

Specifies the feature number used to send either the CLIP number of the trunk in use (subscriber’s number)
or the extension to the network.

Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)

PC Programming Manual References

9.26 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - BRI Port—ISDN CO— Subscriber
Number
9.27 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - PRI Port—CO Setting— Subscriber
Number
12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings—CLIP— CLIP ID
12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings—CLIP— CLIP ID

Feature Guide References

4.1.2.2 Calling/Connected Line Identification Presentation (CLIP/COLP)

MCID
Specifies the feature number used to ask the telephone company to trace a malicious call. This feature can
be used during a call or while hearing a reorder tone after the caller hangs up.

Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)

Feature Guide References

4.1.2.9 Malicious Call Identification (MCID)

ISDN-FWD (MSN) Set / Cancel / Confirm

Specifies the feature number used to set or cancel the FWD of incoming ISDN calls to an outside party using
the ISDN service of the telephone company (instead of the PBX), or confirm the FWD setting.
Extension users can set the FWD destination to the network on an MSN basis.

Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)

Feature Guide References

4.1.2.4 Call Forwarding (CF)—by ISDN (P-MP)
4.1.2.5 Call Forwarding (CF)—by ISDN (P-P)

PC Programming Manual 425

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Message Waiting Set / Cancel / Call Back

Specifies the feature number used to set or cancel Message Waiting, or call back the caller.

Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)

Feature Guide References

2.20.1 Message Waiting

FWD/DND Set / Cancel: Call from CO & Extension

Specifies the feature number used to set or cancel FWD/DND for incoming trunk and intercom calls.

Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)

PC Programming Manual References

12.1.2 PBX Configuration—[4-1-2] Extension—Wired Extension—FWD/DND
12.2.2 PBX Configuration—[4-2-2] Extension—Portable Station—FWD/DND

Feature Guide References

2.3 Call Forwarding (FWD)/Do Not Disturb (DND) Features

FWD/DND Set / Cancel: Call from CO

Specifies the feature number used to set or cancel FWD/DND for incoming trunk calls.

Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)

PC Programming Manual References

12.1.2 PBX Configuration—[4-1-2] Extension—Wired Extension—FWD/DND
12.2.2 PBX Configuration—[4-2-2] Extension—Portable Station—FWD/DND

Feature Guide References

2.3 Call Forwarding (FWD)/Do Not Disturb (DND) Features

FWD/DND Set / Cancel: Call from Extension

Specifies the feature number used to set or cancel FWD/DND for incoming intercom calls.

Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)

426 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

PC Programming Manual References

12.1.2 PBX Configuration—[4-1-2] Extension—Wired Extension—FWD/DND
12.2.2 PBX Configuration—[4-2-2] Extension—Portable Station—FWD/DND

Feature Guide References

2.3 Call Forwarding (FWD)/Do Not Disturb (DND) Features

FWD No Answer Timer Set

Specifies the feature number used to set the length of time before a call is forwarded.

Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)

PC Programming Manual References

12.1.2 PBX Configuration—[4-1-2] Extension—Wired Extension—FWD/DND
12.2.2 PBX Configuration—[4-2-2] Extension—Portable Station—FWD/DND

Feature Guide References

2.3.2 Call Forwarding (FWD)

Group FWD Set / Cancel: Call from CO & Extension

Specifies the feature number used to set or cancel FWD for incoming trunk and intercom calls to an incoming
call distribution group.

Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)

PC Programming Manual References

11.5.1 PBX Configuration—[3-5-1] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings

Feature Guide References

2.3.1 Call Forwarding (FWD)/Do Not Disturb (DND)—SUMMARY

Group FWD Set / Cancel: Call from CO

Specifies the feature number used to set or cancel FWD for incoming trunk calls to an incoming call distribution
group.

Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)

PC Programming Manual References

11.5.1 PBX Configuration—[3-5-1] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings

PC Programming Manual 427

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Feature Guide References

2.3.1 Call Forwarding (FWD)/Do Not Disturb (DND)—SUMMARY

Group FWD Set / Cancel: Call from Extension

Specifies the feature number used to set or cancel FWD for incoming intercom calls to an incoming call
distribution group.

Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)

PC Programming Manual References

11.5.1 PBX Configuration—[3-5-1] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings

Feature Guide References

2.3.1 Call Forwarding (FWD)/Do Not Disturb (DND)—SUMMARY

Call Pickup Deny Set / Cancel

Specifies the feature number used to set or cancel Call Pickup Deny (i.e., preventing other extensions from
picking up calls to your extension).

Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)

Feature Guide References

2.4.3 Call Pickup

Paging Deny Set / Cancel

Specifies the feature number used to set or cancel Paging Deny (i.e., preventing other extensions from paging
your extension).

Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)

PC Programming Manual References

11.4 PBX Configuration—[3-4] Group—Paging Group

Feature Guide References

2.17.1 Paging

Walking Extension
Specifies the feature number used to use the same extension settings at a new extension.

428 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)

Feature Guide References

2.24.3 Walking Extension Features

Data Line Security Set / Cancel

Specifies the feature number used to set or cancel Data Line Security (i.e., preventing signals from other
extensions during data transmission).

Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)

Feature Guide References

2.11.5 Data Line Security

Manual Call Waiting for Extension Call

Specifies the feature number used to set or change the method of receiving a Call Waiting notification from an
extension.

Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)

Feature Guide References

2.1.3.3 Call Waiting

Automatic Call Waiting

Specifies the feature number used to set or cancel a Call Waiting notification from a trunk, doorphone, or a
call via an incoming call distribution group.

Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)

Feature Guide References

2.1.3.3 Call Waiting

Executive Override Deny Set / Cancel

Specifies the feature number used to set or cancel Executive Busy Override (i.e., preventing other extensions
from joining your conversation).

Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)

PC Programming Manual 429

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

PC Programming Manual References

10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System—Class of Service—COS Settings—Executive— Executive Busy
Override
10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System—Class of Service—COS Settings—Executive— Executive Busy
Override Deny

Feature Guide References

2.10.2 Executive Busy Override

Not Ready (Manual Wrap-up) Mode On / Off

Specifies the feature number used to enter or leave Not Ready mode.

Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)

PC Programming Manual References

11.5.1 PBX Configuration—[3-5-1] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings

Feature Guide References

2.2.2.8 Log-in/Log-out

Log-in / Log-out
Specifies the feature number used to join or leave an incoming call distribution group.

Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)

PC Programming Manual References

11.5.1 PBX Configuration—[3-5-1] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings

Feature Guide References

2.2.2.8 Log-in/Log-out

Incoming Call Queue Monitor

Specifies the feature number, available only for extensions assigned as a supervisor, used to monitor the status
of an incoming call distribution group with the extension display.

Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)

PC Programming Manual References

11.5.1 PBX Configuration—[3-5-1] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group
Settings—Miscellaneous— Supervisor Extension Number

430 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Feature Guide References

2.2.2.9 Supervisory Feature

Hot Line (Pickup Dial) Program Set / Cancel

Specifies the feature number used to set/cancel the Hot Line feature, or programme the number to be
automatically dialled.

Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)

PC Programming Manual References

10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3] System—Timers & Counters—Dial / IRNA / Recall / Tone— Dial—Hot Line
(Pickup Dial) Start (s)

Feature Guide References

2.6.6 Hot Line

Absent Message Set / Cancel

Specifies the feature number used to set or cancel the display of an Absent Message.

Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)

Feature Guide References

2.20.2 Absent Message

BGM Set / Cancel

Specifies the feature number used to set or cancel the BGM heard through the telephone speaker while
on-hook.

Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)

PC Programming Manual References

10.2 PBX Configuration—[2-2] System—Operator & BGM

Feature Guide References

2.30.1 Background Music (BGM)

Remote Timed Reminder (Remote Wakeup Call)

Specifies the feature number used to set or cancel a Timed Reminder remotely (Wake-up Call).

PC Programming Manual 431

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)

Feature Guide References

2.24.4 Timed Reminder

Timed Reminder Set / Cancel

Specifies the feature number used to set or cancel a Timed Reminder.

Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)

Feature Guide References

2.24.4 Timed Reminder

Printing Message
Specifies the feature number used to select a Printing Message to be output on SMDR.

Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)

PC Programming Manual References

14.2 PBX Configuration—[6-2] Feature—Hotel & Charge—Main— SMDR for External Hotel Application
2—Printing Message 1–8

Feature Guide References

2.22.2 Printing Message

Extension Dial Lock Set / Cancel

Specifies the feature number used to lock or unlock an extension to make certain trunk calls and change the
forwarding destination, using the Extension Dial Lock feature.

Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)

Feature Guide References

2.7.3 Extension Dial Lock

Time Service (Day / Lunch / Break / Night) Switch

Specifies the feature number, available for manager extensions, used to change the time mode manually.

432 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)

PC Programming Manual References

10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System—Class of Service—COS Settings—Manager— Time Service
Switch
10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System—Class of Service—COS Settings—Manager— Manager

Feature Guide References

5.1.4 Time Service

Remote Extension Dial Lock Off

Specifies the feature number, available for manager extensions, used to unlock other extensions using the
Extension Dial Lock feature.

Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)

PC Programming Manual References

10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System—Class of Service—COS Settings—Manager— Manager

Feature Guide References

2.7.3 Extension Dial Lock

Remote Extension Dial Lock On

Specifies the feature number, available for manager extensions, used to lock other extensions using the
Extension Dial Lock feature.

Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)

PC Programming Manual References

10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System—Class of Service—COS Settings—Manager— Manager

Feature Guide References

2.7.3 Extension Dial Lock

Extension Feature Clear

Specifies the feature number used to reset certain features of an extension to the default values.

Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)

PC Programming Manual 433

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Feature Guide References

2.24.2 Extension Feature Clear

Extension PIN Set / Cancel

Specifies the feature number used to set a PIN for an extension.

Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)

Feature Guide References

2.24.1 Extension Personal Identification Number (PIN)

Dial Information (CTI)

Specifies the feature number used to send dial information to the CTI feature instead of the PBX.

Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)

Feature Guide References

2.26.1 Computer Telephony Integration (CTI)

Conference Group Call Operation

Specifies the feature number used to make a conference group call.

Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)

PC Programming Manual References

10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3] System—Timers & Counters—Miscellaneous— Conference Group
Call—Ring Duration (s)
10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System—Class of Service—COS Settings—Miscellaneous— Conference
Group Call Operation
11.9 PBX Configuration—[3-9] Group—Conference Group

Feature Guide References

2.15.1 Conference Group Call

Centralised BLF Monitor Cancel

Specifies the feature number used to cancel monitoring of an extension using an NDSS button.

Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)

434 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

PC Programming Manual References

17.1 PBX Configuration—[9-1] Private Network—TIE Table

Feature Guide References

4.3.5.1 Network Direct Station Selection (NDSS)

Busy Out Cancel

Specifies the feature number used to cancel the Busy Out status of an analogue trunk.

Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)

PC Programming Manual References

10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options—Option 5— Busy Out—Busy Out for Analogue
CO

Feature Guide References

2.5.4.6 Trunk Busy Out

Simplified Voice Message Access

Specifies the feature number used to access the SVM feature to record, listen to and delete messages.

Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)

PC Programming Manual References

12.1.8 PBX Configuration—[4-1-8] Extension—Wired Extension—Simplified Voice Message
12.2.6 PBX Configuration—[4-2-6] Extension—Portable Station—Simplified Voice Message

Feature Guide References

2.16.3 Built-in Simplified Voice Message (SVM)

Other PBX Extension

Other PBX extension numbers can be used to easily call extensions connected to PBXs at different locations
in a TIE line network. The leading numbers of all PBXs in the network that will be called should be entered in
this table. A maximum of 16 leading numbers can be programmed.

Dial
Specifies the leading extension number of the other PBX.

Value Range
Max. 3 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)

PC Programming Manual 435

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

PC Programming Manual References

17.1 PBX Configuration—[9-1] Private Network—TIE Table— Leading Number

Feature Guide References

4.3.1 TIE Line Service

KX-T7710
The settings of the MESSAGE key and One-touch keys on the KX-T7710 can be programmed.

Note
• This tab is for programming extensions connected to Expansion Units. For information about setting
up Expansion Units, see 9.33 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Expansion Unit1/
Expansion Unit2/Expansion Unit3.
• For further information about programming for KX-T7710 phones, refer to the 2.6.7 KX-T7710
One-touch Dialling in the Feature Guide.

Dial
Indicates the DTMF tone dial required by the PBX to recognise it and dial the pre-programmed number for
each key (reference only).

Value Range
B: For MESSAGE Key
A1: For One-touch Dial 01 Key
A2: For One-touch Dial 02 Key
A3: For One-touch Dial 03 Key
A4: For One-touch Dial 04 Key
A5: For One-touch Dial 05 Key
A6: For One-touch Dial 06 Key
A7: For One-touch Dial 07 Key
A8: For One-touch Dial 08 Key

Message Key—Phone Number

Specifies the feature number or telephone number dialled when the MESSAGE key on the KX-T7710 is
pressed. By default, this is set to the feature number used to call back a caller who left a message waiting
indication, Message Waiting Set / Cancel / Call Back.
This is available only when the position of the Mode switch lever on the KX-T7710 is set to "PBX".

Value Range
Max. 32 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, #, T [Transfer], [ ] [Secret], P [Pause], and F [Flash])

PC Programming Manual References

10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main—Features— Message Waiting Set /
Cancel / Call Back

One-touch Dial 01–08—Phone Number

Specifies the number dialled when a one-touch key on the KX-T7710 is pressed.

436 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

This is available only when the position of the Mode switch lever on the KX-T7710 is set to "PBX".

Value Range
Max. 32 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, #, T [Transfer], [ ] [Secret], P [Pause], and F [Flash])

PC Programming Manual 437

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
10.6.2 PBX Configuration—[2-6-2] System—Numbering Plan—Quick Dial
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

10.6.2 PBX Configuration—[2-6-2] System—Numbering

Plan—Quick Dial
Quick Dialling numbers are used to call extensions or outside parties, or access certain features without having
to dial their full numbers. It is possible to register Quick Dialling numbers that overlap with other registered
numbers (refer to "Automatic Rerouting of VoIP Calls to Public Trunks" in the Feature Guide).
For more information on flexible numbering, see "5.5.7 Flexible Numbering/Fixed Numbering" in the Feature
Guide.

Use Quick Dial for CO rerouting during "Break" Mode.

Specifies whether Quick Dialling can be used to make a trunk call via an extension registered at another site
in a One-look network, when the Time Service mode is Break mode.

Value Range
On, Off

Feature Guide References

2.6.5 Quick Dialling
5.1.4 Time Service

Use quick dial for rerouting to public CO when TIE line does not work.
Specifies whether Quick Dialling can be used for rerouting to a public trunk when a TIE line is not operating.

Value Range
On, Off

Feature Guide References

2.6.5 Quick Dialling

Dial
Specifies the Quick Dialling number.

Value Range
1–4000: Max. 8 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)

Feature Guide References

2.6.5 Quick Dialling
4.3.2 Voice over Internet Protocol (VoIP) Network
5.5.7 Flexible Numbering/Fixed Numbering

Phone Number
Specifies the number to be dialled when the corresponding Quick Dialling number is used.

438 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 10.6.2 PBX Configuration—[2-6-2] System—Numbering Plan—Quick Dial
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Value Range
Max. 32 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, #, T [Transfer], [ ] [Secret], P [Pause], and F [Flash])

Feature Guide References

2.6.5 Quick Dialling
4.3.2 Voice over Internet Protocol (VoIP) Network
5.5.7 Flexible Numbering/Fixed Numbering

PC Programming Manual 439

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
10.6.3 PBX Configuration—[2-6-3] System—Numbering Plan—B/NA DND Call Feature
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

10.6.3 PBX Configuration—[2-6-3] System—Numbering Plan—B/

NA DND Call Feature
Feature numbers used to access various PBX features can be programmed. The following features are
available while hearing a busy, DND, or ringback tone. Each feature must have a unique feature number.
For more information on flexible numbering, see "5.5.7 Flexible Numbering/Fixed Numbering" in the Feature
Guide.

BSS / OHCA / Whisper OHCA / DND Override

Specifies the feature number used to notify a busy extension of a second call by Call Waiting, or call an
extension in DND mode.

Value Range
1 digit (0–9, *, or #)

PC Programming Manual References

12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 2— Manual
C. Waiting for Extension Call
12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 2— Manual
C. Waiting for Extension Call

Feature Guide References

2.1.3.3 Call Waiting
2.3.3 Do Not Disturb (DND)
2.10.4.2 Call Waiting Tone
2.10.4.4 Whisper OHCA

Executive Busy Override

Specifies the feature number used to interrupt an existing call to establish a three-party conference call.

Value Range
1 digit (0–9, *, or #)

PC Programming Manual References

10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System—Class of Service—COS Settings—Executive— Executive Busy
Override
12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 3— Executive
Override Deny
12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 3— Executive
Override Deny

Feature Guide References

2.10.2 Executive Busy Override

440 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 10.6.3 PBX Configuration—[2-6-3] System—Numbering Plan—B/NA DND Call Feature
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Alternate Calling - Ring / Voice

Specifies the feature number used to allow a caller to change the called extension’s preset call receiving
method to ring tone or voice.

Value Range
1 digit (0–9, *, or #)

Feature Guide References

2.5.3 Intercom Call

Message Waiting Set

Specifies the feature number used to leave a Message Waiting notification.

Value Range
1 digit (0–9, *, or #)

Feature Guide References

2.20.1 Message Waiting

Call Monitor
Specifies the feature number used to listen to a busy extension’s conversation.

Value Range
1 digit (0–9, *, or #)

PC Programming Manual References

10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System—Class of Service—COS Settings—Executive— Call Monitor
12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 3— Executive
Override Deny
12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 3— Executive
Override Deny

Feature Guide References

2.10.3 Call Monitor

Automatic Callback Busy

Specifies the feature number used to reserve a busy line and receive callback ringing when the line becomes
idle.

Value Range
1 digit (0–9, *, or #)

Feature Guide References

2.10.1 Automatic Callback Busy (Camp-on)

PC Programming Manual 441

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
10.6.3 PBX Configuration—[2-6-3] System—Numbering Plan—B/NA DND Call Feature
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

BSS / OHCA / Whisper OHCA / DND Override-2

Specifies the feature number used to notify a busy extension of a second call by Call Waiting, or call an
extension in DND mode. This is the same setting as BSS / OHCA / Whisper OHCA / DND Override on
this screen, and can be used to provide two methods of activating the specified features. This can be useful,
for example, if users prefer to use a separate feature number to activate DND Override.

Value Range
1 digit (0–9, *, or #)

PC Programming Manual References

12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 2— Manual
C. Waiting for Extension Call
12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 2— Manual
C. Waiting for Extension Call

Feature Guide References

2.1.3.3 Call Waiting
2.3.3 Do Not Disturb (DND)
2.10.4.2 Call Waiting Tone
2.10.4.4 Whisper OHCA

442 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System—Class of Service—COS Settings
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

10.7 PBX Configuration—[2-7] System—Class of

Service

10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System—Class of

Service—COS Settings
Each extension, doorphone port, incoming call distribution group, and trunk group is assigned a Class of
Service (COS). Certain features can be programmed to behave differently depending on the COS. A maximum
of 64 COS levels can be programmed.

TRS
Restrictions to features related to making trunk calls can be programmed for each COS.

COS Name
Specifies the name of the COS.

Value Range
Max. 20 characters

Feature Guide References

5.1.1 Class of Service (COS)

TRS Level—Day, Lunch, Break, Night

Specifies the Toll Restriction (TRS)/Call Barring (Barring) level for making trunk calls in each time mode.

Value Range
1: Allows all trunk calls
2–6: Restricts trunk calls according to the combination of the Denied and Exception Code Tables
7: Restricts all trunk calls

PC Programming Manual References

10.4 PBX Configuration—[2-4] System—Week Table
11.1.1 PBX Configuration—[3-1-1] Group—Trunk Group—TRG Settings—Main— COS
11.5.1 PBX Configuration—[3-5-1] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings—Main—
COS
12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Main— COS
12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings—Main— COS
13.1 PBX Configuration—[5-1] Optional Device—Doorphone— COS
15.1 PBX Configuration—[7-1] TRS—Denied Code
15.2 PBX Configuration—[7-2] TRS—Exception Code

Feature Guide References

2.7.1 Toll Restriction (TRS)/Call Barring (Barring)

PC Programming Manual 443

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System—Class of Service—COS Settings
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

TRS Level on Extension Lock

Specifies the TRS/Barring level for making trunk calls when an extension is locked using the Extension Dial
Lock feature.

Value Range
1: Allows all trunk calls
2–6: Restricts trunk calls according to the combination of the Denied and Exception Code Tables
7: Restricts all trunk calls

PC Programming Manual References

12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Main— COS
12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings—Main— COS
15.1 PBX Configuration—[7-1] TRS—Denied Code
15.2 PBX Configuration—[7-2] TRS—Exception Code

Feature Guide References

2.7.3 Extension Dial Lock

TRS Level for System Speed Dialling

Specifies the TRS/Barring level for making a trunk call using System Speed Dialling numbers, which overrides
the TRS/Barring set for the current time mode.

Value Range
1: Allows all trunk calls
2–6: Restricts trunk calls according to the combination of the Denied and Exception Code Tables
7: Restricts all trunk calls

PC Programming Manual References

12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Main— COS
12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings—Main— COS
14.1 PBX Configuration—[6-1] Feature—System Speed Dial
15.5 PBX Configuration—[7-5] TRS—Miscellaneous— TRS Override by System Speed Dialling

Feature Guide References

2.6.4 Speed Dialling—Personal/System
2.7.1 Toll Restriction (TRS)/Call Barring (Barring)

CO & SMDR
COS Name
Specifies the name of the COS.

Value Range
Max. 20 characters

444 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System—Class of Service—COS Settings
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Feature Guide References

5.1.1 Class of Service (COS)

Extension-CO Line Call Duration Limit

Enables the extension-to-trunk call duration feature. The maximum call duration can be set using
Extension-CO Duration Time (*60s) on 11.1.1 PBX Configuration—[3-1-1] Group—Trunk Group—TRG
Settings.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

PC Programming Manual References

10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options—Option 2— Extension - CO Call Limitation—For
Incoming Call
11.1.1 PBX Configuration—[3-1-1] Group—Trunk Group—TRG Settings—Main— COS
12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Main— COS
12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings—Main— COS

Feature Guide References

2.11.8 Trunk Call Limitation

Transfer to CO
Enables the transferring of calls to trunks.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

PC Programming Manual References

12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Main— COS
12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings—Main— COS

Feature Guide References

2.12.1 Call Transfer

Call Forward to CO
Enables the forwarding of calls to trunks.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

PC Programming Manual References

12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Main— COS
12.1.2 PBX Configuration—[4-1-2] Extension—Wired Extension—FWD/DND
12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings—Main— COS

PC Programming Manual 445

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System—Class of Service—COS Settings
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

12.2.2 PBX Configuration—[4-2-2] Extension—Portable Station—FWD/DND

Feature Guide References

2.3.2 Call Forwarding (FWD)

Account Code Mode

Specifies whether the entry of an account code is optional or mandatory when making a trunk call.

Value Range
Option, Forced

PC Programming Manual References

12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Main— COS
12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings—Main— COS

Feature Guide References

2.5.4.3 Account Code Entry

CF (MSN)
Enables forwarding of ISDN calls to an outside party using the ISDN service of the telephone company, instead
of the PBX, on an MSN basis.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

Feature Guide References

4.1.2.4 Call Forwarding (CF)—by ISDN (P-MP)
4.1.2.5 Call Forwarding (CF)—by ISDN (P-P)

Outgoing CO Call Printout (SMDR)

Enables the automatic recording of information about outgoing trunk calls on SMDR.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

PC Programming Manual References

12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Main— COS
12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings—Main— COS
19.1 PBX Configuration—[11-1] Maintenance—Main

Feature Guide References

2.22.1.1 Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR)

446 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System—Class of Service—COS Settings
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Assistant
COS Name
Specifies the name of the COS.

Value Range
Max. 20 characters

Feature Guide References

5.1.1 Class of Service (COS)

Call Pickup by DSS

Enables using a DSS button to pick up a call to a specified extension.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

PC Programming Manual References

12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Main— COS
12.1.4 PBX Configuration—[4-1-4] Extension—Wired Extension—Flexible Button
12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings—Main— COS
12.2.3 PBX Configuration—[4-2-3] Extension—Portable Station—Flexible Button

Feature Guide References

2.4.3 Call Pickup

DND Override
Enables making a call to an extension in DND mode by entering the feature number.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

PC Programming Manual References

12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Main— COS
12.1.2 PBX Configuration—[4-1-2] Extension—Wired Extension—FWD/DND
12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings—Main— COS
12.2.2 PBX Configuration—[4-2-2] Extension—Portable Station—FWD/DND

Feature Guide References

2.3.3 Do Not Disturb (DND)

OHCA / Whisper OHCA

Enables using OHCA/Whisper OHCA as a method of second call notification by entering the feature number.

PC Programming Manual 447

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System—Class of Service—COS Settings
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Value Range
Disable, Enable

PC Programming Manual References

12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Main— COS
12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings—Main— COS

Feature Guide References

2.10.4 Second Call Notification to Busy Extension
2.10.4.4 Whisper OHCA

Transfer to busy Extension w/o BSS Operation

Enables a transferred call to be queued when the transfer destination is busy.

Value Range
Disable: The call is not transferred. (If the transfer destination has enabled the call waiting notification feature,
it is possible to inform the destination about the call transfer.)
Enable: The transferred call is queued for the time period specified in Recall—Transfer Recall (s) in
10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3] System—Timers & Counters.

PC Programming Manual References

10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3] System—Timers & Counters— Recall—Transfer Recall (s)

Feature Guide References

2.12.1 Call Transfer

Automatic Answer (Caller)

Enables a caller to have calls automatically answered when the destination has set Hands-free Answerback.

Value Range
Disable: Even if the destination has set Hands-free Answerback, the call will not be automatically answered.
Enable: The call will be automatically answered.

Feature Guide References

2.4.4 Hands-free Answerback

Executive
COS Name
Specifies the name of the COS.

Value Range
Max. 20 characters

448 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System—Class of Service—COS Settings
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Feature Guide References

5.1.1 Class of Service (COS)

Call Monitor
Enables listening to a busy extension’s conversation.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

PC Programming Manual References

12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Main— COS
12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings—Main— COS

Feature Guide References

2.10.3 Call Monitor

Executive Busy Override

Enables interrupting an existing call to establish a three-party conference call.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

PC Programming Manual References

12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Main— COS
12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings—Main— COS

Feature Guide References

2.10.2 Executive Busy Override

Executive Busy Override Deny

Enables preventing other extensions from interrupting calls.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

PC Programming Manual References

12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Main— COS
12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings—Main— COS

Feature Guide References

5.1.1 Class of Service (COS)

PC Programming Manual 449

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System—Class of Service—COS Settings
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Manager
COS Name
Specifies the name of the COS.

Value Range
Max. 20 characters

Feature Guide References

5.1.1 Class of Service (COS)

Group Forward Set

Enables setting call forwarding for calls to an incoming call distribution group.

Value Range
Disable: An extension cannot set call forwarding for any group.
Enable-All: An extension can set call forwarding for all groups.
Enable-Group: An extension can only set call forwarding for the group to which the extension belongs.

PC Programming Manual References

11.5.1.1 PBX Configuration—[3-5-1] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings—Member
List
12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Main— COS
12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings—Main— COS

Feature Guide References

2.3.2 Call Forwarding (FWD)

PT Programming Mode Level

Specifies the level of authorisation for performing PT programming.

Value Range
Disable: A PT user cannot perform any programming.
PROG Only: A PT user can perform only personal programming.
PROG **/*#: A PT user can perform Administrator level and User level programming.

PC Programming Manual References

12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Main— COS
12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings—Main— COS

Feature Guide References

5.5.3 PT Programming

450 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System—Class of Service—COS Settings
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Manager
Specifies the authorisation to use manager features.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

PC Programming Manual References

12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Main— COS
12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings—Main— COS

Feature Guide References

5.1.6 Manager Features

Time Service Switch

Enables manual switching of time modes.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

PC Programming Manual References

10.4 PBX Configuration—[2-4] System—Week Table
12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Main— COS
12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings—Main— COS

Feature Guide References

5.1.4 Time Service

PDN/SDN
An SDN button allows a PT user to see the current status of the corresponding PDN extension, and to pick up
or transfer calls to that extension easily. The settings here control how SDN buttons operate for extensions at
each COS level.

COS Name
Specifies the name of the COS.

Value Range
Max. 20 characters

Feature Guide References

5.1.1 Class of Service (COS)

PC Programming Manual 451

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System—Class of Service—COS Settings
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

SDN Key Mode

Selects what happens when an extension user presses an SDN button while on hook.

Value Range
Enhanced DSS: The registered (owner) extension is called.
Standard SDN: A dial tone is heard.

Feature Guide References

2.9.1 Primary Directory Number (PDN)/Secondary Directory Number (SDN) Extension

Making call by COS of SDN key’s owner

Selects whether an extension that uses an SDN button to make calls is given the COS of the SDN button’s
registered (owner) extension.
This setting is only available when SDN Key Mode above is set to "Standard SDN".

Value Range
Disable, Enable

PC Programming Manual References

10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System—Class of Service—COS Settings—PDN/SDN— COS Name

Feature Guide References

2.9.1 Primary Directory Number (PDN)/Secondary Directory Number (SDN) Extension

SDN Key Assignment by PT Program

Selects whether PT users can create SDN buttons on their own extensions using PT programming.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

Feature Guide References

2.9.1 Primary Directory Number (PDN)/Secondary Directory Number (SDN) Extension

Optional Device & Other Extensions

COS Name
Specifies the name of the COS.

Value Range
Max. 20 characters

Feature Guide References

5.1.1 Class of Service (COS)

452 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System—Class of Service—COS Settings
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Door Unlock
Enables using the door opener feature.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

PC Programming Manual References

12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Main— COS
12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings—Main— COS

Feature Guide References

2.18.2 Door Open

External Relay Access

Enables access to external relays.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

PC Programming Manual References

13.4 PBX Configuration—[5-4] Optional Device—External Relay

Feature Guide References

2.18.4 External Relay Control

Accept the Call from DISA

Enables reception of calls from DISA.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

PC Programming Manual References

12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Main— COS
12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings—Main— COS
13.3.2 PBX Configuration—[5-3-2] Optional Device—Voice Message—DISA Message

Feature Guide References

2.16.1 Direct Inward System Access (DISA)

Remote Operation by Other Extension

Allows the Walking COS feature to be used from a remote location (inside the PBX, or outside the PBX using
DISA).

PC Programming Manual 453

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System—Class of Service—COS Settings
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Value Range
Allow, Deny

PC Programming Manual References

12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Main— COS
12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings—Main— COS

Feature Guide References

2.7.5 Walking COS

Accept Wireless XDP Parallel Mode Set by PS

Allows Wireless XDP Parallel Mode to be set by a PS.

Value Range
Allow, Deny

PC Programming Manual References

12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Main— COS

Feature Guide References

5.2.4.5 Wireless XDP Parallel Mode

CA
COS Name
Specifies the name of the COS.

Value Range
Max. 20 characters

Feature Guide References

5.1.1 Class of Service (COS)

CA Chat
Enables the chat feature when using Communication Assistant (CA) Client.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

PC Programming Manual References

10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System—Class of Service—COS Settings—CA— CA ICD Group Log
Out

454 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System—Class of Service—COS Settings
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Feature Guide References

2.26.2 CA (Communication Assistant)

CA ICD Group Log Out

Enables logging out of ICD groups when using Communication Assistant (CA) Client.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

PC Programming Manual References

10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System—Class of Service—COS Settings—CA— CA Chat

Feature Guide References

2.26.2 CA (Communication Assistant)

Miscellaneous
COS Name
Specifies the name of the COS.

Value Range
Max. 20 characters

Feature Guide References

5.1.1 Class of Service (COS)

Conference Group Call Operation

Enables making conference group calls.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

PC Programming Manual References

10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3] System—Timers & Counters—Miscellaneous— Conference Group
Call—Ring Duration (s)
10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main—Features— Conference Group Call
Operation
11.9 PBX Configuration—[3-9] Group—Conference Group

Feature Guide References

2.15.1 Conference Group Call

PC Programming Manual 455

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System—Class of Service—COS Settings
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Accept a collect call (for Brazil)

Enables accepting collect calls.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

456 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 10.7.2 PBX Configuration—[2-7-2] System—Class of Service—External Call Block
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

10.7.2 PBX Configuration—[2-7-2] System—Class of

Service—External Call Block
Each COS can have different trunk groups available for making trunk calls, depending on the time mode (day/
lunch/break/night). Select the desired time mode from the list.

Outgoing Trunk Group 1–64

Specifies the available trunk groups.

Value Range
Block (blue), Non Block

PC Programming Manual References

10.4 PBX Configuration—[2-4] System—Week Table
12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings
12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings
18.1 PBX Configuration—[10-1] CO & Incoming Call—CO Line Settings

Feature Guide References

2.5.5.3 Trunk Access

PC Programming Manual 457

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
10.7.3 PBX Configuration—[2-7-3] System—Class of Service—Internal Call Block
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

10.7.3 PBX Configuration—[2-7-3] System—Class of

Service—Internal Call Block
Internal Call Block determines the restrictions placed on making intercom calls. The extensions, incoming call
distribution groups, and doorphones belonging to a certain COS can be programmed to not receive intercom
calls from those belonging to a certain COS.

COS Number of the Extension Which Receive the Call from Other Extension 1–
64
Specifies the combinations of COS levels for which intercom calls are blocked.

Value Range
Block (blue), Non Block

PC Programming Manual References

11.5.1 PBX Configuration—[3-5-1] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings—Main—
COS
12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Main— COS
12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings—Main— COS
13.1 PBX Configuration—[5-1] Optional Device—Doorphone— COS

Feature Guide References

2.1.2.2 Internal Call Block

458 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 10.8.1 PBX Configuration—[2-8-1] System—Ring Tone Patterns—Call from CO
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

10.8 PBX Configuration—[2-8] System—Ring Tone

Patterns

10.8.1 PBX Configuration—[2-8-1] System—Ring Tone

Patterns—Call from CO
Different ring tone patterns can be selected for incoming trunk calls depending on the trunk group that the calls
are received on. A maximum of 8 Ring Tone Pattern Tables can be programmed, and any pattern table can
be selected for use by an extension.

Ring Tone Pattern Plan 1–8

Specifies the ring tone pattern for incoming trunk calls.

Value Range
Single, Double, Triple, Option1, Option2

PC Programming Manual References

18.1 PBX Configuration—[10-1] CO & Incoming Call—CO Line Settings— Trunk Group Number
12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 1— Ring
Pattern Table
12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 1— Ring
Pattern Table

Feature Guide References

2.1.3.2 Ring Tone Pattern Selection

PC Programming Manual 459

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
10.8.2 PBX Configuration—[2-8-2] System—Ring Tone Patterns—Call from DOORPHONE
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

10.8.2 PBX Configuration—[2-8-2] System—Ring Tone

Patterns—Call from DOORPHONE
Different ring tone patterns can be selected for incoming doorphone calls depending on the doorphone port
that the calls originate from. A maximum of 8 Ring Tone Pattern Tables can be programmed, and any pattern
table can be selected for use by an extension.

Ring Tone Pattern Plan 1–8

Specifies the ring tone pattern for incoming doorphone calls.

Value Range
Single, Double, Triple, S-Double, Option 1, Option 2

PC Programming Manual References

12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 1— Ring
Pattern Table
12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 1— Ring
Pattern Table
13.1 PBX Configuration—[5-1] Optional Device—Doorphone

Feature Guide References

2.1.3.2 Ring Tone Pattern Selection
2.18.1 Doorphone Call

460 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 10.8.3 PBX Configuration—[2-8-3] System—Ring Tone Patterns—Call from Others
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

10.8.3 PBX Configuration—[2-8-3] System—Ring Tone

Patterns—Call from Others
Different ring tone patterns can be selected for incoming intercom calls and ringing triggered by certain PBX
features (Timed Reminder, Call Back, and Live Call Screening). A maximum of 8 Ring Tone Pattern Tables
can be programmed, and any pattern table can be selected for use by an extension.
For more information on ring tone patterns, see "2.1.3.2 Ring Tone Pattern Selection" in the Feature Guide.

Extension—Ring Tone Pattern Plan 1–8

Specifies the ring tone pattern for incoming intercom calls.

Value Range
Single, Double, Triple, Option 1, Option 2

PC Programming Manual References

12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 1— Ring
Pattern Table
12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 1— Ring
Pattern Table

Timed Reminder—Ring Tone Pattern Plan 1–8

Specifies the ring tone pattern for Timed Reminder alarms.

Value Range
Single, Double, Triple, Option 1, Option 2

PC Programming Manual References

12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 1— Ring
Pattern Table
12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 1— Ring
Pattern Table

Call Back—Ring Tone Pattern Plan 1–8

Specifies the ring tone pattern for callback ringing by Automatic Callback Busy.

Value Range
Single, Double, Triple, S-Double, Option 1, Option 2

PC Programming Manual References

12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 1— Ring
Pattern Table
12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 1— Ring
Pattern Table

PC Programming Manual 461

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
10.8.3 PBX Configuration—[2-8-3] System—Ring Tone Patterns—Call from Others
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Live Call Screening—Ring Tone Pattern Plan 1–8

Specifies the ring tone pattern for LCS warning tones.

Value Range
Single, Double, Triple, Option 1, Option 2

PC Programming Manual References

12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 1— Ring
Pattern Table
12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 1— Ring
Pattern Table

External Sensor—Ring Tone Pattern Plan 1–8

Specifies the ring tone pattern for calls from an external sensor.

Value Range
Single, Double, Triple, Option 1, Option 2

PC Programming Manual References

12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 1— Ring
Pattern Table
12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 1— Ring
Pattern Table

462 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System

Options
Various system settings can be programmed.

Option 1
PT LCD—Date Display
Selects the order that the month and date are shown on the displays of extensions.

Value Range
Date-Month, Month-Date

PT LCD—Time Display
Selects the time format shown on the displays of extensions. The time display format assigned here applies
when setting the Timed Reminder feature.

Value Range
12H, 24H

Feature Guide References

2.24.4 Timed Reminder

PT LCD—Password / PIN Display

Selects whether passwords and PINs (Personal Identification Number) are hidden or shown on the displays
of extensions while being entered.

Value Range
Hide, Display

Feature Guide References

2.24.1 Extension Personal Identification Number (PIN)

PT Fwd / DND—Fwd LED

Selects the light pattern of the FWD/DND button while the FWD feature is activated.

Value Range
On (Solid): Red on
Flash: Slow red flashing

PC Programming Manual References

12.1.2 PBX Configuration—[4-1-2] Extension—Wired Extension—FWD/DND
12.2.2 PBX Configuration—[4-2-2] Extension—Portable Station—FWD/DND

PC Programming Manual 463

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Feature Guide References

2.3.1 Call Forwarding (FWD)/Do Not Disturb (DND)—SUMMARY
2.21.3 LED Indication

PT Fwd / DND—DND LED

Selects the light pattern of the FWD/DND button while the DND feature is activated.

Value Range
On (Solid): Red on
Flash: Slow red flashing

PC Programming Manual References

12.1.2 PBX Configuration—[4-1-2] Extension—Wired Extension—FWD/DND
12.2.2 PBX Configuration—[4-2-2] Extension—Portable Station—FWD/DND

Feature Guide References

2.3.1 Call Forwarding (FWD)/Do Not Disturb (DND)—SUMMARY
2.21.3 LED Indication

PT Fwd / DND—Fwd/DND key mode when Idle

Selects the function of the FWD/DND button (fixed button) when it is pressed in idle status. (A FWD/DND button
customised on a flexible button is always in FWD/DND Cycle Switch mode, and the mode cannot be changed.)

Value Range
FWD/DND Setting Mode: Enter programming mode for the FWD/DND setting.
FWD/DND Cycle Switch: Switch the FWD on/DND on/Off mode instead of entering the programming mode
for the FWD/DND setting. (When there are separate FWD/DND settings for calls from trunks and calls from
extensions, mode switching cannot be performed.)

PC Programming Manual References

12.1.2 PBX Configuration—[4-1-2] Extension—Wired Extension—FWD/DND
12.2.2 PBX Configuration—[4-2-2] Extension—Portable Station—FWD/DND

Feature Guide References

2.3.1 Call Forwarding (FWD)/Do Not Disturb (DND)—SUMMARY

PT Fwd / DND—Paging to DND Extension

Specifies whether extensions can receive paging when in DND mode.

Value Range
Do Not Page, Page

PC Programming Manual References

12.1.2 PBX Configuration—[4-1-2] Extension—Wired Extension—FWD/DND

464 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

12.2.2 PBX Configuration—[4-2-2] Extension—Portable Station—FWD/DND

11.4 PBX Configuration—[3-4] Group—Paging Group

Feature Guide References

2.17.1 Paging

PT Fwd / DND—Extension Status of Mobile Integration (FWD NA to CO)

Specifies whether an extension is shown as idle or busy when it forwards a call to a trunk on no answer.

Value Range
Idle, Busy

PC Programming Manual References

12.1.2 PBX Configuration—[4-1-2] Extension—Wired Extension—FWD/DND
12.2.2 PBX Configuration—[4-2-2] Extension—Portable Station—FWD/DND

Feature Guide References

2.3.2 Call Forwarding (FWD)

PT Operation—Off Hook Monitor

Enables the use of Off-Hook Monitor with D-PTs and IP-PTs.

Value Range
Disable: The PT user’s voice is sent through the handsfree microphone. The other party’s voice is heard
through the hands-free speaker.
Enable: The PT user’s voice is sent through the handset microphone. The other party’s voice is heard through
both the hands-free speaker and the handset.

Feature Guide References

2.11.2 Off-hook Monitor

PT Operation—Privacy Release by SCO key

Selects the function of the S-CO button during a trunk call.

Value Range
Enable: Pressing the S-CO button activates the Privacy Release feature
Disable: Pressing the S-CO button switches the information shown on the PT display.

Feature Guide References

2.14.3 Privacy Release

PC Programming Manual 465

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

PT Operation—One-touch Busy Override by SCO key

Specifies whether calls in progress can be joined (Executive Busy Override) simply by pressing the S-CO
button.

Value Range
Enable, Disable

Feature Guide References

2.10.2 Executive Busy Override

PT Operation—JOG Dial Speed

Selects the speed at which items scroll on the display when the Jog Dial is used.

Value Range
Normal, High Speed

PT Operation—PT Ring Off Setting

Specifies whether incoming call ringing can be turned off at individual extensions. If disabled, users cannot
prevent incoming calls from ringing.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

Feature Guide References

2.1.3.2 Ring Tone Pattern Selection

PT Operation—Automatic Answer for Call from CO after

Specifies the number of times a PT in Hands-free Answerback mode will ring before a conversation is
established automatically when it receives a call from a trunk.

Value Range
No Ring, 1 Ring, 2 Rings, 3 Rings

Feature Guide References

2.4.4 Hands-free Answerback

PT Operation—Automatic Hold by ICM / CO / ICD Group Key

Selects whether calls are disconnected or held when an INTERCOM, PDN, CO, or ICD Group button is pressed
while having a conversation.

Value Range
Disable (Disconnect), Enable

466 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

PC Programming Manual References

12.1.4 PBX Configuration—[4-1-4] Extension—Wired Extension—Flexible Button
12.2.3 PBX Configuration—[4-2-3] Extension—Portable Station—Flexible Button

Feature Guide References

2.13.1 Call Hold

PT Operation—Hold key mode

Selects which extensions can retrieve a held call or a call that is transferred by Call Transfer without
Announcement feature.

Value Range
Hold: Any extension can retrieve a held call.
Exclusive Hold: Only the holding extension can retrieve a held call.

Feature Guide References

2.13.1 Call Hold

Option 2
Extension Clear—Call Waiting
Specifies whether the Call Waiting setting is cleared when Extension Feature Clear is performed.

Value Range
Clear, Do not clear

Feature Guide References

2.24.2 Extension Feature Clear

Extension Clear—Fwd/DND
Specifies whether the FWD/DND setting is cleared when Extension Feature Clear is performed.

Value Range
Clear, Do not clear

Feature Guide References

2.24.2 Extension Feature Clear

Extension Clear—Hot Line (Pick-up Dial)

Specifies whether the Hot Line setting is cleared when Extension Feature Clear is performed.

Value Range
Clear, Do not clear

PC Programming Manual 467

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Feature Guide References

2.24.2 Extension Feature Clear

CODEC—System CODEC
Selects the codec type for PSs.

Value Range
A-Law, Mu-Law

CODEC—Network CODEC
Selects the codec type for ISDN lines.

Value Range
A-Law, Mu-Law

CODEC—Priority Notification from SIP Network (for Incoming Call)

Specifies whether the priority notification from the SIP network is used in place of the PBX’s codec priority for
SIP trunks.

Value Range
Enable, Disable

ISDN en Bloc Dial—[#] as End of Dial for en Bloc mode

Specifies whether to automatically send "#" as an end code when dialling to an ISDN line; if used as the end
code, "#" will not be dialled out as part of a number even when the "#" key is pressed.

Value Range
Enable, Disable

PC Programming Manual References

9.26 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - BRI Port—ISDN CO— ISDN Outgoing
Call Type
9.27 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - PRI Port—CO Setting— ISDN Outgoing
Call Type

Feature Guide References

4.1.2.1 Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN)—SUMMARY

Redial—Automatic Redial when No Answer (ISDN)

Selects whether Automatic Redial to an ISDN line is performed when the called party does not answer within
a pre-programmed time period.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

468 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

PC Programming Manual References

10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3] System—Timers & Counters— Automatic Redial—Redial Call Ring Duration
(x10s)

Feature Guide References

2.6.3 Last Number Redial

Redial—Automatic Redial for Analogue CO

Selects whether Automatic Redial to an analogue trunk is performed when the called party does not answer
within a pre-programmed time period.

Value Range
Enable, Disable

PC Programming Manual References

10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3] System—Timers & Counters— Automatic Redial—Redial Call Ring Duration
(x10s)

Feature Guide References

2.6.3 Last Number Redial

Redial—Save Dial After Connection to Redial Memory

Specifies whether any digits dialled after the called party answers (for example, to access a specific extension
within another company) are also saved as part of the redial number.

Value Range
Enable, Disable

Feature Guide References

2.6.3 Last Number Redial

Redial—Call Log by Redial key

Enables display of the Outgoing Call Log on a display PT by pressing the REDIAL button while on hook.

Value Range
Enable, Disable

Feature Guide References

2.6.3 Last Number Redial

PC Programming Manual 469

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Extension - CO Call Limitation—For Incoming Call

Selects whether the time limit for extension-to-trunk calls applies to outgoing calls only or for both outgoing
and incoming calls. COS determines the use of this feature, and the length of the time limit can be assigned
on a trunk group basis.

Value Range
Enable, Disable

PC Programming Manual References

10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System—Class of Service—COS Settings—CO & SMDR— Extension-CO
Line Call Duration Limit
11.1.1 PBX Configuration—[3-1-1] Group—Trunk Group—TRG Settings—Main— Extension-CO Duration
Time (*60s)

Feature Guide References

2.11.8 Trunk Call Limitation

CO - CO Call Limitation—After Conference

Selects whether to allow a call between 2 outside destinations to continue after the originator of the conference
has left the conference.

Value Range
Enable: The call will be disconnected.
Disable: The call will continue.

Feature Guide References

2.14.2 Conference
4.3.5 QSIG Enhanced Features

Applying logical partitioning

Selects whether to use the logical partitioning feature.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

PC Programming Manual References

7.3.5 Utility—Log—Call Control Log
9.2.2 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property—Site—Main— Area ID for logical 
partition

Option 3
Confirmation Tone—Tone 1 : Called by Voice
Enables the PBX to send Confirmation Tone 1. Confirmation Tone 1 is heard from a PT when it receives a call
in voice-calling mode.

470 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Value Range
Disable, Enable

Feature Guide References

2.18.1 Doorphone Call
2.25.2 Confirmation Tone

Confirmation Tone—Tone 2 : Paged / Automatic Answer

Enables the PBX to send Confirmation Tone 2. Confirmation Tone 2 is heard from a PT when it receives a call
in Hands-free Answerback mode, or paging.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

Feature Guide References

2.4.4 Hands-free Answerback
2.17.1 Paging
2.25.2 Confirmation Tone

Confirmation Tone—Tone 3-1 : Start Talking after Making Call / Call from
DOORPHONE
Enables the PBX to send Confirmation Tone 3-1. Confirmation Tone 3-1 is heard from an extension when, for
example, it pages another extension, or from a doorphone when the doorphone button is pressed.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

Feature Guide References

2.25.2 Confirmation Tone

Confirmation Tone—Tone 3-2 : Start Talking after Answering Call

Enables the PBX to send Confirmation Tone 3-2. Confirmation Tone 3-2 is heard from an extension when
answering a call by, for example, the Call Pickup feature.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

Feature Guide References

2.25.2 Confirmation Tone

Confirmation Tone—Tone 4-1 : Start Conference

Enables the PBX to send Confirmation Tone 4-1. Confirmation Tone 4-1 is heard from an extension when a
new party joins a conference call.

PC Programming Manual 471

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Value Range
Disable, Enable

Feature Guide References

2.14.2 Conference
2.25.2 Confirmation Tone

Confirmation Tone—Tone 4-2 : Finish Conference

Enables the PBX to send Confirmation Tone 4-2. Confirmation Tone 4-2 is heard from an extension when a
party leaves a conference call.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

Feature Guide References

2.14.2 Conference
2.25.2 Confirmation Tone

Confirmation Tone—Tone 5 : Hold

Enables the PBX to send Confirmation Tone 5. Confirmation Tone 5 is heard from an extension when it holds
a call.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

Feature Guide References

2.25.2 Confirmation Tone

Dial Tone—Distinctive Dial Tone

Enables the PBX to send dial tones at different frequencies depending on the setting of the extension.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

Feature Guide References

2.25.1 Dial Tone

Dial Tone—Dial Tone for Extension

Selects the dial tone the PBX sends to extensions to inform about the features activated on them.

Value Range
Type A, Type B

472 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Feature Guide References

2.25.1 Dial Tone

Dial Tone—Dial Tone for ARS

Selects the dial tone the PBX (instead of the network) sends to the caller when a call is made using the ARS
feature, or ISDN En Bloc dialling.

Value Range
Type A, Type B

PC Programming Manual References

9.26 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - BRI Port
9.27 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - PRI Port
16.1 PBX Configuration—[8-1] ARS—System Setting

Feature Guide References

2.8.1 Automatic Route Selection (ARS)
2.25.1 Dial Tone

Echo Cancel—Conference
Enables the use of echo cancelling for conference calls.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

Feature Guide References

2.14.2 Conference

Echo Cancel—CO-to-CO
Enables the use of echo cancelling for trunk-to-trunk calls.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

Echo Cancel—Extension to Analogue Line

Enables the use of echo cancelling for extension-to-analogue trunk calls.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

Echo Cancel—Extension to Digital Line

Enables the use of echo cancelling for extension-to-ISDN line calls.
If set to "Enable", echo cancelling is used for extension-to-ISDN line calls.

PC Programming Manual 473

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

If set to "Disable", echo cancelling is not used for extension-to-ISDN line calls.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

Option 4
DSS Key—DSS key mode for Incoming Call
Enables the use of a DSS button to pick up an incoming call to another extension or an ICD group.

Value Range
On or Flash, Off

Feature Guide References

2.4.3 Call Pickup
2.21.3 LED Indication

DSS Key—Call Pick-up by DSS key for Direct Incoming Call

Specifies whether a DSS button will light up or flash when a call rings at the specified extension. To enable
this setting, DSS Key—DSS key mode for Incoming Call on this screen must be set to "ON or Flash".

Value Range
Disable: The DSS button will light up when a call arrives, but pressing it will not pick up the call.
Enable: The DSS button will flash when a call arrives, and pressing it will pick up the call.

Feature Guide References

2.4.3 Call Pickup

DSS Key—Call Pick-up by DSS key for ICD Group Call

Specifies whether a DSS button will light up or flash when a call rings at the specified incoming call distribution
group.
To enable this setting, DSS Key—DSS key mode for Incoming Call on this screen must be set to "ON or
Flash".

Value Range
Disable: The DSS button will light up when a call arrives, but pressing it will not pick up the call.
Enable: The DSS button will flash when a call arrives, and pressing it will pick up the call.

Feature Guide References

2.4.3 Call Pickup

DSS Key—Automatic Transfer for Extension Call

Specifies whether pressing a DSS or SDN button during an extension-to-extension call disconnects the current
call or places the call on consultation hold.

474 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Value Range
Disable: The PBX disconnects the current call, and calls the extension assigned to the DSS or SDN button.
Enable: The PBX places the current call on consultation hold.

Feature Guide References

2.12.1 Call Transfer

DSS Key—Caller Information Display before Call Pick-up

Specifies whether incoming caller information is displayed after pressing the DSS button when a call is ringing
at the designated extension, instead of answering the call.

Value Range
Enable: Pressing the DSS button displays the caller’s information.
Disable: Pressing the DSS button answers the call.

Feature Guide References

2.4.3 Call Pickup

Private Network—Public Call through Private Network—Minimum Public Caller

ID Digits
Specifies the minimum length of Caller ID required for a call from a private network to be considered as a call
from a public network.

Value Range
0–15

Feature Guide References

2.19.1 Caller ID

Private Network—TIE Call by Extension Numbering

Enables extensions at two PBXs connected in a network to have the same leading number. For example,
extension 101 is registered at PBX 1, and extension 102 is registered at PBX 2. Only the Extension Number
Method is supported.
If disabled, different leading numbers need to be assigned for extensions at each PBX.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

PC Programming Manual References

17.1 PBX Configuration—[9-1] Private Network—TIE Table— Leading Number

Feature Guide References

4.3.1 TIE Line Service

PC Programming Manual 475

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Send CLIP of CO Caller—when call is transferred to CO (CLIP of Held Party)

Enables the transfer of related CLIP information when a party on hold is transferred. When set to "Enable", the
transfer destination will receive the original caller’s CLIP information, not the information of the extension that
performed the transfer.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

Feature Guide References

4.1.2.2 Calling/Connected Line Identification Presentation (CLIP/COLP)

Send CLIP of CO Caller—when call is forwarded to CO

Selects whether the CLIP number of the calling party or the CLIP number of the forwarding extension or virtual
PS is sent to the forwarding destination to identify the origin of a trunk call.

Value Range
Disable: The CLIP number assigned to the forwarding extension or virtual PS is sent.
Enable: The CLIP number of the calling party is sent.

Feature Guide References

2.2.2.3 Outside Destinations in Incoming Call Distribution Group
4.1.2.2 Calling/Connected Line Identification Presentation (CLIP/COLP)
4.3.6 Network ICD Group

Send CLIP of Extension Caller—when call is forwarded to CO

Selects whether the CLIP number of the calling extension or the CLIP number of the forwarding extension or
virtual PS is sent to the forwarding destination to identify the origin of a call.

Value Range
Disable: The CLIP number assigned to the forwarding extension or virtual PS is sent.
Enable: The CLIP number of the calling extension is sent.

Feature Guide References

2.2.2.3 Outside Destinations in Incoming Call Distribution Group
4.1.2.2 Calling/Connected Line Identification Presentation (CLIP/COLP)
4.3.6 Network ICD Group

System Wireless—Out of Range Registration

Selects whether the PBX can set the status of a PS to Out of Range if no signal is received from the PS for a
preset length of time. This feature must be enabled to allow PS roaming.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

476 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

PC Programming Manual References

10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3] System—Timers & Counters— System Wireless—PS Out of Range Timer
(s)

Feature Guide References

4.3.6.1 PS Roaming by Network ICD Group

System Wireless—SDN Delayed Ringing with LCD

Selects whether call information (such as Caller ID) is shown on the display of a PDN extension PS (i.e., a PS
with one or more PDN buttons) when a call is received while delayed ringing is set.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

PC Programming Manual References

12.2.3 PBX Configuration—[4-2-3] Extension—Portable Station—Flexible Button— Parameter Selection
(for SDN)

Feature Guide References

2.9.1 Primary Directory Number (PDN)/Secondary Directory Number (SDN) Extension

Transfer—Automatic Answer for Transferred Call

Enables transferred calls (including direct extension calls) to be automatically answered, when using the
Hands-free Answerback feature.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

Feature Guide References

2.4.4 Hands-free Answerback

Display Information from Mobile Extension (MEX)—when using Automatic

Walking COS
If Automatic Walking COS is being used, this selects whether to show the CLI destination’s extension number
as the CLIP information (Extension Number), or the MEX CLIP information (MEX CLIP) when the incoming
call is recognised as coming from a MEX terminal.

Value Range
Extension Number, MEX CLIP

Feature Guide References

2.16.1 Direct Inward System Access (DISA)

PC Programming Manual 477

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Option 5
SLT—SLT Hold Mode
Selects how to hold a line and transfer a call with an SLT. For details of each mode, see "2.13.1 Call Hold" in
the Feature Guide.

Value Range
Mode 1, Mode 2, Mode 3, Mode 4

Feature Guide References

2.13.1 Call Hold

SLT—Message Waiting Lamp Pattern

Specifies the Message Waiting Lamp light pattern of SLTs.

Value Range
1–12

Feature Guide References

2.20.1 Message Waiting

Whisper OHCA—for SLT

Enables the use of Whisper OHCA to SLTs and IP-PTs

Value Range
Disable, Enable

Feature Guide References

2.10.4.4 Whisper OHCA

Call Waiting—Automatic Call Waiting for Extension Call

Selects whether Busy Station Signalling (BSS) is automatically performed when an extension user calls a busy
extension.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

Feature Guide References

2.1.3.3 Call Waiting

Busy Out—Busy Out for Analogue CO

Enables the PBX to automatically set a trunk to Busy Out status when a loop current is not detected, preventing
that trunk from being used.

478 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Value Range
Disable, Enable

Feature Guide References

2.5.4.6 Trunk Busy Out

ISDN Voice Path Connection—Connect when "Alert" is sent from ISDN

Enables the voice path of an ISDN line to connect even when an "Alert" signal is received from the telephone
company.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

PT Feature Access—No. 1–8

Specifies the System Feature Access Menu (1–8) shown on the display of an extension.

Value Range
None, Call Back Cancel, Call Pickup Direct, Call Pickup Group, DOORPHONE Call, Door Open, Relay On,
External BGM, Paging

ISDN Option—Fwd from ISDN to ISDN

Specifies whether alert messages are sent to the ISDN network. This setting should be enabled for networks
that disconnect a call if an alert message is not received.

Value Range
Mode1: Disable
Mode2: Enable

ISDN Option—Calling Party Name Presentation to PRI23

Specifies whether the name of the calling party is displayed when making a call to the ISDN network.

Value Range
Enable, Disable

ISDN Option—Calling Party Name Sending Format

Specifies the sending format of the calling party name when making a call to the ISDN network.

Value Range
Display, Facility

PC Programming Manual 479

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Option 6 (CTI)
Built-in Communication Assistant—System status retry interval timer
Specifies the length of time until the alive check is retried when no response is received, for First Party Call
Control CTI such as Communication Assistant (CA).

Value Range
0–60 s

Feature Guide References

2.26.1 Computer Telephony Integration (CTI)

Built-in Communication Assistant—System status retry counter

Specifies the number of times that the alive check is repeated for First Party Call Control CTI such as
Communication Assistant (CA). When the alive check has been attempted the programmed number times
without success, the PBX assumes that the logical connection with the CTI application software has been lost.

Value Range
0–10

Feature Guide References

2.26.1 Computer Telephony Integration (CTI)

3rd Party CTI—System status retry interval timer

Specifies the length of time until the alive check is retried when no response is received, for Third Party Call
Control CTI.

Value Range
0–60 s

Feature Guide References

2.26.1 Computer Telephony Integration (CTI)

3rd Party CTI—System status retry counter

Specifies the number of times that the alive check is repeated for Third Party Call Control CTI. When the alive
check has been attempted the programmed number of times without success, the PBX assumes that the logical
connection with the CTI application software has been lost.

Value Range
0–10

Feature Guide References

2.26.1 Computer Telephony Integration (CTI)

480 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

3rd Party CTI—CDR retry interval timer

Specifies the length of time until the alive check of CDR is retried when no response is received, for Third Party
Call Control CTI.

Value Range
0–60 s

Feature Guide References

2.26.1 Computer Telephony Integration (CTI)

3rd Party CTI—CDR retry counter

Specifies the number of times that the alive check of CDR is repeated for Third Party Call Control CTI. When
the alive check has been attempted the programmed number times, the association is released automatically.

Value Range
0–10

Feature Guide References

2.26.1 Computer Telephony Integration (CTI)

CTI Make Call—SLT Ring

Specifies whether to ring an SLT when a call is made from CTI, instead of the SLT.

Value Range
Enable, Disable

CTI Hold—Forced Idle when Hold by PDN/SDN Key

Selects whether to force an extension to become idle while having a call held on a PDN/SDN button.

Value Range
Enable, Disable

Feature Guide References

2.9.1 Primary Directory Number (PDN)/Secondary Directory Number (SDN) Extension

Option 7
Incoming Call Log—Busy/Intercept (when Called Party is Busy)
Specifies whether the following types of calls are recorded in the incoming call log of the original destination.
• Calls received when the extension is busy.
• Calls rerouted via the Intercept Routing—Busy feature.
If this setting is enabled, calls are recorded as "Not Answered".

Value Range
Enable (Not Answered), Disable

PC Programming Manual 481

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Feature Guide References

2.19.2 Incoming Call Log

Incoming Call Log—Fwd All/Fwd Busy

Specifies whether the following types of calls are recorded in the incoming call log of the original destination.
• Calls rerouted via the FWD—All Calls feature.
• Calls rerouted via the FWD—Busy feature.
If this setting is enabled, calls are recorded as "Not Answered".

Value Range
Enable (Not Answered), Disable

Feature Guide References

2.19.2 Incoming Call Log

Incoming Call Log—Call Pickup

Specifies how calls answered using the Call Pickup feature are recorded in the incoming call log of the original
destination.

Value Range
Answered, Not Answered

Feature Guide References

2.19.2 Incoming Call Log

Incoming Call Log—Extension / TIE Call

Specifies whether extension/TIE calls are recorded in the answering extension’s incoming call log.

Value Range
Enable, Disable

Feature Guide References

2.19.2 Incoming Call Log

Outgoing Call Log—Extension Call

Specifies whether extension/TIE calls are recorded in the calling extension’s outgoing call log.

Value Range
Enable, Disable

Feature Guide References

2.6.3 Last Number Redial

482 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Option 8
P2P Group—Priority Voice 1/Priority Voice 2/Priority Voice 3
Specifies the order of priority of the codecs to use for P2P groups.

Value Range
Priority Voice 1: G.729, G.711, G.722
Priority Voice 2/Priority Voice 3: G.729, G.711, G.722, None

Feature Guide References

5.2.3 Peer-to-Peer (P2P) Connection

P2P Group—Video Conference

Specifies the availability of video conferencing for capable extensions within P2P groups.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

Feature Guide References

5.2.3 Peer-to-Peer (P2P) Connection

Extension - Trunk P2P—IP Extension - SIP Trunk P2P

Specifies whether P2P connections are enabled between SIP trunks and IP extensions.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

Feature Guide References

5.2.3 Peer-to-Peer (P2P) Connection

Conference Group—Maximum Number of Speakers During a Conference Group

Call
Specifies the maximum number of participants that can speak during a Conference Group Call.

Value Range
8 Party, 32 Party

Feature Guide References

2.14.1 Conference Features—SUMMARY
2.14.2 Conference

PC Programming Manual 483

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Option 9
Extension / Mailbox Setting—Mailbox Number Synchronization with Extension
Number
Enables the synchronisation of Mailbox Number and Extension Number settings.

Value Range
Enable, Disable

PC Programming Manual References

12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Main— Extension
Number
12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings—Main— Extension
Number
20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting—Mailbox Parameters— Mailbox Number

Feature Guide References

3.1.1 Unified Messaging System Overview

Extension / Mailbox Setting—Mailbox COS Synchronization with Extension

COS
Enables the synchronisation of a user’s Ext. COS setting and Mailbox COS setting.

Value Range
Enable, Disable

PC Programming Manual References

8.1 Users—User Profiles
12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Main— COS
12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings—Main— COS
20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting—Mailbox Parameters— Class of Service
(Mailbox)

Feature Guide References

3.1.1 Unified Messaging System Overview

Walking Extension Option—Home position control

Selects whether to use the Home position control feature for Walking Extension or Enhanced Walking
Extension.

Value Range
Enable, Disable

PC Programming Manual References

10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main—Features— Walking Extension

484 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Feature Guide References

2.24.3 Walking Extension Features
2.24.3.1 Walking Extension
2.24.3.3 Walking Extension-Home position control

PC Programming Manual 485

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
10.10 PBX Configuration—[2-10] System—Extension CID Settings
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

10.10 PBX Configuration—[2-10]

System—Extension CID Settings
Various settings for extension Caller ID can be programmed.

Extension Caller ID Modulation Type

Specifies the modulation frequency to be used when sending Caller ID information to an SLT.

Value Range
V.23(ETSI), Bell202(Bellcore)

Feature Guide References

2.19.1 Caller ID

Channel Seizure Signal Bits

Specifies the number of seizure bits to send when sending Caller ID information to an SLT.

Value Range
10 ´ n (n=3–40) bits

Feature Guide References

2.19.1 Caller ID

Mark Signal Bits

Specifies the number of mark bits to send when sending Caller ID information to an SLT.

Value Range
10 ´ n (n=3–40) bits

Feature Guide References

2.19.1 Caller ID

Channel Seizure Wait Time

Specifies the length of time that the PBX waits before starting to send the seizure signal following the first ring
when sending Caller ID information to an SLT.

Value Range
64 ´ n (n=5–35) ms

Feature Guide References

2.19.1 Caller ID

486 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 10.10 PBX Configuration—[2-10] System—Extension CID Settings
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Caller ID Signal Type

Specifies the type of signal modulation to be used when sending Caller ID information to an SLT (reference
only).

Value Range
FSK

Feature Guide References

2.19.1 Caller ID

Additional Local Trunk Access Code to Extension Caller ID

Enables the PBX to automatically add a Trunk Access number to the received telephone number when sending
the Caller ID number of an incoming trunk call to an SLT.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

Feature Guide References

2.19.1 Caller ID

Send Caller ID Date & Time to Extension

Enables the PBX to send the date and time of an incoming call when sending Caller ID information to an SLT.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

Feature Guide References

2.19.1 Caller ID

Send Caller ID Name to Extension

Enables the PBX to send the caller’s name when sending Caller ID information to an SLT.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

Feature Guide References

2.19.1 Caller ID

Send Caller ID Long Distance to Extension

Enables the PBX to send a call qualifier (Long Distance) (if received from the trunk) when sending Caller ID
information to an SLT.

PC Programming Manual 487

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
10.10 PBX Configuration—[2-10] System—Extension CID Settings
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Value Range
Disable, Enable

Feature Guide References

2.19.1 Caller ID

FSK Transmission Level (for MCSLC Card)

Specifies the transmission level for FSK signal modulation for MCSLC cards.

Value Range
-14 dB, -12 dB, -10 dB, -8 dB, -6 dB, -4 dB, -2 dB, 0 dB

Feature Guide References

2.19.1 Caller ID

488 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 10.11.1 PBX Configuration—[2-11-1] System—Audio Gain—Paging/MOH
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

10.11 PBX Configuration—[2-11] System—Audio

Gain

10.11.1 PBX Configuration—[2-11-1] System—Audio

Gain—Paging/MOH
Gain levels for the External Pager/External BGM ports can be programmed.

Paging—EPG 1-6 (External Pager 1-6)

Specifies the paging volume for External Pager port 1.

Value Range
-15.5–15.5 dB

PC Programming Manual References

11.4 PBX Configuration—[3-4] Group—Paging Group

Feature Guide References

2.17.1 Paging

Paging—Paging Level from PT Speaker

Specifies the volume when paging is broadcast through the speaker of a PT.

Value Range
-15 dB, -12 dB, -9 dB, -6 dB, -3 dB, 0 dB, 3 dB, 6 dB

PC Programming Manual References

11.4 PBX Configuration—[3-4] Group—Paging Group

Feature Guide References

2.17.1 Paging

Internal MOH—MOH1-2 (Music On Hold 1-2)

Specifies the music volume for each internal BGM (MOH1-2).

Value Range
-31.5–31.5 dB

PC Programming Manual References

10.2 PBX Configuration—[2-2] System—Operator & BGM

PC Programming Manual 489

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
10.11.1 PBX Configuration—[2-11-1] System—Audio Gain—Paging/MOH
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Feature Guide References

2.13.4 Music on Hold
2.30.1 Background Music (BGM)

External MOH—MOH 3–8 (Music on Hold 3–8)

Specifies the music volume for External BGM port 1-6 (MOH 3-8).

Value Range
-31.5–31.5 dB

PC Programming Manual References

10.2 PBX Configuration—[2-2] System—Operator & BGM

Feature Guide References

2.13.4 Music on Hold
2.30.1 Background Music (BGM)

490 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 10.11.2 PBX Configuration—[2-11-2] System—Audio Gain—Card
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

10.11.2 PBX Configuration—[2-11-2] System—Audio Gain—Card

Gain levels can be programmed for each type of card.

Up Gain (To PBX)

Specifies the volume for audio signals from the selected type of card to the PBX.

Value Range
-31.5–31.5 dB

Down Gain (From PBX)

Specifies the volume for audio signals from the PBX to the selected type of card.

Value Range
-15.5–15.5 dB

PC Programming Manual 491

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
10.11.2 PBX Configuration—[2-11-2] System—Audio Gain—Card
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

492 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Section 11
PBX Configuration—[3] Group

This section serves as reference operating instructions

for the Group menu of the PBX Configuration Menu of
the Setup screen of Web Maintenance Console.

PC Programming Manual 493

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
11.1.1 PBX Configuration—[3-1-1] Group—Trunk Group—TRG Settings
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

11.1 PBX Configuration—[3-1] Group—Trunk Group

11.1.1 PBX Configuration—[3-1-1] Group—Trunk Group—TRG

Settings
Trunks can be organised into trunk groups. The settings of a trunk group are applied to all trunks in the group.
A maximum of 64 trunk groups can be programmed.
For more information on trunk groups, see "5.1.2 Group" in the Feature Guide.

Main
Group Name
Specifies the name of the trunk group for programming reference.

Value Range
Max. 20 characters

PC Programming Manual References

18.1 PBX Configuration—[10-1] CO & Incoming Call—CO Line Settings

COS
Specifies the COS of the trunk group, applied when making a call from a trunk to another trunk with TIE Line
Service.
If you wish to prevent such calls from being made, ensure that the COS specified here has a TRS level of
"7" assigned for all relevant time modes in 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System—Class of
Service—COS Settings.

Value Range
1–64

PC Programming Manual References

10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System—Class of Service—COS Settings
18.1 PBX Configuration—[10-1] CO & Incoming Call—CO Line Settings

Feature Guide References

4.3.1 TIE Line Service

Line Hunting Order

Specifies the trunk hunting sequence for the trunk group. The hunting sequence can be programmed to start
from the lowest or highest numbered trunks, or to rotate uniformly among all trunks.

Value Range
High -> Low, Low -> High, Rotation

494 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 11.1.1 PBX Configuration—[3-1-1] Group—Trunk Group—TRG Settings
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

PC Programming Manual References

18.1 PBX Configuration—[10-1] CO & Incoming Call—CO Line Settings

Feature Guide References

2.5.5.3 Trunk Access

CO-CO Duration Time (*60s)

Specifies the length of time that a trunk-to-trunk call can be maintained before being disconnected.

Value Range
None, 1–60 (´ 60 s)

PC Programming Manual References

18.1 PBX Configuration—[10-1] CO & Incoming Call—CO Line Settings

Feature Guide References

2.11.8 Trunk Call Limitation

Extension-CO Duration Time (*60s)

Specifies the length of time that an extension-to-trunk call can be maintained before being disconnected.

Value Range
None, 1–60 (´ 60 s)

PC Programming Manual References

10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System—Class of Service—COS Settings
10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options
18.1 PBX Configuration—[10-1] CO & Incoming Call—CO Line Settings

Feature Guide References

2.11.8 Trunk Call Limitation

Caller ID Modification Table

Specifies the table to be used for modifying caller information (telephone number).

Value Range
1–4

PC Programming Manual References

11.1.3 PBX Configuration—[3-1-3] Group—Trunk Group—Caller ID Modification
18.1 PBX Configuration—[10-1] CO & Incoming Call—CO Line Settings

PC Programming Manual 495

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
11.1.1 PBX Configuration—[3-1-1] Group—Trunk Group—TRG Settings
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Feature Guide References

2.19.1 Caller ID

Dialling Plan Table

Specifies the table to be used for en-bloc dialling.

Value Range
1–4

PC Programming Manual References

11.1.4 PBX Configuration—[3-1-4] Group—Trunk Group—Dialling Plan

Tone Detection
Group Name
Specifies the name of the trunk group for programming reference.

Value Range
Max. 20 characters

PC Programming Manual References

18.1 PBX Configuration—[10-1] CO & Incoming Call—CO Line Settings

DISA Tone Detection—Silence

Enables the disconnection of a DISA-originated trunk-to-trunk call by silence detection.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

PC Programming Manual References

13.3.1 PBX Configuration—[5-3-1] Optional Device—Voice Message—DISA System
18.1 PBX Configuration—[10-1] CO & Incoming Call—CO Line Settings

Feature Guide References

2.16.1 Direct Inward System Access (DISA)

DISA Tone Detection—Continuous

Enables the disconnection of a DISA-originated trunk-to-trunk call by continuous signal detection.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

496 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 11.1.1 PBX Configuration—[3-1-1] Group—Trunk Group—TRG Settings
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

PC Programming Manual References

13.3.1 PBX Configuration—[5-3-1] Optional Device—Voice Message—DISA System
18.1 PBX Configuration—[10-1] CO & Incoming Call—CO Line Settings

Feature Guide References

2.16.1 Direct Inward System Access (DISA)

DISA Tone Detection—Cyclic

Enables the disconnection of a DISA-originated trunk-to-trunk call by cyclic signal detection.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

PC Programming Manual References

13.3.1 PBX Configuration—[5-3-1] Optional Device—Voice Message—DISA System
18.1 PBX Configuration—[10-1] CO & Incoming Call—CO Line Settings

Feature Guide References

2.16.1 Direct Inward System Access (DISA)

Simplified Voice Message Tone Detection—Silence

Enables the disconnection of an SVM-originated trunk-to-trunk call by silence detection.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

PC Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

2.16.3 Built-in Simplified Voice Message (SVM)

Simplified Voice Message Tone Detection—Continuous

Enables the disconnection of an SVM-originated trunk-to-trunk call by continuous signal detection.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

PC Programming Manual References

None

PC Programming Manual 497

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
11.1.1 PBX Configuration—[3-1-1] Group—Trunk Group—TRG Settings
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Feature Guide References

2.16.3 Built-in Simplified Voice Message (SVM)

Simplified Voice Message Tone Detection—Cyclic

Enables the disconnection of an SVM-originated trunk-to-trunk call by cyclic signal detection.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

PC Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

2.16.3 Built-in Simplified Voice Message (SVM)

Host PBX Access Code

Group Name
Specifies the name of the trunk group for programming reference.

Value Range
Max. 20 characters

PC Programming Manual References

18.1 PBX Configuration—[10-1] CO & Incoming Call—CO Line Settings

Host PBX Access Code 1–10

Specifies the feature number used to access a trunk from the host PBX.

Value Range
Max. 10 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)

PC Programming Manual References

18.1 PBX Configuration—[10-1] CO & Incoming Call—CO Line Settings

Feature Guide References

2.5.4.8 Host PBX Access Code (Access Code to the Telephone Company from a Host PBX)

Collect Call Reject (for Brazil)

Group Name
Specifies the name of the trunk group for programming reference.

498 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 11.1.1 PBX Configuration—[3-1-1] Group—Trunk Group—TRG Settings
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Value Range
Max. 20 characters

PC Programming Manual References

18.1 PBX Configuration—[10-1] CO & Incoming Call—CO Line Settings

Collect Call Reject (for Brazil)—Mode

Enables the PBX to automatically reject collect calls. This setting is only for users in Brazil.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

Collect Call Reject (for Brazil)—Wait Time

Selects the length of time that the PBX waits before sending a flash signal to reject a collect call. This setting
is only for users in Brazil.

Value Range
500 ms, 1000 ms, 1500 ms, 2000 ms

Collect Call Reject (for Brazil)—Flashing Time

Selects the length of the flash signal that the PBX sends to reject a collect call. This setting is only for users in
Brazil.

Value Range
1000 ms, 1500 ms, 2000 ms, 2500 ms

PC Programming Manual 499

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
11.1.2 PBX Configuration—[3-1-2] Group—Trunk Group—Local Access Priority
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

11.1.2 PBX Configuration—[3-1-2] Group—Trunk Group—Local

Access Priority
Trunk groups can be assigned a priority for Idle Line Access. When making a trunk call by Idle Line Access,
the PBX will search trunk groups for an idle trunk according to the priority assigned here.

Trunk Group No. & Name

Specifies the trunk group assigned to the corresponding priority level.
Select the blank option to not assign a trunk group to the priority.

Value Range
Trunk Group No. 1–64

PC Programming Manual References

18.1 PBX Configuration—[10-1] CO & Incoming Call—CO Line Settings

Feature Guide References

2.5.5.3 Trunk Access

500 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 11.1.3 PBX Configuration—[3-1-3] Group—Trunk Group—Caller ID Modification
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

11.1.3 PBX Configuration—[3-1-3] Group—Trunk Group—Caller

ID Modification
The telephone numbers of incoming callers can be modified automatically according to pre-programmed
modification tables, and then recorded for calling back.

Leading Digits
After the caller’s number is modified by the Length of Digits Modification Tables or CLIP Modification Tables,
the PBX checks the leading digits of the modified number for an area code programmed in the Caller ID
Modification Table assigned to that trunk group. If it finds such a code, it removes digits and adds a number
to the modified number. If this number is stored as a System Speed Dialling number, the caller’s name can be
shown on a PT display and the call can be routed to a certain extension (CLI destination). A maximum of 4
Caller ID Modification Tables, each containing 10 local/international call data and 1 long distance code, can
be programmed. Each trunk group can select a table for use. Select the desired table from the Modification
Table list.
If the modified number does not contain an area code programmed here, the PBX applies the Long Distance
Code settings to the modified number.

Area Code (for Local / International Call Data 1–10)

Specifies the leading number (area code) to look for in the incoming caller’s number.

Value Range
Max. 6 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)

Feature Guide References

2.19.1 Caller ID

Removed Number of Digits

Specifies the number of digits to be removed from the beginning of the incoming caller’s number.

Value Range
0–9

PC Programming Manual References

11.1.1 PBX Configuration—[3-1-1] Group—Trunk Group—TRG Settings— Caller ID Modification Table
14.1 PBX Configuration—[6-1] Feature—System Speed Dial

Feature Guide References

2.19.1 Caller ID

Added Number
Specifies the number to be added to the incoming caller’s number in the place of the removed digits.

Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)

PC Programming Manual 501

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
11.1.3 PBX Configuration—[3-1-3] Group—Trunk Group—Caller ID Modification
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

PC Programming Manual References

11.1.1 PBX Configuration—[3-1-1] Group—Trunk Group—TRG Settings— Caller ID Modification Table
14.1 PBX Configuration—[6-1] Feature—System Speed Dial

Feature Guide References

2.19.1 Caller ID

Length of Digits
The PBX adds a certain number of digits to the caller’s number depending on the length of digits, as
programmed in the Length of Digits Modification Tables assigned to the trunk group. This modification is applied
to incoming trunk calls routed through public networks when the type of network numbering plan is Unknown
or not specified.
A maximum of 4 Length of Digits Modification Tables can be programmed. Select the desired table from the
Modification Table list.
If the length of digits of an incoming trunk call is less than the Minimum Caller ID Digits (for National), the
caller’s number is not modified.

Minimum Caller ID Digits (for International)

Specifies the minimum number of digits required in the caller’s number for it to be recognised as an international
call. The value specified here must be larger than Minimum Caller ID Digits (for National).

Value Range
1–31

Feature Guide References

2.19.1 Caller ID

Minimum Caller ID Digits (for National)

Specifies the minimum number of digits required in the caller’s number for it to be recognised as a national
call. The value specified here must be smaller than Minimum Caller ID Digits (for International).

Value Range
0–30

Feature Guide References

2.19.1 Caller ID

Added Number (for International)

Specifies the number to be added to the incoming telephone number when the total number of digits exceeds
Minimum Caller ID Digits (for International).

Value Range
Max. 8 digits (0–9, *, and #)

502 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 11.1.3 PBX Configuration—[3-1-3] Group—Trunk Group—Caller ID Modification
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Feature Guide References

2.19.1 Caller ID

Added Number (for National)

Specifies the number to be added to the incoming telephone number when the total number of digits exceeds
Minimum Caller ID Digits (for National) but does not exceed Minimum Caller ID Digits (for
International).

Value Range
Max. 8 digits (0–9, *, and #)

Feature Guide References

2.19.1 Caller ID

CLIP
When incoming caller information is sent through an ISDN line and the type of the network numbering plan is
International, National, or Subscriber, the caller’s number can be modified as programmed in the Modification
Tables assigned to the trunk group. The modified number will then be recorded, and it is used for sending to
the network as a CLIP number.
A maximum of 4 CLIP Modification Tables can be programmed. Select the desired table from the Modification
Table list.

Removed Number of Digits

Specifies the number of leading digits to be removed from the incoming caller’s number for each type of network
numbering plan.

Value Range
0–9

PC Programming Manual References

9.27 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - PRI Port— Calling Party
Number—Type of Number—Public, Private
9.27 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - PRI Port— Called Party Number—Type
of Number—Public, Private

Feature Guide References

2.19.1 Caller ID

Added Number
Specifies the number to be added to the incoming caller’s number in the place of the removed digits for each
type of network numbering plan.

Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)

PC Programming Manual 503

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
11.1.3 PBX Configuration—[3-1-3] Group—Trunk Group—Caller ID Modification
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

PC Programming Manual References

9.27 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - PRI Port— Calling Party
Number—Type of Number—Public, Private
9.27 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - PRI Port— Called Party Number—Type
of Number—Public, Private

Feature Guide References

2.19.1 Caller ID

504 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 11.1.4 PBX Configuration—[3-1-4] Group—Trunk Group—Dialling Plan
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

11.1.4 PBX Configuration—[3-1-4] Group—Trunk Group—Dialling

Plan
The PBX sends all of the dialled digits at once after an extension user completes dialling. The PBX can
recognise the end of dialling when the dialled telephone number starts with the programmed leading number
and contains the programmed total number of digits.
When the PBX recognises the end of dialling to an analogue trunk, the PBX cancels the muting of the caller’s
voice sent to the analogue trunk immediately. If the PBX cannot recognise the end of dialling, the PBX mutes
the caller’s voice sent to an analogue trunk from the time at which the last digit is dialled until the analogue
trunk inter-digit timer expires.
4 tables can be programmed, each with a maximum of 50 leading numbers. Select the table to programme
from the Dialling Plan Table list.
To assign a set of leading numbers automatically, click Auto Assign.

Leading Number
Specifies the leading number to be regarded as the beginning of dialling.

Value Range
Max. 32 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, #, N [2,3,4,5,6,7,8,9], P [0, 1], and X [0–9, *, and #])

PC Programming Manual References

10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3] System—Timers & Counters—Dial / IRNA / Recall / Tone— Dial—Analogue
CO First Digit (s)
10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3] System—Timers & Counters—Dial / IRNA / Recall / Tone— Dial—Analogue
CO Inter-digit (s)
11.1.1 PBX Configuration—[3-1-1] Group—Trunk Group—TRG Settings—Main— Dialling Plan Table

Feature Guide References

4.1.2.1 Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN)—SUMMARY

Removed Number of Digits

Specifies the number of leading digits to be removed from the number dialled by en-bloc dialling.

Value Range
0–15

Feature Guide References

4.1.2.1 Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN)—SUMMARY

Added Number
Specifies the number to be added to the number dialled by en-bloc dialling in the place of the removed digits.

Value Range
Max. 32 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)

PC Programming Manual 505

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
11.1.4 PBX Configuration—[3-1-4] Group—Trunk Group—Dialling Plan
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Feature Guide References

4.1.2.1 Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN)—SUMMARY

506 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 11.1.4 PBX Configuration—[3-1-4] Group—Trunk Group—Dialling Plan
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

11.1.4.1 PBX Configuration—[3-1-4] Group—Trunk Group—Dialling

Plan—Auto Assign
It is possible to assign a set of leading numbers automatically.

Select Auto Assigning Table

Selects the set of preset leading number values to assign to the active dialling plan table. When Type D is
selected, you will be prompted to enter a 3-digit area code, and 7 "X"s, in cells 1 through 47 of the dialling plan
table.

Value Range
Type A:
• 1: N11
• 2: NXX XXXX
• 3: 1NXX NXX XXXX
• 4–50: Not stored
Type B:
• 1: N11
• 2: NNX XXXX
• 3: 1NPX NXX XXXX
• 4–50: Not stored
Type C:
• 1: N11
• 2: NXX XXXX
• 3: 1NNX XXXX
• 4: 1NPX NXX XXXX
• 5–50: Not stored
Type D:
• 1–47: Not stored
• 48: N11
• 49: NXX XXXX
• 50: 1NXX NXX XXXX
Type E:
• 1: N11
• 2: NXX NXX XXXX
• 3: 1NXX NXX XXXX
• 4–50: Not stored

PC Programming Manual References

11.1.4 PBX Configuration—[3-1-4] Group—Trunk Group—Dialling Plan

PC Programming Manual 507

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
11.1.5 PBX Configuration—[3-1-5] Group—Trunk Group—Charge Rate
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

11.1.5 PBX Configuration—[3-1-5] Group—Trunk Group—Charge

Rate
The rate charged per pay tone signal (sent from the telephone company) can be assigned for each trunk group.

Trunk Group Name

Indicates the name of the trunk group (reference only).

Value Range
Max. 20 characters

Rate
Specifies the call charge rate.
The number of decimal places that can be specified here depends on the value set in Charge
Options—Digits After Decimal Point in 14.2 PBX Configuration—[6-2] Feature—Hotel & Charge.

Value Range
0–9999999

PC Programming Manual References

14.2 PBX Configuration—[6-2] Feature—Hotel & Charge

Feature Guide References

2.22.3 Call Charge Services

508 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 11.2 PBX Configuration—[3-2] Group—User Group
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

11.2 PBX Configuration—[3-2] Group—User Group

Extensions can be assigned to a tenant according to their extension user groups. An extension user group can
belong to only one tenant. However, one extension user group can belong to several call pickup groups and
several paging groups. A maximum of 8 tenants can be programmed.

User Group Name

Specifies the name of the extension user group.

Value Range
Max. 20 characters

PC Programming Manual References

11.3 PBX Configuration—[3-3] Group—Call Pickup Group
11.4 PBX Configuration—[3-4] Group—Paging Group
12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Main— User Group
12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings—Main— User Group

Feature Guide References

5.1.2 Group

Tenant Number
Specifies the tenant to which the extension user group belongs.

Value Range
1–8

PC Programming Manual References

12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings
12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings

Feature Guide References

5.1.2 Group
5.1.3 Tenant Service

PC Programming Manual 509

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
11.3 PBX Configuration—[3-3] Group—Call Pickup Group
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

11.3 PBX Configuration—[3-3] Group—Call Pickup

Group
Extensions can be assigned to a call pickup group according to their extension user groups. One extension
user group can belong to up to 8 call pickup groups. A maximum of 64 call pickup groups can be programmed.
To assign extension user groups to call pickup groups easily, click All Setting.

User Group Name

Indicates the name of the extension user group (reference only).

Value Range
Max. 20 characters

PC Programming Manual References

12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings
12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings

Feature Guide References

2.4.3 Call Pickup
5.1.2 Group

Pickup Group—1st–8th
Selects the call pickup groups that the extension user group belongs to. One extension user group can be
assigned to a maximum of 8 call pickup groups on this screen. To assign an extension user group to more
than 8 call pickup groups, click All Setting.

Value Range
None, 01:–64:

PC Programming Manual References

12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings
12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings

Feature Guide References

2.4.3 Call Pickup
5.1.2 Group

510 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 11.3.1 PBX Configuration—[3-3] Group—Call Pickup Group—All Setting
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

11.3.1 PBX Configuration—[3-3] Group—Call Pickup Group—All

Setting
Extensions can be assigned to a call pickup group according to their extension user groups. One extension
user group can belong to multiple call pickup groups.

Call Pickup Group Name

Specifies the name of the call pickup group.

Value Range
Max. 20 characters

PC Programming Manual References

12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings
12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings

Feature Guide References

2.4.3 Call Pickup
5.1.2 Group

Main—Call Pickup Group Monitor Feature

For a pickup group, specifies whether display indications and tones are enabled to notify extension users when
a call that can be answered by an extension in the pickup group arrives.

Value Range
Enable, Disable

Feature Guide References

2.4.3 Call Pickup

User Group 1–32

Specifies whether the extension user group belongs to the corresponding pickup group.

Value Range
ON (blue), OFF

PC Programming Manual References

12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings
12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings

Feature Guide References

2.4.3 Call Pickup
5.1.2 Group

PC Programming Manual 511

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
11.4 PBX Configuration—[3-4] Group—Paging Group
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

11.4 PBX Configuration—[3-4] Group—Paging

Group
Extensions can be assigned to a paging group according to their extension user groups. External pagers can
also be assigned to a paging group. One extension user group or external pager can belong to multiple paging
groups. A maximum of 32 paging groups can be programmed.
To assign external pagers to paging groups, click External Pager. To assign extension user groups to paging
groups easily, click All Setting.

User Group Name

Indicates the name of the extension user group (reference only).

Value Range
Max. 20 characters

PC Programming Manual References

12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings
12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings

Feature Guide References

2.17.1 Paging
5.1.2 Group

Paging Group—1st–8th
Selects the paging groups that the extension user group belongs to. One extension user group can be assigned
to a maximum of 8 paging groups on this screen. To assign an extension user group to more than 8 paging
groups, click All Setting.

Value Range
None, 01–32

PC Programming Manual References

12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings
12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings

Feature Guide References

2.17.1 Paging
5.1.2 Group

512 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 11.4.1 PBX Configuration—[3-4] Group—Paging Group—All Setting
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

11.4.1 PBX Configuration—[3-4] Group—Paging Group—All

Setting
Extensions can be assigned to a paging group according to their extension user groups. One extension user
group or external pager can belong to multiple paging groups.

Paging Group Name

Specifies the name of the paging group.

Value Range
Max. 20 characters

PC Programming Manual References

12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings
12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings

Feature Guide References

2.17.1 Paging
5.1.2 Group

User Group 1–32

Specifies whether the extension user group belongs to the corresponding paging group.

Value Range
ON (blue), OFF (white)

PC Programming Manual References

12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings
12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings

Feature Guide References

2.17.1 Paging
5.1.2 Group

PC Programming Manual 513

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
11.4.2 PBX Configuration—[3-4] Group—Paging Group—External Pager
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

11.4.2 PBX Configuration—[3-4] Group—Paging Group—External

Pager
External pagers can be assigned to a paging group. One external pager can belong to multiple paging groups.

Paging Group Name

Indicates the name of the paging group (reference only).

Value Range
Max. 20 characters

PC Programming Manual References

12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings
12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings

Feature Guide References

2.17.1 Paging
5.1.2 Group

External Pager 1–6

Specifies whether the external pager belongs to the corresponding paging group.

Value Range
ON (blue), OFF

PC Programming Manual References

12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings
12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings

Feature Guide References

2.17.1 Paging
5.1.2 Group

514 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 11.5.1 PBX Configuration—[3-5-1] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

11.5 PBX Configuration—[3-5] Group—Incoming

Call Distribution Group

11.5.1 PBX Configuration—[3-5-1] Group—Incoming Call

Distribution Group—Group Settings
Extensions can be assigned as members of an incoming call distribution group. Calls to an incoming call
distribution group are distributed to its member extensions as programmed. A maximum of 128 incoming call
distribution groups can be programmed.
To set the Call Forwarding (FWD) settings of ICD groups easily, click Group FWD. To assign extensions to
ICD groups and change extension settings, click Member List.
For more information on ICD Groups, see "2.2.2.1 Incoming Call Distribution Group Features—SUMMARY"
in the Feature Guide.

Main
Floating Extension Number
Specifies the floating extension number of the incoming call distribution group.

Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)

Group Name
Specifies the name of the incoming call distribution group.

Value Range
Max. 20 characters

Distribution Method
Selects the method for distributing calls to idle extensions of the incoming call distribution group.

Value Range
Ring, UCD, Priority Hunting

Feature Guide References

2.2.2.2 Group Call Distribution

Call Waiting Distribution

Selects the call waiting distribution method for busy extensions of the incoming call distribution group.

Value Range
All, Distribution

PC Programming Manual 515

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
11.5.1 PBX Configuration—[3-5-1] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Feature Guide References

2.2.2.2 Group Call Distribution

FWD Mode
Specifies whether extensions in FWD mode ring when a call is received at the incoming call distribution group.

Value Range
No Ring, Ring

PC Programming Manual References

12.1.2 PBX Configuration—[4-1-2] Extension—Wired Extension—FWD/DND
12.2.2 PBX Configuration—[4-2-2] Extension—Portable Station—FWD/DND

Feature Guide References

2.2.2.2 Group Call Distribution

DND Mode
Specifies whether extensions in DND mode ring when a call is received at the incoming call distribution group.

Value Range
No Ring, Ring

PC Programming Manual References

12.1.2 PBX Configuration—[4-1-2] Extension—Wired Extension—FWD/DND
12.2.2 PBX Configuration—[4-2-2] Extension—Portable Station—FWD/DND

Feature Guide References

2.2.2.2 Group Call Distribution

Tenant Number
Specifies the tenant to which the incoming call distribution group belongs, to determine the Time Table and
the audio source for the group. (The tenant number corresponds to the Time Table number.)

Value Range
1–8

PC Programming Manual References

10.2 PBX Configuration—[2-2] System—Operator & BGM
10.4 PBX Configuration—[2-4] System—Week Table
14.6 PBX Configuration—[6-6] Feature—Tenant— Music On Hold

Feature Guide References

2.13.4 Music on Hold

516 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 11.5.1 PBX Configuration—[3-5-1] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

5.1.3 Tenant Service

COS
Specifies the COS of the incoming call distribution group. Depending on the COS, calls from certain extensions
are restricted as determined by the Internal Call Block feature. Also, when calls are forwarded or overflowed
to a trunk, the TRS/Barring assigned for the COS of the incoming call distribution group applies.

Value Range
1–64

PC Programming Manual References

10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System—Class of Service—COS Settings
10.7.2 PBX Configuration—[2-7-2] System—Class of Service—External Call Block
10.7.3 PBX Configuration—[2-7-3] System—Class of Service—Internal Call Block

Feature Guide References

2.1.2.2 Internal Call Block

CLIP on ICD Group Button

Specifies the CLIP number sent to the network when making calls using the ICD Group button.

Value Range
Max. 16 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)

Feature Guide References

4.1.2.2 Calling/Connected Line Identification Presentation (CLIP/COLP)

Overflow Queuing Busy

Floating Extension Number
Specifies the floating extension number of the incoming call distribution group.

Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)

Group Name
Specifies the name of the incoming call distribution group.

Value Range
Max. 20 characters

Queuing Busy—Destination-Day, Lunch, Break, Night

Specifies the overflow destination of calls that cannot be queued in each time mode.

PC Programming Manual 517

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
11.5.1 PBX Configuration—[3-5-1] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Value Range
Max. 32 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, #, [ ] [Secret], and P [Pause])

PC Programming Manual References

10.4 PBX Configuration—[2-4] System—Week Table

Feature Guide References

2.2.2.7 Overflow Feature

Queuing Busy—Queue Call Capacity

Specifies the number of calls that can wait in a queue.

Value Range
None, 1–100

Feature Guide References

2.2.2.4 Queuing Feature

Overflow No Answer
Floating Extension Number
Specifies the floating extension number of the incoming call distribution group.

Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)

Group Name
Specifies the name of the incoming call distribution group.

Value Range
Max. 20 characters

Time out & Manual Queue Redirection—Destination-Day, Lunch, Break, Night

Specifies the overflow destination of queued calls when they are not answered or are redirected by Manual
Queue Redirection in each time mode.

Value Range
Max. 32 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, #, [ ] [Secret], and P [Pause])

PC Programming Manual References

10.4 PBX Configuration—[2-4] System—Week Table

518 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 11.5.1 PBX Configuration—[3-5-1] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Feature Guide References

2.2.2.4 Queuing Feature
2.2.2.7 Overflow Feature

Time out & Manual Queue Redirection Overflow Time

Specifies the length of time calls wait in a queue before they are redirected to the overflow destination.

Value Range
None, 10 ´ n (n=1–125) s

Feature Guide References

2.2.2.4 Queuing Feature
2.2.2.7 Overflow Feature

Hurry-up Level
Specifies the number of calls to hold in the queue before prompting Manual Queue Redirection by flashing the
Hurry-up button.

Value Range
None, 1–30

PC Programming Manual References

12.1.4 PBX Configuration—[4-1-4] Extension—Wired Extension—Flexible Button
12.2.3 PBX Configuration—[4-2-3] Extension—Portable Station—Flexible Button

Feature Guide References

2.2.2.4 Queuing Feature

Queuing Time Table

Floating Extension Number
Specifies the floating extension number of the incoming call distribution group.

Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)

Group Name
Specifies the name of the incoming call distribution group.

Value Range
Max. 20 characters

Queuing Time Table—Day, Lunch, Break, Night

Specifies the Queuing Time Table to be used in each time mode.

PC Programming Manual 519

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
11.5.1 PBX Configuration—[3-5-1] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Value Range
None, Table 1–Table 64

PC Programming Manual References

10.4 PBX Configuration—[2-4] System—Week Table

Feature Guide References

2.2.2.4 Queuing Feature

Queuing Time Table When Extension Ringing

Enables the PBX to play messages/BGM to the caller according to the Queuing Time Table, when the call
arrives at an extension without being queued or after being queued.

Value Range
Disable (Ringback Tone), Enable

Miscellaneous
Floating Extension Number
Specifies the floating extension number of the incoming call distribution group.

Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)

Group Name
Specifies the name of the incoming call distribution group.

Value Range
Max. 20 characters

Extension No Answer Redirection Time

Specifies the length of time that a call queues at an extension before it is redirected to the next member
extension of the incoming call distribution group, in UCD or Priority Hunting distribution method.

Value Range
None, 10 ´ n (n=1–15) s

Feature Guide References

2.2.2.2 Group Call Distribution
2.2.2.4 Queuing Feature

520 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 11.5.1 PBX Configuration—[3-5-1] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

No. of Unanswered Calls for Automatic Log-out

Specifies the number of consecutive unanswered calls before a member extension is automatically logged out
from the incoming call distribution group.

Value Range
None, 1–15

Feature Guide References

2.2.2.8 Log-in/Log-out

Maximum No. of Busy Extension

Specifies the number of extensions that can accept calls simultaneously in the incoming call distribution group.

Value Range
Max.: Call arrives at an idle extension.
1–32: Call will not arrive at an idle extension when the number of busy extensions exceeds the assigned
number.

Feature Guide References

2.2.2.2 Group Call Distribution

Status of FWD for Virtual PS

Specifies whether a virtual PS in an ICD group is shown as idle or busy when it forwards a call to a trunk on
no answer.

Value Range
Idle, Busy

Feature Guide References

2.3.2 Call Forwarding (FWD)

Last Extension Log-out

Specifies whether the last extension logged-in to the incoming call distribution group is allowed to log out.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

Feature Guide References

2.2.2.8 Log-in/Log-out

VIP Call Mode

Enables VIP Call mode, to prioritise calls received from multiple incoming call distribution groups.

PC Programming Manual 521

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
11.5.1 PBX Configuration—[3-5-1] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Value Range
Disable, Enable

Feature Guide References

2.2.2.6 VIP Call

Supervisor Extension Number

Specifies the extension number of the incoming call distribution group’s supervisor. The supervisor can monitor
and control the status of each member of the group using a 6-line display PT. The supervisor extension need
not belong to the group.

Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)

Feature Guide References

2.2.2.9 Supervisory Feature

Programmed Mailbox No. (16 Digits)

Specifies the mailbox number of the incoming call distribution group’s mailbox for Voice Processing Systems
(VPS) with DTMF Integration.

Value Range
Max. 16 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)

Group Log / Group FWD

Floating Extension Number
Specifies the floating extension number of the incoming call distribution group.

Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)

Group Name
Specifies the name of the incoming call distribution group.

Value Range
Max. 20 characters

Incoming Call Log Memory

Specifies the number of unanswered calls to the incoming call distribution group that can be logged in the call
log memory.

Value Range
0–100

522 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 11.5.1 PBX Configuration—[3-5-1] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Feature Guide References

2.19.2 Incoming Call Log

Group FWD Call from CO—Setting

Indicates the current FWD status for incoming trunk calls (reference only).

Value Range
Off, On

Feature Guide References

2.3.2 Call Forwarding (FWD)

Group FWD Call from CO—Destination

Specifies the forward destination of incoming trunk calls directed to the incoming call distribution group.

Value Range
Max. 32 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, #, [ ] [Secret], and P [Pause])

Feature Guide References

2.3.2 Call Forwarding (FWD)

Group FWD Call from Extension—Setting

Indicates the current FWD status for incoming intercom calls (reference only).

Value Range
Off, On

Feature Guide References

2.3.2 Call Forwarding (FWD)

Group FWD Call from Extension—Destination

Specifies the forward destination of incoming intercom calls directed to the incoming call distribution group.

Value Range
Max. 32 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, #, [ ] [Secret] and P [Pause])

Feature Guide References

2.3.2 Call Forwarding (FWD)

PC Programming Manual 523

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
11.5.1 PBX Configuration—[3-5-1] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

11.5.1.1 PBX Configuration—[3-5-1] Group—Incoming Call

Distribution Group—Group Settings—Member List
Each incoming call distribution group can have a maximum of 128 members (extensions) assigned to it, and
each member can have its own delayed ringing and Wrap-up time settings. An extension can be a member of
multiple incoming call distribution groups. An ICD Group can also contain cellular phones, and network ICD
groups (ICD groups at other PBXs in a network) using virtual PS (see "5.2.4.6 Virtual PS" in the Feature
Guide). The forward destination assigned to a virtual PS (e.g., a cellular phone) can act as a member of an
ICD group. Select the desired ICD group (1–128) from the ICD Group No. list.
To assign members to the group, enter directly or click Extension No. Setting (see 2.1.6 Extension Number
Setting). To copy the members to another group, click Member list copy, select the group, and click OK.

Extension Number
Specifies the extension number of each member. In addition to the extension numbers of PT, SLT, and PS
extensions, floating extension numbers of PS Ring groups can also be specified.

Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)

PC Programming Manual References

11.8 PBX Configuration—[3-8] Group—PS Ring Group

Feature Guide References

2.2.2.1 Incoming Call Distribution Group Features—SUMMARY

Extension Name
Indicates the name of the extension (reference only).

Value Range
Max. 20 characters

PC Programming Manual References

11.8 PBX Configuration—[3-8] Group—PS Ring Group

Feature Guide References

2.2.2.1 Incoming Call Distribution Group Features—SUMMARY

Delayed Ring
Specifies the delayed ringing setting of each member. (Applicable when the call distribution method of the
incoming call distribution group is set to Ring.)

Value Range
Immediate, 1–6 Rings, No Ring

524 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 11.5.1 PBX Configuration—[3-5-1] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Feature Guide References

2.2.2.2 Group Call Distribution

Wrap-up Timer
Specifies the length of time that must pass after completing a call before the member extension can accept
another call.
This timer is used when " Options—Wrap-up Timer based on" is set to "ICD Group Member" in
11.5.3 PBX Configuration—[3-5-3] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Miscellaneous.

Value Range
10 ´ n (n=0–300) s

PC Programming Manual References

11.5.3 PBX Configuration—[3-5-3] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Miscellaneous—
Options—Wrap-up Timer based on
12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 8— Wrap-up
Timer
12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 8— Wrap-up
Timer

Feature Guide References

2.2.2.8 Log-in/Log-out

PC Programming Manual 525

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
11.5.2 PBX Configuration—[3-5-2] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Queuing Time Table
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

11.5.2 PBX Configuration—[3-5-2] Group—Incoming Call

Distribution Group—Queuing Time Table
A Queuing Time Table can contain up to 16 sequences which control how calls waiting in a queue are handled.
A maximum of 64 Queuing Time Tables can be programmed.

Queuing Sequence—Sequence 01–16

Specifies the command activated by the corresponding sequence.

Value Range
None: Redirects the call to the next sequence.
Overflow: Redirects the call to the overflow destination when there is no answer.
Disconnect: Disconnects the line.
Sequence 01–16: Redirects the call to a different sequence.
Wait 5 ´ n (n=1–16) s: If preceded by an OGM, plays the Music on Hold for the specified period of time; if not
preceded by an OGM, sends a ringback tone for the specified period of time.
OGM 01–64: Sends a certain OGM.
Queue No.: Announces how many calls precede the caller in the waiting queue.
Queue No. and Time: Announces how many calls precede the caller in the waiting queue and the estimated
wait time.

Feature Guide References

2.2.2.4 Queuing Feature
2.2.2.7 Overflow Feature
2.13.4 Music on Hold
2.30.2 Outgoing Message (OGM)

526 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 11.5.3 PBX Configuration—[3-5-3] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Miscellaneous
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

11.5.3 PBX Configuration—[3-5-3] Group—Incoming Call

Distribution Group—Miscellaneous
Optional settings related to Incoming Call Distribution Groups can be programmed.

Options—Call Log to ICD Group when ICD Member Answered

Selects whether answered calls to an ICD Group are also logged in the Incoming Call Log for the group, in
addition to the log of the extension that answered the call.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

Feature Guide References

2.2.2.1 Incoming Call Distribution Group Features—SUMMARY

Options—Call Log to ICD Group when Overflow Destination Answered

Selects whether the calls to an ICD Group that are redirected and are answered by the overflow destination
are also logged in the Incoming Call Log for the group, in addition to the log of the extension that answered
the call.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

Feature Guide References

2.2.2.1 Incoming Call Distribution Group Features—SUMMARY

Options—ICD Group Key Mode

Selects whether ICD Group buttons at extensions operate as normal or in Enhanced Phantom button mode.
When set to Enhanced Phantom mode, creating an ICD Group button at an extension using PT personal
programming automatically registers the extension as a member of the relevant ICD Group. The extension
user can also specify the delayed ringing settings.

Value Range
Group DN, Enhanced Phantom

PC Programming Manual References

11.5.1.1 PBX Configuration—[3-5-1] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings—Member
List— Delayed Ring

Feature Guide References

2.2.2.1 Incoming Call Distribution Group Features—SUMMARY

PC Programming Manual 527

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
11.5.3 PBX Configuration—[3-5-3] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Miscellaneous
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Options—Longest Idle Distribution

Selects whether incoming calls are distributed to idle extensions evenly in order (UCD), or to the extension
that has been idle the longest (ACD).

Value Range
Disable (UCD), Enable (ACD)

Feature Guide References

2.2.2.2 Group Call Distribution

Options—Wrap-up Timer based on

Selects whether the ICD Group member wrap-up timer or extension wrap-up timer is used.
If Extension is selected here, Wrap-up Timer on 11.5.1.1 PBX Configuration—[3-5-1] Group—Incoming
Call Distribution Group—Group Settings—Member List becomes unavailable. If ICD Group Member is
selected, Wrap-up Timer on 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired
Extension—Extension Settings and 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable
Station—Extension Settings become unavailable.

Value Range
Extension: The timer is activated after all calls to or from the extension, including a retrieved call on hold.
ICD Group Member: The timer is only activated after calls to the extension through an ICD Group.

PC Programming Manual References

11.5.1.1 PBX Configuration—[3-5-1] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings—Member
List— Wrap-up Timer
12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 8— Wrap-up
Timer
12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 8— Wrap-up
Timer

Feature Guide References

2.2.2.8 Log-in/Log-out

Options—Overflow immediately when All Logout

Specifies whether overflow redirection is processed when all members of an ICD group are logged out.

Value Range
Enable (Queuing Busy Destination), Disable (Keep Queuing)

Feature Guide References

2.2.2.1 Incoming Call Distribution Group Features—SUMMARY

Options—Call Log for Built-in ACD Report

Specifies whether to log call information for the Built-in ACD Report. This feature requires an activation key.

528 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 11.5.3 PBX Configuration—[3-5-3] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Miscellaneous
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Note
When this setting is enabled, certain hospitality features cannot be used. For details, refer to the relevant
chapter in the Feature Guide.

Value Range
Enable (Logging), Disable

Feature Guide References

2.2.2.1 Incoming Call Distribution Group Features—SUMMARY
2.2.2.10 Supervisory Feature (ACD)
2.23.2 Room Status Control
2.23.3 Call Billing for Guest Room

Options—Call Log for Built-in ACD Report—ICD Group Unanswered Call Log
Specifies whether to log call information of unanswered calls when the ICD group distribution method is set to
Uniform Call Distribution or Priority Hunting, for the Built-in ACD Report.

Value Range
Enable, Disable

Feature Guide References

2.2.2.10 Supervisory Feature (ACD)

Options—ICD Group Call Monitor View—Screen Update Time (s)

Specifies the screen update interval time for the ICD Group Call Monitor View.

Value Range
5–60

Feature Guide References

2.2.2.1 Incoming Call Distribution Group Features—SUMMARY

Options—Announcement of Estimated Waiting Time—Calculated based on (the

following time x number of calls in queue)
Specifies the method to announce the estimated wait time to calls waiting in an ICD group queue. The amount
of time announced is calculated using the time set here for each call in the queue.

Value Range
Average waiting time: The average wait time is used for calculating the announced amount of wait time.
Predefined time: A set amount of time (10–3600 s) is used for calculating the announced amount of wait time.

Feature Guide References

2.2.2.4 Queuing Feature

PC Programming Manual 529

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
11.5.3 PBX Configuration—[3-5-3] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Miscellaneous
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Options—Announcement of Estimated Waiting Time—Threshold Time for

Special Announce (10-60 min)
Specifies the threshold wait time for when calls waiting in an ICD group queue will hear the special
announcement.

Value Range
10–60 min

Feature Guide References

2.2.2.4 Queuing Feature

Options—UM System Guidance—UM System Guidance for Queue No. / Queue

No. and Time
Specifies the announcement heard by callers in an ICD queue about the estimated wait time. Select an
announcement from the specified Unified Messaging System Guidance messages.

Value Range
Guidance No.1–8

Feature Guide References

2.2.2.4 Queuing Feature

Options—ICD Group Distribution order

Select the distribution method for member extensions that belong to multiple ICD groups and become idle.

Value Range
FIFO, Circular

Feature Guide References

2.2.2.4 Queuing Feature

Options—2nd line LCD display information for ICD Group redirected call
Select the information displayed on the second line of the PT's display when an incoming call is redirected to
the ICD group that the extension belongs to.

Value Range
Last destination, First destination

Feature Guide References

2.2.2.4 Queuing Feature

530 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 11.5.4 PBX Configuration–[3-5-4] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—ACD Supervisor
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

11.5.4 PBX Configuration–[3-5-4] Group—Incoming Call

Distribution Group—ACD Supervisor
This screen is only available at Installer level.

Description
After specifying an ICD Group to be monitored, specify a User (User) or User (Administrator) as an ACD
supervisor to begin monitoring. The ACD supervisor can monitor an ICD Group, manage and analyse statistical
information, and create an ACD report.
For details about ICD Group management by the ACD supervisor, see 8.4 Users—ICDG Management.

To set the ACD Supervisor

1. Click the button. The Set ACD Supervisor screen is displayed.
2. From the users listed in the Normal User window, click a user to select it as the ACD supervisor, and then
click the right arrow button to move the selected user to the ACD Supervisor window. To remove a selected
user, click a user on the ACD Supervisor window to select it, and then click the left arrow button.
3. Click OK.
The ACD supervisor selected above is displayed as follows.

First Name
The first name of the ACD supervisor (reference only).

Last Name
The last name of the ACD supervisor (reference only).

Ext. No.
The extension number of the ACD supervisor (reference only).

To assign the ICD Groups that are monitored by the ACD Supervisor.
1. In the ICD Group column, click the Edit button for the ACD supervisor. The Set ACD Supervisor ICD
Group screen is displayed.
2. From the ICD Groups listed in the Available ICD Group window, click an ICD Group to select it for
assignment to the ACD supervisor, and then click the right arrow button to move the selected ICD Group
to the Selected ICD Group list. To remove a selected ICD Group, click an ICD Group on the Selected
ICD Group list to select it, and then click the left arrow button.
3. Click OK.

Feature Guide References

2.2.2.10 Supervisory Feature (ACD)

PC Programming Manual 531

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
11.6 PBX Configuration—[3-6] Group—Extension Hunting Group
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

11.6 PBX Configuration—[3-6] Group—Extension

Hunting Group
If an extension within an idle extension hunting group is called when it is busy or in DND mode, the call can
be redirected to another extension in the same hunting group, according to a pre-programmed hunting type.
If there is no idle extension in the group, the call can then be redirected to the overflow destination, which can
be different depending on the time mode (day/lunch/break/night). A maximum of 64 hunting groups can be
programmed, each containing up to 16 extensions.
To assign members to the group, click Member List. To assign extensions as overflow destinations easily,
click Destination Setting (see 2.1.6 Extension Number Setting).

Hunting Group Name

Specifies the name of the hunting group.

Value Range
Max. 20 characters

Feature Guide References

2.2.1 Idle Extension Hunting

Hunting Type
Specifies the hunting type for the hunting group.

Value Range
Circular: Circulates until the call is answered or overflowed
Terminated: Terminates at the last extension

Feature Guide References

2.2.1 Idle Extension Hunting
5.1.2 Group

Overflow—Day, Lunch, Break, Night

Specifies the overflow destination of an unanswered call in each time mode.

Value Range
Max. 32 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, #, T [Transfer], [ ] [Secret], P [Pause], and F [Flash])

Feature Guide References

2.2.1 Idle Extension Hunting

532 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 11.6.1 PBX Configuration—[3-6] Group—Extension Hunting Group—Member List
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

11.6.1 PBX Configuration—[3-6] Group—Extension Hunting

Group—Member List
Each hunting group can contain up to 16 extensions. Select the hunting group to programme from the Hunting
Group No. list.
To assign members to the group, enter the extension numbers in Extension Number or click Extension
No. Setting (see 2.1.6 Extension Number Setting).

Extension Number
Specifies the extension number of the hunting group member.

Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)

PC Programming Manual References

11.6 PBX Configuration—[3-6] Group—Extension Hunting Group

Feature Guide References

2.2.1 Idle Extension Hunting

Extension Name
Indicates the name of the extension, when an extension number is specified in Extension Number above
(reference only).

Value Range
Max. 20 characters

PC Programming Manual References

11.6 PBX Configuration—[3-6] Group—Extension Hunting Group

Feature Guide References

2.2.1 Idle Extension Hunting

PC Programming Manual 533

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
11.7.1 PBX Configuration—[3-7-1] Group—UM Group—System Settings
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

11.7 PBX Configuration—[3-7] Group—UM Group

11.7.1 PBX Configuration—[3-7-1] Group—UM Group—System

Settings
The Unified Messaging (UM) ports of a PBX make up a group, called a UM group. This group has a floating
extension number, which can be the destination for incoming calls, redirected calls, transferred calls, etc. When
a call is received at the UM group, the Unified Messaging system can direct the caller to leave a voice message
or dial a number to reach the desired party.

Call Waiting on UM Group

Enables the queuing of calls when all extension ports of the UM group are busy. (Call Waiting tone is not sent
to any UM port.)

Value Range
Disable, Enable

PC Programming Manual References

9.6 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—UM Port Property

Feature Guide References

2.2.2.4 Queuing Feature
3.1.1 Unified Messaging System Overview—UM Ports and the UM Group

Intercept to Mailbox for Call to Extension

Enables the PBX to send the mailbox number of the called extension to the Unified Messaging system when
a call is redirected to the UM group by Intercept Routing. When the Unified Messaging system receives the
mailbox number, the Unified Messaging system answers the call with the appropriate mailbox.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

PC Programming Manual References

9.6 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—UM Port Property
12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Intercept
Destination— Intercept Destination—When called party does not answer—Day, Lunch, Break, Night
12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings—Intercept
Destination— Intercept Destination—When called party does not answer—Day, Lunch, Break, Night

Feature Guide References

3.1.1 Unified Messaging System Overview—UM Ports and the UM Group

534 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 11.7.1 PBX Configuration—[3-7-1] Group—UM Group—System Settings
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Overflow to Mailbox for Call to ICD Group

Enables the PBX to send the mailbox number of the called extension to the UM when a call is redirected from
an incoming call distribution group to the UM group by Intercept Routing. When the Unified Messaging system
receives the mailbox number, it answers the call with the appropriate mailbox.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

Feature Guide References

2.2.2 Incoming Call Distribution Group Features

Transfer Recall to Mailbox

Enables the PBX to send the mailbox number of the transfer destination extension to the Unified Messaging
system in these situations: (1) when a call is transferred to an extension by the Call Transfer without
Announcement feature using the Automated Attendant (AA) service of the Unified Messaging system, and the
call is not answered within a programmed time period; (2) when the Unified Messaging system is assigned as
the Transfer Recall destination of a certain extension. When the Unified Messaging system receives the
mailbox number, the Unified Messaging system answers the call with the appropriate mailbox.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

PC Programming Manual References

9.6 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—UM Port Property

Feature Guide References

3.1.1 Unified Messaging System Overview—UM Ports and the UM Group

PC Programming Manual 535

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
11.7.2 PBX Configuration—[3-7-2] Group—UM Group—Unit Settings
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

11.7.2 PBX Configuration—[3-7-2] Group—UM Group—Unit

Settings
A UM group has a floating extension number, which can be assigned as the destination for redirected calls
and incoming calls.
To assign extension numbers to the group, click Member List. To view a list of all programmed extension
numbers and types, click Extension List View (see 6.5 Tool—Extension List View).

Floating Extension No.

Specifies the floating extension number of the UM group.

Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)

PC Programming Manual References

9.6 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—UM Port Property

Feature Guide References

3.1.1 Unified Messaging System Overview—UM Ports and the UM Group

Group Name
Specifies the name of the UM group, which will be shown on the display of extensions that call the UM group.

Value Range
Max. 20 characters

PC Programming Manual References

9.6 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—UM Port Property

Feature Guide References

3.1.1 Unified Messaging System Overview—UM Ports and the UM Group

Centralised VM Unit Setting

Floating Extension No. (TIE)
Specifies the floating extension number of the centralised VM (DPT) group. This floating extension number
must start with the number used to access a TIE line or the extensions of another PBX.

Value Range
Max. 8 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)

PC Programming Manual References

10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main—Features— TIE Line Access
10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main—Other PBX Extension

536 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 11.7.2 PBX Configuration—[3-7-2] Group—UM Group—Unit Settings
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Feature Guide References

2.28.1 Voice Mail (VM) Group
2.28.3 Voice Mail DPT (Digital) Integration
4.3.5.2 Centralised Voice Mail

Group Name
Specifies the name of the centralised VM (DPT) group, which will be shown on the display of extensions that
call the VM (DPT) group.

Value Range
Max. 20 characters

Feature Guide References

2.28.1 Voice Mail (VM) Group
2.28.3 Voice Mail DPT (Digital) Integration
4.3.5.2 Centralised Voice Mail

PC Programming Manual 537

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
11.7.2 PBX Configuration—[3-7-2] Group—UM Group—Unit Settings
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

11.7.2.1 PBX Configuration—[3-7-2] Group—UM Group—Unit

Settings—Member List
Displays information about all UM ports that belong to the selected UM group.

No.
Indicates the UM port number (reference only).

Value Range
1–24

PC Programming Manual References

11.7.2 PBX Configuration—[3-7-2] Group—UM Group—Unit Settings

Extension No.
Indicates the extension number assigned to the UM port (reference only).

Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)

PC Programming Manual References

11.7.2 PBX Configuration—[3-7-2] Group—UM Group—Unit Settings

Feature Guide References

3.1.1 Unified Messaging System Overview—UM Ports and the UM Group

538 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 11.8 PBX Configuration—[3-8] Group—PS Ring Group
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

11.8 PBX Configuration—[3-8] Group—PS Ring

Group
A PS ring group is a group of PS extensions that receives incoming calls. Each group has a floating extension
number and name. One PS can belong to multiple PS ring groups. A maximum of 32 PS ring groups can be
programmed, each containing up to 128 PS extensions.
To add PSs to the PS Ring Group, click Member List.

Floating Extension Number

Specifies the floating extension number of the PS ring group.

Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)

Feature Guide References

5.2.4.2 PS Ring Group

Group Name
Specifies the name of the PS ring group, which will be shown on the display of extensions that call the PS ring
group when Incoming Trunk Call Information Display on this screen is set to Called Number.

Value Range
Max. 20 characters

Feature Guide References

5.2.4.2 PS Ring Group

Incoming Trunk Call Information Display

Specifies the information of the incoming trunk call to be shown on the displays of the PSs that belong to the
PS ring group. If the caller’s name or called party’s name is not recognised, the telephone number will be
shown.

Value Range
Caller ID, Called Number

Feature Guide References

5.2.4.2 PS Ring Group

PC Programming Manual 539

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
11.8.1 PBX Configuration—[3-8] Group—PS Ring Group—Member List
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

11.8.1 PBX Configuration—[3-8] Group—PS Ring Group—Member

List
Each PS Ring Group can have up to 128 PS extensions assigned. Select the group to programme from the
PS Ring Group Number list.
To assign members to the PS Ring Group, enter directly or click Extension No. Setting (see 2.1.6 Extension
Number Setting). To copy members to another group, click Member list copy, select the group, and click
OK.

Extension Number
Specifies the extension number of the PS assigned to the PS Ring Group.

Value Range
Max. 5 digits

PC Programming Manual References

11.8 PBX Configuration—[3-8] Group—PS Ring Group
12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings

Feature Guide References

5.2.4.2 PS Ring Group

Extension Name
Indicates the name of the PS (reference only).

Value Range
Max. 20 characters

PC Programming Manual References

11.8 PBX Configuration—[3-8] Group—PS Ring Group
12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings

Feature Guide References

5.2.4.2 PS Ring Group

540 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 11.9 PBX Configuration—[3-9] Group—Conference Group
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

11.9 PBX Configuration—[3-9] Group—Conference

Group
A conference group is a group of telephones (extensions or outside destinations) that ring when a conference
group call is made. One destination number can be assigned to multiple conference groups. Up to 31 members
can be assigned to each of 8 conference groups. To assign members to a group, click Member List.
When Broadcast Mode is set to "Disable", only up to 7 members can be assigned to a group. All of these
members are automatically allowed to speak when the call starts.

Conference Group Name

Specifies the name of the conference group.

Value Range
Max. 20 characters

Feature Guide References

2.15.1 Conference Group Call

Broadcast Mode
Specifies whether only the original caller can speak or up to 8 people can speak at the start of a conference
group call.

Value Range
Disable: The original caller and up to 7 participants can speak at the start of a conference group call.
Enable: Only the original caller can speak at the start of a conference group call.

Feature Guide References

2.15.1 Conference Group Call

Ability to Talk
Enables PT, SLT and PS users to use the push-to-talk feature during a conference group call, when
Broadcast Mode is set to "Enable". The push-to-talk feature allows PT, SLT and PS users to speak during
the call by pressing any of their dial keys.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

PC Programming Manual References

11.9 PBX Configuration—[3-9] Group—Conference Group— Broadcast Mode

Feature Guide References

2.15.1 Conference Group Call

PC Programming Manual 541

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
11.9 PBX Configuration—[3-9] Group—Conference Group
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Automatic Answer w/o Extension Setting

Specifies if the extensions of the conference will automatically answer a conference group call, even if
Hands-free Answerback is not set for those extensions. This setting can be used with PTs and KX-TCA175/
KX-TCA275/KX-TCA185/KX-TCA285/KX-TCA385 PSs.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

PC Programming Manual References

11.9 PBX Configuration—[3-9] Group—Conference Group— Broadcast Mode

Feature Guide References

2.15.1 Conference Group Call

542 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 11.9.1 PBX Configuration—[3-9] Group—Conference Group—Member List
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

11.9.1 PBX Configuration—[3-9] Group—Conference

Group—Member List
Up to 31 members can be assigned to each conference group. Select the group to programme from the
Conference Group No. list.
When Broadcast Mode is set to "Disable", only up to 7 members can be assigned to a group. All of these
members are automatically allowed to speak when the call starts.
To copy the numbers to another group, click Member list copy, select the group to copy to, and click OK.
To assign destinations for conference groups easily, click Extension No. Setting (see 2.1.6 Extension
Number Setting).

Dial Number
Specifies the destination number of each member of the conference group.

Value Range
Max. 32 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, #, [ ] [Secret], and P [Pause])

PC Programming Manual References

11.9 PBX Configuration—[3-9] Group—Conference Group

Feature Guide References

2.15.1 Conference Group Call

Extension Name
Indicates the name of the extension, when an extension number is specified in Dial Number above
(reference only).

Value Range
Max. 20 characters

PC Programming Manual References

12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings

Feature Guide References

2.15.1 Conference Group Call

PC Programming Manual 543

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
11.10 PBX Configuration—[3-10] Group—P2P Group
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

11.10 PBX Configuration—[3-10] Group—P2P Group

Settings for peer-to-peer (P2P) groups can be programmed.

P2P Group Name

Specifies the name of the P2P group.

Value Range
Max. 20 characters

Feature Guide References

5.2.3 Peer-to-Peer (P2P) Connection

Bandwidth Control
Specifies whether to use the bandwidth precedence setting of the P2P group for calling among different P2P
groups.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

Feature Guide References

5.2.3 Peer-to-Peer (P2P) Connection

544 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 11.11.1 PBX Configuration—[3-11-1] Group—VM(DPT) Group—System Settings
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

11.11 PBX Configuration—[3-11] Group—VM(DPT)

Group

11.11.1 PBX Configuration—[3-11-1] Group—VM(DPT)

Group—System Settings
A Panasonic Voice Processing System (VPS) with DPT Integration can be connected to DPT ports of the PBX.
The DPT ports that are connected to the VPS are called a VM (DPT) Group. 2 VM (DPT) Groups can be
programmed.

Call Waiting on VM Group

Enables the queuing of calls when all extension ports of the VM (DPT) group are busy. (Call Waiting tone is
not sent to any VM port.)

Value Range
Disable, Enable

PC Programming Manual References

9.22 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property—Extension Type

Feature Guide References

2.2.2.4 Queuing Feature
2.28.1 Voice Mail (VM) Group

Intercept to Mailbox for Call to Extension

Enables the PBX to send the mailbox number of the called extension to the VPS when a call is redirected to
the VM (DPT) group by Intercept Routing. When the VPS receives the mailbox number, the VPS answers the
call with the appropriate mailbox.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

PC Programming Manual References

9.22 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property—Extension Type
12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Intercept
Destination— Intercept Destination—When called party does not answer—Day, Lunch, Break, Night
12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings—Intercept
Destination— Intercept Destination—When called party does not answer—Day, Lunch, Break, Night

Feature Guide References

2.28.1 Voice Mail (VM) Group

PC Programming Manual 545

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
11.11.1 PBX Configuration—[3-11-1] Group—VM(DPT) Group—System Settings
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Overflow to Mailbox for Call to ICD Group

Enables the PBX to send the mailbox number of the called extension to the VM when a call is redirected from
an incoming call distribution group to the VM group by Intercept Routing. When the VPS receives the mailbox
number, it answers the call with the appropriate mailbox.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

Feature Guide References

2.28.1 Voice Mail (VM) Group
2.2.2 Incoming Call Distribution Group Features

Transfer Recall to Mailbox

Enables the PBX to send the mailbox number of the transfer destination extension to the VPS in these
situations: (1) when a call is transferred to an extension by the Call Transfer without Announcement feature
using the Automated Attendant (AA) service of the VPS, and the call is not answered within a programmed
time period; (2) when the VPS is assigned as the Transfer Recall destination of a certain extension. When the
VPS receives the mailbox number, the VPS answers the call with the appropriate mailbox.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

PC Programming Manual References

9.22 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property—Extension Type

Feature Guide References

2.28.1 Voice Mail (VM) Group
2.28.3 Voice Mail DPT (Digital) Integration

546 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 11.11.2 PBX Configuration—[3-11-2] Group—VM(DPT) Group—Unit Settings
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

11.11.2 PBX Configuration—[3-11-2] Group—VM(DPT)

Group—Unit Settings
A VM (DPT) group has a floating extension number, which can be assigned as the destination for redirected
calls and incoming calls.
To assign extension numbers to the group, click Member List. To view a list of all programmed extension
numbers and types, click Extension List View.

Floating Extension No.

Specifies the floating extension number of the VM (DPT) group.

Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)

PC Programming Manual References

9.22 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property—Extension Type

Feature Guide References

2.28.1 Voice Mail (VM) Group
2.28.3 Voice Mail DPT (Digital) Integration

Group Name
Specifies the name of the VM (DPT) group, which will be shown on the display of extensions that call the VM
(DPT) group.

Value Range
Max. 20 characters

PC Programming Manual References

9.22 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property—Extension Type

Feature Guide References

2.28.1 Voice Mail (VM) Group
2.28.3 Voice Mail DPT (Digital) Integration

PC Programming Manual 547

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
11.11.2 PBX Configuration—[3-11-2] Group—VM(DPT) Group—Unit Settings
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

11.11.2.1 PBX Configuration—[3-11-2] Group—VM(DPT) Group—Unit

Settings—Member List
Displays information on the settings of all relevant ports. Only ports set to VM(DPT) in DPT Type—Type of
9.22 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property—Extension Type will be displayed. In
addition, the other information displayed here can also be set in 9.22 PBX Configuration—[1-1]
Configuration—Slot—Port Property—Extension Type.

Shelf
Indicates the shelf position (reference only).

Value Range
Shelf number

PC Programming Manual References

11.11.2 PBX Configuration—[3-11-2] Group—VM(DPT) Group—Unit Settings

Slot
Indicates the slot position (reference only).

Value Range
Slot number

PC Programming Manual References

11.11.2 PBX Configuration—[3-11-2] Group—VM(DPT) Group—Unit Settings

Port
Indicates the port number (reference only).

Value Range
Port number

PC Programming Manual References

11.11.2 PBX Configuration—[3-11-2] Group—VM(DPT) Group—Unit Settings

Feature Guide References

5.2.6 Extension Port Configuration

VM Unit No.
Indicates the unit number of the connected VPS (reference only).

Value Range
1, 2

548 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 11.11.2 PBX Configuration—[3-11-2] Group—VM(DPT) Group—Unit Settings
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

PC Programming Manual References

11.11.2 PBX Configuration—[3-11-2] Group—VM(DPT) Group—Unit Settings

Feature Guide References

2.28.1 Voice Mail (VM) Group

VM Port No.
Indicates the VM port number for the port (reference only).

Value Range
1-12

PC Programming Manual References

11.11.2 PBX Configuration—[3-11-2] Group—VM(DPT) Group—Unit Settings

Feature Guide References

2.28.1 Voice Mail (VM) Group

Extension No.
Indicates the extension number assigned to the VM port (reference only).

Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)

PC Programming Manual References

11.11.2 PBX Configuration—[3-11-2] Group—VM(DPT) Group—Unit Settings
11.12.2 PBX Configuration—[3-12-2] Group—VM(DTMF) Group—Group Settings

Feature Guide References

2.28.1 Voice Mail (VM) Group
2.28.3 Voice Mail DPT (Digital) Integration

Extension Name
Indicates the name of the extension (reference only).

Value Range
Max. 20 characters

PC Programming Manual References

11.11.2 PBX Configuration—[3-11-2] Group—VM(DPT) Group—Unit Settings

PC Programming Manual 549

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
11.11.2 PBX Configuration—[3-11-2] Group—VM(DPT) Group—Unit Settings
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Feature Guide References

2.28.1 Voice Mail (VM) Group
2.28.3 Voice Mail DPT (Digital) Integration

550 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 11.12.1 PBX Configuration—[3-12-1] Group—VM(DTMF) Group—System Settings
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

11.12 PBX Configuration—[3-12] Group—VM(DTMF)

Group

11.12.1 PBX Configuration—[3-12-1] Group—VM(DTMF)

Group—System Settings
A Panasonic Voice Processing System (VPS) with DTMF Integration can be connected to SLT ports of the
PBX. The SLT ports that are connected to the VPS are called a VM (DTMF) Group. 2 VM (DTMF) Groups can
be programmed. For more information on Voice Mail groups and DTMF integration, see 2.28.1 Voice Mail
(VM) Group and 2.28.2 Voice Mail DTMF Integration in the Feature Guide.

VM DTMF Status Signal—Ringback Tone

Specifies the DTMF status signal the PBX sends to the VPS when the called extension is ringing.

Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, #, and P [pause])

VM DTMF Status Signal—Busy Tone

Specifies the DTMF status signal the PBX sends to the VPS when the called extension is busy.

Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, #, and P [pause])

VM DTMF Status Signal—Reorder Tone

Specifies the DTMF status signal the PBX sends to the VPS when the dialled number is invalid.

Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, #, and P [pause])

VM DTMF Status Signal—DND Tone

Specifies the DTMF status signal the PBX sends to the VPS when the called extension is in DND mode.

Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, #, and P [pause])

VM DTMF Status Signal—Answer

Specifies the DTMF status signal the PBX sends to the VPS when the called extension has answered the call.

Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, #, and P [pause])

PC Programming Manual 551

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
11.12.1 PBX Configuration—[3-12-1] Group—VM(DTMF) Group—System Settings
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

VM DTMF Status Signal—Confirm

Specifies the DTMF status signal the PBX sends to the VPS when a certain feature (e.g., Message Waiting)
has been successfully set or cancelled on an extension.

Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, #, and P [pause])

VM DTMF Status Signal—Disconnect

Specifies the DTMF status signal the PBX sends to the VPS when the caller hangs up.

Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, #, and P [pause])

VM DTMF Status Signal—FWD to VM Ringback Tone

Specifies the DTMF status signal the PBX sends to the VPS when the call has been forwarded to the VPS and
the PBX is calling another port of the VPS.

Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, #, and P [pause])

VM DTMF Status Signal—FWD to VM Busy Tone

Specifies the DTMF status signal the PBX sends to the VPS when the call has been forwarded to the VPS and
all ports of the VPS are busy.

Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, #, and P [pause])

VM DTMF Status Signal—FWD to Extension Ringback Tone

Specifies the DTMF status signal the PBX sends to the VPS when the call has been forwarded to another
extension and the PBX is calling the destination extension.

Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, #, and P [pause])

VM DTMF Command—Recording Message

Specifies the DTMF command the PBX sends to the VPS when a call is forwarded, intercepted, or transferred
to the VPS, so that the caller can leave a message in a certain mailbox.

Value Range
Max. 16 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, #, H [mailbox number], and P [pause])

VM DTMF Command—Listening Message

Specifies the DTMF command the PBX sends to the VPS when an extension user answers a message waiting
notification from the VPS, so that the extension user can retrieve a new message in a certain mailbox without
having to dial the mailbox number manually.

552 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 11.12.1 PBX Configuration—[3-12-1] Group—VM(DTMF) Group—System Settings
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Value Range
Max. 16 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, #, H [mailbox number], and P [pause])

Feature Guide References

2.20.1 Message Waiting

VM DTMF Command—Switching to AA
Specifies the DTMF command the PBX sends to the VPS to switch from VM Service Mode to AA Service Mode.

Value Range
Max. 16 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, #, H [mailbox number], and P [pause])

VM DTMF Command—Switching to VM
Specifies the DTMF command the PBX sends to the VPS to switch from AA Service Mode to VM Service Mode.

Value Range
Max. 16 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, #, H [mailbox number], and P [pause])

Timing—DTMF Length for VM

Specifies the length of DTMF signals the PBX sends to the VPS.

Value Range
80 ms, 160 ms

Timing—Inter-digit Time
Specifies the length of pause time between DTMF signals the PBX sends to the VPS.

Value Range
80 ms, 160 ms

Timing—Waiting Time before Sending Follow on ID

Specifies the length of time that the PBX waits before sending the Follow on ID to the VPS after the VPS has
answered a call.

Value Range
0.5 s, 1.0 s, 1.5 s, 2.0 s

Timing—Waiting Time before Sending VM DTMF Status Signal

Specifies the length of time that the PBX waits before sending the DTMF status signal to the VPS after the
VPS has finished dialling.

Value Range
0.5 s, 1.0 s, 1.5 s, 2.0 s

PC Programming Manual 553

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
11.12.1 PBX Configuration—[3-12-1] Group—VM(DTMF) Group—System Settings
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Others—Call Waiting on VM Group

Enables the queuing of calls when all extension ports of the VM (DTMF) group are busy. (Call Waiting tone is
not sent to any VM port.)

Value Range
Disable, Enable

Feature Guide References

2.2.2.4 Queuing Feature

Others—FWD to the VPS Sequence

Specifies which DTMF commands the VPS receives from the PBX when a call is forwarded to the VPS, so
that the VPS can answer the call either with a mailbox or in the AA service mode. It is also possible to send
no DTMF signal to the VPS.

Value Range
None, Answer by Mailbox, AA

Others—Intercept Routing to the VPS Sequence

Specifies which DTMF commands the VPS receives from the PBX when a call is intercepted to the VPS, so
that the VPS can answer the call either with a mailbox or in the AA service mode. It is also possible to send
no DTMF signal to the VPS.

Value Range
None, Answer by Mailbox, AA

Others—Mailbox for Extension

Specifies whether the mailboxes use the same numbers as the extensions and incoming call distribution
groups, or use different numbers as programmed for each extension or incoming call distribution group.

Value Range
Extension Number, Programmed Mailbox Number

PC Programming Manual References

11.5.1 PBX Configuration—[3-5-1] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings
12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings
12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings

Others—Message Waiting Lamp Control

Specifies whether the PBX or VPS cancels the Message Waiting feature (e.g., turning off the MESSAGE button
light) when an extension user answers the message waiting notification from the VPS.

Value Range
By PBX, BY VM

554 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 11.12.2 PBX Configuration—[3-12-2] Group—VM(DTMF) Group—Group Settings
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

11.12.2 PBX Configuration—[3-12-2] Group—VM(DTMF)

Group—Group Settings
A VM (DTMF) group has a floating extension number, and can be assigned as the destination for redirected
calls and incoming calls. To assign members to the group, click Member List. To view a list of all programmed
extension numbers and types, click Extension List View.

Floating Ext. No.

Specifies the floating extension number of the VM (DTMF) group.

Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)

Feature Guide References

2.28.1 Voice Mail (VM) Group

Group Name
Specifies the name of the VM (DTMF) group, which will be shown on the display of extensions that call the VM
(DTMF) group.

Value Range
Max. 20 characters

Feature Guide References

2.28.1 Voice Mail (VM) Group

Type
Specifies the initial service mode in which the VPS answers calls.

Value Range
AA, VM

Feature Guide References

2.28.2 Voice Mail DTMF Integration

PC Programming Manual 555

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
11.12.2 PBX Configuration—[3-12-2] Group—VM(DTMF) Group—Group Settings
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

11.12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[3-12-2] Group—VM(DTMF)

Group—Group Settings—Member List
Select the group to programme from the VM(DTMF) Group Number list.
To assign members to the group, enter directly or click Extension No. Setting (see 2.1.6 Extension Number
Setting). To copy members to another group, click Member list copy, select the group, and then click OK.

Extension Number of the SLT Port Connected to VM

Specifies the extension number assigned to the SLT port that is connected to the VPS.

Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)

PC Programming Manual References

11.12.2 PBX Configuration—[3-12-2] Group—VM(DTMF) Group—Group Settings

Feature Guide References

2.28.2 Voice Mail DTMF Integration

Extension Name
Indicates the name of the extension (reference only).

Value Range
Max. 20 characters

PC Programming Manual References

11.12.2 PBX Configuration—[3-12-2] Group—VM(DTMF) Group—Group Settings

Feature Guide References

2.28.2 Voice Mail DTMF Integration

556 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Section 12
PBX Configuration—[4] Extension

This section serves as reference operating instructions

for the Extension menu of the PBX Configuration Menu
of the Setup screen of Web Maintenance Console.

PC Programming Manual 557

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

12.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1] Extension—Wired

Extension

12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired

Extension—Extension Settings
For each slot in which an extension card is installed, a certain number of extension ports are displayed. For
each extension port, various extension settings can be assigned.
To search for a specific extension, enter the extension number or the extension name in the search box and
click Find Next.
To copy the settings of an extension to another extension, click Copy to. The copied data includes FWD/DND,
personal speed dialling, and flexible button settings.
To assign a set of CLIP numbers automatically, click CLIP Generate.
The Shelf, Slot, and Port for each item are displayed for your reference. For details, see Common
Programming Reference Items in 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot.

Main
Extension Number
Specifies the extension number of the extension.

Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)

Extension Name
Specifies the name of the extension.

Value Range
Max. 20 characters

Port Type
Indicates the extension port type (reference only).

Value Range
DPT: DPT port (DLC)
SLT: SLT port (MCSLC)
S-Hybrid: Super Hybrid port (DHLC)
S-Hybrid(SLT): XDP port of Super Hybrid port (DHLC)
S-Hybrid(S-DPT): Digital XDP port of Super Hybrid port (DHLC)
DPT(S-DPT): Digital XDP port of DPT port (DLC)
ISDN: ISDN port (BRI/PRI)
IP-EXT: IP-Extension port (V-IPEXT)
SIP: General SIP Extension port (V-SIPEXT)
SIP-MLT: KX-UT series SIP phone/S-PS/SIP-CS Extension port (V-UTEXT)
UM: Unified Messaging System Extension port

558 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Telephone Type
Indicates the type of telephone connected to the extension port (reference only).

Value Range
DPT (15V)/DPT (40V): DPT is connected.
APT (15V): APT is connected.
DSS: DSS Console is connected.
VM: VPS is connected.
ISDN-Extension: ISDN telephone is connected.
CS: CS is connected.
IP-PT: IP-PT belonging to the V-IPEXT card is connected.
P-SIP: Panasonic SIP Phone is connected.
UT: KX-UT series SIP phone is connected.
SIP: General SIP Extension is connected.
S-PS: SIP Portable Station is connected.
SIP-CS: SIP Cell Station is connected.
CS-M: High-density CS is connected with its master port.
CS-S1–3: High-density CS is connected with its slave port.
No Connection: No telephone is connected.
UNKNOWN: SLT is connected (or no telephone is connected to the Super Hybrid or SLT port).

User Group
Specifies the extension user group to which the extension belongs. Extension user groups are used to compose
tenants, call pickup groups and paging groups.

Value Range
1–32

Feature Guide References

5.1.2 Group
5.1.3 Tenant Service

COS
Specifies the COS of the extension.

Value Range
1–64

PC Programming Manual References

10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System—Class of Service—COS Settings

Feature Guide References

5.1.1 Class of Service (COS)

Extension PIN
Specifies the PIN of the extension.

PC Programming Manual 559

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

CAUTION
There is a risk that fraudulent telephone calls will be made if a third party discovers a personal identification
number (PIN) (verification code PIN or extension PIN) of the PBX.
The cost of such calls will be billed to the owner/renter of the PBX.
To protect the PBX from this kind of fraudulent use, we strongly recommend:
a. Keeping PINs secret.
b. Selecting complex, random PINs that cannot be easily guessed.
c. Changing PINs frequently.
To change an Extension PIN:
1. Click Edit under Extension PIN for the extension to change.
2. In the window that appears, enter the new extension PIN and then enter it again to confirm it.
3. Click OK.
Value Range
Max. 10 digits (consisting of 0–9)

Feature Guide References

2.24.1 Extension Personal Identification Number (PIN)

Intercept Destination
Extension Number
Specifies the extension number of the extension.

Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)

Extension Name
Specifies the name of the extension.

Value Range
Max. 20 characters

Intercept Destination—When called party does not answer—Day, Lunch,

Break, Night
Specifies the Intercept Routing destination of calls in each time mode for Intercept Routing–No Answer and
Intercept Routing–DND.
Note that Intercept Routing–Busy calls are routed using Intercept Destination—When Called Party is
Busy below.

Value Range
Max. 32 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, #, [ ] [Secret], and P [Pause])

PC Programming Manual References

12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Intercept
Destination— Intercept Destination—When Called Party is Busy

560 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Feature Guide References

2.1.1.6 Intercept Routing

Intercept Destination—When Called Party is Busy

Specifies the Intercept Routing destination of calls when the extension is busy.

Value Range
Max. 32 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, #, [ ] [Secret], and P [Pause])

Feature Guide References

2.1.1.6 Intercept Routing

Intercept No Answer Time

Extension Number
Specifies the extension number of the extension.

Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)

Extension Name
Specifies the name of the extension.

Value Range
Max. 20 characters

Intercept No Answer Time—Day, Lunch, Break, Night

Specifies the length of time until an unanswered call is redirected to the intercept routing destination in each
time mode.
When this setting is set to "0", the system timer is used.

Value Range
0–240 s

PC Programming Manual References

10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3] System—Timers & Counters—Dial / IRNA / Recall / Tone— Intercept Routing
No Answer (IRNA)—Day (s), Lunch (s), Break (s), Night (s)

Feature Guide References

2.1.1.6 Intercept Routing

PC Programming Manual 561

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

CLIP
Extension Number
Specifies the extension number of the extension.

Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)

Extension Name
Specifies the name of the extension.

Value Range
Max. 20 characters

CLIP ID
Specifies the CLIP number sent to the public network to show on the called party’s telephone display when
making a trunk call.

Value Range
Max. 16 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)

Feature Guide References

4.1.2.2 Calling/Connected Line Identification Presentation (CLIP/COLP)

CLIP on Extension/CO
Selects the CLIP number to show on the called party’s telephone.

Value Range
Extension: Show the CLIP number specified in CLIP ID.
CO: Show the CLIP number specified in Subscriber Number in 9.26 PBX Configuration—[1-1]
Configuration—Slot—Port Property - BRI Port or 9.27 PBX Configuration—[1-1]
Configuration—Slot—Port Property - PRI Port.

PC Programming Manual References

9.26 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - BRI Port—ISDN CO— Subscriber
Number
9.27 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - PRI Port—CO Setting— Subscriber
Number
12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings—CLIP— CLIP ID

Feature Guide References

4.1.2.2 Calling/Connected Line Identification Presentation (CLIP/COLP)

562 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

CLIR
Specifies whether to restrict the display of the CLIP number on the called party’s telephone when making a
public network trunk call.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

Feature Guide References

4.1.2.2 Calling/Connected Line Identification Presentation (CLIP/COLP)

COLR
Specifies whether to restrict the display of the CLIP number of the extension on the caller’s telephone display
when answering a call.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

Feature Guide References

4.1.2.2 Calling/Connected Line Identification Presentation (CLIP/COLP)

UM
Extension Number
Specifies the extension number of the extension.

Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)

Extension Name
Specifies the name of the extension.

Value Range
Max. 20 characters

Two-way Recording
Specifies whether to enable the two-way recording feature for the extension using the Unified Messaging
system.

Value Range
Enable, Disable

Feature Guide References

3.2.2.30 Two-way Record/Two-way Transfer

PC Programming Manual 563

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Option 1
Extension Number
Specifies the extension number of the extension.

Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)

Extension Name
Specifies the name of the extension.

Value Range
Max. 20 characters

Wireless XDP / Shared Extension

Specifies the extension number of the PS with which Wireless XDP Parallel Mode is established. To enable
Wireless XDP Parallel Mode, the PS must be turned off once and then turned on after assigning this setting.
This setting also specifies the sub extension for the main extension of a one-numbered extension.

Note
When Wireless XDP, S-PSs cannot be used with this setting.

Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)

Feature Guide References

2.11.11 One-numbered Extension
5.2.4.5 Wireless XDP Parallel Mode

Ring Pattern Table

Specifies the Ring Tone Pattern Table to be used by the extension.

Value Range
1–8

PC Programming Manual References

10.8.1 PBX Configuration—[2-8-1] System—Ring Tone Patterns—Call from CO
10.8.2 PBX Configuration—[2-8-2] System—Ring Tone Patterns—Call from DOORPHONE
10.8.3 PBX Configuration—[2-8-3] System—Ring Tone Patterns—Call from Others

Feature Guide References

2.1.3.2 Ring Tone Pattern Selection

564 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Programmed Mailbox No.

Specifies the mailbox number of the incoming call distribution group’s mailbox for Voice Processing Systems
(VPS) with DTMF Integration.

Value Range
Max. 16 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)

Transfer Recall Destination

Specifies the transfer recall destination when an extension user transfers a call with the Call Transfer without
Announcement feature and the transferred call is not answered within a certain time period.

Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)

Feature Guide References

2.12.1 Call Transfer

ARS Itemised Code

Specifies the itemised billing code used by the ARS feature for identifying calls made from the extension for
accounting and billing purposes.

Value Range
Max. 10 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)

PC Programming Manual References

16.5 PBX Configuration—[8-5] ARS—Carrier

Feature Guide References

2.7.6 Verification Code Entry
2.8.1 Automatic Route Selection (ARS)

Option 2
Extension Number
Specifies the extension number of the extension.

Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)

Extension Name
Specifies the name of the extension.

Value Range
Max. 20 characters

PC Programming Manual 565

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Manual C. Waiting for Extension Call

Selects the method of receiving call waiting notification from other extensions.

Value Range
Off: No notification
BSS: Tone from the handset or built-in speaker
OHCA: Voice from the built-in speaker
W-OHCA: Voice from the handset

Feature Guide References

2.1.3.3 Call Waiting
2.10.4.1 Second Call Notification to Busy Extension—SUMMARY

Automatic C. Waiting
Specifies whether to receive call waiting notifications for calls from a trunk, doorphone calls, and calls via an
incoming call distribution group.

Value Range
Off, On

Feature Guide References

2.1.3.3 Call Waiting

Pickup Dial Set

Sets or cancels the Hot Line feature. The number specified in Pickup Dial No. on this screen is dialled
automatically after going off-hook when the Hot Line feature is active.

Value Range
Off, On

PC Programming Manual References

10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3] System—Timers & Counters—Dial / IRNA / Recall / Tone— Dial—Hot Line
(Pickup Dial) Start (s)

Feature Guide References

2.6.6 Hot Line

Pickup Dial No.

Specifies the number to be dialled automatically after going off-hook when the Hot Line feature is active.

Value Range
Max. 32 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, #, T [Transfer], [ ] [Secret], P [Pause], and F [Flash])

566 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Feature Guide References

2.6.6 Hot Line

Data Mode
Sets or cancels the protection against tones or interruptions from other extensions during communication.

Value Range
Off, On

Feature Guide References

2.11.5 Data Line Security

Option 3
Extension Number
Specifies the extension number of the extension.

Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)

Extension Name
Specifies the name of the extension.

Value Range
Max. 20 characters

Call Pickup Deny

Specifies whether calls can be picked up by other extensions.

Value Range
Disable: Allows other extension users to pick up calls to your extension
Enable: Prevents other extension users from picking up calls to your extension

Feature Guide References

2.4.3 Call Pickup

Call Pickup Group Monitoring

Specifies how incoming calls that can be answered by an extension in a pickup group are indicated on a PT
(display, tone, etc.).

Value Range
Display & Tone1, Display & Tone2, Display & Tone3, Display only, Disable

Note
• Supported terminals are: DPT, DPT (S-DPT), S-Hybrid, S-Hybrid (S-DPT), IP-EXT

PC Programming Manual 567

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

• Depending on system programming, the number of terminals may be limited to 256. For more
information, consult your dealer.

Feature Guide References

2.4.3 Call Pickup

Executive Override Deny

Specifies whether calls can be interrupted by other extensions.

Value Range
Disable: Allows other extension users to interrupt an existing call
Enable: Prevents other extension users from interrupting an existing call

Feature Guide References

2.10.2 Executive Busy Override

Absent Message
Specifies the Personal Absent Message which, unlike the System Absent Message, can be customised for
each extension.

Value Range
Max. 16 characters

Feature Guide References

2.20.2 Absent Message

Charge Limit
Specifies the maximum limit of call charges allowed for the extension. When this limit is reached, the extension
cannot be used to make further trunk calls.
The number of decimal places that can be specified here depends on the value set in Charge
Options—Digits After Decimal Point in 14.2 PBX Configuration—[6-2] Feature—Hotel & Charge.

Value Range
0–9999999

PC Programming Manual References

14.2 PBX Configuration—[6-2] Feature—Hotel & Charge

Feature Guide References

2.7.2 Budget Management

568 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Intercom Call by Voice

Selects the method of receiving intercom calls. When Deny Voice Call is selected, the extension will always
ring when receiving calls, regardless of how the caller wants to make the call.

Value Range
Tone Call, Voice Call, Deny Voice Call

Feature Guide References

2.5.3 Intercom Call

Option 4
Extension Number
Specifies the extension number of the extension.

Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)

Extension Name
Specifies the name of the extension.

Value Range
Max. 20 characters

Outgoing Preferred Line

Selects the line to be seized after going off-hook to make a call.

Value Range
No Line: No line is seized.
Idle: An idle trunk is seized automatically from the programmed trunk groups.
ICM/PDN: An extension line is seized, or, for a PDN extension, an idle PDN button is selected.
F-1–F-84: A trunk programmed for a flexible button (F-1–F-84) is seized. A flexible button customised as a
Single-CO, Group-CO, Loop-CO, or ICD Group button must be selected.

PC Programming Manual References

12.1.4 PBX Configuration—[4-1-4] Extension—Wired Extension—Flexible Button

Feature Guide References

2.5.5.2 Line Preference—Outgoing

Incoming Preferred Line

Selects the line on which an incoming call is answered after going off-hook.
Note that even if a specific PDN button is selected here, a call ringing at any PDN button on the extension will
be answered when going off-hook.

PC Programming Manual 569

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Value Range
No Line: No line is selected. Select a line by pressing the desired Line Access button to answer a call.
Ringing Line: The longest ringing call is selected.
PDN: The call arriving at any PDN button is selected.
F-1–F-84: The call arriving at a flexible button (F-1–F-84) is selected. A flexible button customised as a
Single-CO, Group-CO, Loop-CO, or ICD Group button must be selected.

PC Programming Manual References

12.1.4 PBX Configuration—[4-1-4] Extension—Wired Extension—Flexible Button

Feature Guide References

2.4.2 Line Preference—Incoming

Call Waiting Tone Type

Selects the type of Call Waiting tone sent to the busy extension.

Value Range
CW Tone 1, CW Tone 2

Feature Guide References

2.10.4.2 Call Waiting Tone

LCS Recording Mode

Specifies whether to continue or stop recording the message in the extension’s mailbox when the extension
user answers a call that was being monitored.

Value Range
Stop Record, Keep Record

Feature Guide References

3.1.1 Unified Messaging System Overview

LCS Answer Mode

Specifies whether the extension’s mailbox is monitored in Hands-free or Private mode.

Value Range
Hands free: Monitor through the built-in speaker
Private: Monitor through the handset or the built-in speaker after hearing a warning tone

Feature Guide References

2.11.1 Hands-free Operation
3.1.1 Unified Messaging System Overview

570 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Option 5
Extension Number
Specifies the extension number of the extension.

Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)

Extension Name
Specifies the name of the extension.

Value Range
Max. 20 characters

Display Language
Selects the display language of the extension telephone.

Value Range
Language1–Language5

Feature Guide References

2.21.4 Display Information

Incoming Call Display

Selects which caller information is shown on the first line of the extension’s display.

Value Range
Caller ID Name, CO Line Name, DDI/DID Name

Feature Guide References

2.21.4 Display Information

Automatic LCD Switch when Start Talking

Enables the first line of the display to show the call duration automatically after answering a trunk call.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

Feature Guide References

2.21.4 Display Information

Key Pad Tone

Specifies whether key pad tones are heard when dialling.

PC Programming Manual 571

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Value Range
Off, On

Automatic Answer for CO Call

Enables the extension to answer an incoming trunk call automatically after a certain number of rings without
going off-hook, when Hands-free Answerback has been set on the extension. This setting is only effective
when Forced Automatic Answer on this screen has been set to Off.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

Feature Guide References

2.4.4 Hands-free Answerback

Option 6
Extension Number
Specifies the extension number of the extension.

Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)

Extension Name
Specifies the name of the extension.

Value Range
Max. 20 characters

Forced Automatic Answer

Specifies whether the extension automatically answers all incoming calls (both intercom and trunk calls) without
going off-hook, regardless of the Hands-free Answerback setting.

Value Range
Off, On

Flexible Button Programming Mode

Specifies whether the extension user can modify all flexible buttons without limitation, or only the One-touch
Dialling buttons. When the mode is set to One-touch Dial, there is no need to enter "2" before the number
when customising a One-touch Dialling button.

Value Range
No Limitation, One-touch Dial

572 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

ICM Tone
Selects the ring tone for incoming calls arriving at the INTERCOM button or PDN buttons. Note that the ring
tone specified here is applied to all PDN buttons on an extension.

Value Range
IP-PT (except KX-NT265/KX-NT321): 1–30
KX-NT265/KX-NT321: 1–8 (Even if ring tone 9–30 is selected, ring tone 1 is heard.)
Other telephones: 1–8 (Even if ring tone 9–30 is selected, ring tone 2 is heard.)

Display Lock/SVM Lock

Locks or unlocks the Incoming Call Log display (i.e., specifies whether other extension users can see the
Incoming Call Log information at the extension).

Value Range
Unlock, Lock

Feature Guide References

2.19.2 Incoming Call Log

Paging Deny
Specifies whether paging of the extension from other extensions is enabled.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

Feature Guide References

2.17.1 Paging

Option 7
Extension Number
Specifies the extension number of the extension.

Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)

Extension Name
Specifies the name of the extension.

Value Range
Max. 20 characters

Character Input Mode

Selects the character table to be used for entering characters.

PC Programming Manual 573

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Value Range
Table 1: Standard mode
Table 2: Option mode

Flash Mode during CO Conversation

Selects the function of the FLASH/RECALL button during a trunk conversation.

Value Range
EFA, Terminate, Flash Recall

Feature Guide References

2.11.6 Flash/Recall/Terminate
2.11.7 External Feature Access (EFA)

Incoming Call Log Memory

Specifies the number of incoming trunk calls that are retained in the extension’s Incoming Call Log memory.

Value Range
0–100

Feature Guide References

2.19.2 Incoming Call Log

Outgoing Call Log Memory

Specifies the number of telephone numbers dialled by the extension that are retained in the extension’s
Outgoing Call Log memory.

Value Range
1–100

Feature Guide References

2.6.3 Last Number Redial

ISDN Bearer
Selects the ISDN bearer mode. When Automatic is selected, the bearer mode is set automatically depending
on the extension’s telephone type as follows:
PT: Speech
SLT: Audio

Value Range
Automatic, Speech, Audio

574 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Feature Guide References

4.1.2.1 Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN)—SUMMARY

Option 8
Extension Number
Specifies the extension number of the extension.

Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)

Extension Name
Specifies the name of the extension.

Value Range
Max. 20 characters

Group CW w/o Tone (Ring after Call)

Enables an incoming call to an incoming call distribution group to arrive at a previously busy extension at the
moment that the extension goes on-hook for the previous call.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

Extension Caller ID Sending

Enables the extension to send Caller ID information.

Note
This setting is available only when Port Type is set to one of the following.
SLT/S-Hybrid/S-Hybrid(S-DPT)/S-Hybrid(SLT)

Value Range
Disable, Enable

Feature Guide References

2.19.1 Caller ID

Incoming Call Wait Timer for Extension Caller ID

Specifies the length of time that the ringing for a call is delayed when the call follows immediately after the
previous unanswered call. When receiving two calls in quick succession (e.g., when a call waiting in a queue
is directed to an extension immediately after the previous unanswered call stops ringing), some SLTs require
a pause, after the first call stops ringing, to receive the second call’s Caller ID information.

Note
This setting is available only when Port Type is set to one of the following.
SLT/S-Hybrid/S-Hybrid(S-DPT)/S-Hybrid(SLT)

PC Programming Manual 575

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Value Range
0–15 s

Feature Guide References

2.19.1 Caller ID

SLT MW Mode
Enables the use of the Message Waiting Lamp on an SLT extension connected to the extension port.

Value Range
Disable, MW-Lamp

Feature Guide References

2.20.1 Message Waiting

Wrap-up Timer
Specifies the length of time that must pass after completing a call before an extension will accept another call
when logged in as a member of an Incoming Call Distribution Group.
This timer is used when " Options—Wrap-up Timer based on" is set to "Extension" in 11.5.3 PBX
Configuration—[3-5-3] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Miscellaneous.

Value Range
0–3000 s

PC Programming Manual References

11.5.1.1 PBX Configuration—[3-5-1] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings—Member
List— Wrap-up Timer
11.5.3 PBX Configuration—[3-5-3] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Miscellaneous—
Options—Wrap-up Timer based on

Feature Guide References

2.2.2.8 Log-in/Log-out

Option 9
Extension Number
Specifies the extension number of the extension.

Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)

Extension Name
Specifies the name of the extension.

576 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Value Range
Max. 20 characters

PDN Delayed Ringing

Specifies the delayed ringing setting for calls to a PDN extension (an extension with one or more PDN buttons).

Value Range
Immediate, 1 Ring, 2 Rings, 3 Rings, 4 Rings, 5 Rings, 6 Rings

Feature Guide References

2.9.1 Primary Directory Number (PDN)/Secondary Directory Number (SDN) Extension

Built-in Communication Assistant

Specifies whether to enable or disable the Communication Assistant (CA) application for each extension.

Value Range
Disable, Basic Only, Enable

PC Programming Manual References

9.2.2 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property—Site—Port Number— Built-in
Communication Assistant Server

Feature Guide References

2.26.2 CA (Communication Assistant)

Mobile Extension
Specifies whether to enable or disable mobile extension features (with a cellular phone or other outside
destination) for the extension.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

Feature Guide References

2.27.1 Cellular Phone Features—SUMMARY

FWD / DND
Call Forwarding (FWD) and Do Not Disturb (DND) settings for each extension can be referred. FWD and DND
settings can be programmed separately for each extension in 12.1.2 PBX Configuration—[4-1-2]
Extension—Wired Extension—FWD/DND.

Extension Number
Specifies the extension number of the extension.

PC Programming Manual 577

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)

Extension Name
Specifies the name of the extension.

Value Range
Max. 20 characters

FWD Mode for Call from CO

Indicates the forwarding type of incoming trunk calls (reference only).

Value Range
None, FWD All, FWD Busy, FWD N/A, FWD Busy N/A

PC Programming Manual References

12.1.2 PBX Configuration—[4-1-2] Extension—Wired Extension—FWD/DND

Feature Guide References

2.3.2 Call Forwarding (FWD)

FWD Destination for Call from CO

Indicates the forwarding destination of incoming trunk calls (reference only).

Value Range
Max. 32 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, #, [ ] [Secret], and P [Pause])

PC Programming Manual References

12.1.2 PBX Configuration—[4-1-2] Extension—Wired Extension—FWD/DND

Feature Guide References

2.3.2 Call Forwarding (FWD)

FWD Mode for Call from Extension

Indicates the forwarding type of incoming intercom calls (reference only).

Value Range
None, FWD All, FWD Busy, FWD N/A, FWD Busy N/A

PC Programming Manual References

12.1.2 PBX Configuration—[4-1-2] Extension—Wired Extension—FWD/DND

578 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Feature Guide References

2.3.2 Call Forwarding (FWD)

FWD Destination for Call from Extension

Indicates the forwarding destination of incoming intercom calls (reference only).

Value Range
Max. 32 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, #, [ ] [Secret], and P [Pause])

PC Programming Manual References

12.1.2 PBX Configuration—[4-1-2] Extension—Wired Extension—FWD/DND

Feature Guide References

2.3.2 Call Forwarding (FWD)

FWD No Answer Time

Specifies the length of time that an incoming call rings at the extension before the call is forwarded.

Value Range
0–120 s

PC Programming Manual References

12.1.2 PBX Configuration—[4-1-2] Extension—Wired Extension—FWD/DND

Feature Guide References

2.3.2 Call Forwarding (FWD)

Keep ring after FWD NA to CO

Specifies whether an extension continues to ring after forwarding an incoming call to an outside destination
via FWD N/A or FWD Busy N/A.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

PC Programming Manual References

12.1.2 PBX Configuration—[4-1-2] Extension—Wired Extension—FWD/DND

Feature Guide References

2.3.2 Call Forwarding (FWD)

PC Programming Manual 579

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Remote FWD COS

Specifies the COS that allows the FWD setting on the extension to be changed from another extension. This
COS must then be set for the extensions that will remotely change the FWD setting.

Value Range
Disable, 1–64

Feature Guide References

2.3.2 Call Forwarding (FWD)

580 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

12.1.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired

Extension—Extension Settings—CLIP Generate
CLIP Generate allows the CLIP numbers for a set of locations in series to be programmed together.
Pre-assigned CLIP numbers for those locations will be overwritten.
If a number generated here is longer than 16 digits, the additional digits will be discarded.

Location Entry—Beginning Entry Location (Ext. Number)

Specifies the extension number of the first location to be programmed.

Value Range
Wired extension number

PC Programming Manual References

12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings

Feature Guide References

4.1.2.2 Calling/Connected Line Identification Presentation (CLIP/COLP)

Location Entry—Number to Generate

Specifies the number of locations to be programmed.
A CLIP number will only be assigned to connected wired extensions, even if the number entered here is larger
than the total number of wired extensions.

Value Range
1–total number of connected wired extensions

PC Programming Manual References

12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings

Feature Guide References

4.1.2.2 Calling/Connected Line Identification Presentation (CLIP/COLP)

Parameter—Deleting Digits
Specifies the number of digits to be deleted from the start of an extension number when using it as part of the
CLIP number.

Value Range
0–5

PC Programming Manual References

12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings

PC Programming Manual 581

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Feature Guide References

4.1.2.2 Calling/Connected Line Identification Presentation (CLIP/COLP)

Parameter—Head of ID
Specifies a prefix number to be applied to all generated CLIP numbers.

Value Range
Max. 16 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)

PC Programming Manual References

12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings

Feature Guide References

4.1.2.2 Calling/Connected Line Identification Presentation (CLIP/COLP)

Parameter—Tail of ID
Specifies a suffix number to be applied to all generated CLIP numbers.

Value Range
Max. 16 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)

PC Programming Manual References

12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings

Feature Guide References

4.1.2.2 Calling/Connected Line Identification Presentation (CLIP/COLP)

582 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 12.1.2 PBX Configuration—[4-1-2] Extension—Wired Extension—FWD/DND
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

12.1.2 PBX Configuration—[4-1-2] Extension—Wired

Extension—FWD/DND
For each extension, separate Call Forwarding (FWD) and Do Not Disturb (DND) settings can be programmed
for incoming intercom and trunk calls. Select the desired extension from the Extension Number / Name list.
To copy the FWD/DND settings of an extension to another extension, click Copy to.

Forward / DND—For external calls

Specifies the FWD/DND setting for external calls.
If Always (All), Busy, No Answer, or Busy / No Answer is selected, the FWD destination field can be set.

Value Range
Always (All), Busy, No Answer, Busy / No Answer, Do Not Disturb, Off

Feature Guide References

2.3.1 Call Forwarding (FWD)/Do Not Disturb (DND)—SUMMARY

Forward / DND—For internal calls

Specifies the FWD/DND setting for internal calls.
If Always (All), Busy, No Answer, or Busy / No Answer is selected, the FWD destination field can be set.
If For both external calls and internal calls is checked, this setting becomes unavailable, and the value set
for external calls is applied to internal calls.

Value Range
Always (All), Busy, No Answer, Busy / No Answer, Do Not Disturb, Off

Feature Guide References

2.3.1 Call Forwarding (FWD)/Do Not Disturb (DND)—SUMMARY

PC Programming Manual 583

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
12.1.3 PBX Configuration—[4-1-3] Extension—Wired Extension—Speed Dial
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

12.1.3 PBX Configuration—[4-1-3] Extension—Wired

Extension—Speed Dial
Personal Speed Dialling allows extension users to dial frequently dialled numbers using two-digit speed dialling
numbers (00–99). A maximum of 100 Personal Speed Dialling numbers can be programmed for each
extension. Select the desired extension from the Extension Number / Name list.

Speed Dialling - Personal Name

Specifies the name of the Personal Speed Dialling number to call using the Personal Speed Dialling Directory
shown on the extension’s display.

Value Range
Max. 20 characters

Feature Guide References

2.6.4 Speed Dialling—Personal/System

Speed Dialling - Personal Number

Specifies the number to be dialled by the Personal Speed Dialling number.

Value Range
Max. 32 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, #, T [Transfer], [ ] [Secret], P [Pause], and F [Flash])

Feature Guide References

2.6.4 Speed Dialling—Personal/System

584 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 12.1.4 PBX Configuration—[4-1-4] Extension—Wired Extension—Flexible Button
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

12.1.4 PBX Configuration—[4-1-4] Extension—Wired

Extension—Flexible Button
Overview
Each flexible button can be customised to allow one-touch access to a certain feature. A maximum of 84 flexible
buttons can be customised for each extension. Select the desired extension from the Extension Number /
Name list.

KX-NT505 Flexible Buttons

KX-NT553/KX-NT556 IP-PTs can be connected to up to 4 KX-NT505 48 key add-on units. When an extension
that has one or more KX-NT505 units connected is selected in the Extension Number / Name list, Number
of Connections NT505 and NT505 Location No. are displayed. In Number of Connections NT505, specify
the number of connected KX-NT505 units (a maximum of 4). This configuration is available at the Installer level
only. Then, in NT505 Location No., select a KX-NT505 to program. Up to 48 flexible buttons can be
programmed for each KX-NT505 unit.

Note
Up to 64 KX-NT505 units can be connected to the PBX system.

Copying Flexible Button Settings

To copy the flexible button settings of an extension to another extension, click Copy to. This operation (Copy
to) is available at the User (Administrator) level.

Note
The Copy to button can be used with KX-NT505 units, even if the number of connected KX-NT505 units
differs between extensions. Settings for NT505 Location No. will be copied to the same number of the
copy target extension. However, if a matching NT505 Location No. does not exist at the target destination,
those settings will not be copied.

For more information on flexible buttons, see "2.21.2 Flexible Buttons" in the Feature Guide.
Once flexible buttons have been programmed, the Terminal Label Print utility can be used to print label sheets,
which can be attached to extension telephones for quick reference. For details, see 1.2.2.1 Editing and
Printing Terminal Labels in Off-line Mode.
To access the Super Master CS for related programming, click SIP-CS Web. The CS Web login screen will
open in your web browser.

Note
For this button to be enabled, you must specify the URL of the Super Master CS in the Utility—CS-Web
Connection screen. See 7.12 Utility—CS-Web Connection.

Type
Specifies the feature to be assigned to the flexible button.

Value Range
Not Stored, Loop CO, Single CO, Group CO, DSS, One-touch, ICD Group, Message Waiting, FWD/DND
(Both), FWD/DND (External), FWD/DND (Internal), Group Fwd (Both), Group Fwd (External), Group Fwd
(Internal), Account, Conference, Terminate, EFA, Charge, Call Park, Call Log, Log-in/Log-out, Hurry-up,
Wrap-up, System Alarm, Time Service, Answer, Release, TRS Level Change, ISDN Service, CLIR, COLR,
ISDN Hold, Headset, Time Service - Automatic/Manual, Check In, Check Out, Cleaned Up, Two-way
Record, Two-way Transfer, LCS, Voice Mail Transfer, NDSS, CTI, PDN, SDN, DN

PC Programming Manual 585

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
12.1.4 PBX Configuration—[4-1-4] Extension—Wired Extension—Flexible Button
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Notice
For each KX-UT series SIP phone that is connected to the PBX, at least one DN button must be assigned
to the extension. Without a DN button assigned, the extension will not be able to make or receive calls.

PC Programming Manual References

12.1.4.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-4] Extension—Wired Extension—Flexible Button—Flexible button data copy

Parameter Selection (for Single CO)

Specifies the trunk to be accessed.

Value Range
1–208

Feature Guide References

2.5.5.3 Trunk Access

Parameter Selection (for Group CO)

Specifies the trunk group to be accessed.

Value Range
1–64

Feature Guide References

2.5.5.3 Trunk Access

Parameter Selection (for Call Park)

Specifies whether a call is parked in an idle parking zone automatically or in a specific parking zone.

Value Range
Automatic, Specific

Feature Guide References

2.13.2 Call Park

Parameter Selection (for Log-in/Log-out)

Specifies which incoming call distribution groups that the extension belongs to are logged in to or logged out
from.

Value Range
None: The incoming call distribution group is selected manually.
All: All incoming call distribution groups that the extension belongs to.
Incoming Group: A pre-specified incoming call distribution group

586 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 12.1.4 PBX Configuration—[4-1-4] Extension—Wired Extension—Flexible Button
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Feature Guide References

2.2.2.8 Log-in/Log-out

Parameter Selection (for Time Service)

Selects which time modes are switched manually.

Value Range
All (Day/Night/Lunch/Break), Day/Night/Break, Day/Night/Lunch, Day/Night

Feature Guide References

5.1.4 Time Service

Parameter Selection (for TRS Level Change)

Specifies the TRS/Barring level to be used temporarily on a certain extension.

Value Range
Level 1–Level 7

Feature Guide References

2.7.1 Toll Restriction (TRS)/Call Barring (Barring)
2.7.4 Dial Tone Transfer

Parameter Selection (for Time Service - Automatic/Manual)

Specifies the Time Table to be used when the Time Service Switching Mode is set to Automatic.

Value Range
Table 1–Table 8

Feature Guide References

5.1.4 Time Service

Parameter Selection (for SDN)

Specifies the delayed ringing setting for calls arriving at an SDN button.

Value Range
Immediate, 1 Ring, 2 Rings, 3 Rings, 4 Rings, 5 Rings, 6 Rings, No Ring

Feature Guide References

2.9.1 Primary Directory Number (PDN)/Secondary Directory Number (SDN) Extension

Extension Number (for DSS)

Specifies the number of an extension to be accessed.

PC Programming Manual 587

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
12.1.4 PBX Configuration—[4-1-4] Extension—Wired Extension—Flexible Button
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)

Extension Number (for ICD Group)

Specifies the floating extension number of an incoming call distribution group to be accessed.

Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)

Extension Number (for Message Waiting)

Specifies the number of an extension or floating extension number of an incoming call distribution group for
which messages are checked. If this cell is left empty, the extension will check its own messages only.

Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)

Extension Number (for Group Fwd (Both))

Specifies the floating extension number of an incoming call distribution group or the extension number to set
FWD remotely whose intercom and trunk calls will be forwarded.

Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)

Feature Guide References

2.3.1 Call Forwarding (FWD)/Do Not Disturb (DND)—SUMMARY
2.3.2 Call Forwarding (FWD)

Extension Number (for Group Fwd (External))

Specifies the floating extension number of an incoming call distribution group or the extension number to set
FWD remotely whose trunk calls will be forwarded.

Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)

Feature Guide References

2.3.1 Call Forwarding (FWD)/Do Not Disturb (DND)—SUMMARY
2.3.2 Call Forwarding (FWD)

Extension Number (for Group Fwd (Internal))

Specifies the floating extension number of an incoming call distribution group or the extension number to set
FWD remotely whose intercom calls will be forwarded.

Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)

588 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 12.1.4 PBX Configuration—[4-1-4] Extension—Wired Extension—Flexible Button
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Feature Guide References

2.3.1 Call Forwarding (FWD)/Do Not Disturb (DND)—SUMMARY
2.3.2 Call Forwarding (FWD)

Extension Number (for Call Log)

Specifies the extension’s own number or the floating extension number of an incoming call distribution group
for which call log information is displayed. If the cell is left empty, the extension will display its own call log
information.

Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)

Extension Number (for Log-in/Log-out)

Specifies the floating extension number of an incoming call distribution group to log-in to or log-out from.

Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)

Feature Guide References

2.2.2.8 Log-in/Log-out

Extension Number (for Hurry-up)

Specifies the floating extension number of the incoming call distribution group whose longest waiting call will
be redirected (Manual Queue Redirection).

Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)

Feature Guide References

2.2.2.4 Queuing Feature

Extension Number (for Two-way Record)

Specifies the floating extension number of the UM/VM (DPT) group containing the extension’s mailbox.

Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)

Feature Guide References

2.28.3 Voice Mail DPT (Digital) Integration
3.1.1 Unified Messaging System Overview

Extension Number (for Two-way Transfer)

Specifies the floating extension number of the UM/VM (DPT) group containing the desired mailbox.

PC Programming Manual 589

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
12.1.4 PBX Configuration—[4-1-4] Extension—Wired Extension—Flexible Button
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)

Feature Guide References

2.28.3 Voice Mail DPT (Digital) Integration
3.1.1 Unified Messaging System Overview

Extension Number (for Voice Mail Transfer)

Specifies the floating extension number of the UM/VM (DTMF/DPT) group containing the desired mailbox.

Value Range
Max. 8 digits (consisting of 0–9)

Feature Guide References

2.28.2 Voice Mail DTMF Integration
2.28.3 Voice Mail DPT (Digital) Integration
3.1.1 Unified Messaging System Overview

Extension Number (for SDN)

Specifies the floating extension number of the PDN extension corresponding to this SDN button.
Note that the extension specified here must have a PDN button registered for the SDN button to function.

Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)

Feature Guide References

2.9.1 Primary Directory Number (PDN)/Secondary Directory Number (SDN) Extension

Extension Name
Indicates the name of the extension, when an extension number is specified (reference only).

Value Range
Max. 20 characters

Dial (for One-touch)

Specifies the number to be dialled. The PBX can have a maximum of 2000 One-touch Dialling buttons for
extensions.

Value Range
Max. 32 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, #, T [Transfer], [ ] [Secret], P [Pause], and F [Flash])

Feature Guide References

2.6.2 One-touch Dialling

590 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 12.1.4 PBX Configuration—[4-1-4] Extension—Wired Extension—Flexible Button
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Dial (for ISDN Service)

Specifies the number required to access the telephone company’s ISDN service.

Value Range
Max. 32 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, #, T [Transfer], [ ] [Secret], P [Pause], and F [Flash])

Feature Guide References

4.1.2.11 ISDN Service Access by Keypad Protocol

Dial (for NDSS)

Specifies the network extension number of the extension to be accessed using Network Direct Station
Selection.
Note that only extension numbers that have been previously registered in 17.4 PBX Configuration—[9-4]
Private Network—NDSS Key Table can be specified here.

Value Range
Max. 16 digits (consisting of 0–9)

Feature Guide References

4.3.5.1 Network Direct Station Selection (NDSS)

Label Name
Specifies the name of each flexible button for KX-NT366 and KX-NT553/KX-NT556/KX-NT560 IP-PTs, and
KX-UT248 and KX-UT670 SIP-MLTs. The name specified here is displayed on the LCD for each button.

Value Range
Max. 12 characters

Note
The maximum length for KX-UT248 and KX-UT670 labels is 10 characters.

Feature Guide References

2.21.2 Flexible Buttons

Optional Parameter (Ringing Tone Type Number) (for Time Service)

Specifies the Time Table to be used for changing time modes in the Automatic Switching mode.

Value Range
Table 1–Table 8

Feature Guide References

5.1.4 Time Service

PC Programming Manual 591

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
12.1.4 PBX Configuration—[4-1-4] Extension—Wired Extension—Flexible Button
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Optional Parameter (Ringing Tone Type Number) (for Loop CO, Single CO,
Group CO, ICD Group, SDN)
Specifies the ring tone type.

Value Range
IP-PT (except KX-NT265/KX-NT321): 1–30
KX-NT265/KX-NT321: 1–8 (Even if ring tone 9–30 is selected, ring tone 1 is heard.)
S-PS: Not available.
Other telephones: 1–8 (Even if ring tone 9–30 is selected, ring tone 2 is heard.)

Optional Parameter (Ringing Tone Type Number) (for Call Park)

Specifies the number of the parking zone a call is to be parked in when a Call Park button with Parameter
Selection (for Call Park) on this screen set to Specific is pressed.

Value Range
Park 00–Park 99

Feature Guide References

2.13.2 Call Park

Ext No. of Mailbox (for Two-way Transfer)

Specifies the number of the extension whose mailbox will be used to record conversations using One-touch
Two-way Transfer. (For example, a secretary can record a conversation into the mailbox of a boss.) If the cell
is left empty, the extension user must specify the number of an extension each time.

Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)

Feature Guide References

2.28.3 Voice Mail DPT (Digital) Integration
3.1.1 Unified Messaging System Overview

592 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 12.1.4 PBX Configuration—[4-1-4] Extension—Wired Extension—Flexible Button
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

12.1.4.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-4] Extension—Wired

Extension—Flexible Button—Flexible button data copy
The flexible button settings (including key label settings) of an extension can be copied to different extensions.

Destination Extension Line

Select the number and name of the extension that will receive the copied settings. Multiple extensions can be
selected. To select all extensions at once, click Select All.
When selecting multiple extensions, note that if the source extension has an SDN button, the copy operation
cannot be performed.

PC Programming Manual References

12.1.4 PBX Configuration—[4-1-4] Extension—Wired Extension—Flexible Button

PC Programming Manual 593

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
12.1.5 PBX Configuration—[4-1-5] Extension—Wired Extension—PF Button
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

12.1.5 PBX Configuration—[4-1-5] Extension—Wired

Extension—PF Button
Each Programmable Feature (PF) button can be customised to access a certain feature with one touch. A
maximum of 12 PF buttons can be customised for each extension. Select the desired extension from the
Extension Number / Name list.

Type
Specifies whether to store a dialling number for the one-touch access.

Value Range
Not Stored, One Touch

Feature Guide References

2.21.2 Flexible Buttons

Dial
Specifies the number to be dialled.

Value Range
Max. 32 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, #, T [Transfer], [ ] [Secret], P [Pause], and F [Flash])

Feature Guide References

2.21.2 Flexible Buttons

594 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 12.1.6 PBX Configuration—[4-1-6] Extension—Wired Extension—NDSS Link Data - Send
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

12.1.6 PBX Configuration—[4-1-6] Extension—Wired

Extension—NDSS Link Data - Send
It is possible to cancel the transmission of an extension’s status data over the network. Select the desired
extension from the Extension Number / Name list.
This screen can be accessed only in On-line mode.

Network BLF Data to NDSS Key of Other PBX - Other PBX (Network PBX ID=1)
Selects whether extension status data is transmitted over the network for the selected extension. This setting
is automatically set to ON when the feature is used, and can only be manually changed from ON to OFF, to
cancel data transmission.

Value Range
OFF, ON

PC Programming Manual References

17.1 PBX Configuration—[9-1] Private Network—TIE Table

Feature Guide References

4.3.5.1 Network Direct Station Selection (NDSS)

PC Programming Manual 595

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
12.1.7 PBX Configuration—[4-1-7] Extension—Wired Extension—CLIP ID Table
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

12.1.7 PBX Configuration—[4-1-7] Extension—Wired

Extension—CLIP ID Table
Up to 8 CLIP IDs can be set for each wired extension.

Extension Number
Indicates the extension number of the extension (reference only).

Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)

Extension Name
Indicates the name of the extension (reference only).

Value Range
Max. 20 characters

CLIP 1–8
Specifies up to 8 CLIP IDs for the extension.

Value Range
Max. 16 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)

596 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 12.1.8 PBX Configuration—[4-1-8] Extension—Wired Extension—Simplified Voice Message
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

12.1.8 PBX Configuration—[4-1-8] Extension—Wired

Extension—Simplified Voice Message
The built-in Simplified Voice Message feature can be provided for each extension. This screen allows you to
specify which extension uses this feature, and the maximum number of messages that can be stored for each
extension.
For more information on Simplified Voice Message, see 2.16.3 Built-in Simplified Voice Message (SVM) in
the Feature Guide.

Shelf
Indicates the shelf position (reference only).

Value Range
1-4

Slot
Indicates the slot position (reference only).

Value Range
Slot number

Port
Indicates the port number (reference only).

Value Range
Port number

Extension number
Indicates the extension number (reference only).

Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)

PC Programming Manual References

9.35 PBX Configuration—[1-2] Configuration—Portable Station

Extension Name
Indicates the name of the extension (reference only).

Value Range
Max. 20 characters

PC Programming Manual 597

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
12.1.8 PBX Configuration—[4-1-8] Extension—Wired Extension—Simplified Voice Message
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

PC Programming Manual References

12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Main— Extension
Name

Simplified Voice Message

Specifies whether to enable the Simplified Voice Message feature.

Value Range
Enable, Disable

Maximum SVM Log

Specifies the maximum number of voice messages (not including greeting messages) that can be stored for
the extension.

Value Range
1-100

598 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

12.2 PBX Configuration—[4-2] Extension—Portable

Station

12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable

Station—Extension Settings
For each Portable Station (PS), various extension settings can be assigned. A maximum of 128 PSs can be
programmed.
To copy the settings of an extension to another extension, click Copy to. The copied data includes FWD/DND
and flexible button settings.
To assign a set of CLIP numbers automatically, click CLIP Generate. To assign names and tenants to
extension user groups, click Extension User Group Table. See 11.2 PBX Configuration—[3-2]
Group—User Group for more details.

Main
Extension Number
Indicates the extension number of the PS (reference only).

Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)

PC Programming Manual References

9.35 PBX Configuration—[1-2] Configuration—Portable Station— Extension No.

Extension Name
Specifies the name of the PS.

Value Range
Max. 20 characters

PC Programming Manual References

9.35 PBX Configuration—[1-2] Configuration—Portable Station— Extension Name

Property
Indicates the property (reference only).

Value Range
Portable Station

User Group
Specifies the extension user group to which the PS belongs. The extension user group is used to compose
tenants, call pickup groups and paging groups.

PC Programming Manual 599

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Value Range
1–32

Feature Guide References

5.1.2 Group
5.1.3 Tenant Service

COS
Specifies the COS of the PS.

Value Range
1–64

PC Programming Manual References

10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System—Class of Service—COS Settings

Feature Guide References

5.1.1 Class of Service (COS)

Extension PIN
Specifies the PIN of the PS.

CAUTION
There is a risk that fraudulent telephone calls will be made if a third party discovers a personal identification
number (PIN) (verification code PIN or extension PIN) of the PBX.
The cost of such calls will be billed to the owner/renter of the PBX.
To protect the PBX from this kind of fraudulent use, we strongly recommend:
a. Keeping PINs secret.
b. Selecting complex, random PINs that cannot be easily guessed.
c. Changing PINs frequently.
To change an extension PIN:
1. Click Edit under Extension PIN for the extension to change.
2. In the window that appears, enter the new extension PIN and then enter it again to confirm it.
3. Click OK.
Value Range
Max. 10 digits (consisting of 0–9)

Feature Guide References

2.24.1 Extension Personal Identification Number (PIN)

600 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Intercept Destination
Extension Number
Indicates the extension number of the PS (reference only).

Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)

PC Programming Manual References

9.35 PBX Configuration—[1-2] Configuration—Portable Station— Extension No.

Extension Name
Specifies the name of the PS.

Value Range
Max. 20 characters

PC Programming Manual References

9.35 PBX Configuration—[1-2] Configuration—Portable Station— Extension Name

Intercept Destination—When called party does not answer—Day, Lunch,

Break, Night
Specifies the Intercept Routing destination of calls in each time mode for Intercept Routing–No Answer and
Intercept Routing–DND.
Note that Intercept Routing–Busy calls are routed using Intercept Destination—When Called Party is
Busy below.

Value Range
Max. 32 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, #, [ ] [Secret], and P [Pause])

PC Programming Manual References

12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings—Intercept
Destination— Intercept Destination—When Called Party is Busy

Feature Guide References

2.1.1.6 Intercept Routing

Intercept Destination—When Called Party is Busy

Specifies the Intercept Routing destination of calls when the extension is busy.

Value Range
Max. 32 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, #, [ ] [Secret], and P [Pause])

PC Programming Manual 601

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Feature Guide References

2.1.1.6 Intercept Routing

Intercept No Answer Time

Extension Number
Indicates the extension number of the PS (reference only).

Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)

PC Programming Manual References

9.35 PBX Configuration—[1-2] Configuration—Portable Station— Extension No.

Extension Name
Specifies the name of the PS.

Value Range
Max. 20 characters

PC Programming Manual References

9.35 PBX Configuration—[1-2] Configuration—Portable Station— Extension Name

Intercept No Answer Time—Day, Lunch, Break, Night

Specifies the length of time until an unanswered call is redirected to the intercept routing destination in each
time mode.
When this setting is set to "0", the system timer is used.

Value Range
0–240 s

PC Programming Manual References

10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3] System—Timers & Counters—Dial / IRNA / Recall / Tone— Intercept Routing
No Answer (IRNA)—Day (s), Lunch (s), Break (s), Night (s)

Feature Guide References

2.1.1.6 Intercept Routing

CLIP
Extension Number
Indicates the extension number of the PS (reference only).

602 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)

PC Programming Manual References

9.35 PBX Configuration—[1-2] Configuration—Portable Station— Extension No.

Extension Name
Specifies the name of the PS.

Value Range
Max. 20 characters

PC Programming Manual References

9.35 PBX Configuration—[1-2] Configuration—Portable Station— Extension Name

CLIP ID
Specifies the CLIP number sent to the public network to show on the called party’s telephone display when
making a trunk call.

Value Range
Max. 16 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)

Feature Guide References

4.1.2.2 Calling/Connected Line Identification Presentation (CLIP/COLP)

CLIP on Extension/CO
Selects the CLIP number to show on the called party’s telephone.

Value Range
Extension: Show the CLIP number specified in CLIP ID.
CO: Show the CLIP number specified in Subscriber Number in 9.26 PBX Configuration—[1-1]
Configuration—Slot—Port Property - BRI Port or 9.27 PBX Configuration—[1-1]
Configuration—Slot—Port Property - PRI Port.

PC Programming Manual References

9.26 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - BRI Port—ISDN CO— Subscriber
Number
9.27 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - PRI Port—CO Setting— Subscriber
Number
12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings—CLIP— CLIP ID

Feature Guide References

4.1.2.2 Calling/Connected Line Identification Presentation (CLIP/COLP)

PC Programming Manual 603

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

CLIR
Specifies whether to restrict the display of the CLIP number on the called party’s telephone when making a
public network trunk call.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

Feature Guide References

4.1.2.2 Calling/Connected Line Identification Presentation (CLIP/COLP)

COLR
Specifies whether to restrict the display of the CLIP number of the PS on the caller’s telephone display when
answering a call.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

Feature Guide References

4.1.2.2 Calling/Connected Line Identification Presentation (CLIP/COLP)

UM
Extension Number
Specifies the extension number of the PS (reference only).

Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)

Extension Name
Specifies the name of the PS.

Value Range
Max. 20 characters

Two-way Recording
Specifies whether to enable the two-way recording feature for the PS using the Unified Messaging system.

Value Range
Enable, Disable

Feature Guide References

3.2.2.30 Two-way Record/Two-way Transfer

604 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Option 1
Extension Number
Indicates the extension number of the PS (reference only).

Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)

PC Programming Manual References

9.35 PBX Configuration—[1-2] Configuration—Portable Station— Extension No.

Extension Name
Specifies the name of the PS.

Value Range
Max. 20 characters

PC Programming Manual References

9.35 PBX Configuration—[1-2] Configuration—Portable Station— Extension Name

Ring Pattern Table

Specifies the Ring Tone Pattern Table to be used by the PS.

Value Range
1–8

PC Programming Manual References

10.8.1 PBX Configuration—[2-8-1] System—Ring Tone Patterns—Call from CO
10.8.2 PBX Configuration—[2-8-2] System—Ring Tone Patterns—Call from DOORPHONE
10.8.3 PBX Configuration—[2-8-3] System—Ring Tone Patterns—Call from Others

Feature Guide References

2.1.3.2 Ring Tone Pattern Selection

Programmed Mailbox No.

Specifies the mailbox number of the incoming call distribution group’s mailbox for Voice Processing Systems
(VPS) with DTMF Integration.

Value Range
Max. 16 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)

Transfer Recall Destination

Specifies the transfer recall destination when an extension user transfers a call with the Call Transfer without
Announcement feature and the transferred call is not answered within a certain time period.

PC Programming Manual 605

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)

Feature Guide References

2.12.1 Call Transfer

ARS Itemised Code

Specifies the itemised billing code used by the ARS feature for identifying the calls made from the PS for
accounting and billing purposes.

Value Range
Max. 10 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)

PC Programming Manual References

16.5 PBX Configuration—[8-5] ARS—Carrier

Feature Guide References

2.7.6 Verification Code Entry
2.8.1 Automatic Route Selection (ARS)

Option 2
Extension Number
Indicates the extension number of the PS (reference only).

Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)

PC Programming Manual References

9.35 PBX Configuration—[1-2] Configuration—Portable Station— Extension No.

Extension Name
Specifies the name of the PS.

Value Range
Max. 20 characters

PC Programming Manual References

9.35 PBX Configuration—[1-2] Configuration—Portable Station— Extension Name

Manual C. Waiting for Extension Call

Selects the method of receiving call waiting notification from other extensions.

606 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Value Range
Off: No notification
BSS: Tone from the handset or built-in speaker

Feature Guide References

2.1.3.3 Call Waiting

Automatic C. Waiting
Specifies whether to receive call waiting notification for a call from trunk, a doorphone call or a call via an
incoming call distribution group.

Value Range
Off, On

Feature Guide References

2.1.3.3 Call Waiting

Pickup Dial Set

Sets or cancels the Hot Line feature. The number specified in Pickup Dial No. on this screen is dialled
automatically after going off-hook when the Hot Line feature is active.

Value Range
Off, On

PC Programming Manual References

10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3] System—Timers & Counters—Dial / IRNA / Recall / Tone— Dial—Hot Line
(Pickup Dial) Start (s)

Feature Guide References

2.6.6 Hot Line

Pickup Dial No.

Specifies the number to be dialled automatically after going off-hook when the Hot Line feature is active.

Value Range
Max. 32 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, #, T [Transfer], [ ] [Secret], P [Pause], and F [Flash])

Feature Guide References

2.6.6 Hot Line

PC Programming Manual 607

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Option 3
Extension Number
Indicates the extension number of the PS (reference only).

Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)

PC Programming Manual References

9.35 PBX Configuration—[1-2] Configuration—Portable Station— Extension No.

Extension Name
Specifies the name of the PS.

Value Range
Max. 20 characters

PC Programming Manual References

9.35 PBX Configuration—[1-2] Configuration—Portable Station— Extension Name

Call Pickup Deny

Specifies whether calls can be picked up by other extensions.

Value Range
Disable: Allows other extension users to pick up calls to your PS
Enable: Prevents other extension users from picking up calls to your PS

Feature Guide References

2.4.3 Call Pickup

Executive Override Deny

Specifies whether calls can be interrupted by other extensions.

Value Range
Disable: Allows other extension users to interrupt an existing call
Enable: Prevents other extension users from interrupting an existing call

Feature Guide References

2.10.2 Executive Busy Override

Absent Message
Specifies the Personal Absent Message which, unlike the System Absent Message, can be customised for
each PS.

608 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Value Range
Max. 16 characters

Feature Guide References

2.20.2 Absent Message

Charge Limit
Specifies the maximum limit of call charges allowed for the PS. When this limit is reached, the PS cannot be
used to make further trunk calls.
The number of decimal places that can be specified here depends on the value set in Charge
Options—Digits After Decimal Point in 14.2 PBX Configuration—[6-2] Feature—Hotel & Charge.

Value Range
0–9999999

PC Programming Manual References

14.2 PBX Configuration—[6-2] Feature—Hotel & Charge

Feature Guide References

2.7.2 Budget Management

Option 4
Extension Number
Indicates the extension number of the PS (reference only).

Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)

PC Programming Manual References

9.35 PBX Configuration—[1-2] Configuration—Portable Station— Extension No.

Extension Name
Specifies the name of the PS.

Value Range
Max. 20 characters

PC Programming Manual References

9.35 PBX Configuration—[1-2] Configuration—Portable Station— Extension Name

PC Programming Manual 609

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Outgoing Preferred Line

Selects the line to be seized after going off-hook to make a call.

Value Range
No Line: No line is seized.
Idle: An idle trunk is seized automatically from the programmed trunk groups.
ICM/PDN: An extension line is seized, or, for a PDN extension, an idle PDN button is selected.
F-1–F-12: A trunk programmed for a flexible button (F-1–F-12) is seized. A flexible button customised as a
Single-CO, Group-CO, Loop-CO, or ICD Group button must be selected.

PC Programming Manual References

12.2.3 PBX Configuration—[4-2-3] Extension—Portable Station—Flexible Button

Feature Guide References

2.5.5.2 Line Preference—Outgoing

Incoming Preferred Line

Selects the line on which an incoming call is answered after going off-hook.
Note that even if a specific PDN button is selected here, a call ringing at any PDN button on the extension will
be answered when going off-hook.

Value Range
No Line: No line is selected. Select a line by pressing the desired Line Access button to answer a call.
Ringing Line: The longest ringing call is selected.
PDN: The call arriving at any PDN button is selected.
F-1–F-12: The call arriving at a flexible button (F-1–F-12) is selected. A flexible button customised as a
Single-CO, Group-CO, Loop-CO, or ICD Group button must be selected.

PC Programming Manual References

12.2.3 PBX Configuration—[4-2-3] Extension—Portable Station—Flexible Button

Feature Guide References

2.4.2 Line Preference—Incoming

Call Waiting Tone Type

Selects the type of Call Waiting tone sent to the busy extension.

Value Range
CW Tone 1, CW Tone 2

Feature Guide References

2.10.4.2 Call Waiting Tone

610 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

LCS Recording Mode

Specifies whether to continue or stop recording the message in the PS’s mailbox when the PS user answers
a call that was being monitored.

Value Range
Stop Record, Keep Record

Feature Guide References

3.1.1 Unified Messaging System Overview

Option 5
Extension Number
Indicates the extension number of the PS (reference only).

Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)

PC Programming Manual References

9.35 PBX Configuration—[1-2] Configuration—Portable Station— Extension No.

Extension Name
Specifies the name of the PS.

Value Range
Max. 20 characters

PC Programming Manual References

9.35 PBX Configuration—[1-2] Configuration—Portable Station— Extension Name

Display Language
Selects the display language of the PS.

Value Range
Language1–Language5

Feature Guide References

2.21.4 Display Information

Incoming Call Display

Selects which caller information is shown on the first line of the PS’s display.

Value Range
Caller ID Name, CO Line Name, DDI/DID Name

PC Programming Manual 611

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Feature Guide References

2.21.4 Display Information

Automatic LCD Switch when Start Talking

Enables the first line of the display to show the call duration automatically after answering a trunk call.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

Feature Guide References

2.21.4 Display Information

Option 6
Extension Number
Indicates the extension number of the PS (reference only).

Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)

PC Programming Manual References

9.35 PBX Configuration—[1-2] Configuration—Portable Station— Extension No.

Extension Name
Specifies the name of the PS.

Value Range
Max. 20 characters

PC Programming Manual References

9.35 PBX Configuration—[1-2] Configuration—Portable Station— Extension Name

Flexible Button Programming Mode

Specifies whether the PS user can modify all flexible buttons without limitation, or only the One-touch Dialling
buttons. When the mode is set to One-touch Dial, there is no need to enter "2" before the number when
customising a One-touch Dialling button.

Value Range
No Limitation, One-touch Dial

Feature Guide References

2.6.2 One-touch Dialling

612 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

SVM Lock
Selects whether Simplified Voice Message Log information can be displayed at the extension or other
extensions.

Value Range
Unlock, Lock

Feature Guide References

2.19.2 Incoming Call Log

Option 7
Extension Number
Indicates the extension number of the PS (reference only).

Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)

PC Programming Manual References

9.35 PBX Configuration—[1-2] Configuration—Portable Station— Extension No.

Extension Name
Specifies the name of the PS.

Value Range
Max. 20 characters

PC Programming Manual References

9.35 PBX Configuration—[1-2] Configuration—Portable Station— Extension Name

Character Input Mode

Selects the character table to be used for entering characters.

Value Range
Table 1: Standard mode
Table 2: Option mode

Flash Mode during CO Conversation

Selects the function of the FLASH/RECALL button during a trunk conversation.

Value Range
EFA, Terminate, Flash Recall

PC Programming Manual 613

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Feature Guide References

2.11.6 Flash/Recall/Terminate
2.11.7 External Feature Access (EFA)

Incoming Call Log Memory

Specifies the number of incoming trunk calls that are retained in the PS’s Incoming Call Log memory.

Value Range
0–100

Feature Guide References

2.19.2 Incoming Call Log

Outgoing Call Log Memory

Specifies the number of telephone numbers dialled by the PS that are retained in the PS’s Outgoing Call Log
memory.

Value Range
1–100

Feature Guide References

2.6.3 Last Number Redial

ISDN Bearer
Selects the ISDN bearer mode. When Automatic is selected, the bearer mode is set automatically depending
on the type of the PS.

Value Range
Automatic, Speech, Audio

Feature Guide References

4.1.2.1 Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN)—SUMMARY

Option 8
Extension Number
Indicates the extension number of the PS (reference only).

Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)

PC Programming Manual References

9.35 PBX Configuration—[1-2] Configuration—Portable Station— Extension No.

614 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Extension Name
Specifies the name of the PS.

Value Range
Max. 20 characters

PC Programming Manual References

9.35 PBX Configuration—[1-2] Configuration—Portable Station— Extension Name

Group CW w/o Tone (Ring after Call)

Enables an incoming call to an incoming call distribution group to arrive at a previously busy extension at the
moment that the extension goes on-hook for the previous call.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

Wrap-up Timer
Specifies the length of time that must pass after completing a call before a PS will accept another call when
logged in as a member of an Incoming Call Distribution Group.
This timer is used when " Options—Wrap-up Timer based on" is set to "Extension" in 11.5.3 PBX
Configuration—[3-5-3] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Miscellaneous.

Value Range
0–3000 s

PC Programming Manual References

11.5.1.1 PBX Configuration—[3-5-1] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings—Member
List— Wrap-up Timer
11.5.3 PBX Configuration—[3-5-3] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Miscellaneous—
Options—Wrap-up Timer based on

Feature Guide References

2.2.2.8 Log-in/Log-out

Option 9
Extension Number
Indicates the extension number of the PS (reference only).

Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)

PC Programming Manual References

9.35 PBX Configuration—[1-2] Configuration—Portable Station— Extension No.

PC Programming Manual 615

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Extension Name
Specifies the name of the PS.

Value Range
Max. 20 characters

PC Programming Manual References

9.35 PBX Configuration—[1-2] Configuration—Portable Station— Extension Name

PDN Delayed Ringing

Specifies the delayed ringing setting for calls to a PDN extension (an extension with one or more PDN buttons).

Value Range
Immediate, 1 Ring, 2 Rings, 3 Rings, 4 Rings, 5 Rings, 6 Rings

Feature Guide References

2.9.1 Primary Directory Number (PDN)/Secondary Directory Number (SDN) Extension

Built-in Communication Assistant

Specifies whether to enable or disable the Communication Assistant (CA) application for each extension.

Value Range
Disable, Basic Only, Enable

PC Programming Manual References

9.2.2 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property—Site—Port Number— Built-in
Communication Assistant Server

Feature Guide References

2.26.2 CA (Communication Assistant)

Mobile Extension
Specifies whether to enable or disable mobile extension features (with a cellular phone or other outside
destination) for the extension.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

Feature Guide References

2.27.1 Cellular Phone Features—SUMMARY

616 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

FWD / DND
Call Forwarding (FWD) and Do Not Disturb (DND) settings for each PS can be referred. FWD and DND settings
can be programmed separately for each PS in 12.2.2 PBX Configuration—[4-2-2] Extension—Portable
Station—FWD/DND.

Extension Number
Indicates the extension number of the PS (reference only).

Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)

PC Programming Manual References

9.35 PBX Configuration—[1-2] Configuration—Portable Station— Extension No.

Extension Name
Specifies the name of the PS.

Value Range
Max. 20 characters

PC Programming Manual References

9.35 PBX Configuration—[1-2] Configuration—Portable Station— Extension Name

FWD Mode for Call from CO

Indicates the forwarding type of incoming trunk calls (reference only).

Value Range
None, FWD All, FWD Busy, FWD N/A, FWD Busy N/A

PC Programming Manual References

12.2.2 PBX Configuration—[4-2-2] Extension—Portable Station—FWD/DND

Feature Guide References

2.3.2 Call Forwarding (FWD)

FWD Destination for Call from CO

Indicates the forwarding destination of incoming trunk calls (reference only).

Value Range
Max. 32 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, #, [ ] [Secret], and P [Pause])

PC Programming Manual 617

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

PC Programming Manual References

12.2.2 PBX Configuration—[4-2-2] Extension—Portable Station—FWD/DND

Feature Guide References

2.3.2 Call Forwarding (FWD)

FWD Mode for Call from Extension

Indicates the forwarding type of incoming intercom calls (reference only).

Value Range
None, FWD All, FWD Busy, FWD N/A, FWD Busy N/A

PC Programming Manual References

12.2.2 PBX Configuration—[4-2-2] Extension—Portable Station—FWD/DND

Feature Guide References

2.3.2 Call Forwarding (FWD)

FWD Destination for Call from Extension

Indicates the forwarding destination of incoming intercom calls (reference only).

Value Range
Max. 32 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, #, [ ] [Secret], and P [Pause])

PC Programming Manual References

12.2.2 PBX Configuration—[4-2-2] Extension—Portable Station—FWD/DND

Feature Guide References

2.3.2 Call Forwarding (FWD)

FWD No Answer Time

Specifies the length of time that an incoming call rings at the PS before the call is forwarded.

Value Range
0–120 s

PC Programming Manual References

12.2.2 PBX Configuration—[4-2-2] Extension—Portable Station—FWD/DND

Feature Guide References

2.3.2 Call Forwarding (FWD)

618 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Keep ring after FWD NA to CO

Specifies whether a PS continues to ring after forwarding an incoming call to an outside destination via FWD
N/A or FWD Busy N/A.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

PC Programming Manual References

12.2.2 PBX Configuration—[4-2-2] Extension—Portable Station—FWD/DND

Feature Guide References

2.3.2 Call Forwarding (FWD)

Remote FWD COS

Specifies the COS that allows the FWD setting on the extension to be changed from another extension. This
COS must then be set for the extensions that will remotely change the FWD setting.

Value Range
Disable, 1–64

Feature Guide References

2.3.2 Call Forwarding (FWD)

PC Programming Manual 619

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

12.2.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable

Station—Extension Settings—CLIP Generate
CLIP Generate allows the CLIP numbers for a set of locations in series to be programmed together.
Pre-assigned CLIP numbers for those locations will be overwritten.
If a number generated here is longer than 16 digits, the additional digits will be discarded.

Location Entry—Beginning Entry Location (Ext. Number)

Specifies the extension number of the first location to be programmed.

Value Range
PS extension number

PC Programming Manual References

12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings

Feature Guide References

4.1.2.2 Calling/Connected Line Identification Presentation (CLIP/COLP)

Location Entry—Number to Generate

Specifies the number of locations to be programmed.
A CLIP number will only be assigned to registered PS extensions, even if the number entered here is larger
than the total number of PS extensions.

Value Range
1–total number of connected PS extensions

PC Programming Manual References

12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings

Feature Guide References

4.1.2.2 Calling/Connected Line Identification Presentation (CLIP/COLP)

Parameter—Deleting Digits
Specifies the number of digits to be deleted from the start of an extension number when using it as part of the
CLIP number.

Value Range
0–4

PC Programming Manual References

12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings

620 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Feature Guide References

4.1.2.2 Calling/Connected Line Identification Presentation (CLIP/COLP)

Parameter—Head of ID
Specifies a prefix number to be applied to all generated CLIP numbers.

Value Range
Max. 16 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)

PC Programming Manual References

12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings

Feature Guide References

4.1.2.2 Calling/Connected Line Identification Presentation (CLIP/COLP)

Parameter—Tail of ID
Specifies a suffix number to be applied to all generated CLIP numbers.

Value Range
Max. 16 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)

PC Programming Manual References

12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings

Feature Guide References

4.1.2.2 Calling/Connected Line Identification Presentation (CLIP/COLP)

PC Programming Manual 621

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
12.2.2 PBX Configuration—[4-2-2] Extension—Portable Station—FWD/DND
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

12.2.2 PBX Configuration—[4-2-2] Extension—Portable

Station—FWD/DND
For each PS, separate Call Forwarding (FWD) and Do Not Disturb (DND) settings can be programmed for
incoming intercom and trunk calls. Select the desired PS from the Extension Number / Name list.
To copy FWD/DND values from one location to another, click Copy to.

Forward / DND—For external calls

Specifies the FWD/DND setting for external calls.
If Always (All), Busy, No Answer, or Busy / No Answer is selected, the FWD destination field can be set.

Value Range
Always (All), Busy, No Answer, Busy / No Answer, Do Not Disturb, Off

Feature Guide References

2.3.1 Call Forwarding (FWD)/Do Not Disturb (DND)—SUMMARY

Forward / DND—For internal calls

Specifies the FWD/DND setting for internal calls.
If Always (All), Busy, No Answer, or Busy / No Answer is selected, the FWD destination field can be set.
If For both external calls and internal calls is checked, this setting becomes unavailable, and the value set
for external calls is applied to internal calls.

Value Range
Always (All), Busy, No Answer, Busy / No Answer, Do Not Disturb, Off

Feature Guide References

2.3.1 Call Forwarding (FWD)/Do Not Disturb (DND)—SUMMARY

622 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 12.2.3 PBX Configuration—[4-2-3] Extension—Portable Station—Flexible Button
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

12.2.3 PBX Configuration—[4-2-3] Extension—Portable

Station—Flexible Button
Each flexible button can be customised to allow one-touch access to a certain feature. A maximum of 12 flexible
buttons can be customised for each PS. Select the desired PS from the Extension Number / Name list.
To copy values from one location to another, click the Copy to button.
For more information on flexible buttons, see "2.21.2 Flexible Buttons" in the Feature Guide.

Type
Specifies the feature to be assigned to the flexible button.

Value Range
Not Stored, Loop CO, Single CO, Group CO, DSS, One-touch, ICD Group, Message Waiting, FWD/DND
(Both), FWD/DND (External), FWD/DND (Internal), Group Fwd (Both), Group Fwd (External), Group Fwd
(Internal), Account, Conference, Terminate, EFA, Charge, Call Park, Log-in/Log-out, Hurry-up, Wrap-up, Time
Service, TRS Level Change, ISDN Service, CLIR, COLR, ISDN Hold, Time Service - Automatic/Manual,
Two-way Record, Two-way Transfer, LCS, Voice Mail Transfer, NDSS, CTI, PDN, SDN

PC Programming Manual References

12.2.3.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-3] Extension—Portable Station—Flexible Button—Flexible button data copy

Parameter Selection (for Single CO)

Specifies the trunk to be accessed.

Value Range
1–208

Feature Guide References

2.5.5.3 Trunk Access

Parameter Selection (for Group CO)

Specifies the trunk group to be accessed.

Value Range
1–64

Feature Guide References

2.5.5.3 Trunk Access

Parameter Selection (for Call Park)

Specifies whether a call is parked in an idle parking zone automatically, or in a specific parking zone.

Value Range
Automatic, Specific

PC Programming Manual 623

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
12.2.3 PBX Configuration—[4-2-3] Extension—Portable Station—Flexible Button
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Feature Guide References

2.13.2 Call Park

Parameter Selection (for Log-in/Log-out)

Specifies which incoming call distribution groups that the PS belongs to are logged in to or logged out from.

Value Range
None: The incoming call distribution group is selected manually.
All: All incoming call distribution groups that the PS belongs to.
Incoming Group: A pre-specified incoming call distribution group

Feature Guide References

2.2.2.8 Log-in/Log-out

Parameter Selection (for Time Service)

Selects which time modes are switched manually.

Value Range
All (Day/Night/Lunch/Break), Day/Night/Break, Day/Night/Lunch, Day/Night

Feature Guide References

5.1.4 Time Service

Parameter Selection (for TRS Level Change)

Specifies the TRS/Barring level to be used temporarily on a certain PS.

Value Range
Level 1–Level 7

Feature Guide References

2.7.1 Toll Restriction (TRS)/Call Barring (Barring)
2.7.4 Dial Tone Transfer

Parameter Selection (for Time Service - Automatic/Manual)

Specifies the Time Table to be used when the Time Service Switching Mode is set to Automatic.

Value Range
Table 1–Table 8

Feature Guide References

5.1.4 Time Service

624 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 12.2.3 PBX Configuration—[4-2-3] Extension—Portable Station—Flexible Button
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Parameter Selection (for SDN)

Specifies the delayed ringing setting for calls arriving at an SDN button.
The value specified here is only used when System Wireless—SDN Delayed Ringing with LCD on
10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options is set to "Enable".

Value Range
Immediate, 1 Ring, 2 Rings, 3 Rings, 4 Rings, 5 Rings, 6 Rings, No Ring

PC Programming Manual References

10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options—Option 4— System Wireless—SDN Delayed
Ringing with LCD

Feature Guide References

2.9.1 Primary Directory Number (PDN)/Secondary Directory Number (SDN) Extension

Extension Number (for DSS)

Specifies the number of an extension to be accessed.

Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)

Extension Number (for ICD Group)

Specifies the floating extension number of an incoming call distribution group to be accessed.

Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)

Extension Number (for Message Waiting)

Specifies the number of an extension or floating extension number of an incoming call distribution group for
which messages are checked. If this cell is left empty, the PS will check its own messages only.

Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)

Extension Number (for Group Fwd (Both))

Specifies the floating extension number of an incoming call distribution group or the extension number to set
FWD remotely whose intercom and trunk calls will be forwarded.

Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)

Feature Guide References

2.3.1 Call Forwarding (FWD)/Do Not Disturb (DND)—SUMMARY
2.3.2 Call Forwarding (FWD)

PC Programming Manual 625

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
12.2.3 PBX Configuration—[4-2-3] Extension—Portable Station—Flexible Button
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Extension Number (for Group Fwd (External))

Specifies the floating extension number of an incoming call distribution group or the extension number to set
FWD remotely whose trunk calls will be forwarded.

Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)

Feature Guide References

2.3.1 Call Forwarding (FWD)/Do Not Disturb (DND)—SUMMARY
2.3.2 Call Forwarding (FWD)

Extension Number (for Group Fwd (Internal))

Specifies the floating extension number of an incoming call distribution group or the extension number to set
FWD remotely whose intercom calls will be forwarded.

Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)

Feature Guide References

2.3.1 Call Forwarding (FWD)/Do Not Disturb (DND)—SUMMARY
2.3.2 Call Forwarding (FWD)

Extension Number (for Log-in/Log-out)

Specifies the floating extension number of an incoming call distribution group to log-in to or log-out from.

Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)

Extension Number (for Hurry-up)

Specifies the floating extension number of the incoming call distribution group whose longest waiting call will
be redirected (Manual Queue Redirection).

Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)

Feature Guide References

2.2.2.4 Queuing Feature

Extension Number (for Two-way Record)

Specifies the floating extension number of the UM/VM (DPT) group containing the PS’s mailbox.

Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)

626 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 12.2.3 PBX Configuration—[4-2-3] Extension—Portable Station—Flexible Button
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Feature Guide References

2.28.3 Voice Mail DPT (Digital) Integration
3.1.1 Unified Messaging System Overview

Extension Number (for Two-way Transfer)

Specifies the floating extension number of the UM/VM (DPT) group containing the desired mailbox.

Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)

Feature Guide References

2.28.3 Voice Mail DPT (Digital) Integration
3.1.1 Unified Messaging System Overview

Extension Number (for Voice Mail Transfer)

Specifies the floating extension number of the UM/VM (DTMF/DPT) group containing the desired mailbox.

Value Range
Max. 8 digits (consisting of 0–9)

Feature Guide References

2.28.2 Voice Mail DTMF Integration
2.28.3 Voice Mail DPT (Digital) Integration
3.1.1 Unified Messaging System Overview

Extension Number (for SDN)

Specifies the floating extension number of the corresponding (owner) extension for the SDN button.
Note that the extension specified here must have a PDN button registered for the SDN button to function.

Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)

Feature Guide References

2.9.1 Primary Directory Number (PDN)/Secondary Directory Number (SDN) Extension

Extension Name
Indicates the name of the extension, when an extension number is specified (reference only).

Value Range
Max. 20 characters

Dial (for One-touch)

Specifies the number to be dialled. The PBX can have a maximum of 500 One-touch Dialling buttons for PSs.

PC Programming Manual 627

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
12.2.3 PBX Configuration—[4-2-3] Extension—Portable Station—Flexible Button
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Value Range
Max. 32 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, #, T [Transfer], [ ] [Secret], P [Pause], and F [Flash])

Feature Guide References

2.6.2 One-touch Dialling

Dial (for ISDN Service)

Specifies the number required to access the telephone company’s ISDN service.

Value Range
Max. 32 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, #, T [Transfer], [ ] [Secret], P [Pause], and F [Flash])

Feature Guide References

4.1.2.11 ISDN Service Access by Keypad Protocol

Dial (for NDSS)

Specifies the network extension number of the extension to be accessed using Network Direct Station
Selection.
Note that only extension numbers that have been previously registered in 17.4 PBX Configuration—[9-4]
Private Network—NDSS Key Table can be specified here.

Value Range
Max. 16 digits (consisting of 0–9)

Feature Guide References

4.3.5.1 Network Direct Station Selection (NDSS)

Optional Parameter (or Ringing Tone Type Number) (for Time Service)
Specifies the Time Table to be used for changing time modes in the Automatic Switching mode.

Value Range
Table 1–Table 8

Feature Guide References

5.1.4 Time Service

Optional Parameter (or Ringing Tone Type Number) (for Call Park)
Specifies the number of the parking zone a call is to be parked in when a Call Park button with Parameter
Selection (for Call Park) on this screen set to Specific is pressed.

Value Range
Park 00–Park 99

628 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 12.2.3 PBX Configuration—[4-2-3] Extension—Portable Station—Flexible Button
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Feature Guide References

2.13.2 Call Park

Ext No. of Mailbox (for Two-way Transfer)

Specifies the number of the extension whose mailbox will be used to record conversations using One-touch
Two-way Transfer. (For example, a secretary can record a conversation into the mailbox of a boss.) If the cell
is left empty, the extension user must specify the number of an extension each time.

Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)

Feature Guide References

2.28.3 Voice Mail DPT (Digital) Integration
3.1.1 Unified Messaging System Overview

PC Programming Manual 629

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
12.2.3 PBX Configuration—[4-2-3] Extension—Portable Station—Flexible Button
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

12.2.3.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-3] Extension—Portable

Station—Flexible Button—Flexible button data copy
The flexible button settings of a PS can be copied to different PSs.

Destination Extension Line

Select the number and name of the PS that will receive the copied settings. Multiple PSs can be selected. To
select all PSs at once, click Select All.
When selecting multiple extensions, note that if the source extension has an SDN button, the copy operation
cannot be performed.

PC Programming Manual References

12.2.3 PBX Configuration—[4-2-3] Extension—Portable Station—Flexible Button

630 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 12.2.4 PBX Configuration—[4-2-4] Extension—Portable Station—NDSS Link Data - Send
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

12.2.4 PBX Configuration—[4-2-4] Extension—Portable

Station—NDSS Link Data - Send
It is possible to cancel the transmission of an extension’s status data over the network. Select the desired
extension from the Extension Number / Name list.
This screen can be accessed only in On-line mode.

Network BLF Data to NDSS Key of Other PBX - Other PBX (Network PBX ID=1)
Selects whether extension status data is transmitted over the network for the selected extension. This setting
is automatically set to ON when the feature is used, and can only be manually changed from ON to OFF, to
cancel data transmission.

Value Range
OFF, ON

PC Programming Manual References

17.4 PBX Configuration—[9-4] Private Network—NDSS Key Table

Feature Guide References

4.3.5.1 Network Direct Station Selection (NDSS)

PC Programming Manual 631

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
12.2.5 PBX Configuration—[4-2-5] Extension—Portable Station—CLIP ID Table
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

12.2.5 PBX Configuration—[4-2-5] Extension—Portable

Station—CLIP ID Table
Up to 8 CLIP IDs can be set for each wireless extension.

Extension Number
Indicates the extension number of the PS (reference only).

Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)

Extension Name
Indicates the name of the PS (reference only).

Value Range
Max. 20 characters

CLIP 1–8
Specifies up to 8 CLIP IDs for the PS.

Value Range
Max. 16 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)

632 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 12.2.6 PBX Configuration—[4-2-6] Extension—Portable Station—Simplified Voice Message
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

12.2.6 PBX Configuration—[4-2-6] Extension—Portable

Station—Simplified Voice Message
The built-in Simplified Voice Message feature can be provided for each PS. This screen allows you to specify
which extension uses this feature, and the maximum number of messages that can be stored for each
extension.
For more information on Simplified Voice Message, see 2.16.3 Built-in Simplified Voice Message (SVM) in
the Feature Guide.

Extension Number
Indicates the extension number (reference only).

Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)

PC Programming Manual References

9.35 PBX Configuration—[1-2] Configuration—Portable Station

Extension Name
Indicates the name of the extension (reference only).

Value Range
Max. 20 characters

PC Programming Manual References

9.35 PBX Configuration—[1-2] Configuration—Portable Station
12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings

Simplified Voice Message

Specifies whether to enable the Simplified Voice Message feature.

Value Range
Enable, Disable

PC Programming Manual References

9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot

Feature Guide References

2.16.3 Built-in Simplified Voice Message (SVM)

Maximum SVM Log

Specifies the maximum number of voice messages (not including greeting messages) that can be stored for
the extension.

PC Programming Manual 633

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
12.2.6 PBX Configuration—[4-2-6] Extension—Portable Station—Simplified Voice Message
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Value Range
0–100

Feature Guide References

2.16.3 Built-in Simplified Voice Message (SVM)

634 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 12.3 PBX Configuration—[4-3] Extension—DSS Console
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

12.3 PBX Configuration—[4-3] Extension—DSS

Console
A DSS Console can be used in conjunction with a PT. A maximum of 8 DSS Consoles can be programmed.
The DPT Type—Type of the extension port that DSS Console is connected must be set to DSS in 9.22 PBX
Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property—Extension Type.
Each flexible DSS button can be customised to access a certain feature. A maximum of 66 flexible DSS buttons
can be customised for each DSS Console.
To copy DSS Console setting values from one location to another, click the Copy to button.
For more information on flexible buttons, see 2.21.2 Flexible Buttons in the Feature Guide.
Once flexible DSS buttons have been programmed, the Terminal Label Print utility can be used to print label
sheets, which can be attached to your DSS Console for quick reference. For details, see 1.2.2.1 Editing and
Printing Terminal Labels in Off-line Mode.

Pair Extension
Specifies the extension number of the PT to be used in pair with the DSS Console. Note that if one or more
SDN buttons have been set at the DSS Console, they must be deleted before this setting can be changed.

Value Range
None, Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)

Type
Specifies the feature to be assigned to the flexible DSS button.

Value Range
Not Stored, Loop CO, Single CO, Group CO, DSS, One-touch, ICD Group, Message Waiting, FWD/DND
(Both), FWD/DND (External), FWD/DND (Internal), Group Fwd (Both), Group Fwd (External), Group Fwd
(Internal), Account, Conference, Terminate, EFA, Charge, Call Park, Call Log, Log-in/Log-out, Hurry-up,
Wrap-up, System Alarm, Time Service, Answer, Release, TRS Level Change, ISDN Service, CLIR, COLR,
ISDN Hold, Headset, Time Service - Automatic/Manual, Check In, Check Out, Cleaned Up, Two-way Record,
Two-way Transfer, LCS, Voice Mail Transfer, NDSS, CTI, SDN

PC Programming Manual References

12.3 PBX Configuration—[4-3] Extension—DSS Console

Feature Guide References

2.21.2 Flexible Buttons

Parameter Selection (for Single CO)

Specifies the trunk to be accessed.

Value Range
1–208

PC Programming Manual 635

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
12.3 PBX Configuration—[4-3] Extension—DSS Console
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Feature Guide References

2.5.5.3 Trunk Access

Parameter Selection (for Group CO)

Specifies the trunk group to be accessed.

Value Range
1–64

Feature Guide References

2.5.5.3 Trunk Access

Parameter Selection (for Call Park)

Specifies whether a call is parked in an idle parking zone automatically or in a specific parking zone.

Value Range
Automatic, Specific

Feature Guide References

2.13.2 Call Park

Parameter Selection (for Log-in/Log-out)

Specifies which incoming call distribution groups that the paired extension belongs to are logged in to or logged
out from.

Value Range
None: The incoming call distribution group is selected manually.
All: All incoming call distribution groups that the paired extension belongs to.
Incoming Group: A pre-specified incoming call distribution group

Feature Guide References

2.2.2.8 Log-in/Log-out

Parameter Selection (for Time Service)

Selects which time modes are switched manually.

Value Range
All (Day/Night/Lunch/Break), Day/Night/Break, Day/Night/Lunch, Day/Night

Feature Guide References

5.1.4 Time Service

636 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 12.3 PBX Configuration—[4-3] Extension—DSS Console
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Parameter Selection (for TRS Level Change)

Specifies the TRS/Barring level to be used temporarily on a certain extension.

Value Range
1-7

Feature Guide References

2.7.1 Toll Restriction (TRS)/Call Barring (Barring)
2.7.4 Dial Tone Transfer

Parameter Selection (for Time Service - Automatic/Manual)

Specifies the Time Table to be used when the Time Service Switching Mode is set to Automatic.

Value Range
1-8

Feature Guide References

5.1.4 Time Service

Parameter Selection (for SDN)

Specifies the delayed ringing setting for calls arriving at an SDN button.

Value Range
Immediate, 1 Ring, 2 Rings, 3 Rings, 4 Rings, 5 Rings, 6 Rings, No Ring

Feature Guide References

2.9.1 Primary Directory Number (PDN)/Secondary Directory Number (SDN) Extension

Extension Number (for DSS)

Specifies the number of an extension to be accessed.

Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)

Extension Number (for ICD Group)

Specifies the floating extension number of an incoming call distribution group to be accessed.

Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)

Extension Number (for Message Waiting)

Specifies the number of an extension or floating extension number of an incoming call distribution group for
which messages are checked. If this cell is left empty, the paired extension will check its own messages only.

PC Programming Manual 637

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
12.3 PBX Configuration—[4-3] Extension—DSS Console
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)

Extension Number (for Group Fwd (Both))

Specifies the floating extension number of an incoming call distribution group for which both intercom and trunk
calls are forwarded.

Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)

Feature Guide References

2.3 Call Forwarding (FWD)/Do Not Disturb (DND) Features

Extension Number (for Group Fwd (External))

Specifies the floating extension number of an incoming call distribution group for which trunk calls are
forwarded.

Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)

Feature Guide References

2.3 Call Forwarding (FWD)/Do Not Disturb (DND) Features

Extension Number (for Group Fwd (Internal))

Specifies the floating extension number of an incoming call distribution group for which intercom calls are
forwarded.

Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)

Feature Guide References

2.3 Call Forwarding (FWD)/Do Not Disturb (DND) Features

Extension Number (for Call Log)

Specifies the paired extension’s number or the floating extension number of an incoming call distribution group
for which call log information is displayed. If the cell is left empty, the paired extension will display its own call
log information.

Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)

Extension Number (for Log-in/Log-out)

Specifies the floating extension number of an incoming call distribution group to log-in to or log-out from.

638 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 12.3 PBX Configuration—[4-3] Extension—DSS Console
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)

Extension Number (for Hurry-up)

Specifies the floating extension number of the incoming call distribution group whose longest waiting call will
be redirected (Manual Queue Redirection).

Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)

Feature Guide References

2.2.2.4 Queuing Feature

Extension Number (for Two-way Record)

Specifies the floating extension number of the UM/VM (DPT) group containing the paired extension’s mailbox.

Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)

Feature Guide References

2.28.3 Voice Mail DPT (Digital) Integration
3.1.1 Unified Messaging System Overview

Extension Number (for Two-way Transfer)

Specifies the floating extension number of the UM/VM (DPT) group containing the desired mailbox.

Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)

Feature Guide References

2.28.3 Voice Mail DPT (Digital) Integration
3.1.1 Unified Messaging System Overview

Extension Number (for Voice Mail Transfer)

Specifies the floating extension number of the UM/VM (DTMF/DPT) group containing the desired mailbox.

Value Range
Max. 8 digits (consisting of 0–9)

Feature Guide References

2.28.2 Voice Mail DTMF Integration
2.28.3 Voice Mail DPT (Digital) Integration
3.1.1 Unified Messaging System Overview

PC Programming Manual 639

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
12.3 PBX Configuration—[4-3] Extension—DSS Console
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Extension Number (for SDN)

Specifies the floating extension number of the PDN extension corresponding to the SDN button. Note that the
extension specified here must have a PDN button registered for the SDN button to function.

Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)

Feature Guide References

2.1.1.2 Direct In Line (DIL)

Extension Name
Indicates the name of the extension, when an extension number is specified (reference only).

Value Range
Max. 20 characters

Dial (for One-touch)

Specifies the number to be dialled. The PBX can have a maximum of 2000 One-touch Dialling buttons for
extensions and DSS Consoles.

Value Range
Max. 32 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, #, T [Transfer], [ ] [Secret], P [Pause], and F [Flash])

Feature Guide References

2.6.2 One-touch Dialling

Dial (for ISDN Service)

Specifies the number required to access the telephone company’s ISDN service.

Value Range
Max. 32 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, #, T [Transfer], [ ] [Secret], P [Pause], and F [Flash])

Feature Guide References

4.1.2.11 ISDN Service Access by Keypad Protocol

Dial (for NDSS)

Specifies the network extension number of the extension to be accessed using Network Direct Station
Selection. Note that only extension numbers that have been previously registered in 17.4 PBX
Configuration—[9-4] Private Network—NDSS Key Table can be specified here.

Value Range
Max. 16 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, #, T [Transfer], [ ] [Secret], P [Pause], and F [Flash])

640 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 12.3 PBX Configuration—[4-3] Extension—DSS Console
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Feature Guide References

4.3.5.1 Network Direct Station Selection (NDSS)

Optional Parameter (Ringing Tone Type Number) (for Time Service)

Specifies the Time Table to be used for changing time modes in the Automatic Switching mode.

Value Range
1-8

Feature Guide References

5.1.4 Time Service

Optional Parameter (Ringing Tone Type Number) (for Loop CO, Single CO,
Group CO, ICD Group, SDN)
Specifies the ring tone type.

Value Range
KX-DT300 series (except KX-DT321)/KX-T7600 series (except KX-T7665)/IP-PT (except KX-NT265/
KX-NT321): 1–30
KX-DT321/KX-T7665/KX-NT265/KX-NT321: 1–8 (Even if ring tone 9–30 is selected, ring tone 1 is heard.)
Other telephones: 1–8 (Even if ring tone 9–30 is selected, ring tone 2 is heard.)

Optional Parameter (Ringing Tone Type Number) (for Call Park)

Specifies the number of the parking zone a call is to be parked in when a Call Park button with Parameter
Selection (for Call Park) on this screen set to Specific is pressed.

Value Range
0-99

Feature Guide References

2.13.2 Call Park

Ext No. of Mailbox (for Two-way Transfer)

Specifies the number of the extension whose mailbox will be used to record conversations using One-touch
Two-way Transfer. (For example, a secretary can record a conversation into the mailbox of a boss.) If the cell
is left empty, the extension user must specify the number of an extension each time.

Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)

Feature Guide References

2.28.3 Voice Mail DPT (Digital) Integration
3.1.1 Unified Messaging System Overview

PC Programming Manual 641

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
12.3.1 PBX Configuration—[4-3] Extension—DSS Console—DSS key data copy
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

12.3.1 PBX Configuration—[4-3] Extension—DSS Console—DSS

key data copy
The flexible DSS button settings (including key label settings) of a DSS Console can be copied to different
DSS Consoles. Select the DSS Console that has the setting to copy to other DSS Consoles from the DSS
Console No./Pair Extension list, then click Copy to.

Destination DSS Console

Select the number of the DSS Console and paired extension. Multiple DSS Consoles can be selected. To
select all DSS Consoles at once, click Select All.
When selecting multiple extensions, note that if the source extension has an SDN button, the copy operation
cannot be performed.

PC Programming Manual References

12.3 PBX Configuration—[4-3] Extension—DSS Console

642 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Section 13
PBX Configuration—[5] Optional Device

This section serves as reference operating instructions

for the Optional Device menu of the PBX
Configuration menu of the Setup screen of Web
Maintenance Console.

PC Programming Manual 643

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
13.1 PBX Configuration—[5-1] Optional Device—Doorphone
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

13.1 PBX Configuration—[5-1] Optional

Device—Doorphone
The settings to establish doorphone calls can be programmed.
To assign destinations for doorphone calls easily, click Destination Setting (see 2.1.6 Extension Number
Setting).
The Shelf, Slot, and Port for each item are displayed for your reference. For details, see Common
Programming Reference Items in 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot.

DOORPHONE Number
Indicates the number of the doorphone (reference only).

Value Range
Doorphone number

Feature Guide References

2.18.1 Doorphone Call

Name
Specifies the doorphone name.

Value Range
Max. 20 characters

Feature Guide References

2.18.1 Doorphone Call

Destination—Day, Lunch, Break, Night

Specifies the destination number of doorphone calls for each port in each time mode.

Value Range
Max. 32 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, #, [ ] [Secret], and P [Pause])

PC Programming Manual References

10.4 PBX Configuration—[2-4] System—Week Table

Feature Guide References

2.18.1 Doorphone Call

Tenant Number
Specifies the tenant number for the doorphone port in order to apply the Time Table (day/lunch/break/night).

644 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 13.1 PBX Configuration—[5-1] Optional Device—Doorphone
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Value Range
1–8

PC Programming Manual References

10.4 PBX Configuration—[2-4] System—Week Table

Feature Guide References

2.18.1 Doorphone Call
5.1.3 Tenant Service

COS
Specifies the Class of Service (COS) number. COS programming determines the doorphone ports that are
able to make trunk calls, and sets restrictions on intercom calls from certain extensions (Internal Call Block).

Value Range
1–64

PC Programming Manual References

10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System—Class of Service—COS Settings—TRS— TRS Level—Day,
Lunch, Break, Night
10.7.3 PBX Configuration—[2-7-3] System—Class of Service—Internal Call Block

Feature Guide References

2.1.2.2 Internal Call Block
2.18.1 Doorphone Call

Service Group Number

Specifies the Service Group number sent to the Unified Messaging system when the incoming call destination
is the floating extension number of a UM group.
The Service Group number is used to allow the Unified Messaging system to send the applicable greeting
message to the caller.

Value Range
None, 1–64

Feature Guide References

2.18.1 Doorphone Call
3.1.1 Unified Messaging System Overview

VM Trunk Group No.

Specifies the number of the VM trunk group sent to the VPS when the incoming call destination is the floating
extension number of a VM (DPT) Group. The VM trunk group number is used to allow the VPS to send the
applicable greeting message to the caller.

PC Programming Manual 645

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
13.1 PBX Configuration—[5-1] Optional Device—Doorphone
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Value Range
1–48

646 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 13.2 PBX Configuration—[5-2] Optional Device—External Pager
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

13.2 PBX Configuration—[5-2] Optional

Device—External Pager
Settings for the external pager (external speaker) can be specified.
Click Extension List View to view a list of all programmed extension numbers and types (see
6.5 Tool—Extension List View).

ID
Indicates the external pager ID (reference only).

Value Range
1–6

Floating Extension Number

Specifies the floating extension number of the external pager.

Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)

Feature Guide References

2.17.1 Paging
2.17.2 Trunk Answer From Any Station (TAFAS)
2.30.1 Background Music (BGM)

Name
Specifies the name of the external pager.

Value Range
Max. 20 characters

Feature Guide References

2.17.1 Paging
2.17.2 Trunk Answer From Any Station (TAFAS)
2.30.1 Background Music (BGM)

PC Programming Manual 647

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
13.3.1 PBX Configuration—[5-3-1] Optional Device—Voice Message—DISA System
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

13.3 PBX Configuration—[5-3] Optional

Device—Voice Message

13.3.1 PBX Configuration—[5-3-1] Optional Device—Voice

Message—DISA System
Direct Inward System Access (DISA) enables outside callers to access specific PBX features as if the caller
were using an SLT extension of the PBX.
For more information on DISA, see "2.16.1 Direct Inward System Access (DISA)" in the Feature Guide.

Option 1
DISA Security—DISA Security Mode
Selects the DISA security mode to prevent unauthorised access to the PBX. In Trunk or All Security mode, the
caller is required to override security by Walking COS or Verification Code Entry in order to enable the restricted
feature temporarily.

Value Range
None: Intercom calls, TIE line calls, and trunk calls can be made.
Trunk: Intercom calls and TIE line calls without PBX code can be made. TIE line calls with PBX code and trunk
calls are restricted.
All: All calls are restricted.

Feature Guide References

2.7.5 Walking COS
2.7.6 Verification Code Entry

DISA Security—Remote Walking COS through DISA without PIN (Activation Key
Required)
Enables registered caller ID numbers to be automatically recognised as PBX extensions when calling through
DISA, and to use the Walking COS features without entering a PIN.

Value Range
Disable, Enable (Get DISA)

DISA Intercept—Intercept when destination through DISA sets DND

Selects how DISA calls are handled if the destination sets DND, and disables Idle Extension Hunting.

Value Range
Busy Tone, Enable, Busy Message

DISA Intercept—Intercept when all DISA ports are busy

Selects how DISA calls are handled if all DISA ports are currently in use.

648 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 13.3.1 PBX Configuration—[5-3-1] Optional Device—Voice Message—DISA System
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Value Range
to Operator, to AA-0, to AA-9, Disable (Busy Tone)

DISA Intercept—Intercept when No Dial after DISA answers

Selects how DISA calls are handled if the caller does not select any option from the menu.

Value Range
to Operator, to AA-0, to AA-9, Disable (Reorder Tone)

CO-CO with DISA—DISA to Public CO

Specifies whether the DISA port is released when a trunk-to-public trunk call using DISA is established. To
enable this setting, " CO-CO with DISA—Fwd/Transfer to Public CO" on this screen should be set to
"Enable".
Setting this to "Disable" will free up DISA ports faster, but prevent DISA being used to detect the end of a call
and disconnect the trunk quickly.

Value Range
Disable (Release DISA): The DISA port is released when a trunk-to-public trunk call using DISA is established.
Enable: DISA stays connected for the duration of the call, to allow detection of the end of the call.

PC Programming Manual References

13.3.1 PBX Configuration—[5-3-1] Optional Device—Voice Message—DISA System—Option 1— CO-CO
with DISA—Fwd/Transfer to Public CO

CO-CO with DISA—DISA to Private Network

Specifies whether the DISA port is released when a trunk-to-private trunk call using DISA is established.
To enable this setting, " CO-CO with DISA—Fwd/Transfer to Private Network" on this screen should be
set to "Enable".
Setting this to "Disable" will free up DISA ports faster, but prevent DISA being used to detect the end of a call
and disconnect the trunk quickly.

Value Range
Disable (Release DISA): The DISA port is released when a trunk-to-private trunk call using DISA is established.
Enable: DISA stays connected for the duration of the call, to allow detection of the end of the call.

PC Programming Manual References

13.3.1 PBX Configuration—[5-3-1] Optional Device—Voice Message—DISA System—Option 1— CO-CO
with DISA—Fwd/Transfer to Private Network

CO-CO with DISA—Fwd/Transfer to Public CO

Enables trunk-to-public trunk calls to be established using DISA.

Value Range
Disable: Trunk-to-public trunk calls are established without using DISA.

PC Programming Manual 649

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
13.3.1 PBX Configuration—[5-3-1] Optional Device—Voice Message—DISA System
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Enable (Get DISA): Trunk-to-public trunk calls are established using DISA, and DISA can be used to detect
the end of the call.

PC Programming Manual References

13.3.1 PBX Configuration—[5-3-1] Optional Device—Voice Message—DISA System—Option 1— CO-CO
with DISA—DISA to Public CO

CO-CO with DISA—Fwd/Transfer to Private Network

Enables trunk-to-private trunk calls to be established using DISA.

Value Range
Disable: Trunk-to-private trunk calls are established without using DISA.
Enable (Get DISA): Trunk-to-private trunk calls are established using DISA, and DISA can be used to detect
the end of the call.

PC Programming Manual References

13.3.1 PBX Configuration—[5-3-1] Optional Device—Voice Message—DISA System—Option 1— CO-CO
with DISA—DISA to Private Network

CO-CO with DISA—Transfer by DTMF "#" (Activation Key Required)

Specifies whether an outside party such as a cellular phone can transfer a trunk call to an extension within the
PBX by dialling "#" + extension number.

Value Range
Disable: "#" is ignored if dialled.
Enable (as "Flash"): The current trunk call will be placed on hold, then transferred to the extension whose
number is entered.

CO-CO with DISA—Return to DISA Top Menu by DTMF "*"

Enables a trunk caller to return to the DISA top menu by pressing " " while hearing a ringback, reorder, or
busy tone. If disabled, retrying the call is possible by pressing " ".

Value Range
Disable, Enable

Option 2
DISA Cyclic Tone Detection
Selects the cyclic tone detection mode. Cyclic tone detection is used to determine the end of a call for a DISA
trunk-to-trunk conversation established through an analogue trunk.
This setting is only available when DPS cards are not installed.

650 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 13.3.1 PBX Configuration—[5-3-1] Optional Device—Voice Message—DISA System
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Value Range
Fixed: The number of times of a tone pattern (a set of tone-on and tone-off) that the PBX receives is fixed to
4 times in the ranges of:
A C C C

B D D D

, = 100–1300 ms, = 90 ms, = 90 ms

Option: The tone pattern that the PBX receives is optional as specified in DISA Cyclic Tone Option on this
screen.

DISA Cyclic Tone Option—Tone on Maximum Time (ms)

Specifies the maximum duration of the cyclic tone that will be recognised by the PBX. When the tone sent from
the telephone company is shorter than the value set here, the PBX recognises it as a tone-on.
Note that this option can only be set when DISA Cyclic Tone Detection on this screen is set to "Option".

Value Range
10 ´ n (n=11–400) ms

DISA Cyclic Tone Option—Tone off Maximum Time (ms)

Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for a cyclic tone to be sent from the telephone company before
recognising it as a tone-off. When no tone is detected within the time set here, the PBX recognises it as a
tone-off.
Note that this option can only be set when DISA Cyclic Tone Detection on this screen is set to "Option".

Value Range
10 ´ n (n=11–400) ms

DISA Cyclic Tone Option—Repeating Times of ON/OFF for Detection

Specifies the number of times the tone pattern (a set of tone-on and tone-off) must be received to establish
reception of the cyclic tone. This determines the end of call.
Note that this option can only be set when DISA Cyclic Tone Detection on this screen is set to "Option".

Value Range
3–16

Timed Reminder Message—Day, Lunch, Break, Night

Specifies the pre-recorded message to play when a Timed Reminder call is answered in each time mode.

Value Range
None, 1–64

PC Programming Manual References

13.3.2 PBX Configuration—[5-3-2] Optional Device—Voice Message—DISA Message

PC Programming Manual 651

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
13.3.1 PBX Configuration—[5-3-1] Optional Device—Voice Message—DISA System
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Feature Guide References

2.24.4 Timed Reminder

652 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 13.3.2 PBX Configuration—[5-3-2] Optional Device—Voice Message—DISA Message
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

13.3.2 PBX Configuration—[5-3-2] Optional Device—Voice

Message—DISA Message
Outgoing messages (OGM) for DISA calls can be specified. A maximum of 64 OGMs can be programmed.
To view a list of all programmed extension numbers and types, click Extension List View (see
6.5 Tool—Extension List View). To assign AA destinations easily, click Destination Setting (see
2.1.6 Extension Number Setting).

Floating Extension Number

Specifies the floating extension number of the OGM.

Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)

Feature Guide References

2.30.2 Outgoing Message (OGM)
2.16.1 Direct Inward System Access (DISA)
5.5.8 Floating Extension

Name
Specifies the name of the OGM.

Value Range
Max. 20 characters

Feature Guide References

2.30.2 Outgoing Message (OGM)
2.16.1 Direct Inward System Access (DISA)

1 Digit AA Destination (Extension Number)—Dial 0–9

Specifies the destination for each DISA Automated Attendant (AA) number. After listening to an OGM, the
caller can be directed to the destination by dialling a 1-digit DISA AA number.

Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)

Feature Guide References

2.30.2 Outgoing Message (OGM)
2.16.1 Direct Inward System Access (DISA)

Busy / DND Message No.

Selects the OGM to be played for the caller when the destination party is busy or sets DND.

PC Programming Manual 653

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
13.3.2 PBX Configuration—[5-3-2] Optional Device—Voice Message—DISA Message
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Value Range
None, 1–64

PC Programming Manual References

13.3.1 PBX Configuration—[5-3-1] Optional Device—Voice Message—DISA System

Feature Guide References

2.16.1 Direct Inward System Access (DISA)

Fax Extension
Specifies the extension number to which to transfer a call when a fax signal is detected.

Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)

Feature Guide References

2.16.2 Automatic Fax Transfer

654 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 13.3.3 PBX Configuration—[5-3-3] Optional Device—Voice Message—SVM
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

13.3.3 PBX Configuration—[5-3-3] Optional Device—Voice

Message—SVM
Settings related to Built-in Simplified Voice Message feature can be specified. This feature can be accessed
via the MPR card.

SVM—Floating Extension Number

Specifies the floating extension number used to access the SVM feature.

Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)

Feature Guide References

2.16.3 Built-in Simplified Voice Message (SVM)

SVM—SVM Name
Specifies the name of the card, for programming reference.

Value Range
Max. 20 characters

Feature Guide References

2.16.3 Built-in Simplified Voice Message (SVM)

Remote Access
Selects whether the Walking COS feature can be used while listening to a greeting message from the SVM
feature. Using Walking COS, a user can access his or her message box remotely.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

PC Programming Manual References

12.1.8 PBX Configuration—[4-1-8] Extension—Wired Extension—Simplified Voice Message
12.2.6 PBX Configuration—[4-2-6] Extension—Portable Station—Simplified Voice Message

Feature Guide References

2.16.3 Built-in Simplified Voice Message (SVM)

SVM Cyclic Tone Detection

Specifies the SVM cyclic tone detection mode.

Value Range
Fixed, Option

PC Programming Manual 655

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
13.3.3 PBX Configuration—[5-3-3] Optional Device—Voice Message—SVM
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Feature Guide References

2.16.3 Built-in Simplified Voice Message (SVM)

SVM Cyclic Tone Option—Tone On Maximum Time

Specifies the maximum duration of the cyclic tone that will be recognised by the PBX. When the tone sent from
the telephone company is shorter than the value set here, the PBX recognises it as a tone-on.
Note that this option can only be set when SVM Cyclic Tone Detection on this screen is set to "Option".

Value Range
20 x n (n=6–200) ms

PC Programming Manual References

9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot

Feature Guide References

2.16.3 Built-in Simplified Voice Message (SVM)

SVM Cyclic Tone Option—Tone Off Maximum Time

Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for a cyclic tone to be sent from the telephone company before
recognising it as a tone-off. When no tone is detected within the time set here, the PBX recognises it as a
tone-off.

Value Range
20 x n (n=6–200) ms

PC Programming Manual References

9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot

Feature Guide References

2.16.3 Built-in Simplified Voice Message (SVM)

SVM Cyclic Tone Option—Repeating Times of ON/OFF for Detection

Specifies the number of times the tone pattern (a set of tone-on and tone-off) must be received to establish
reception of the cyclic tone. This determines the end of call.
Note that this option can only be set when SVM Cyclic Tone Detection on this screen is set to "Option".

Value Range
3-16

Feature Guide References

2.16.3 Built-in Simplified Voice Message (SVM)

656 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 13.3.3 PBX Configuration—[5-3-3] Optional Device—Voice Message—SVM
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

SLT Dial "*" Operation Mode

Specifies the SLT dial "*" operation mode to avoid wrong DTMF signal detection from the SLT. If "Enable" is
selected, you need to dial "*" before dialling.

Value Range
Enable, Disable

Feature Guide References

2.16.3 Built-in Simplified Voice Message (SVM)

PC Programming Manual 657

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
13.4 PBX Configuration—[5-4] Optional Device—External Relay
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

13.4 PBX Configuration—[5-4] Optional

Device—External Relay
Settings related to external relays can be programmed.
Before programming these settings, For Output - Device Type must be set to "Relay" in the
DOORPHONE card’s property settings. (® 9.34 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Card
Property—DOORPHONE Card)
The Shelf, Slot, and Port for each item are displayed for your reference. For details, see Common
Programming Reference Items in 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot.

External Relay No.

Indicates the number of the external relay (reference only).

Value Range
1–8

Feature Guide References

2.18.4 External Relay Control

Name
Specifies the relay name.

Value Range
Max. 20 characters

Feature Guide References

2.18.4 External Relay Control

Relay Activate Time

Specifies the length of time that the relay stays on when activated.

Value Range
1–7 s

Feature Guide References

2.18.4 External Relay Control

COS Number
Specifies the Class of Service (COS) number. COS programming determines the extensions that are able to
activate relays.

Value Range
1–64

658 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 13.4 PBX Configuration—[5-4] Optional Device—External Relay
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

PC Programming Manual References

10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System—Class of Service—COS Settings—Optional Device & Other
Extensions— External Relay Access

Feature Guide References

2.1.2.2 Internal Call Block
2.18.4 External Relay Control

PC Programming Manual 659

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
13.5 PBX Configuration—[5-5] Optional Device—External Sensor
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

13.5 PBX Configuration—[5-5] Optional

Device—External Sensor
Settings related to external sensors can be programmed.
To assign destinations for sensor calls easily, click Destination Setting (see 2.1.6 Extension Number
Setting).
The Shelf, Slot, and Port for each item are displayed for your reference. For details, see Common
Programming Reference Items in 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot.

External Sensor No.

Indicates the number of the external sensor (reference only).

Value Range
1–8

Feature Guide References

2.18.3 External Sensor

Name
Specifies the sensor name.

Value Range
Max. 20 characters

Feature Guide References

2.18.3 External Sensor

Destination—Day, Lunch, Break, Night

Specifies the destination number of sensor calls for each port in each time mode.

Value Range
Max. 32 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, #, [ ] [Secret], and P [Pause])

Feature Guide References

2.18.3 External Sensor

Tenant No.
Specifies the tenant to which the sensor belongs, to determine the Time Table for the sensor. (The tenant
number corresponds to the Time Table number.)

Value Range
1–8

660 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 13.5 PBX Configuration—[5-5] Optional Device—External Sensor
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

PC Programming Manual References

10.4 PBX Configuration—[2-4] System—Week Table

Feature Guide References

2.18.3 External Sensor
5.1.3 Tenant Service

Sensor Alarm—Email notification

Enables e-mail notification when the sensor detects an alarm.

Value Range
Enable, Disable

Feature Guide References

2.18.3 External Sensor
5.1.3 Tenant Service

Sensor Alarm—Email Address

Specifies the e-mail address that will receive a notification when the sensor detects an alarm.

Value Range
Max.128 characters

Feature Guide References

2.18.3 External Sensor
5.1.3 Tenant Service

Sensor Alarm—Email Comment

Specifies comments in the e-mail received when the sensor detects an alarm.

Value Range
Max.256 characters

Feature Guide References

2.18.3 External Sensor
5.1.3 Tenant Service

PC Programming Manual 661

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
13.5 PBX Configuration—[5-5] Optional Device—External Sensor
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

662 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Section 14
PBX Configuration—[6] Feature

This section serves as reference operating instructions

for the Feature menu of the PBX Configuration menu of
the Setup screen of Web Maintenance Console.

PC Programming Manual 663

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
14.1 PBX Configuration—[6-1] Feature—System Speed Dial
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

14.1 PBX Configuration—[6-1] Feature—System

Speed Dial
The System Speed Dialling Table is used to store frequently dialled numbers as well as callers who should be
automatically routed to certain extensions when they call (Calling Line Identification [CLI] distribution). The
System Speed Dialling Table is available for all extension users when making or receiving a call.
In Basic Memory, a maximum of 1000 System Speed Dialling numbers (e.g., telephone numbers, feature
numbers) can be programmed with other related parameters. 100 numbers are displayed at a time. To display
other sets of numbers, click the applicable tab.

Select Table
Selects the System Speed Dialling Table to be programmed. Whether a tenant uses the basic System Speed
Dialling Table or the additional table depends on the setting of System Speed Dial in 14.6 PBX
Configuration—[6-6] Feature—Tenant.

Value Range
System: the standard table
Expansion for Tenant 1-8: additional tables

PC Programming Manual References

14.6 PBX Configuration—[6-6] Feature—Tenant— System Speed Dial

Feature Guide References

2.6.4 Speed Dialling—Personal/System
2.19.1 Caller ID
5.1.3 Tenant Service

Name
Specifies a name for the System Speed Dialling number.

Value Range
Max. 20 characters

Feature Guide References

2.6.4 Speed Dialling—Personal/System
2.19.1 Caller ID

CO Line Access Number + Telephone Number

Specifies the telephone number (including the Trunk Access number) or feature number assigned to the
System Speed Dialling number.

Value Range
Max. 32 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, #, T [Transfer], [ ] [Secret], P [Pause], and F [Flash])

664 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 14.1 PBX Configuration—[6-1] Feature—System Speed Dial
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Feature Guide References

2.6.4 Speed Dialling—Personal/System
2.19.1 Caller ID

CLI Destination
Specifies the CLI destination (extension) to which incoming calls from the programmed telephone number are
routed. If a Caller ID Modification Table is being used, the modified number must match the telephone number
above (CO Line Access Number + Telephone Number) in order for the call to be routed correctly.

Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)

PC Programming Manual References

18.2 PBX Configuration—[10-2] CO & Incoming Call—DIL Table & Port Settings—CLI for DIL— CLI Ring
for DIL—Day, Lunch, Break, Night
18.3 PBX Configuration—[10-3] CO & Incoming Call—DDI / DID Table— CLI Ring for DDI/DID—Day, Lunch,
Break, Night

Feature Guide References

2.1.1.5 Calling Line Identification (CLI) Distribution
2.19.1 Caller ID

PC Programming Manual 665

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
14.2 PBX Configuration—[6-2] Feature—Hotel & Charge
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

14.2 PBX Configuration—[6-2] Feature—Hotel &

Charge
Various settings related to the hospitality features of the PBX can be set.

Main
Hotel Operator—Extension 1–4
Specifies the numbers of the extensions designated as hotel operators.

Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)

Feature Guide References

2.23.1 Hospitality Features—SUMMARY
2.23.2 Room Status Control

SMDR for External Hotel Application 1—Room Status Control

Selects whether check-in and check-out data is output on SMDR.

Value Range
No Print, Print

PC Programming Manual References

19.1 PBX Configuration—[11-1] Maintenance—Main

Feature Guide References

2.22.1.1 Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR)
2.23.2 Room Status Control

SMDR for External Hotel Application 1—Timed Reminder (Wake-up Call)

Selects whether Timed Reminder data is output on SMDR.

Value Range
No Print, Print

PC Programming Manual References

19.1 PBX Configuration—[11-1] Maintenance—Main

Feature Guide References

2.22.1.1 Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR)
2.24.4 Timed Reminder

666 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 14.2 PBX Configuration—[6-2] Feature—Hotel & Charge
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

SMDR for External Hotel Application 2—Printing Message 1–8

Specifies the text of the message output on SMDR when this Printing Message is selected from an extension.
The "%" character can be used in a message, and requires a number to be entered in its place when the
message is selected from an extension. This character can be used a maximum of seven times in a Printing
Message.

Value Range
Max. 16 characters

PC Programming Manual References

19.1 PBX Configuration—[11-1] Maintenance—Main

Feature Guide References

2.22.1.1 Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR)
2.22.2 Printing Message

Timed Reminder Message for SIP-MLT / Standard SIP Phone—Message

Specifies the message displayed on a SIP-MLT or Standard SIP Phone LCD screen for the Timed Reminder
feature.

Value Range
Max. 20 characters

Feature Guide References

2.24.4 Timed Reminder

Bill
Checkout Billing—Billing for Guest
Activates call billing features for the PBX.

Value Range
OFF, ON

PC Programming Manual References

9.2.2 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property—Site

Feature Guide References

2.23.3 Call Billing for Guest Room

Checkout Billing—LCD for "Telephone"

Specifies the name of charge item 1 as shown on the display of the hotel operator extension when entering
room charges.

PC Programming Manual 667

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
14.2 PBX Configuration—[6-2] Feature—Hotel & Charge
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Value Range
Max. 12 characters

Feature Guide References

2.23.3 Call Billing for Guest Room

Checkout Billing—LCD for "Minibar"

Specifies the name of charge item 2 as shown on the display of the hotel operator extension when entering
room charges.

Value Range
Max. 12 characters

Feature Guide References

2.23.3 Call Billing for Guest Room

Checkout Billing—LCD for "Others"

Specifies the name of charge item 3 as shown on the display of the hotel operator extension when entering
room charges.

Value Range
Max. 12 characters

Feature Guide References

2.23.3 Call Billing for Guest Room

Checkout Billing—Bill (SMDR) for "Telephone"

Specifies the name of charge item 1 as printed on the guest bill.

Value Range
Max. 12 characters

Feature Guide References

2.23.3 Call Billing for Guest Room

Checkout Billing—Bill (SMDR) for "Minibar"

Specifies the name of charge item 2 as printed on the guest bill.

Value Range
Max. 12 characters

668 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 14.2 PBX Configuration—[6-2] Feature—Hotel & Charge
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Feature Guide References

2.23.3 Call Billing for Guest Room

Checkout Billing—Bill (SMDR) for "Others"

Specifies the name of charge item 3 as printed on the guest bill.

Value Range
Max. 12 characters

Feature Guide References

2.23.3 Call Billing for Guest Room

SMDR for External Hotel Application—Language for Bill (SMDR)

Specifies the language used for standard items shown on guest bills printed out using the Call Billing feature.

Value Range
Language 1–Language 5

Feature Guide References

2.23.3 Call Billing for Guest Room

SMDR for External Hotel Application—Header 1–3

Specifies the text printed at the top of the guest bill.

Value Range
Max. 80 characters

Feature Guide References

2.23.3 Call Billing for Guest Room

SMDR for External Hotel Application—Footer 1–3

Specifies the text printed at the bottom of the guest bill.

Value Range
Max. 80 characters

Feature Guide References

2.23.3 Call Billing for Guest Room

PC Programming Manual 669

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
14.2 PBX Configuration—[6-2] Feature—Hotel & Charge
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Charge
Margin & Tax—Margin Rate for "Telephone" (%)
Specifies the percentage margin to be added to telephone charges displayed on the guest bill.

Value Range
0.00–99.99 %

Feature Guide References

2.22.3 Call Charge Services
2.23.3 Call Billing for Guest Room

Margin & Tax—Tax Rate for "Telephone" (%)

Specifies the percentage tax rate to be used when calculating guest telephone charges.

Value Range
0.00–99.99 %

Feature Guide References

2.23.3 Call Billing for Guest Room

Margin & Tax—Tax Rate for "Minibar" (%)

Specifies the percentage tax rate to be used when calculating guest charges for charge item 2.

Value Range
0.00–99.99 %

Feature Guide References

2.23.3 Call Billing for Guest Room

Margin & Tax—Tax Rate for "Others" (%)

Specifies the percentage tax rate to be used when calculating guest charges for charge item 3.

Value Range
0.00–99.99 %

Feature Guide References

2.23.3 Call Billing for Guest Room

Charge Options—Digits After Decimal Point

Specifies the number of digits to display after the decimal point for the currency in use.

Value Range
0–6

670 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 14.2 PBX Configuration—[6-2] Feature—Hotel & Charge
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

PC Programming Manual References

12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 3— Charge
Limit
12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 3— Charge
Limit
14.3 PBX Configuration—[6-3] Feature—Verification Code— Budget Management

Feature Guide References

2.21.4 Display Information
2.22.3 Call Charge Services
2.23.3 Call Billing for Guest Room

Charge Options—Currency
Specifies the currency characters shown on the display of the extension and the SMDR.

Value Range
Max. 3 characters

PC Programming Manual References

12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 3— Charge
Limit
12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 3— Charge
Limit
14.3 PBX Configuration—[6-3] Feature—Verification Code— Budget Management

Feature Guide References

2.21.4 Display Information
2.22.1.1 Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR)
2.22.3 Call Charge Services
2.23.3 Call Billing for Guest Room

Charge Options—Currency Display Position

Specifies whether the currency characters are displayed before or after the call charge.

Value Range
Head, Tail

PC Programming Manual References

12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 3— Charge
Limit
12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 3— Charge
Limit
14.3 PBX Configuration—[6-3] Feature—Verification Code— Budget Management

PC Programming Manual 671

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
14.2 PBX Configuration—[6-2] Feature—Hotel & Charge
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Feature Guide References

2.22.3 Call Charge Services

Charge Options—Action at Charge Limit

Selects what happens when the amount of the call charge reaches the pre-programmed limit during a
conversation.

Value Range
Alarm: Only a warning tone is heard.
Alarm + Disconnect: A warning tone is heard, and then the call is disconnected.

PC Programming Manual References

12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 3— Charge
Limit
12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 3— Charge
Limit

Feature Guide References

2.7.2 Budget Management

Charge Options—Meter Start on Answer Detection

Enables the PBX to start counting the call charge when the answer signal from the telephone company is
detected.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

PC Programming Manual References

12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 3— Charge
Limit
12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 3— Charge
Limit

Feature Guide References

2.22.3 Call Charge Services

672 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 14.3 PBX Configuration—[6-3] Feature—Verification Code
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

14.3 PBX Configuration—[6-3] Feature—Verification

Code
A verification code is used to override the Toll Restriction (TRS)/Call Barring (Barring) of the extension in use
to make a certain trunk call, or to identify the call for accounting and billing purposes.
A maximum of 1000 verification codes can be programmed with other related parameters. 100 codes are
displayed at a time. To display other sets of codes, click the applicable tab.

Verification Code
Specifies the verification code.

Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)

Feature Guide References

2.7.6 Verification Code Entry

User Name
Specifies the user name assigned to the verification code.

Value Range
Max. 20 characters

Feature Guide References

2.7.6 Verification Code Entry

Verification Code PIN

Specifies the PIN to be entered when making a trunk call with the verification code.

CAUTION
There is a risk that fraudulent telephone calls will be made if a third party discovers a personal identification
number (PIN) (verification code PIN or extension PIN) of the PBX.
The cost of such calls will be billed to the owner/renter of the PBX.
To protect the PBX from this kind of fraudulent use, we strongly recommend:
a. Keeping PINs secret.
b. Selecting complex, random PINs that cannot be easily guessed.
c. Changing PINs frequently.
Value Range
Max. 10 digits (consisting of 0–9)

Feature Guide References

2.7.6 Verification Code Entry

PC Programming Manual 673

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
14.3 PBX Configuration—[6-3] Feature—Verification Code
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

COS Number
Specifies the COS that applies when making a trunk call with the verification code.

Value Range
1–64

PC Programming Manual References

10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System—Class of Service—COS Settings

Feature Guide References

2.7.6 Verification Code Entry
5.1.1 Class of Service (COS)

Itemised Billing Code for ARS

Specifies the itemised billing code used by the ARS feature for identifying calls made with a verification code
for accounting and billing purposes.

Value Range
Max. 10 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)

PC Programming Manual References

16.5 PBX Configuration—[8-5] ARS—Carrier

Feature Guide References

2.8.1 Automatic Route Selection (ARS)

Budget Management
Specifies the limit of the call charge that will be counted on the verification code.
The number of decimal places that can be specified here depends on the value set in Charge
Options—Digits After Decimal Point in 14.2 PBX Configuration—[6-2] Feature—Hotel & Charge.

Value Range
0–9999999

Feature Guide References

2.7.2 Budget Management

674 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 14.4 PBX Configuration—[6-4] Feature—Second Dial Tone
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

14.4 PBX Configuration—[6-4] Feature—Second Dial

Tone
A programmed Pause time can be inserted automatically between the Second Dial Tone Waiting code and
the following digits. When a programmed Second Dial Tone Waiting code is dialled after seizing a trunk, a
pre-programmed number of pauses are inserted after the code.
A maximum of 100 Second Dial Tone Waiting codes can be programmed. 20 codes are displayed at a time.
To display other sets of codes, click the applicable tab.

Second Dial Tone Waiting Code

Specifies the Second Dial Tone Waiting code.

Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)

Feature Guide References

2.5.4.7 Pause Insertion

Pause Repeating Counter

Specifies the number of pauses to be inserted when waiting for the second dial tone.

Value Range
0–20

Feature Guide References

2.5.4.7 Pause Insertion

PC Programming Manual 675

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
14.5 PBX Configuration—[6-5] Feature—Absent Message
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

14.5 PBX Configuration—[6-5] Feature—Absent

Message
When a display PT user calls an extension, a message is shown on the caller’s telephone display describing
the reason for absence. A maximum of 8 Absent Messages can be programmed, and any extension user can
select one of them.

Note
When using this feature in conjunction with the Unified Messaging (UM) system, changing a message here
will create a difference between the displayed message and the UM’s pre-recorded greeting that
corresponds to the absent message. To use both features in synchronisation, you must record a
corresponding greeting for each absent message changed. For details about changing UM system
prompts, see 7.9 Utility—UM – System Prompts Customisation.

Absent Message
Specifies the message for display.

Value Range
Max. 16 characters

Feature Guide References

2.20.2 Absent Message

676 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 14.6 PBX Configuration—[6-6] Feature—Tenant
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

14.6 PBX Configuration—[6-6] Feature—Tenant

A maximum of 8 tenants can share the PBX. Each tenant is composed of specified extension user groups.
The PBX offers each tenant its own Time Table and system resources.
To assign extensions as operators easily, click Extension No. Setting (see 2.1.6 Extension Number
Setting).

Music On Hold
Specifies the audio source to be used for Music on Hold.

Value Range
Same as System Setting, BGM1, BGM2, BGM3, BGM4, BGM5, BGM6, BGM7, BGM8, Tone

PC Programming Manual References

10.2 PBX Configuration—[2-2] System—Operator & BGM

Feature Guide References

2.13.4 Music on Hold
5.1.3 Tenant Service

Operator (Extension Number)

Specifies the extension number or the floating extension number of an incoming call distribution group to be
designated as the tenant operator. When this parameter is left unspecified, the PBX operator serves as the
tenant operator.

Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)

PC Programming Manual References

10.2 PBX Configuration—[2-2] System—Operator & BGM

Feature Guide References

5.1.3 Tenant Service
5.1.5 Operator Features

ARS Mode
Specifies the ARS mode used when making a trunk call.

Value Range
Off: ARS is disabled.
On for Local Access Operation: ARS operates when an extension user makes a call using any Idle Line Access
method.
On for Any CO Access Operation: ARS operates when an extension user makes a call using any Trunk Access
method.

PC Programming Manual 677

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
14.6 PBX Configuration—[6-6] Feature—Tenant
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Same as System Setting: The setting specified in ARS Mode in 16.1 PBX Configuration—[8-1]
ARS—System Setting is applied.

PC Programming Manual References

16.1 PBX Configuration—[8-1] ARS—System Setting

Feature Guide References

2.8.1 Automatic Route Selection (ARS)
5.1.3 Tenant Service

System Speed Dial

Specifies which system speed dialling table is used by the tenant.

Value Range
Same as System Setting: PBX common system speed dialling numbers are used.
Tenant Exclusive: Individual tenant system speed dialling numbers are used.

PC Programming Manual References

14.1 PBX Configuration—[6-1] Feature—System Speed Dial

Feature Guide References

2.6.4 Speed Dialling—Personal/System
5.1.3 Tenant Service

Extension Directory
Specifies whether the display for the Speed Dialling numbers is for the entire system, or only for the extensions
of the tenant group that the extension belongs to.

Value Range
System: All system Speed Dialling numbers are displayed.
Tenant: Only the extensions of the tenant group that the extension belongs to are displayed.

Feature Guide References

2.6.4 Speed Dialling—Personal/System
5.1.3 Tenant Service

678 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Section 15
PBX Configuration—[7] TRS

This section serves as reference operating instructions

for the TRS menu of the PBX Configuration menu of the
Setup screen of Web Maintenance Console.

PC Programming Manual 679

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
15.1 PBX Configuration—[7-1] TRS—Denied Code
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

15.1 PBX Configuration—[7-1] TRS—Denied Code

Toll Restriction (TRS)/Call Barring (Barring) prohibits an extension from making certain trunk calls. Each time
mode of every COS is assigned one of the seven TRS/Barring levels. TRS/Barring level 7 provides the
maximum restriction (all trunk calls are prohibited) and level 1 provides the minimum (all trunk calls are
allowed). TRS/Barring levels 2–6 are used to restrict calls according to the combination of denied codes here
and excepted codes in 15.2 PBX Configuration—[7-2] TRS—Exception Code. If the leading digits of the
dialled number are not found in the applicable Denied Code tables, the call is made.
A maximum of 100 denied codes can be programmed for each level. 20 codes are displayed at a time. To
display other sets of codes, click the applicable tab.

Level 2–Level 6
Specifies the leading digits of toll restricted numbers for each level.

Value Range
Max. 16 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, #, and X)

PC Programming Manual References

10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System—Class of Service—COS Settings—TRS— TRS Level—Day,
Lunch, Break, Night
15.2 PBX Configuration—[7-2] TRS—Exception Code

Feature Guide References

2.7.1 Toll Restriction (TRS)/Call Barring (Barring)

680 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 15.2 PBX Configuration—[7-2] TRS—Exception Code
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

15.2 PBX Configuration—[7-2] TRS—Exception

Code
Toll Restriction (TRS)/Call Barring (Barring) prohibits an extension from making certain trunk calls. Each time
mode of every COS is assigned one of the seven TRS/Barring levels. TRS/Barring level 7 provides the
maximum restriction (all trunk calls are prohibited) and level 1 provides the minimum (all trunk calls are
allowed). TRS/Barring levels 2–6 are used to restrict calls according to the combination of denied codes in
15.1 PBX Configuration—[7-1] TRS—Denied Code and excepted codes here. A call denied by the applicable
Denied Code tables is checked against the applicable Exception Code tables, and if a match is found, the call
is made.
A maximum of 100 exception codes can be programmed for each level. 20 codes are displayed at a time. To
display other sets of codes, click the applicable tab.

Level 2–Level 6
Specifies the leading digits of the numbers to be exempted from toll restriction/call barring for each level.

Value Range
Max. 16 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, #, and X)

PC Programming Manual References

10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System—Class of Service—COS Settings—TRS— TRS Level—Day,
Lunch, Break, Night
15.1 PBX Configuration—[7-1] TRS—Denied Code

Feature Guide References

2.7.1 Toll Restriction (TRS)/Call Barring (Barring)

PC Programming Manual 681

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
15.3 PBX Configuration—[7-3] TRS—Special Carrier
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

15.3 PBX Configuration—[7-3] TRS—Special Carrier

If the PBX has access to multiple telephone companies, a Special Carrier Access Code is required each time
a trunk call is made. By programming these Special Carrier Access Codes here, Toll Restriction (TRS)/Call
Barring (Barring) can restrict or allow calls to be made by ignoring the codes and looking at the telephone
number only. If a Special Carrier Access Code is found in the dialled number, TRS/Barring will look only at the
following digits.
A maximum of 20 Special Carrier Access Codes can be programmed.

Special Carrier Access Code

Specifies a Special Carrier Access Code. Special Carrier Access Codes and Host PBX Access codes should
be unique.

Value Range
Max. 16 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)

Feature Guide References

2.5.4.9 Special Carrier Access Code
2.7.1 Toll Restriction (TRS)/Call Barring (Barring)

682 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 15.4 PBX Configuration—[7-4] TRS—Emergency Dial
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

15.4 PBX Configuration—[7-4] TRS—Emergency Dial

Any extension user can dial the programmed emergency numbers at any time after seizing a trunk. The
restrictions imposed on the extension, such as Toll Restriction (TRS)/Call Barring (Barring), Account
Code—Forced mode, and Extension Dial Lock are disregarded.
A maximum of 10 emergency numbers can be programmed.

Emergency Number
Specifies the numbers used for making emergency calls. It is not necessary to start the emergency number
with a Trunk Access number.

Value Range
Max. 32 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, #, T [Transfer], P [Pause], and F [Flash])

Feature Guide References

2.5.4.2 Emergency Call

PC Programming Manual 683

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
15.5 PBX Configuration—[7-5] TRS—Miscellaneous
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

15.5 PBX Configuration—[7-5] TRS—Miscellaneous

Toll Restriction (TRS)/Call Barring (Barring) prohibits an extension from making certain trunk calls. The
following optional settings can be programmed to activate a TRS/Barring check, override TRS/Barring, or
switch between TRS/Barring methods.

TRS Override by System Speed Dialling

Enables an outgoing trunk call to override TRS/Barring when the call is made using System Speed Dialling.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

PC Programming Manual References

14.1 PBX Configuration—[6-1] Feature—System Speed Dial

Feature Guide References

2.7.1 Toll Restriction (TRS)/Call Barring (Barring)

TRS Check for Dial " * # "

Enables a TRS/Barring check for the user-dialled " " and "#". This is useful in preventing unauthorised calls
which could possibly be made through certain telephone company exchanges.

Value Range
No Check, Check

Feature Guide References

2.7.1 Toll Restriction (TRS)/Call Barring (Barring)

Mode when Dial Time-out before TRS Check

Selects whether a trunk is disconnected if the TRS/Barring check has not been completed when the trunk
Inter-digit timer expires.

Value Range
Disconnect: The trunk is disconnected as soon as the timer expires.
Keep: The TRS/Barring check is performed when the timer expires.

PC Programming Manual References

10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3] System—Timers & Counters

Feature Guide References

2.7.1 Toll Restriction (TRS)/Call Barring (Barring)

684 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 15.5 PBX Configuration—[7-5] TRS—Miscellaneous
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Dial Digits Limitation After Answering—Dial Digits

Specifies a limit to be placed on the number of digits which can be dialled after an extension user receives a
trunk call. If the number of dialled digits exceeds the programmed limit, the line will be disconnected.

Value Range
None, 1–7

Feature Guide References

2.7.1 Toll Restriction (TRS)/Call Barring (Barring)
2.11.8 Trunk Call Limitation

TRS Check after EFA

Enables TRS/Barring to check the digits dialled after External Feature Access (EFA) during a trunk call.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

Feature Guide References

2.7.1 Toll Restriction (TRS)/Call Barring (Barring)
2.11.7 External Feature Access (EFA)

TRS Table Mode for Level N (N=2_6)

Selects the method of TRS/Barring to be used for restricting calls. The level of TRS/Barring is determined by
the telephone codes set in the Denied Code Tables and Exception Code Tables.

Value Range
Deny Table 2_N + Except Table N_6: The Denied Code Tables for the higher levels are applied to all levels
below it, and the Exception Code Tables for the lower levels are applied to all levels above it.
Deny Table N + Except Table N: Each level has its own separate set of denied codes and exception codes,
which are only applied to that level.

Feature Guide References

2.7.1 Toll Restriction (TRS)/Call Barring (Barring)

PC Programming Manual 685

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
15.5 PBX Configuration—[7-5] TRS—Miscellaneous
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

686 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Section 16
PBX Configuration—[8] ARS

This section serves as reference operating instructions

for the ARS menu of the PBX Configuration menu of the
Setup screen of Web Maintenance Console.

PC Programming Manual 687

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
16.1 PBX Configuration—[8-1] ARS—System Setting
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

16.1 PBX Configuration—[8-1] ARS—System Setting

Automatic Route Selection (ARS) automatically selects the appropriate carrier at the time a trunk call is made,
according to the programmed settings. The user-dialled number will be checked and modified in order to
connect it to the appropriate carrier.

ARS Mode
Selects the condition to determine when to operate ARS.

Value Range
Off: ARS is disabled.
On for Local Access Operation: ARS operates when an extension user makes a call using Idle Line Access
method.
On for Any CO Access Operation: ARS operates when an extension user makes a call using Idle Line Access,
Trunk Access, or S-CO Line Access method.

Feature Guide References

2.5.5.3 Trunk Access
2.8.1 Automatic Route Selection (ARS)

Mode When Any Carrier is not programmed for the Dial

Selects what happens when the dialled number is not found in Leading Number in 16.2 PBX
Configuration—[8-2] ARS—Leading Number.

Value Range
Disconnect: the line will be disconnected.
Local Access: the dialled number will be handled by Idle Line Access method.

Feature Guide References

2.8.1 Automatic Route Selection (ARS)

688 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 16.2 PBX Configuration—[8-2] ARS—Leading Number
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

16.2 PBX Configuration—[8-2] ARS—Leading

Number
Specifies the area codes and/or telephone numbers as leading numbers that will be routed by the ARS feature.
A maximum of 1000 different leading numbers can be programmed, and each leading number can select a
Routing Plan Table number, which determines the ARS procedure.
The additional (remaining) number of digits can also be specified for each leading number. The additional
(remaining) number of digits must be specified only when "#", for example, is needed after the dialled number.
The "#" will be added after the programmed number of digits of the user-dialled number (excluding the leading
number).
100 leading numbers are displayed at a time. To display other sets of leading numbers, click the applicable
tab.

Leading Number
Specifies the leading number.

Value Range
Max. 16 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, #, and X)

Feature Guide References

2.8.1 Automatic Route Selection (ARS)

Additional Number of Digits

Specifies the additional (remaining) number of digits following each leading number.

Value Range
0–15

Feature Guide References

2.8.1 Automatic Route Selection (ARS)

Routing Plan Number

Specifies the Routing Plan Table number used for each leading number.

Value Range
1–48

Feature Guide References

2.8.1 Automatic Route Selection (ARS)

PC Programming Manual 689

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
16.3 PBX Configuration—[8-3] ARS—Routing Plan Time
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

16.3 PBX Configuration—[8-3] ARS—Routing Plan

Time
The start and end times of a maximum of 4 different time blocks are shown for each day of the week. There
are 48 Routing Plan Tables, and each Routing Plan Table can have its own time blocks. Select the desired
Routing Plan Table number from the Routing Plan list.
• To adjust the currently displayed Routing Plan, click and drag the divisions between two time periods.
• To programme the time blocks of the currently displayed Routing Plan, including adding or deleting time
blocks, click Time Setting.

690 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 16.3.1 PBX Configuration—[8-3] ARS—Routing Plan Time—Time Setting
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

16.3.1 PBX Configuration—[8-3] ARS—Routing Plan Time—Time

Setting
The start times of a maximum of 4 different time blocks can be programmed for each day of the week, for the
selected Routing Plan. Each time block automatically ends when the subsequent block begins.

Time-A–D—Setting
Enables the setting of the start time for each time block.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

Feature Guide References

2.8.1 Automatic Route Selection (ARS)

Time-A–D—Hour, Minute
Specifies the start time for each time block.

Note
Time-A must be the earliest block in the day, and the following blocks must be set in chronological order.

Correct programming example:

Time-A: 8:00
Time-B: 17:00
Time-C: 21:00

Incorrect programming example:

Time-A: 8:00
Time-B: 13:00
Time-C: 11:30
Time-D: 17:00

Value Range
00:00–23:59

Feature Guide References

2.8.1 Automatic Route Selection (ARS)

PC Programming Manual 691

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
16.4 PBX Configuration—[8-4] ARS—Routing Plan Priority
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

16.4 PBX Configuration—[8-4] ARS—Routing Plan

Priority
The carrier priority (1 through 6) in a Routing Plan Table can be programmed for each time zone of each day
of the week. Select the desired Routing Plan Table number from the Routing Plan list. Select the desired day
of the week by clicking the applicable tab.

Time-A–Time-D
Specifies the carrier to be given priority for each time zone.

Value Range
None, 1–48

Feature Guide References

2.8.1 Automatic Route Selection (ARS)

692 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 16.5 PBX Configuration—[8-5] ARS—Carrier
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

16.5 PBX Configuration—[8-5] ARS—Carrier

Carrier
It is possible to specify how user-dialled numbers are modified for connecting to the appropriate carrier. A
maximum of 48 different carriers can be programmed to be used with the ARS feature.

Carrier Name
Specifies the carrier name.

Value Range
Max. 20 characters

Feature Guide References

2.8.1 Automatic Route Selection (ARS)

Removed Number of Digits

Specifies the number of leading digits to remove from the user-dialled number.

Value Range
0–15

Feature Guide References

2.8.1 Automatic Route Selection (ARS)

Modify Command
Specifies the commands to modify the user-dialled number to access the carrier. For details of each command,
see the Feature Guide.

Value Range
Max. 16 characters (consisting of 0–9, *, #, C, P, A, G, I and H)

Feature Guide References

2.8.1 Automatic Route Selection (ARS)

CLIP Table No.

Sets the CLIP numbers established for each extension (wired/wireless) of a carrier. The CLIP IDs for each
CLIP number are set in 12.1.7 PBX Configuration—[4-1-7] Extension—Wired Extension—CLIP ID
Table and 12.2.5 PBX Configuration—[4-2-5] Extension—Portable Station—CLIP ID Table.

Value Range
1–8

PC Programming Manual 693

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
16.5 PBX Configuration—[8-5] ARS—Carrier
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Feature Guide References

2.8.1 Automatic Route Selection (ARS)

Carrier Access Code

Specifies the carrier access code. The carrier access code can be added to the user-dialled number by
specifying "C" in Modify Command on this screen.

Value Range
Max. 32 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, #, and P [Pause])

Feature Guide References

2.8.1 Automatic Route Selection (ARS)

TRG Priority
Selects the order in which trunk groups are seized when making calls via each carrier.

Trunk Group—Priority 1–Priority 4

Specifies which trunk group is seized in the order of priority 1 to priority 4.

Value Range
None, 1–64

Feature Guide References

2.8.1 Automatic Route Selection (ARS)

TRG 01–TRG 64
Selects the trunk groups that connect to the carrier.

TRG 01–TRG 64
Enables each trunk group for each carrier. If a cell is highlighted in blue, that trunk group is enabled for use
with that carrier.

Value Range
OFF (white), ON (blue)

Feature Guide References

2.8.1 Automatic Route Selection (ARS)

Authorisation Code for Tenant

Specifies an Authorisation code for each tenant. The Authorisation codes can be added to the user-dialled
number by specifying "A" command in Modify Command on the Carrier tab.

694 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 16.5 PBX Configuration—[8-5] ARS—Carrier
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Authorisation Code for Tenant—Tenant 1–Tenant 8

Specifies the Authorisation code of each carrier for each tenant.

Value Range
Max. 16 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)

Feature Guide References

2.8.1 Automatic Route Selection (ARS)
5.1.3 Tenant Service

PC Programming Manual 695

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
16.6 PBX Configuration—[8-6] ARS—Leading Number Exception
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

16.6 PBX Configuration—[8-6] ARS—Leading

Number Exception
Specifies telephone numbers that will not be connected using the ARS feature. When the user-dialled number
includes a leading number exception, the PBX sends the number to a trunk by the Idle Line Access method if
ARS Mode in 16.1 PBX Configuration—[8-1] ARS—System Setting is "on".
A maximum of 200 different leading number exceptions can be programmed. 20 leading number exception
entries are displayed on the screen at a time. To display other sets, click the applicable tab.

Leading Number Exception

Specifies the leading number exception.

Value Range
Max. 16 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, #, and X)

Feature Guide References

2.8.1 Automatic Route Selection (ARS)

696 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 16.7 PBX Configuration—[8-7] ARS—Authorisation Code for TRG
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

16.7 PBX Configuration—[8-7] ARS—Authorisation

Code for TRG
An Authorisation code can be specified for each trunk group. The Authorisation codes entered here can be
added to user-dialled numbers by adding "G" to the Modify Command specified on the Carrier tab of screen
16.5 PBX Configuration—[8-5] ARS—Carrier.
8 trunk groups are displayed on the screen at a time. To display other groups, click the applicable tab.

TRG—TRG 01–TRG 64
Specifies the Authorisation code of each carrier for each trunk group.

Value Range
Max. 10 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)

PC Programming Manual References

16.5 PBX Configuration—[8-5] ARS—Carrier—Carrier— Modify Command

Feature Guide References

2.8.1 Automatic Route Selection (ARS)

PC Programming Manual 697

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
16.7 PBX Configuration—[8-7] ARS—Authorisation Code for TRG
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

698 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Section 17
PBX Configuration—[9] Private Network

This section serves as reference operating instructions

for the Private Network menu of the PBX
Configuration menu of the Setup screen of Web
Maintenance Console.

PC Programming Manual 699

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
17.1 PBX Configuration—[9-1] Private Network—TIE Table
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

17.1 PBX Configuration—[9-1] Private Network—TIE

Table
A TIE line is a privately leased communication line between two or more PBXs, which provides cost effective
communications between company members at different locations.
A maximum of 32 TIE Line Routing and Modification Tables can be programmed. It is necessary to make
unified tables with all PBXs at different locations in a TIE line network in order to identify the trunk route to be
used when an extension makes or receives a TIE line call.
There are two types of routing methods: the Extension Number Method, where all extensions in the network
are given a unique extension number; and the PBX Code Method, where each PBX is given a unique code,
which is dialled before the extension number to call an extension at another PBX.
Two priority sets (from a total of 8) are displayed at a time. To display other priority sets, click the applicable
tab.
Using a private network, up to 8 PBXs can share one voice mail system (centralised VM) connected to another
PBX. This can provide voice mail for extensions attached to any of the PBXs in the network.

Own PBX Code

Specifies the PBX code of the local PBX, when using PBX Code Method numbering on a TIE line network. If
this cell is left empty, the Extension Number Method is used.

Value Range
Max. 7 digits (consisting of 0–9)

Feature Guide References

4.3.1 TIE Line Service

Priority 1–Priority 8
Leading Number
Specifies the leading number for other PBX extension numbers or the PBX code of others in the TIE line
network.

Value Range
Max. 3 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)

Feature Guide References

4.3.1 TIE Line Service

Removed Number of Digits

Specifies the number of leading digits of the dialled number to be removed for each priority.

Value Range
0–15

Feature Guide References

4.3.1 TIE Line Service

700 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 17.1 PBX Configuration—[9-1] Private Network—TIE Table
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Added Number
Specifies the number to be added to the dialled number in place of the removed digits for each priority.

Value Range
Max. 32 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, #, and P [Pause])

Feature Guide References

4.3.1 TIE Line Service

Trunk Group
Specifies the trunk group to be used for TIE line calls for each priority.

Value Range
None, 1–64

Feature Guide References

4.3.1 TIE Line Service

Enhanced QSIG
Leading Number
Specifies the leading number for other PBX extension numbers or the PBX code of other PBXs in the TIE line
network.

Value Range
Max. 3 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)

Feature Guide References

4.3.5 QSIG Enhanced Features

Enhanced QSIG Call Information (Activation Key Required)

Enables Network Message Waiting information to be sent from the PBX to which the voice mail system is
attached to extensions connected to other PBXs in the network.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

Feature Guide References

4.3.5 QSIG Enhanced Features

PC Programming Manual 701

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
17.2 PBX Configuration—[9-2] Private Network—Network Data Transmission
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

17.2 PBX Configuration—[9-2] Private

Network—Network Data Transmission
Settings related to the transmission of extension BLF (Busy Line Field) data or Message Waiting notifications
over a network of PBXs can be programmed.
Extension BLF data is used to show the status of a monitored extension attached to another PBX on a Network
DSS (NDSS) button. Network Message Waiting notifications are used for the Centralised VM feature, and a
voice mail system can send notifications to extensions connected to any PBX in the network.

Network Data Transmission for Centralised Operator Feature—Network PBX ID

Specifies the Network ID of the PBX, for Network Direct Station Selection (NDSS). This parameter must be
set in correspondence with the Network IDs assigned to other PBXs in the network.
Network IDs 1-8 can only be assigned to one PBX each within a network. Assigning the same Network ID to
two PBXs will cause network data transmission problems.
Changing this value in On-line mode will automatically clear any NDSS Link Data.

Value Range
0: The PBX retransmits BLF data sent by other PBXs.
1: The PBX receives BLF data sent by other PBXs.
2–8: The PBX transmits BLF data over the network.

Feature Guide References

4.3.5.1 Network Direct Station Selection (NDSS)

Network Data Transmission for Centralised Operator Feature—Data

Transmission VoIP->ISDN
Selects whether to re-send BLF data received from a VoIP port through any ISDN ports that are set to transmit
BLF data.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

PC Programming Manual References

9.26 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - BRI Port—ISDN CO— Networking Data
Transfer
9.27 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - PRI Port—CO Setting— Networking
Data Transfer

Feature Guide References

4.3.5.1 Network Direct Station Selection (NDSS)

Network Data Transmission for Centralised Operator Feature—Data

Transmission ISDN->VoIP
Selects whether to re-send BLF data received from an ISDN port through any VoIP ports that are set to transmit
BLF data.

702 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 17.2 PBX Configuration—[9-2] Private Network—Network Data Transmission
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Value Range
Disable, Enable

PC Programming Manual References

17.3 PBX Configuration—[9-3] Private Network—Network Operator (VoIP)— IP-GW Card Slot No. to notify
BLF data to Network Operator

Feature Guide References

4.3.5.1 Network Direct Station Selection (NDSS)

Network Data Transmission for Centralised Operator Feature—Data

Transmission Counter
Specifies the maximum number of "hops", or transmissions between two PBXs, before a packet of BLF data
is discarded.

Value Range
1–63

Feature Guide References

4.3.5.1 Network Direct Station Selection (NDSS)

Network Data Transmission for Centralised Operator Feature—Data

Broadcasting Interval Timer
Specifies the frequency of BLF data transmission. The PBX will send data over the network periodically
according to the interval specified here.

Value Range
100 ´ n (n=0–30) ms

Feature Guide References

4.3.5.1 Network Direct Station Selection (NDSS)

Network MSW Data Transmission for Centralised VM Feature—Data

Re-transmission : Repeat Counter
Specifies the number of times re-transmission of network message waiting notifications is repeated before
being cancelled.

Value Range
0–10

PC Programming Manual 703

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
17.2 PBX Configuration—[9-2] Private Network—Network Data Transmission
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

PC Programming Manual References

17.1 PBX Configuration—[9-1] Private Network—TIE Table— Enhanced QSIG Call Information (Activation
Key Required)

Feature Guide References

4.3.5.2 Centralised Voice Mail

Network MSW Data Transmission for Centralised VM Feature—Data

Re-transmission : Repeat Timer
Specifies the length of time between repeated re-transmission of network message waiting notifications.

Value Range
10–240 s

PC Programming Manual References

17.1 PBX Configuration—[9-1] Private Network—TIE Table— Enhanced QSIG Call Information (Activation
Key Required)

Feature Guide References

4.3.5.2 Centralised Voice Mail

704 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 17.3 PBX Configuration—[9-3] Private Network—Network Operator (VoIP)
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

17.3 PBX Configuration—[9-3] Private

Network—Network Operator (VoIP)
This screen allows network operators to be programmed. A network operator is an extension at a remote PBX
that will monitor other PBX extensions using Network Direct Station Selection (NDSS). The settings on this
screen should be programmed at the PBX that is to be monitored ( Network Data Transmission for
Centralised Operator Feature—Network PBX ID 2–8). Up to 8 network operators can be programmed.

Network Operator Extension No.

Specifies the number of an extension at the monitor PBX (the PBX whose Network Data Transmission
for Centralised Operator Feature—Network PBX ID is set to 1 in 17.2 PBX Configuration—[9-2] Private
Network—Network Data Transmission). Any extension at the monitor PBX can be specified here.

Value Range
Max. 16 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)

PC Programming Manual References

17.2 PBX Configuration—[9-2] Private Network—Network Data Transmission— Network Data Transmission
for Centralised Operator Feature—Network PBX ID

Feature Guide References

4.3.5.1 Network Direct Station Selection (NDSS)

IP-GW Card Slot No. to notify BLF data to Network Operator

Specifies the slot number of the card used to send extension status data. This setting is only required when
using VoIP to transmit data.

Value Range
Undefined, 1 – 4, 1 – 5, 2 – 2, 2 – 3, 3 – 2, 3 – 3, 4 – 2, 4 – 3, Virtual – 1, Virtual – 2, Virtual – 3, Virtual – 4

PC Programming Manual References

9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot

Feature Guide References

4.3.5.1 Network Direct Station Selection (NDSS)

PC Programming Manual 705

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
17.4 PBX Configuration—[9-4] Private Network—NDSS Key Table
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

17.4 PBX Configuration—[9-4] Private

Network—NDSS Key Table
Extensions at up to 7 other PBXs that will be monitored using Network Direct Station Selection (NDSS) can
be registered. A maximum of 250 extensions can be registered. To create an NDSS button to monitor an
extension, the extension must be registered here first.
To clear NDSS link data, click the NDSS Clear button. The NDSS Clear button can be used only in On-line
mode.
Note that the parameters on this screen can only be set when the Network Data Transmission for Centralised
Operator Feature—Network PBX ID is set to 1 in the 17.2 PBX Configuration—[9-2] Private
Network—Network Data Transmission screen.

Network Extension No.

Specifies the number of the remote extension (attached to another PBX) that will be monitored. The number
input here can use either Extension Number Method or PBX Code Method.

Value Range
Max. 16 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)

Feature Guide References

4.1 Public Network Features—4.3.1 TIE Line Service
4.3.5.1 Network Direct Station Selection (NDSS)

Network Extension Name for Programming Reference

Specifies the name of the network extension. This name is only shown here, not on the displays of extensions.

Value Range
Max. 20 characters

Feature Guide References

4.3.5.1 Network Direct Station Selection (NDSS)

Network PBX ID of Network Extension to be monitored

Indicates the Network Data Transmission for Centralised Operator Feature—Network PBX ID of the PBX
that the extension is connected to (reference only).

Value Range
None, 1–8

PC Programming Manual References

17.2 PBX Configuration—[9-2] Private Network—Network Data Transmission— Network Data Transmission
for Centralised Operator Feature—Network PBX ID

706 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 17.4 PBX Configuration—[9-4] Private Network—NDSS Key Table
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Feature Guide References

4.3.5.1 Network Direct Station Selection (NDSS)

PC Programming Manual 707

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
17.5 PBX Configuration—[9-5] Private Network—Centralised UM/VM Unit
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

17.5 PBX Configuration—[9-5] Private

Network—Centralised UM/VM Unit
View and programme settings for using the Unified Messaging system and VPSs in a private network. To view
a list of all programmed extension numbers and types, click Extension List View (see 6.5 Tool—Extension
List View).

Unit No.
Indicates the unit number of the UM system or VM unit, as assigned by the PBX (reference only).

Value Range
Unit No.

Floating Extension No. (TIE)

Specifies the floating extension number of the centralised UM or VM (VPS) group. This floating extension
number must start with the number used to access a TIE line or the extensions of another PBX.

Value Range
Max. 8 digits (consisting of 0–9)

Group Name (20 characters)

Specifies the name of the centralised UM or VM (VPS) group, which will be shown on the display of extensions
that call it.

Value Range
Max. 20 Characters

708 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Section 18
PBX Configuration—[10] CO & Incoming Call

This section serves as reference operating instructions

for the CO & Incoming Call menu of the PBX
Configuration menu of the Setup screen of Web
Maintenance Console.

PC Programming Manual 709

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
18.1 PBX Configuration—[10-1] CO & Incoming Call—CO Line Settings
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

18.1 PBX Configuration—[10-1] CO & Incoming

Call—CO Line Settings
Trunks can be assigned a name, and grouped into a maximum of 64 trunk groups.
The Shelf, Slot, and Port for each item are displayed for your reference. For details, see Common
Programming Reference Items in 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot.

Card Type
Indicates the type of card to which the trunk is connected (reference only).

Value Range
Card type

CO Name
Specifies the trunk name which is shown on the extension’s display when receiving a call from the trunk.

Value Range
Max. 20 characters

Feature Guide References

2.21.4 Display Information

Trunk Group Number

Specifies the trunk group number to which the trunk belongs.
When a V-IPGW card is installed, the value is automatically set to "7" for the corresponding trunks.

Value Range
1–64

Feature Guide References

5.1.2 Group

710 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 18.2 PBX Configuration—[10-2] CO & Incoming Call—DIL Table & Port Settings
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

18.2 PBX Configuration—[10-2] CO & Incoming

Call—DIL Table & Port Settings
Direct In Line (DIL) or Direct Dialling In (DDI)/Direct Inward Dialling (DID) can be selected for each trunk as
the method of distributing incoming trunk calls to certain destinations. For each trunk to which DIL distribution
is set, different destinations can be programmed depending on the time mode (day/lunch/break/night). If
desired, Calling Line Identification (CLI) distribution can be used in conjunction with DIL distribution.

DIL
For each trunk to which DIL distribution is set, different DIL destinations can be programmed depending on
the time mode (day/lunch/break/night). Generally, DIL distribution is used for trunk calls from analogue trunks.
Tenant number and service group number can also be programmed for each trunk.
To assign DIL destination numbers, enter directly or click Destination Setting (see 2.1.6 Extension Number
Setting).
The Shelf, Slot, and Port for each item are displayed for your reference. For details, see Common
Programming Reference Items in 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot.

Card Type
Indicates the trunk card type (reference only).

Value Range
Card type

Feature Guide References

2.1.1.1 Incoming Trunk Call Features—SUMMARY

Trunk Property
Indicates the networking type of each trunk (reference only).

Value Range
Public, Private(TIE), VPN

Feature Guide References

2.1.1.1 Incoming Trunk Call Features—SUMMARY
4.3.1 TIE Line Service
4.3.3 ISDN Virtual Private Network (ISDN-VPN)

Distribution Method
Selects the distribution method for incoming trunk calls. The value range of this setting depends on the card
type and Trunk Property assigned for each trunk.

Value Range
DIL: Distribution depends on the trunk through which the calls arrive
DDI/DID: Distribution depends on the DDI/DID number of the calls
MSN: Distribution depends on the MSN of the calls

PC Programming Manual 711

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
18.2 PBX Configuration—[10-2] CO & Incoming Call—DIL Table & Port Settings
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Feature Guide References

2.1.1.1 Incoming Trunk Call Features—SUMMARY

DIL Destination—Day, Lunch, Break, Night

Specifies the DIL destination in each time mode.

Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)

PC Programming Manual References

10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main

Feature Guide References

2.1.1.2 Direct In Line (DIL)
4.3.1 TIE Line Service

Tenant Number
Specifies the tenant number, to determine the Time Table by which calls are distributed depending on the time
of day.

Value Range
1–8

Feature Guide References

2.1.1.2 Direct In Line (DIL)
5.1.3 Tenant Service
5.1.4 Time Service

UM Service Group No.

Specifies the Service Group number sent to the Unified Messaging system when the incoming call destination
is the floating extension number of a UM group.
The Service Group number is used to allow the Unified Messaging system to send the applicable greeting
message to the caller.

Value Range
None, 1–64

Feature Guide References

2.1.1.2 Direct In Line (DIL)
3.2.1 System Features—3.2.1.39 Service Group

712 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 18.2 PBX Configuration—[10-2] CO & Incoming Call—DIL Table & Port Settings
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

VM Trunk Group No.

Specifies the number of the VM trunk group sent to the VPS when the incoming call destination is the floating
extension number of a VM (DPT) Group. The VM trunk group number is used to allow the VPS to send the
applicable greeting message to the caller.

Value Range
1–48

CLI for DIL

When CLI distribution is enabled for a trunk to which DIL distribution is set, incoming trunk calls will be
distributed to the CLI destinations (instead of the DIL destinations) if the caller’s identification number is found
in the System Speed Dialling Table.
CLI distribution can be enabled or disabled for each time mode (day/lunch/break/night) on a trunk basis.
The Shelf, Slot, and Port for each item are displayed for your reference. For details, see Common
Programming Reference Items in 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot.

Card Type
Indicates the trunk card type (reference only).

Value Range
Card type

Feature Guide References

2.1.1.1 Incoming Trunk Call Features—SUMMARY

Trunk Property
Indicates the networking type of each trunk (reference only).

Value Range
Public, Private(TIE), VPN

Feature Guide References

2.1.1.1 Incoming Trunk Call Features—SUMMARY
4.3.1 TIE Line Service
4.3.3 ISDN Virtual Private Network (ISDN-VPN)

Distribution Method
Selects the distribution method for incoming trunk calls. The value range of this setting depends on the card
type and Trunk Property assigned for each trunk.

Value Range
DIL: Distribution depends on the trunk through which the calls arrive
DDI/DID: Distribution depends on the DDI/DID number of the calls
MSN: Distribution depends on the MSN of the calls

PC Programming Manual 713

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
18.2 PBX Configuration—[10-2] CO & Incoming Call—DIL Table & Port Settings
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Feature Guide References

2.1.1.1 Incoming Trunk Call Features—SUMMARY

CLI Ring for DIL—Day, Lunch, Break, Night

Enables CLI distribution in each time mode.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

Feature Guide References

2.1.1.2 Direct In Line (DIL)
2.1.1.5 Calling Line Identification (CLI) Distribution

DDI / DID / TIE / MSN

For each trunk to which DDI/DID distribution is set, or for each trunk whose Trunk Property on this screen
is Private (TIE), modification parameters for DDI/DID number and TIE line call numbers can be programmed.
The Shelf, Slot, and Port for each item are displayed for your reference. For details, see Common
Programming Reference Items in 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot.

Card Type
Indicates the trunk card type (reference only).

Value Range
Card type

Feature Guide References

2.1.1.1 Incoming Trunk Call Features—SUMMARY

Trunk Property
Indicates the networking type of each trunk (reference only).

Value Range
Public, Private(TIE), VPN

Feature Guide References

2.1.1.1 Incoming Trunk Call Features—SUMMARY
4.3.1 TIE Line Service
4.3.3 ISDN Virtual Private Network (ISDN-VPN)

Distribution Method
Selects the distribution method for incoming trunk calls. The value range of this setting depends on the card
type and Trunk Property assigned for each trunk.

714 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 18.2 PBX Configuration—[10-2] CO & Incoming Call—DIL Table & Port Settings
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Value Range
DIL: Distribution depends on the trunk through which the calls arrive
DDI/DID: Distribution depends on the DDI/DID number of the calls
MSN: Distribution depends on the MSN of the calls

Feature Guide References

2.1.1.1 Incoming Trunk Call Features—SUMMARY
2.1.1.3 Direct Inward Dialling (DID)/Direct Dialling In (DDI)
2.1.1.4 Multiple Subscriber Number (MSN) Ringing Service

DDI/DID/TIE/MSN—Remove Digit
Specifies the number of leading digits to be removed from the incoming called number for DDI/DID distribution
or for TIE line service.

Value Range
0–15

Feature Guide References

2.1.1.3 Direct Inward Dialling (DID)/Direct Dialling In (DDI)
2.1.1.4 Multiple Subscriber Number (MSN) Ringing Service
4.3.1 TIE Line Service

DDI/DID/TIE/MSN—Additional Dial
Specifies the number to be added to the incoming called number in the place of the removed digits for DDI/
DID distribution or for TIE line service.

Value Range
Max. 8 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)

Feature Guide References

2.1.1.3 Direct Inward Dialling (DID)/Direct Dialling In (DDI)
2.1.1.4 Multiple Subscriber Number (MSN) Ringing Service
4.3.1 TIE Line Service

PC Programming Manual 715

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
18.3 PBX Configuration—[10-3] CO & Incoming Call—DDI / DID Table
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

18.3 PBX Configuration—[10-3] CO & Incoming

Call—DDI / DID Table
Incoming trunk calls with DDI/DID numbers can be distributed to specific destinations. Each DDI/DID number
has a destination programmed for each time mode (day/lunch/break/night).
When CLI distribution is enabled for a DDI/DID number, incoming trunk calls with that DDI/DID number will be
distributed to the CLI destinations (instead of the DDI/DID destinations) if the caller’s identification number is
found in the System Speed Dialling Table, which is used as the Caller ID Table. CLI distribution can be enabled
or disabled for each time mode (day/lunch/break/night) on a DDI/DID number basis.
A maximum of 1000 DDI/DID numbers can be programmed with other related parameters. 100 numbers are
displayed at a time. To display other sets of numbers, click the applicable tab.
To assign DDI/DID destination numbers, enter directly or click Destination Setting (see 2.1.6 Extension
Number Setting). It is possible to programme DDI/DID numbers and DDI/DID destinations in each time mode
(day/lunch/break/night) for a set of locations in series at once by clicking Automatic Registration, or to
programme DDI/DID names for a set of locations in series at once by clicking Name Generate.

DDI / DID Number

Specifies the DDI/DID number.

Value Range
Max. 32 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)

PC Programming Manual References

18.3.1 PBX Configuration—[10-3] CO & Incoming Call—DDI / DID Table—Automatic Registration

Feature Guide References

2.1.1.3 Direct Inward Dialling (DID)/Direct Dialling In (DDI)

DDI / DID Name

Specifies the name for the DDI/DID number which is shown on the extension’s display when receiving a call
with the DDI/DID number. The name of the DDI/DID number can be printed out on SMDR.

Value Range
Max. 20 characters

PC Programming Manual References

18.3.2 PBX Configuration—[10-3] CO & Incoming Call—DDI / DID Table—Name Generate
19.1 PBX Configuration—[11-1] Maintenance—Main—SMDR Options— Option—DDI/DID Number & Name

Feature Guide References

2.1.1.3 Direct Inward Dialling (DID)/Direct Dialling In (DDI)

DDI / DID Destination—Day, Lunch, Break, Night

Specifies the DDI/DID destination in each time mode.

716 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 18.3 PBX Configuration—[10-3] CO & Incoming Call—DDI / DID Table
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)

PC Programming Manual References

10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main
18.3.1 PBX Configuration—[10-3] CO & Incoming Call—DDI / DID Table—Automatic Registration

Feature Guide References

2.1.1.3 Direct Inward Dialling (DID)/Direct Dialling In (DDI)
4.3.1 TIE Line Service

Tenant Number
Specifies the tenant number, to determine the Time Table by which calls are distributed depending on the time
of day.

Value Range
1–8

PC Programming Manual References

10.4 PBX Configuration—[2-4] System—Week Table

Feature Guide References

2.1.1.3 Direct Inward Dialling (DID)/Direct Dialling In (DDI)

UM Service Group No.

Specifies the Service Group number sent to the Unified Messaging system when the incoming call destination
is the floating extension number of a UM group.
The Service Group number is used to allow the Unified Messaging system to send the applicable greeting
message to the caller.

Value Range
None, 1–64

Feature Guide References

2.1.1.3 Direct Inward Dialling (DID)/Direct Dialling In (DDI)
3.1.1 Unified Messaging System Overview

VM Trunk Group No.

Specifies the number of the VM trunk group sent to the VPS when the incoming call destination is the floating
extension number of a VM (DPT) Group. The VM trunk group number is used to allow the VPS to send the
applicable greeting message to the caller.

PC Programming Manual 717

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
18.3 PBX Configuration—[10-3] CO & Incoming Call—DDI / DID Table
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Value Range
1–48

CLI Ring for DDI/DID—Day, Lunch, Break, Night

Enables CLI distribution in each time mode.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

PC Programming Manual References

14.1 PBX Configuration—[6-1] Feature—System Speed Dial

Feature Guide References

2.1.1.3 Direct Inward Dialling (DID)/Direct Dialling In (DDI)
2.1.1.5 Calling Line Identification (CLI) Distribution

718 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 18.3.1 PBX Configuration—[10-3] CO & Incoming Call—DDI / DID Table—Automatic Registration
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

18.3.1 PBX Configuration—[10-3] CO & Incoming Call—DDI / DID

Table—Automatic Registration
Automatic Registration allows DDI/DID numbers and DDI/DID destinations in each time mode (day/lunch/
break/night) to be programmed at once for a set of locations in series.

Beginning Entry Location

Specifies the number of the first location to be programmed.

Value Range
1–1000

PC Programming Manual References

18.3 PBX Configuration—[10-3] CO & Incoming Call—DDI / DID Table

Feature Guide References

2.1.1.3 Direct Inward Dialling (DID)/Direct Dialling In (DDI)

Generate DDI/DID Number (From)

Specifies the DID number of the first location to be programmed. DDI/DID numbers for subsequent locations
will be generated automatically, by adding one to the value of the previous location.

Value Range
Max. 32 digits (consisting of 0–9)

PC Programming Manual References

18.3 PBX Configuration—[10-3] CO & Incoming Call—DDI / DID Table

Feature Guide References

2.1.1.3 Direct Inward Dialling (DID)/Direct Dialling In (DDI)

Number of Registration
Specifies the number of locations to be programmed.

Value Range
1–1000

PC Programming Manual References

18.3 PBX Configuration—[10-3] CO & Incoming Call—DDI / DID Table

Feature Guide References

2.1.1.3 Direct Inward Dialling (DID)/Direct Dialling In (DDI)

PC Programming Manual 719

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
18.3.1 PBX Configuration—[10-3] CO & Incoming Call—DDI / DID Table—Automatic Registration
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Destination—Day, Lunch, Break, Night

Specifies the number of the DDI/DID destination in each time mode for the first location to be programmed. If
the same destination is to be used for all locations for a certain time mode, click the appropriate Same all
check box. If the Same all check box for a certain time mode is not clicked, the destination numbers for
subsequent locations will be generated automatically, by adding one to the value of the previous location for
that time mode.

Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)

PC Programming Manual References

18.3 PBX Configuration—[10-3] CO & Incoming Call—DDI / DID Table

Feature Guide References

2.1.1.3 Direct Inward Dialling (DID)/Direct Dialling In (DDI)

720 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 18.3.2 PBX Configuration—[10-3] CO & Incoming Call—DDI / DID Table—Name Generate
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

18.3.2 PBX Configuration—[10-3] CO & Incoming Call—DDI / DID

Table—Name Generate
Name Generate allows DDI/DID names to be programmed at once for a set of locations in series.
If a name generated here is longer than 20 characters, the additional characters will be discarded.

Beginning Entry Location

Specifies the number of the first location to be programmed.

Value Range
1–1000

PC Programming Manual References

18.3 PBX Configuration—[10-3] CO & Incoming Call—DDI / DID Table

Feature Guide References

2.1.1.3 Direct Inward Dialling (DID)/Direct Dialling In (DDI)

Number to Generate
Specifies the number of locations to be programmed.

Value Range
1–1000

PC Programming Manual References

18.3 PBX Configuration—[10-3] CO & Incoming Call—DDI / DID Table

Feature Guide References

2.1.1.3 Direct Inward Dialling (DID)/Direct Dialling In (DDI)

No. of Digits to Delete

Specifies the number of digits to be deleted from the start of a DDI/DID number when using it as part of the
DDI/DID name.

Value Range
0–32

PC Programming Manual References

18.3 PBX Configuration—[10-3] CO & Incoming Call—DDI / DID Table

Feature Guide References

2.1.1.3 Direct Inward Dialling (DID)/Direct Dialling In (DDI)

PC Programming Manual 721

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
18.3.2 PBX Configuration—[10-3] CO & Incoming Call—DDI / DID Table—Name Generate
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Name Prefix
Specifies the text to be included at the start of each DDI/DID name.

Value Range
Max. 20 characters

PC Programming Manual References

18.3 PBX Configuration—[10-3] CO & Incoming Call—DDI / DID Table

Feature Guide References

2.1.1.3 Direct Inward Dialling (DID)/Direct Dialling In (DDI)

Name Suffix
Specifies the text to be included at the end of each DDI/DID name.

Value Range
Max. 20 characters

PC Programming Manual References

18.3 PBX Configuration—[10-3] CO & Incoming Call—DDI / DID Table

Feature Guide References

2.1.1.3 Direct Inward Dialling (DID)/Direct Dialling In (DDI)

722 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 18.4 PBX Configuration—[10-4] CO & Incoming Call—MSN Table
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

18.4 PBX Configuration—[10-4] CO & Incoming

Call—MSN Table
Incoming ISDN-BRI (Basic Rate Interface) line calls with Multiple Subscriber Numbers (MSNs) can be
distributed to a certain destination. Each MSN has a destination programmed for each time mode (day/lunch/
break/night).
A maximum of 10 MSNs can be programmed for each ISDN-BRI port.
To use this feature, Access Mode in 9.26 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property
- BRI Port must be set to P-MP.

MSN
To assign MSN destination numbers, enter directly or click Destination Setting (see 2.1.6 Extension Number
Setting).
The Shelf, Slot, and Port for each item are displayed for your reference. For details, see Common
Programming Reference Items in 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot.

MSN Number
Specifies the MSN.

Value Range
Max. 16 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)

PC Programming Manual References

9.26 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - BRI Port

Feature Guide References

2.1.1.4 Multiple Subscriber Number (MSN) Ringing Service

MSN Name
Specifies the name for the MSN which is shown on the extension’s display when receiving a call with the MSN.

Value Range
Max. 20 characters

PC Programming Manual References

9.26 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - BRI Port

Feature Guide References

2.1.1.4 Multiple Subscriber Number (MSN) Ringing Service

MSN Destination—Day, Lunch, Break, Night

Specifies the MSN destination in each time mode.

PC Programming Manual 723

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
18.4 PBX Configuration—[10-4] CO & Incoming Call—MSN Table
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)

PC Programming Manual References

9.26 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - BRI Port

Feature Guide References

2.1.1.4 Multiple Subscriber Number (MSN) Ringing Service

Tenant Number
Specifies the tenant number, to determine the Time Table by which calls are distributed depending on the time
of day.

Value Range
1–8

PC Programming Manual References

9.26 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - BRI Port
10.4 PBX Configuration—[2-4] System—Week Table

Feature Guide References

2.1.1.4 Multiple Subscriber Number (MSN) Ringing Service

VM Trunk Group No.

Specifies the number of the VM trunk group sent to the VPS when the incoming call destination is the floating
extension number of a VM (DPT) Group. The VM trunk group number is used to allow the VPS to send the
applicable greeting message to the caller.

Value Range
1–48

UM Service Group No.

Specifies the Service Group number sent to the Unified Messaging system when the incoming call destination
is the floating extension number of a UM group.
The Service Group number is used to allow the Unified Messaging system to send the applicable greeting
message to the caller.

Value Range
None, 1–64

PC Programming Manual References

9.26 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - BRI Port

724 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 18.4 PBX Configuration—[10-4] CO & Incoming Call—MSN Table
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Feature Guide References

2.1.1.4 Multiple Subscriber Number (MSN) Ringing Service

CLI for MSN

When CLI distribution is enabled for an ISDN-BRI line to which MSN distribution is set, incoming trunk calls
will be distributed to the CLI destinations (instead of the MSN destinations) if the caller’s identification number
is found in the System Speed Dialling Table.
CLI distribution can be enabled or disabled for each time mode (day/lunch/break/night) on a trunk basis.
The Shelf, Slot, and Port for each item are displayed for your reference. For details, see Common
Programming Reference Items in 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot.

CLI Ring for MSN—Day, Lunch, Break, Night

Enables CLI distribution in each time mode.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

PC Programming Manual References

9.26 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - BRI Port

Feature Guide References

2.1.1.4 Multiple Subscriber Number (MSN) Ringing Service
2.1.1.5 Calling Line Identification (CLI) Distribution

PC Programming Manual 725

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
18.5 PBX Configuration—[10-5] CO & Incoming Call—Miscellaneous
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

18.5 PBX Configuration—[10-5] CO & Incoming

Call—Miscellaneous
The Intercept Routing feature can activate when the destination of an incoming call is unavailable, or when
there is no destination for the call, to reroute the call to an alternate destination.

Intercept—Intercept Routing - DND (Destination sets DND.)

Enables the Intercept Routing—DND feature to activate when the original destination is in DND mode.

Value Range
Disable (Busy Tone): Sends a busy tone to the caller. (However, a call through an LCOT card will ring at the
original destination while the caller hears a ringback tone.)
Enable: Redirects the call to the intercept destination

Feature Guide References

2.1.1.6 Intercept Routing
2.3.3 Do Not Disturb (DND)

Intercept—Routing to Operator - No Destination (Destination is not

programmed.)
Enables the Intercept Routing—No Destination feature to activate when there is no destination for the call.

Value Range
Disable (Reorder Tone): Sends a reorder tone to the caller. (However, a call through an LCOT card will ring
at the original destination while the caller hears a ringback tone.)
Enable: Redirects the call to an operator

Feature Guide References

2.1.1.7 Intercept Routing—No Destination

Intercept—Intercept Routing for Extension Call

Enables the Intercept Routing feature to operate for extension calls.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

Feature Guide References

2.1.1.7 Intercept Routing—No Destination

726 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Section 19
PBX Configuration—[11] Maintenance

This section serves as reference operating instructions

for the Maintenance menu of the PBX Configuration
menu of the Setup screen of Web Maintenance
Console.

PC Programming Manual 727

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
19.1 PBX Configuration—[11-1] Maintenance—Main
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

19.1 PBX Configuration—[11-1] Maintenance—Main

SMDR
Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR) automatically records detailed information about incoming and
outgoing calls.

SMDR Format—Type
Selects the format of SMDR output.

Value Range
Type A: 80 digits without call charge information
Type B: 80 digits with call charge information
Type C: 120 digits

Feature Guide References

2.22.1.1 Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR)

SMDR Format—Port
Selects the Serial Interface port that is used to output the SMDR data.

Value Range
None, LAN(TELNET)

Feature Guide References

2.22.1.1 Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR)

SMDR Format—Page Length (Number of Lines)

Specifies the number of lines on a page of output paper. Match the SMDR output to the paper size being used
in the printer.

Value Range
No Print, 4–99

Feature Guide References

2.22.1.1 Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR)

SMDR Format—Blank Footer Length (Number of Lines)

Specifies the number of lines to be skipped at the end of every page. The number of lines for the skip perforation
should be shorter than the page length.

Value Range
0–95

728 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 19.1 PBX Configuration—[11-1] Maintenance—Main
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Feature Guide References

2.22.1.1 Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR)

SMDR Format—Date Format

Selects the printed date format.

Value Range
MM-DD-YY, DD-MM-YY, YY-MM-DD, YY-DD-MM

Feature Guide References

2.22.1.1 Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR)

SMDR Format—Time Format (12H / 24H)

Selects whether times are displayed using the 12- or 24-hour format.

Value Range
12H, 24H

Feature Guide References

2.22.1.1 Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR)

Print Information—Outgoing Call

Specifies whether the dialled digits of outgoing trunk calls are printed. Class of Service (COS) programming
determines the printable records.

Value Range
No Print, Print

PC Programming Manual References

10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System—Class of Service—COS Settings—CO & SMDR— Outgoing
CO Call Printout (SMDR)

Feature Guide References

2.22.1.1 Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR)

Print Information—Incoming Call

Specifies whether the information relating to incoming trunk calls, such as caller’s identification name and
number, is printed.

Value Range
No Print, Print

PC Programming Manual 729

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
19.1 PBX Configuration—[11-1] Maintenance—Main
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Feature Guide References

2.22.1.1 Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR)

Print Information—Intercom Call

Specifies whether the dialled digits of outgoing intercom calls are printed.

Value Range
No Print, Print

Feature Guide References

2.22.1.1 Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR)

Print Information—Log-in / Log-out

Specifies whether the log-in/log-out status is printed.

Value Range
No Print, Print

Feature Guide References

2.2.2.8 Log-in/Log-out
2.22.1.1 Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR)

Print Information—Hotel Room Status

Selects whether check-in and check-out data is output on SMDR.

Value Range
No Print, Print

PC Programming Manual References

14.2 PBX Configuration—[6-2] Feature—Hotel & Charge

Feature Guide References

2.22.1.1 Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR)
2.23.2 Room Status Control

Print Information—Timed Reminder (Wake-up Call)

Selects whether Timed Reminder data is output on SMDR.

Value Range
No Print, Print

730 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 19.1 PBX Configuration—[11-1] Maintenance—Main
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

PC Programming Manual References

14.2 PBX Configuration—[6-2] Feature—Hotel & Charge

Feature Guide References

2.22.1.1 Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR)
2.24.4 Timed Reminder

Print Information—Error Log

Specifies whether PBX error log information is output to SMDR.

Value Range
No Print, Print

Feature Guide References

2.22.1.1 Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR)
5.6.4 Local Alarm Information

SMDR Options
Option—ARS Dial
Selects the type of the dialled number to be printed for a call with the ARS feature.

Value Range
Dial before ARS Modification: The user-dialled number
Dial after ARS Modification: The ARS modified number

Feature Guide References

2.5.4.8 Host PBX Access Code (Access Code to the Telephone Company from a Host PBX)
2.8 Automatic Route Selection (ARS) Features
2.22.1.1 Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR)

Option—Caller ID Number & Name

Selects the printing format of caller identifications for incoming trunk calls.

Value Range
None, Number, Name, Name + Number

Feature Guide References

2.22.1.1 Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR)

Option—DDI/DID Number & Name

Selects the printing format of incoming trunk calls with a DDI/DID number.

PC Programming Manual 731

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
19.1 PBX Configuration—[11-1] Maintenance—Main
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Value Range
None, Number, Name, Name + Number

Feature Guide References

2.22.1.1 Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR)

Option—Secret Dial
Selects the printing format of calls with a secret dial. The secret dial conceals all or part of the dialled number.
Note that selecting Dial before ARS Modification in Option—ARS Dial on this screen indicates the dialled
numbers as dots regardless of this setting.

Value Range
Print "...." (Secret), Print Dialled Number

Feature Guide References

2.6.1 Memory Dialling Features—SUMMARY
2.22.1.1 Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR)

Option—Privacy Mode
Selects whether private dialling is enabled or disabled, and how many digits to hide when enabled.
To enable this setting, Print Information—Outgoing Call on the SMDR tab should be set to Print.

Value Range
Print Dialled Number: Disables private dialling; all dialled numbers are shown on SMDR.
No Print: No dialled number will be shown on SMDR.
Print "X", Print "XX", Print "XXX", Print "XXXX": The selected number of digits at the end of dialled telephone
numbers, and any additional digits dialled after connection, are shown on SMDR as "X".

PC Programming Manual References

19.1 PBX Configuration—[11-1] Maintenance—Main—SMDR— Print Information—Outgoing Call

Feature Guide References

2.22.1.1 Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR)

Option—Condition Code "RC"

Specifies whether the time of receiving an incoming trunk call is printed.

Value Range
No Print, Print

Feature Guide References

2.22.1.1 Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR)

732 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 19.1 PBX Configuration—[11-1] Maintenance—Main
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Option—Condition Code "AN"

Specifies whether the time of answering an incoming trunk call is printed.

Value Range
No Print, Print

Feature Guide References

2.22.1.1 Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR)

Option—Caller ID Modification
Specifies whether Caller ID numbers are recorded on SMDR as received (before being modified by the PBX)
or after being modified.

Value Range
Before Modification, After Modification

PC Programming Manual References

11.1.3 PBX Configuration—[3-1-3] Group—Trunk Group—Caller ID Modification

Feature Guide References

2.22.1.1 Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR)

Emergency Call Notification

Specifies if an emergency call is recorded on SMDR only when the call is completed, or when the call is initially
dialled as well.

Value Range
End of Call, Start and End of Call

Feature Guide References

2.22.1.1 Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR)

LAN—SMDR Port Number

Specifies the port number used to output SMDR data via the LAN.

Value Range
1–65535

Feature Guide References

2.22.1.1 Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR)

PC Programming Manual 733

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
19.1 PBX Configuration—[11-1] Maintenance—Main
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

LAN—SMDR Password
Specifies the password used to output the SMDR data via the LAN.

Value Range
Max. 10 characters

Feature Guide References

2.22.1.1 Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR)

LAN—New Line Code for Telnet

Specifies the new line code for a terminal emulator.
If the terminal emulator automatically feeds lines with a carriage return, select CR (Carriage Return).
If not, select CR + LF (Line Feed).

Value Range
CR + LF, CR

Feature Guide References

2.22.1.1 Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR)

Maintenance
Local Alarm Display—Extension 1, Extension 2
Specifies the extension numbers of PTs that will be notified by the PBX about local alarms. When the PBX
detects a PBX error, the System Alarm button on the PT turns on red. When this button is pressed, the display
will show the error number, and the button light will turn off automatically.

Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)

Feature Guide References

5.6.4 Local Alarm Information

Daily Test Start Time—Set

Enables the daily self check of the PBX for local alarm and error log.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

Feature Guide References

5.6.4 Local Alarm Information

Daily Test Start Time—Hour

Specifies the hour of the PBX daily self check start time.

734 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 19.1 PBX Configuration—[11-1] Maintenance—Main
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Value Range
0–23

Feature Guide References

5.6.4 Local Alarm Information

Daily Test Start Time—Minute

Specifies the minute of the PBX daily self check start time.

Value Range
0–59

Feature Guide References

5.6.4 Local Alarm Information

Error Log for UM Port Busy—Detection of All UM Port Busy

Enables error information to be logged in the PBX if UM ports were all busy specified in Detection of All UM
Port Busy. This item is recorded by Syslog. If this Log is frequently recorded in your customer, it indicates
insufficiency of UM port. Recommend to purchase Activation Keys for expand UM port.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

PC Programming Manual References

7.3.2 Utility—Log—Syslog

Error Log for UM Port Busy—Detection Busy Threshold Time

Enables error information to be logged in the PBX if UM ports were all busy time specified in Detection Busy
Threshold Time. This item is recorded by Syslog. If this Log is frequently recorded in your customer, it indicates
insufficiency of UM port. Recommend to purchase Activation Keys for expand UM port.

Value Range
3-300 (sec)

PC Programming Manual References

7.3.2 Utility—Log—Syslog

Error Log for Centralised VM—Network MSW Transmission (Counter)

Enables error information to be logged in the PBX if network message waiting information is deleted after
re-transmission is repeated for the number of times specified in Network MSW Data Transmission for
Centralised VM Feature—Data Re-transmission : Repeat Counter in 17.2 PBX Configuration—[9-2]
Private Network—Network Data Transmission.

PC Programming Manual 735

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
19.1 PBX Configuration—[11-1] Maintenance—Main
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Value Range
Disable, Enable

PC Programming Manual References

17.1 PBX Configuration—[9-1] Private Network—TIE Table— Enhanced QSIG Call Information (Activation
Key Required)
17.2 PBX Configuration—[9-2] Private Network—Network Data Transmission— Network MSW Data
Transmission for Centralised VM Feature—Data Re-transmission : Repeat Counter

Feature Guide References

4.3.5.2 Centralised Voice Mail

Error Log for Centralised VM—Network MSW Transmission (Buffer)

Enables error information to be logged in the PBX if the quantity of network message waiting information being
re-transmitted is larger than the transmission buffer.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

PC Programming Manual References

17.1 PBX Configuration—[9-1] Private Network—TIE Table— Enhanced QSIG Call Information (Activation
Key Required)

Feature Guide References

4.3.5.2 Centralised Voice Mail

Remote
Remote—Analogue Remote (Modem) Floating Extension Number
Specifies the floating extension number for analogue remote maintenance. To enable this setting, an RMT
card must be installed, and Remote—Remote Programming on this screen must be enabled.

Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)

Feature Guide References

5.5.2 PC Programming

Remote—ISDN Remote Floating Extension Number

Specifies the floating extension number for ISDN remote maintenance. To enable this setting,
Remote—Remote Programming on this screen must be enabled.

Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)

736 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 19.1 PBX Configuration—[11-1] Maintenance—Main
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Feature Guide References

5.5.2 PC Programming

Remote—Remote Programming
Enables system programming, diagnosis, and data upload from a remote location.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

Feature Guide References

5.5.2 PC Programming

Remote—Password Lock Counter for Remote Programming

Specifies the number of successive incorrect password entries allowed before remote access is locked.

Value Range
None, 1–15

Feature Guide References

5.5.2 PC Programming

Remote—Remote Maintenance Dial Number (Own Telephone number for

reference)
Specifies the telephone number of the PBX used to access the PBX from a remote location for maintenance
purposes. This number can be specified by Quick Setup.

Value Range
Max. 32 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)

Feature Guide References

5.5.2 PC Programming

Password
Passwords authorise the user to programme the extension and the PBX by a PT or a personal computer.

System Password - PT Programming—Prog **: User Level

Specifies the System password to authorise the PT user to access User Level programming.

Value Range
4–10 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)

PC Programming Manual 737

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
19.1 PBX Configuration—[11-1] Maintenance—Main
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Feature Guide References

5.5.2 PC Programming

System Password - PT Programming—Prog *#: Administrator Level

Specifies the System password to authorise the PT user to access User Level programming.

Value Range
4–10 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)

Feature Guide References

5.5.2 PC Programming

Manager Password - PT Programming—Prog *1

Specifies the manager password to authorise the PT user to access manager programming.

Value Range
4–10 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)

Feature Guide References

5.1.6 Manager Features

738 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 19.2 PBX Configuration—[11-2] Maintenance—PT Programming Access
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

19.2 PBX Configuration—[11-2] Maintenance—PT

Programming Access
The programming items accessible at User and Administrator level can be specified. 100 programming item
numbers are displayed at a time. To display other sets of numbers, click the applicable tab.

Program Number
Indicates the programming item number (reference only).

Value Range
000–999

Feature Guide References

5.5.3 PT Programming

PROG **
Selects whether User Level PT users can access each system programming item.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

Feature Guide References

5.5.3 PT Programming

PROG *#
Selects whether Administrator Level PT users can access each system programming item.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

Feature Guide References

5.5.3 PT Programming

PC Programming Manual 739

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
19.3.1 PBX Configuration—[11-3-1] Maintenance—CS Synchronisation—Air Synchronisation
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

19.3 PBX Configuration—[11-3] Maintenance—CS

Synchronisation

19.3.1 PBX Configuration—[11-3-1] Maintenance—CS

Synchronisation—Air Synchronisation
You can programme and view settings for Air Synchronisation Groups.
Select an Air Synchronisation Group (1-4) to programme from the Air Synchronisation Group Number
drop-down list.
It is possible to synchronise CSs with each other within the air synchronisation group.
Click Sort to reorder CSs with traditional CSs first, followed by IP-CSs.
To open the screen described in 7.4.4 Utility—Monitor/Trace—CS Status Monitor—Air Sync Group, click
CS Status Monitor.
Air Synchronisation Groups can be programmed only in On-line mode.
The Shelf, Slot, and Port for each item are displayed for your reference. For details, see Common
Programming Reference Items in 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot.

Adding CSs
Follow the steps below to add CSs to the air synchronisation group.
1. Connect the CS to be registered to the network and, if necessary, the power supply.
2. Click Add.
A dialogue box will appear. Non-registered (available) CSs are displayed on the left.
3. Highlight CSs and click the right arrow to select them for addition.
4. Click OK.
Deleting CSs
Follow the steps below to delete CSs from the air synchronisation group.
1. Click Delete.
A dialogue box will appear. Registered CSs are displayed on the left.
2. Highlight CSs and click the right arrow to select them for deletion.
3. Click OK.

Air Synchronisation Group Number

Select the air synchronisation group to programme.

Value Range
1–4

Index
Indicates the CS number (reference only).

Value Range
1–16

CS Name
Indicates the name of the CS (reference only).

740 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 19.3.1 PBX Configuration—[11-3-1] Maintenance—CS Synchronisation—Air Synchronisation
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Value Range
Max. 20 characters

Connection
Indicates the port status. To change the status of the port, click the desired cell in the column, and then select
INS or OUS for the port.

Value Range
INS: The port is in service.
OUS: The port is out of service.
Fault: The port is not communicating with the network.

Status
Indicates whether a certain CS is registered (reference only).

Value Range
-, Registered

CS Class
Specifies the classification of each CS. This parameter can only be modified when Connection on this screen
is set to OUS.

Value Range
Sync Master CS1, Sync Master CS2, Sync Slave CS

Primary CS—Index
Specifies the number of the primary CS.

Value Range
1–16

Primary CS—Shelf
Indicates the shelf number (reference only).

Value Range
1: Main unit
2–4: Expansion Unit
Virtual: Virtual card

Primary CS—Slot
Indicates the slot position of the primary CS (reference only).

Value Range
Slot number

PC Programming Manual 741

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
19.3.1 PBX Configuration—[11-3-1] Maintenance—CS Synchronisation—Air Synchronisation
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Primary CS—Port
Indicates the port number of the primary CS (reference only).

Value Range
Port number

Primary CS—CS Name

Indicates the name of the primary CS (reference only).

Value Range
Max. 20 characters

Secondary CS—Index
Specifies the number of the secondary CS.

Value Range
1–16

Secondary CS—Shelf
Indicates the shelf number (reference only).

Value Range
1: Main unit
2–4: Expansion Unit
Virtual: Virtual card

Secondary CS—Slot
Indicates the slot position of the secondary CS (reference only).

Value Range
Slot number

Secondary CS—Port
Indicates the port number of the secondary CS (reference only).

Value Range
Port number

Secondary CS—CS Name

Indicates the name of the secondary CS (reference only).

Value Range
Max. 20 characters

742 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 19.3.2 PBX Configuration—[11-3-2] Maintenance—CS Synchronisation—LAN Synchronisation
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

19.3.2 PBX Configuration—[11-3-2] Maintenance—CS

Synchronisation—LAN Synchronisation
You can programme and view settings for LAN Synchronisation Groups.
Select a LAN Synchronisation Group (1-4) to programme from the LAN Synchronisation Group Number
drop-down list.
It is possible to synchronise CSs with each other within the LAN synchronisation group.
Click Sort to reorder CSs.
To open the screen described in 7.4.5 Utility—Monitor/Trace—CS Status Monitor—LAN Sync Group, click
CS Status Monitor.
LAN Synchronisation Groups can be programmed only in On-line mode.
The Shelf, Slot, and Port for each item are displayed for your reference. For details, see Common
Programming Reference Items in 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot.

Note
Only KX-NS0154 IP-CSs can be added to a LAN synchronisation group.

Adding CSs
Follow the steps below to add CSs to the LAN synchronisation group.
1. Connect the CS to be registered to the network and, if necessary, the power supply.
2. Click Add.
A dialogue box will appear. Non-registered (available) CSs are displayed on the left.
3. Highlight CSs and click the right arrow to select them for addition.
4. Click OK.
Deleting CSs
Follow the steps below to delete CSs from the LAN synchronisation group.
1. Click Delete.
A dialogue box will appear. Registered CSs are displayed on the left.
2. Highlight CSs and click the right arrow to select them for deletion.
3. Click OK.

LAN Synchronisation Group Number

Select the LAN synchronisation group to programme.

Note
You must specify a LAN synchronisation group number or an air synchronisation group number for each
IP-CS. Do not leave both of these settings unspecified.

Value Range
1–4

PC Programming Manual References

19.3.1 PBX Configuration—[11-3-1] Maintenance—CS Synchronisation—Air Synchronisation— Air
Synchronisation Group Number

PC Programming Manual 743

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
19.3.2 PBX Configuration—[11-3-2] Maintenance—CS Synchronisation—LAN Synchronisation
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

IP Address for Group Control

Specifies the IP address for the group. This is the same value specified in Group Control Setting—IP
Address for Group Control in 19.3.3 PBX Configuration—[11-3-3] Maintenance—CS
Synchronisation—LAN Sync Group Setting.

Value Range
239.0.0.0–239.255.255.255

Index
Indicates the CS number (reference only).

Value Range
1–32

CS Name
Indicates the name of the CS (reference only).

Value Range
Max. 20 characters

Connection
Indicates the port status. To change the status of the port, click the desired cell in the column, and then select
INS or OUS for the port.

Value Range
INS: The port is in service.
OUS: The port is out of service.
Fault: The port is not communicating with the network.

Status
Indicates whether a certain CS is registered (reference only).

Value Range
-, Registered

CS Class
Specifies the classification of each CS. This parameter can only be modified when Connection on this screen
is set to OUS.

Value Range
Sync Master CS1, Sync Master CS2-1, Sync Master CS2-2, Sync Slave

Note
Sync Master CS1, Sync Master CS2-1 and Sync Master CS2-2 can each be assigned to only 1 IP-CS in
the same LAN synchronisation group.

744 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 19.3.2 PBX Configuration—[11-3-2] Maintenance—CS Synchronisation—LAN Synchronisation
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

MAC Address
Indicates the MAC address of the IP-CS (reference only).

Value Range
00:00:00:00:00:00–FF:FF:FF:FF:FF:FF

Current IP Address
Indicates the current IP address of the IP-CS (reference only).

Value Range
1.0.0.0–223.255.255.255

PC Programming Manual 745

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
19.3.3 PBX Configuration—[11-3-3] Maintenance—CS Synchronisation—LAN Sync Group Setting
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

19.3.3 PBX Configuration—[11-3-3] Maintenance—CS

Synchronisation—LAN Sync Group Setting
You can programme the settings for a LAN synchronisation group.

LAN Synchronisation Group Number

Select the LAN synchronisation group to programme.

Value Range
1–4

Group Control Setting—Type of Control Packet

Select the method for performing LAN synchronisation.

Value Range
Multicast, Broadcast

Group Control Setting—IP Address for Group Control

Specifies the IP address of the group.
If Broadcast is selected for Group Control Setting—Type of Control Packet, this setting is greyed out.

Value Range
239.0.0.1–239.255.255.255

Synchronisation Level Setting—Level of Synchronisation Establish (ns)

Specifies the threshold for establishing LAN synchronisation.

Value Range
0–8192 ns

Synchronisation Level Setting—Limit level of Synchronisation holding (ns)

Specifies the limit for determining synchronisation holding.

Value Range
0–8192 ns

Synchronisation Level Setting—Maximum duration of Synchronisation holding

(s)
Specifies the maximum duration for synchronisation holding.

Value Range
0–256 s

746 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 19.3.3 PBX Configuration—[11-3-3] Maintenance—CS Synchronisation—LAN Sync Group Setting
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Synchronisation Level Setting—Level of Synchronisations Lost and Restart

(ns)
Specifies the level at which re-synchronisation is performed.

Value Range
0–32768 ns

Synchronisation Monitoring Report Setting—Long Term Diagnosis Monitoring

timer (h)
Specifies the number of hours between performing in-operation monitoring (long term).

Value Range
2–168 hours

PC Programming Manual 747

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
19.3.3 PBX Configuration—[11-3-3] Maintenance—CS Synchronisation—LAN Sync Group Setting
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

748 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Section 20
UM Configuration—[1] Mailbox Settings

This section serves as reference operating instructions

for the Mailbox Settings menu of the UM Configuration
menu of the Setup screen of Web Maintenance
Console.

PC Programming Manual 749

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
20.1.1 UM Configuration—[1-1] Mailbox Settings—Quick Setting
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

20.1 UM Configuration—[1] Mailbox Settings

A maximum of 500 subscriber mailboxes can be created. Although the System Manager can use a telephone
to create or edit mailboxes, the System Administrator can create several mailboxes at once using Web
Maintenance Console. Each mailbox can be edited based upon the needs of the subscriber.
Click each tab on the Mailbox Settings screen to specify the desired parameters.

Adding Mailboxes
1. Click the icon.
2. Edit each parameter in the "Mailbox" dialogue box.
3. Click OK.
A range of mailboxes can be added that use the default mailbox settings.
1. Click the icon.
2. Specify the range of mailboxes to add in From and To. Check Use the same number for Mailbox and
Extension to assign each mailbox to the same number extension.
3. Enter the number of mailboxes to create in Number Of Mailboxes:. To edit the default settings to be used
for each new mailbox, click Edit Default Mailboxes and make changes as necessary.
4. When all settings have been made, click OK to create the range of mailboxes.
Editing Mailboxes
To edit a specific mailbox, select the desired mailbox, then click the icon. You can also edit specific
parameters directly from the Mailbox Settings screen.

Deleting Mailboxes
1. Select a mailbox.
2. Click the icon.
3. Click OK.

20.1.1 UM Configuration—[1-1] Mailbox Settings—Quick Setting

With Quick Settings, you can set the necessary minimum settings for Unified Messaging mailboxes. This setting
is available at the User (Administrator) level.

Mailbox Number
Specifies the subscriber’s mailbox number. The maximum number of digits that can be used for mailbox
numbers is set in 24.4 UM Configuration—[5-4] System Parameters—Parameters—Mailbox— Mailbox
No. Max. Length (3-8), or when you initialise the system.

Note
The mailbox number can only be set when adding a mailbox; when editing a mailbox, you cannot change
the assigned mailbox number.

Value Range
2–[the value set in Mailbox No. Max. Length (3-8)] digits

PC Programming Manual References

10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options—Option 9

750 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 20.1.1 UM Configuration—[1-1] Mailbox Settings—Quick Setting
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Feature Guide References

3.1.1 Unified Messaging System Overview
3.2.2 Subscriber Features—3.2.2.17 Mailbox

Extension
Specifies the extension number of the mailbox’s subscriber. Any valid extension number including an Extension
Group number can be assigned.

Note
If an Extension Group number is assigned to a mailbox, all group members are able to access the
messages stored in the mailbox.

Value Range
2–8 digits

PC Programming Manual References

10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options—Option 9

Feature Guide References

3.1.1 Unified Messaging System Overview
3.2.2 Subscriber Features—3.2.2.17 Mailbox

First Name
Specifies the first name of the subscriber. If there are non-alphabetical characters in the first 4 letters of the
first name, the mailbox is not included in the directory.

Value Range
Max. 20 characters

PC Programming Manual References

21.1 UM Configuration—[2] Class of Service— Directory Listing

Feature Guide References

3.2.1.16 Dialling by Name

Last Name
Specifies the last name of the subscriber. If there are non-alphabetical characters in the first 4 letters of the
first name, the mailbox is not included in the directory.

Value Range
Max. 20 characters

PC Programming Manual 751

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting

Mailbox Parameters
Mailbox Number
Specifies the subscriber’s mailbox number. The maximum number of digits that can be used for mailbox
numbers is set in 24.4 UM Configuration—[5-4] System Parameters—Parameters—Mailbox— Mailbox
No. Max. Length (3-8), or when you initialise the system.

Note
The mailbox number can only be set when adding a mailbox; when editing a mailbox, you cannot change
the assigned mailbox number.

Value Range
2–[the value set in Mailbox No. Max. Length (3-8)] digits

PC Programming Manual References

10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options—Option 9

Feature Guide References

3.1.1 Unified Messaging System Overview
3.2.2 Subscriber Features—3.2.2.17 Mailbox

Extension
Specifies the extension number of the mailbox’s subscriber. Any valid extension number including an Extension
Group number can be assigned.

Note
If an Extension Group number is assigned to a mailbox, all group members are able to access the
messages stored in the mailbox.

Value Range
2–8 digits

PC Programming Manual References

10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options—Option 9

Feature Guide References

3.1.1 Unified Messaging System Overview
3.2.2.17 Mailbox

First Name
Specifies the first name of the subscriber. If there are non-alphabetical characters in the first 4 letters of the
first name, the mailbox is not included in the directory.

752 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Value Range
Max. 20 characters

PC Programming Manual References

21.1 UM Configuration—[2] Class of Service— Directory Listing

Feature Guide References

3.2.1.16 Dialling by Name

Last Name
Specifies the last name of the subscriber. If there are non-alphabetical characters in the first 4 letters of the
first name, the mailbox is not included in the directory.

Value Range
Max. 20 characters

PC Programming Manual References

21.1 UM Configuration—[2] Class of Service— Directory Listing

Feature Guide References

3.2.1.16 Dialling by Name

Mailbox Password
Specifies the password needed to access the mailbox. If a default password is programmed by an
administrator, that password will be assigned automatically when creating all mailboxes. Administrators can
change and delete the password.
To change a password for a mailbox:
1. On the Mailbox Parameters Screen, click Edit under Mailbox Password for the mailbox extension to
change.
2. In the window that appears, enter the new password and then enter it again to confirm it.
3. Click OK.
Value Range
Max. 16 digits

PC Programming Manual References

26.1 UM Configuration—[7] System Security—Subscriber

Feature Guide References

3.1.2.4 Password Administration

PC Programming Manual 753

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Mailbox Password (Message Client)

Specifies the password needed to access the mailbox when using a client software programme. If a default
password is programmed by an administrator, that password will be assigned automatically when creating all
mailboxes. Administrators can change and delete the password.

Note
This setting requires the installation of an Activation Key for Unified Messaging E-mail Notification
(KX-NSU2xx) for the number of users that will be accessing their UM mailbox using a client software
programme.
To change a password for a mailbox:
1. On the Mailbox Parameters Screen, click Edit under Mailbox Password (Message Client) for the mailbox
extension to change.
2. In the window that appears, enter the new password and then enter it again to confirm it.
3. Click OK.
Value Range
4–16 characters (A–Z, a–z, 0–9)

PC Programming Manual References

26.1 UM Configuration—[7] System Security—Subscriber

Feature Guide References

3.1.2.4 Password Administration

Class of Service (Mailbox)

Determines the set of services available to the subscriber.

Note
• We recommend that parameters for each COS number be defined before assigning a Class of Service
(COS) to each mailbox or creating new mailboxes.
• COS No. 65 and 66 are assigned by default to the Message Manager and to the System Manager,
respectively. No other mailboxes can be assigned to COS No. 65 and 66.

Value Range
COS No. 1–66

PC Programming Manual References

10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options—Option 9
21.1 UM Configuration—[2] Class of Service

Feature Guide References

3.1.1 Unified Messaging System Overview
3.2.1.11 Class of Service (COS)

754 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Covering Extension
Forwards calls to a second extension when the first extension’s subscriber is not available to take the call. The
Covering Extension is one of the Incomplete Call Handling options that can be enabled or disabled by the
subscriber. The caller can also be transferred the Covering Extension by pressing [0] while a Personal Greeting
is being played, or while leaving a message.

Note
Extension Groups or Logical Extensions (extensions whose calls are set to always be directed their
mailboxes) cannot be assigned as covering extensions.

Value Range
1–8 digits

Feature Guide References

3.2.1.14 Covering Extension

Interview Mailbox
Assigns an interview mailbox to the subscriber’s mailbox. In order for it to function properly, the interview
mailbox number must not be the same number as an existing mailbox and an existing mailbox group.

Note
Each caller’s replies to an interview session are saved as one message.

Value Range
2–[the value set in Mailbox No. Max. Length (3-8)] digits

Feature Guide References

3.2.1.24 Interview Service

All Calls Transfer to Mailbox

If this parameter is set to "Yes", the extension is considered to be a Logical Extension and therefore calls
directed to the extension via Automated Attendant service are automatically forwarded to the extension
mailbox. The extension does not ring when a call is received.

Value Range
No, Yes

Feature Guide References

3.2.1.3 Automated Attendant (AA)

Call Transfer Sequence (Selection)

Specifies the method for the Call Transfer Sequence used by the mailbox. Allows each mailbox to be assigned
its own Call Transfer Sequence (Personal Transfer Sequence).

PC Programming Manual 755

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Note
This sequence has higher priority than the alternate extension transfer sequence specified in 24.4 UM
Configuration—[5-4] System Parameters—Parameters—PBX Parameters— PBX
Environment—Alternate Extension Transfer Sequence (Up to 16 digits / [0-9 * # D R F T X , ;]).

Value Range
System, Other

Note
When "System" is selected, the Unified Messaging system uses the extension transfer sequence
pre-programmed in 24.4 UM Configuration—[5-4] System Parameters—Parameters—PBX
Parameters— PBX Environment—Extension Transfer Sequence (Up to 16 digits / [0-9 * # D R F T
X , ;]).

PC Programming Manual References

24.4 UM Configuration—[5-4] System Parameters—Parameters—PBX Parameters— PBX
Environment—Extension Transfer Sequence (Up to 16 digits / [0-9 * # D R F T X , ;])

Feature Guide References

3.2.2.7 Call Transfer Status

Call Transfer Sequence (Other)

Specifies the Call Transfer Sequence used by the mailbox. Only specified if Call Transfer Sequence
(Selection) is set to "Other".

Value Range
Enter a maximum of 16 characters consisting of 0–9, , # and special codes:
D: Disconnecting
F: Flash (Recall)
R: Ringback Tone Detection
T: Dial Tone Detection
, : Dial Pause (default 1 s)
; : Dial Pause (default 3 s)
X: Extension Dialling
0–9, , #: Dial Code

Feature Guide References

3.2.2.7 Call Transfer Status

No Answer Time (Selection/Other)

Specifies the length of time that the Unified Messaging system waits before handling unanswered calls to the
extension.

Note
When "System" is selected, the Unified Messaging system uses the time pre-programmed in 24.4 UM
Configuration—[5-4] System Parameters—Parameters—Dialling Parameters/MSW Notification—
Dialling Parameters—Call Transfer No Answer Time (10-60 s).

756 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Value Range
System, Other (If "Other" is selected, specify 10–60 s)

PC Programming Manual References

24.4 UM Configuration—[5-4] System Parameters—Parameters—Dialling Parameters/MSW Notification—
Dialling Parameters—Call Transfer No Answer Time (10-60 s)

Call Transfer Status

Determines how the Unified Messaging system handles a call when it reaches the subscriber’s extension. Click
Edit for the extension to change, programme the settings, and click OK to finish.

Note
This setting can be changed by subscribers.

Value Range
None: Rings the subscriber’s extension.
Call blocking: Handles the call according to the Incomplete Call Handling for No Answer setting for the
subscriber’s extension. The subscriber’s extension will not ring.
Call screening: The caller is prompted to record his or her name. The Unified Messaging system then calls
the subscriber and plays back the caller name. The subscriber can choose whether to answer the call.
Intercom Paging: Pages the subscriber by intercom.
Transfer to Mailbox: Transfers the caller to the mailbox.
Transfer to specified Custom Service Menu: Transfers the caller to the specified Custom Service.
Transfer to specified telephone number 1–5: Transfers the caller to one of the specified telephone numbers
in numerical order of priority.

Feature Guide References

3.2.2.7 Call Transfer Status

Incomplete Call Handling for No Answer

Specifies how the Unified Messaging system handles a call when there is no answer. Click Edit for the
extension to change, programme the settings, and click OK to finish.

Note
• This setting can be changed by subscribers.
• More than one option can be selected.

Value Range
Leave a Message: Allows the caller to record a message.
Transfer to a covering extension: Transfers the caller to a covering extension.
Page the mailbox owner by intercom paging: Pages the subscriber by intercom.
Transfer to operator: Transfers the caller to an operator.
Return to top menu: Lets the caller return to top menu and try another extension.
Transfer to specified Custom Service Menu: Transfers the caller to the specified Custom Service.

Feature Guide References

3.2.2.15 Incomplete Call Handling Service

PC Programming Manual 757

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Incomplete Call Handling for Busy

Specifies how the Unified Messaging system handles a call when the extension is busy. Click Edit for the
extension to change, programme the settings, and click OK to finish.

Note
• This setting can be changed by subscribers.
• More than one option can be selected.

Value Range
Leave a Message: Allows the caller to record a message.
Transfer to a covering extension: Transfers the caller to a covering extension.
Page the mailbox owner by intercom paging: Pages the subscriber by intercom.
Transfer to operator: Transfers the caller to an operator.
Return to top menu: Lets the caller return to top menu and try another extension.
Transfer to specified Custom Service Menu: Transfers the caller to the specified Custom Service.

Feature Guide References

3.2.2.15 Incomplete Call Handling Service

Call Transfer Anytime in Incomplete Handling Menu

Specifies whether callers can input an extension number to transfer their call while the Automated Attendant
service is playing an Incomplete Call Handling menu.

Value Range
Enable, Disable

Notification Parameters
The Unified Messaging system is able to notify a subscriber when a new message is recorded in his or her
mailbox. There are 3 methods the system can use for notification:
– Lighting the Message Waiting Lamp on the subscriber’s extension telephone.
– Calling a pre-programmed device (external telephone, etc.). A maximum of 3 devices (Device 1, 2, 3) can
be programmed per mailbox.
– Sending an e-mail to a designated address.

Message Waiting Lamp

If set to "Enable", the Message Waiting Lamp of the subscriber’s telephone turns on when a new message is
recorded.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

Feature Guide References

3.2.1.29 Message Waiting Notification—Lamp

758 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Telephone Device
Specifies the Message Waiting Notification schedule for each device. The following parameters can be
specified for devices 1, 2, and 3. Click Edit for the extension to change, set Device Notification for
Unreceived Message to "Yes", and programme the settings, then click OK to finish.

Feature Guide References

3.2.1.30 Message Waiting Notification—Telephone Device

Telephone Device—Device No. 1, 2, 3—Only Urgent Messages

Specifies if notifications will be sent only for messages designated as urgent.

Value Range
Yes, No

Feature Guide References

3.2.1.30 Message Waiting Notification—Telephone Device

Telephone Device—Device No. 1, 2, 3—Dial Number [0-9 * # T X , ;]

Assigns a telephone number to Device 1, 2, or 3. The subscriber can also specify the number to be dialled by
entering it from his or her telephone, allowing the subscriber to set this feature on a case by case basis.

Note
When the Unified Messaging system calls a trunk via the PRI card, be sure to add "#" after the telephone
number (1112223333 in the example here): 9P1112223333#PP123PP456PPX# (P: Dial Pause)

Value Range
Max. 32 digits consisting of 0–9, , # and special codes:
, : Dial Pause (default 1 s)
; : Dial Pause (default 3 s)
T: Dial Tone Detection
X: Callback Number Entry Code
0–9, , #: Dial Code

Feature Guide References

3.2.1.30 Message Waiting Notification—Telephone Device

Telephone Device—Device No. 1, 2, 3—No. of Retries

Specifies the number of times the Unified Messaging system will try to send notification if the device is busy
or if there is no answer.

Value Range
0–9 times

Feature Guide References

3.2.1.30 Message Waiting Notification—Telephone Device

PC Programming Manual 759

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Telephone Device—Device No. 1, 2, 3—Busy Delay Time (min)

Specifies the time (in minutes) the Unified Messaging system waits before retrying message notification when
the called device is busy.

Value Range
0–120 min

Feature Guide References

3.2.1.30 Message Waiting Notification—Telephone Device

Telephone Device—Device No. 1, 2, 3—No Answer Delay Time (min)

Specifies the time (in minutes) the Unified Messaging system waits before retrying message notification when
the called device does not answer.

Value Range
1–120 min

Feature Guide References

3.2.1.30 Message Waiting Notification—Telephone Device

Telephone Device—Device No. 1, 2, 3—Use Mode

Specifies if and how each device is used for message notification. The subscriber can also specify the use
mode from his or her telephone.
Schedule: If Scheduled is selected here, follow the steps below to specify the time frame:
1. Select a day from the Day drop-down list (Sunday – Saturday).
2. Click Enable Time Frame No. 1 or 2.
3. Enter the start and end times in the Start At (HH:MM) and End At (HH:MM) fields.
4. Repeat steps 1 to 3 for each day to be programmed, and then click OK.
Value Range
Not use: The selected device is not used for message notification.
Continuously: The device is called whenever a message is recorded in the mailbox. If Only Urgent
Messages is set to "Yes", the device is called whenever an urgent message is recorded in the mailbox.
Scheduled: The selected device is called only during the selected times.

Feature Guide References

3.2.1.30 Message Waiting Notification—Telephone Device

Telephone Device—Device Notification Timer—Device Start Delay Time (0-120

min)
Specifies the length of time the system waits after a new message is received before sending message waiting
notification.

Value Range
0–120 min

760 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Feature Guide References

3.2.1.30 Message Waiting Notification—Telephone Device

Telephone Device—Device Notification Timer—Device Interval Time between

Device 1, 2, 3 and Next Device
Specifies how long the PBX waits after sending Message Waiting Notification to Device 1, 2, or 3 before sending
notification to the next device.

Value Range
0–120 min

Feature Guide References

3.2.1.30 Message Waiting Notification—Telephone Device

E-mail/Text Message Device—Device No. 1, 2, 3—User Name

Specifies the name of the user of the device.

Value Range
Max. 64 characters

Feature Guide References

3.2.1.28 Message Waiting Notification—E-mail Device

E-mail/Text Message Device—Device No. 1, 2, 3—E-mail Address

Specifies the e-mail address of the device.

Note
• This setting requires the installation of an Activation Key for Unified Messaging E-mail Notification
(KX-NSU2xx) for the number of users that will be accessing their UM mailbox using a client software
programme.
• In the mailbox user’s profile (See 8.1 Users—User Profiles) if Email 1–3 is input in the Contact tab,
and Automatic copy to UM message notification is checked, the e-mail address(es) will be copied
to this setting and overwrite any previously input data here.

Value Range
Max. 128 characters

Feature Guide References

3.2.1.28 Message Waiting Notification—E-mail Device

E-mail/Text Message Device—Device No. 1, 2, 3—Only Urgent Messages

Specifies if Message Waiting Notifications will be sent only for urgent messages.

PC Programming Manual 761

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Value Range
Yes, No

Feature Guide References

3.2.1.28 Message Waiting Notification—E-mail Device

E-mail/Text Message Device—Device No. 1, 2, 3—Title Order

Specifies the format of the title of the notification.

Value Range
Title-ID-Name, Title-Name-ID, ID-Title-Name, Name-Title-ID, ID-Name-Title, Name-ID-Title

Feature Guide References

3.2.1.28 Message Waiting Notification—E-mail Device

E-mail/Text Message Device—Device No. 1, 2, 3—Title String

Specifies the text string to be included as part of the title of the notification.

Value Range
Max. 30 characters

Feature Guide References

3.2.1.28 Message Waiting Notification—E-mail Device

E-mail/Text Message Device—Device No. 1, 2, 3—Callback Number

Specifies the callback number to be included in the notification.

Value Range
Max. 32 digits (0–9, , #)

Feature Guide References

3.2.1.28 Message Waiting Notification—E-mail Device

E-mail/Text Message Device—Device No. 1, 2, 3—Send Wait Time [0-120 min]

Specifies the delay between the message being left and the sending of the Message Waiting Notification.

Value Range
0–120 min

Feature Guide References

3.2.1.28 Message Waiting Notification—E-mail Device

762 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

E-mail/Text Message Device—Device No. 1, 2, 3—Attach Voice File

Specifies whether to attach a voice file of the voice message to the notification e-mail.

Value Range
Yes, No

Feature Guide References

3.2.1.28 Message Waiting Notification—E-mail Device

E-mail/Text Message Device—Device No. 1, 2, 3—Use Mode

Specifies if and how each device is used for message notification.
If Scheduled is selected here, follow the steps below to specify the time frame:
1. Click a day (Sunday – Saturday) tab.
2. Click Enable Time Frame No. 1 or 2.
3. Enter the start and end times in the Start At (HH:MM) and End At (HH:MM) fields.
4. To specify if sent voice message is deleted from the Unified Message system after they are sent by e-mail,
select "Yes" for Delete After Send (Voice File).
5. Repeat steps 1 to 4 for each day to be programmed, and then click OK.
Note
If voice message or fax image files are set to be deleted after they are sent by e-mail, be aware that a
deleted file cannot be recovered in the event that the e-mail is not sent successfully.

Value Range
Not use: The selected device is not used for message notification.
Continuously: The device is called whenever a message is recorded in the mailbox. If Only Urgent
Messages is set to "Yes", the device is called whenever an urgent message is recorded in the mailbox.
Scheduled: The selected device is called only during the selected times.

Feature Guide References

3.2.1.28 Message Waiting Notification—E-mail Device

External MSG Delivery/Auto FWD/Personal Custom Serv

This tab contains programming items for External Message Delivery, Auto Forwarding, and Personal Custom
Service settings.

External Message Delivery Active

If set to "Yes", subscribers are able to utilise the External Message Delivery feature.

Value Range
No, Yes

Feature Guide References

3.2.2.12 External Message Delivery Service

PC Programming Manual 763

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

External Message Delivery Prompt Mode

When an external message is delivered, the receiver will be greeted by the system in the specified language.
If set to "Primary", the default language will be used. If set to "Selective", the receiver has a choice of prompts.
See related explanation in 22.1 UM Configuration—[3-1] UM Extension / Trunk Service—Service
Group— Day, Night, Lunch, and Break Mode - Incoming Call Service Prompt.

Note
If set to "Selective" and the receiver uses a rotary telephone, the no-entry selection is specified by 22.1 UM
Configuration—[3-1] UM Extension / Trunk Service—Service Group— Day, Night, Lunch, and
Break Mode - Prompt for No DTMF Input Callers.

Value Range
Primary, Selective, Guidance No. 1–8

PC Programming Manual References

22.1 UM Configuration—[3-1] UM Extension / Trunk Service—Service Group— Day, Night, Lunch, and
Break Mode - Incoming Call Service Prompt

Feature Guide References

3.2.1.41 System Prompts

Auto Forwarding Active

If set to "Yes", the Unified Messaging system automatically forwards messages that have not been played for
a specified length of time to another mailbox.

Value Range
No, Yes

Feature Guide References

3.2.1.2 Auto Forwarding

Auto Forwarding Mailbox Number

Specifies the mailbox to which the messages will be forwarded.

Note
A Mailbox Group number cannot be specified as a destination.

Value Range
2–[the value set in Mailbox No. Max. Length (3-8)] digits

Feature Guide References

3.2.1.2 Auto Forwarding

764 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Auto Forwarding Delay Time

Specifies the length of time in hours and minutes that the system waits before forwarding unplayed messages.
The maximum delay time is 99 h, 59 min.

Note
The delay time must be shorter than the New Message Retention Time, or else messages will be deleted
before being forwarded.

Value Range
00:00–99:59

Feature Guide References

3.2.1.2 Auto Forwarding

Auto Forwarding Message Type Urgent

Specifies whether only urgent messages are forwarded.

Value Range
Yes, No

Feature Guide References

3.2.1.2 Auto Forwarding

Auto Forwarding Mode

Specifies if forwarded messages are to be retained in the original mailbox. When set to "Copy", copies of the
messages are retained in the original mailbox after forwarding. When set to "Move", messages are forwarded
to the receiving mailbox and are not retained in the original mailbox.

Value Range
Copy, Move

Feature Guide References

3.2.1.2 Auto Forwarding

Auto Forwarding Mode - Message Remains New

Specifies if the forwarded messages remain marked as new. This setting is available only when Auto
Forwarding Mode is set to "Copy".

Value Range
Yes, No

Feature Guide References

3.2.1.2 Auto Forwarding

PC Programming Manual 765

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Auto Forwarding Expires

Specifies the date and time of day for when forwarding of messages will expire.

Value Range
Date and time

Feature Guide References

3.2.1.2 Auto Forwarding

Personal Custom Service

Specifies the Personal Custom Service. The System Administrator can assign an operation to each key.

Note
• These settings can be changed by subscribers.
• Make sure to add a trunk access number when you store an outside telephone number.
• When the Unified Messaging system calls a trunk via the PRI card, be sure to add "#" after the telephone
number (1112223333 in the example here): 9P1112223333#PP123PP456PPX# (P: Dial Pause)
Follow the steps below to edit a Personal Custom Service.
1. Click Edit.
2. For each Key, specify an Assigned Operation.
3. For each Assigned Operation that is specified, specify a Value
4. Click OK when finished.
Assigned Operation
• Transfer to specified mailbox: Allow the caller to leave messages in a specified mailbox.
• Transfer to specified extension: Transfers the caller to a specified extension.
• Transfer to Voice Mail Service: Allows the caller to access Voice Mail Service.
• Transfer to Automated Attendant Service: Allows the caller to access Automated Attendant Service.
• Transfer to specified Custom Service Menu: Transfers the caller to the Custom Service specified here.
• Transfer to operator: Connects the caller to an operator.
• Transfer to outside (specified number): Transfers the caller to a specified outside telephone number.
Enter a number from the Outside Numbers list (1–4).
• Page the party: Pages the subscriber.
• Repeat greeting: Repeats the greeting.
• None: No operation assigned.

Value Range
• Transfer to specified mailbox: 2–[the value set in Mailbox No. Max. Length (3-8)] digits
• Transfer to specified extension: 2–8 digits
• Transfer to specified Custom Service Menu: 1–200
• Transfer to outside (specified number): Outside Number 1–4

Feature Guide References

3.2.2.21 Personal Custom Service

766 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Outside Numbers
Specifies the outside telephone numbers that can be used for the "Transfer to outside (specified number)"
operation in the Custom Service settings. Click OK when finished.

Value Range
Outside Number #1–#4: Max. 32 digits consisting of 0–9, , #, and special codes
T: Dial Tone Detection
, : Dial Pause (default 1 s)
; : Dial Pause (default 3 s)
0–9, , #: Dial Code

Feature Guide References

3.2.2.21 Personal Custom Service

No DTMF Input Operation

Specifies the operation taken when no DTMF input (a caller does not dial anything) is received after the
Personal Greeting.

Value Range
Recording: The caller will be guided to leave a message.
Disconnect (All Day): The line will be disconnected, regardless of the time of day.
Disconnect (Only After Hours): The line will be disconnected only after hours.

Feature Guide References

3.2.2.21 Personal Custom Service

No DTMF Input Operation Wait Time

Specifies the duration of time to wait for DTMF input before the action set in No DTMF Input Operation is
performed.

Value Range
0–10 s

Feature Guide References

3.2.2.21 Personal Custom Service

Personal Distribution List

Personal Distribution Lists are used to send the same messages to several mailboxes in a single operation. A
maximum of 4 lists can be maintained with each list containing a maximum of 40 mailboxes.

List 1 Name–List 4 Name

Specifies a list name.

Value Range
Max. 32 characters

PC Programming Manual 767

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Feature Guide References

3.2.2.14 Group Distribution Lists

List 1 Members–List 4 Members

Specifies the mailbox numbers that belong to the list.
Follow the steps below to edit list members.
1. Click Edit for a List Members item.
2. Under Subscribers To Add, click the checkbox in No. for each mailbox to add, referring to the mailbox
numbers and mailbox owners’ names.
3. Click Add.
4. Click OK.
Follow the steps below to remove members from a list.
1. Click Edit for Personal Distribution Lists (1–4) Members item.
2. Under Distribution, click the checkbox in No. for each mailbox to add, referring to the mailbox numbers
and mailbox owners’ names.
3. Click Delete.
4. Click OK.
Value Range
Max. 40 mailboxes per list

Feature Guide References

3.2.2.14 Group Distribution Lists

Remote Call/Automatic Login/Direct Service

This tab contains programming items for Remote Call Forwarding, Automatic Login, and Direct Service
settings.

Remote Call Telephone Number 1, 2

Specifies the telephone numbers of destinations to which callers are forwarded when the subscriber sets
Remote Call Forwarding. 2 telephone numbers can be specified per mailbox. Telephone numbers can contain
the digits "0–9" and " ". These telephone numbers should begin with a trunk access number.

Note
Class of Service programming determines if the subscriber is able to use this feature.

Value Range
Max. 32 digits (consisting of 0–9 and " ")

PC Programming Manual References

21.1 UM Configuration—[2] Class of Service— Call Transfer to Outside

Feature Guide References

3.2.2.26 Remote Call Forwarding Set

768 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Auto Login Extension

When this item is set to "Enable", subscribers are able to access their mailbox directly without entering the
mailbox number. Subscribers can automatically log in from their extensions, by calling from an outside
telephone whose number is stored as a Caller ID number, or by dialling a telephone number assigned to a
specified DID number or trunk. When logging in from outside telephones, the Toll Saver feature is also
available.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

Feature Guide References

3.2.2.2 Automatic Login

Auto Login Extension Password Entry Requirement

Specifies if a password is required for the Automatic Login Extension feature.

Notice
If this is set to "No", ensure that unauthorised third-parties are not allowed access to that mailbox.

Value Range
Yes, No

Feature Guide References

3.2.2.2 Automatic Login

Auto Login Caller ID 1, 2

Specifies the telephone number from which the subscriber can automatically be logged in from. When Caller
ID information is received that matches one of these numbers, the caller (subscriber) is automatically logged
in to the mailbox. Note that this telephone number must be unique for each mailbox.

Value Range
Max. 20 digits

Feature Guide References

3.2.2.2 Automatic Login

Auto Login Caller ID Password Entry Requirement

Specifies if a password is required for entry when automatic login is performed using the Caller ID of the number
set in Auto Login Caller ID 1 or Auto Login Caller ID 2.

Value Range
Yes, No

Notice
If this is set to "No", ensure that unauthorised third-parties are not allowed access to that mailbox using
the number assigned to Auto Login Caller ID 1 or Auto Login Caller ID 2.

PC Programming Manual 769

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Feature Guide References

3.2.2.2 Automatic Login

Auto Login DDI/DID

Specifies the DDI/DID number for Automatic Login. When the Unified Messaging system receives this DDI/
DID number from the PBX, the caller (subscriber) is automatically logged in to the mailbox. Note that this
number must be unique for each mailbox.

Value Range
Max. 20 digits

Feature Guide References

3.2.2.2 Automatic Login

Auto Login TRG No.

Specifies the trunk number for Automatic Login. When the Unified Messaging system receives a call on this
trunk, the caller (subscriber) is automatically logged in to the mailbox. Note that this number must be unique
for each mailbox.

Value Range
1–64

Feature Guide References

3.2.2.2 Automatic Login

Auto Login DDI/DID, TRG No. Password Entry Requirement

Specifies if a password is required for entry when automatic login is performed using the trunk group number
or the DID number.

Value Range
Yes, No

Notice
If this is set to "No", ensure that unauthorised third-parties are not allowed access to any extensions using
the specified trunk group number.

Feature Guide References

3.2.2.2 Automatic Login

Auto Login Toll Saver

Allows subscribers to call the Unified Messaging system and know whether or not new messages have been
recorded in their mailboxes by the number of rings they hear before the Unified Messaging system answers
their calls. Toll Saver is available under the same conditions as Automatic Login; subscribers can use Toll
Saver when calling from an outside telephone whose number is stored as a Caller ID number, or by dialling a
telephone number assigned to a specified DID number or trunk.

770 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Value Range
Disable: Disables the Toll Saver feature.
DID: Toll Saver functions when the system receives the pre-programmed DID number from the PBX.
Caller ID: Toll Saver functions when Caller ID information is received that matches one of the pre-programmed
numbers (Caller ID 1 or 2).
Trunk: Toll Saver functions when the system receives a call on the pre-programmed trunk.

Feature Guide References

3.2.2.29 Toll Saver

Direct Service UM Extension

Specifies which features can be directly accessed by dialling a Unified Messaging extension number. This
setting can only be specified for Unified Messaging extension numbers.

Note
Automatic Login must be enabled for extensions to use this feature.

Value Range
Record No Answer Greeting: The subscriber can record the greeting played when there is no answer.
Record Busy Greeting: The subscriber can record the greeting played when their extension is busy.
Record After Hours Greeting: The subscriber can record the greeting played when the system is in night
mode.
Record Temporary Greeting: The subscriber can record a greeting that is used exclusively until the subscriber
disables it.
Change Day Main Menu: The subscriber can change the Day Main Menu greeting. Only the Message
Manager may make this change.
Change Night Main Menu: The subscriber can change the Night Main Menu greeting. Only the Message
Manager may make this change.
Change Emergency Greeting: The subscriber can change the Emergency Greeting. Only the Message
Manager may make this change.

PC Programming Manual References

9.6 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—UM Port Property
20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting—Remote Call/Automatic Login/Direct
Service— Auto Login Extension

Feature Guide References

3.2.2.11 Direct Service Access

Announce Number of Messages

Subscriber Service - All New Messages
Specifies if the system announces to subscribers the number of only new messages in their mailbox when the
subscriber logs in.

Value Range
Yes, No

PC Programming Manual 771

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Subscriber Service - All Messages

Specifies if the system announces to subscribers the number of all messages in their mailbox when the
subscriber logs in.

Value Range
Yes, No

Subscriber Service - New Voice Messages

Specifies if the system announces to subscribers the number of only new voice messages in their mailbox
when the subscriber logs in.

Value Range
Yes, No

Subscriber Service - New Urgent Messages

Specifies if the system announces to subscribers the number of only new messages marked as urgent in their
mailbox when the subscriber logs in.

Value Range
Yes, No

Receiving Message Service - All New Messages

Specifies if the system announces to subscribers the number of only new messages in their mailbox when the
subscriber has selected to listen to messages.

Value Range
Yes, No

Receiving Message Service - All Messages

Specifies if the system announces to subscribers the number of all messages in their mailbox when the
subscriber has selected to listen to messages.

Value Range
Yes, No

Receiving Message Service - New Voice Messages

Specifies if the system announces to subscribers the number of only new voice messages in their mailbox
when the subscriber has selected to listen to messages.

Value Range
Yes, No

Receiving Message Service - New Urgent Messages

Specifies if the system announces to subscribers the number of only new urgent messages in their mailbox
when the subscriber has selected to listen to messages.

772 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Value Range
Yes, No

Message Client Display Language

Specifies the language of information generated by the UM system for the mail (IMAP) client.

Value Range
English, French, German, Italian, Dutch, Spanish, Portuguese, Russian

Quick Menu and Greeting Recording

Quick Menu and Greeting Recording
When this setting is enabled for the Message Manager mailbox, the following features are enabled for the
Message Manager to access greeting and recording management menus quickly.
• Custom Service Menu messages for Custom Service 1 and 2 can be recorded and changed from the Top
Menu.
• Company Greeting No. 1 can be recorded and changed from the Top Menu. This is useful for recording
the Emergency Greeting.

Value Range
Enable, Disable

PC Programming Manual References

23.3 UM Configuration—[4-3] Service Settings—Custom Service

Feature Guide References

3.2.1.17 Emergency Greeting

PC Programming Manual 773

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
20.1.3 UM Configuration—[1-3] Mailbox Settings—Auto Configuration
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

20.1.3 UM Configuration—[1-3] Mailbox Settings—Auto

Configuration
Auto Configuration automatically associates extension numbers and mailboxes in bulk. This feature is available
at the Installer level only.

Select the following options

Specifies Auto configuration mode from the following.

Note
In Re-create all mailboxes mode, all voice data is deleted, including data that is recorded in mailboxes.
It is strongly recommended that you backup the voice data that has been recorded in mailboxes.
Backed up voice data can be restored as sound data on a PC by using special software tools. For details,
consult your dealer.

Value Range
Create mailboxes
Re-create all mailboxes

Installation Manual References

5.11 Automatic Configuration of Mailboxes

Feature Guide References

3.1.2.1 Automatic Configuration of Mailboxes

774 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Section 21
UM Configuration—[2] Class of Service

This section serves as reference operating instructions

for the Class of Service menu of the UM Configuration
menu of the Setup screen of Web Maintenance
Console.

PC Programming Manual 775

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
21.1 UM Configuration—[2] Class of Service
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

21.1 UM Configuration—[2] Class of Service

Each mailbox is assigned a Class of Service (COS) that determines the set of services that are available to its
subscriber. There are 66 classes. Mailboxes can be assigned to their own or to the same COS as needed.
COS No. 65 and 66 are assigned by default to the Message Manager and to the System Manager, respectively.
No other mailboxes can be assigned to COS No. 65 and 66.

General
Class Of Service Name
Specifies the Class of Service’s name.

Value Range
Max. 32 characters

Feature Guide References

3.2.1.11 Class of Service (COS)

Prompt Mode
Specifies the language used for system prompts played for the subscriber during Subscriber Service. If set to
"Primary", the default language which is selected from all installed languages will be used.

Value Range
Primary, Guidance No. 1–8

PC Programming Manual References

24.4 UM Configuration—[5-4] System Parameters—Parameters—Prompt Setting— Primary Language

Feature Guide References

3.2.1.41 System Prompts

Directory Listing
If set to "Yes", the subscriber’s name and extension number will be listed in the directory (Dialling by Name).

Note
This setting is not available for COS 66 (System Manager).

Value Range
No, Yes

Feature Guide References

3.2.1.16 Dialling by Name

776 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 21.1 UM Configuration—[2] Class of Service
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Tutorial
The tutorial is a series of voice prompts for setting up the mailbox that is played to subscribers when they first
log in to their mailbox. This item specifies if subscribers in the Class of Service hear a normal tutorial, a
simplified tutorial, or no tutorial when they first log in to their mailbox.
In the tutorial, subscribers are asked to provide:
– A password
– The mailbox owner’s name
– Personal Greetings (No Answer Greeting, Busy Signal Greeting, After Hours Greeting)
Value Range
Normal: A navigation voice menu is given for each step.
Simplified: Only direct prompts are given for making each setting. For Personal Greetings, only a No Answer
Greeting can be set.
None: No tutorial is played and settings for the mailbox must be made manually.

Feature Guide References

3.2.2.27 Subscriber Tutorial

Call-through Service
Specifies if subscribers in the Class of Service can make outside calls by accessing the subscriber service
menu (from an outside telephone) and dialling an outside destination.

Value Range
Yes, No

Feature Guide References

3.2.2.5 Call-through Service

Remote Call Forward to CO

Select if subscribers in the Class of Service can perform a Remote Call Forward to CO.

Value Range
Yes, No

Feature Guide References

3.2.2.26 Remote Call Forwarding Set

E-mail Option
Specifies if subscribers in the Class of Service can receive notifications by e-mail when they have a new
message waiting.

Value Range
Yes, No

PC Programming Manual 777

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
21.1 UM Configuration—[2] Class of Service
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Feature Guide References

3.2.1.28 Message Waiting Notification—E-mail Device

Desktop Messaging
Specifies if subscribers in the Class of Service can access the contents of their mailboxes with an e-mail
application using IMAP. This includes the Microsoft Outlook® e-mail client plug-in.

Value Range
Yes, No

Feature Guide References

3.3.1 Integration with Microsoft Outlook

System Manager Authority

Specifies if subscribers in the Class of Service have access to the Unified Messaging system as a System
Manager.

Value Range
Yes, No

Feature Guide References

3.1.1 Unified Messaging System Overview

Message Manager Authority

Specifies if subscribers in the Class of Service have access to the Unified Messaging system as a Message
Manager.

Value Range
Yes, No

Feature Guide References

3.1.1 Unified Messaging System Overview

Remote Call Forward to CO

Select if subscribers in the Class of Service have allowed to do Remote Call Forward to CO.

Value Range
Yes, No

Feature Guide References

3.1.1 Unified Messaging System Overview

778 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 21.1 UM Configuration—[2] Class of Service
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Mailbox
Personal Greeting Length (s)
Defines the maximum length (in seconds) of Personal Greetings for subscribers in the Class of Service.

Note
This setting is not available for COS 65 (Message Manager) and COS 66 (System Manager).

Value Range
1–360 s

Feature Guide References

3.2.2.22 Personal Greetings

Message Length (Selection)

Specifies if the length of messages left for subscribers in the Class of Service are unlimited in duration or have
a specified time limit. If set to "Unlimited", the maximum recording time is 60 minutes, and the maximum
recording time for two-way conversations (Two-way Record and Two-way Transfer) is unlimited.

Value Range
Unlimited, Limited

Message Length (Limited) (min)

Specifies the maximum recording time for messages left to subscribers in the Class of Service. Only specified
if Message Length (Selection) is set to "Limited".

Value Range
1–60 min

Mailbox Capacity Maximum Message Time (Selection)

Specifies if a maximum limit is applied to the total amount of messages (new and saved) for mailboxes of
subscribers in the Class of Service.

Value Range
Unlimited, Limited

Mailbox Capacity Maximum Message Time (Limited) (min)

Specifies the total number of available minutes for storing messages (both new and saved) for mailboxes of
subscribers in the Class of Service. Only specified if Mailbox Capacity Maximum Message Time
(Selection) is set to "Limited".

Value Range
1–600 min

PC Programming Manual 779

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
21.1 UM Configuration—[2] Class of Service
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

New Message Retention Time (Selection)

Specifies if a retention time limit is applied to new messages in mailboxes of subscribers in the Class of Service.
If "Unlimited" is selected, new messages will remain in the mailbox until erased by the subscriber.

Value Range
Unlimited, Limited

New Message Retention Time (Limited) (days)

Defines the number of days that new messages will remain in mailboxes for subscribers in the Class of Service.
The storage period begins the day after the message reception. Only specified if New Message Retention
Time (Selection) is set to "Limited".

Value Range
1–30 days

Saved Message Retention Time (Selection)

Specifies if a retention time limit is applied to saved messages in mailboxes of subscribers in the Class of
Service. If "Unlimited" is selected, saved messages will remain in the mailbox until erased by the subscriber.

Value Range
Unlimited, Limited

Saved Message Retention Time (Limited) (days)

Defines the number of days that saved messages will remain in mailboxes for subscribers in the Class of
Service. Only specified if Saved Message Retention Time (Selection) is set to "Limited".

Value Range
1–30 days

Message Retrieval Order

Specifies the order in which messages will be retrieved for subscribers in the Class of Service (played back
for listening).

Value Range
LIFO: Messages are retrieved starting with the most recent (Last In First Out).
FIFO: Messages are retrieved starting with the oldest (First In First Out).

Number of CIDs for Caller Name Announcement (Selection)

Specifies if subscribers in the Class of Service can assign telephone numbers for the Personal Caller Name
Announcement feature.

Note
This setting is not available for COS 65 (Message Manager) and COS 66 (System Manager).

Value Range
None, Other

780 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 21.1 UM Configuration—[2] Class of Service
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Number of CIDs for Caller Name Announcement (Other)

Specifies the maximum number of telephone numbers that subscribers in the Class of Service can assign for
the Personal Caller Name Announcement feature. Only specified if Number of CIDs for Caller Name
Announcement (Selection) is set to "Other".

Value Range
1–30

Message Envelope Setting

Specifies when message envelopes (message date and time, name of the person who recorded or transferred
the message, telephone number of the caller) are announced.

Value Range
Before: The system announces the message envelope before playing the recorded message.
After: The system announces the message envelope after playing the recorded message.
Require: The system announces the message envelope when the user presses the appropriate dial key as
prompted when listening to the message.

Mailbox Capacity Warning (Selection)

Specifies if the system alerts mailbox subscribers in the Class of Service that the programmed recording time
for their mailboxes is reaching its set amount of message storage time. If set to "None", the warning will not
be announced.

Value Range
None, Other

Mailbox Capacity Warning (Other) (min)

Specifies when the system alerts mailbox subscribers in the Class of Service that the programmed recording
time for mailboxes is reaching its set amount of message storage time. The setting indicates the remaining
recording time capacity threshold for when the announcement is heard. Only specified if Mailbox Capacity
Warning (Selection) is set to "Other".

Value Range
1–60 min

Play System Prompt after Personal Greeting

If set to "Yes", directions for recording a message are given to the caller immediately after the personal greeting
of the subscriber in the Class of Service has been played.

Note
This setting is not available for COS 65 (Message Manager) and COS 66 (System Manager).

Value Range
No, Yes

PC Programming Manual 781

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
21.1 UM Configuration—[2] Class of Service
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Message Cancel for Live Call Screening

If set to "Yes", the caller’s message will be deleted when a subscriber in the Class of Service answers a call
via Live Call Screening while the caller is leaving a message.

Note
This setting is not available for COS 66 (System Manager).

Value Range
No, Yes

Feature Guide References

3.2.2.16 Live Call Screening (LCS)

Delete Message Confirmation

If set to "Yes", the system requests confirmation from subscribers in the Class of Service before erasing a
message in the mailbox. If set to "No", the message is erased immediately.

Value Range
No, Yes

Personal Greeting for Caller ID

If set to "Yes", subscribers in the Class of Service can record personal greetings that are played for specific
callers only (Personal Greeting for Caller ID).

Note
This setting is not available for COS 65 (Message Manager) and COS 66 (System Manager).

Value Range
No, Yes

Feature Guide References

3.2.2.22 Personal Greetings

Caller ID Callback
If set to "Yes", subscribers in the Class of Service can call the caller back while listening to the caller’s message
(Caller ID Callback).

Value Range
No, Yes

Feature Guide References

3.2.2.9 Caller ID Callback

782 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 21.1 UM Configuration—[2] Class of Service
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Auto Receipt
If set to "Yes", subscribers in the Class of Service can request to receive confirmation when their message has
been listened to by the message recipient.

Value Range
No, Yes

Feature Guide References

3.2.2.1 Auto Receipt

Autoplay New Message

If set to "Yes", the system plays new messages automatically when subscribers in the Class of Service log into
their mailboxes.

Value Range
No, Yes

Play New Messages Sequentially

If set to "Yes", the system plays all new messages for subscribers in the Class of Service sequentially without
system prompts. The subscriber’s Service Top Menu will be heard after all of the messages are played. This
feature is only available when Autoplay New Message is set to "Yes".

Value Range
No, Yes

First Playback Urgent Message

If set to "Yes", the system plays urgent messages before regular messages for subscribers in the Class of
Service.

Value Range
No, Yes

Feature Guide References

3.2.2.31 Urgent Message

Announce Message Transferred Information

If set to "Yes", the system plays the information of transferred messages to subscribers in the Class of Service
before playing the messages.

Value Range
No, Yes

PC Programming Manual 783

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
21.1 UM Configuration—[2] Class of Service
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Caller ID Number Announcement

Specifies whether or not the system announces the Caller ID number when a subscriber in the Class of Service
plays a message left by a caller, if their name has not been recorded for the Caller Name Announcement
feature. If the name has been recorded, it will be announced regardless of this setting.

Note
If "Caller ID Callback" is set to "Yes", Caller ID numbers will be announced regardless of this setting (see
21.1 UM Configuration—[2] Class of Service—Mailbox— Caller ID Callback).

Value Range
No, Yes

Announce Option Menu after Erasing Message

If set to "Yes", the system plays the option menu after erasing a message for subscribers in the Class of Service.
If set to "No", the system plays the next message automatically without playing the option menu.

Value Range
No, Yes

New Message Length Announcement

If set to "Yes", the system announces the total length of new messages when the number of new messages
is announced for subscribers in the Class of Service.

Value Range
No, Yes

Password Expiry Period (Selection)

Specifies if the mailbox passwords for subscribers in the Class of Service will expire after a set time.

Value Range
Disable, Other

Feature Guide References

3.1.2.4 Password Administration

Password Expiry Period (Other)

Specifies the number of days a set mailbox password will be used before it expires and the system prompts
the subscriber for a new password. This feature is only available when Password Expiry Period
(Selection) is set to "Other".

Value Range
5–200 days

Feature Guide References

3.1.2.4 Password Administration

784 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 21.1 UM Configuration—[2] Class of Service
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Two-way Recorded Message Save Mode

Specifies whether two-way recording sessions are saved in the mailboxes of subscribers in the Class of Service
as "old" or "new" messages.

Value Range
Save as Old, Save as New

Feature Guide References

3.2.2.30 Two-way Record/Two-way Transfer

Call Transfer
Intercom Paging Group
Specifies the Intercom Paging group number available to subscribers in the Class of Service.

Note
This setting is not available for COS 65 (Message Manager).

Value Range
1–32

PC Programming Manual References

24.4 UM Configuration—[5-4] System Parameters—Parameters—Intercom Paging Parameters

Use Call Waiting on Busy

If set to "Yes", the system signals subscribers in the Class of Service when they are on a call and another call
is received.

Note
This setting is not available for COS 65 (Message Manager).

Value Range
No, Yes

Caller ID Screen
If set to "Yes", subscribers in the Class of Service can hear the pre-recorded names of callers when they receive
calls (Caller ID Screening).

Note
This setting is not available for COS 65 (Message Manager).

Value Range
No, Yes

Feature Guide References

3.2.1 System Features—3.2.1.9 Caller ID Screening

PC Programming Manual 785

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
21.1 UM Configuration—[2] Class of Service
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Notify of Transfer
If set to "Yes", subscribers in the Class of Service will hear "You have a call." when they answer transferred
calls.

Value Range
No, Yes

Call Transfer to Outside

If set to "Yes", the system allows calls to be transferred to a trunk via the following features: Custom Service,
Caller ID Callback, Call Transfer Service, Personal Custom Service, Call-through Service.

Note
This setting is not available for COS 65 (Message Manager).

Value Range
No, Yes

Feature Guide References

3.2.1.7 Call Transfer to Outside

Hospitality Mode
Hospitality Mode
Specifies whether subscribers in the Class of Service have the Hospitality Mode enabled. (For use with
extensions for hotel rooms, etc.) This setting must be set to "Yes" to enable other Hospitality Mode settings.
When this item is set to "Yes", only the following options are made available to subscribers:
• Listen to Messages
• Password
• Personal Greetings
• Owner Name
Value Range
No, Yes

Feature Guide References

3.2.1.21 Hospitality Mode

Password
Specifies if subscribers in the Class of Service are given a voice prompt selection to change their password
when accessing their mailbox.

Value Range
No, Yes

PC Programming Manual References

20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting— Mailbox Password

786 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 21.1 UM Configuration—[2] Class of Service
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Feature Guide References

3.2.1.21 Hospitality Mode

Personal Greeting
Specifies if subscribers in the Class of Service are given a voice prompt selection to change their Personal
Greeting when accessing their mailbox.

Note
For the Personal Greeting of subscribers in a Class of Service with Hospitality mode enabled, only No
Answer and Busy greetings can be set.

Value Range
No, Yes

Feature Guide References

3.2.1.21 Hospitality Mode
3.2.2.22 Personal Greetings

Owner Name
Specifies if subscribers in the Class of Service are given a voice prompt selection to change the mailbox
owner’s name when accessing their mailbox.

Value Range
No, Yes

Feature Guide References

3.2.1.21 Hospitality Mode

Erase When Check Out - Password

Specifies if the password of the subscriber in the Class of Service is erased when the subscriber’s extension
is set to the "Check Out" status.

Value Range
No, Yes

Feature Guide References

2.23.1 Hospitality Features—SUMMARY
3.2.1.21 Hospitality Mode

Erase When Check Out - Personal Greeting

Specifies if the Personal Greeting of the subscriber in the Class of Service is erased when the subscriber’s
extension is set to the "Check Out" status.

Value Range
No, Yes

PC Programming Manual 787

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
21.1 UM Configuration—[2] Class of Service
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Feature Guide References

2.23.1 Hospitality Features—SUMMARY
3.2.1.21 Hospitality Mode

Erase When Check Out - Owner Name

Specifies if the Owner Name of the subscriber in the Class of Service is erased when the subscriber’s extension
is set to the "Check Out" status.

Value Range
No, Yes

Feature Guide References

2.23.1 Hospitality Features—SUMMARY
3.2.1.21 Hospitality Mode

788 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Section 22
UM Configuration—[3] UM Extension / Trunk
Service

This section serves as reference operating instructions

for the Port/Trunk Service menu of the UM
Configuration menu of the Setup screen of Web
Maintenance Console.

PC Programming Manual 789

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
22.1 UM Configuration—[3-1] UM Extension / Trunk Service—Service Group
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

22.1 UM Configuration—[3-1] UM Extension / Trunk

Service—Service Group
The parameters of Service Groups determine how calls are handled throughout the day. Each Service Group
(therefore each port) can have a different call service for each time mode (day, night, lunch, break). One of 5
incoming call services (Voice Mail, Automated Attendant, Interview, Custom Service or Transfer to Mailbox)
can be assigned to each call service.
Once one or more service groups are set, you can assign the service groups to each UM port in 22.2 UM
Configuration—[3-2] UM Extension / Trunk Service—Port Assignment.

Day, Night, Lunch, and Break Mode - Company Greeting No. (Selection)
Specifies the greeting to be heard by callers, the System Greeting, another message, or no greeting. The
System Greeting is "Good morning/Good afternoon/Good evening. Welcome to the Unified Messaging
System.". Each call service can have its own setting.

Value Range
None, System, Other

Feature Guide References

3.2.1.12 Company Greeting

Day, Night, Lunch, and Break Mode - Company Greeting No. (Other)
Specifies the number of the greeting message to use when "Other" is specified for the greeting selection.

Value Range
1–32

Feature Guide References

3.2.1.12 Company Greeting

Day, Night, Lunch, and Break Mode - Incoming Call Service

Specifies the incoming call service used to handle calls.

Value Range
Voice Mail Service, Automated Attendant, Interview Mailbox, Custom Service, Transfer to Mailbox

Day, Night, Lunch, and Break Mode - Incoming Call Service Parameter
Specifies the parameter for the type of Incoming Call Service specified. This is disabled if "Voice Mail
Service" or "Automated Attendant" is selected for the Incoming Call Service.

Value Range
Interview Mailbox: Mailbox number
Custom Service: Custom Service number (1–200)
Transfer to Mailbox: Mailbox number

790 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 22.1 UM Configuration—[3-1] UM Extension / Trunk Service—Service Group
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Note
Mailbox numbers are between 2 digits and the value set in Mailbox No. Max. Length (3-8).

Day, Night, Lunch, and Break Mode - Incoming Call Service Prompt
Specifies the language of system prompts used by this call service. If set to "Primary", the default language
which is selected from all installed languages will be used. When set to "Selective", the caller can select the
language of his or her choice, provided the System Administrator or the Message Manager has recorded the
Multilingual Selection Menu. To specify a Prompt Selection Number, see 24.4 UM Configuration—[5-4]
System Parameters—Parameters—Prompt Setting.

Note
If "Selective" is specified, you will need to select a prompt available for callers that cannot input DTMF
signals, such as rotary phone callers. See "Prompt for No DTMF Input Callers" below.

Value Range
Primary, Selective, Guidance No. 1–8

PC Programming Manual References

24.4 UM Configuration—[5-4] System Parameters—Parameters—Prompt Setting— Primary Language

Feature Guide References

3.2.1.41 System Prompts

Day, Night, Lunch, and Break Mode - Prompt for No DTMF Input Callers
Specifies which language is used when a caller cannot enter any digits to select a language after the Multilingual
Selection Menu has been played. If set to "Primary", the default language which is selected from all installed
languages will be used.

Value Range
Primary, Guidance No. 1–8

PC Programming Manual References

24.4 UM Configuration—[5-4] System Parameters—Parameters—Prompt Setting— Primary Language

Feature Guide References

3.2.1.41 System Prompts

Day, Night, Lunch, and Break Mode - Delayed Answer Time

Specifies whether the Unified Messaging system answers calls on the port or trunk immediately (0) or after a
delay (1 s–60 s).

Value Range
0–60 s

PC Programming Manual 791

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
22.2 UM Configuration—[3-2] UM Extension / Trunk Service—Port Assignment
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

22.2 UM Configuration—[3-2] UM Extension / Trunk

Service—Port Assignment
You can assign a Service Group created in 22.1 UM Configuration—[3-1] UM Extension / Trunk
Service—Service Group to each UM port.
1. For each UM port number, select a Service Group number (1–64) from the Service Group drop-down list.
2. Click OK when finished.

792 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Section 23
UM Configuration—[4] Service Settings

This section serves as reference operating instructions

for the Service Settings menu of the UM Configuration
menu of the Setup screen of Web Maintenance
Console.

PC Programming Manual 793

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
23.1 UM Configuration—[4-1] Service Settings—Caller ID / PIN Call Routing
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

23.1 UM Configuration—[4-1] Service

Settings—Caller ID / PIN Call Routing
A maximum of 200 Caller ID/PIN numbers can be assigned so that callers are automatically forwarded to a
pre-programmed destination. A different destination can be set for each time mode (day, night, lunch, break).
For Mode, select Caller-ID Mode or PIN Mode from the drop-down list, and then click the button to assign
a routing destination. PIN Call Routing is only available when the Call Transfer Anytime of a Custom
Service is set to "PIN".

Wild card input for Caller IDs/PINs

• The wild card, " ", can be used as a substitute for any numbers in the following ways.
1. When Caller ID/PIN numbers include one " ":
" " matches any number, regardless of the actual numbers of digits. For example, registering " " by
itself matches all numbers, and registering "201 " matches any number that starts with "201".
2. When Caller ID/PIN numbers include more than one " ":
Each " " matches a single digit. For example, registering " " matches any 10-digit
number, and registering "201 " matches any 10-digit number that starts with "201".

Note
• If Automatic Login or Holiday Service is used, these will take priority over Caller ID Call Routing settings.
Also note that Caller ID Call Routing takes priority over the Trunk Service and Port Service.
• Received Caller ID/PIN numbers are searched for in each service setting table in order from the first
registered number to last. When programming Caller ID/PIN routing, note the order of registration, and
remember that wild card entries should be entered after any specific routing entries.

Caller-ID Mode
Caller ID No. (Selection)
Specifies the Caller ID number setting so that callers are automatically forwarded to a pre-programmed
destination.

Value Range
Private, Out of Area, Long Distance, Others

Feature Guide References

3.2.1.8 Caller ID Call Routing

Caller ID No. (Other)

Specifies a Caller ID number (or range of numbers using the wild card, " ") for callers from a specific number
or range of numbers that are to be automatically forwarded to a pre-programmed destination. Only specified
if Caller ID No. (Selection) is set to "Others".

Value Range
0–9, (Max. 20 digits)

Feature Guide References

3.2.1.8 Caller ID Call Routing

794 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 23.1 UM Configuration—[4-1] Service Settings—Caller ID / PIN Call Routing
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Description
Specifies a name and/or description of the Caller ID number.

Note
When no data is specified in this parameter, the caller’s name will be automatically entered here if the
caller’s name is received from the telephone company.

Value Range
Max. 20 characters

Feature Guide References

3.2.1.8 Caller ID Call Routing

Call Transfer for Day, Night, Lunch, and Break service

Specifies the destination to which the call from an assigned Caller ID number is automatically forwarded. A
destination can be set for each time mode. To disable the setting, select "None". A Mailbox Group number can
be entered here instead of a mailbox number.

Value Range
None: disables this feature.
Custom Service Menu: forwards callers to the specified Custom Service menu.
Extension: forwards callers to the specified extension.
Mailbox: forwards callers to the specified mailbox.

Feature Guide References

3.2.1.8 Caller ID Call Routing

PIN Mode
PIN No.
Specifies a PIN number (or range of PIN numbers using the wild card, " ") for callers from a specific number
or range of numbers that are to be automatically forwarded to a pre-programmed destination. For more
information on using " " with pin numbers, refer to Wild card input for Caller IDs/PINs.

Value Range
0–9, (Max. 20 digits)

Feature Guide References

3.2.1.35 PIN Call Routing

Description
Specifies a name and/or description of the PIN number.

Value Range
Max. 20 characters

PC Programming Manual 795

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
23.1 UM Configuration—[4-1] Service Settings—Caller ID / PIN Call Routing
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Feature Guide References

3.2.1.35 PIN Call Routing

Call Transfer for Day, Night, Lunch, and Break service

Specifies the destination to which the call using an assigned PIN number is automatically forwarded. A
destination can be set for each time mode. To disable the setting, select "None". A Mailbox Group number can
be entered here instead of a mailbox number.

Value Range
None: disables this feature.
Custom Service Menu: forwards callers to the specified Custom Service menu.
Extension: forwards callers to the specified extension.
Mailbox: forwards callers to the specified mailbox.

Feature Guide References

3.2.1.35 PIN Call Routing

796 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 23.2 UM Configuration—[4-2] Service Settings—Parameters
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

23.2 UM Configuration—[4-2] Service

Settings—Parameters
Automated Attendant
Wait Time for First Digit (0-20 s)
Specifies the length of time the system waits for the caller to dial a digit before assuming the caller cannot input
a DTMF signal and therefore activates No DTMF Input Call Coverage

Value Range
0–20 s

Menu Repeat Cycle (1-5 times)

Specifies the number of times the system will play the Automated Attendant top menu if the caller does not
make a selection.

Value Range
1–5 times

Feature Guide References

3.2.1.3 Automated Attendant (AA)

Play Owner’s Name during Transfer

Determines whether "Transferring you to (name)" is announced to the caller before transferring the caller to
an extension.

Value Range
Enable, Disable

Feature Guide References

3.2.1.3 Automated Attendant (AA)

Operator Service
When operator calls are made, calls are connected to the lowest-numbered operator that is available. To
enable/disable the operator setting for each time mode, check/uncheck it.

Note
• The extension assigned as Operator 1 for day mode is automatically designated as the Message
Manager. Because the extension number assigned for Operator Service No. 1 in the Day Mode is for
the Message Manager, you cannot assign this extension to any other mailbox.
• Extensions assigned as operators can be called by dialling [0], however, when setting features such
as Message Waiting Notification and Remote Call Forwarding, the extension number (not "0") must be
specified.

Value Range
Operator Service for Day, Operator Service for Night, Operator Service for Lunch, Operator Service for Break

PC Programming Manual 797

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
23.2 UM Configuration—[4-2] Service Settings—Parameters
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

PC Programming Manual References

10.2 PBX Configuration—[2-2] System—Operator & BGM— PBX Operator—Day, Lunch, Break, Night

Feature Guide References

3.2.1.34 Operator Service

Operator Service—Operator’s Extension

Specifies the extension number for Operator 1, 2, and 3 for the checked time setting.

Note
• The default extension number of Operator 1 in day mode cannot be used with the Message Waiting
Notification Lamp feature.
• Since the extension number assigned as Operator Service No. 1 for Day is automatically designated
as the Message Manager (mailbox number 998), do not assign an individual mailbox to this extension
number. Assigning an individual mailbox to this extension will result in the following operations:
– Any messages recorded for the extension will be sent to the Message Manager mailbox instead of
the extension’s assigned mailbox.
– The Message Manager COS (65) will be applied to call transfers, etc., instead of the COS of the
assigned mailbox.
– If the extension user tries to access their mailbox using the Automatic Login feature, the user will
access the Message Manager mailbox instead of the assigned mailbox.

Value Range
1–8 digits

Feature Guide References

3.2.1.34 Operator Service

Operator Service—Operator’s Mailbox

Specifies the mailbox number for Operator 1, 2, and 3. Callers to Operator 1, 2, or 3 are prompted to leave a
message in this mailbox depending upon how the Busy Coverage Mode or No Answer Coverage Mode is set.

Value Range
2–8 digits

Feature Guide References

3.2.1.34 Operator Service

Operator Service—Busy Coverage Mode

Specifies how to handle calls when the operator is busy.

Value Range
Hold: Automatically places the caller on hold and the operator is called again.
No Answer Coverage: Offers the option specified by the No Answer Coverage Mode to the caller.
Call Waiting: Signals the operator when another call is waiting using the Call Waiting feature of PBX.
Disconnect Message: Disconnects the caller after playing "Thank you for calling".

798 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 23.2 UM Configuration—[4-2] Service Settings—Parameters
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Feature Guide References

3.2.1.34 Operator Service

Operator Service—No Answer Coverage Mode

Specifies how to handle operator calls when they are not answered within the time period set in Operator
Service—Operator No Answer Time (10-60 s).

Value Range
Caller Select: Allows the caller to leave a message or call another extension. In the following cases, the caller
cannot call another extension:
a. No input to Automated Attendant.
b. When the No DTMF Input Operation setting of a Custom Service is set to "Operator".
Leave Message: Instructs the caller to leave a message in the operator’s mailbox.
Disconnect Message: Disconnects the caller after playing "Thank you for calling.".
Next Operator: Transfers the caller to the next operator.

PC Programming Manual References

20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting— No DTMF Input Operation

Feature Guide References

3.2.1.34 Operator Service

Operator Service—Operator No Answer Time (10-60 s)

When a call to an operator is not answered within the time set, the system will offer other options as defined
by Operator Service—No Answer Coverage Mode.

Note
• This time applies to Operator 1, 2, and 3.
• If more than one operator is assigned, we recommend setting this value to 15 s.

Value Range
10–60 s

Feature Guide References

3.2.1.34 Operator Service

Call Hold Mode

If Call Hold Mode is checked, the system gives callers the option of either holding for a specific extension or
selecting one of several Incomplete Call Handling Service options. While on hold, the system periodically gives
callers the choice to either continue to hold or select one of the Incomplete Call Handling Service options. If
Call Hold Mode is not checked, the system immediately offers callers the Incomplete Call Handling Service
and callers are not put on hold.

Value Range
Enable (checked), Disable (unchecked)

PC Programming Manual 799

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
23.2 UM Configuration—[4-2] Service Settings—Parameters
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Feature Guide References

3.2.1.3 Automated Attendant (AA)

Call Hold Mode—Call Queuing Announcement Mode

If set to "Enable", callers on hold are informed of their current position in the call hold queue.
Example: "One other person is waiting to connect."

Value Range
Enable, Disable

Feature Guide References

3.2.1.3 Automated Attendant (AA)

Call Hold Mode—Call Retrieval Announcement Timing (1-30 s)

Specifies the interval between the voice guidance message that asks whether or not calls are to be retrieved
during call holding.
Example: "To cancel holding, press 2 now. Otherwise, I’ll try your party again."

Value Range
1–30 s

Feature Guide References

3.2.1.3 Automated Attendant (AA)

Alternate Extension
Specifies extensions that require a different transfer sequence than normal. Calls to these extensions will be
transferred according with the setting for 24.4 UM Configuration—[5-4] System
Parameters—Parameters— PBX Environment—Alternate Extension Transfer Sequence (Up to 16
digits / [0-9 * # D R F T X , ;]).Click Edit and follow the steps below to edit an alternate extension.

Adding an Alternate Extension

1. Click New.
2. Enter an extension number.
3. Click OK.
Editing an Alternate Extension
1. Select the desired alternate extension.
2. Click Edit.
3. Edit the extension number.
4. Click OK.
Deleting an Alternate Extension
1. Select the desired alternate extension.
2. Click Delete.
3. Click Yes.

800 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 23.2 UM Configuration—[4-2] Service Settings—Parameters
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Changing the order of Alternate Extensions

Select an extension and click Move up or Move down to change its order in the list. Alternate extensions will
be dialled in order from top to bottom.

Note
Extension Groups and Logical Extensions cannot be assigned.

Value Range
Max. 32 extensions (max. 5 digits per extension)

PC Programming Manual References

24.4 UM Configuration—[5-4] System Parameters—Parameters— PBX Environment—Alternate Extension
Transfer Sequence (Up to 16 digits / [0-9 * # D R F T X , ;])

Feature Guide References

3.2.1.3 Automated Attendant (AA)

List All Names

If set to "Enable", callers can listen to all subscriber names and extension numbers in the Automated
Attendant service or Custom Service.

Value Range
Enable, Disable

Feature Guide References

3.2.1.3 Automated Attendant (AA)

Operator Transfer Mode

Specifies the timing of the operator transfer.

Value Range
Transfer immediately, Do not transfer immediately

Feature Guide References

3.2.1.3 Automated Attendant (AA)

No DTMF Input Operation

No DTMF Input Call Coverage for Day, Night, Lunch, and Break (Selection)
Specifies where a caller will be transferred when there is no DTMF input in response to system guidance (for
example, the caller is using a rotary phone) for each time mode.

Value Range
G.D.M.: The caller is transferred to the General Delivery Mailbox.
Operator: The caller is transferred to an operator.

PC Programming Manual 801

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
23.2 UM Configuration—[4-2] Service Settings—Parameters
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Mailbox: The caller is transferred to the designated mailbox extension.

Extension: The caller is transferred to the designated extension.

Feature Guide References

3.2.1.32 No DTMF Input Operation

No DTMF Input Call Coverage for Day, Night, Lunch, and Break (Parameter)
Specifies the transfer destination if "Mailbox" or "Extension" is selected for No DTMF Input Call Coverage
for Day, Night, Lunch, and Break (Selection).

Value Range
2–8 digits (for extensions)
2–[the value set in Mailbox No. Max. Length (3-8)] digits (for mailboxes)

Feature Guide References

3.2.1.32 No DTMF Input Operation

Name Entry
Number of Digits to Entry Name (3-4 digits)
Specifies the number of digits (letters) that must be entered when using the Dial by Name feature, which allows
callers to connect themselves with the desired party by entering the first 3 or 4 letters of the party’s name.

Value Range
3–4 digits

Feature Guide References

3.2.1.16 Dialling by Name

Name Entry Time Out (1-10 s)

Specifies the length of time that the system waits for the caller to enter the first 3 or 4 digits (letters) of the
desired party’s name. If the required number of digits are not dialled within this time, the previous menu will
be played again for the caller.

Value Range
1–10 s

Feature Guide References

3.2.1.16 Dialling by Name

Key Mode
Specifies the standard used for keypad text entry. If set to use the North American Standard, press [7] for
"Q" and [9] for "Z", If set to use the Australasian Standard, press [1] for "Q" and "Z".

802 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 23.2 UM Configuration—[4-2] Service Settings—Parameters
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Value Range
North American Standard, Australasian Standard

Feature Guide References

3.2.1.16 Dialling by Name

Name Directory Mode

Specifies one of Last Name, First Name, or Both to be used when entering the name.

Value Range
Last, First, Both

Feature Guide References

3.2.1.16 Dialling by Name

Toll Saver
Delayed Answer Time for New Message (5-60 s)
Specifies the time period before the system answers the call when there are new messages.

Value Range
5–60 s

Delayed Answer Time for No New Message (5-60 s)

Specifies the time period before the system answers the call when there are no new messages.

Value Range
5–60 s

Feature Guide References

3.2.2.29 Toll Saver

PC Programming Manual 803

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
23.3 UM Configuration—[4-3] Service Settings—Custom Service
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

23.3 UM Configuration—[4-3] Service

Settings—Custom Service
A Custom Service allows callers to perform specific functions by pressing dial buttons on their telephones while
listening to voice guidance (Custom Service Menu). Custom Services allow callers to connect themselves to
an extension, mailbox, Mailbox Group, operator, fax machine, etc., without the assistance of an operator. A
Custom Service Menu ("Press 1 for Sales, press 2 for Service", etc.) can be recorded by the System Manager
or the Message Manager, and can be recorded in several languages if needed. The System Manager can
create a maximum of 200 Custom Services.
Common uses for Custom Services include:
– callers press a button to connect themselves with the desired destination
– callers press buttons to navigate through a series of other Custom Services before being connected with
the desired destination
– callers enter PIN numbers to connect themselves with the desired destination (PIN Call Routing)
– callers enter the first few letters of the desired parties (Dial by Name) to connect themselves with the desired
destination

Custom Service Builder

The Custom Service Builder is a utility that allows the System Administrator to create Custom Services visually.
Each Custom Service and its functions can be edited, arranged using a familiar drag-and-drop interface. The
following Custom Service types are available:
– Menu & Transfer
– Date Control
– Time Control
– Day Control
– Password

Creating a Custom Service

1. Click the desired Custom Service type under Custom Service Type.
2. Click on an area within the workspace to the right of the menu to place the Custom Service (it can be moved
later).
3. Double-click the Custom Service icon you placed in the grid.
4. Edit the parameters in the Custom Service parameters dialogue box.
5. Click OK.
Note
If you are using Windows Internet Explorer, and you become unable to create new Custom Services with
the Custom Service Builder, click the browser’s Refresh button.

Editing a Custom Service

Custom Services parameters can be connected to other Custom Services. To connect a parameter to another
Custom Service, click and hold the parameter’s blue handle, drag it to the desired Custom Service, then release
the mouse button.
You can edit each Custom Service in the following ways.

[From the Custom Service List]

1. Enter the desired Custom Service number under Quick Search and click Edit Custom Service.
2. Edit the parameters in the Custom Service parameters dialogue box.
3. Click OK.

804 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 23.3 UM Configuration—[4-3] Service Settings—Custom Service
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

[From the Custom Service Diagram]

1. Double-click the desired Custom Service icon in the diagram, or right-click on the desired icon and select
Edit.
2. Edit the parameters in the Custom Service parameters dialogue box.
3. Click OK.
Example: Setting "Menu & Transfer"
1. Click Menu & Transfer under Custom Service Type and drag it to the right side of the screen.
2. Drop Menu & Transfer on to a position of your choice in the Custom Service diagram. The parameters
dialogue box for the Custom Service opens.
3. Enter or select a value for each item.
For each parameter, refer to the description in the following section.
4. Click Record A Prompt For This Custom Service.
This feature is only available when setting "Menu & Transfer" or "Password". You can also skip this step,
and go to step 7.
5. Select Record from extension or Import from recorded file.
When Record from extension is selected:
1. Specify the extension number of the telephone used for recording, then click Connect.
2. When the specified extension rings, go off-hook.
3. Click Record, Play, or Stop to record or play a voice label through the extension.
4. Click Disconnect.
5. Click OK.
When Import from recorded file is selected:
1. Click the folder icon.
The Open dialogue box appears.
2. Navigate to the folder containing the WAV files you want to open.
WAV files must meet the following specifications:
– G.711 PCM codec
– 8 kHz, 8-bit sampling rate
– Monaural
– A-law or µ-law encoding
3. Select the desired WAV file.
4. Click Open.
6. Click OK.
7. Click OK.

PC Programming Manual 805

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
23.3.1 UM Configuration—[4-3] Service Settings—Custom Service—Menu & Transfer
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

23.3.1 UM Configuration—[4-3] Service Settings—Custom

Service—Menu & Transfer
The below parameters are set for the Menu Transfer Custom Service in the Custom Service Builder.
This Custom Service type guides callers to press certain buttons to connect themselves with the designated
party. The prompt for this service can be recorded in the CS No. dialogue box.
Custom Service prompts can be recorded only in On-line mode.

Description
The information typed in this field is for reference only.

Value Range
Max. 32 characters

Feature Guide References

3.2.1.15 Custom Service

Prompt Mode
Specifies the language for prompts used by this Custom Service.

Note
• This parameter overrides a set "Incoming Call Service Prompt".
• If "Primary" is selected, the default language which is selected from all installed languages will be used.
• If "None" is selected, the prompt mode of previous process will be continued, or "Primary" language
will be selected.

Value Range
None, Primary, Guidance No. 1-8

PC Programming Manual References

22.1 UM Configuration—[3-1] UM Extension / Trunk Service—Service Group— Day, Night, Lunch, and
Break Mode - Incoming Call Service Prompt

Feature Guide References

3.2.1.15 Custom Service

Menu Repeat Cycle (1-3)

Specifies the number of times the Custom Service menu message will be repeated for the caller.

Value Range
1–3 times

Feature Guide References

3.2.1.15 Custom Service

806 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 23.3.1 UM Configuration—[4-3] Service Settings—Custom Service—Menu & Transfer
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Call Transfer Anytime

Specifies the type of dialling that the system accepts during the Custom Service in addition to the single-digit
Custom Service options. This setting allows callers to dial numbers to connect themselves to an extension or
mailbox or enter a PIN.

Note
If you only need to allow callers to dial single-digit Custom Service option numbers, set this parameter to
"No". When set to a value other than "No", the system always waits for the amount determined by the Wait
for Second Digit (1-5 s) setting before handling the call. This will cause a delay between the time the
caller dials a single-digit Custom Service option number and when the call is actually handled.

Value Range
Extn: enables callers to be transferred directly to their intended party by dialling the extension number.
Mbx: enables callers to leave messages in a mailbox by entering the mailbox number.
PIN: enables callers to be transferred directly to the specified party according to the setting for PIN Call Routing
Service by dialling a PIN.
No: disables extension transfer and mailbox transfer; only 1-digit entries will function (following the Custom
Service menu)

Feature Guide References

3.2.1.15 Custom Service

Wait for First Digit (0-10 s)

Specifies the length of time that the system waits for the caller to dial the first digit after a Custom Service menu
is played for the caller. If this time expires, the No DTMF Operation settings determines how the call is then
handled. If this parameter is set to "0", No DTMF Input Operation handles the call immediately after the menu
is played for the caller.

Value Range
0–10 s

Feature Guide References

3.2.1.15 Custom Service

Wait for Second Digit (1-5 s)

This parameter is only valid when Call Transfer Anytime is set to a value other than "No". After the caller dials
a digit (the first digit) after listening to a Custom Service menu, the system waits for a second digit to be dialled.
This gives the caller time to continue dialling a mailbox number, extension number, or PIN. If this time expires
without a second digit being entered, the system assumes the caller has selected a Custom Service menu
option and handles the call according to the digit dialled by the caller.

Value Range
1–5 s

Feature Guide References

3.2.1.15 Custom Service

PC Programming Manual 807

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
23.3.1 UM Configuration—[4-3] Service Settings—Custom Service—Menu & Transfer
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

No DTMF Input Operation

Determines how calls are handled when callers do not dial any numbers after listening to the menu message
(most likely because they are using rotary telephones) The default setting is "Operator", which allows the caller
to be automatically connected to an operator after the menu message plays back ("Press the desired number,
or stay on the line to be connected to an operator.").

Value Range
Trf to Mbx: Allows the caller to leave messages in a specified mailbox.
Trf to Ext: Transfers the caller to a specified extension.
Operator: Connects the caller to an operator.
Trf to Out: Transfers the caller to a specified outside telephone number. Enter the trunk access number of the
PBX then the destination telephone number.
Exit: Plays the Custom Service exit prompt and disconnects the caller.
Prev Menu: Returns the caller to the previous menu (if there was a previous menu).
CS: Transfers the caller to the Custom Service specified here.

Feature Guide References

3.2.1.15 Custom Service

Key – Assigned Operation: 0–9, *, #

Any of the 16 operations listed below can be assigned to the 0 through 9, , and # keys on the telephone
keypad. Callers are able to access these operations by pressing the corresponding keys on their telephones.

Value Range
Trf to Mbx: Allows the caller to leave messages in a specified mailbox.
Trf to Ext: Transfers the caller to a specified extension.
Operator: Connects the caller to an operator.
Trf to Out: Transfers the caller to a specified outside telephone number. Enter the trunk access number of the
PBX then the destination telephone number.
Exit: Plays the Custom Service exit prompt and disconnects the caller.
Prev Menu: Returns the caller to the previous menu (not available if there was no previous menu).
CS: Transfers the caller to the Custom Service specified here.
VM Serv: Allows the caller to access Voice Mail Service.
Call Trf Serv: Allows the caller to access Automated Attendant Service.
Subscriber Serv: Allows the caller to access the Subscriber Service. The caller needs to press the assigned
key followed by the mailbox number that he or she wants to log in. If this option is enabled, it is strongly
recommended that each subscriber set a password for his or her mailbox; this will prevent unauthorised callers
from accidentally or intentionally accessing subscribers’ mailboxes.
Dial by Name: Requests the caller to enter the first 3 or 4 letters of a first or last name of the person the caller
wishes to reach, then transfers the caller to the corresponding extension.
Repeat Menu: Repeats the Custom Service menu.
Main Menu: Returns the caller to the Custom Service top menu.
Trf to Fax Extn: Allows the caller to send fax messages to an extension specified as the fax extension.
List All Names: The system will announce the names and extensions numbers of all subscribers (except those
whose Class of Service Directory Listing parameter is set to "No").
None: No operation assigned.

Example: Assigning key [1] to transfer to extension 101

1. Click the check box next to key [1].
2. Select "Trf to Ext" in the "Assigned Operation" column.
3. Enter "101" in the "Value" column.

808 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 23.3.1 UM Configuration—[4-3] Service Settings—Custom Service—Menu & Transfer
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Example: Cancelling the setting for key [1]

1. Clear the check box next to key [1].

Feature Guide References

3.2.1.15 Custom Service

PC Programming Manual 809

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
23.3.2 UM Configuration—[4-3] Service Settings—Custom Service—Date Control
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

23.3.2 UM Configuration—[4-3] Service Settings—Custom

Service—Date Control
The below parameters are set for the Date Control Custom Service in the Custom Service Builder.
This service allows you to assign a different operation for up to 5 time periods. The caller makes no selection
and no menu is announced.

Description
The information typed in this field is for reference only.

Value Range
Max. 32 characters

Feature Guide References

3.2.1.15 Custom Service

Period 1–5, Outside

Period 1–5:
Specifies the name of date period for reference, start and end date, and an operation.

Outside:
Allows you to specify an operation that is enabled on all other dates not included in the set periods.

Value Range
Period 1–5:
Name: Max. 16 characters
From/To: Select the check box, and then click the input field to select a date (month and day) from the calendar.
You can specify a beginning date (From), ending date (To), or both for each period.
Assigned Operation: Trf to Mbx, Trf to Ext, Operator, Trf to Out, Exit, Prev Menu, CS, VM Serv, Call Trf Serv,
Subscriber Serv, Dial by Name, Repeat Menu, Main Menu, Trf to Fax Extn, List All Names, None (see
23.3.1 UM Configuration—[4-3] Service Settings—Custom Service—Menu & Transfer— Key –
Assigned Operation: 0–9, *, #)

Outside:
Name: Max. 16 characters
Assigned Operation: Trf to Mbx, Trf to Ext, Operator, Trf to Out, Exit, Prev Menu, CS, VM Serv, Call Trf Serv,
Subscriber Serv, Dial by Name, Repeat Menu, Main Menu, Trf to Fax Extn, List All Names, None (see
23.3.1 UM Configuration—[4-3] Service Settings—Custom Service—Menu & Transfer— Key –
Assigned Operation: 0–9, *, #)

Feature Guide References

3.2.1.15 Custom Service

810 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 23.3.3 UM Configuration—[4-3] Service Settings—Custom Service—Time Control
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

23.3.3 UM Configuration—[4-3] Service Settings—Custom

Service—Time Control
The below parameters are set for the Time Control Custom Service in the Custom Service Builder.
This service allows you to assign a different operation for up to 5 blocks of time during the day. The caller
makes no selection and no menu is announced.

Description
The information typed in this field is for reference only.

Value Range
Max. 32 characters

Feature Guide References

3.2.1.15 Custom Service

Period 1–5, Outside

Period 1–5:
Specifies the name of time period for reference, start and end time, and an operation.

Note
When the start time is specified and the end time is "None", the period will end at "00:00".

Outside:
Allows you to specify an operation that is enabled for all other times not included in the set time periods.

Value Range
Period 1–5:
Name: Max. 16 characters
From/To: Select the check box, click the input field, and then specify a time (hour and minute). You can specify
a beginning time (From), ending time (To), or both for each period.
Assigned Operation: Trf to Mbx, Trf to Ext, Operator, Trf to Out, Exit, Prev Menu, CS, VM Serv, Call Trf Serv,
Subscriber Serv, Dial by Name, Repeat Menu, Main Menu, Trf to Fax Extn, List All Names, None (see
23.3.1 UM Configuration—[4-3] Service Settings—Custom Service—Menu & Transfer— Key –
Assigned Operation: 0–9, *, #)

Outside:
Name: Max. 16 characters
Assigned Operation: Trf to Mbx, Trf to Ext, Operator, Trf to Out, Exit, Prev Menu, CS, VM Serv, Call Trf Serv,
Subscriber Serv, Dial by Name, Repeat Menu, Main Menu, Trf to Fax Extn, List All Names, None (see
23.3.1 UM Configuration—[4-3] Service Settings—Custom Service—Menu & Transfer— Key –
Assigned Operation: 0–9, *, #)

Feature Guide References

3.2.1.15 Custom Service

PC Programming Manual 811

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
23.3.4 UM Configuration—[4-3] Service Settings—Custom Service—Day Control
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

23.3.4 UM Configuration—[4-3] Service Settings—Custom

Service—Day Control
The below parameters are set for the Menu Transfer Custom Service in the Custom Service Builder.
This service allows you to assign a different operation for each day of the week, and for all holidays. The caller
makes no selection and no menu is announced.

Description
The information typed in this field is for reference only.

Value Range
Max. 32 characters

Feature Guide References

3.2.1.15 Custom Service

Sunday–Saturday, Holiday
Specifies a service for each day of the week and for all holidays.

Note
If an operation is assigned to "Holiday" here, either one of the following settings is required in order to
activate the operation for the "Holiday" Custom Service:
a. In the Holiday Table, select "Custom Service Menu" and specify the number of this Date
Control—"Holiday" Custom Service, or the number of its higher layered Custom Service (see 23.4 UM
Configuration—[4-4] Service Settings—Holiday Table).
b. Assign the desired Date Control—"Holiday" Custom Service or its higher layered Custom Service to
the desired Port/Trunk (see 22.1 UM Configuration—[3-1] UM Extension / Trunk Service—Service
Group).
For "Port Affected/Trunk Affected", exclude the Port/Trunk numbers that are assigned to the Date
Control—"Holiday" Custom Service or the number of its higher layered Custom Service.

Value Range
Assigned Operation: Trf to Mbx, Trf to Ext, Operator, Trf to Out, Exit, Prev Menu, CS, VM Serv, Call Trf Serv,
Subscriber Serv, Dial by Name, Repeat Menu, Main Menu, Trf to Fax Extn, List All Names, None (see
23.3.1 UM Configuration—[4-3] Service Settings—Custom Service—Menu & Transfer— Key –
Assigned Operation: 0–9, *, #)

Feature Guide References

3.2.1.15 Custom Service

812 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 23.3.5 UM Configuration—[4-3] Service Settings—Custom Service—Password
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

23.3.5 UM Configuration—[4-3] Service Settings—Custom

Service—Password
The below parameters are set for the Password Custom Service in the Custom Service Builder.
This service requires that callers enter a password, followed by "#". Each password is assigned an operation.
If a password is entered correctly, the caller is handled by the password’s pre-programmed operation. The
prompt for this service can be recorded in the CS No. dialogue box.
Custom Service prompts can be recorded only in On-line mode.

Description
The information typed in this field is for reference only.

Value Range
Max. 32 characters

Feature Guide References

3.2.1.15 Custom Service

Menu Repeat Cycle (1-3)

Specifies the number of times the Custom Service menu message will be repeated to the caller.

Value Range
1–3 times

Feature Guide References

3.2.1.15 Custom Service

Wait for First Digit (0-10 s)

Specifies the length of time that the system waits for the caller to dial the first digit after a Custom Service menu
is played for the caller. If this time expires, the No DTMF Operation setting determines how the call is then
handled.

Value Range
1–10 s

Feature Guide References

3.2.1.15 Custom Service

Maximum Number of Invalid Entry (1-10)

Specifies the number of times an invalid password is entered before the operation assigned for Entry
Failure is executed.

Value Range
1–10 times

PC Programming Manual 813

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
23.3.5 UM Configuration—[4-3] Service Settings—Custom Service—Password
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Feature Guide References

3.2.1.15 Custom Service

No DTMF Input Operation

Determines how calls are handled when callers do not dial any numbers in response to system guidance (often
because they are rotary telephone users). The default setting is "Operator", which allows the caller to be
automatically connected to an operator after the message is played.

Value Range
Trf to Mbx, Trf to Ext, Operator, Trf to Out, Exit, Prev Menu, CS (see 23.3.1 UM Configuration—[4-3] Service
Settings—Custom Service—Menu & Transfer— No DTMF Input Operation)

Feature Guide References

3.2.1.15 Custom Service

Entry Failure
Determines what operation is activated when a caller enters an invalid password X times. (X= the value set
for Maximum Number of Invalid Entry (1-10))

Value Range
Trf to Mbx, Trf to Ext, Operator, Trf to Out, Exit, Prev Menu, CS, VM Serv, Call Trf Serv, Subscriber Serv, Dial
by Name, Repeat Menu, Main Menu, Trf to Fax Extn, List All Names (see 23.3.1 UM Configuration—[4-3]
Service Settings—Custom Service—Menu & Transfer— Key – Assigned Operation: 0–9, *, #)

Feature Guide References

3.2.1.15 Custom Service

Pass1–5, Cancel
Pass1–5:
Specifies a password and an operation for the specified password.

Cancel:
Determines the operation that is activated when a caller presses "#" to cancel password entry.

Value Range
Pass1–5:
Password: Max. 12 digits
Assigned Operation: Trf to Mbx, Trf to Ext, Operator, Trf to Out, Exit, Prev Menu, CS, VM Serv, Call Trf Serv,
Subscriber Serv, Dial by Name, Repeat Menu, Main Menu, Trf to Fax Extn, List All Names, None (see
23.3.1 UM Configuration—[4-3] Service Settings—Custom Service—Menu & Transfer— Key –
Assigned Operation: 0–9, *, #)

Cancel:
Assigned Operation: Trf to Mbx, Trf to Ext, Operator, Trf to Out, Exit, Prev Menu, CS, VM Serv, Call Trf Serv,
Subscriber Serv, Dial by Name, Repeat Menu, Main Menu, Trf to Fax Extn, List All Names, None (see
23.3.1 UM Configuration—[4-3] Service Settings—Custom Service—Menu & Transfer— Key –
Assigned Operation: 0–9, *, #)

814 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 23.3.5 UM Configuration—[4-3] Service Settings—Custom Service—Password
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Feature Guide References

3.2.1.15 Custom Service

PC Programming Manual 815

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
23.4 UM Configuration—[4-4] Service Settings—Holiday Table
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

23.4 UM Configuration—[4-4] Service

Settings—Holiday Table
Holidays can be set for and assigned to trunks and Unified Messaging ports. When a call is received from a
certain trunk or by a certain subscriber during the time frame set for an assigned holiday, the call handling
settings for that holiday will be used. This screen is similar to the table found in 10.5 PBX
Configuration—[2-5] System—Holiday Table. You can also access the PBX Holiday Table directly by clicking
the PBX Holiday Table tab. A maximum of 24 different holidays can be programmed.

Setting
Enables the setting of the holiday. This setting synchronises with the PBX’s Holiday Table.

Value Range
Enable, Disable

PC Programming Manual References

10.5 PBX Configuration—[2-5] System—Holiday Table— Holiday Table—Setting

Feature Guide References

3.2.1.20 Holiday Service

Name of Holiday
Specifies the name of the holiday setting for later reference.

Value Range
Max. 32 Characters

Feature Guide References

3.2.1.20 Holiday Service

Start Date (Month Day)

Specifies the month and day of the holiday start date. Click the cell to display a calendar. Select a month using
the arrow buttons, and click on a day for the selected month. This setting synchronises with the PBX’s Holiday
Table.

Value Range
Month and Day

PC Programming Manual References

10.5 PBX Configuration—[2-5] System—Holiday Table
→ Holiday Table—Start Date—Month
→ Holiday Table—Start Date—Day

816 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 23.4 UM Configuration—[4-4] Service Settings—Holiday Table
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Feature Guide References

3.2.1.20 Holiday Service

Start Time
Specifies the time of day on the specified date at which to begin the holiday service. Click the cell to display
an array of hours and minutes. Select an hour of the day and a minute of the hour to set the time.

Value Range
Hour and Minute

Feature Guide References

3.2.1.20 Holiday Service

End Date (Month Day)

Specifies the month and day of the holiday end date. Click the cell to display a calendar. Select a month using
the arrow buttons, and click on a day for the selected month. This setting synchronises with the PBX’s Holiday
Table.

Value Range
Month and Day

PC Programming Manual References

10.5 PBX Configuration—[2-5] System—Holiday Table
→ Holiday Table—End Date—Month
→ Holiday Table—End Date—Day

Feature Guide References

3.2.1.20 Holiday Service

End Time
Specifies the time of day on the specified date at which to end the holiday service. Click the cell to display an
array of hours and minutes. Select an hour of the day and a minute of the hour to set the time.

Value Range
Hour and Minute

Feature Guide References

3.2.1.20 Holiday Service

Retain Holiday
If "Yes" is selected, the holiday will not end regardless of the end time setting. To end the holiday setting when
"Yes" is selected and the end time has already passed, set Setting to "Disable" or re-programme the settings
for the holiday.

PC Programming Manual 817

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
23.4 UM Configuration—[4-4] Service Settings—Holiday Table
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Value Range
No, Yes

Feature Guide References

3.2.1.20 Holiday Service

Company Greeting No.

Specify the greeting callers hear when calling the affected trunks or ports during the holiday.

Value Range
None (do not playback): No greeting is heard.
No. 1–32: The selected company greeting is heard.
System Greeting: The following greeting is heard: "Good morning/Good afternoon/Good evening. Welcome
to the Unified Messaging System".

Feature Guide References

3.2.1.20 Holiday Service

Service
One of 4 incoming call services (Voice Mail, Automated Attendant, Interview, or Custom Service) can be
assigned to each holiday. After a greeting is played (if specified), the call will be transferred to the selected
service.

Value Range
Voice Mail Service: The caller is transferred to the Voice Mail Service.
Automated Attendant Service: The caller is transferred to the Automated Attendant Service.
Interview Mailbox: The caller is transferred to an Interview Mailbox.
Custom Service Menu: The caller is transferred to a Custom Service Menu.

Feature Guide References

3.2.1.20 Holiday Service

Interview Mailbox/Custom Service Menu

If "Interview Mailbox" or "Custom Service Menu" was selected for Service, specify the Interview Mailbox or
Custom Service here.

Value Range
Interview Mailbox number, Custom Service number

Feature Guide References

3.2.1.20 Holiday Service

818 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 23.4 UM Configuration—[4-4] Service Settings—Holiday Table
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Trunk Affected
Specify which trunks will be subject to the holiday setting. Click Edit, and then select the check boxes for the
trunks to be subject to the holiday setting, or select the All check box to apply the holiday to all trunks. Click
OK to finish.

Value Range
Trunk No. 1–64, All

Feature Guide References

3.2.1.20 Holiday Service

Port Affected
Specify which UM ports will be subject to the holiday setting. Click Edit, and then select the check boxes for
the UM ports to be subject to the holiday setting, or select the All check box to apply the holiday to all UM
ports. Click OK to finish.

Value Range
Port No. 1–24, All

Feature Guide References

3.2.1.20 Holiday Service

PC Programming Manual 819

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
23.4 UM Configuration—[4-4] Service Settings—Holiday Table
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

820 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Section 24
UM Configuration—[5] System Parameters

This section serves as reference operating instructions

for the System Parameters menu of the UM
Configuration menu of the Setup screen of Web
Maintenance Console.

PC Programming Manual 821

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
24.1 UM Configuration—[5-1] System Parameters—Mailbox Group
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

24.1 UM Configuration—[5-1] System

Parameters—Mailbox Group
Also called System Group Distribution Lists. Mailbox Groups allow a caller or subscriber to record a message
and have it sent to several mailboxes. Messages sent to a Mailbox Group are sent to all subscribers in the
group. The system can maintain a maximum of 20 Mailbox Groups. Each group can have a maximum of 200
members. For Personal Group Distribution Lists, see 20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox
Settings—Full Setting—Personal Distribution List.
Follow the steps below to create or edit a Mailbox Group.

Adding Mailbox Groups

1. Specify the Group List No. and Group Name for each Mailbox Group to be used.
2. Click OK.
Editing Mailboxes
To edit a mailbox group, select the desired mailbox group, then click the icon. You can also edit specific
parameters directly from the Mailbox Group list.

Deleting Mailboxes
1. Select a mailbox group.
2. Click the icon.
3. Click Yes.
Adding Mailboxes to a Group
1. In the Group Members column, click the Edit button of the group to add mailboxes to.
2. In the Subscribers To Add column, select the check boxes for the mailbox numbers to add to the group.
3. Click Add.
4. Click OK.
5. Click OK.
Recording a Name for the Group in the Edit Mailbox Group dialogue box
1. Select the desired Mailbox Group and click the icon.

Note
Before you can record, confirm that there is at least 1 member in the group and that you have clicked
Apply since adding members to the group.
2. Select "Record from extension" or "Import from recorded file". When "Record from extension" is selected:
1. Specify the extension number of the telephone used for recording, then click Connect.
2. When the specified extension rings, go off-hook.
3. Click Record, Play, or Stop to record or play a voice label through the extension.
4. Click Disconnect.
5. Click OK.
When "Import from recorded file" is selected:
1. Click the folder icon.
The Open dialogue box appears.
2. Navigate to the folder containing the WAV files you want to open.
WAV files must meet the following specifications:
– G.711 PCM codec
– 8 kHz, 8-bit sampling rate
– Monaural
– A-law or µ-law encoding

822 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 24.1 UM Configuration—[5-1] System Parameters—Mailbox Group
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

3. Select the desired WAV file.

4. Click Open to import the file.
3. Click OK.

Group List No.

Specifies the Mailbox Group number. This number is similar to a mailbox number and is used to send a
message to all subscribers of the group. It must be a unique number; no other group or mailbox can be assigned
this number.

Value Range
2–[the value set in Mailbox No. Max. Length (3-8)] digits

Feature Guide References

3.2.2.14 Group Distribution Lists

Group Name
Specifies the group name.

Value Range
Max. 32 characters

Feature Guide References

3.2.2.14 Group Distribution Lists

PC Programming Manual 823

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
24.2 UM Configuration—[5-2] System Parameters—Extension Group
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

24.2 UM Configuration—[5-2] System

Parameters—Extension Group
An Extension Group is a group of extensions that share a common mailbox. Each group has an Extension
Group number. If the group number is assigned as the owner of a mailbox, then all members cannot be
assigned their own personal mailboxes.
Up to 20 Extension Groups can be created, and each group can consist of 100 extensions (members). You
can add, delete, and review the extensions. Members of an Extension Group are able to share the same
mailbox and be notified by the Message Waiting Notification feature when a message is received.
Follow the steps below to edit an Extension Group.

Adding Extension Groups

1. Click the icon.
2. Specify the Group List No. and Group Name for the Extension Group.
3. Click OK.
Editing Extension Groups
To edit Extension Group settings, select the desired Group, then click the icon. You can also edit specific
parameters directly from the Extension Group list.

Deleting Extension Groups

1. Select an Extension Group.
2. Click the icon.
3. Click Yes.
Editing Extension Group Members
1. In the Extension No. column, click the Click To Edit.. button to open the Group Members window.
2. Click the icon.
3. Enter the extension to add in Extension, and click OK.
4. Click OK.
The table on this screen will list any extensions that cannot be added, as well as the reason that extension
cannot be added to the group (i.e. it is already in another extension group, etc.).

Group List No.

Specifies the Extension Group number.

Note
In order to configure an Extension Group, set a group number here, then assign the group number as the
owner of a mailbox. The Extension Group number is effectively the extension number that is the owner of
the group’s mailbox.

Value Range
2–8 digits

Feature Guide References

3.2.1.18 Extension Group

824 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 24.2 UM Configuration—[5-2] System Parameters—Extension Group
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Group Name
Specifies the group name.

Value Range
Max. 32 characters

Feature Guide References

3.2.1.18 Extension Group

PC Programming Manual 825

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
24.3 UM Configuration—[5-3] System Parameters—System Caller Name Announcement
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

24.3 UM Configuration—[5-3] System

Parameters—System Caller Name Announcement
Allows the System Administrator to store a maximum of 200 telephone numbers and record a caller name for
each telephone number. The caller name is announced when playing a message in their mailbox from one of
the pre-programmed callers, when the system transfers a call to the subscriber from one of the
pre-programmed callers (Caller ID Screening), and when the system pages the subscriber by intercom
(Intercom Paging).
Caller ID Screening feature is only available when the Caller ID Screen parameter of the subscriber’s Class
of Service is set to "Yes". This feature is also enabled when subscribers select "Call screening" as the Call
Transfer method (see "3.2.2 Subscriber Features—3.2.2.7 Call Transfer Status" in the Feature Guide).
The Intercom Paging feature is enabled by selecting "Intercom Paging" as the Call Transfer method (see
"3.2.2 Subscriber Features—3.2.2.7 Call Transfer Status" and/or "3.2.2 Subscriber
Features—3.2.2.15 Incomplete Call Handling Service" in the Feature Guide).
Follow the steps below to edit System Caller Name Announcements.

Adding a Caller Extension and Description

1. Specify the Caller-ID No. and Description for each entry that will be used.
2. Click OK.
Editing Caller ID Entries
To edit an entry, select the desired mailbox group, then click the icon. You can also edit specific parameters
directly from the list.

Deleting Mailboxes
1. Select an entry.
2. Click the icon.
3. Click Yes.
Recording a Name for the extension in the Caller Information dialogue box
1. Select the desired Caller ID number and click the icon.

Note
Before you can record, confirm that you have clicked Apply since you added the Caller ID No.
2. Select "Record from extension" or "Import from recorded file".
When "Record from extension" is selected:
1. Specify the extension number of the telephone used for recording, then click Connect.
2. When the specified extension rings, go off-hook.
3. Click Record, Play, or Stop to record or play a voice label through the extension.
4. Click Disconnect.
5. Click OK.
When "Import from recorded file" is selected:
1. Click the folder icon.
The Open dialogue box appears.
2. Navigate to the folder containing the WAV files you want to open.
WAV files must meet the following specifications:
– G.711 PCM codec
– 8 kHz, 8-bit sampling rate
– Monaural
– A-law or µ-law encoding
3. Select the desired WAV file.

826 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 24.3 UM Configuration—[5-3] System Parameters—System Caller Name Announcement
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

4. Click Open to import the file.

3. Click OK.

Caller-ID No.
Assigns the telephone number for which the system announces the pre-recorded caller name to extension
users.

Value Range
Max. 20 digits consisting of 0–9

Feature Guide References

3.2.1.10 Caller Name Announcement

Description
Enters a name and/or description of the Caller ID number.

Value Range
Max. 20 characters

Feature Guide References

3.2.1.10 Caller Name Announcement

PC Programming Manual 827

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
24.4 UM Configuration—[5-4] System Parameters—Parameters
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

24.4 UM Configuration—[5-4] System

Parameters—Parameters
Daily Hours Setting
Clock Format
Specifies the time format (12-hour or 24-hour).

Note
The selected time format (12-hour or 24-hour) affects the time format of reports as well as the time that
appears in e-mail notifications for new messages.

Value Range
12 H, 24 H

Morning Hours Start Time (HH:MM)

Specifies the starting time of the morning greeting.

Value Range
HH:MM (HH: Hour, MM: Minute)

Feature Guide References

3.2.1.12 Company Greeting

Afternoon Hours Start Time (HH:MM)

Specifies the starting time of the afternoon greeting.

Value Range
HH:MM (HH: Hour, MM: Minute)

Feature Guide References

3.2.1.12 Company Greeting

Evening Hours Start Time (HH:MM)

Specifies the starting time of the evening greeting.

Value Range
HH:MM (HH: Hour, MM: Minute)

Feature Guide References

3.2.1.12 Company Greeting

828 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 24.4 UM Configuration—[5-4] System Parameters—Parameters
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Prompt Setting
These settings are required when Multilingual Service is enabled.

Primary Language
Specifies the default language to be used when another language is not selected in the Multilingual Selection
Menu.

Value Range
Guidance No. 1–8

Feature Guide References

3.2.1.31 Multilingual Service
3.2.1.41 System Prompts

Language 1–5—Language (1–5)

Assigns a selection number (1–9) to each language. Callers use the numbers to select the desired languages
for their message prompts. This setting is required when either one or both of the following parameters are set
to "Selective":
a. Day, Night, Lunch, and Break Mode - Incoming Call Service Prompt
b. External Message Delivery Prompt Mode
For each selection of this setting, related items within "Language 1–5" can be set.

Value Range
Language 1–5

PC Programming Manual References

22.1 UM Configuration—[3-1] UM Extension / Trunk Service—Service Group Day, Night, Lunch, and Break
Mode - Prompt for No DTMF Input Callers
24.4 UM Configuration—[5-4] System Parameters—Parameters—External Message Delivery

Feature Guide References

3.2.1.31 Multilingual Service
3.2.1.41 System Prompts

Language 1–5—Language
Specifies the language for the current language selection number.

Value Range
None, Guidance No. 1–8

Feature Guide References

3.2.1.31 Multilingual Service
3.2.1.41 System Prompts

PC Programming Manual 829

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
24.4 UM Configuration—[5-4] System Parameters—Parameters
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Language 1–5—DTMF
Specifies the number to be input to select the language set for the current language selection number.

Value Range
None, 1–9

Feature Guide References

3.2.1.31 Multilingual Service
3.2.1.41 System Prompts

Selection Menu Wait Time (0-20 s)

Specifies the length of time that the system waits for the caller to select a language by pressing the appropriate
dial key. If this time period expires without the selection number being entered, the system uses the Primary
Language.

Value Range
0–20 s

Feature Guide References

3.2.1.41 System Prompts

Selection Menu Repeat Cycle (1-3 times)

Specifies the number of times the system will play the Multilingual Selection Menu.

Value Range
1–3

Feature Guide References

3.2.1.31 Multilingual Service

Delay Time After Connected Received for Incoming (0-10 s)

Specifies the length of time (in seconds) that the system waits after the line is connected for incoming calls
before playing the prompt.

Value Range
0–10 s

Feature Guide References

3.2.1.41 System Prompts

Delay Time After Connected Received for Outgoing (0-10 s)

Specifies the length of time (in seconds) that the system waits after the line is connected for outgoing calls
before playing the prompt.

830 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 24.4 UM Configuration—[5-4] System Parameters—Parameters
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Value Range
0–10 s

Feature Guide References

3.2.1.41 System Prompts

System Guidance—System Guidance

Specifies the parameters which vary depending on the language assigned as the System Guidance language.
For each selection of this setting, related items within "System Guidance 1–8" can be set.

Value Range
Guidance No. 1–8

PC Programming Manual References

24.4 UM Configuration—[5-4] System Parameters—Parameters—Prompt Setting— Primary Language

System Guidance—Select Language—Position of "AM/PM" in Time Stamp

Specifies the position of the "AM/PM" announcement.

Value Range
Before: the system announces "AM/PM" before the time, such as P.M. 3:42.
After: the system announces "AM/PM" after the time, such as 3:42 P.M.
24-h: the system announces the time in 24-h format, such as 15:42.

System Guidance—Select Language—"O’clock" Prompt

Specifies when and if "O’clock" is announced.

Value Range
When at :00: the system announces "O’clock" only on the hour, such "one o’clock".
Always: the system announces "O’clock" always.
None: No announcement

System Guidance—Select Language—Month/Day Prompt

Specifies the order of the month and day for date announcements.

Value Range
MM:DD: Month and Day
DD:MM: Day and Month

System Guidance—Select Language—# Announcement Mode

Specifies the way of announcement for the "#" character when "US-English" or "English (UK)" is selected as
System Guidance.

PC Programming Manual 831

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
24.4 UM Configuration—[5-4] System Parameters—Parameters
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Value Range
POUND, HASH

PBX Parameters
Specifies how the system will initiate and control call transfers, setup outgoing calls, and control message
waiting lamps on extensions.

PBX Environment—Operator Transfer Sequence (Up to 16 digits / [0-9 * # D R

F T X , ;])
Specifies the sequence for transferring calls to an operator’s extension.

Value Range
Max. 16 digits consisting of 0–9, , # and special codes
D: Disconnecting
F: Flash (Recall)
R: Ringback Tone Detection
T: Dial Tone Detection
, : Dial Pause (default 1 s)
; : Dial Pause (default 3 s)
X: Extension Dialling
0–9, , #: Dial Code

PBX Environment—Extension Transfer Sequence (Up to 16 digits / [0-9 * # D R

F T X , ;])
Specifies the sequence for transferring calls to any extension except an operator’s extension.

Value Range
Max. 16 digits consisting of 0–9, , # and special codes
D: Disconnecting
F: Flash (Recall)
R: Ringback Tone Detection
T: Dial Tone Detection
, : Dial Pause (default 1 s)
; : Dial Pause (default 3 s)
X: Extension Dialling
0–9, , #: Dial Code

PBX Environment—Alternate Extension Transfer Sequence (Up to 16 digits /

[0-9 * # D R F T X , ;])
Specifies the sequence for transferring calls to extensions in the Alternate Extension Group.

Value Range
Max. 16 digits consisting of 0–9, , # and special codes
D: Disconnecting
F: Flash (Recall)
R: Ringback Tone Detection
T: Dial Tone Detection

832 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 24.4 UM Configuration—[5-4] System Parameters—Parameters
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

, : Dial Pause (default 1 s)

; : Dial Pause (default 3 s)
X: Extension Dialling
0–9, , #: Dial Code

Feature Guide References

3.2.1.1 Alternate Extension Group

Dialling Parameters/MSW Notification

Dialling Parameters—Call Transfer No Answer Time (10-60 s)
Specifies the length of time that the system waits before retrieving the transferred call when there is no answer
at the destination extension.

Note
Make sure that the duration of Call Transfer No Answer Time is longer than the duration of Call Forwarding
No Answer Time at the PBX. Otherwise, the PBX may forward the call immediately to the extension’s
Intercept Routing destination according to PBX programming, rather than return the call to the system.

Value Range
10–60 s

PC Programming Manual References

12.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1] Extension—Wired Extension— FWD No Answer Time
12.2 PBX Configuration—[4-2] Extension—Portable Station— FWD No Answer Time

Dialling Parameters—Outgoing Call No Answer Time (10-90 s)

Specifies the length of time that the system waits before concluding that there is no answer at the outside
number called.

Value Range
10–90 s

Dialling Parameters—Pause Time for "," (100-9900 ms, *100 ms)

Specifies the pause time for "," used in call sequences.

Value Range
100–9900 ms, in units of 100 ms

Dialling Parameters—Pause Time for ";" (100-9900 ms, *100 ms)

Specifies the pause time for ";" used in call sequences.

Value Range
100–9900 ms, in units of 100 ms

PC Programming Manual 833

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
24.4 UM Configuration—[5-4] System Parameters—Parameters
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Message Waiting Notification—System Callback No. (Up to 32 digits)

Specifies a callback number to be displayed with text reports of messages waiting notifications. The system
callback number is displayed when the caller does not enter his or her telephone number when prompted by
the system.

Value Range
Max. 32 digits

Feature Guide References

3.2.1.30 Message Waiting Notification—Telephone Device

External Message Delivery

Determines how essential External Message Delivery features are carried out.

Retry Times (times)

Specifies the number of times the system will attempt to deliver an external message when the destination is
busy or does not answer.

Value Range
0–3 times (E/NE: 0–4 times, NZ: 0–5 times, C: 0–9 times, Taiwan/Malaysia: 0–2 times)

Feature Guide References

3.2.2.12 External Message Delivery Service

Busy Delay (min)

Specifies the length of time (in minutes) the system waits to try to deliver an external message again when the
destination is busy.

Value Range
1–60 min (Malaysia: 2–120 min)

Feature Guide References

3.2.2.12 External Message Delivery Service

No Answer Delay (min)

Specifies the length of time (in minutes) the system waits to try to deliver an external message again when the
destination is not answering.

Value Range
60–120 min

Feature Guide References

3.2.2.12 External Message Delivery Service

834 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 24.4 UM Configuration—[5-4] System Parameters—Parameters
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Outgoing Call UM Extensions

Specifies the Unified Messaging extensions for the External Message Delivery feature.

Value Range
UM port extension number

PC Programming Manual References

9.6 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—UM Port Property

Feature Guide References

3.2.2.12 External Message Delivery Service

Message Length (1-6 min)

Specifies the maximum length (in minutes) of messages recorded for the External Delivery Message.

Value Range
1–6 min

Feature Guide References

3.2.2.12 External Message Delivery Service

Max. Messages for Mailboxes (1-100 msgs)

Specifies the maximum number of External Delivery Messages that can be stored in one mailbox.

Value Range
1–100

Feature Guide References

3.2.2.12 External Message Delivery Service

System External Message Delivery Duration Time (1-9 min)

Specifies the maximum length of External Message Delivery calls. The timer begins counting when the called
party answers the call, and if the called party has not pressed the appropriate dial key to initiate message
playback, the system terminates the call when this timer expires.

Value Range
1–9 min

Feature Guide References

3.2.2.12 External Message Delivery Service

PC Programming Manual 835

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
24.4 UM Configuration—[5-4] System Parameters—Parameters
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Company Telephone No. (Up to 32 digits)

Specifies the company’s telephone number. When the recipient has failed to retrieve the sender’s message
because of he or she did not enter the correct password, the system announces the company’s telephone
number to the caller. The caller can later call the company for assistance or to speak to the message sender.

Value Range
Max. 32 digits

Intercom Paging Parameters

Unified Messaging Intercom Paging functions in conjunction with the Intercom Paging feature of the PBX. It
allows the system to page the called party (announce the caller’s name, line number, etc.) while the caller is
placed on hold. To utilise this feature, Intercom Paging must be available for the PBX, and the Unified
Messaging system must be properly programmed.

No Answer Time for Intercom Paging (1-30 s)

Specifies the length of time (in seconds) the system waits before concluding Intercom Paging when there is
no answer. The system will return to the caller if the paged party does not respond before this timer expires.

Value Range
1–30 s

Feature Guide References

3.2.1.23 Intercom Paging

Announcement Repeat Cycle (1-3 times)

Specifies the number of times the system announces the page.

Example:
"I have a call for (name)".

Value Range
1–3 times

Feature Guide References

3.2.1.23 Intercom Paging

Intercom Paging Retry (1-10 times)

Specifies the number of times to retry paging when the called subscriber has set Incomplete Call Handling
for No Answer/ Incomplete Call Handling for Busy to "Page the mailbox owner by intercom paging" and
the subscriber is busy or if there is no answer.

Value Range
1–10 times

836 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 24.4 UM Configuration—[5-4] System Parameters—Parameters
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

PC Programming Manual References

20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting— Incomplete Call Handling for No Answer
20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting— Incomplete Call Handling for Busy

Feature Guide References

3.2.1.23 Intercom Paging

Caller Recorded Name Announce Mode

Determines whether or not the system announces the caller’s name during paging. (In order for the name to
be announced, it must be recorded beforehand.)

Value Range
Disable, Enable

Feature Guide References

3.2.1.23 Intercom Paging

Fax Management
You can programme the system to automatically detect incoming fax calls and forward those calls to a fax
extension. You can specify a maximum of 2 fax extensions as the destination for faxes; if the main fax extension
is not available to receive a fax, the system will forward the fax call to the alternate fax extension.

Automatic Transfer of Incoming Fax Call

Specifies the detection and destination of incoming fax calls.

Note
The system can detect incoming fax signals during the first 30 seconds after it answers incoming calls.

Value Range
Disable, Transfer to Fax Extension

Main Fax Extension No. (1-8 digits)

Specifies the extension number of the main fax machine.

Value Range
1–8 digits

Alternate Fax Extension No. (1-8 digits)

Specifies the extension number of the alternate fax machine. When the main fax extension is busy or does not
answer within the time specified under Fax No Answer Time (5-60s) , the system forwards the fax call to
the alternate fax extension.

Value Range
1–8 digits

PC Programming Manual 837

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
24.4 UM Configuration—[5-4] System Parameters—Parameters
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Fax No Answer Time (5-60s)

Specifies the length of time (in seconds) that the system waits for the main or alternate fax extension to answer
a fax call before taking other action, such as notifying the Fax Manager that the fax could not be received.

Value Range
5–60 s

Fax Manager Mailbox No.

Specifies the mailbox number of the Fax Manager. The system will notify the Fax Manager of the status of fax
calls depending upon the settings of the Fax No Answer Coverage Mode and Fax Notification Mode
parameters.

Value Range
2–[the value set in Mailbox No. Max. Length (3-8)] digits

Fax No Answer Coverage Mode

Determines what action the system takes when an incoming fax call could not be answered by the main or
alternate fax extension. The system can announce to the Fax Manager the number of unanswered fax calls.
The number announced is the number of unanswered fax calls since the last time the system notified the Fax
Manager. This announcement is heard when the Fax Manager logs in to his or her mailbox.

Value Range
No: The system will not notify the Fax Manager when fax calls were not answered.
Mbx: The system will announce the number of unanswered fax calls to the Fax Manager when the Fax Manager
logs in to his or her mailbox.
Ext: The system will announce the number of unanswered fax calls to the Fax Manager by calling the Fax
Manager’s extension.

Fax Notification Mode

Determines what action the system takes when an incoming fax call is successfully received by the main or
alternate fax extension. The system can announce to the Fax Manager the number of received fax calls. The
number announced is the number of received fax calls since the last time the system notified the Fax Manager.

Value Range
No: The system will not notify the Fax Manager when fax calls are answered.
Mbx: The system will announce the number of successfully received fax calls to the Fax Manager when the
Fax Manager logs in to his or her mailbox.
Ext: The system will announce the number of successfully received fax calls to the Fax Manager by calling
the Fax Manager’s extension.

Disconnect Parameters
Maximum Silence Time (0-60 s)
Specifies the length of silence detected by the system before the system disconnects the call.

Value Range
0–60 s

838 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 24.4 UM Configuration—[5-4] System Parameters—Parameters
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Maximum Continuous Tone Time (0-60 s)

Specifies the length of time the system waits when a continuous tone is detected before it disconnects the call.

Value Range
0–60 s

Maximum Cyclic Tone Time (0-60 s)

Specifies the length of time the system waits when a cyclic tone is detected before it disconnects the call.

Value Range
0–60 s

Maximum Call Duration (0-60 min)

Specifies the maximum duration of calls. If the system detects no DTMF signals for the specified amount of
time, it terminates the call. Calls will not be terminated while playing or recording messages. If this setting is
set to "0", calls will not be terminated.

Value Range
0–60 min

Transfer to Outside
These parameters determine how the system will transfer calls to a trunk via the following features: Call
Transfer Service, Custom Service, Personal Custom Service, Caller ID Callback, Call-through Service.

Outside Transfer Sequence—Call Transfer to Outside Sequence (Up to 16

digits / [0-9 * # D F R T , ; N])
Specifies the sequence the system uses to transfer calls to trunks.

Value Range
Max. 16 digits consisting of 0–9, , # and special codes
D: Disconnecting
F: Flash (Recall)
R: Ringback Tone Detection
T: Dial Tone Detection
, : Dial Pause for 1 s (default)
; : Dial Pause for 3 s (default)
N: Telephone Number Dialling
0–9, , #: Dial Code

Feature Guide References

3.2.1.7 Call Transfer to Outside

PC Programming Manual 839

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
24.4 UM Configuration—[5-4] System Parameters—Parameters
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Outside Transfer Sequence—EFA Transfer Sequence (Up to 16 digits / [0-9 * #

D F R T , ; N A])
Specifies the sequence the system uses to transfer calls to trunks using EFA (External Feature Access). This
setting should match the settings of the PBX.

Value Range
Max. 16 digits consisting of 0–9, , # and special codes
D: Disconnecting
F: Flash (Recall)
R: Ringback Tone Detection
T: Dial Tone Detection
, : Dial Pause for 1 s (default)
; : Dial Pause for 3 s (default)
N: Telephone Number Dialling
A: Feature Access Code
0–9, , #: Dial Code

Outside Transfer Sequence—EFA Transfer Reconnect Sequence on Busy (Up

to 16 digits / [0-9 * # D F R T , ; N A])
Specifies the sequence the system uses to reconnect the line when the party transferred with EFA (External
Feature Access) is busy. This setting should match the settings of the PBX.

Value Range
Max. 16 digits consisting of 0–9, , # and special codes
D: Disconnecting
F: Flash (Recall)
R: Ringback Tone Detection
T: Dial Tone Detection
, : Dial Pause for 1 s (default)
; : Dial Pause for 3 s (default)
N: Telephone Number Dialling
A: Feature Access Code
0–9, , #: Dial Code

Outside Transfer Sequence—EFA Transfer Reconnect Sequence on No Answer

(Up to 16 digits / [0-9 * # D F R T , ; N A])
Specifies the sequence the system uses to reconnect the line when the party transferred with EFA (External
Feature Access) does not answer. This setting should match the settings of the PBX.

Value Range
Max. 16 digits consisting of 0–9, , # and special codes
D: Disconnecting
F: Flash (Recall)
R: Ringback Tone Detection
T: Dial Tone Detection
, : Dial Pause for 1 s (default)
; : Dial Pause for 3 s (default)
N: Telephone Number Dialling
A: Feature Access Code
0–9, , #: Dial Code

840 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 24.4 UM Configuration—[5-4] System Parameters—Parameters
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Outside Transfer Sequence—Call Transfer to Outside Answer Mode

Specifies the answering method the system uses to detect whether the destination party has answered the
transferred trunk call.

Value Range
Guidance: The system plays the following guidance before connecting the line to the destination party: "You
have a call. To answer the call, press [1]. Otherwise, press [2] and hang up." If the destination party presses
"1", he or she will be able to answer the transferred trunk call. The system continues playing this guidance for
the time specified in Dialling Parameters—Outgoing Call No Answer Time (10-90 s) in Dialling
Parameters/MSW Notification. If the transferred party does not answer the call within this time, the system
considers it as a No Answer call.
Analyze: The system monitors the status of the trunk, recognises that the destination party goes off-hook, and
connects the line.

Feature Guide References

3.2.1.7 Call Transfer to Outside

Trunk Group (1–64)—Trunk Group No.

Specifies a trunk group for making settings for EFA Transfer, Caller ID Callback, and Outside Line Access
Sequence for Caller ID Callback. Selecting different trunk groups from this drop-down list allows settings to be
made for each trunk group.

Value Range
1–64

Trunk Group (1–64)—EFA Transfer

Specifies whether or not the system uses EFA (External Feature Access) when transferring incoming trunk
calls to another trunk. If set to "Enable", the system transfers incoming trunk calls to another trunk according
to "EFA Transfer Sequence" specified in "Transfer to Outside". If set to "Disable", the system transfers incoming
trunks calls to another trunk according to Outside Transfer Sequence—Call Transfer to Outside
Sequence (Up to 16 digits / [0-9 * # D F R T , ; N]) specified in Transfer to Outside.

Value Range
Enable, Disable

Trunk Group (1–64)—Caller ID Callback

Specifies whether or not the system allows a subscriber to call back the party who left a message in his or her
mailbox by using the caller ID information sent from the PBX. This setting applies to the trunk number used
when the message with Caller ID information was left in his or her mailbox.

Value Range
Enable, Disable

Trunk Group (1–64)—Outside Line Access Sequence for Caller ID Callback (Up
to 16 digits / [0-9 * # D F R T , ; ])
Specifies the sequence of trunk access numbers for Caller ID Callback. This parameter is available when the
system executes Caller ID Callback without using EFA.

PC Programming Manual 841

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
24.4 UM Configuration—[5-4] System Parameters—Parameters
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Value Range
Max. 16 digits consisting of 0–9, , # and special codes
D: Disconnecting
F: Flash (Recall)
R: Ringback Tone Detection
T: Dial Tone Detection
, : Dial Pause for 1 s (default)
; : Dial Pause for 3 s (default)
0–9, , #: Dial Code

Number of Digits in Telephone Number (1-20)

Specifies the number of digits for local area telephone numbers. According to this parameter, telephone
numbers dialled by the system can be distinguished as either local calls or long distance calls.

Value Range
1–20

E-mail Option
E-mail Integration allows the system to send new message notification or to send recorded voice messages
as file attachments to subscribers via e-mail. The following settings must be made in order for the system to
use E-mail Integration features.

Mail Address (Up to 128 ASCII characters)

Specifies the mail address of the Unified Messaging system.

Value Range
Max. 128 characters

Feature Guide References

3.2.1.28 Message Waiting Notification—E-mail Device

Full Name (Up to 64 ASCII characters)

Specifies the full name that will appear in e-mail messages sent by the Unified Messaging system.

Value Range
Max. 64 characters

Feature Guide References

3.2.1.28 Message Waiting Notification—E-mail Device

Maximum Message Length (Selection)

Specifies whether voice messages sent as e-mail attachments will have a limit to their length.

842 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 24.4 UM Configuration—[5-4] System Parameters—Parameters
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Value Range
Unlimited, Other

Feature Guide References

3.2.1.28 Message Waiting Notification—E-mail Device

Maximum Message Length (Other) (1-30 min)

Specifies the maximum length of voice messages sent as e-mail attachments.

Note
If you attach a voice message that is longer than this setting, surplus parts of the message may be discarded
when sending the e-mail.

Value Range
1–30 min

Feature Guide References

3.2.1.28 Message Waiting Notification—E-mail Device

Message Client
Password Lockup Time (5-60 min)
Specifies the amount of time access will be locked after a password has been incorrectly entered 3 consecutive
times.

Value Range
5–60 min

Mailbox
Mailbox No. Max. Length (3-8)
Specifies the maximum allowed number of digits for a mailbox number.

Note
This setting cannot be changed to a smaller value if mailboxes exist with a number of digits greater than
that smaller value. Those mailboxes must be re-numbered or deleted before this setting can be changed
to a smaller value.

Value Range
3–8 digits

PC Programming Manual 843

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
24.4 UM Configuration—[5-4] System Parameters—Parameters
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

844 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Section 25
UM Configuration—[6] H/W Settings

This section serves as reference operating instructions

for the H/W Settings menu of the UM Configuration
menu of the Setup screen of Web Maintenance
Console.

PC Programming Manual 845

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
25.1 UM Configuration—[6] H/W Settings
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

25.1 UM Configuration—[6] H/W Settings

Global Parameters
Global parameters define the settings that affect integration with other PBX operations.

Maximum Time to Wait for Dial Tone (500-20000 ms, *100 ms)
Specifies the length of time that the system waits for dial tone detection.

Value Range
5–200 (´ 100 ms)

Delay After Dialling Before Onhook (0-250 s)

Specifies the length of time that the system waits for an answer when making an outside call. If no answer is
detected, the system disconnects the call.

Value Range
0–250 s

DTMF Cut Length (0-500 ms)

Specifies the length of time for DTMF to be deleted when it is detected while recording.

Value Range
0–500 ms

Minimum Message Length (0-9 s)

Specifies the minimum message recording length. Messages shorter than the specified minimum recording
length are discarded from the mailbox.

Value Range
0–9 s

846 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Section 26
UM Configuration—[7] System Security

This section serves as reference operating instructions

for the System Security menu of the UM Configuration
menu of the Setup screen of Web Maintenance
Console.

PC Programming Manual 847

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
26.1 UM Configuration—[7] System Security
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

26.1 UM Configuration—[7] System Security

Manager
Login Failures before Disconnection (1-99 times)
Specifies the number of times an invalid password can be entered, when the System Manager or Message
Manager tries to log in to the system using a telephone, before the call is disconnected.

Value Range
1–99 times

System Manager Access from Telephone

Enables or disables access to the Unified Messaging system from the System Manager’s telephone.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

Password for System Manager (Up to 16 numeric digits)

If "Enable" is selected in System Manager Access from Telephone, assign a numerical password here
for the System Manager to login to the system.

Value Range
Max. 16 digits

Feature Guide References

3.1.2.7 System Security

Password for System Manager (Message Client)

Specifies the password for the System Manager for accessing the Unified Messaging system from the
messaging client.

Note
This setting requires the installation of an Activation Key for Unified Messaging E-mail Notification
(KX-NSU2xx) for the number of users that will be accessing their UM mailbox using a client software
programme.

Value Range
4–16 characters (A–Z, a–z, 1–9)

Feature Guide References

3.1.2.7 System Security

Message Manager Access from Telephone

Enables or disables access to the system from the Message Manager’s telephone.

848 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 26.1 UM Configuration—[7] System Security
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Value Range
Disable, Enable

Feature Guide References

3.1.2.7 System Security

Password for Message Manager (Up to 16 numeric digits)

If "Enable" is selected in Message Manager Access from Telephone, assign a numerical password here
for the Message Manager to login to the system.

Value Range
Max. 16 digits

Feature Guide References

3.1.2.7 System Security

Password for Message Manager (Message Client)

Specifies the password for the Message Manager for accessing the Unified Messaging system from the
messaging client.

Note
This setting requires the installation of an Activation Key for Unified Messaging E-mail Notification
(KX-NSU2xx) for the number of users that will be accessing their UM mailbox using a client software
programme.

Value Range
4–16 characters (A–Z, a–z, 1–9)

Feature Guide References

3.1.2.7 System Security

Subscriber
Minimum Password Length (0-16 digits)
Specifies the minimum length (number of digits) of mailbox passwords.

Value Range
0–16

Enable Login Failure Disconnection

Specifies whether the system disconnects a call when the subscriber enters an invalid password n times.
(n=the value specified under Login Failures before Disconnection (1-99 times))

Value Range
Disable, Enable

PC Programming Manual 849

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
26.1 UM Configuration—[7] System Security
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Login Failures before Disconnection (1-99 times)

Specifies the number of times an invalid password can be entered before the system disconnects the call. In
order to use this feature, Enable Login Failure Disconnection must be set to "Enable".

Value Range
1–99 times

Default Password for New Mailboxes

Specifies whether the default password is assigned to new mailboxes automatically when they are created.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

Feature Guide References

3.1.2.7 System Security

Default Password—Fix digit (which length is minimum password length)

Select this option to specify a fixed password for all new mailboxes. The number of digits in the password must
be equal or greater than the value specified in Minimum Password Length (0-16 digits).

Value Range
Max. 16 digits

Default Password—Prefix (1 or 2 digits) + Mailbox No

Select this option to specify default mailbox passwords using a prefix pattern. The value entered here will be
combined with the mailbox number to become the default password. For example, if "55" is entered here, and
then mailbox 101 is created, its default password will be "55101". 1 digit or 2 digits can be used as the prefix.

Value Range
1 digit: 0–9
2 digits: 00–99

850 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Section 27
Network Service

This section serves as reference operating instructions

for the Network Service menu of the Setup screen of
Web Maintenance Console.

PC Programming Manual 851

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
27.1 Network Service—[1] IP Address/Ports
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

27.1 Network Service—[1] IP Address/Ports

Basic Settings
LAN Setting—DHCP Port Number
Specifies the port number of the DHCP client. This parameter is only available for entering values when Obtain
an IP address automatically is selected.

Value Range
68, 1024–65535

LAN Setting—Obtain an IP address automatically/Use the following IP address

Specifies whether to enable the DHCP server to assign IP address information automatically to the mother
board, or to enter the information manually.

Value Range
Obtain an IP address automatically, Use the following IP address

Feature Guide References

5.6.6 Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) Assignment

LAN Setting—IP Address

Specifies the IP address of the mother board. This parameter is only available for entering values when Use
the following IP address is selected.

Value Range
1.0.0.1–223.255.255.254

LAN Setting—MAC Address

Indicates the MAC address of the mother board (reference only).

Value Range
00:00:00:00:00:00–FF:FF:FF:FF:FF:FF

LAN Setting—Subnet Mask

Specifies the network mask address of the mother board. This parameter is only available for entering values
when Use the following IP address is selected.

Value Range
0–255.0–255.0–255.0–255 (except 0.0.0.0 and 255.255.255.255)

LAN Setting—Default Gateway

Specifies the IP address of the default gateway for the network. This parameter is only available for entering
values when Use the following IP address is selected.

852 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 27.1 Network Service—[1] IP Address/Ports
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Value Range
1.0.0.1–223.255.255.254

DNS Setting—Port Number

Specifies the port number of the DNS server. This parameter is only available for entering values when Obtain
DNS server address automatically is selected.

Value Range
53, 1024–65535

DNS Setting—Obtain DNS server address automatically/Use the following DNS

server address
Specifies whether to enable the DHCP server to assign DNS server address information automatically to the
mother board, or to enter the information manually.

Value Range
Obtain DNS server address automatically, Use the following DNS server address

Feature Guide References

5.6.6 Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) Assignment

DNS Setting—Preferred DNS IP Address

Specifies the preferred IP address for the DNS server. This parameter is only available for entering values
when Use the following DNS server address is selected.

Value Range
1.0.0.0–223.255.255.255

DNS Setting—Alternative DNS IP Address

Specifies the alternative IP address for the DNS server. This parameter is only available for entering values
when Use the following DNS server address is selected.

Value Range
1.0.0.0–223.255.255.255

DSP IP Setting—Obtain DSP IP address automatically/Use the following DSP IP

address
Specifies whether the DHCP server assigns IP address information automatically to the DSP card(s), or to
enter the information manually.

Value Range
Obtain DSP IP address automatically, Use the following DSP IP address

PC Programming Manual 853

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
27.1 Network Service—[1] IP Address/Ports
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

DSP IP Setting—DSP Card-1/DSP Card-2—IP Address

Specifies the IP address of the DSP card. This parameter is only available for entering values when Use the
following DSP IP address is selected.

Value Range
1.0.0.1–223.255.255.254

DSP IP Setting—DSP Card-1/DSP Card-2—MAC Address

Indicates the MAC address of the DSP card (reference only).

Value Range
00:00:00:00:00:00–FF:FF:FF:FF:FF:FF

Advanced Settings
LAN Port—Speed & Duplex
Specifies the connection mode of the main port. The connection is made in 100Mbps/half duplex when Auto
negotiation fails.

Value Range
Auto: Automatic mode selection
100M-Full: 100 Mbps/full duplex
100M-Half: 100 Mbps/half duplex
10M-Full: 10 Mbps/full duplex
10M-Half: 10 Mbps/half duplex

LAN Port—MDI/MDIX
Specifies the cable type connected to the LAN port.

Value Range
Auto, MDI, MDIX

Reference
The items displayed in this tab are the settings obtained from a DHCP server by the DHCP client of the PBX.
They are for reference only.

Assigned IP Address—IP Address

Indicates the assigned IP address of the mother board (reference only).

Assigned IP Address—MAC Address

Indicates the MAC address of the mother board (reference only).

Assigned IP Address—Subnet Mask

Indicates the network mask address of the mother board (reference only).

854 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 27.1 Network Service—[1] IP Address/Ports
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Assigned IP Address—Default Gateway

Indicates the assigned IP address of the default gateway for the network (reference only).

DSP Card-1/DSP Card-2—IP Address

Indicates the IP address assigned for an installed optional DSP card (reference only).

DSP Card-1/DSP Card-2—MAC Address

Indicates the MAC address of the DSP card (reference only).

DSP Card-1/DSP Card-2—Subnet Mask

Indicates the Subnet Mask address of the DSP card (reference only).

DSP Card-1/DSP Card-2—Default Gateway

Indicates the Default Gateway address of the DSP card (reference only).

PC Programming Manual 855

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
27.2.1 Network Service—[2-1] Server Feature—DHCP
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

27.2 Network Service—[2] Server Feature

27.2.1 Network Service—[2-1] Server Feature—DHCP

Settings for the DHCP Server can be programmed.

DHCP Server
DHCP Server
Specifies if the DHCP server functions of the PBX are enabled or not.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

Port number
Specifies the port number used for the DHCP server.

Value Range
67, 1024–65535

IP address auto assignment

Starting IP address
Specifies the starting IP address for the assignable range of IP addresses.

Value Range
1.0.0.0–223.255.255.255

Ending IP address
Specifies the ending IP address for the assignable range of IP addresses.

Value Range
1.0.0.0–223.255.255.255

Lease interval (h)

Specifies the duration in hours of the DHCP allocation lease. Setting "0" specifies an unlimited lease duration.

Value Range
1–168 (hours)

Auto assignment exclusions

Up to 16 IP Addresses can be specified that will not be automatically assigned.

Value Range
1.0.0.0–223.255.255.255

856 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 27.2.1 Network Service—[2-1] Server Feature—DHCP
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

IP Address Static Assignment

MAC Address
Specifies the MAC addresses of the MAC address/IP address pairs to be subject to static DHCP allocation.

Value Range
00:00:00:00:00:00–FF:FF:FF:FF:FF:FF

IP Address
Specifies the IP addresses of the MAC address/IP address pairs to be subject to static DHCP allocation.

Value Range
1.0.0.0–223.255.255.255

IP Address Assignment List

MAC Address
Specifies MAC addresses currently specified by the system.

Value Range
00:00:00:00:00:00–FF:FF:FF:FF:FF:FF

IP Address
Specifies IP addresses currently assigned by the system.

Value Range
1.0.0.0–223.255.255.255

Remaining lease time

Specifies the remaining lease time for the MAC address/IP address pair.

Value Range
1–85777 s

PC Programming Manual 857

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
27.2.2 Network Service—[2-2] Server Feature—FTP
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

27.2.2 Network Service—[2-2] Server Feature—FTP

Settings for FTP server connections can be programmed.

Connection Control—Control Port number

Specifies the port number for connecting to the PBX’s FTP server.

Value Range
21, 1024–65535

Data Transfer Port—Port number (Minimum)

Specifies the minimum port number for FTP data transfer.

Value Range
1024–65535

Data Transfer Port—Port number (Maximum)

Specifies the maximum port number for FTP data transfer.

Value Range
1024–65535

User Information—User Name

Specifies the user name for the PBX’s FTP server authentication.

Note
Be sure to change the user name from its initial, default value. Also, for security reasons, change the user
name regularly.

Value Range
Max. 24 characters (a–z, 0–9, [hyphen], [underscore])

Note
The first character must be a letter (a–z).

User Information—Password
Specifies the password for the PBX’s FTP server authentication.

Note
Be sure to change the password from its initial, default value. Also, for security reasons, change the
password regularly.

Value Range
Max. 24 characters (A–Z, a–z, 0–9, [hyphen], [underscore])

Note
The first character must be a letter or number.

858 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 27.2.3 Network Service—[2-4] Server Feature—HTTP
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

27.2.3 Network Service—[2-4] Server Feature—HTTP

HTTP server settings can be programmed.

HTTP (LAN)—Port number

Specifies the port number for HTTP connections using the LAN ports. This port is used for accessing the PBX
for Web Maintenance Console programming.

Value Range
80, 1024–65535

HTTP (LAN)—HTTPs server

Enables or disables HTTPs for connections to the LAN ports using the PBX’s HTTP server function.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

HTTPs (LAN) —Port number

Specifies the port number for HTTPs connections. This port is used for accessing the PBX for Web
Maintenance Console programming when using a TLS connection.

Value Range
443, 1024–65535

Automatic logout Timer (min)

Specifies the amount of time required to elapse before logging off an inactive connection from the HTTP server.

Value Range
5, 10, 30, 60´n (n=1–24) (minutes)

PC Programming Manual 859

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
27.2.4 Network Service—[2-5] Server Feature—NTP
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

27.2.4 Network Service—[2-5] Server Feature—NTP

NTP server settings for use with KX-UT series SIP phones can be programmed.

NTP server
Enables or disables NTP service with the PBX’s NTP server for connected KX-UT series SIP phones.
When this feature is enabled, the PBX will report to connected KX-UT series SIP phones the information
obtained from the SNTP server specified in 10.1.2 PBX Configuration—[2-1-2] System—Date &
Time—SNTP / Daylight Saving.
If this feature is disabled, connected KX-UT series SIP phones will use their individually programmed time
settings.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

PC Programming Manual References

10.1.2 PBX Configuration—[2-1-2] System—Date & Time—SNTP / Daylight Saving— SNTP—SNTP
Server—IP Address
10.1.2 PBX Configuration—[2-1-2] System—Date & Time—SNTP / Daylight Saving— SNTP—SNTP
Server—Port Number
10.1.2 PBX Configuration—[2-1-2] System—Date & Time—SNTP / Daylight Saving— SNTP—Time
Zone—Time Zone

860 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 27.2.5 Network Service—[2-6] Server Feature—SMTP
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

27.2.5 Network Service—[2-6] Server Feature—SMTP

Settings for SMTP for sending e-mail for PBX functions can be programmed.

Mail sending—Mail sender information name

Specifies the name to be used as the sender of the e-mails from the PBX.

Value Range
Max. 64 characters

Mail sending—Mail address

Specifies the sending e-mail address for messages sent from the PBX. This address, for example, could be
set as the e-mail address of an administrator.

Value Range
Max. 128 characters

SMTP server for relay—SMTP server address—IP Address

Specifies the IP address of the SMTP server to be used to send e-mails.

Value Range
1.0.0.0–223.255.255.255

SMTP server for relay—SMTP server address—Name

Specifies the host name of the SMTP server to be used to send e-mails.

Value Range
Max. 128 characters

SMTP server for relay—SMTP server Port number

Specifies the port number of the SMTP server to be used to send e-mails.

Value Range
25, 465, 587, 1024–65535

SMTP server for relay—SMTP over TLS

Specifies whether the SMTP server uses Transport Layer Security.

Value Range
Enable, Disable

Note
When Enable is selected, the encryption method used is STARTTLS.

PC Programming Manual 861

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
27.2.5 Network Service—[2-6] Server Feature—SMTP
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

SMTP Authentication—SMTP Authentication

Specifies whether authentication on the SMTP server is enabled.

Value Range
Enable, Disable

SMTP Authentication—User Name

Specifies the user name required to access the SMTP server.

Value Range
Max. 64 characters

SMTP Authentication—Password
Specifies the password required to access the SMTP server.

Value Range
Max. 64 characters

POP Before SMTP—POP before SMTP

Specifies whether POP before SMTP is enabled on the SMTP server.

Value Range
Enable, Disable

POP Before SMTP—POP server address—IP Address

Specifies the IP address of the POP server when POP before SMTP is enabled.

Value Range
1.0.0.0–223.255.255.255

POP Before SMTP—POP server address—Name

Specifies the host name of the POP server when POP before SMTP is enabled.

Value Range
Max. 128 characters

POP Before SMTP—POP server Port number

Specifies the port number of the POP server when POP before SMTP is enabled.

Value Range
110, 1024–65535

POP Before SMTP—User Name

Specifies the user name for the POP server when POP before SMTP is enabled.

862 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 27.2.5 Network Service—[2-6] Server Feature—SMTP
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Value Range
Max. 64 characters

POP Before SMTP—Password

Specifies the password for the POP server when POP before SMTP is enabled.

Value Range
Max. 64 characters

Mail Receiving—SMTP Authentication

Specifies if SMTP authentication is enabled for mail receiving.

Value Range
Enable, Disable

Mail Receiving—SMTP over TLS

Specifies whether mail receiving uses Transport Layer Security for SMTP.

Value Range
Enable, Disable

Mail Receiving—Receive Port number (SMTPs)

Specifies the receiving port number when using SMTPs.

Value Range
25, 465, 587, 1024–65535

Mail Receiving—Receive Port number (SMTP)

Specifies the receiving port number when using SMTP.

Value Range
25, 465, 587, 1024–65535

PC Programming Manual 863

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
27.2.6 Network Service—[2-7] Server Feature—IMAP4
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

27.2.6 Network Service—[2-7] Server Feature—IMAP4

Settings for IMAP4 server functions for the PBX can be programmed.

IMAP4—IMAP4 server
Specifies whether to enable the IMAP4 server functions of the PBX.

Value Range
Enable, Disable

IMAP4—Port number
Specifies a port number for the IMAP server. The default value is 143.

Value Range
143, 1024–65535

IMAP4 over TLS—IMAP4 over TLS

Specifies whether to enable TLS encryption for the IMAP4 server functions of the PBX.

Value Range
Enable, Disable

IMAP4 over TLS—Port number

Specifies a port number for the IMAP server when using TLS encryption. The default value is 993.

Value Range
993, 1024–65535

CAPABILITY command—Supporting IDLE response

Specifies whether the IMAP4 server will respond to IDLE commands sent by clients.

Value Range
Enable, Disable

Authenticated Connection Timeout—Authenticated Connection Timeout (min)

Specifies the amount of time of no activity that is required before an authenticated connection to the IMAP4
server will be disconnected.

Value Range
1, 2, 3, 5, 10, 15, 20, 25, 30, 60 (min)

864 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 27.3.1 Network Service—[3-1] Client Feature—FTP
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

27.3 Network Service—[3] Client Feature

27.3.1 Network Service—[3-1] Client Feature—FTP

FTP client connection settings can be programmed. Up to 5 FTP sites can be specified for connections.

Connection 1—Connection 5
Connection Name
Specifies the name of the connection to use for programming in other items.

Value Range
Max. 64 characters

IP Address
Specifies the IP address of the FTP site. Click the IP Address radio button when this is used.

Value Range
1.0.0.0–223.255.255.255

Name
Specifies the name of the FTP site. Click the Name radio button when this is used.

Value Range
FTP site name (max. 253 characters)

Server Port Number

Specifies the port number used to connect to the FTP site.

Value Range
21, 990, 1024–65535

User name
Specifies the user name required to log in to the FTP site.

Value Range
Max. 24 characters (a–z, 0–9, $, [hyphen], [underscore])

Note
• The first character must be a letter or number.
• $ may only be used as the final character.

Password
Specifies the password for the user name required to log in to the FTP site.

PC Programming Manual 865

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
27.3.1 Network Service—[3-1] Client Feature—FTP
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Value Range
Max. 24 characters (A–Z, a–z, 0–9, =, [hyphen], [underscore])

Note
The first character must be a letter, number, or =.

Protocol
Specifies the communication protocol for the FTP connection.

Value Range
FTP, FTPS (Explicit), FTPS (Implicit)

866 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 27.3.2 Network Service—[3-2] Client Feature—Syslog
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

27.3.2 Network Service—[3-2] Client Feature—Syslog

Settings can be programmed for a Syslog client connection.

Remote Syslog
Specifies whether an external Syslog server will be used with the PBX.

Value Range
Enable, Disable

Remote Syslog server—IP address / Host name

Specifies the IP address or host name of the external Syslog server.

Value Range
1.0.0.0–223.255.255.255 (IP address), Max. 253 characters (host name)

Port
Specifies the connection port for the remote Syslog server.

Value Range
514, 1024–65535

PC Programming Manual 867

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
27.3.3 Network Service—[3-3] Client Feature—SNMP Agent
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

27.3.3 Network Service—[3-3] Client Feature—SNMP Agent

Using SNMP (Simple Network Management Protocol), it is possible for a PC assigned as an SNMP manager
to manage and receive PBX system status information, such as alarm information and general system activity.
The related PBX system settings can be programmed.
This option is only available at Installer level.

SNMP agent
Enables the PBX to use its SNMP agent function.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

Feature Guide References

5.6.5 Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) System Monitor

SNMP version
Specifies the version of the SNMP protocol to use.

Value Range
SNMP V1, SNMP V2c

Feature Guide References

5.6.5 Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) System Monitor

SNMP manager port

Specifies the SNMP manager port.

Value Range
161, 1024–65535

Feature Guide References

5.6.5 Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) System Monitor

MIB info—SysContact
Specifies the name and contact information of the system administrator.

Value Range
Max. 255 characters

Feature Guide References

5.6.5 Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) System Monitor

868 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 27.3.3 Network Service—[3-3] Client Feature—SNMP Agent
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

MIB info—SysName
Specifies the administrative name for the system.

Value Range
Max. 255 characters

Feature Guide References

5.6.5 Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) System Monitor

MIB info—SysLocation
Specifies the physical location for the system.

Value Range
Max. 255 characters

Feature Guide References

5.6.5 Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) System Monitor

SNMP Manager #1 / SNMP Manager #2

It is possible to assign up to two PCs as SNMP managers. The settings related to SNMP manager activity can
be programmed for each SNMP manager, indicated as No.1 and No.2 on the screen.
This option is only available at Installer level.

IP address
Specifies the IP address of an SNMP manager. Click the button next to IP Address and enter the address.

Value Range
1.0.0.0–223.255.255.255

Feature Guide References

5.6.5 Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) System Monitor

Host name
Specifies the host name of an SNMP manager. Click the button next to Host Name and enter a name.

Value Range
Max. 253 characters (host name)

Feature Guide References

5.6.5 Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) System Monitor

PC Programming Manual 869

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
27.3.3 Network Service—[3-3] Client Feature—SNMP Agent
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Trap port
Specifies a port number used to send trap messages from the agent to an SNMP manager.

Value Range
162, 1024–65535

Feature Guide References

5.6.5 Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) System Monitor

Community name
Specifies a community name of an SNMP manager.

Value Range
Max. 32 characters

Feature Guide References

5.6.5 Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) System Monitor

TRAP filtering—Standard TRAP

Selects whether the PBX sends standard trap messages to an SNMP manager or not.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

Feature Guide References

5.6.5 Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) System Monitor

TRAP filtering—enterpriseSpecific (Major)

Selects whether the PBX sends Major Alarm trap messages to an SNMP manager or not.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

Feature Guide References

5.6.5 Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) System Monitor

TRAP filtering—enterpriseSpecific (Minor)

Selects whether the PBX sends Minor Alarm trap messages to an SNMP manager or not.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

870 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 27.3.3 Network Service—[3-3] Client Feature—SNMP Agent
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Feature Guide References

5.6.5 Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) System Monitor

PC Programming Manual 871

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
27.4.1 Network Service—[4-1] Other—Security
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

27.4 Network Service—[4] Other

27.4.1 Network Service—[4-1] Other—Security

Network security settings can be programmed.

ICMP Echo Reply—LAN Port

Specifies if the LAN port will send ICMP echo-replies to incoming ICMP echo-requests.

Value Range
Enable, Disable

ICMP Echo Reply—Log Output

Specifies if the PBX logs ICMP echo-replies.

Value Range
Enable, Disable

TLS—Encryption Suite
Specifies the method of encryption used for TLS.

Value Range
AES256-SHA, DES-CBC3-SHA, AES128-SHA, DES-CBC-SHA

872 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 27.4.2 Network Service—[4-2] Other—NAS
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

27.4.2 Network Service—[4-2] Other—NAS

NAS settings can be programmed.

NAS Status
Displays/changes the connection status of the NAS.

Value Range
Connected, Disconnected
To change the connection status of the NAS, perform the following:
• Click Disconnect to set the NAS to disconnect status.
• Click Connect to set the NAS to connect status.

NAS Setting—Protocol
Specifies the communication protocol for the NAS connection.

Value Range
NFS, CIFS

NAS Setting—NAS Address—IP Address

Specifies the IP address of the NAS.

Value Range
1.0.0.1–223.255.255.254

NAS Setting—NAS Address—Name

Specifies the Name of the NAS.

Value Range
Max. 253 characters

NAS Setting—Port No.

Specifies the NAS using port number.

Value Range
445, 1024–65535

NAS Setting—Mount directory

Specifies the NAS mount directory.

Value Range
Max. 128 characters (multi-byte characters allowed)

PC Programming Manual 873

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
27.4.2 Network Service—[4-2] Other—NAS
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

CIFS Setting—User Name

Specifies the NAS connection user name when NAS Setting—Protocol is set to CIFS.

Value Range
Max. 24 characters (multi-byte characters allowed)

CIFS Setting—Password
Specifies the NAS connection password when NAS Setting—Protocol is set to CIFS.

Value Range
Max. 24 characters (multi-byte characters allowed)

874 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Section 28
Appendix

PC Programming Manual 875

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
28.1.1 PFMPR Software File Version 004.1xxxx
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

28.1 Revision History

28.1.1 PFMPR Software File Version 004.1xxxx

New Contents
• 6.2 Tool—BRI Automatic Configuration
• 7.4.4 Utility—Monitor/Trace—CS Status Monitor—Air Sync Group
• 7.4.5 Utility—Monitor/Trace—CS Status Monitor—LAN Sync Group
• 7.4.9 Utility—Monitor/Trace—TCP Trace
• 7.5.5 Utility—Report—IP-CS Information
• 8.4.1 Users—ICDG Management—Group Monitor— Options—Highlighted Display Settings—Full Screen
Display (pixels)
• 8.4.3 Users—ICDG Management—ACD Scheduled Export
• 8.4.4 Users—ICDG Management—ACD Export History
• 9.17 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Card Property—V-IPCS— CS Repeater Mode
• 9.18 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property—V-IPCS—Main— Channel
expansion
• 9.18 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property—V-IPCS—Main— LAN Sync Group
No.
• 9.18 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property—V-IPCS—Option— Announce Mode
• 9.18 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property—V-IPCS—Remote Place
• 9.26 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - BRI Port
• 9.27 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - PRI Port—Main— Line Coding
• 9.27 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - PRI Port—Main— Frame Sequence
• 9.27 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - PRI Port—CO Setting— Loopback
Test started by Network
• 9.36 PBX Configuration—[1-3] Configuration—Option— New Card Installation—ISDN Standard Mode
for PRI23 Card
• 10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3] System—Timers & Counters— Call Pickup Group Monitor—LCD Display
Duration (s)
• 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System—Class of Service—COS Settings—CO & SMDR— CF
(MSN)
• 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options—Option 4— Display Information from Mobile
Extension (MEX)—when using Automatic Walking COS
• 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options—Option 5— ISDN Option—Calling Party Name
Presentation to PRI23
• 11.3.1 PBX Configuration—[3-3] Group—Call Pickup Group—All Setting— Main—Call Pickup Group
Monitor Feature
• 11.5.1 PBX Configuration—[3-5-1] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group
Settings—Miscellaneous— Status of FWD for Virtual PS
• 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 3— Call
Pickup Group Monitoring
• 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings—FWD / DND—
Remote FWD COS
• 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings—FWD / DND—
Remote FWD COS
• 18.4 PBX Configuration—[10-4] CO & Incoming Call—MSN Table
• 19.3.2 PBX Configuration—[11-3-2] Maintenance—CS Synchronisation—LAN Synchronisation
• 19.3.3 PBX Configuration—[11-3-3] Maintenance—CS Synchronisation—LAN Sync Group Setting

876 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 28.1.1 PFMPR Software File Version 004.1xxxx
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Changed Contents
• Introduction
• 1.2.1 Starting Web Maintenance Console
• 1.2.2 PC Programming Using Off-line Mode
• 2.1.2 Access Levels
• 2.3 Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ)
• 3.1 Home Screen
• 4.1.3 Status—Equipment Status—PS Information
• 5.1 System Control—Program Update
• 5.1.3 System Control—Program Update—Plug and Update
• 5.2.1 System Control—MOH—Install
• 6.4 Tool—Call Pickup for My Group
• 6.9 Tool—UM Data Backup
• 6.14 Tool—UT Option Setting
• 7.1.1 Utility—Diagnosis—Card Diagnosis
• 7.3.1 Utility—Log—Error Log
• 7.4.1 Utility—Monitor/Trace—ISDN/QSIG Protocol Trace
• 7.5.2 Utility—Report—IP Extension Statistical Information
• 7.6 Utility—Activation Key Installation
• 7.7.1 Utility—Email Notification—Alert
• 8.4.2 Users—ICDG Management—ACD Report
• 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot
• 9.2.2 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property—Site—Main
• 9.2.2 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property—Site—Port Number
• 9.2.2 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property—Site—Media Relay
• 9.2.3 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property—Slot Summary—Physical Shelf
• 9.3 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Activation Key Status
• 9.7 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property—Port Type View
• 9.10 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property—V-SIPGW—Main
• 9.10 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property—V-SIPGW—Register
• 9.10 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property—V-SIPGW—Option
• 9.10 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property—V-SIPGW—Called Party
• 9.10 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property—V-SIPGW—Voice/FAX
• 9.13 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Card Property—V-IPEXT
• 9.14 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property—V-IPEXT—Option
• 9.17 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Card Property—V-IPCS
• 9.18 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property—V-IPCS—Main
• 9.25 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Card Property - BRI type/PRI type
• 9.36 PBX Configuration—[1-3] Configuration—Option
• 9.37 PBX Configuration—[1-4] Configuration—Clock Priority
• 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main
• 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options—Option 1
• 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options—Option 2
• 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options—Option 3
• 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options—Option 9
• 11.5.3 PBX Configuration—[3-5-3] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Miscellaneous
• 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Main
• 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings—CLIP
• 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 8
• 12.1.4 PBX Configuration—[4-1-4] Extension—Wired Extension—Flexible Button

PC Programming Manual 877

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
28.1.2 PFMPR Software File Version 004.2xxxx
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

• 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 2

• 12.2.3 PBX Configuration—[4-2-3] Extension—Portable Station—Flexible Button
• 12.3 PBX Configuration—[4-3] Extension—DSS Console
• 17.2 PBX Configuration—[9-2] Private Network—Network Data Transmission
• 18.2 PBX Configuration—[10-2] CO & Incoming Call—DIL Table & Port Settings—DIL
• 18.2 PBX Configuration—[10-2] CO & Incoming Call—DIL Table & Port Settings—CLI for DIL
• 18.2 PBX Configuration—[10-2] CO & Incoming Call—DIL Table & Port Settings—DDI / DID / TIE / MSN
• 19.3 PBX Configuration—[11-3] Maintenance—CS Synchronisation
• 20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting—External MSG Delivery/Auto FWD/
Personal Custom Serv
• 21.1 UM Configuration—[2] Class of Service—Call Transfer
• 27.1 Network Service—[1] IP Address/Ports—Advanced Settings
• 27.2.2 Network Service—[2-2] Server Feature—FTP
• 27.2.5 Network Service—[2-6] Server Feature—SMTP

28.1.2 PFMPR Software File Version 004.2xxxx

New Contents
• 10.6.2 PBX Configuration—[2-6-2] System—Numbering Plan—Quick Dial
– Use Quick Dial for CO rerouting during "Break" Mode.
– Use quick dial for rerouting to public CO when TIE line does not work.
• 11.5.3 PBX Configuration—[3-5-3] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Miscellaneous—
Options—Call Log for Built-in ACD Report—ICD Group Unanswered Call Log

Changed Contents
• 5.3 System Control—System Reset
• 8.4.2 Users—ICDG Management—ACD Report—Call— Call—View Report
• 9.3 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Activation Key Status— Activated Feature
• 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Main—
Telephone Type
• 15.3 PBX Configuration—[7-3] TRS—Special Carrier

878 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Feature Programming References

PC Programming Manual 879

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
Feature Programming References
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

KX-UT Series SIP Phones

• 9.19 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Card Property—V-UTEXT
• 9.20 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property—V-UTEXT
• 12.1.4 PBX Configuration—[4-1-4] Extension—Wired Extension—Flexible Button

Feature Guide References

5.2.2.1 KX-UT Series SIP Phones

Absent Message
• 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main—Features— Absent Message Set /
Cancel
• 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 3—
Absent Message
• 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 3— Absent
Message
• 14.5 PBX Configuration—[6-5] Feature—Absent Message

Feature Guide References

2.20.2 Absent Message

Account Code Entry

• 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main—Features— Account Code Entry
• 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System—Class of Service—COS Settings—CO & SMDR— Account
Code Mode

Feature Guide References

2.5.4.3 Account Code Entry

Advice of Charge (AOC)

• 9.26 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - BRI Port—Supplementary
Service— COLP, CLIR, COLR, CNIP, CONP, CNIR, CONR, CF (Rerouting), CT, CCBS, AOC-D, AOC-E,
3PTY
• 9.27 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - PRI Port—Supplementary
Service— COLP, CLIR, COLR, CNIP, CONP, CNIR, CONR, CF (Rerouting), CT, CCBS, AOC-D, AOC-E,
E911, 3PTY

Feature Guide References

4.1.2.3 Advice of Charge (AOC)

Automatic Callback Busy (Camp-on)

• 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main—Features— Automatic Callback
Busy Cancel
• 10.6.3 PBX Configuration—[2-6-3] System—Numbering Plan—B/NA DND Call Feature— Automatic
Callback Busy

Feature Guide References

2.10.1 Automatic Callback Busy (Camp-on)

Automatic Extension Release

• 10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3] System—Timers & Counters—Dial / IRNA / Recall / Tone
– Dial—Extension First Digit (s)

880 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 Feature Programming References
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

– Dial—Extension Inter-digit (s)

– Tone Length—Reorder Tone for PT Handset (s)
– Tone Length—Reorder Tone for PT Hands-free (s)

Feature Guide References

2.5.2 Automatic Extension Release

Automatic Fax Transfer

• 10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3] System—Timers & Counters— DISA—Intercept Timer—Day (s), Lunch
(s), Break (s), Night (s)
• 13.3.2 PBX Configuration—[5-3-2] Optional Device—Voice Message—DISA Message— Fax Extension

Feature Guide References

2.16.2 Automatic Fax Transfer

Automatic Route Selection (ARS)

• 6.6 Tool—Import
– ARS - Leading Digit
– ARS - Except Code
– ARS - Routing Plan
• 6.7 Tool—Export
• 10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3] System—Timers & Counters—Dial / IRNA / Recall / Tone—
Dial—Extension Inter-digit (s)
• 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options—Option 3— Dial Tone—Dial Tone for ARS
• 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 1— ARS
Itemised Code
• 12.1.7 PBX Configuration—[4-1-7] Extension—Wired Extension—CLIP ID Table
• 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 1— ARS
Itemised Code
• 12.2.5 PBX Configuration—[4-2-5] Extension—Portable Station—CLIP ID Table
• 14.3 PBX Configuration—[6-3] Feature—Verification Code— Itemised Billing Code for ARS
• Section 16 PBX Configuration—[8] ARS
• 19.1 PBX Configuration—[11-1] Maintenance—Main—SMDR Options— Option—ARS Dial

Feature Guide References

2.8.1 Automatic Route Selection (ARS)

Automatic Setup
• 6.2 Tool—BRI Automatic Configuration
• 10.1.1 PBX Configuration—[2-1-1] System—Date & Time—Date & Time Setting
• 10.1.2 PBX Configuration—[2-1-2] System—Date & Time—SNTP / Daylight Saving— Automatic Time
Adjustment
• 10.1.2.1 PBX Configuration—[2-1-2] System—Date & Time—SNTP / Daylight Saving—Daylight Saving
• 27.2.4 Network Service—[2-5] Server Feature—NTP— NTP server

Feature Guide References

5.5.5 Automatic Setup

Background Music (BGM)

• 10.2 PBX Configuration—[2-2] System—Operator & BGM

PC Programming Manual 881

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
Feature Programming References
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

• 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main—Features

– External BGM On / Off
– BGM Set / Cancel
• 10.11.1 PBX Configuration—[2-11-1] System—Audio Gain—Paging/MOH
– Internal MOH—MOH1-2 (Music On Hold 1-2)
• 13.2 PBX Configuration—[5-2] Optional Device—External Pager

Feature Guide References

2.30.1 Background Music (BGM)

Budget Management
• 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 3—
Charge Limit
• 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 3—
Charge Limit
• 14.2 PBX Configuration—[6-2] Feature—Hotel & Charge—Charge— Charge Options—Action at Charge
Limit
• 14.3 PBX Configuration—[6-3] Feature—Verification Code— Budget Management

Feature Guide References

2.7.2 Budget Management

Built-in Simplified Voice Message (SVM)

• 6.16.1 Tool—SVM (Simplified Voice Message)—Delete All Recording
• 6.16.2 Tool—SVM (Simplified Voice Message)—Check Current Usage
• 10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3] System—Timers & Counters—Miscellaneous
– SVM—Recording Time (s)
– SVM—Dial Tone Continuous Time (s)
• 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main—Features— Simplified Voice
Message Access
• 11.1.1 PBX Configuration—[3-1-1] Group—Trunk Group—TRG Settings—Tone Detection
– DISA Tone Detection—Silence
– DISA Tone Detection—Continuous
– DISA Tone Detection—Cyclic
• 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 6—
Display Lock/SVM Lock
• 12.1.8 PBX Configuration—[4-1-8] Extension—Wired Extension—Simplified Voice Message
• 12.2.6 PBX Configuration—[4-2-6] Extension—Portable Station—Simplified Voice Message
• 13.3.3 PBX Configuration—[5-3-3] Optional Device—Voice Message—SVM

Feature Guide References

2.16.3 Built-in Simplified Voice Message (SVM)

CA (Communication Assistant)
• 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System—Class of Service—COS Settings—CA
• 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options—Option 6 (CTI)
→ Built-in Communication Assistant—System status retry interval timer
→ Built-in Communication Assistant—System status retry counter
• 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 9—
Built-in Communication Assistant

882 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 Feature Programming References
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

• 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 9— Built-in

Communication Assistant

Feature Guide References

2.26.2 CA (Communication Assistant)

Call Billing for Guest Room

• 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Main— Extension
PIN
• 14.2 PBX Configuration—[6-2] Feature—Hotel & Charge— Checkout Billing—LCD for "Telephone"
• 14.2 PBX Configuration—[6-2] Feature—Hotel & Charge—Charge
– Margin & Tax—Margin Rate for "Telephone" (%)
– Margin & Tax—Tax Rate for "Telephone" (%)
– Margin & Tax—Tax Rate for "Minibar" (%)
– Margin & Tax—Tax Rate for "Others" (%)

Feature Guide References

2.23.3 Call Billing for Guest Room

Call Charge Services

• 11.1.5 PBX Configuration—[3-1-5] Group—Trunk Group—Charge Rate
• 12.1.4 PBX Configuration—[4-1-4] Extension—Wired Extension—Flexible Button— Type
• 12.2.3 PBX Configuration—[4-2-3] Extension—Portable Station—Flexible Button— Type
• 14.2 PBX Configuration—[6-2] Feature—Hotel & Charge—Charge
– Margin & Tax—Margin Rate for "Telephone" (%)
– Margin & Tax—Tax Rate for "Telephone" (%)
– Charge Options—Digits After Decimal Point
– Charge Options—Currency
– Charge Options—Currency Display Position
– Charge Options—Action at Charge Limit
– Charge Options—Meter Start on Answer Detection

Feature Guide References

2.22.3 Call Charge Services

Call Distribution Port Group

• 9.11.2 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Shelf Property—V-IPGW—Hunt Pattern—Hunt
Pattern 1–16— Leading Number
• 9.11.2 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Shelf Property—V-IPGW—Hunt Pattern—Hunt
Pattern 1–16— Call Distribution Port Group—1st–16th
• 9.12 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property—V-IPGW— Call Distribution Port
Group

Feature Guide References

4.3.2.3 Call Distribution Port Group

Call Forwarding (CF)—by ISDN (P-MP)

• 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main—Features— ISDN-FWD (MSN)
Set / Cancel / Confirm
• 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System—Class of Service—COS Settings—CO & SMDR— CF
(MSN)

PC Programming Manual 883

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
Feature Programming References
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Feature Guide References

4.1.2.4 Call Forwarding (CF)—by ISDN (P-MP)

Call Forwarding (CF)—by ISDN (P-P)

• 9.26 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - BRI Port—Supplementary
Service— COLP, CLIR, COLR, CNIP, CONP, CNIR, CONR, CF (Rerouting), CT, CCBS, AOC-D, AOC-E,
3PTY
• 9.27 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - PRI Port—Supplementary
Service— COLP, CLIR, COLR, CNIP, CONP, CNIR, CONR, CF (Rerouting), CT, CCBS, AOC-D, AOC-E,
E911, 3PTY
• 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main—Features— ISDN-FWD (MSN)
Set / Cancel / Confirm
• 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System—Class of Service—COS Settings—CO & SMDR— CF
(MSN)

Feature Guide References

4.1.2.5 Call Forwarding (CF)—by ISDN (P-P)

Call Forwarding (CF)—by QSIG

• 9.26 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - BRI Port—Supplementary
Service— COLP, CLIR, COLR, CNIP, CONP, CNIR, CONR, CF (Rerouting), CT, CCBS, AOC-D, AOC-E,
3PTY
• 9.27 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - PRI Port—Supplementary
Service— COLP, CLIR, COLR, CNIP, CONP, CNIR, CONR, CF (Rerouting), CT, CCBS, AOC-D, AOC-E,
E911, 3PTY

Feature Guide References

4.3.4.3 Call Forwarding (CF)—by QSIG

Call Forwarding (FWD)

• 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main—Features— FWD No Answer
Timer Set
• 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System—Class of Service—COS Settings
– CO & SMDR— Call Forward to CO
– Manager— Group Forward Set
– Optional Device & Other Extensions— Remote Operation by Other Extension
• 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options—Option 1— PT Fwd / DND—Extension Status
of Mobile Integration (FWD NA to CO)
• 11.1.1 PBX Configuration—[3-1-1] Group—Trunk Group—TRG Settings—Main
– CO-CO Duration Time (*60s)
– Extension-CO Duration Time (*60s)
• 11.5.1 PBX Configuration—[3-5-1] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings—Group
Log / Group FWD
• 11.5.3 PBX Configuration—[3-5-3] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Miscellaneous—
Options—2nd line LCD display information for ICD Group redirected call
• 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings—FWD / DND
• 12.1.2 PBX Configuration—[4-1-2] Extension—Wired Extension—FWD/DND
• 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings—FWD / DND
• 12.2.2 PBX Configuration—[4-2-2] Extension—Portable Station—FWD/DND

884 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 Feature Programming References
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Feature Guide References

2.3.2 Call Forwarding (FWD)

Call Hold
• 10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3] System—Timers & Counters—Dial / IRNA / Recall / Tone
– Recall—Hold Recall (s)
– Recall—Disconnect after Recall (x60s)
• 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main—Features
– Call Hold / Call Hold Retrieve
– Call Hold Retrieve : Specified with a Holding Extension Number
– Hold Retrieve : Specified with a Held CO Line Number
• 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options
– Option 1— PT Operation—Automatic Hold by ICM / CO / ICD Group Key
– Option 1— PT Operation—Hold key mode
– Option 5— SLT—SLT Hold Mode

Feature Guide References

2.13.1 Call Hold

Call Hold (HOLD)—by ISDN

• 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main—Features— ISDN Hold
• 12.1.4 PBX Configuration—[4-1-4] Extension—Wired Extension—Flexible Button— Type
• 12.2.3 PBX Configuration—[4-2-3] Extension—Portable Station—Flexible Button— Type

Feature Guide References

4.1.2.6 Call Hold (HOLD)—by ISDN

Call Monitor
• 10.6.3 PBX Configuration—[2-6-3] System—Numbering Plan—B/NA DND Call Feature— Call Monitor
• 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System—Class of Service—COS Settings—Executive— Call Monitor
• 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings
– Option 2— Data Mode
– Option 3— Executive Override Deny
• 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 3—
Executive Override Deny

Feature Guide References

2.10.3 Call Monitor

Call Park
• 10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3] System—Timers & Counters
– Recall—Call Park Recall (s)
– Recall—Disconnect after Recall (x60s)
• 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main—Features— Call Park / Call Park
Retrieve
• 12.1.4 PBX Configuration—[4-1-4] Extension—Wired Extension—Flexible Button
– Type
– Parameter Selection (for Call Park)
– Optional Parameter (Ringing Tone Type Number) (for Call Park)
• 12.2.3 PBX Configuration—[4-2-3] Extension—Portable Station—Flexible Button

PC Programming Manual 885

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
Feature Programming References
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

– Type
– Parameter Selection (for Call Park)
– Optional Parameter (or Ringing Tone Type Number) (for Call Park)

Feature Guide References

2.13.2 Call Park

Call Pickup
• 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main—Features
– Group Call Pickup
– Directed Call Pickup
– Call Pickup Deny Set / Cancel
• 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options—Option 4
• 11.3 PBX Configuration—[3-3] Group—Call Pickup Group
• 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 3— Call
Pickup Deny
• 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 3— Call
Pickup Deny

Feature Guide References

2.4.3 Call Pickup

Call Transfer
• 10.2 PBX Configuration—[2-2] System—Operator & BGM— BGM and Music on Hold—Sound on
Transfer
• 10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3] System—Timers & Counters—Dial / IRNA / Recall / Tone—
Recall—Transfer Recall (s)
• 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System—Class of Service—COS Settings
– CO & SMDR— Transfer to CO
– Assistant— Transfer to busy Extension w/o BSS Operation
• 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options—Option 4— DSS Key—Automatic Transfer
for Extension Call
• 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 1—
Transfer Recall Destination
• 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 1—
Transfer Recall Destination

Feature Guide References

2.12.1 Call Transfer

Call Transfer (CT)—by ISDN

• 9.26 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - BRI Port—Supplementary
Service— COLP, CLIR, COLR, CNIP, CONP, CNIR, CONR, CF (Rerouting), CT, CCBS, AOC-D, AOC-E,
3PTY
• 9.27 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - PRI Port—Supplementary
Service— COLP, CLIR, COLR, CNIP, CONP, CNIR, CONR, CF (Rerouting), CT, CCBS, AOC-D, AOC-E,
E911, 3PTY

Feature Guide References

4.1.2.7 Call Transfer (CT)—by ISDN

886 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 Feature Programming References
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Call Transfer (CT)—by QSIG

• 9.26 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - BRI Port—Supplementary
Service— COLP, CLIR, COLR, CNIP, CONP, CNIR, CONR, CF (Rerouting), CT, CCBS, AOC-D, AOC-E,
3PTY
• 9.27 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - PRI Port—Supplementary
Service— COLP, CLIR, COLR, CNIP, CONP, CNIR, CONR, CF (Rerouting), CT, CCBS, AOC-D, AOC-E,
E911, 3PTY

Feature Guide References

4.3.4.4 Call Transfer (CT)—by QSIG

Call Waiting
• 9.23 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Card Property - LCO type— Caller ID—Caller ID
Signalling
• 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main—Features
– Manual Call Waiting for Extension Call
– Automatic Call Waiting
• 10.6.3 PBX Configuration—[2-6-3] System—Numbering Plan—B/NA DND Call Feature
– BSS / OHCA / Whisper OHCA / DND Override
– BSS / OHCA / Whisper OHCA / DND Override-2
• 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options—Option 5— Call Waiting—Automatic Call
Waiting for Extension Call
• 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings
– Option 2— Manual C. Waiting for Extension Call
– Option 2— Automatic C. Waiting
– Option 4— Call Waiting Tone Type
• 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings
– Option 2— Manual C. Waiting for Extension Call
– Option 2— Automatic C. Waiting
– Option 4— Call Waiting Tone Type

Feature Guide References

2.1.3.3 Call Waiting

Call Waiting Tone

• 10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3] System—Timers & Counters—Miscellaneous— Caller ID—Visual Caller
ID Display (s)
• 10.6.3 PBX Configuration—[2-6-3] System—Numbering Plan—B/NA DND Call Feature
– BSS / OHCA / Whisper OHCA / DND Override
– BSS / OHCA / Whisper OHCA / DND Override-2
• 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings
– Option 2— Manual C. Waiting for Extension Call
– Option 2— Automatic C. Waiting
– Option 4— Call Waiting Tone Type
• 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings
– Option 2— Manual C. Waiting for Extension Call
– Option 2— Automatic C. Waiting
– Option 4— Call Waiting Tone Type

Feature Guide References

2.10.4.2 Call Waiting Tone

PC Programming Manual 887

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
Feature Programming References
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Caller ID
• 10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3] System—Timers & Counters—Miscellaneous
– Caller ID—Waiting to receive (s)
– Caller ID—Visual Caller ID Display (s)
• 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options—Option 4— Private Network—Public Call
through Private Network—Minimum Public Caller ID Digits
• 10.10 PBX Configuration—[2-10] System—Extension CID Settings
• 11.1.1 PBX Configuration—[3-1-1] Group—Trunk Group—TRG Settings—Main— Caller ID Modification
Table
• 11.1.3 PBX Configuration—[3-1-3] Group—Trunk Group—Caller ID Modification
• 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 8
– Extension Caller ID Sending
– Incoming Call Wait Timer for Extension Caller ID
• 14.1 PBX Configuration—[6-1] Feature—System Speed Dial

Feature Guide References

2.19.1 Caller ID

Calling Line Identification (CLI) Distribution

• 14.1 PBX Configuration—[6-1] Feature—System Speed Dial
– Name
– CO Line Access Number + Telephone Number
– CLI Destination
• 18.2 PBX Configuration—[10-2] CO & Incoming Call—DIL Table & Port Settings—CLI for DIL— CLI
Ring for DIL—Day, Lunch, Break, Night
• 18.3 PBX Configuration—[10-3] CO & Incoming Call—DDI / DID Table— CLI Ring for DDI/DID—Day,
Lunch, Break, Night
• 18.4 PBX Configuration—[10-4] CO & Incoming Call—MSN Table— CLI Ring for MSN—Day, Lunch,
Break, Night

Feature Guide References

2.1.1.5 Calling Line Identification (CLI) Distribution

Calling Party Control (CPC) Signal Detection

• 9.24 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - LCO Port— CPC Signal Detection
Time—Outgoing, Incoming

Feature Guide References

2.11.9 Calling Party Control (CPC) Signal Detection

Calling/Connected Line Identification Presentation (CLIP/COLP)

• 9.26 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - BRI Port
– ISDN CO— Subscriber Number
– Supplementary Service— COLP, CLIR, COLR, CNIP, CONP, CNIR, CONR, CF (Rerouting), CT,
CCBS, AOC-D, AOC-E, 3PTY
• 9.27 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - PRI Port
– CO Setting— Subscriber Number
– Supplementary Service— COLP, CLIR, COLR, CNIP, CONP, CNIR, CONR, CF (Rerouting), CT,
CCBS, AOC-D, AOC-E, E911, 3PTY
• 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main—Features
– COLR Set / Cancel

888 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 Feature Programming References
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

– CLIR Set / Cancel

– Switch CLIP of CO Line / Extension
• 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options—Option 4
– Send CLIP of CO Caller—when call is transferred to CO (CLIP of Held Party)
– Send CLIP of CO Caller—when call is forwarded to CO
– Send CLIP of Extension Caller—when call is forwarded to CO
• 11.5.1 PBX Configuration—[3-5-1] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings—Main—
CLIP on ICD Group Button
• 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings
– Main— Extension Number
– CLIP— CLIP ID
– CLIP— CLIP on Extension/CO
– CLIP— CLIR
– CLIP— COLR
• 12.1.4 PBX Configuration—[4-1-4] Extension—Wired Extension—Flexible Button— Type
• 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings
– CLIP— CLIP ID
– CLIP— CLIP on Extension/CO
– CLIP— CLIR
– CLIP— COLR
• 12.2.3 PBX Configuration—[4-2-3] Extension—Portable Station—Flexible Button— Type

Feature Guide References

4.1.2.2 Calling/Connected Line Identification Presentation (CLIP/COLP)

Calling/Connected Line Identification Presentation (CLIP/COLP) and Calling/Connected Name

Identification Presentation (CNIP/CONP)—by QSIG
• 9.26 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - BRI Port—Supplementary
Service— COLP, CLIR, COLR, CNIP, CONP, CNIR, CONR, CF (Rerouting), CT, CCBS, AOC-D, AOC-E,
3PTY
• 9.27 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - PRI Port—Supplementary
Service— COLP, CLIR, COLR, CNIP, CONP, CNIR, CONR, CF (Rerouting), CT, CCBS, AOC-D, AOC-E,
E911, 3PTY
• 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main—Features
– COLR Set / Cancel
– CLIR Set / Cancel
• 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Main
– Extension Number
– Extension Name
• 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings—Main
– Extension Number
– Extension Name

Feature Guide References

4.3.4.2 Calling/Connected Line Identification Presentation (CLIP/COLP) and Calling/Connected Name
Identification Presentation (CNIP/CONP)—by QSIG

Centralised Voice Mail

• 9.36 PBX Configuration—[1-3] Configuration—Option— New Card Installation—ISDN Standard Mode
for PRI23 Card
• 17.1 PBX Configuration—[9-1] Private Network—TIE Table—Enhanced QSIG

PC Programming Manual 889

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
Feature Programming References
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

• 17.2 PBX Configuration—[9-2] Private Network—Network Data Transmission

– Network MSW Data Transmission for Centralised VM Feature—Data Re-transmission : Repeat
Counter
– Network MSW Data Transmission for Centralised VM Feature—Data Re-transmission : Repeat
Timer
• 19.1 PBX Configuration—[11-1] Maintenance—Main—Maintenance
– Error Log for Centralised VM—Network MSW Transmission (Counter)
– Error Log for Centralised VM—Network MSW Transmission (Buffer)

Feature Guide References

4.3.5.2 Centralised Voice Mail

Class of Service (COS)

• 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System—Class of Service—COS Settings
• 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Main— COS
• 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings—Main— COS

Feature Guide References

5.1.1 Class of Service (COS)

Common Extension Numbering for 2 PBXs

• 17.1 PBX Configuration—[9-1] Private Network—TIE Table

Feature Guide References

4.3.1.4 Common Extension Numbering for 2 PBXs

Common Extension Numbering for Multiple PBXs

• 17.1 PBX Configuration—[9-1] Private Network—TIE Table
• 18.5 PBX Configuration—[10-5] CO & Incoming Call—Miscellaneous— Intercept—Routing to Operator
- No Destination (Destination is not programmed.)

Feature Guide References

4.3.2.2 Common Extension Numbering for Multiple PBXs

Completion of Calls to Busy Subscriber (CCBS)

• 9.26 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - BRI Port—Supplementary
Service— COLP, CLIR, COLR, CNIP, CONP, CNIR, CONR, CF (Rerouting), CT, CCBS, AOC-D, AOC-E,
3PTY
• 9.26 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - BRI Port—CCBS Option
– CCBS Type
– CCBS Delete Digits
• 9.27 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - PRI Port—Supplementary Service
– COLP, CLIR, COLR, CNIP, CONP, CNIR, CONR, CF (Rerouting), CT, CCBS, AOC-D, AOC-E,
E911, 3PTY
– CCBS Type
– CCBS Delete Digits

Feature Guide References

4.1.2.10 Completion of Calls to Busy Subscriber (CCBS)

890 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 Feature Programming References
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Completion of Calls to Busy Subscriber (CCBS)—by QSIG

• 9.26 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - BRI Port—Supplementary
Service— COLP, CLIR, COLR, CNIP, CONP, CNIR, CONR, CF (Rerouting), CT, CCBS, AOC-D, AOC-E,
3PTY
• 9.27 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - PRI Port—Supplementary
Service— COLP, CLIR, COLR, CNIP, CONP, CNIR, CONR, CF (Rerouting), CT, CCBS, AOC-D, AOC-E,
E911, 3PTY

Feature Guide References

4.3.4.5 Completion of Calls to Busy Subscriber (CCBS)—by QSIG

Computer Telephony Integration (CTI)

• 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main—Features— Dial Information (CTI)
• 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options—Option 6 (CTI)

Feature Guide References

2.26.1 Computer Telephony Integration (CTI)

Conference
• 10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3] System—Timers & Counters—DISA / Door / Reminder / U. Conf
– Unattended Conference—Recall Start Timer (x60s)
– Unattended Conference—Warning Tone Start Timer (s)
– Unattended Conference—Disconnect Timer (s)
• 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System—Class of Service—COS Settings—CO & SMDR— Transfer
to CO
• 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options—Option 2— CO - CO Call Limitation—After
Conference
• 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options—Option 3
– Confirmation Tone—Tone 4-1 : Start Conference
– Confirmation Tone—Tone 4-2 : Finish Conference
– Echo Cancel—Conference
• 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options—Option 8— Conference Group—Maximum
Number of Speakers During a Conference Group Call
• 12.1.4 PBX Configuration—[4-1-4] Extension—Wired Extension—Flexible Button— Type
• 12.2.3 PBX Configuration—[4-2-3] Extension—Portable Station—Flexible Button— Type

Feature Guide References

2.14.2 Conference

Conference Group Call

• 10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3] System—Timers & Counters—Miscellaneous— Conference Group
Call—Ring Duration (s)
• 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main—Features— Conference Group
Call Operation
• 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System—Class of Service—COS Settings—Miscellaneous—
Conference Group Call Operation
• 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options—Option 8— Conference Group—Maximum
Number of Speakers During a Conference Group Call
• 11.9 PBX Configuration—[3-9] Group—Conference Group
• 11.9.1 PBX Configuration—[3-9] Group—Conference Group—Member List

PC Programming Manual 891

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
Feature Programming References
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Feature Guide References

2.15.1 Conference Group Call

Confirmation Tone
• 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options—Option 3
– Confirmation Tone—Tone 1 : Called by Voice
– Confirmation Tone—Tone 2 : Paged / Automatic Answer
– Confirmation Tone—Tone 3-1 : Start Talking after Making Call / Call from DOORPHONE
– Confirmation Tone—Tone 3-2 : Start Talking after Answering Call
– Confirmation Tone—Tone 4-1 : Start Conference
– Confirmation Tone—Tone 4-2 : Finish Conference
– Confirmation Tone—Tone 5 : Hold

Feature Guide References

2.25.2 Confirmation Tone

Data Line Security

• 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main—Features— Data Line Security
Set / Cancel
• 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 2— Data
Mode

Feature Guide References

2.11.5 Data Line Security

Dial Tone
• 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options—Option 3
– Dial Tone—Distinctive Dial Tone
– Dial Tone—Dial Tone for Extension
– Dial Tone—Dial Tone for ARS

Feature Guide References

2.25.1 Dial Tone

Dial Tone Transfer

• 12.1.4 PBX Configuration—[4-1-4] Extension—Wired Extension—Flexible Button
– Type
– Parameter Selection (for TRS Level Change)
• 12.2.3 PBX Configuration—[4-2-3] Extension—Portable Station—Flexible Button
– Type
– Parameter Selection (for TRS Level Change)

Feature Guide References

2.7.4 Dial Tone Transfer

Dial Type Selection

• 9.24 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - LCO Port
– Dialling Mode
– DTMF Width
– Pulse Speed

892 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 Feature Programming References
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Feature Guide References

2.5.4.4 Dial Type Selection

Direct In Line (DIL)

• 18.2 PBX Configuration—[10-2] CO & Incoming Call—DIL Table & Port Settings—DIL
– DIL Destination—Day, Lunch, Break, Night
– Tenant Number
– UM Service Group No.
– VM Trunk Group No.

Feature Guide References

2.1.1.2 Direct In Line (DIL)

Direct Inward Dialling (DID)/Direct Dialling In (DDI)

• 10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3] System—Timers & Counters—Miscellaneous— Incoming Call Inter-digit
Timer—DDI / DID (s)
• 18.2 PBX Configuration—[10-2] CO & Incoming Call—DIL Table & Port Settings—DDI / DID / TIE / MSN
– Distribution Method
– DDI/DID/TIE/MSN—Remove Digit
– DDI/DID/TIE/MSN—Additional Dial
• 18.3 PBX Configuration—[10-3] CO & Incoming Call—DDI / DID Table

Feature Guide References

2.1.1.3 Direct Inward Dialling (DID)/Direct Dialling In (DDI)

Direct Inward System Access (DISA)

• 10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3] System—Timers & Counters—DISA / Door / Reminder / U. Conf
– DISA—Delayed Answer Timer (s)
– DISA—Mute & OGM Start Timer after answering (s)
– DISA—No Dial Intercept Timer (s)
– DISA—2nd Dial Timer for AA (s)
– DISA—Intercept Timer—Day (s), Lunch (s), Break (s), Night (s)
– DISA—Disconnect Timer after Intercept (s)
– DISA—CO-to-CO Call Prolong Counter
– DISA—CO-to-CO Call Prolong Time (x60s)
– DISA—Progress Tone Continuation Time before Recording Message (s)
– DISA—Reorder Tone Duration (s)
• 10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3] System—Timers & Counters—Miscellaneous— Extension PIN—Lock
Counter
• 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System—Class of Service—COS Settings—Optional Device & Other
Extensions— Accept the Call from DISA
• 11.1.1 PBX Configuration—[3-1-1] Group—Trunk Group—TRG Settings—Tone Detection
– DISA Tone Detection—Silence
– DISA Tone Detection—Continuous
– DISA Tone Detection—Cyclic
• 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Intercept
Destination— Intercept Destination—When called party does not answer—Day, Lunch, Break, Night
• 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings—Intercept
Destination— Intercept Destination—When called party does not answer—Day, Lunch, Break, Night
• 13.3.1 PBX Configuration—[5-3-1] Optional Device—Voice Message—DISA System

PC Programming Manual 893

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
Feature Programming References
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

• 13.3.2 PBX Configuration—[5-3-2] Optional Device—Voice Message—DISA Message

Feature Guide References

2.16.1 Direct Inward System Access (DISA)

Direct SIP Connection

• 9.2.2 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property—Site
• 9.8 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Shelf Property—V-SIPGW
• 9.10 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property—V-SIPGW

Feature Guide References

4.1.1.2 Direct SIP Connection

Display Information
• 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options—Option 5— PT Feature Access—No. 1–8
• 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 5
– Display Language
– Incoming Call Display
– Automatic LCD Switch when Start Talking
• 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 5
– Display Language
– Incoming Call Display
– Automatic LCD Switch when Start Talking
• 14.2 PBX Configuration—[6-2] Feature—Hotel & Charge—Charge
– Charge Options—Digits After Decimal Point
– Charge Options—Currency
– Charge Options—Currency Display Position
• 18.1 PBX Configuration—[10-1] CO & Incoming Call—CO Line Settings— CO Name

Feature Guide References

2.21.4 Display Information

Distribution Order
• 11.5.3 PBX Configuration—[3-5-3] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Miscellaneous—
Options—ICD Group Distribution order

Feature Guide References

2.2.2.5 Distribution Order

Do Not Disturb (DND)

• 10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3] System—Timers & Counters—Dial / IRNA / Recall / Tone— Tone
Length—Busy Tone / DND Tone (s)
• 10.6.3 PBX Configuration—[2-6-3] System—Numbering Plan—B/NA DND Call Feature
– BSS / OHCA / Whisper OHCA / DND Override
– BSS / OHCA / Whisper OHCA / DND Override-2
• 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System—Class of Service—COS Settings—Assistant— DND
Override
• 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings—FWD / DND

894 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 Feature Programming References
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

• 12.1.2 PBX Configuration—[4-1-2] Extension—Wired Extension—FWD/DND

• 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings—FWD / DND
• 12.2.2 PBX Configuration—[4-2-2] Extension—Portable Station—FWD/DND

Feature Guide References

2.3.3 Do Not Disturb (DND)

Door Open
• 9.34 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Card Property—DOORPHONE Card
• 10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3] System—Timers & Counters—DISA / Door / Reminder / U. Conf—
Doorphone—Open Duration (s)
• 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main—Features— Door Open
• 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System—Class of Service—COS Settings—Optional Device & Other
Extensions— Door Unlock

Feature Guide References

2.18.2 Door Open

Doorphone Call
• 10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3] System—Timers & Counters—DISA / Door / Reminder / U. Conf
– Doorphone—Call Ring Duration (x10s)
– Doorphone—Call Duration (x10s)
• 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main—Features— DOORPHONE Call
• 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System—Class of Service—COS Settings—TRS— TRS
Level—Day, Lunch, Break, Night
• 10.8.2 PBX Configuration—[2-8-2] System—Ring Tone Patterns—Call from DOORPHONE
• 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options—Option 3— Confirmation Tone—Tone 1 :
Called by Voice
• 13.1 PBX Configuration—[5-1] Optional Device—Doorphone

Feature Guide References

2.18.1 Doorphone Call

DSP Resource Reservation

• 9.2.2 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property—Site—DSP Conference DSP 
Conference Priority
• 9.38 PBX Configuration—[1-5] Configuration—DSP Resource

Feature Guide References

5.5.4.1 DSP Resource Reservation

Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) Assignment

• 27.2.1 Network Service—[2-1] Server Feature—DHCP

Feature Guide References

5.6.6 Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) Assignment

E-mail Notification for Extension Users

• 8.2.1 Users—Add User—Single User

PC Programming Manual 895

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
Feature Programming References
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

• 20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting—Notification Parameters— E-mail/Text

Message Device—Device No. 1, 2, 3—E-mail Address
• 27.2.5 Network Service—[2-6] Server Feature—SMTP

Feature Guide References

5.4.1 E-mail Notification for Extension Users

E-mail Notification for Manager

• 7.5.4 Utility—Report—E-mail Report
• 20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting—Notification Parameters
– E-mail/Text Message Device—Device No. 1, 2, 3—User Name
– E-mail/Text Message Device—Device No. 1, 2, 3—E-mail Address
– E-mail/Text Message Device—Device No. 1, 2, 3—Only Urgent Messages
– E-mail/Text Message Device—Device No. 1, 2, 3—Title Order
– E-mail/Text Message Device—Device No. 1, 2, 3—Title String
– E-mail/Text Message Device—Device No. 1, 2, 3—Callback Number
– E-mail/Text Message Device—Device No. 1, 2, 3—Send Wait Time [0-120 min]
– E-mail/Text Message Device—Device No. 1, 2, 3—Attach Voice File
– E-mail/Text Message Device—Device No. 1, 2, 3—Use Mode
• 24.4 UM Configuration—[5-4] System Parameters—Parameters—E-mail Option

Feature Guide References

5.4.4 E-mail Notification for Manager

E-mail Notification of System-level Events

• 5.1 System Control—Program Update
• 7.7 Utility—Email Notification
• 8.2.1 Users—Add User—Single User
• 27.2.5 Network Service—[2-6] Server Feature—SMTP

Feature Guide References

5.4.2 E-mail Notification of System-level Events

Emergency Call
• 15.4 PBX Configuration—[7-4] TRS—Emergency Dial

Feature Guide References

2.5.4.2 Emergency Call

Enhanced Walking Extension

• 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main—Features— Walking Extension

Feature Guide References

2.24.3.2 Enhanced Walking Extension

Executive Busy Override

• 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main—Features— Executive Override
Deny Set / Cancel
• 10.6.3 PBX Configuration—[2-6-3] System—Numbering Plan—B/NA DND Call Feature— Executive
Busy Override

896 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 Feature Programming References
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

• 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System—Class of Service—COS Settings—Executive

– Executive Busy Override
– Executive Busy Override Deny
• 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options—Option 1— PT Operation—One-touch Busy
Override by SCO key
• 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 3—
Executive Override Deny
• 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 3—
Executive Override Deny

Feature Guide References

2.10.2 Executive Busy Override

Extension Dial Lock

• 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main—Features
– Extension Dial Lock Set / Cancel
– Remote Extension Dial Lock Off
– Remote Extension Dial Lock On
• 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System—Class of Service—COS Settings—TRS— TRS Level on
Extension Lock

Feature Guide References

2.7.3 Extension Dial Lock

Extension Feature Clear

• 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main—Features— Extension Feature
Clear
• 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options—Option 2
– Extension Clear—Call Waiting
– Extension Clear—Fwd/DND
– Extension Clear—Hot Line (Pick-up Dial)

Feature Guide References

2.24.2 Extension Feature Clear

Extension Personal Identification Number (PIN)

• 10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3] System—Timers & Counters—Miscellaneous— Extension PIN—Lock
Counter
• 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main—Features— Extension PIN Set /
Cancel
• 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options—Option 1— PT LCD—Password / PIN Display
• 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Main— Extension
PIN
• 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings—Main— Extension
PIN

Feature Guide References

2.24.1 Extension Personal Identification Number (PIN)

External Feature Access (EFA)

• 9.24 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - LCO Port— Flash Time

PC Programming Manual 897

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
Feature Programming References
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

• 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main—Features— External Feature

Access
• 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 7— Flash
Mode during CO Conversation
• 12.1.4 PBX Configuration—[4-1-4] Extension—Wired Extension—Flexible Button— Type
• 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 7— Flash
Mode during CO Conversation
• 12.2.3 PBX Configuration—[4-2-3] Extension—Portable Station—Flexible Button— Type
• 15.5 PBX Configuration—[7-5] TRS—Miscellaneous— TRS Check after EFA

Feature Guide References

2.11.7 External Feature Access (EFA)

External Relay Control

• 9.34 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Card Property—DOORPHONE Card
• 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main—Features— External Relay Access
• 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System—Class of Service—COS Settings—Optional Device & Other
Extensions— External Relay Access
• 13.4 PBX Configuration—[5-4] Optional Device—External Relay

Feature Guide References

2.18.4 External Relay Control

External Sensor
• 9.34 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Card Property—DOORPHONE Card
• 10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3] System—Timers & Counters—Miscellaneous— External Sensor—Ring
Duration (s)
• 10.8.3 PBX Configuration—[2-8-3] System—Ring Tone Patterns—Call from Others— External
Sensor—Ring Tone Pattern Plan 1–8
• 13.5 PBX Configuration—[5-5] Optional Device—External Sensor

Feature Guide References

2.18.3 External Sensor

Flash/Recall/Terminate
• 9.24 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - LCO Port— Disconnect Time
• 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 7— Flash
Mode during CO Conversation
• 12.1.4 PBX Configuration—[4-1-4] Extension—Wired Extension—Flexible Button— Type
• 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 7— Flash
Mode during CO Conversation
• 12.2.3 PBX Configuration—[4-2-3] Extension—Portable Station—Flexible Button— Type

Feature Guide References

2.11.6 Flash/Recall/Terminate

Flexible Buttons
• 10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3] System—Timers & Counters—Miscellaneous— PT Display—PT Last
Display Duration in Idle Mode (s)
• 12.1.4 PBX Configuration—[4-1-4] Extension—Wired Extension—Flexible Button

898 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 Feature Programming References
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

• 12.1.4.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-4] Extension—Wired Extension—Flexible Button—Flexible button data

copy
• 12.1.5 PBX Configuration—[4-1-5] Extension—Wired Extension—PF Button
• 12.2.3 PBX Configuration—[4-2-3] Extension—Portable Station—Flexible Button

Feature Guide References

2.21.2 Flexible Buttons

Flexible Numbering/Fixed Numbering

• 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main
– Extension
– Features
– Other PBX Extension
• 10.6.2 PBX Configuration—[2-6-2] System—Numbering Plan—Quick Dial
• 10.6.3 PBX Configuration—[2-6-3] System—Numbering Plan—B/NA DND Call Feature

Feature Guide References

5.5.7 Flexible Numbering/Fixed Numbering

Floating Extension
• 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main—Extension
• 11.5.1 PBX Configuration—[3-5-1] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings—Main
– Floating Extension Number
– Group Name
• 11.7.2 PBX Configuration—[3-7-2] Group—UM Group—Unit Settings— Floating Extension No.
• 11.8 PBX Configuration—[3-8] Group—PS Ring Group— Floating Extension Number
• 13.2 PBX Configuration—[5-2] Optional Device—External Pager— Floating Extension Number
• 13.3.2 PBX Configuration—[5-3-2] Optional Device—Voice Message—DISA Message— Floating
Extension Number

Feature Guide References

5.5.8 Floating Extension

FWD/DND Button, Group FWD Button

• 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main—Features
– FWD/DND Set / Cancel: Call from CO & Extension
– FWD/DND Set / Cancel: Call from CO
– FWD/DND Set / Cancel: Call from Extension
– Group FWD Set / Cancel: Call from CO & Extension
– Group FWD Set / Cancel: Call from CO
– Group FWD Set / Cancel: Call from Extension
• 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options—Option 1
– PT Fwd / DND—Fwd LED
– PT Fwd / DND—DND LED
– PT Fwd / DND—Fwd/DND key mode when Idle
• 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings—FWD / DND
• 12.1.4 PBX Configuration—[4-1-4] Extension—Wired Extension—Flexible Button
– Type
– Extension Number (for Group Fwd (Both))
– Extension Number (for Group Fwd (External))

PC Programming Manual 899

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
Feature Programming References
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

– Extension Number (for Group Fwd (Internal))

• 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings—FWD / DND
• 12.2.3 PBX Configuration—[4-2-3] Extension—Portable Station—Flexible Button
– Type
– Extension Number (for Group Fwd (Both))
– Extension Number (for Group Fwd (External))
– Extension Number (for Group Fwd (Internal))

Feature Guide References

2.3.4 FWD/DND Button, Group FWD Button

Group
• Section 11 PBX Configuration—[3] Group

Feature Guide References

5.1.2 Group

Group Call Distribution

• 11.1.1 PBX Configuration—[3-1-1] Group—Trunk Group—TRG Settings—Main— Line Hunting Order
• 11.5.1 PBX Configuration—[3-5-1] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings
– Main— Distribution Method
– Main— Call Waiting Distribution
– Miscellaneous— Extension No Answer Redirection Time
– Miscellaneous— Maximum No. of Busy Extension
• 11.5.1.1 PBX Configuration—[3-5-1] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings—Member
List— Delayed Ring
• 11.5.3 PBX Configuration—[3-5-3] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Miscellaneous
– Options—Wrap-up Timer based on
– Options—Longest Idle Distribution
• 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 8—
Wrap-up Timer
• 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 8—
Wrap-up Timer

Feature Guide References

2.2.2.2 Group Call Distribution

Hands-free Answerback
• 10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3] System—Timers & Counters—Dial / IRNA / Recall / Tone— Tone
Length—Reorder Tone for PT Hands-free (s)
• 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System—Class of Service—COS Settings—Assistant— Automatic
Answer (Caller)
• 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options
– Option 1— PT Operation—Automatic Answer for Call from CO after
– Option 3— Confirmation Tone—Tone 2 : Paged / Automatic Answer
– Option 4— Transfer—Automatic Answer for Transferred Call
• 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings
– Option 5— Automatic Answer for CO Call
– Option 6— Forced Automatic Answer

Feature Guide References

900 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 Feature Programming References
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

2.4.4 Hands-free Answerback

Hands-free Operation
• 10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3] System—Timers & Counters—Dial / IRNA / Recall / Tone— Tone
Length—Reorder Tone for PT Hands-free (s)
• 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 4— LCS
Answer Mode

Feature Guide References

2.11.1 Hands-free Operation

Headset Operation
• 12.1.4 PBX Configuration—[4-1-4] Extension—Wired Extension—Flexible Button— Type

Feature Guide References

2.11.4 Headset Operation

Host PBX Access Code (Access Code to the Telephone Company from a Host PBX)
• 11.1.1 PBX Configuration—[3-1-1] Group—Trunk Group—TRG Settings—Host PBX Access Code
• 19.1 PBX Configuration—[11-1] Maintenance—Main—SMDR Options— Option—ARS Dial

Feature Guide References

2.5.4.8 Host PBX Access Code (Access Code to the Telephone Company from a Host PBX)

Hot Line
• 10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3] System—Timers & Counters—Dial / IRNA / Recall / Tone— Dial—Hot
Line (Pickup Dial) Start (s)
• 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main—Features— Hot Line (Pickup Dial)
Program Set / Cancel
• 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 2
– Pickup Dial Set
– Pickup Dial No.
• 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 2
– Pickup Dial Set
– Pickup Dial No.

Feature Guide References

2.6.6 Hot Line

Idle Extension Hunting

• 11.6 PBX Configuration—[3-6] Group—Extension Hunting Group
• 11.6.1 PBX Configuration—[3-6] Group—Extension Hunting Group—Member List

Feature Guide References

2.2.1 Idle Extension Hunting

Incoming Call Distribution Group Features

• 11.5.1 PBX Configuration—[3-5-1] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings
– Main
– Overflow Queuing Busy

PC Programming Manual 901

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
Feature Programming References
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

– Overflow No Answer
– Miscellaneous
• 11.5.1.1 PBX Configuration—[3-5-1] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings—Member
List
• 11.5.3 PBX Configuration—[3-5-3] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Miscellaneous

Feature Guide References

2.2.2 Incoming Call Distribution Group Features

Incoming Call Log

• 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options—Option 7
– Incoming Call Log—Busy/Intercept (when Called Party is Busy)
– Incoming Call Log—Fwd All/Fwd Busy
– Incoming Call Log—Call Pickup
– Incoming Call Log—Extension / TIE Call
– Outgoing Call Log—Extension Call
• 11.5.1 PBX Configuration—[3-5-1] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group
Settings—Miscellaneous— Supervisor Extension Number
• 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings
– Option 5— Incoming Call Display
– Option 6— Display Lock/SVM Lock
– Option 7— Incoming Call Log Memory
• 12.1.4 PBX Configuration—[4-1-4] Extension—Wired Extension—Flexible Button— Type
• 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings
– Option 5— Incoming Call Display
– Option 7— Incoming Call Log Memory

Feature Guide References

2.19.2 Incoming Call Log

Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN) Service Features

• 6.2 Tool—BRI Automatic Configuration
• 9.25 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Card Property - BRI type/PRI type
• 9.26 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - BRI Port
• 9.27 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - PRI Port
• 10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3] System—Timers & Counters—Dial / IRNA / Recall / Tone—
Dial—Extension Inter-digit (s)
• 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options—Option 2— ISDN en Bloc Dial—[#] as End
of Dial for en Bloc mode
• 11.1.4.1 PBX Configuration—[3-1-4] Group—Trunk Group—Dialling Plan—Auto Assign
• 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings
– Main— Extension Number
– Option 7— ISDN Bearer
• 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 7— ISDN
Bearer

Feature Guide References

4.1.2 Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN) Service Features

902 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 Feature Programming References
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Intercept Routing
• 10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3] System—Timers & Counters—Dial / IRNA / Recall / Tone— Intercept
Routing No Answer (IRNA)—Day (s), Lunch (s), Break (s), Night (s)
• 10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3] System—Timers & Counters—DISA / Door / Reminder / U. Conf—
DISA—Intercept Timer—Day (s), Lunch (s), Break (s), Night (s)
• 11.5.1 PBX Configuration—[3-5-1] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings—Overflow
No Answer— Time out & Manual Queue Redirection—Destination-Day, Lunch, Break, Night
• 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings
– Intercept Destination
– Intercept No Answer Time
• 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings
– Intercept Destination
– Intercept No Answer Time
• 18.5 PBX Configuration—[10-5] CO & Incoming Call—Miscellaneous

Feature Guide References

2.1.1.6 Intercept Routing

Intercept Routing—No Destination

• 10.2 PBX Configuration—[2-2] System—Operator & BGM— PBX Operator—Day, Lunch, Break, Night
• 18.5 PBX Configuration—[10-5] CO & Incoming Call—Miscellaneous— Intercept—Routing to Operator
- No Destination (Destination is not programmed.)

Feature Guide References

2.1.1.7 Intercept Routing—No Destination

Intercom Call
• 10.6.3 PBX Configuration—[2-6-3] System—Numbering Plan—B/NA DND Call Feature— Alternate
Calling - Ring / Voice
• 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings
– Main— Extension Number
– Main— Extension Name
– Option 3— Intercom Call by Voice
• 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings—Main
– Extension Number
– Extension Name

Feature Guide References

2.5.3 Intercom Call

Internal Call Block

• 10.7.3 PBX Configuration—[2-7-3] System—Class of Service—Internal Call Block— COS Number of
the Extension Which Receive the Call from Other Extension 1–64
• 11.5.1 PBX Configuration—[3-5-1] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings—Main—
COS
• 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Main— COS
• 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings—Main— COS
• 13.1 PBX Configuration—[5-1] Optional Device—Doorphone— COS
• 13.4 PBX Configuration—[5-4] Optional Device—External Relay— COS Number

Feature Guide References

PC Programming Manual 903

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
Feature Programming References
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

2.1.2.2 Internal Call Block

Internal Call Features

• 13.1 PBX Configuration—[5-1] Optional Device—Doorphone— Destination—Day, Lunch, Break, Night

Feature Guide References

2.1.2 Internal Call Features

IP Proprietary Telephone (IP-PT)

• 9.2.2 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property—Site—Main— IP Terminal
Registration Mode
• 9.13 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Card Property—V-IPEXT
• 9.14 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property—V-IPEXT

Feature Guide References

5.2.1 IP Proprietary Telephone (IP-PT)

IP-CS (KX-NS0154)
• 7.4.4 Utility—Monitor/Trace—CS Status Monitor—Air Sync Group
• 7.4.5 Utility—Monitor/Trace—CS Status Monitor—LAN Sync Group
• 7.5.5 Utility—Report—IP-CS Information
• 9.2.2 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property—Site—Main
– LLDP Packet Sending Ability
– IP-CS Registration Mode
• 9.2.2 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property—Site—Port Number— Firmware
Update Port No. for IP-PT/IP-CS (Media Relay)
• 9.2.2 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property—Site—Media Relay
– IP Extension / IP-CS—NAT - MGCP Server Port No. for IP-CS
– IP Extension / IP-CS—Keep Alive Packet Type for IP-CS
– IP Extension / IP-CS—NAT - FTP Server Port No.
• 9.17 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Card Property—V-IPCS
• 9.18 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property—V-IPCS
• 10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3] System—Timers & Counters—Miscellaneous— Air
Synchronisation—Watching Degeneracy (x60s)
• 19.3 PBX Configuration—[11-3] Maintenance—CS Synchronisation

Feature Guide References

5.2.7 IP-CS (KX-NS0154)

ISDN Extension
• 9.26 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - BRI Port—ISDN Extension
• 9.27 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - PRI Port—Extension Setting

Feature Guide References

5.2.5.1 ISDN Extension

ISDN Service Access by Keypad Protocol

• 12.1.4 PBX Configuration—[4-1-4] Extension—Wired Extension—Flexible Button
– Type
– Dial (for ISDN Service)

904 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 Feature Programming References
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

• 12.2.3 PBX Configuration—[4-2-3] Extension—Portable Station—Flexible Button

– Type
– Dial (for ISDN Service)

Feature Guide References

4.1.2.11 ISDN Service Access by Keypad Protocol

ISDN Virtual Private Network (ISDN-VPN)

• 9.26 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - BRI Port—Network Numbering
Plan— Trunk Property
• 9.27 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - PRI Port—Network Numbering
Plan— Trunk Property
• 16.2 PBX Configuration—[8-2] ARS—Leading Number— Leading Number
• 17.1 PBX Configuration—[9-1] Private Network—TIE Table
– Leading Number
– Removed Number of Digits
– Added Number

Feature Guide References

4.3.3 ISDN Virtual Private Network (ISDN-VPN)

Last Number Redial

• 10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3] System—Timers & Counters—Dial / IRNA / Recall / Tone
– Automatic Redial—Repeat Counter
– Automatic Redial—Repeat Interval (x10s)
– Automatic Redial—Redial Call Ring Duration (x10s)
• 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main—Features— Redial
• 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options—Option 2
– Redial—Automatic Redial when No Answer (ISDN)
– Redial—Save Dial After Connection to Redial Memory
• 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options—Option 7
– Outgoing Call Log—Extension Call
• 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 7—
Outgoing Call Log Memory
• 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 7—
Outgoing Call Log Memory

Feature Guide References

2.6.3 Last Number Redial

LED Indication
• 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options
– Option 1— PT Fwd / DND—Fwd LED
– Option 1— PT Fwd / DND—DND LED

Feature Guide References

2.21.3 LED Indication

Legacy Device Connection

• 9.33 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Expansion Unit1/Expansion Unit2/Expansion Unit3

PC Programming Manual 905

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
Feature Programming References
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Feature Guide References

5.3 Legacy Device Connection

Line Preference—Incoming
• 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 4—
Incoming Preferred Line
• 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 4—
Incoming Preferred Line

Feature Guide References

2.4.2 Line Preference—Incoming

Line Preference—Outgoing
• 10.7.2 PBX Configuration—[2-7-2] System—Class of Service—External Call Block
• 11.1.2 PBX Configuration—[3-1-2] Group—Trunk Group—Local Access Priority
• 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 4—
Outgoing Preferred Line
• 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 4—
Outgoing Preferred Line

Feature Guide References

2.5.5.2 Line Preference—Outgoing

Local Alarm Information

• 7.3.1 Utility—Log—Error Log
• 12.1.4 PBX Configuration—[4-1-4] Extension—Wired Extension—Flexible Button— Type
• 12.2.3 PBX Configuration—[4-2-3] Extension—Portable Station—Flexible Button— Type
• 19.1 PBX Configuration—[11-1] Maintenance—Main
– SMDR— Print Information—Error Log
– Maintenance— Local Alarm Display—Extension 1, Extension 2
– Maintenance— Daily Test Start Time—Set
– Maintenance— Daily Test Start Time—Hour
– Maintenance— Daily Test Start Time—Minute

Feature Guide References

5.6.4 Local Alarm Information

Log-in/Log-out
• 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main—Features
– Log-in / Log-out
– Not Ready (Manual Wrap-up) Mode On / Off
• 11.5.1 PBX Configuration—[3-5-1] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group
Settings—Miscellaneous
– No. of Unanswered Calls for Automatic Log-out
– Last Extension Log-out
• 11.5.1.1 PBX Configuration—[3-5-1] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings—Member
List— Wrap-up Timer
• 11.5.3 PBX Configuration—[3-5-3] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Miscellaneous—
Options—Wrap-up Timer based on

906 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 Feature Programming References
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

• 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 8—

Wrap-up Timer
• 12.1.4 PBX Configuration—[4-1-4] Extension—Wired Extension—Flexible Button
– Type
– Parameter Selection (for Log-in/Log-out)
– Extension Number (for Log-in/Log-out)
• 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 8—
Wrap-up Timer
• 12.2.3 PBX Configuration—[4-2-3] Extension—Portable Station—Flexible Button
– Type
– Parameter Selection (for Log-in/Log-out)
– Extension Number (for Log-in/Log-out)
• 19.1 PBX Configuration—[11-1] Maintenance—Main—SMDR— Print Information—Log-in / Log-out

Feature Guide References

2.2.2.8 Log-in/Log-out

Making a TIE Line Call

• 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main—Features— TIE Line Access
• 17.1 PBX Configuration—[9-1] Private Network—TIE Table— Own PBX Code

Feature Guide References

4.3.1.1 Making a TIE Line Call

Malicious Call Identification (MCID)

• 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main—Features— MCID

Feature Guide References

4.1.2.9 Malicious Call Identification (MCID)

Manager Features
• 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System—Class of Service—COS Settings—Manager— Manager
• 19.1 PBX Configuration—[11-1] Maintenance—Main—Password— Manager Password - PT
Programming—Prog *1

Feature Guide References

5.1.6 Manager Features

Message Waiting
• 9.16 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property—V-SIPEXT
• 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main—Features— Message Waiting
Set / Cancel / Call Back
• 10.6.3 PBX Configuration—[2-6-3] System—Numbering Plan—B/NA DND Call Feature— Message
Waiting Set
• 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options
– Option 3— Dial Tone—Distinctive Dial Tone
– Option 5— SLT—Message Waiting Lamp Pattern
• 12.1.4 PBX Configuration—[4-1-4] Extension—Wired Extension—Flexible Button— Type
• 12.2.3 PBX Configuration—[4-2-3] Extension—Portable Station—Flexible Button— Type

Feature Guide References

PC Programming Manual 907

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
Feature Programming References
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

2.20.1 Message Waiting

Multiple Subscriber Number (MSN) Ringing Service

• 18.2 PBX Configuration—[10-2] CO & Incoming Call—DIL Table & Port Settings—DDI / DID / TIE / MSN
– Distribution Method
– DDI/DID/TIE/MSN—Remove Digit
– DDI/DID/TIE/MSN—Additional Dial
• 18.4 PBX Configuration—[10-4] CO & Incoming Call—MSN Table

Feature Guide References

2.1.1.4 Multiple Subscriber Number (MSN) Ringing Service

Music on Hold
• 10.2 PBX Configuration—[2-2] System—Operator & BGM
• 10.11.1 PBX Configuration—[2-11-1] System—Audio Gain—Paging/MOH
– Internal MOH—MOH1-2 (Music On Hold 1-2)

Feature Guide References

2.13.4 Music on Hold

Network Direct Station Selection (NDSS)

• 9.26 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - BRI Port—ISDN CO— Networking
Data Transfer
• 9.27 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - PRI Port—CO Setting— Networking
Data Transfer
• 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System—Class of Service—COS Settings—Manager— Manager
• 12.1.4 PBX Configuration—[4-1-4] Extension—Wired Extension—Flexible Button
– Type
– Dial (for NDSS)
• 12.1.6 PBX Configuration—[4-1-6] Extension—Wired Extension—NDSS Link Data - Send
• 12.2.3 PBX Configuration—[4-2-3] Extension—Portable Station—Flexible Button
– Type
– Dial (for NDSS)
• 12.2.4 PBX Configuration—[4-2-4] Extension—Portable Station—NDSS Link Data - Send
• 17.2 PBX Configuration—[9-2] Private Network—Network Data Transmission
• 17.3 PBX Configuration—[9-3] Private Network—Network Operator (VoIP)
• 17.4 PBX Configuration—[9-4] Private Network—NDSS Key Table

Feature Guide References

4.3.5.1 Network Direct Station Selection (NDSS)

Network ICD Group

• 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options—Option 4
– Send CLIP of CO Caller—when call is forwarded to CO
– Send CLIP of Extension Caller—when call is forwarded to CO

Feature Guide References

4.3.6 Network ICD Group

908 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 Feature Programming References
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Off-hook Call Announcement (OHCA)

• 10.6.3 PBX Configuration—[2-6-3] System—Numbering Plan—B/NA DND Call Feature
– BSS / OHCA / Whisper OHCA / DND Override
– BSS / OHCA / Whisper OHCA / DND Override-2
• 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System—Class of Service—COS Settings—Assistant— OHCA /
Whisper OHCA

Feature Guide References

2.10.4.3 Off-hook Call Announcement (OHCA)

Off-hook Monitor
• 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options—Option 1— PT Operation—Off Hook Monitor

Feature Guide References

2.11.2 Off-hook Monitor

One-numbered Extension
• 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main—Features— Parallel Telephone
(Ring) Mode Set / Cancel
• 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings
– Option 1— Wireless XDP / Shared Extension

Feature Guide References

2.11.11 One-numbered Extension

One-touch Dialling
• 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 6—
Flexible Button Programming Mode
• 12.1.4 PBX Configuration—[4-1-4] Extension—Wired Extension—Flexible Button
– Type
– Dial (for One-touch)
• 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 6—
Flexible Button Programming Mode
• 12.2.3 PBX Configuration—[4-2-3] Extension—Portable Station—Flexible Button
– Type
– Dial (for One-touch)

Feature Guide References

2.6.2 One-touch Dialling

Operator Features
• 10.2 PBX Configuration—[2-2] System—Operator & BGM— PBX Operator—Day, Lunch, Break, Night
• 14.6 PBX Configuration—[6-6] Feature—Tenant— Operator (Extension Number)

Feature Guide References

5.1.5 Operator Features

Outgoing Message (OGM)

• 7.2.5 Utility—File—Message File Transfer PC to PBX
• 7.2.6 Utility—File—Message File Transfer PBX to PC

PC Programming Manual 909

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
Feature Programming References
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

• 10.2 PBX Configuration—[2-2] System—Operator & BGM

• 10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3] System—Timers & Counters—DISA / Door / Reminder / U. Conf—
DISA—Progress Tone Continuation Time before Recording Message (s)
• 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main—Features— OGM Record / Clear /
Playback
• 11.5.1.1 PBX Configuration—[3-5-1] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings—Member
List— Delayed Ring
• 11.5.2 PBX Configuration—[3-5-2] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Queuing Time Table—
Queuing Sequence—Sequence 01–16
• 13.3.2 PBX Configuration—[5-3-2] Optional Device—Voice Message—DISA Message— Floating
Extension Number

Feature Guide References

2.30.2 Outgoing Message (OGM)

Outside Destinations in Incoming Call Distribution Group

• 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options—Option 4
– Send CLIP of CO Caller—when call is forwarded to CO
– Send CLIP of Extension Caller—when call is forwarded to CO

Feature Guide References

2.2.2.3 Outside Destinations in Incoming Call Distribution Group

Overflow Feature
• 11.5.1 PBX Configuration—[3-5-1] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings
– Overflow Queuing Busy
– Overflow No Answer
• 11.5.2 PBX Configuration—[3-5-2] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Queuing Time Table
• 11.5.3 PBX Configuration—[3-5-3] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Miscellaneous—
Options—Overflow immediately when All Logout

Feature Guide References

2.2.2.7 Overflow Feature

Paging
• 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main—Features
– Group Paging
– Group Paging Answer
– Paging Deny Set / Cancel
• 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options
– Option 1— PT Fwd / DND—Paging to DND Extension
– Option 3— Confirmation Tone—Tone 2 : Paged / Automatic Answer
• 10.11.1 PBX Configuration—[2-11-1] System—Audio Gain—Paging/MOH
– Paging—EPG 1-6 (External Pager 1-6)
– Paging—Paging Level from PT Speaker
• 11.4 PBX Configuration—[3-4] Group—Paging Group
• 11.4.1 PBX Configuration—[3-4] Group—Paging Group—All Setting
• 11.4.2 PBX Configuration—[3-4] Group—Paging Group—External Pager
• 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 6—
Paging Deny

910 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 Feature Programming References
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Feature Guide References

2.17.1 Paging

Panasonic SIP Phones (P-SIP)

• 9.15 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Card Property—V-SIPEXT
• 9.16 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property—V-SIPEXT

Feature Guide References

5.2.2.4 Panasonic SIP Phones (P-SIP)

Pause Insertion
• 9.24 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - LCO Port— Pause Time
• 10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3] System—Timers & Counters—Miscellaneous— During
Conversation—Pause Signal Time (s)
• 14.4 PBX Configuration—[6-4] Feature—Second Dial Tone

Feature Guide References

2.5.4.7 Pause Insertion

PDN (Primary Directory Number)/SDN (Secondary Directory Number) Extension

• 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System—Class of Service—COS Settings—PDN/SDN
• 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options
– Option 4— System Wireless—SDN Delayed Ringing with LCD
– Option 6 (CTI)— CTI Hold—Forced Idle when Hold by PDN/SDN Key
• 12.1.4 PBX Configuration—[4-1-4] Extension—Wired Extension—Flexible Button
– Type
– Parameter Selection (for SDN)
– Extension Number (for SDN)
– Optional Parameter (Ringing Tone Type Number) (for Loop CO, Single CO, Group CO, ICD Group,
SDN)
• 12.2.3 PBX Configuration—[4-2-3] Extension—Portable Station—Flexible Button
– Type
– Parameter Selection (for SDN)
– Extension Number (for SDN)
• 12.3 PBX Configuration—[4-3] Extension—DSS Console

Feature Guide References

2.9.1 Primary Directory Number (PDN)/Secondary Directory Number (SDN) Extension

Peer-to-Peer (P2P) Connection

• 9.14 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property—V-IPEXT— P2P Group
• 9.16 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property—V-SIPEXT
• 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options—Option 8
– P2P Group—Priority Voice 1/Priority Voice 2/Priority Voice 3
– P2P Group—Video Conference
• 11.10 PBX Configuration—[3-10] Group—P2P Group
Feature Guide References
5.2.3 Peer-to-Peer (P2P) Connection

PC Programming Manual 911

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
Feature Programming References
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Ping
• 7.1.2 Utility—Diagnosis—Ping

Feature Guide References

5.6.7 PING Confirmation

Portable Station (PS) Connection

• 9.35 PBX Configuration—[1-2] Configuration—Portable Station

Feature Guide References

5.2.4.1 Portable Station (PS) Connection

Power Failure Transfer

Feature Guide References

5.6.2 Power Failure Transfer

Printing Message
• 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main—Features— Printing Message
• 14.2 PBX Configuration—[6-2] Feature—Hotel & Charge—Main— SMDR for External Hotel Application
2—Printing Message 1–8

Feature Guide References

2.22.2 Printing Message

Privacy Release
• 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options—Option 1— PT Operation—Privacy Release
by SCO key
• 12.1.4 PBX Configuration—[4-1-4] Extension—Wired Extension—Flexible Button— Type
• 12.2.3 PBX Configuration—[4-2-3] Extension—Portable Station—Flexible Button— Type

Feature Guide References

2.14.3 Privacy Release

PS Directory
• 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Main— Extension
Name
• 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings—Main— Extension
Name
• 14.1 PBX Configuration—[6-1] Feature—System Speed Dial
– Name
– CO Line Access Number + Telephone Number

Feature Guide References

5.2.4.3 PS Directory

PS Ring Group
• 11.5.1 PBX Configuration—[3-5-1] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings—Main—
Distribution Method
• 11.8 PBX Configuration—[3-8] Group—PS Ring Group

912 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 Feature Programming References
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

• 11.8.1 PBX Configuration—[3-8] Group—PS Ring Group—Member List

Feature Guide References

5.2.4.2 PS Ring Group

PS Roaming by Network ICD Group

• 10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3] System—Timers & Counters—Miscellaneous— System Wireless—PS
Out of Range Timer (s)
• 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options—Option 4— System Wireless—Out of Range
Registration

Feature Guide References

4.3.6.1 PS Roaming by Network ICD Group

PT Programming
• 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System—Class of Service—COS Settings—Manager— PT
Programming Mode Level
• 19.1 PBX Configuration—[11-1] Maintenance—Main—Password
– Manager Password - PT Programming—Prog *1

Feature Guide References

5.5.3 PT Programming

QSIG Enhanced Features

• 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options—Option 2— CO - CO Call Limitation—After
Conference
• 17.1 PBX Configuration—[9-1] Private Network—TIE Table—Enhanced QSIG

Feature Guide References

4.3.5 QSIG Enhanced Features

Queuing Feature
• 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main—Features— Incoming Call Queue
Monitor
• 11.5.1 PBX Configuration—[3-5-1] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings
– Overflow Queuing Busy
– Overflow No Answer
– Queuing Time Table
– Miscellaneous— Extension No Answer Redirection Time
– Miscellaneous— Maximum No. of Busy Extension
• 11.5.3 PBX Configuration—[3-5-3] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Miscellaneous
• 11.7.1 PBX Configuration—[3-7-1] Group—UM Group—System Settings— Call Waiting on UM Group
• 12.1.4 PBX Configuration—[4-1-4] Extension—Wired Extension—Flexible Button
– Type
– Extension Number (for Hurry-up)
• 12.2.3 PBX Configuration—[4-2-3] Extension—Portable Station—Flexible Button
– Type
– Extension Number (for Hurry-up)

Feature Guide References

2.2.2.4 Queuing Feature

PC Programming Manual 913

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
Feature Programming References
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Quick Dialling
• 10.6.2 PBX Configuration—[2-6-2] System—Numbering Plan—Quick Dial

Feature Guide References

2.6.5 Quick Dialling

Reverse Circuit
• 9.24 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - LCO Port— Reverse Detection

Feature Guide References

2.5.4.5 Reverse Circuit

Ring Tone Pattern Selection

• 10.8.1 PBX Configuration—[2-8-1] System—Ring Tone Patterns—Call from CO— Ring Tone Pattern
Plan 1–8
• 10.8.2 PBX Configuration—[2-8-2] System—Ring Tone Patterns—Call from DOORPHONE— Ring Tone
Pattern Plan 1–8
• 10.8.3 PBX Configuration—[2-8-3] System—Ring Tone Patterns—Call from Others— Extension—Ring
Tone Pattern Plan 1–8
• 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options—Option 1— PT Operation—PT Ring Off
Setting
• 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 1— Ring
Pattern Table
• 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 1— Ring
Pattern Table

Feature Guide References

2.1.3.2 Ring Tone Pattern Selection

Room Status Control

• 12.1.4 PBX Configuration—[4-1-4] Extension—Wired Extension—Flexible Button— Type
• 14.2 PBX Configuration—[6-2] Feature—Hotel & Charge
– Main— Hotel Operator—Extension 1–4
– Bill— Checkout Billing—Billing for Guest

Feature Guide References

2.23.2 Room Status Control

Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) System Monitor

• 27.3.3 Network Service—[3-3] Client Feature—SNMP Agent

Feature Guide References

5.6.5 Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) System Monitor

Simple Remote Connection

• 9.2.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property—Main—SIP Extension
– Setting parameters assigned to Remote SIP-MLT—NAT - CWMP Server IP Address
– Setting parameters assigned to Remote SIP-MLT—NAT - CWMP Server (HTTP) Port No.
– Setting parameters assigned to Remote SIP-MLT—NAT - CWMP Server (HTTPS) Port No.

914 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 Feature Programming References
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

– Setting parameters assigned to Remote SIP-MLT—NAT - SIP-MLT Data Download Server (HTTP)
Port No.
– Setting parameters assigned to Remote SIP-MLT—NAT - SIP-MLT Data Download Server (HTTPS)
Port No.
– Setting parameters assigned to Remote SIP-MLT—NAT - SIP Proxy Server IP Address
– Setting parameters assigned to Remote SIP-MLT—NAT - SIP Proxy Server Port No.
– Setting parameters assigned to Remote SIP-MLT—NAT - NTP Server IP Address
– Setting parameters assigned to Remote SIP-MLT—NAT - NTP Server Port No.
– Setting parameters assigned to Remote SIP-MLT—NAT - Keep Alive Packet Type
– Setting parameters assigned to Remote SIP-MLT—NAT - Keep Alive Packet Sending Interval Time
(s)
– Setting parameters assigned to Remote SIP-MLT—NAT - SIP Register Expire Time (s)
– Setting parameters for Networking Survivability, assigned to Remote SIP-MLT—NAT - CWMP
Server IP Address
– Setting parameters for Networking Survivability, assigned to Remote SIP-MLT—NAT - CWMP
Server (HTTP) Port No.
– Setting parameters for Networking Survivability, assigned to Remote SIP-MLT—NAT - CWMP
Server (HTTPS) Port No.
– Control Condition of Remote SIP-MLT—PERIODIC Ability
– Control Condition of Remote SIP-MLT—PERIODIC Packet Sending Interval Time (s)
• 9.2.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property—Main—Media Relay
– Common—NAT - External IP Address
– IP Extension / IP-CS—NAT - MGCP Server Port No.
– IP Extension / IP-CS—NAT - MGCP Server Port No. for IP-CS
– IP Extension / IP-CS—Keep Alive Packet Type
– IP Extension / IP-CS—Keep Alive Packet Type for IP-CS
– IP Extension / IP-CS—Keep Alive Packet Sending Interval Time (s)
– IP Extension / IP-CS—NAT - FTP Server Port No.
– SIP Extension / UT Extension—NAT - SIP Proxy Server Port No.
– UT Extension—NAT - CWMP Server (HTTP) Port No.
– UT Extension—NAT - CWMP Server (HTTPS) Port No.
– UT Extension—NAT - CWMP Server (HTTP) Port No. for Network Survivability
– UT Extension—NAT - CWMP Server (HTTPS) Port No. for Network Survivability
– UT Extension—NAT - SIP-MLT Data Download Server (HTTP) Port No.
– UT Extension—NAT - SIP-MLT Data Download Server (HTTPS) Port No.
– UT Extension—NAT - NTP Server Port No.
– UT Extension—Keep Alive Packet Type
– UT Extension—Keep Alive Packet Sending Interval Time (s)
– UT Extension—SIP Register Expire Time (s)
– UT Extension—PERIODIC Ability
– UT Extension—PERIODIC Packet Sending Interval Time (s)
– Option—NAT - RTP IP Address
– Option—NAT - SIP Proxy Server IP Address
– Option—NAT - CWMP Server IP Address
– Option—NAT - CWMP Server IP Address for Network Survivability
– Option—NAT - NTP Server IP Address
• 9.2.2 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property—Site—Port Number— Firmware
Update Port No. for IP-PT/IP-CS (Media Relay)
• 9.14 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property—V-IPEXT—Remote Place
• 9.16 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property—V-SIPEXT—Remote Place
• 9.20 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property—V-UTEXT—Remote Place

PC Programming Manual 915

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
Feature Programming References
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Feature Guide References

5.2.2.3 Simple Remote Connection

SIP (Session Initiation Protocol) Extension

• 9.15 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Card Property—V-SIPEXT
• 9.16 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property—V-SIPEXT

Feature Guide References

5.2.2 SIP (Session Initiation Protocol) Extension

SIP (Session Initiation Protocol) Trunk

• 9.8 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Shelf Property—V-SIPGW
• 9.9 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Card Property—V-SIPGW
• 9.10 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property—V-SIPGW

Feature Guide References

4.1.1 SIP (Session Initiation Protocol) Trunk

SIP Portable Station (S-PS) and SIP Cell Station (SIP-CS)

• 7.12 Utility—CS-Web Connection
• 9.20 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property—V-UTEXT—Main— Telephone Type
• 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Main—
Telephone Type
• 12.1.4 PBX Configuration—[4-1-4] Extension—Wired Extension—Flexible Button

Feature Guide References

5.2.2.2 SIP Portable Station (S-PS) and SIP Cell Station (SIP-CS)

SIP Refer Transfer

• 9.10 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property—V-SIPGW—Supplementary Service
– Blind Transfer(REFER)
– Attended Transfer(REFER)

Feature Guide References

2.12.2 SIP Refer Transfer

Software Upgrading
• 5.1 System Control—Program Update

Feature Guide References

5.5.9 Software Upgrading

Special Carrier Access Code

• 15.3 PBX Configuration—[7-3] TRS—Special Carrier

Feature Guide References

2.5.4.9 Special Carrier Access Code

916 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 Feature Programming References
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Speed Dialling—Personal/System
• 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main—Features
– System Speed Dialling / Personal Speed Dialling
– Personal Speed Dialling - Programming
• 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System—Class of Service—COS Settings—TRS— TRS Level for
System Speed Dialling
• 12.1.3 PBX Configuration—[4-1-3] Extension—Wired Extension—Speed Dial
• 14.1 PBX Configuration—[6-1] Feature—System Speed Dial
• 14.6 PBX Configuration—[6-6] Feature—Tenant
– Extension Directory
– System Speed Dial

Feature Guide References

2.6.4 Speed Dialling—Personal/System

Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR)

• 10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3] System—Timers & Counters—Dial / IRNA / Recall / Tone—
Dial—Analogue CO Call Duration Start (s)
• 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System—Class of Service—COS Settings—CO & SMDR— Outgoing
CO Call Printout (SMDR)
• 14.2 PBX Configuration—[6-2] Feature—Hotel & Charge
– Main— SMDR for External Hotel Application 2—Printing Message 1–8
– Charge— Charge Options—Currency
• 19.1 PBX Configuration—[11-1] Maintenance—Main
– SMDR
– SMDR Options

Feature Guide References

2.22.1.1 Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR)

Supervisory Feature
• 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main—Features— Incoming Call Queue
Monitor
• 11.5.1 PBX Configuration—[3-5-1] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group
Settings—Miscellaneous— Supervisor Extension Number

Feature Guide References

2.2.2.9 Supervisory Feature

Supervisory Feature (ACD)

• 8.4 Users—ICDG Management
• 11.5.3 PBX Configuration—[3-5-3] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Miscellaneous
• 11.5.4 PBX Configuration–[3-5-4] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—ACD Supervisor

Feature Guide References

2.2.2.10 Supervisory Feature (ACD)

Syslog Record Management

• 27.3.2 Network Service—[3-2] Client Feature—Syslog

PC Programming Manual 917

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
Feature Programming References
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Feature Guide References

2.22.1.2 Syslog Record Management

Tenant Service
• 10.2 PBX Configuration—[2-2] System—Operator & BGM
– PBX Operator—Day, Lunch, Break, Night
– BGM and Music on Hold—Music on Hold
• 10.4 PBX Configuration—[2-4] System—Week Table
• 10.5 PBX Configuration—[2-5] System—Holiday Table
• 10.7.3 PBX Configuration—[2-7-3] System—Class of Service—Internal Call Block
• 11.2 PBX Configuration—[3-2] Group—User Group
• 11.5.1 PBX Configuration—[3-5-1] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings—Main—
Tenant Number
• 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Main— User
Group
• 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings—Main— User
Group
• 13.1 PBX Configuration—[5-1] Optional Device—Doorphone— Tenant Number
• 13.5 PBX Configuration—[5-5] Optional Device—External Sensor— Tenant No.
• 14.6 PBX Configuration—[6-6] Feature—Tenant
• Section 16 PBX Configuration—[8] ARS
• 16.5 PBX Configuration—[8-5] ARS—Carrier—Authorisation Code for Tenant
• 18.2 PBX Configuration—[10-2] CO & Incoming Call—DIL Table & Port Settings—DIL— Tenant Number
• 18.3 PBX Configuration—[10-3] CO & Incoming Call—DDI / DID Table— Tenant Number
• 18.4 PBX Configuration—[10-4] CO & Incoming Call—MSN Table—MSN— Tenant Number

Feature Guide References

5.1.3 Tenant Service

Three-party Conference (3PTY)—by ISDN

• 9.26 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - BRI Port—Supplementary
Service— COLP, CLIR, COLR, CNIP, CONP, CNIR, CONR, CF (Rerouting), CT, CCBS, AOC-D, AOC-E,
3PTY
• 9.27 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - PRI Port—Supplementary
Service— COLP, CLIR, COLR, CNIP, CONP, CNIR, CONR, CF (Rerouting), CT, CCBS, AOC-D, AOC-E,
E911, 3PTY

Feature Guide References

4.1.2.8 Three-party Conference (3PTY)—by ISDN

TIE Line Service

• 9.26 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - BRI Port—Network Numbering
Plan— Trunk Property
• 9.27 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - PRI Port—Network Numbering
Plan— Trunk Property
• 10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3] System—Timers & Counters—Miscellaneous— Incoming Call Inter-digit
Timer—TIE (s)
• 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main—Features
– Idle Line Access (Local Access)
– Trunk Group Access
– TIE Line Access

918 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 Feature Programming References
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

• 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main—Other PBX Extension

• 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System—Class of Service—COS Settings—TRS— TRS
Level—Day, Lunch, Break, Night
• 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options—Option 4— Private Network—TIE Call by
Extension Numbering
• 11.1.1 PBX Configuration—[3-1-1] Group—Trunk Group—TRG Settings—Main— COS
• 17.1 PBX Configuration—[9-1] Private Network—TIE Table
• 18.2 PBX Configuration—[10-2] CO & Incoming Call—DIL Table & Port Settings
– DIL— Trunk Property
– DIL— DIL Destination—Day, Lunch, Break, Night
– DDI / DID / TIE / MSN
• 18.3 PBX Configuration—[10-3] CO & Incoming Call—DDI / DID Table— DDI / DID Destination—Day,
Lunch, Break, Night

Feature Guide References

4.3.1 TIE Line Service

Time Service
• 10.4 PBX Configuration—[2-4] System—Week Table
• 10.5 PBX Configuration—[2-5] System—Holiday Table
• 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main—Features— Time Service (Day /
Lunch / Break / Night) Switch
• 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System—Class of Service—COS Settings—Manager— Time Service
Switch
• 12.1.4 PBX Configuration—[4-1-4] Extension—Wired Extension—Flexible Button
– Type
– Parameter Selection (for Time Service)
– Parameter Selection (for Time Service - Automatic/Manual)
– Optional Parameter (Ringing Tone Type Number) (for Time Service)
• 12.2.3 PBX Configuration—[4-2-3] Extension—Portable Station—Flexible Button
– Type
– Parameter Selection (for Time Service)
– Parameter Selection (for Time Service - Automatic/Manual)
– Optional Parameter (or Ringing Tone Type Number) (for Time Service)

Feature Guide References

5.1.4 Time Service

Timed Reminder
• 10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3] System—Timers & Counters—DISA / Door / Reminder / U. Conf
– Timed Reminder—Repeat Counter
– Timed Reminder—Interval Time (x10s)
– Timed Reminder—Alarm Ringing Duration (x10s)
• 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main—Features
– Remote Timed Reminder (Remote Wakeup Call)
– Timed Reminder Set / Cancel
• 10.8.3 PBX Configuration—[2-8-3] System—Ring Tone Patterns—Call from Others— Timed
Reminder—Ring Tone Pattern Plan 1–8
• 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options—Option 1— PT LCD—Time Display
• 13.3.1 PBX Configuration—[5-3-1] Optional Device—Voice Message—DISA System— Timed Reminder
Message—Day, Lunch, Break, Night

PC Programming Manual 919

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
Feature Programming References
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

• 14.2 PBX Configuration—[6-2] Feature—Hotel & Charge—Main— SMDR for External Hotel Application
1—Timed Reminder (Wake-up Call)
• 14.2 PBX Configuration—[6-2] Feature—Hotel & Charge—Main— Timed Reminder Message for
SIP-MLT / Standard SIP Phone—Message
• 19.1 PBX Configuration—[11-1] Maintenance—Main—SMDR— Print Information—Timed Reminder
(Wake-up Call)

Feature Guide References

2.24.4 Timed Reminder

Toll Restriction (TRS)/Call Barring (Barring)

• 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System—Class of Service—COS Settings—TRS
– TRS Level—Day, Lunch, Break, Night
– TRS Level for System Speed Dialling
• 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Main— COS
• 12.1.4 PBX Configuration—[4-1-4] Extension—Wired Extension—Flexible Button
– Type
– Parameter Selection (for TRS Level Change)
• 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings—Main— COS
• 12.2.3 PBX Configuration—[4-2-3] Extension—Portable Station—Flexible Button
– Type
– Parameter Selection (for TRS Level Change)
• 15.1 PBX Configuration—[7-1] TRS—Denied Code
• 15.2 PBX Configuration—[7-2] TRS—Exception Code
• 15.3 PBX Configuration—[7-3] TRS—Special Carrier
• 15.5 PBX Configuration—[7-5] TRS—Miscellaneous

Feature Guide References

2.7.1 Toll Restriction (TRS)/Call Barring (Barring)

Trunk Access
• 9.22 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property—Extension Type— Connection
• 9.24 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - LCO Port— Connection
• 9.26 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - BRI Port— Connection
• 9.27 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - PRI Port— Connection
• 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main—Features
– Idle Line Access (Local Access)
– Trunk Group Access
– Single CO Line Access
• 10.7.2 PBX Configuration—[2-7-2] System—Class of Service—External Call Block
• 11.1.1 PBX Configuration—[3-1-1] Group—Trunk Group—TRG Settings—Main— Line Hunting Order
• 11.1.2 PBX Configuration—[3-1-2] Group—Trunk Group—Local Access Priority
• 12.1.4 PBX Configuration—[4-1-4] Extension—Wired Extension—Flexible Button
– Type
– Parameter Selection (for Single CO)
– Parameter Selection (for Group CO)
• 12.2.3 PBX Configuration—[4-2-3] Extension—Portable Station—Flexible Button
– Type
– Parameter Selection (for Single CO)
– Parameter Selection (for Group CO)

920 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 Feature Programming References
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

• 16.1 PBX Configuration—[8-1] ARS—System Setting— ARS Mode

• 18.1 PBX Configuration—[10-1] CO & Incoming Call—CO Line Settings— CO Name

Feature Guide References

2.5.5.3 Trunk Access

Trunk Adaptor Connection

• 9.10 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property—V-SIPGW
– Trunk Adaptor
– Connection Attribute
– Channel Attribute
• 9.12 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property—V-IPGW
– Trunk Adaptor
– Connection Attribute

Feature Guide References

5.3.1 Trunk Adaptor Connection

Trunk Answer From Any Station (TAFAS)

• 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main—Features— TAFAS Answer
• 10.11.1 PBX Configuration—[2-11-1] System—Audio Gain—Paging/MOH
– Paging—EPG 1-6 (External Pager 1-6)
• 13.2 PBX Configuration—[5-2] Optional Device—External Pager

Feature Guide References

2.17.2 Trunk Answer From Any Station (TAFAS)

Trunk Busy Out

• 9.24 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - LCO Port— Busy Out Status
• 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main—Features— Busy Out Cancel
• 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System—Class of Service—COS Settings—Manager— Manager
• 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options—Option 4— Busy Out—Busy Out for Analogue
CO

Feature Guide References

2.5.4.6 Trunk Busy Out

Trunk Call Limitation

• 7.3.5 Utility—Log—Call Control Log
• 9.2.2 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property—Site—Main— Area ID for 
logical partition
• 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System—Class of Service—COS Settings—CO & SMDR—
Extension-CO Line Call Duration Limit
• 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options—Option 2
– Extension - CO Call Limitation—For Incoming Call
– Applying logical partitioning
• 11.1.1 PBX Configuration—[3-1-1] Group—Trunk Group—TRG Settings—Main
– CO-CO Duration Time (*60s)
– Extension-CO Duration Time (*60s)
• 15.5 PBX Configuration—[7-5] TRS—Miscellaneous— Dial Digits Limitation After Answering—Dial Digits

PC Programming Manual 921

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
Feature Programming References
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Feature Guide References

2.11.8 Trunk Call Limitation

Unified Messaging—Alternate Extension Group

• 23.2 UM Configuration—[4-2] Service Settings—Parameters— Alternate Extension

Feature Guide References

3.2.1.1 Alternate Extension Group

Unified Messaging—Auto Forwarding

• 20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting—External MSG Delivery/Auto FWD/
Personal Custom Serv
– Auto Forwarding Active
– Auto Forwarding Mailbox Number
– Auto Forwarding Delay Time
– Auto Forwarding Message Type Urgent
– Auto Forwarding Mode
– Auto Forwarding Expires

Feature Guide References

3.2.1.2 Auto Forwarding

Unified Messaging—Auto Receipt

• 21.1 UM Configuration—[2] Class of Service—Mailbox— Auto Receipt

Feature Guide References

3.2.2.1 Auto Receipt

Unified Messaging—Automated Attendant (AA)

• 23.2 UM Configuration—[4-2] Service Settings—Parameters
– Wait Time for First Digit (0-20 s)
– Menu Repeat Cycle (1-5 times)
– Play Owner’s Name during Transfer
– Operator Service
– Operator Service—Operator’s Extension
– Operator Service—Operator’s Mailbox
– Operator Service—Busy Coverage Mode
– Operator Service—No Answer Coverage Mode
– Operator Service—Operator No Answer Time (10-60 s)
– Call Hold Mode
– Call Hold Mode—Call Queuing Announcement Mode
– Call Hold Mode—Call Retrieval Announcement Timing (1-30 s)
– Alternate Extension
– List All Names
– Operator Transfer Mode

Feature Guide References

3.2.1.3 Automated Attendant (AA)

922 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 Feature Programming References
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Unified Messaging—Automatic Login

• 20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting—Remote Call/Automatic Login/Direct
Service
– Auto Login Extension
– Auto Login Extension Password Entry Requirement
– Auto Login Caller ID 1, 2
– Auto Login Caller ID Password Entry Requirement
– Auto Login DDI/DID
– Auto Login TRG No.
– Auto Login DDI/DID, TRG No. Password Entry Requirement
– Auto Login Toll Saver

Feature Guide References

3.2.2.2 Automatic Login

Unified Messaging—Automatic Two-way Recording for Manager

• 7.10.3 Utility—Automatic Two-way Recording—Extension Setting List
– Internal Call
– External Call
– Supervisor
– Mailbox Number

Feature Guide References

3.2.1.4 Automatic Two-way Recording for Manager

Unified Messaging—Call Services

• 22.1 UM Configuration—[3-1] UM Extension / Trunk Service—Service Group
– Day, Night, Lunch, and Break Mode - Incoming Call Service
– Day, Night, Lunch, and Break Mode - Incoming Call Service Parameter
– Day, Night, Lunch, and Break Mode - Incoming Call Service Prompt

Feature Guide References

3.2.1.6 Call Services

Unified Messaging—Call Transfer Scenario

• 8.1.1 Users—User Profiles—Advanced setting
• Advanced Call Transfer Setting
• Scenario Setting

Feature Guide References

3.2.2.6 Call Transfer Scenario

Unified Messaging—Call Transfer Status

• 20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting—Mailbox Parameters— Call Transfer
Status

Feature Guide References

3.2.2.7 Call Transfer Status

PC Programming Manual 923

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
Feature Programming References
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Unified Messaging—Call Transfer to Outside

• 21.1 UM Configuration—[2] Class of Service—Call Transfer— Call Transfer to Outside
• 24.4 UM Configuration—[5-4] System Parameters—Parameters—Transfer to Outside

Feature Guide References

3.2.1.7 Call Transfer to Outside

Unified Messaging—Callback Number Entry

• 20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting—Notification Parameters— Telephone
Device—Device No. 1, 2, 3—Dial Number [0-9 * # T X , ;]
• 24.4 UM Configuration—[5-4] System Parameters—Parameters—Dialling Parameters/MSW
Notification— Message Waiting Notification—System Callback No. (Up to 32 digits)

Feature Guide References

3.2.2.8 Callback Number Entry

Unified Messaging—Caller ID Call Routing

• 23.1 UM Configuration—[4-1] Service Settings—Caller ID / PIN Call Routing

Feature Guide References

3.2.1.8 Caller ID Call Routing

Unified Messaging—Caller ID Callback

• 21.1 UM Configuration—[2] Class of Service—Mailbox— Caller ID Callback
• 24.4 UM Configuration—[5-4] System Parameters—Parameters—Transfer to Outside— Trunk Group
(1–64)—Caller ID Callback

Feature Guide References

3.2.2.9 Caller ID Callback

Unified Messaging—Caller ID Screening

• 21.1 UM Configuration—[2] Class of Service—Call Transfer— Caller ID Screen

Feature Guide References

3.2.1.9 Caller ID Screening

Unified Messaging—Caller Name Announcement

• 21.1 UM Configuration—[2] Class of Service—Mailbox— Number of CIDs for Caller Name
Announcement (Selection)
• 24.3 UM Configuration—[5-3] System Parameters—System Caller Name Announcement

Feature Guide References

3.2.1.10 Caller Name Announcement

Unified Messaging—Call-through Service

• 21.1 UM Configuration—[2] Class of Service—General— Call-through Service
• 24.4 UM Configuration—[5-4] System Parameters—Parameters—Transfer to Outside— Outside
Transfer Sequence—Call Transfer to Outside Sequence (Up to 16 digits / [0-9 * # D F R T , ; N])

Feature Guide References

924 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 Feature Programming References
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

3.2.2.5 Call-through Service

Unified Messaging—Company Greeting

• 22.1 UM Configuration—[3-1] UM Extension / Trunk Service—Service Group
– Day, Night, Lunch, and Break Mode - Company Greeting No. (Selection)
– Day, Night, Lunch, and Break Mode - Company Greeting No. (Other)
• 24.4 UM Configuration—[5-4] System Parameters—Parameters—Daily Hours Setting

Feature Guide References

3.2.1.12 Company Greeting

Unified Messaging—Covering Extension

• 20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting—Mailbox Parameters— Covering
Extension

Feature Guide References

3.2.1.14 Covering Extension

Unified Messaging—Custom Service

• 23.3 UM Configuration—[4-3] Service Settings—Custom Service

Feature Guide References

3.2.1.15 Custom Service

Unified Messaging—Custom Service Builder

• 23.3 UM Configuration—[4-3] Service Settings—Custom Service—Custom Service Builder

Feature Guide References

3.1.2.2 Custom Service Builder

Unified Messaging—Default Mailbox Template

• 20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting—Adding Mailboxes

Feature Guide References

3.1.2.3 Default Mailbox Template

Unified Messaging—Dialling by Name

• 20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting—Mailbox Parameters
– First Name
– Last Name
• 21.1 UM Configuration—[2] Class of Service—General— Directory Listing

Feature Guide References

3.2.1.16 Dialling by Name

Unified Messaging—Direct Service Access

• 20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting—Remote Call/Automatic Login/Direct
Service— Direct Service UM Extension

Feature Guide References

PC Programming Manual 925

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
Feature Programming References
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

3.2.2.11 Direct Service Access

Unified Messaging—Extension Group

• 24.2 UM Configuration—[5-2] System Parameters—Extension Group

Feature Guide References

3.2.1.18 Extension Group

Unified Messaging—External Message Delivery Service

• 20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting—External MSG Delivery/Auto FWD/
Personal Custom Serv
– External Message Delivery Active
– External Message Delivery Prompt Mode
• 20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting—Mailbox Parameters— Extension
• 24.4 UM Configuration—[5-4] System Parameters—Parameters—External Message Delivery

Feature Guide References

3.2.2.12 External Message Delivery Service

Unified Messaging—Group Distribution Lists

• 20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting—Personal Distribution List
• 24.1 UM Configuration—[5-1] System Parameters—Mailbox Group

Feature Guide References

3.2.2.14 Group Distribution Lists

Unified Messaging—Hold
• 23.1 UM Configuration—[4-1] Service Settings—Caller ID / PIN Call Routing—23.2 UM
Configuration—[4-2] Service Settings—Parameters
– Operator Service—Busy Coverage Mode
– Call Hold Mode
– Call Hold Mode—Call Queuing Announcement Mode
– Call Hold Mode—Call Retrieval Announcement Timing (1-30 s)

Feature Guide References

3.2.1.19 Hold

Unified Messaging—Holiday Service

• 10.5 PBX Configuration—[2-5] System—Holiday Table
• 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options—Option 9
• 23.4 UM Configuration—[4-4] Service Settings—Holiday Table

Feature Guide References

3.1.1 Unified Messaging System Overview
3.2.1.20 Holiday Service

Unified Messaging—Hospitality Mode

• 21.1 UM Configuration—[2] Class of Service—Hospitality Mode

Feature Guide References

926 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 Feature Programming References
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

3.2.1.21 Hospitality Mode

Unified Messaging—IMAP Integration

• 20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting—Mailbox Parameters— Mailbox
Password (Message Client)
• 21.1 UM Configuration—[2] Class of Service—General
– Desktop Messaging

Feature Guide References

3.3.2 IMAP Integration

Unified Messaging—Incomplete Call Handling Service

• 20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting—Mailbox Parameters
– Incomplete Call Handling for No Answer
– Incomplete Call Handling for Busy

Feature Guide References

3.2.2.15 Incomplete Call Handling Service

Unified Messaging—Intercept Routing to a Mailbox

• 11.7.1 PBX Configuration—[3-7-1] Group—UM Group—System Settings— Intercept to Mailbox for Call
to Extension

Feature Guide References

3.2.1.22 Intercept Routing to a Mailbox

Unified Messaging—Intercom Paging

• 21.1 UM Configuration—[2] Class of Service—Call Transfer
– Intercom Paging Group
• 24.4 UM Configuration—[5-4] System Parameters—Parameters—Intercom Paging Parameters

Feature Guide References

3.2.1.23 Intercom Paging

Unified Messaging—Interview Service

• 20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting—Mailbox Parameters— Interview Mailbox

Feature Guide References

3.2.1.24 Interview Service

Unified Messaging—List All Names

• 21.1 UM Configuration—[2] Class of Service—General— Directory Listing

Feature Guide References

3.2.1.25 List All Names

Unified Messaging—Live Call Screening (LCS)

• 10.8.3 PBX Configuration—[2-8-3] System—Ring Tone Patterns—Call from Others— Live Call
Screening—Ring Tone Pattern Plan 1–8
• 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 4

PC Programming Manual 927

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
Feature Programming References
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

– LCS Recording Mode

– LCS Answer Mode
• 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 4— LCS
Recording Mode
• 21.1 UM Configuration—[2] Class of Service—Mailbox— Message Cancel for Live Call Screening

Feature Guide References

3.2.2.16 Live Call Screening (LCS)

Unified Messaging—Logical Extension (All Calls Transfer to Mailbox)

• 20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting—Mailbox Parameters— All Calls Transfer
to Mailbox

Feature Guide References

3.2.1.26 Logical Extension (All Calls Transfer to Mailbox)

Unified Messaging—Mailbox
• 7.5.3 Utility—Report—UM View Reports
• 20.1 UM Configuration—[1] Mailbox Settings

Feature Guide References

3.2.2.17 Mailbox

Unified Messaging—Manager Service Switching

• 21.1 UM Configuration—[2] Class of Service—General
– System Manager Authority
– Message Manager Authority

Feature Guide References

3.2.2.19 Manager Service Switching

Unified Messaging—Message Reception Mode

• 20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting—Mailbox Parameters— All Calls Transfer
to Mailbox

Feature Guide References

3.2.1.27 Message Reception Mode

Unified Messaging—Message Transfer

• 21.1 UM Configuration—[2] Class of Service—Mailbox— Announce Message Transferred Information

Feature Guide References

3.2.2.20 Message Transfer

Unified Messaging—Message Waiting Notification—E-mail Device

• 7.5.3 Utility—Report—UM View Reports
• 20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting—Notification Parameters
– E-mail/Text Message Device—Device No. 1, 2, 3—User Name
– E-mail/Text Message Device—Device No. 1, 2, 3—E-mail Address
– E-mail/Text Message Device—Device No. 1, 2, 3—Only Urgent Messages

928 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 Feature Programming References
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

– E-mail/Text Message Device—Device No. 1, 2, 3—Title Order

– E-mail/Text Message Device—Device No. 1, 2, 3—Title String
– E-mail/Text Message Device—Device No. 1, 2, 3—Callback Number
– E-mail/Text Message Device—Device No. 1, 2, 3—Send Wait Time [0-120 min]
– E-mail/Text Message Device—Device No. 1, 2, 3—Attach Voice File
– E-mail/Text Message Device—Device No. 1, 2, 3—Use Mode
• 21.1 UM Configuration—[2] Class of Service—General
– E-mail Option
• 24.4 UM Configuration—[5-4] System Parameters—Parameters—E-mail Option

Feature Guide References

3.2.1.28 Message Waiting Notification—E-mail Device

Unified Messaging—Message Waiting Notification—Lamp

• 20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting—Notification Parameters— Message
Waiting Lamp

Feature Guide References

3.2.1.29 Message Waiting Notification—Lamp

Unified Messaging—Message Waiting Notification—Telephone Device

• 20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting—Notification Parameters
– Telephone Device—Device No. 1, 2, 3—Only Urgent Messages
– Telephone Device—Device No. 1, 2, 3—Dial Number [0-9 * # T X , ;]
– Telephone Device—Device No. 1, 2, 3—No. of Retries
– Telephone Device—Device No. 1, 2, 3—Busy Delay Time (min)
– Telephone Device—Device No. 1, 2, 3—No Answer Delay Time (min)
– Telephone Device—Device No. 1, 2, 3—Use Mode
– Telephone Device—Device Notification Timer—Device Start Delay Time (0-120 min)
– Telephone Device—Device Notification Timer—Device Interval Time between Device 1, 2, 3 and
Next Device
• 24.4 UM Configuration—[5-4] System Parameters—Parameters—Dialling Parameters/MSW Notification

Feature Guide References

3.2.1.30 Message Waiting Notification—Telephone Device

Unified Messaging—Multilingual Service

• 24.4 UM Configuration—[5-4] System Parameters—Parameters—Prompt Setting

Feature Guide References

3.2.1.31 Multilingual Service

Unified Messaging—No DTMF Input Operation

• 20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting—External MSG Delivery/Auto FWD/
Personal Custom Serv
– No DTMF Input Operation
– No DTMF Input Operation Wait Time

Feature Guide References

3.2.1.32 No DTMF Input Operation

PC Programming Manual 929

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
Feature Programming References
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Unified Messaging—On Hold Announcement Menu

• 7.9 Utility—UM – System Prompts Customisation

Feature Guide References

3.2.1.33 On Hold Announcement Menu

Unified Messaging—Operator Service

• 23.1 UM Configuration—[4-1] Service Settings—Caller ID / PIN Call Routing—23.2 UM
Configuration—[4-2] Service Settings—Parameters
– Operator Service
– Operator Service—Operator’s Extension
– Operator Service—Operator’s Mailbox
– Operator Service—Busy Coverage Mode
– Operator Service—No Answer Coverage Mode
– Operator Service—Operator No Answer Time (10-60 s)

Feature Guide References

3.2.1.34 Operator Service

Unified Messaging—Password Administration

• 20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting—Mailbox Parameters
• Mailbox Password
• Mailbox Password (Message Client)

Feature Guide References

3.1.2.4 Password Administration

Unified Messaging—Personal Custom Service

• 20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting—External MSG Delivery/Auto FWD/
Personal Custom Serv— Personal Custom Service

Feature Guide References

3.2.2.21 Personal Custom Service

Unified Messaging—Personal Greetings

• 21.1 UM Configuration—[2] Class of Service—Mailbox
– Personal Greeting Length (s)
– Personal Greeting for Caller ID

Feature Guide References

3.2.2.22 Personal Greetings

Unified Messaging—PIN Call Routing

• 23.1 UM Configuration—[4-1] Service Settings—Caller ID / PIN Call Routing
– PIN No.
– Description
– Call Transfer for Day, Night, Lunch, and Break service

Feature Guide References

3.2.1.35 PIN Call Routing

930 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 Feature Programming References
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Unified Messaging—Play System Prompt After Personal Greeting

• 21.1 UM Configuration—[2] Class of Service—Mailbox— Play System Prompt after Personal Greeting

Feature Guide References

3.2.1.36 Play System Prompt After Personal Greeting

Unified Messaging—Port Service

• Section 22 UM Configuration—[3] UM Extension / Trunk Service

Feature Guide References

3.2.1.37 Port Service

Unified Messaging—Remote Call Forwarding Set

• 20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting—Remote Call/Automatic Login/Direct
Service— Remote Call Telephone Number 1, 2

Feature Guide References

3.2.2.26 Remote Call Forwarding Set

Unified Messaging—Subscriber Tutorial

• 21.1 UM Configuration—[2] Class of Service—General— Tutorial

Feature Guide References

3.2.2.27 Subscriber Tutorial

Unified Messaging—System Backup/Restore

• 6.9 Tool—UM Data Backup
• 6.10 Tool—UM Data Restore
• 6.11 Tool—UM Backup History

Feature Guide References

3.1.2.5 System Backup/Restore

Unified Messaging—System Prompts

• 7.9 Utility—UM – System Prompts Customisation
• 21.1 UM Configuration—[2] Class of Service—General— Prompt Mode
• 24.4 UM Configuration—[5-4] System Parameters—Parameters—Prompt Setting

Feature Guide References

3.2.1.41 System Prompts

Unified Messaging—System Reports

• 7.5.3 Utility—Report—UM View Reports

Feature Guide References

3.1.2.6 System Reports

Unified Messaging—System Security

• 26.1 UM Configuration—[7] System Security

PC Programming Manual 931

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
Feature Programming References
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Feature Guide References

3.1.2.7 System Security

Unified Messaging—Toll Saver

• 20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting—Remote Call/Automatic Login/Direct
Service
– Auto Login Extension
– Auto Login Extension Password Entry Requirement
– Auto Login Caller ID 1, 2
– Auto Login Caller ID Password Entry Requirement
– Auto Login DDI/DID
– Auto Login TRG No.
– Auto Login DDI/DID, TRG No. Password Entry Requirement
– Auto Login Toll Saver
• 23.1 UM Configuration—[4-1] Service Settings—Caller ID / PIN Call Routing—23.2 UM
Configuration—[4-2] Service Settings—Parameters
– Delayed Answer Time for New Message (5-60 s)
– Delayed Answer Time for No New Message (5-60 s)

Feature Guide References

3.2.2.29 Toll Saver

Unified Messaging—Transfer Recall to a Mailbox

• 10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3] System—Timers & Counters—Dial / IRNA / Recall / Tone—
Recall—Transfer Recall (s)
• 11.7.1 PBX Configuration—[3-7-1] Group—UM Group—System Settings— Transfer Recall to Mailbox

Feature Guide References

3.2.1.42 Transfer Recall to a Mailbox

Unified Messaging—Trunk Service (Universal Port)

• 22.1 UM Configuration—[3-1] UM Extension / Trunk Service—Service Group

Feature Guide References

3.2.1.44 Trunk Service (Universal Port)

Unified Messaging—Two-way Record/Two-way Transfer

• 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings— Two-way
Recording
• 12.1.4 PBX Configuration—[4-1-4] Extension—Wired Extension—Flexible Button
– Extension Number (for Two-way Record)
– Extension Number (for Two-way Transfer)
– Extension Number (for Voice Mail Transfer)
• 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings— Two-way
Recording
• 12.2.3 PBX Configuration—[4-2-3] Extension—Portable Station—Flexible Button
– Extension Number (for Two-way Record)
– Extension Number (for Two-way Transfer)
– Extension Number (for Voice Mail Transfer)
• 21.1 UM Configuration—[2] Class of Service—Mailbox— Two-way Recorded Message Save Mode

932 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 Feature Programming References
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Feature Guide References

3.2.2.30 Two-way Record/Two-way Transfer

Unified Messaging—Urgent Message

• 20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting—Notification Parameters
– Telephone Device—Device No. 1, 2, 3—Only Urgent Messages
– E-mail/Text Message Device—Device No. 1, 2, 3—Only Urgent Messages
• 20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting—External MSG Delivery/Auto FWD/
Personal Custom Serv— Auto Forwarding Message Type Urgent
• 20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting—Announce Number of Messages
– Subscriber Service - New Urgent Messages
– Receiving Message Service - New Urgent Messages
• 21.1 UM Configuration—[2] Class of Service—Mailbox— First Playback Urgent Message

Feature Guide References

3.2.2.31 Urgent Message

Unified Messaging—Voice Mail (VM) Transfer Button

• 12.1.4 PBX Configuration—[4-1-4] Extension—Wired Extension—Flexible Button— Extension Number
(for Voice Mail Transfer)
• 12.2.3 PBX Configuration—[4-2-3] Extension—Portable Station—Flexible Button— Extension Number
(for Voice Mail Transfer)

Feature Guide References

3.2.2.32 Voice Mail (VM) Transfer Button

Unified Messaging—Voice Mail Service

• 22.1 UM Configuration—[3-1] UM Extension / Trunk Service—Service Group

Feature Guide References

3.2.1.45 Voice Mail Service

Unified Messaging—Web Programming

• 20.1 UM Configuration—[1] Mailbox Settings
• 22.1 UM Configuration—[3-1] UM Extension / Trunk Service—Service Group— Day, Night, Lunch, and
Break Mode - Incoming Call Service Prompt
• 24.4 UM Configuration—[5-4] System Parameters—Parameters—Prompt Setting

Feature Guide References

3.2.2.33 Web Programming

User Profiles
• Section 8 Users
• Section 12 PBX Configuration—[4] Extension
• Section 20 UM Configuration—[1] Mailbox Settings

Feature Guide References

5.5.1 User Profiles

PC Programming Manual 933

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
Feature Programming References
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

Verification Code Entry

• 10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3] System—Timers & Counters—Miscellaneous— Extension PIN—Lock
Counter
• 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main—Features— User Remote
Operation / Walking COS / Verification Code
• 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings
– Option 1— ARS Itemised Code
– Option 3— Charge Limit
• 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings
– Option 1— ARS Itemised Code
– Option 3— Charge Limit
• 14.3 PBX Configuration—[6-3] Feature—Verification Code

Feature Guide References

2.7.6 Verification Code Entry

VIP Call
• 11.5.1 PBX Configuration—[3-5-1] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group
Settings—Miscellaneous— VIP Call Mode

Feature Guide References

2.2.2.6 VIP Call

Virtual PS
• 9.35 PBX Configuration—[1-2] Configuration—Portable Station— Registration

Feature Guide References

5.2.4.6 Virtual PS

Voice Mail (VM) Group

• 9.22 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property—Extension Type— DPT
Type—Type
• 9.22 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property—Extension Type— DPT Type—VM
Unit No.
• 9.22 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property—Extension Type— DPT Type—VM
Port No.
• 11.11.1 PBX Configuration—[3-11-1] Group—VM(DPT) Group—System Settings
• 11.11.2 PBX Configuration—[3-11-2] Group—VM(DPT) Group—Unit Settings
• 11.12.1 PBX Configuration—[3-12-1] Group—VM(DTMF) Group—System Settings
• 11.12.2 PBX Configuration—[3-12-2] Group—VM(DTMF) Group—Group Settings
• 11.7.1 PBX Configuration—[3-7-1] Group—UM Group—System Settings
• 11.7.2 PBX Configuration—[3-7-2] Group—UM Group—Unit Settings

Feature Guide References

2.28.1 Voice Mail (VM) Group
3.1.1 Unified Messaging System Overview—UM Ports and the UM Group

Voice Mail DPT (Digital) Integration

• 10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3] System—Timers & Counters— Recall—Transfer Recall (s)
• 11.11.1 PBX Configuration—[3-11-1] Group—VM(DPT) Group—System Settings

934 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 Feature Programming References
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

• 11.11.2 PBX Configuration—[3-11-2] Group—VM(DPT) Group—Unit Settings

• 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 4
– LCS Recording Mode
– LCS Answer Mode
• 12.1.4 PBX Configuration—[4-1-4] Extension—Wired Extension—Flexible Button
– Type
– Extension Number (for Two-way Record)
– Extension Number (for Two-way Transfer)
– Extension Number (for Voice Mail Transfer)
– Ext No. of Mailbox (for Two-way Transfer)
• 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 4— LCS
Recording Mode
• 12.2.3 PBX Configuration—[4-2-3] Extension—Portable Station—Flexible Button
– Type
– Extension Number (for Two-way Record)
– Extension Number (for Two-way Transfer)
– Extension Number (for Voice Mail Transfer)
– Ext No. of Mailbox (for Two-way Transfer)
• 12.3 PBX Configuration—[4-3] Extension—DSS Console
– Type
– Extension Number (for Two-way Record)
– Extension Number (for Two-way Transfer)
– Extension Number (for Voice Mail Transfer)
– Ext No. of Mailbox (for Two-way Transfer)
• 13.1 PBX Configuration—[5-1] Optional Device—Doorphone— VM Trunk Group No.
• 18.2 PBX Configuration—[10-2] CO & Incoming Call—DIL Table & Port Settings—DIL
– Tenant Number
– VM Trunk Group No.
• 18.3 PBX Configuration—[10-3] CO & Incoming Call—DDI / DID Table
– Tenant Number
– VM Trunk Group No.
• 18.4 PBX Configuration—[10-4] CO & Incoming Call—MSN Table—MSN
– Tenant Number
– UM Service Group No.

Feature Guide References

2.28.3 Voice Mail DPT (Digital) Integration

Voice Mail DTMF Integration

• 10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3] System—Timers & Counters—Miscellaneous— Voice Mail (Caller from
VM to CO)—On-hook Wait Time (s)
• 11.5.1 PBX Configuration—[3-5-1] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group
Settings—Miscellaneous— Programmed Mailbox No. (16 Digits)
• 11.12.1 PBX Configuration—[3-12-1] Group—VM(DTMF) Group—System Settings
• 11.12.2 PBX Configuration—[3-12-2] Group—VM(DTMF) Group—Group Settings
• 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 1—
Programmed Mailbox No.
• 12.1.4 PBX Configuration—[4-1-4] Extension—Wired Extension—Flexible Button
– Type
– Extension Number (for Voice Mail Transfer)

PC Programming Manual 935

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
Feature Programming References
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

• 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 1—

Programmed Mailbox No.
• 12.2.3 PBX Configuration—[4-2-3] Extension—Portable Station—Flexible Button
– Type
– Extension Number (for Voice Mail Transfer)
• 12.3 PBX Configuration—[4-3] Extension—DSS Console
– Type
– Extension Number (for Voice Mail Transfer)

Feature Guide References

2.28.2 Voice Mail DTMF Integration

Voice over Internet Protocol (VoIP) Network

• 27.1 Network Service—[1] IP Address/Ports—Basic Settings— DSP IP Setting—DSP Card-1/DSP
Card-2—IP Address

Feature Guide References

4.3.2 Voice over Internet Protocol (VoIP) Network

Walking COS
• 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main—Features— User Remote
Operation / Walking COS / Verification Code
• 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System—Class of Service—COS Settings—Optional Device & Other
Extensions— Remote Operation by Other Extension
• 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Main— Extension
PIN
• 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings—Main— Extension
PIN

Feature Guide References

2.7.5 Walking COS

Walking Extension Features

• 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main—Features— Walking Extension
• 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Main— Extension
PIN

Feature Guide References

2.24.3 Walking Extension Features

Walking Extension-Home position control

• 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options—Option 9— Walking Extension Option—Home
position control

Feature Guide References

2.24.3.3 Walking Extension-Home position control

Whisper OHCA
• 9.14 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property—V-IPEXT—Option— IP Codec
Priority
• 10.6.3 PBX Configuration—[2-6-3] System—Numbering Plan—B/NA DND Call Feature

936 PC Programming Manual

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 Feature Programming References
WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

– BSS / OHCA / Whisper OHCA / DND Override

– BSS / OHCA / Whisper OHCA / DND Override-2
• 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System—Class of Service—COS Settings—Assistant— OHCA /
Whisper OHCA
• 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options—Option 5— Whisper OHCA—for SLT

Feature Guide References

2.10.4.4 Whisper OHCA

Wireless XDP Parallel Mode

• 9.35 PBX Configuration—[1-2] Configuration—Portable Station—PS Registration and De-registration
• 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main—Features— Wireless XDP Parallel
Mode Set / Cancel
• 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System—Class of Service—COS Settings—Optional Device & Other
Extensions— Accept Wireless XDP Parallel Mode Set by PS
• 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 1—
Wireless XDP / Shared Extension

Feature Guide References

5.2.4.5 Wireless XDP Parallel Mode

PC Programming Manual 937

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
 WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM

1-62, 4-chome, Minoshima, Hakata-ku, Fukuoka 812-8531, Japan

Web Site: http://www.panasonic.net/

Copyright:
This material is copyrighted by Panasonic System Networks Co., Ltd., and may be reproduced for internal use
only. All other reproduction, in whole or in part, is prohibited without the written consent of Panasonic System
Networks Co., Ltd.

Panasonic System Networks Co., Ltd. 2014

WWW.ERTEBATGROUP.COM
PNQX6305TA CC0114AH6035